JP2024022397A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine having display means capable of displaying multiple kinds of images can execute a first performance in which one of the multiple kinds of images is a numeral image expressing a number and a first numeral image is displayed on the display means, and a second performance in which a second numeral image in which a number in a direction differing from that of a number expressed by the first numeral image is expressed after the first performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 111

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known that can execute a display performance using a display device when a game ball enters a winning opening (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Such gaming machines can perform display effects using character images, symbols, and the like.

JP2016-202930A Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-198339 Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-182376

However, even with the above-mentioned gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in terms of technology for increasing the interest of gaming.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to improve the interest of games.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following application examples. Note that the reference numerals and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later to aid understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. .

[Application example 1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a number image representing a number,
a first effect in which a first number image is displayed on the display means;
After the first effect, a second effect is displayed in which a second number image representing a number having a different direction from the number represented by the first number image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Application example 2]
The gaming machine described in Application Example 1,
The first number image includes a plurality of number images,
In the first effect, the plurality of number images are displayed, and each of the plurality of number images has a different size from each other.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Application example 3]
The gaming machine described in Application Example 1,
The second number image includes a plurality of number images,
In the first performance,
The first numerical image is displayed tilted and distorted in a direction along the display surface of the display means,
In the second performance,
The second number images are displayed, the second number images are arranged along the first direction of the display means, and each of the second number images is oriented perpendicular to the first direction. is displayed,
Each time a predetermined period of time elapses, the numerical value represented by at least one of the second numerical images changes in order.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Application example 4]
The gaming machine described in Application Example 1,
The second number image is
Displayed in a number different from the number of the first number images, and in a size different from the size of the first number image, and displayed at a speed different from the speed at which the number represented by the first number image changes. numbers change,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Application example 5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Examples 1 to 4, further comprising:
Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
The first number image and the second number image are timer images composed of a plurality of number images,
In the second effect, the timer image represents the remaining period during which the operating means can be operated.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Application example 6]
The gaming machine according to Application Example 5,
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image whose appearance changes over time,
In the second effect, the specific image is displayed, and the aspect of the specific image changes in accordance with the change in the remaining time represented by the timer image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the gaming machine. It is an enlarged view of display devices. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining various types of random numbers used in gaming machines. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining determination tables T1 to T4. It is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot type determination table T5. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in a non-time saving state. It is an explanatory diagram of fluctuation pattern judgment table T6 in a time saving state. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of an electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. It is an explanatory diagram of the big prize opening pattern determination table T8. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of a V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. It is a flowchart of main control main processing. 3 is a flowchart of main side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of starting port sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 prior judgment processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 prior judgment processing. It is a flowchart of normal operation processing. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol standby processing. It is a flowchart of jackpot determination processing. It is a 1st flowchart of a fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a 2nd flowchart of a fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of special symbol fluctuation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol confirmation processing. It is a flowchart of gaming state management processing. It is a flowchart of gaming state reset processing. It is a flowchart of special electric accessories processing. It is a flowchart of V opening/closing member operation processing. It is a flowchart of gaming state setting processing. It is a flowchart of V area sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of pending ball number processing. 3 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing. 3 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing. It is a flowchart of a look-ahead effect determination process. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of a preliminary determination information storage area. It is an explanatory diagram of a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. It is a flowchart of a fluctuating production start process. It is an explanatory diagram of a basic performance pattern determination table T52. It is an explanatory diagram of a chance up performance pattern determination table T53. It is a flowchart of processing during a fluctuation performance. It is a flowchart of display control processing. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a movement mode of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. It is an explanatory view illustrating a second aspect of the first movable accessory 14. It is an explanatory view illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory 15. It is an explanatory view illustrating a second aspect of the frame movable accessory 69. 6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display effect of a sub-display screen 64. FIG. It is a diagram for explaining the same number decorative pattern row effect A. It is a diagram for explaining the same number decorative pattern row performance B. It is a diagram for explaining the same number decorative pattern row effect C. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern number change effect A. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern number change effect B. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern number change effect C. It is a diagram for explaining a decorative pattern number image number change effect A. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern number image number change effect B. It is a diagram for explaining a decorative pattern number image number change effect C. It is a diagram for explaining a fluctuation direction change effect A. It is a figure for explaining fluctuation direction change performance B. It is a diagram for explaining a fluctuation direction change effect C. It is a diagram for explaining a first movable accessory interlocking performance A. It is a diagram for explaining the first movable accessory interlocking performance B. It is a diagram for explaining the first movable accessory interlocking performance C. It is a diagram for explaining a performance symbol movement variation performance A. It is a diagram for explaining a performance symbol movement variation performance B. It is a diagram for explaining a performance symbol movement variation performance C. It is a diagram for explaining frame-out variation effect A. It is a diagram for explaining frame-out variation effect B. It is a diagram for explaining frame-out variation effect C. It is a diagram for explaining the effect pattern mode change effect A. It is a diagram for explaining the effect pattern mode change effect B. It is a diagram for explaining the effect pattern mode change effect C. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern arrangement change effect A. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern arrangement change effect B. It is a diagram for explaining a decorative pattern arrangement change effect C. It is a diagram for explaining a decorative pattern partial display/disappearance effect A. It is a diagram for explaining a decorative pattern partial display/disappearance effect B. It is a diagram for explaining a decorative pattern partial display/disappearance effect C. It is a diagram for explaining winning game type notification performance A. It is a diagram for explaining winning game type notification performance B. It is a diagram for explaining winning game type notification performance C. It is a diagram for explaining a symbol arrangement. It is a diagram for explaining specific symbol stop effect A. It is a diagram for explaining specific symbol stop performance B. It is a figure for explaining the winning mode symbol display performance A. It is a figure for explaining the winning mode symbol display performance B. It is a diagram for explaining a winning pattern display effect C. It is a diagram for explaining the effect pattern mode change effect A. It is a diagram for explaining the effect pattern mode change effect B. It is a diagram for explaining the effect pattern mode change effect C. It is a diagram for explaining game number display effect A. It is a diagram for explaining game number display effect B. It is a diagram for explaining a game number display effect C. It is a diagram for explaining enlarged symbol display effect A. It is a diagram for explaining enlarged symbol display effect B. It is a diagram for explaining a reduced symbol display performance. It is a figure for explaining pending image simultaneous change effect A. It is a figure for explaining pending image simultaneous change production B. It is a figure for explaining pending image simultaneous change effect C. It is a diagram for explaining special symbol retention display performance A. It is a diagram for explaining special symbol retention display performance B. It is a diagram for explaining special symbol retention display effect C. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a pseudo-continuous performance A at the time of a specific variation. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining pseudo-continuous effect B at the time of specific fluctuation. It is a diagram for explaining pseudo-continuous performance C at the time of specific fluctuation. It is a figure for explaining operation means image display performance A. It is a diagram for explaining operation means image display effect B. It is a diagram for explaining an operation means image display effect C. It is a diagram for explaining numerical image display effect A. It is a diagram for explaining numerical image display performance B. It is a diagram for explaining numerical image display effect C. It is a diagram for explaining expectation level suggestion performance A. It is a diagram for explaining expectation level suggestion performance B. It is a diagram for explaining the expectation level suggestion effect C. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a screen cracking effect A. It is a figure for explaining screen cracking effect B and screen breaking effect C. It is a diagram for explaining screen cracking effect D.

<First embodiment>
1. Structure of Gaming Machine FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention. In the following, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be explained so as to correspond to the left-right direction as seen from the player facing the gaming machine 1. Further, the forward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the gaming machine 1 toward the player, and the backward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the player toward the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that fires game balls based on a player's firing operation, and when a game ball wins a prize in a specific winning device, pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the winning. be. The game machine 1 includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2, and the game board 2 is attached to the inside of the game machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes, in addition to a front frame (front frame part) 53, an outer frame (base frame part) that forms the outer shell of the gaming machine, and an inner frame to which the gaming board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. We are prepared. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit disposed on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and includes a handle 60, a batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and an excess ball tray (lower tray). ) 62, the production button 63, the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U), the sword member 65, the frame lamp 66, the speaker 67, A frame movable body 69 is provided. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the gaming area 3 of the gaming board 2 can be viewed through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53, and causes the game ball to be launched with a firing intensity that corresponds to the rotation angle. A movable frame body 69 (also referred to as a movable frame accessory 69), which is a movable gimmick, is provided on the right and left sides of the handle 60. The frame movable body 69 is configured such that two members disposed on the left and right sides of the handle 60 are movable in the left-right direction. Each of the two members is formed of a flexible flat plate-like member, and is configured such that its main surface moves toward or away from the handle 60. Normally, the frame movable bodies 69 are stationary at retracted positions (FIG. 1) that are far from the handle 60 on the left and right sides of the handle 60, respectively, and move from the retracted positions toward the handle 60 so as to approach each other (advance). ) and can come to rest at the position where it touches the handle 60. When the frame movable body 69 is in the advanced position, it touches the handle 60 or the right hand of the player who is operating the handle 60.

A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is arranged below the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the batted ball supply tray 61. The performance button 63 is an operation unit disposed near the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player during a performance performed as the game progresses. A vibration motor is arranged inside the performance button 63, and the button itself is configured to vibrate up and down and left and right depending on the performance and the like. The sword member 65 is an operation part imitating the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player during performances performed as the game progresses. The sword member 65 is configured to be able to perform a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward and a second operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 upward. The sub display screen 64 is a screen of a liquid crystal display device, and includes a right sub display screen 64R, a left sub display screen 64L, and an upper sub display screen 64U. The right sub display screen 64R is provided on the right side of the front frame 53, the left sub display screen 64L is provided on the left side of the front frame 53, and the upper sub display screen 64U is provided on the upper side of the front frame 53. The right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L are arranged at paired positions on the game board 2. The upper sub-display screen 64U is arranged above the game board 2. The right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U are arranged to surround the opening of the front frame 53. The sub display screen 64 may be a liquid crystal display, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The frame lamp 66 includes a right frame lamp and a left frame lamp, is arranged above the front frame 53, and performs a light emitting effect during a game or the like. The right frame lamp is a diagonally linear light emitting section disposed between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the right sub-display screen 64R. The left frame lamp is a diagonally linear light emitting section disposed between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the left sub-display screen 64L. The speakers 67 are arranged at the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53, and perform sound production during games and the like.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a first board movable body 14, a second board movable body 15, and a fixed winning device (belly button) 19. , a normal variable winning device (electronic chew) 22, a gate (through chucker) 28, a first grand prize device (first attacker) 31, a second grand prize device (second attacker) 36, and a grand prize opening opening. It includes a starting opening 17, a general winning opening 27 (normal winning opening 27), an out opening 16, and indicators 40.

The game area 3 is an area where game balls shot by operating the handle 60 flow down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game balls are provided protrudingly. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game ball launched by operating the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3, and emits light from the back side of the game area 3. Here, a part of the board lamp 5 is connected to the right frame lamp and the left frame lamp, and is configured so that the shape and light emission are continuous.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the gaming area 3 and includes a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a performance pattern display area in which performance patterns (decorative patterns) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and a pending image display area in which pending images 9A and 9B are displayed. area, and a pending digested image display area (the pending display area) in which the pending digested image 9C is displayed. The hold images 9A and 9B are images representing hold, and are also called hold icons 9A and 9B. The pending digested image 9C is an image representing the pending, and is also referred to as the pending image 9C, the pending icon 9C, the variable icon 9C, and the variable icon 9C. The hold icon 9C may also be simply called a hold icon.

The performance symbol display area includes three symbol display areas: "left," "middle," and "right." A left effect pattern (left decorative pattern) 8L is displayed in the left pattern display area. A medium performance pattern (medium decoration pattern) 8C is displayed in the medium pattern display area. A right performance symbol (right decorative symbol) 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. The performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of a plurality of symbols representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. The variable display of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which will be described later. The image display device 7 displays a first special symbol and a first special symbol displayed by a first special symbol display 41a and a second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, by a combination of effect symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas. The result of the variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner to the player.

For example, in the case of winning a jackpot, the effect pattern is stopped and displayed as a zero number such as "777". If it is a miss, the effect pattern is stopped and displayed with a miss such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result not only on the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b but also on the image display device 7. Note that the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Further, the manner in which the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner may be a manner in which they are scrolled in the vertical direction, or may be in any other manner. The combination of performance symbols to be stopped and displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above and can be arbitrarily set. Hereinafter, the performance that displays the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will also be referred to as "fluctuation performance of performance symbols", "fluctuation performance of decorative symbols", or simply "fluctuation performance" and "fluctuation display". It should be noted that the variation performance of this decorative pattern is counted as one variation performance (one cycle of variation performance) during the period from when the special symbol starts changing until it stops (also referred to as a special symbol variation period). Therefore, even if there is a case where the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the period from when the special pattern starts changing until it stops, the effect of the temporary stop is included in the variable effect of the decorative pattern.

The image display device 7 can display on the display screen 7a, in addition to the performance symbol variation performance, a jackpot performance that is performed in parallel with a jackpot game (an example of a special game), a demonstration performance for waiting for customers, etc. In the performance symbol variation performance, performance images such as background images and character images may also be displayed in addition to the performance symbols. In addition to the production pattern, the image display device 7 also includes an identification display (fourth pattern, not shown) that can indicate that the special pattern is changing or indicate the lottery result of the special pattern. may be displayed on the display screen 7a. Note that the identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitting device such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

The reserved image display area is a first reserved display area that displays reserved images 9A according to the number of stored first special figures reserved, which will be described later, and a reserved image 9B that displays reserved images 9B according to the number of stored second special figures reserved, which will be described later. and a second hold display area. By displaying the holding images 9A and 9B, the stored number of first special figure holdings displayed on the first special figure holding display 43a, which will be described later, and the number of second special figure holdings displayed on the second special figure holding display 43b are determined. The number of memories can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner to the player. The pending digest image display area includes a pending digest display area that displays the pending digest image 9C. The pending digest image 9C corresponds to the production symbols (production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b, and depending on the display of the pending digest image 9C, the first special symbol pending or the first special symbol is displayed. 2. It is possible to clearly display to the player that the special figure reservation is extinguished ("extinguishment of special figure reservation" to be described later).

On the left side of the image display device 7, a first board movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable accessory 14), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that a vertically long rod-shaped member is movable in the left-right direction in front of the image display device 7 (front surface). The first movable accessory 14 is normally stationary at a retracted position on the left side of the image display device 7 (FIG. 1), and moves (advances) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a. It can stand still at any advanced position in front of the vehicle. The first movable accessory 14 is formed to have approximately the same length as the vertical direction of the image display device 7, and covers a part of the image display device 7 from above to below at the advanced position.

A second board movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided above the image display device 7. The second movable accessory 15 is configured such that a rectangular member (decoration part) written with "OARO" is movable in the vertical direction. The second movable accessory 15 normally remains stationary at a retracted position above the image display device 7 (FIG. 1), and moves (advances) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a for display. It can stand still at the advanced position in front of the screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

A stage section 11 is formed at the bottom of the image display device 7. The stage part 11 has a shape that can guide a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage part 11 to a first starting port 20, which will be described later. A warp section 12 is provided at the lower left of the image display device 7. The warp section 12 includes an entrance section through which game balls flow in and an exit section through which game balls flow out, and allows the game balls that flowed in from the entrance section to flow out to the stage section 11 from the exit section.

The fixed winning device (belly button) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the gaming area 3, and is located at a first starting hole (first starting winning hole, first ball entering hole) where the ease of entering the game ball always remains constant. (fixed starting port) 20. The winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 is an opportunity for a first special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 is an opportunity for obtaining a jackpot random number and the like and determining a jackpot.

The normal variable prize winning device (electronic chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting hole 20 in the gaming area 3, and includes a second starting hole (second starting winning hole, second ball entering hole, variable starting hole) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball into the second starting hole 21 is an opportunity for a second special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). The electric chew 22 includes a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21, and the second starting port 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric chew solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in an open state. Note that the electric chew 22 only needs to enter the second starting port 21 more easily when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It may be possible for the ball to enter the ball.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged above the first big prize winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured to allow the game ball to pass through. Passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for a normal symbol lottery to determine whether or not to release the electric chew 22. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is a trigger for obtaining a normal symbol random number (a winning random number) and determining a winning number.

Here, the "special symbol lottery" means that when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21, a random number for special symbol determination is acquired, and this acquired random number is used as a predetermined random number. It is a process of determining whether or not it is a jackpot by comparing it with the value corresponding to the "jackpot". The lottery result of this "jackpot" is not immediately notified to the player, but the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on a first special symbol display 41a or a second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, and a predetermined variation is made. When the time has elapsed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a pattern matching game is performed in which performance symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the variably displayed special symbols, and the jackpot lottery result is more effectively notified to the player by this symbol matching game.

In addition, "normal symbol lottery" means that when a game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for determining a normal symbol is obtained, and this obtained random number is compared with a predetermined value corresponding to a "win". It is a process of determining whether or not it is a hit by doing so. Regarding the lottery result of this normal symbol, the lottery result is not announced immediately after the game ball passes through the gate 28, but the normal symbol is displayed fluctuating on the regular symbol display 42, which will be described later, and a predetermined fluctuation is performed. When the time has elapsed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is displayed (lit or extinguished) and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged at the upper right of the first starting opening 20 in the gaming area 3, and is connected to the first big winning opening (first special winning opening) 30. , a V region 39, a non-V region 70, and a V opening/closing member 71. The first big prize opening 30 includes an opening/closing member (first special winning opening opening/closing member) 32 that allows or inhibits reception of game balls through a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by the first big prize opening solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the first big prize opening 30 when the opening/closing member 32 is in an open state.

The first big prize winning device 31 includes a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V area (non-specific area) 70, and a non-V area sensor 70a (FIG. 3). , a first big prize opening sensor 30a (FIG. 3), a V opening/closing member 71, and a V opening/closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3). The V area (specific area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specific area) 70 are configured as areas through which the game ball that has passed through the first grand prize opening 30 can pass inside the first grand prize winning device 31. . The first big winning hole sensor 30a is arranged upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70, and detects the winning of a game ball into the first big winning hole 30. The V area sensor 39a is arranged in the V area 39 and detects passage of a game ball to the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70a is arranged in the non-V area 70 and detects passage of a game ball to the non-V area 70. The V opening/closing member 71 distributes the game balls that have passed through the first big prize opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71. The V opening/closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to move the game ball. It is in the first state (rotating state) in which it distributes to the V area 39, and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, it is in the second state (stopping state) in which it is located at the origin and distributes game balls to the non-V area 70. . In addition, the V opening/closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, but may have the function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first big prize opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70, for example, It may be configured to move in the left-right direction with respect to the game board 2. That is, when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the game ball is distributed to the V area 39 in a retracted state (first state), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the game ball is distributed to the non-V area 70 in the advancing state. (Second state). In addition, in the gaming machine 1, passage of the game ball to the V area 39 is an opportunity for transition to a high probability state, which will be described later. In other words, the V area 39 serves as a variable probability operation opening. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 does not serve as a variable probability operation opening. The first big winning device 31 of this embodiment further includes a first big winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first big winning device 31. The first big winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 merge downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V area sensor 39a or the non-V area sensor 70a.

The second big prize winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged at the upper right of the first big winning hole 30 in the gaming area 3, and the second big winning hole (second special winning hole) 35 It is equipped with The second big prize opening 35 includes an opening/closing member (second special winning opening opening/closing member, movable member) 37 that obstructs or allows reception of game balls by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by the second large prize opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second big prize opening 35 when the opening/closing member 37 is in an open state.

The grand prize opening starting hole 17 is arranged above the first grand prize opening 30 in the gaming area 3, and the first grand prize opening 30 is opened when the game ball passes. However, the gaming machine 1 does not need to include the big winning opening opening opening 17.

The general winning hole 27 is provided at the lower part of the gaming area 3. The out port 16 is provided at the lower part of the game area 3, and discharges game balls that have not won in any of the winning holes to the outside of the game area 3. The display devices 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2. Details of the display devices 40 will be described later. The general winning hole 29 is located in the lower right part of the gaming area 3, adjacent to the right side of the first big winning hole 30.

The gaming area 3 includes a left gaming area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction, and a right gaming area 3B on the right side. A hitting method in which the game ball is launched so that it flows down the left game area 3A is called "left-handed hitting." On the other hand, a hitting method in which the game ball is launched so that it flows down the right game area 3B is called "right-handed hitting." In the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim for winning in the first starting opening 20 by playing left-handed. On the other hand, it is configured so that by hitting right, you can aim to pass through the gate 28 and win a prize in the second starting opening 21, the first big winning opening 30, and the second big winning opening 35.

FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the displays 40. The displays 40 include a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol reservation display 43a, and a second special symbol reservation display 43b. , and a general figure reservation display 44. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays normal symbols. The first special symbol reservation display 43a displays the number of stored operation reservations (first special symbol reservation) of the first special symbol display 41a. The second special symbol reservation display 43b displays the number of stored operation reservations (second special symbol reservation) of the second special symbol display 41b. The normal symbol reservation display 44 displays the number of stored operation reservations (common symbol reservations) of the ordinary symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the landing of a game ball into the first starting port 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is triggered by the landing of a game ball into the second starting port 21. Below, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are also collectively referred to as a "special symbol." In addition, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are also collectively referred to as the "special symbol display 41." In addition, the first special figure holding display 43a and the second special figure holding display 43b are also collectively referred to as the "special figure holding display 43."

The special symbol display device 41 variably displays (fluctuates) the special symbol (identification information) and then stops displaying the special symbol (identification information) to draw a lottery based on winning in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (special symbol winning lottery). , jackpot lottery) results. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed (stop symbol, special symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by special symbol lottery. If the stopped symbol is a special symbol (jackpot symbol) with a predetermined jackpot stopping pattern, the first jackpot 30 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed (the type of jackpot that was won). Alternatively, a special game (jackpot game) in which the second big prize opening 35 is opened is played. In addition, the opening pattern of the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30 and second big winning hole 35) in the special game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the special symbol winning lottery depending on the lighting mode. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), you can select one or two from the left as "○○●●○○●●" (○: lit, ●: off). , 5th and 6th LEDs are lit to display jackpot symbols. If it is a loss, a losing symbol such as "●●●●●●●○" is displayed with only the rightmost LED lit. A mode may be adopted in which all the LEDs are turned off as a losing symbol. Before the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (variable display) for a predetermined variable time. For example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode, and can be any lighting mode as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lit display in a specific mode). For example, the variable display mode may be such that all LEDs blink at the same time.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, the values (numerical information) of various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers obtained for that winning are , is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if the winning is in the first starting opening 20, it is stored in the first special drawing holding storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as the first special drawing holding, and if it is winning in the second starting opening 21, it is stored in the first special drawing holding storage area 85a (FIG. 5). , is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as a second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit in this embodiment is for both the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. There are 4 pieces. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 is consumed when variable display of special symbols based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. "Extinguishing the special symbol reservation" refers to determining the jackpot random number etc. corresponding to the special symbol reservation and executing a variable display of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, if the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Even if a prize is won during execution of a medium or special game, the right to draw a jackpot for that prize can be reserved up to a predetermined number of prizes. The number of special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation display 43. The first special figure holding display 43a and the second special figure holding display 43b each include, for example, four LEDs. Each special figure reservation display 43 displays the number of special symbols reserved by lighting up LEDs corresponding to the number of special symbols reserved.

The variable display of the normal symbols is triggered by the passage of the game ball to the gate 28. The normal symbol display device 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbols variably (variably displaying) and then stop displaying them. The normal pattern that is stopped and displayed (the normal pattern that is stopped and the normal pattern that is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) is one normal pattern that is selected from a plurality of types of normal patterns by a normal pattern lottery. When the normal pattern stopping pattern is a predetermined specific normal pattern (normal pattern with a predetermined stopping pattern, that is, a normal winning pattern), an auxiliary game that opens the second starting port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state. will be held. Note that the opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The normal symbol display device 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery depending on the lighting mode. For example, if the lottery result is a win, a normal winning symbol with both LEDs lit, such as "○○" (○: lit, ●: off), is displayed. If the lottery result is a loss, a normal loss symbol such as "●○" with only the right LED lit is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off as a normal losing symbol may be adopted. Before the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time. As for the variable display mode, for example, both LEDs may be lit alternately. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode and can be any lighting mode as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighted up display in a specific mode). For example, the variable display mode may be such that all the LEDs blink at the same time.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (winning random number) obtained for the passage is stored as a normal symbol in the normal symbol retention storage area 86 (FIG. 5). Once it is memorized. There is an upper limit to the number of regular symbols that can be stored in the regular symbol reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit in this embodiment is four. The general symbol reservation stored in the ordinary symbol reservation storage area 86 is consumed when the variable display of the ordinary symbol based on the ordinary symbol reservation becomes possible. The extinguishing of the reserved ordinary symbol means to determine the ordinary symbol random number (winning random number) corresponding to the ordinary symbol reserved, and to execute a variable display of the ordinary symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, if the variable display of normal symbols based on the passing of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passing of the game ball, in other words, when the variable display of the normal symbols is being executed or the auxiliary game is being executed, winnings may be won. Even if there is, it is possible to reserve the right to draw a normal symbol lottery for the passing of the symbols, up to a predetermined number. The number of general drawings on hold is displayed on the general drawing holding display 44. The common picture reservation display 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of common pictures pending by lighting up the LEDs for the number of common pictures pending.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be explained based on FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and an audio control board 106 (FIG. 4). FIG. 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls gaming profits such as jackpot lottery and game state transition, and constitutes a main control section. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls the effects to be executed as the game progresses, and together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the audio control board 106, constitutes a sub-control unit. Note that the sub-control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90.

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the main ROM 83. Contains. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data to and from other boards etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 87. The input/output circuit 87 may be built into the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88. The main control board 80 receives signals output from each sensor and outputs a signal to each solenoid. The sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the big winning opening opening starting port sensor 17a, the first starting opening sensor 20a, the second starting opening sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first big winning opening sensor 30a, and the first starting opening sensor 21a. Two major winning opening sensors 35a, a V area sensor 39a, a non-V area sensor 70a, and normal winning opening sensors 27a and 29a are exemplified. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric chew solenoid 24, the first big winning hole solenoid 33, the second big winning hole solenoid 38, and the V opening/closing member solenoid 73. The big winning opening opening starting port sensor 17a is provided inside the big winning opening starting opening 17, and detects the game ball that has entered the big winning opening starting opening 17. The first starting port sensor 20a is provided inside the first starting port 20, and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 20. The second starting port sensor 21a is provided inside the second starting port 21, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first big winning hole sensor 30a is provided inside the first big winning hole 30, and detects a game ball that has won in the first big winning hole 30. The second big winning hole sensor 35a is provided inside the second big winning hole 35, and detects the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 35. The V area sensor 39a is provided in the V area 39 inside the first big prize opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70a is provided in the non-V area 70 inside the first big prize opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V area 70. The normal winning hole sensor 27a is provided inside the normal winning hole 27, and detects a game ball that has won in the normal winning hole 27. The normal winning hole sensor 29a detects a game ball that has passed into the normal winning hole 29. The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22. The first big prize opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first big winning device 31. The second big prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36. The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 of the first big prize winning device 31.

Display devices 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol pending display 43a, a second special symbol pending display 43b, and a normal symbol pending. Display control for the display 44 is performed.

A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for monitoring payout. A prize ball payout device 120, a rental ball payout device 130, and a card unit 135 are connected to the payout control board 110, and a shooting device 112 is connected via a shooting control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out prize balls. The paid out prize balls are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The rental ball payout device 130 pays out rental balls. The payout control board 110 drives the ball rental motor 131 of the rental ball payout device 130 based on a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1 to pay out rental balls. The paid-out rental balls are detected by the rental ball sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1, and outputs information regarding ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card. The firing device 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a firing motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a firing volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the firing device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114, and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the firing volume 115. Then, the firing motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the firing volume 115.

A sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only the transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode), not shown, is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 as a communication direction regulating means.

The sub-control board 90 includes a production control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95. The production control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the production of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The performance control microcomputer 91 includes a sub-ROM 93 that stores programs for controlling the performance as the game progresses, a sub-RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a sub-ROM that executes the programs stored in the sub-ROM 93. It includes a CPU 92. Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and details of the storage area provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The performance control microcomputer 91 sends and receives data to and from other boards etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95. The input/output circuit 95 may be built in the production control microcomputer 91. An image control board 100 , an audio control board 106 , a lamp control board 107 , and a relay board 108 are connected to the sub-control board 90 via an input/output circuit 95 .

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls the display of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In addition to programs for display control, the ROM 103 stores still image data and video data displayed on the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64, specifically, characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, and symbols. etc. (including performance patterns), background images, and other image data are stored. RAM 104 is used as a memory for developing image data. CPU 102 executes a program stored in ROM 103. The performance control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106, and the performance control microcomputer 91 outputs audio, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80. etc. is output. Acoustic data such as audio output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. Note that the voice control board 106 may include a CPU, and may cause the CPU to execute voice control based on commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 may be equipped with a ROM, and may store acoustic data in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute audio control. Furthermore, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

A frame lamp 66, a board lamp 5, a first movable accessory 14, a second movable accessory 15, and a frame movable accessory 69 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and these are controlled. . The production control microcomputer 91 controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on commands received from the main control board 80. In other words, the performance control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting/extinguishing, light emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5, and creates a light emission pattern. Light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The production control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The performance control microcomputer 91 creates motion pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of each of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69, and performs the operations according to the motion pattern data. The operations of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69 are controlled. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. Note that the lamp control board 107 may include a CPU, and may cause the CPU to control the lighting of the lamp and control the operation of the movable accessories 14 and 15 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a ROM, and data regarding the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

A production button detection switch 63a and a select button detection switch 68a are connected to the relay board 108. The performance button detection switch 63a detects that the performance button 63 (FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. Further, a vibration motor is attached to the production button detection switch 63a, and can be driven in response to a signal from the relay board 108 to vibrate the production button 63. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed. Note that the relay board 108 is also connected to a sword member detection switch that detects that the sword member 65 has been investigated.

3. Data Configuration of Gaming Machine The data configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be explained based on FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5(A) is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. 5(B) is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 6(A) is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub ROM 93. FIG. 6(B) is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5(A)) includes a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, and a fluctuation pattern. A determination table T6, an electric chew opening pattern determination table T7, a big prize opening pattern determination table T8, and a V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in main control main processing (described later) that the game control microcomputer 81 executes. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5(B)) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special figure reservation storage area 85, and a general figure reservation memory. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) where commands output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side are set in the main control main processing (described later), and includes advance determination commands, pending pitch count commands, A fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passing command, a customer waiting command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area where flags indicating the status of the gaming machine and the gaming status are set in the main control main processing (described later), and include a jackpot flag, jackpot end flag, first winning flag, second winning flag, The ceiling flag, V flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area where counters used in main control main processing (described later) are set, including a random number counter, a round counter, a ceiling counter, a variable probability counter, a time saving counter, and the like. The special operation status setting area 84d is an area where a status in special operation processing, which will be described later, is set. The special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which a first special figure reservation is stored, and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which a second special figure reservation is stored. The first special figure reservation storage area 85a stores a group of random numbers (reservation information) such as random numbers per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the first special figure reservation. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for storage. The second special figure reservation storage area 85b has a first memory area for storing random value groups (reservation information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the second special figure reservation. A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The normal symbol reservation storage area 86 stores a group of random numbers (reservation information) such as normal symbol random numbers (hit random numbers) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth symbols of the ordinary symbol reservation. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for. In addition, in the main RAM 84, in addition to the above-mentioned area, a winning type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, and drive data for driving the movable accessories 14, 15 and the frame movable body 600 are set. A drive data buffer and the like are provided. The information stored in the main RAM 84 is not cleared and is maintained as it is even when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off and on. That is, the above commands, flags, counters, status information, and hold information do not change their status even when the power is turned off and on, and the information is maintained. On the other hand, the information stored in the main RAM 84 is reset by clearing the RAM of the gaming machine 1. When reset, the ceiling flag is set to "ON" and the other flags are set to "OFF" as the initial state of the flags. Furthermore, as the initial state of the counters, the ceiling counter is set to "500" and the other counters are set to "0".

The sub ROM93 (FIG. 6(A)) stores a look-ahead performance pattern determination table T51, a basic performance pattern determination table T52, a chance-up performance pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. . These decision tables are referred to by the production control microcomputer 91 in sub-control main processing (described later) that the production control microcomputer 91 executes. The specific contents of each decision table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (FIG. 6(B)) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a preliminary determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side are stored in sub-control main processing (described later), including advance judgment commands, pending pitch count commands, fluctuation start commands, and fluctuation commands. A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passing command, a customer waiting command, etc. are stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area where commands output from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are set in the sub-control main processing (described later). It is an output buffer) in which a variable performance start command, a fluctuation before end command, a variable performance end command, an opening performance start command, a round performance start command, an ending performance start command, etc. are set. The preliminary determination information storage area 94c stores preliminary determination information in sub-control main processing (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area in which counters used in the sub-control main processing (described later) are set, including a random number counter, a first special symbol reservation performance counter, a second special symbol reservation performance counter, and a regular symbol reservation performance counter. , ceiling effect counter, evening effect counter, fixed change effect counter, time saving effect counter, etc. are set. Of the information stored in the sub-RAM 94, the information other than the overnight presentation counter is not cleared and is maintained as it is even when the gaming machine 1 is turned off and on. That is, the above-mentioned commands, counters other than the evening performance counter, and advance determination information do not change their states even when the power is turned off and on, and the information is maintained. The evening performance counter is reset by turning off and on the power of the gaming machine 1, and is set to 0 as an initial state. The information stored in the sub RAM 94 is reset by clearing the RAM of the gaming machine 1. When reset, the ceiling effect counter is set to 500 and the other counters are set to 0 as the initial state of the counters.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. FIG. 7(A) shows the random number obtained by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control section side, and FIG. 7(B) shows the random number obtained by the performance control microcomputer 91 on the sub control section side. There is. The game control microcomputer 81 acquires a "jackpot random number," a "jackpot type random number," a "reach random number," a "fluctuation pattern random number," and a "normal symbol random number (hit random number)" at timings described later. It is configured as follows. The “jackpot random number” is a random number used for lottery to determine whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The “jackpot type random number” is a random number used for lottery of the winning jackpot type (jackpot type determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. "Reach Random Number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the performance symbol variation performance that indicates the result when the jackpot judgment is a loss, and has a value in the range of 0 to 127. Take. Reach is a state in which there is only one fluctuating performance symbol remaining among multiple performance symbols (decorative symbols), and it depends on which symbol the fluctuating performance symbol is stopped and displayed. This is a state in which a combination of performance symbols indicates a jackpot (for example, a state of "7↓7"). Note that the performance symbols that are displayed in a stopped state in the ready-to-win state may be displayed as if they are shaking within the display screen 7a. The "variation pattern random number" is a random number used to determine a variation pattern including variation time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "normal symbol random number (winning random number)" is used for a lottery (normal symbol lottery) to determine whether or not to play an auxiliary game that opens the electric chew 22. Normal symbol random numbers take values in the range from 0 to 255. The “jackpot random number,” “jackpot type random number,” “reach random number,” and “variation pattern random number” are acquired based on the ball entering the starting hole (first starting hole 20 or second starting hole 21). The random number group obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random number group obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a. It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. The “normal symbol random number (winning random number)” is obtained based on passing through the gate 28. The acquired normal symbol random number value is stored in the ordinary symbol retention storage area 86.

The performance control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a "pre-read performance random number" and a "chance up random number" at timings to be described later. The "pre-read effect random number" is a random number used to determine the pre-read effect during the variable effect, and takes a value in the range from 0 to 127. The "chance up random number" is a random number used to determine the chance up performance during the variable performance, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "pre-read effect random number" is acquired based on the output of a preliminary determination command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The obtained random number group is stored in the sub-RAM 94. The "chance up random number" is acquired based on a fluctuation start command being output from the main control section to the sub control section. The obtained random number value is stored in the sub-RAM 94.

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4. FIG. 8(A) shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8(B) shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. 8(C) shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2. 8(D) shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hit determination table T3, and FIG. 8(D) shows a diagram for explaining the regular symbol variation pattern determination table T4.

In the jackpot determination table T1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the obtained jackpot random number value (any of 0 to 65535) corresponds to a "jackpot" or a "loss" in the main control main processing (described later). This table is referred to for determination. In FIG. 8(A), in the "normal probability state", if the jackpot random number value is "0 to 164", it is determined to be a "jackpot", and if the jackpot random number value is "a number other than 0 to 164 (165 to 65,535 )”, it is shown that it is determined to be a “lose”. In addition, in the "high probability state", if the jackpot random number is "0 to 649", it will be determined as a "jackpot", and if the jackpot random number is "a number other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)", it will be judged as a "jackpot". It is shown that this is determined to be a "loss". Details of the "normal probability state" and the "high probability state" will be described later.

The reach determination table T2 indicates whether the reach random value (one of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) corresponds to "reach exists" or "reach does not exist". This is a table that is referenced to determine whether the In FIG. 8(B), in the "non-time saving state", if the reach random value is "0 to 13", it is determined that there is a "reach", and if the reach random value is "a number other than 0 to 13 (14 to 127), it is determined that there is no reach. In addition, in the "time saving state", if the reach random value is "0 to 5", it is determined that there is a "reach", and if the reach random value is "a number other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)", it is determined that there is a reach. It is shown that it is determined that there is no reach. The contents of the "time-saving state" and "non-time-saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, it is harder to reach when losing in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. This is because in the time-saving state, more no-reach losses with short fluctuation times are selected, thereby speeding up the processing speed of special symbol reservations.

The normal symbol winning determination table T3 indicates whether the normal symbol random number value (any of 0 to 255) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) corresponds to a "win" or a "loss". This is a table that is referenced to determine whether the In FIG. 8(C), in the "non-time saving state", if the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 2", it is determined to be a "win", and if the normal symbol random number value is "a number other than 0 to 2 (3 255)", it is determined that the result is a "loss". In addition, in the "time saving state", if the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 254", it will be determined as a "win", and if the normal symbol random number value is "a number other than 0 to 254 (255)", it will be determined as a "win". , it is shown that it is determined to be a "lose".

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine how many seconds the normal symbol fluctuation time is according to the gaming state (non-time saving state or time saving state) in the main control main processing (described later). This is the table that is referenced to do this. In FIG. 8(D), when in the "non-time saving state", the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds", and when in the "time saving state", the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second". It has been shown that

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 is composed of "jackpot type" and "special symbol This is a table that is referenced to determine the type. In FIG. 9, when winning in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 24", the jackpot type is determined to be "16 RV passing scheduled jackpot", and the special symbol 1 stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) is determined to be "jackpot symbol 1". When the jackpot type random number is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined to be "16 RV passing planned jackpot" and the special pattern stop symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 2". When the jackpot type random number is "50 to 55", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 15R) V passing expected jackpot" and the special pattern stopping symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 3". When the jackpot type random number is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot" and the special pattern stopping symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 4". When the jackpot type random number is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" and the special pattern stop symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 5". On the other hand, when you win in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 82", the jackpot type is determined to be "16 RV passing planned jackpot", and the special symbol 2 The stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) is determined to be "jackpot symbol 1". When the jackpot type random number is "83 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing expected jackpot" and the special pattern stop symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 5". In addition, by referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, the "special pattern stop pattern data" corresponding to the special pattern stop pattern, the "opening (OP) command", "round designation command", and "ending (ED)" of the special game can be determined. "command" can also be specified. Regarding the specific contents of "16RV passing planned jackpot", "16R (actually 15R) V passing planned jackpot", "16R (actually 13R) V passing planned jackpot", and "16R (actually 13R) V not planning jackpot" This will be explained later.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time saving state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 is a table that is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) to determine the fluctuation pattern according to the acquired fluctuation pattern random value (0 to 127). . In FIG. 10, for example, a player enters the first starting slot 20 in a non-time saving state, the jackpot determination table T1 determines that he has lost, the reach determination table T2 determines that he has a reach, and the number of reserved balls is "1". ~2'', and when the fluctuation pattern random number value is between "0 and 60", it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P7". In FIG. 11, for example, a prize is won in the second starting port 21 in the time saving state, it is determined as a "jackpot" in the jackpot determination table T1, it is determined as a "jackpot due to pass through 16 RV" in the jackpot type determination table T5, and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0 to 10", it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P61". As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, once the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. In addition, when reaching a reach, it is also determined whether the reach will be a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach effect where the fluctuation time after reach is longer than normal reach. Here, five types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) with different variation times are set. SP1-3 are progressively executed after normal reach. The difference between SP1 to SP5 may be, for example, the presence or absence of pseudo-association.

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the gaming state (non-time saving state or time saving state) in the main control main processing (described later). This is the table being referenced. In FIG. 12A, the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is determined to be "opening pattern 11" in the "non-time saving state", and the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 12" in the "time saving state". It has been shown that FIG. 12(B) shows the contents of the open pattern 11 and the open pattern 12. In the opening pattern 11, the electric chew 22 is opened once for an opening time of 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the electric chew 22 is opened three times, each opening time is 2.0 seconds, and the interval (opening interval) is 1.0 seconds. However, the opening of this electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains if a predetermined number of game balls are won (regular winning number, maximum 10).

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the big winning opening pattern determination table T8. The big winning hole opening pattern determination table T8 is based on the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole according to the special pattern stop symbol data (FIG. 9), in which the game control microcomputer 81 performs main control main processing (described later). This table is referred to in order to determine 35 open patterns. In FIG. 13(A), when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35 is "opening pattern 21". ”, and when the special pattern stop symbol data is “14H”, “15H”, or “22H”, the release pattern is determined to be “open pattern 22”, and when the special pattern stop pattern data is “13H”, the release pattern is It is shown that the pattern is determined to be "open pattern 23." FIG. 13(B) shows the contents of the open pattern 21, the open pattern 22, and the open pattern 23. In the opening pattern 21, in the 1st to 13th and 15th R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened once and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening), and in the 14th and 16th R, the opening is performed once, The second big prize opening 35 is opened for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening). In the opening pattern 22, in the 1st to 13th R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened (long opening) for 1 time and 29.5 seconds, and in the 14th and 16th R, the opening is 1 time and the opening time is 29.5 seconds. Open the second grand prize opening 35 for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 15th R, open the first grand prize opening 30 once for the number of openings and for an opening time of 0.1 seconds (short opening). . In the opening pattern 23, in the 1st to 13th and 15th R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened (long opening) for 1 opening time and 29.5 seconds, and in the 14th R, the opening number is 1 time and the opening time is 29.5 seconds. Open the second grand prize opening 35 for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and in the 16th R, open the second grand prize opening 35 once for the number of openings and for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening). . However, the first grand prize opening 30 and the second grand prize opening 35 will be opened even if the opening time remains if a predetermined number of game balls are won (regular number of prizes, maximum 9). Closed.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 according to the special pattern stop symbol data (FIG. 9) in the main control main processing (described later). This is the table being referenced. In FIG. 14(A), when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is determined to be "open pattern 31", and the special figure stop symbol When the data is "13H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 32", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "14H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 33", and the special figure stopping symbol data is determined to be "opening pattern 33". It is shown that when it is "15H" or "22H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 34". FIG. 14(B) shows the contents of the open pattern 31, the open pattern 32, the open pattern 33, and the open pattern 34. In the opening pattern 31, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds. At the 10th and 12th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 12th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds. At the 8th and 10th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, in the 2nd and 6th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds, and the second prize is won. At this time, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. At the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds. In the opening pattern 34, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds. .

4. Explanation of jackpots, etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are "jackpots" and "losses" as a result of jackpot drawings (special symbol drawings). In the case of a "jackpot", the "jackpot symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. At the time of "losing", the "losing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. When you win a jackpot, the jackpot game opens the jackpot (first jackpot 30 and second jackpot 35) in an opening pattern according to the type of special symbol that is stopped and displayed (jackpot type). ” is executed. A jackpot game is an example of a special game. A jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open games), an opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the final round game ends. There is. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game, and ends with the start of the next round game. The closing time (interval time) of the big prize opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. Here, the types of jackpots are roughly divided into two types: "V-passing planned jackpot" and "V-not-passing planned jackpot." "V passing planned jackpot" operates the opening/closing member 32, opening/closing member 37, and V opening/closing member 71 in an opening pattern that allows the game ball to pass through the V area 39 (V passing scheduled opening pattern) during the jackpot game. It's a big hit. Here, the jackpot where the special pattern stop symbol data is 11H to 14H, 21H corresponds to the "V passing expected jackpot (probable variable jackpot)". The combinations of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 are (opening pattern 21: opening pattern 31), (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 33) ) or (open pattern 23: open pattern 32), the game ball can pass to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. "V non-passing expected jackpot (normal jackpot)" is an opening pattern (opening pattern not expected to pass V) in which the game ball cannot pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot game, and the opening/closing member 32, opening/closing member 37, This is a jackpot that activates the V opening/closing member 71. Here, the jackpot with the special figure stop symbol data of 15H and 22H corresponds to the "V non-passing planned jackpot". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 34), the V area is 39 becomes impossible for the game ball to pass through. As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 serves as both the V passing scheduled opening pattern and the V non-passing scheduled opening pattern.

The “V passing planned jackpot” includes “16RV passing planned jackpot”, “16R (actually 13R) V passing planned jackpot”, and “16R (actually 15R) V passing planned jackpot”. The actual total number of rounds in the "16 RV jackpot" is 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the second big prize opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30 is easily possible.

In the "16R (actually 13R) V jackpot", the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R, and in 14R and Even in 16R, the second big prize opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: Opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 13R) jackpot expected to pass V", the opening time of the jackpot is extremely short from 14R to 16R, making it a round in which no prize ball is expected. In other words, the "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot" is actually a jackpot of 13R. In 2R and 6R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 33), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30 is easily possible.

In the "16R (actually 15R) jackpot expected to pass V", the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 15R. In other words, in 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in 16R, the second big prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 14R The second big prize opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: Opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 15R) jackpot expected to pass through V", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the jackpot is extremely short and no prize balls are expected. In other words, the "16R (actually 15R) V passing expected jackpot" is actually a jackpot of 15R. In 8R and 10R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 32), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30 is easily possible.

The "V non-passing planned jackpot" is the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" of the open pattern 22 in which the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R, and in 14R and Even in 16R, the second big prize opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: Opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 13R) V-non-passing planned jackpot", the opening time of the jackpot is extremely short from 14R to 16R, making it a round in which no prize ball is expected. In other words, the "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" is actually a jackpot of 13R. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, although the V opening/closing member 71 is opened, the opening is a short opening (FIG. 14: Opening pattern 34), and the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30 is opened. It is almost impossible for game balls to pass through.

As is clear from the above explanation, the "16R (actually 13R) jackpot that is not expected to pass through V" and the "16R (actually 13R) jackpot that is scheduled to pass V" are the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35 ( The opening patterns of the opening/closing member 32 and opening/closing member 37 are the same (opening pattern 22), and only the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is different (opening pattern 34 and opening pattern 33). In addition, as will be described later, in the case of "16R (actually 13R) jackpot not expected to pass V" and "16R (actually 13R) jackpot scheduled to pass V", the time-saving game (100 times in this example) will be performed after the jackpot game ends. It has become. In other words, in the "16R (actually 13R) jackpot not expected to pass through V", it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V area 39 in the first jackpot 30, and the gaming state after the jackpot is It becomes a low accuracy time saving state (low accuracy high base state). On the other hand, in the "16R (actually 13R) jackpot expected to pass through V", the game ball can easily pass through the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30, and the gaming state after the jackpot is highly accurate. It becomes a time-saving state (high-accuracy, high-base state). For this reason, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between a "16R (actually 13R) jackpot that is not expected to pass" and a "16R (actually 13R) jackpot that is not expected to pass", and the gaming state after the jackpot is uncertain. It becomes difficult to determine whether the time-saving state (low-accuracy/high-base state) or the high-accuracy/time-saving state (high-accuracy/high-base state) will occur. In addition, after the end of the time-saving game, the gaming state becomes a low probability low base state (normal state) for "16R (actually 13R) jackpot expected to not pass V", and the gaming state becomes "16R (actually 13R) jackpot expected to pass V". appears to be in a normal high-accuracy-low base state. That is, in the "16R (actually 13R) V passing planned jackpot", if the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30, when the time saving state after the jackpot game ends, the gaming state will be as follows. Being in a high probability low base state but with a high probability becomes a latent state (latent probability variable state), and this latent probability variable state is difficult for the player to discern. In other words, the low-probability time-saving state (low-probability (high base state) and the high probability time saving state (high probability high base state) after the jackpot game of "16R (actually 13R) V-passing planned jackpot", and the time saving end of "16R (actually 13R) V not planned jackpot" The subsequent low-probability, low-base state and the high-probability, low-base state after the end of the time saving of "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot" are performed in a manner that is difficult for the player to distinguish.

In addition, as shown in Figure 9, the distribution ratio of jackpots in the lottery for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is 68/128 (approximately 53%) for jackpots scheduled to pass V and 60/128 (approximately 53%) for jackpots scheduled to pass V not. 128 (approximately 47%). On the other hand, the distribution ratio of jackpots in the lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is 83/128 (approximately 64.8%) for jackpots scheduled to pass V and 45/128 (approximately 64.8%) for jackpots scheduled to pass V not. 35.2%). In this way, in the gaming machine 1, the jackpot lottery that is performed when a game ball enters the second starting port 21 is more popular than the jackpot lottery that is performed when a game ball enters the second starting port 21 (first special symbol lottery). The lottery (the lottery of the second special symbol) is set to be more advantageous for the player.

5. Description of gaming state The gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be explained. The game control microcomputer 81 can perform "probability variation control" and "variation time shortening control" on the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display 42, respectively. It is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 performs probability fluctuation control on the special symbols on the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a "high probability state (high probability state, probability fluctuation state, probability variable state)", and the probability fluctuation An uncontrolled state is simply called a "normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state)." The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8(A)) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be a jackpot is greater in a high probability state than in a normal probability state, as probability fluctuation control for special symbols. A high probability state is achieved by making a jackpot determination. Therefore, the high probability state has a higher probability of hitting the jackpot than the normal probability state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes probability variation control on the special symbols on the special symbol display 41, compared to the case where the probability variation control is not executed, The probability that the display result (stopped pattern) of the variable display of the special symbol will be a jackpot symbol is increased.

In addition, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the special symbols on the special symbol display 41 to shorten the fluctuation time is referred to as a "time-saving state", and the state in which the fluctuation time is not controlled to shorten is simply referred to as a "non-time-saving state". That's what it means. In the time saving state, the variation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of variable display to the time of deriving and displaying the display result) is shorter than in the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 executes a variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) that is determined so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more often in a time-saving state than in a non-time-saving state. Determine the variation pattern used. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes variable time reduction control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41, the variation of the special symbol A short variation time is more likely to be selected as the display variation time. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the reserved special drawings are consumed becomes faster, and effective winnings in the starting opening (winnings that can be stored as reserved special drawings) are more likely to occur. This allows players to aim for a jackpot while the game progresses smoothly. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 may execute the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control simultaneously with respect to the special symbols on the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time reduction control for the normal symbols in the time-saving state, but does not perform them in the non-time-saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 performs normal symbol probability fluctuation control by creating a normal symbol hit determination table T3 (where the number of normal symbol random numbers (random winning numbers) that are determined to be hits is greater in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. Hit determination (normal symbol determination) is performed using FIG. 8(C)). Therefore, in the time saving state, the winning probability is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes probability variation control on the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, compared to the case where the probability variation control is not executed, the normal symbol display 42 The probability that the display result of the variable display of the normal symbol (stopped symbol) becomes a winning symbol is increased. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time saving state. Here, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but it is 1 second in the time saving state (FIG. 8(D)). Furthermore, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes open time extension control on the electric chew 22. In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is greater than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes control to increase the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened. Under the situation where the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, and control for extending the opening time and increasing number of openings for the electric chew 22, Compared to the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the game ball enters the second starting port 21 more frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls, increases. Therefore, a state where these controls are being executed is called a "high base state", and a state where these controls are not being executed is called a "low base state". In a high base state, you can aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. Note that the high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control that supports winning to the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. The high base state (electric support control state) does not need to execute all of the above controls. That is, among the probability fluctuation control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, the variation time shortening control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the control for increasing the number of openings for the electric chew 22. It is only necessary that by executing one or more controls, the electric chew 22 can be opened more easily than when the controls are not executed. Further, the high base state (electric support control state) may be controlled independently without being associated with the time saving state.

In the gaming machine 1, the gaming state after a jackpot game due to winning the V passing scheduled jackpot is a high probability state, a time saving state, and a high base state if the player passes to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. . This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "high-accuracy, high-base state" or a "high-accuracy, time-saving state." Specifically, jackpots in which the gaming state after the jackpot game is in a high-probability, high-base state are of the jackpot types shown in FIG. 16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot.” "16RV jackpot expected to pass" and "16R (actually 15R) V pass planned jackpot" are in a high probability high base state, after playing a jackpot game, winning the next jackpot (next jackpot) and executing that jackpot game. Ends with. "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot" is a high probability high base state, after the jackpot game, a variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this case), and a high probability low base state (latent probability change state), or the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot game is executed. In addition, the gaming state after a jackpot game due to winning a jackpot scheduled to not pass V will be a normal probability state (non-high probability (that is, a state of low probability), a short-time state, and a high-base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low probability high base state" and "low probability time saving state." Specifically, the jackpot in which the gaming state after the jackpot game is a low-probability-high base state is the "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" among the jackpot types shown in FIG. 9. In this jackpot, the low-probability-high base state means that after the jackpot game, a variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (in this case, 100 times), or the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot is won. The game ends when the game is executed. When playing the gaming machine 1 for the first time, the gaming state after the power is turned on is a normal probability state, a non-time saving state, and a low base state (non-electric support control state). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". The low-probability, low-base state is sometimes referred to as a "normal gaming state" or a "low-probability non-time-saving state (also simply referred to as a non-time-saving state)." Further, the state in which a special game (big hit game) is being executed may be referred to as a "special game state (big hit game state)". Furthermore, a state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state may be referred to as a "specific gaming state."

In a high base state such as a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state, the game can proceed more advantageously if the game ball enters the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting right. Due to the electric support control, the electric chew 22 is opened more easily than in the low base state, and it is easier to win a prize in the second starting port 21 than to win a prize in the first starting port 20. be. Therefore, in the high base state, the game ball is hit to the right in order to enter the second starting port 21 while passing the game ball to the gate 28 which is the trigger for the normal symbol lottery. This allows you to get more starting prizes (winning into the starting hole) than if you hit left-handed. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, even during the jackpot game, the game is played with the right hand. On the other hand, in the low base state, the game can be progressed more advantageously if the game ball enters the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by hitting the ball to the left. Since the electric support control is not executed, the electric chew 22 is more difficult to open than in the high base state, and it is easier to win a prize in the first starting port 20 than to win a prize in the second starting port 21. This is because For this reason, in the low base state, the game ball is hit to the left in order to cause the game ball to enter the first starting port 20. This allows you to win more starting prizes than if you hit right-handed.

6. Operation of the game control microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be explained based on FIGS. 15 to 34. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the validity determining means (FIG. 23) and the preliminary determination means (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of main control main processing. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing main control main processing from the main ROM 83. In the main control main processing, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs initial settings (step S001). Initial settings include, for example, setting the main CPU 82 and resetting various flags, statuses, counters, and the like. The initial values of the flags are "1", that is, "ON" for the ceiling flag, and the initial values of the other flags are "0", that is, "OFF". The initial value of the status is "1". The initial values of the counters are "500" for the ceiling counter and "0" for the other counters. Note that the initial settings are executed only once after the power is turned on, and are not executed thereafter.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits interrupt processing (step S002), and performs normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (step S003). In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values (jackpot random number, jackpot type random number, reach random number, fluctuation pattern random number) shown in FIG. , normal symbol random number value) is updated by adding 1. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. Further, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

After the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 allows an interrupt of the interrupt process (step S004). While interrupts are enabled, main side timer interrupt processing (step S005) can be executed. The main side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined period (for example, a 4 msec period). That is, the main side timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined intervals (for example, every 4 msec). Then, after the main side timer interrupt processing ends and until the next main side timer interrupt processing starts, the updating processing of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating processing is repeatedly executed. . Note that if an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main side timer interrupt processing is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled.

[Main side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main side timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs a random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7(A). This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. In other words, the update processing of various random number counter values is performed during the execution period of the main side timer interrupt processing and other periods (the period from the end of the main side timer interrupt processing until the next main side timer interrupt processing starts). It is carried out both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input processing, the game control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1, and outputs payout data to the main RAM 84 for paying out prize balls according to the type of winning opening. Set in buffer. The various sensors include, for example, the first starting hole sensor 20a, the second starting hole sensor 21a, the first big winning hole sensor 30a, the second big winning hole sensor 35a, the normal winning hole sensor 27a, and the normal winning hole sensor 29a (Fig. 3).

After the input processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs starting port sensor detection processing (step S103), normal operation processing (step S104), special operation processing (step S105), V area sensor detection processing (step S106), and hold ball detection processing. The numerical processing (step S107) is executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After processing the number of reserved balls, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the commands and the like set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each of the above processes to the sub control board 90. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processes (step S109). In other processes, for example, the second special figure holding display 43b is controlled to display the number based on the number of reserved balls for special figure 2, which will be described later, and the first special figure is displayed based on the number of reserved balls for special figure 1. The hold display 43a is controlled to display the number.

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the starting port sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether a game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made depending on whether a game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. If no game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S202). The number of normal symbols reserved is the number of normal symbols reserved, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of regular symbols reserved. If the number of normal symbols reserved balls is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. When the number of normal symbols reserved balls is "3" or less (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the number of normal symbols reserved balls (step S203), a normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: value of label -TRND-H), and stores the obtained random value in the first to Of the fourth storage area, it is stored in a storage area corresponding to the current number of normal symbols reserved balls.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether a game ball has entered the second starting port 21 or not. This determination is made depending on whether or not a game ball is detected by the second starting port sensor 21a. If no game ball has entered the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. If the game ball wins (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved special drawings 2 balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S206). The number of special symbols 2 reserved balls is the number of reserved 2nd special symbols, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of reserved 2nd special symbols. If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "4" (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (step S207), special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (Figure 7: Label-TRND-A value), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (Figure 7: Value of label-TRND-AS), the value of the reach random number counter (Figure 7: Label-TRND-AS value), -TRND-RC value) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of label -TRND-T1). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random value group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 also temporarily stores the acquired random number group in a buffer (advance determination buffer) different from the second special figure holding storage area 85b for special figure 2 advance determination processing (FIG. 18), which will be described later. to be memorized (retained). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (step S209). Details of the special figure 2 advance determination process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether a game ball has entered the first starting port 20 or not. This determination is made depending on whether or not a game ball is detected by the first starting port sensor 20a. If no game ball has entered the first starting port 20 (step S210: NO), this process ends. When a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is "4 (upper limit)" ( Step S211). The number of reserved special symbols 1 is the number of reserved first special symbols, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of reserved first special symbols. If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "4" (step S211: YES), this process is ended. When the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (step S212), special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S213). Here, similarly to the above-mentioned special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208), the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter are obtained. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random number group in a storage area corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 also temporarily stores the acquired random number group in a buffer (advance determination buffer) different from the first special figure reservation storage area 85a for special figure 1 advance determination processing (FIG. 19), which will be described later. to be memorized (retained). After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (step S214). Details of the special figure 1 preliminary determination process will be described later.

[Special figure 2 advance judgment processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: Step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S301). If the probability change flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability change flag is OFF, no preliminary determination is performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a preliminary jackpot judgment with reference to the high probability state table of the jackpot judgment table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value that is temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer through special drawing 2 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: Step S208). do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the reference jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) and the jackpot random number value to pre-determine whether or not it is a jackpot. Here, since it is a high probability state (the probability change flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 selects the table for the high probability state (the jackpot judgment value is "0" to "649") out of the jackpot judgment table T1. Refer to this to determine in advance whether or not it is a jackpot. That is, when the jackpot random number value is between "0" and "649", it is determined in advance that it is a "jackpot", and when it is any other value, it is determined in advance that it is a "loss". In addition, in this embodiment, the preliminary determination is performed using the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later, but as another embodiment, a preliminary determination table T1 different from the jackpot determination table T1 may be used. A preliminary determination may be made using the jackpot determination table.

If the result of the preliminary jackpot determination is "lose" (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot preliminary determination is "jackpot" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot type preliminary determination (step S305). In the jackpot type preliminary determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first uses the jackpot type random number value as the determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). get. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a preliminary determination of the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, even if the jackpot type random number is any one of "0" to "127", it is determined in advance that it is a "jackpot expected to pass through 16RV". In this embodiment, the preliminary determination is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later; however, in other embodiments, a preliminary determination different from the jackpot type determination table T5 may be used. A preliminary determination may be made using a jackpot type determination table for determination.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a preliminary determination of the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains a fluctuating pattern random number value as a judgment value temporarily stored in the preliminary judgment buffer by the special drawing 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208), And obtain the reach random value. Next, since the time-saving state is here (the time-saving flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) for the time-saving state, and determines the jackpot preliminary determination result in step S304. A fluctuation pattern is identified from the preliminary judgment result of reach/absence obtained from the reach random value and the fluctuation pattern random value. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the variation pattern selected may differ depending on the difference in the number of reserved pitches. Here, it is assumed that all variation patterns that may be selected depending on the difference in the number of reserved pitches are selected. For example, if a loss with a reach is determined in advance from the jackpot preliminary determination result and the preliminary determination result of the presence or absence of a reach, and the fluctuation pattern random value is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the number of pending balls is "1 to 2". ”, the variation pattern “P64” is selected, and the number of reserved pitches is “3 to 4”, the variation pattern “P68” is selected. Note that in this embodiment, preliminary determination is performed using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 used in the fluctuation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described later; however, as another embodiment, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 may be used. The preliminary determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for preliminary determination that is different from the above.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a preliminary determination command. The preliminary determination command includes a jackpot preliminary determination result (in the case of a hit, a jackpot type preliminary determination result), and a fluctuation pattern preliminary determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created advance determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special figure 1 advance judgment processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: Step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the above-mentioned special figure 2 advance determination process, when the probability change flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process is finished. That is, when the probability variation flag is ON, no preliminary determination is performed. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a preliminary jackpot judgment by referring to the table for the normal probability state of the jackpot judgment table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S401: NO). S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value that is temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer through special drawing 1 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S213). do. Next, since the normal probability state is here (the probability variable flag is OFF), the game control microcomputer 81 selects the table for the normal probability state (the jackpot judgment value is "0" to "164") out of the jackpot judgment table T1. ”) to determine whether or not it is a jackpot in advance. That is, when the jackpot random number value is between "0" and "164", it is determined in advance that it is a "jackpot", and when it is any other value, it is determined in advance that it is a "loss". Note that the preliminary jackpot determination may use a jackpot determination table for preliminary determination that is different from the jackpot determination table T1. Hereinafter, the processing of steps S404 to S408 is the same as steps S304 to S308 of the above-mentioned special drawing 2 preliminary determination processing (FIG. 18), so the explanation will be omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501). If the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process moves to step S520. When the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbols are changing (step S502). If the normal symbol is changing (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. If the normal symbols are not changing (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls of the normal symbols is "0" (step S503). If the number of reserved pitches is "0" (step S503: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when a game ball passes through the gate 28 with the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol being "0", in step S203 of the starting port sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved balls of the regular symbol is "1". ”, and then, in this step S504, the reservation is extinguished and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol becomes “0” immediately. This also applies to the number of reserved balls in the special symbol. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the starting port sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of pending special symbols becomes "1", and then in step S1404 and step S212 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22), which will be described later. In S1410, the reservation is exhausted and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8(C)) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first inputs the normal symbol random number value ( Read out the winning random value). Then, it is determined whether or not it is a hit using the normal symbol random number value, the gaming state (whether it is a time saving state or not), and the normal symbol winning determination table T3. For example, in a non-time saving state, if the normal symbol random value is between "0" and "2", it is determined to be a "win", and if the normal symbol random value is other than that, it is determined to be a "lose". (See FIG. 8(C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8(D)) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the gaming state (whether or not it is a time saving state), and uses the gaming state determination result and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 to determine the normal symbol fluctuation. Select the fluctuation time of the normal symbol as a pattern. Here, in the non-time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" (see Figure 8 (D)) . The game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected normal symbol variation pattern to start variable display of the normal symbols (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol variation time has elapsed and ended. The normal symbol fluctuation time is the fluctuation time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8(D)). If the variable time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the fluctuating display of the normal symbols continues. On the other hand, if the variation time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the variation display (step S509), and if the above-mentioned hit determination (step S505) is a "loss", (Step S510: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, in the case of "win" in the above hit determination (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets an electric chew opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12(A)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the gaming state (whether or not it is a time saving state), and determines the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 using the gaming state determination result and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. Select. Here, in the non-time-saving state, "open pattern 11" is selected, and in the time-saving state, "open pattern 12" is selected. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chew operation according to the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this process.

In step S501 described above, if the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition for the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of prizes entered into the electric chew 22 reaches the specified maximum number of prizes (for example, 6 pieces), or the operating time of the electric chew 22 has elapsed and the time to close the electric chew 22 has arrived. One of the things that has been achieved is that it has been fulfilled. The operating time of the electric chew 22 is the operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. If the closing condition for the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the closing condition for the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (occlusions) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and the main processing finish.

[Special operation processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing related to the special symbol display 41 and the grand prize device (first grand prize device 31 and second grand prize device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is divided into "1" of "special operation status", They are called "2", "3", and "4". When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol standby processing (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, jackpot determination, variation pattern selection, etc. are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), special symbol fluctuation processing is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol fluctuation processing, output of a fluctuation stop command etc. is executed after the fluctuation time has elapsed. When the "special operation status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), special symbol confirmation processing is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of an opening command, etc. is executed at the time of a jackpot. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), special electric accessory processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessory processing, a jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. Note that the special operation status is "1" in the initial setting.

[Special symbol standby processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: Step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401). When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401: YES), in other words, the random value group acquired due to the winning in the second starting opening 21 is stored in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. If there is no memory, the process moves to step S1407. When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and the fluctuation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 changes the storage location of the reservation information (various random numbers) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b from the current position to the side from which it is read. At the same time as shifting by one, the pending information stored in the farthest location from the read side in the second special figure pending storage area 85b is cleared (step S1405). For example, if pending information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the pending information stored in the third storage area is cleared and the pending information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, the pending information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. Through the above steps, the second special figure reservations are consumed in the order in which they were reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B (the leftmost reserved image 9B among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is displayed. It is shifted to the held digested image display area side and displayed as the held digested image 9C. In addition, the reserved images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left among the four reserved images 9B) are respectively on the left side. Shift by one (Figure 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one second special figure reservation has been used up. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 variation start process, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, a variation display of the second special symbol is started, and a variation time timer is set. A variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process is set in the variation time timer. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2". In addition, the variation start command (special figure 2 variation start command) set in the special figure 2 variation start process includes information regarding the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and the variation pattern selection process ( Information regarding the fluctuation pattern set in step S1403) (including information regarding fluctuation time) is included.

In step S1401, if the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is "0" ( Step S1407). When the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), in other words, the random value group acquired due to winning in the first starting opening 20 is stored in the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. If there is no memory, the process moves to step S1413. When the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the fluctuation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the fluctuation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage locations of the various random numbers stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a from the current position to the side where they are read out. At the same time, the reservation information stored in the farthest location from the read side in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is cleared (step S1411). Through the above steps, the first special figure reservations are consumed in the order in which they were reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (the rightmost reserved image 9A among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is displayed. It is shifted to the held digested image display area side and displayed as the held digested image 9C. In addition, the reserved images 9A (the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th reserved images 9A from the left among the 4 reserved images 9A) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a are on the right side, respectively. Shift by one (Figure 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one first special symbol reservation has been used up. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step S1412). In the special figure 1 variation start process, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, a variation display of the first special symbol is started, and a variation time timer is set. A variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process is set in the variation time timer. Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2" (step S1406). In addition, the variation start command (special figure 1 variation start command) set in the special figure 1 variation start process includes information regarding the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the variation pattern selection process ( Information regarding the fluctuation pattern set in step S1409) (including information regarding fluctuation time) is included.

In step S1407, if the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may determine, for example, by turning on/off a demonstration screen display flag for waiting for customers. If it is a standby screen (step S1413: YES), this process ends. If it is not a standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 waits for a predetermined standby time to elapse, and then sets a customer waiting standby command to display a standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. (Step S1414), this process ends. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol reservation is executed only when the second special symbol reservation is "0". That is, the extinguishment of the second special figure reservation is executed in priority to the extinguishment of the first special figure reservation. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special symbol reservation is a jackpot that provides a greater profit for the player than the lottery based on the first special symbol reservation (V-passing expected jackpot) It has become easier to win.

[Jackpot determination process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). The jackpot determination process (step S1402) of the special figure 2 and the jackpot determination process (step S1408) of the special figure 1 have the same processing flow, so they will be explained together. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the probability change flag is ON (step S1501). If the probability change flag is ON (step S1501: YES), a jackpot determination is made with reference to the high probability state table of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a jackpot random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process for the special figure 2, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process for the special figure 1, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure reserved) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the reference jackpot determination table T1 and the jackpot random number value to determine whether or not it is a jackpot. Here, since it is a high probability state (probability variable flag is ON), it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot based on the table for high probability state (jackpot judgment value is "0" to "649") of the jackpot judgment table T1. judge.

In step S1501, if the probability change flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8). Step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value using the same method as in step S1502. Next, since the normal probability state is here (the probability variable flag is OFF), it is determined whether it is a jackpot based on the table for the normal probability state (the jackpot judgment value is "0" to "164") out of the jackpot judgment table T1. Determine whether or not.

If the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the type of jackpot (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a jackpot type random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process for special figure 2, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process for special figure 1, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After determining the jackpot type, the special symbol stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and the process ends. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, if the jackpot determination result is "lose", special symbol stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the losing symbol is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520). , this process ends.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). The variation pattern selection process of special figure 2 (step S1403) and the variation pattern selection process of special figure 1 (step S1409) have the same processing flow, so they will be explained together. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the gaming state is a time saving state (step S1600). A determination as to whether or not the time saving state is established is made based on whether the time saving flag is ON or not. If it is in the time saving state (step S1600: YES), the process moves to step S1612. If it is not in the time saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (step S1602). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process moves to step S1607. When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot is the special drawing 2 (step S1603). If the jackpot is special map 2 (step S1603: YES), the jackpot type will definitely be a V-passing planned jackpot, so the process skips to step S1605. If the jackpot is special map 1 (step S1603: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot type is a V-passing planned jackpot (step S1604), and the jackpot type determination is set in the main RAM 84. This is done based on the special figure stop symbol data.

If the jackpot type is a jackpot scheduled to pass through V (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 changes by referring to the table for jackpots scheduled to pass through V in a non-time-saving state among the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a fluctuating pattern random value as a determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process for special figure 2, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process for the special figure 1, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure reserved) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random value. Here, as a table for the non-time saving state V passing scheduled jackpot, of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. ” to “P3” (in special drawing 2, the variation pattern is “P21” to “P23”) are referenced (addresses are set). From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P1" to "P3" is selected as a fluctuation pattern for special drawing 1, and one of "P21" to "P23" for special drawing 2 is selected.

If the jackpot type is a V non-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the non-time saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). Then, a variation pattern is selected (step S1606). Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, we will use the portions ("P4" to "P6") corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. ) is referred to. One of "P4" to "P6" is selected as a variation pattern from the read variation pattern random values.

In step S1602, when the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the reach random number is a reach established random number (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a reach random value as a determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first piece of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the variation pattern selection process of special figure 1, the reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure pending) of the first special figure pending storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8(B)) and the reach random value to determine whether or not there is a reach. Here, since it is a non-time saving state, the reach is determined based on the table for the non-time saving state (the part where the reach judgment value (reach establishment random number) is "0" to "13") of the reach judgment table T2. Determine the presence or absence.

When the reach random value is a reach establishment random value (step S1607: YES), that is, when there is a reach and there is a loss, the game control microcomputer 81 selects the non-time saving state from the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A variation pattern is selected with reference to the table for loss with reach (step S1608). Here, as a table for a loss with reach in a non-time saving state, of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. The "P14" part (in special drawing 2, the variation pattern is "P24" to "P31" part) is referred to. In the special figure 1, one of "P7" to "P14" is selected as a variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, one of "P24" to "P31" is selected as a variation pattern from the readout variation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) for the special figure 2. Since the variation pattern selected changes depending on the number of balls on hold, a shortening variation function works according to the number of balls on hold. In other words, in both Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", the fluctuation time is shorter than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". More and more short fluctuation patterns are being selected. Thereby, when the number of reserved balls is large, it is possible to increase the speed at which special symbols are reserved.

If the reach random value is not a reach established random value (step S1607: NO), that is, if there is no reach and there is no reach, the game control microcomputer 81 selects the non-time-saving state from the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A variation pattern is selected with reference to the table for no-reach loss (step S1609). Here, as a table for non-time-saving state no reach loss, of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for non-time-saving state shown in FIG. The "P16" part (in special drawing 2, the variation pattern is "P32" to "P33" part) is referred to. In the special figure 1, either "P15" or "P16" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) for the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, either "P32" or "P33" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) for the special figure 2. Here, too, the variation pattern selected changes depending on the number of balls on hold, so the shortening variation function works according to the number of balls on hold.

In step S1600, when it is determined that the gaming state is the time saving state, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (FIG. 25: step S1612). Thereafter, the processing in steps S1613 to S1619 is the same as the processing in steps S1603 to S1609 described above, except for the following points, so a description thereof will be omitted. The difference between the processing in steps S1613 to S1619 and the processing in steps S1603 to S1609 is that in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the part of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 that is referenced is different from. Specifically, in steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-time-saving state is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-time-saving state is referred to. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the V-passing scheduled jackpot, of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time-saving state shown in FIG. is referred to as "P41" to "P43", and in special drawing 2, the variation pattern is "P61" to "P63". From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P41" to "P43" is selected as a fluctuation pattern for special drawing 1, and one of "P61" to "P63" for special drawing 2 is selected. For example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (“P44 ” to “P46”) are referenced. One of "P44" to "P46" is selected as a variation pattern from the read variation pattern random values.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends this process. Information on the set variation pattern is included in the variation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process (FIG. 16: Step S108). This starts the variable display of special symbols.

[Special symbol fluctuation processing]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21: Step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed and ended (step S1701). The variation time of the special symbol is the variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the above-mentioned variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25). If the variable time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the variable display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), a fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the stoppage of fluctuation (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of special symbols at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 finishes this process.

[Special design confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 21: Step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs game state management processing (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for managing the number of STs and the number of time saving times, and the details will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). When the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1808), and ends this process. As a result, the jackpot game is not started, and the process returns to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22), and the jackpot determination for the next hold is executed.

If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets an opening pattern for the jackpot and the V opening/closing member according to the type of jackpot won (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the big winning hole opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the big winning hole from the special figure stop symbol data, and uses the determined opening pattern. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the big winning hole. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), determines the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 from the special figure stop symbol data, and sets the determined opening pattern. . For example, when the special figure stop pattern data is "11H", "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71. Together with the setting of the opening pattern of the big prize opening and the V opening/closing member, the value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of the won jackpot. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, the round counter is set to "16" (FIG. 13(B)).

After setting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state reset process (step S1804). The gaming state reset process is a process for resetting the probability change flag and the time saving flag (returning them to OFF), and the contents will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start a jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). Thereafter, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1807), and the present process ends.

[Game state management processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the gaming state management process (FIG. 27: Step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the probability change flag is ON or not (step S2001). If the probability change flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2010. If the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of variations of the special symbol executed during the high probability state. Here, "100" is set in the probability change counter at the time of transition to the high probability state. As a result of decrementing the probability change counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2003). If the value of the probability change counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the value of the probability variation counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. If the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. If the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time saving counter counts the number of changes in the special symbol executed during the time saving state. Here, when transitioning to the time saving state, the time saving counter is set to "100". As a result of decrementing the time saving counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2007). If the value of the time saving counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008).

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The gaming state specification command includes information regarding the current gaming state (whether the ceiling flag is ON or not, the ceiling counter value, whether or not it is in a variable probability state, the variable variable counter value, whether or not it is in a time saving state, and the time saving counter value, etc.). include.

In step S2010, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the ceiling flag is ON or not. If the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2010: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the ceiling flag is ON (step S2010: YES), the value of the ceiling counter is decremented by 1 (step S2011). The ceiling counter is for counting the specified number of rotations until b time saving (play time) is reached, and counts the number of changes in the special symbol executed when the ceiling flag is ON (during low probability state). . Here, when the ceiling flag is set to ON, "500" is set to the ceiling counter as the specified rotation speed. As a result of decrementing the ceiling counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the counter value has become "0" (step S2012). In other words, it is determined whether or not the specified number of rotations has elapsed until reaching b time saving (play time). If the value of the ceiling counter is not "0" (step S2012: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the probability change counter is "0" (step S2012: YES), the time saving flag is switched on (step S2013), and "700" is set in the time saving counter as the number of time saving times (number of times of granting). Then, the ceiling flag is turned off (step S2015). After that, the process of step S2009 is executed.

[Game state reset processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the gaming state reset process (FIG. 27: Step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the probability change flag is ON or not (step S2101). If the probability change flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the time saving flag is ON. If the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), the process skips to 2105. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). In step S2105, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the ceiling flag is ON or not. If the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2105: NO), this process ends. If the ceiling flag is ON (step S2105: YES), the ceiling flag is switched OFF (step S2106). That is, during the execution of the jackpot game, the ceiling flag is turned off in a non-high probability state and a non-time saving state. Since the gaming machine 1 is always in a low base state during a non-time saving state, it is in a low base state while a jackpot game is being executed.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing (FIG. 21: Step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The "jackpot end flag" is a flag indicating that all openings of the jackpot devices (first jackpot device 31 and second jackpot device 36) based on the opening pattern have been completed in the jackpot game being executed. If the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process moves to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), a V opening/closing member operation process for operating the V opening/closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V opening/closing member 71 of this embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls win in the first big prize opening 30, and in the V opening/closing member operation processing, it is operated according to the V opening/closing member opening pattern T9. When a game ball of a predetermined number wins, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period of time. Details of the V opening/closing member operation processing will be described later. After the V opening/closing member operation processing, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30 and second big winning opening 35) is open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process moves to step S2210.

If the grand prize opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is time (timing) to open the grand prize opening (step S2203). The time to open the big winning hole may be, for example, when the opening time of the jackpot has passed and it is time to start opening in the first round game, or when the big winning hole that was temporarily closed after opening is reopened. This includes the time when it is time to start opening again after the interval time (closed time) has elapsed. If it is not time to open the big prize opening (step S2203: NO), the process moves to step S2220.

If it is the time (timing) to open the big winning hole (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the big winning hole opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big winning hole (the first big winning hole 30 or the second big winning hole 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) depending on the type of jackpot. After the big winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information regarding the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. In addition, in this embodiment, the grand prize opening is not opened multiple times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the big winning opening is opened multiple times during one round of gaming, the game control microcomputer 81 controls the opening of the big winning opening during one round. It may be determined whether it is the first opening or not, and the round designation command may be set only if it is the first opening. After setting the round designation command, this processing ends.

In step S2202 described above, if the grand prize opening is being opened (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition for the grand prize opening is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of prizes entered into the grand prize opening in that round game has reached the specified maximum number of prizes (for example, 9 per round), or the time has come to close the grand prize opening. (i.e., that a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has elapsed since opening the big prize opening). Then, if the condition for closing the big winning opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the condition for closing the big winning opening is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the big winning opening (step S2211).

In step S2203 described above, if it is not the time (timing) to open the big prize opening, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined period of time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed after the big prize opening is closed. This is because, as described above, the time (interval time) for closing the big prize opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended, depending on whether a predetermined interval time has elapsed since closing the big prize opening. If the round game has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

If the round game has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2221), and determines whether the value of the round counter is "0" or not. A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the prescribed number of round games has not yet been played, this process ends in order to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0", a jackpot ending command is set as a jackpot ending process to end the jackpot game (step S2227), and a jackpot ending is started (step S2228). In this embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the "16R (actually 13R) V-passing planned jackpot" is "16R (actually 13R) V-not-passing planned jackpot". The length is the same as the ending time when the game ball does not pass into the V area 39 in "Jackpot". As a result, even if the game ball passes through the V area 39 with a "16R (actually 13R) jackpot expected to pass through V", a "16R (actually 13R) jackpot expected to not pass through V" will occur to the player. ”, it can be recognized that no game ball has passed into the V area 39. In addition, the ending time when the game ball does not pass to the V area 39 in "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot" is also the same length as these. After the jackpot ending starts, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and this process ends.

In step S2200 described above, if the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the final round has ended, so the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special operation status. is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, in the next special operation process, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again. Thereafter, a game state setting process (step S2234), which will be described later, is executed and the present process ends.

[V opening/closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 30: Step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the current round game (the round) is an open round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round correspond to the opening rounds of the V opening/closing member 71. The game control microcomputer 81 can determine that it is an open round when the round counter values are "15", "13", "11", "9", "7", and "5". If it is not the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this process ends. This is because there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71 in this round.

If it is an opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the first winning flag is ON or not (step S2502). The "first winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first ball won in the first big winning hole 30 in the round. If the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process moves to step S2520. When the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not a winning of the first ball has been detected (step S2503). If the winning of the first ball is not detected (step S2503: NO), this process ends. This is because there is no prize in the first big prize opening 30 in this round, and there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71.

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-circuits the V opening/closing member 71 and performs a V validity period setting process (step S2504). In the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is performed when the first ball wins, regardless of whether it is "short opening" or "long opening". This is to allow the short circuit to be opened (in this case, for 0.1 seconds) at the same time. In addition, in the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is very short, so the first game ball that enters the first big prize opening 30 does not pass through the V area 39 and is not played. It is configured to pass through the V region 70. In the V effective period setting process, the V effective period during which the V opening/closing member 71 is open and several seconds after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is set as the V effective period during which the detection of a game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 (here, for 0.1 seconds) according to the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), and while the V opening/closing member 71 is open. And 1 second after closing is set as the V effective period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including when a jackpot game is not executed) as a V invalid period in which detection of a game ball by the V area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid. Here, "determining that the detection of a game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid" means turning on the V flag based on the detection of a game ball by the V area sensor 39a (described later in the V area sensor detection processing (see Figure 33)). Further, "determining that the detection of a game ball by the V area sensor 39a is invalid" means that the V flag is not turned on even if a game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a. The reason why the V effective period includes several seconds after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed (ball brushing period) is because there is a physical distance between the V opening/closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a. This takes into consideration the period until the game ball that enters the V area 39 side immediately before the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is detected by the V area sensor 39a. That is, here, the V flag is turned on only when V passing (passing of a game ball to the V area 39) is detected during the V valid period, and the V flag is turned ON when V passing is detected outside the V valid period (V invalid period). It is assumed that it will not be turned on. Note that when the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag is turned ON, that is, the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability state (see the gaming state setting process (FIG. 32) described later). This prevents the V flag from being turned on and set to a high probability state based on V passing due to fraudulent activity. After the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505) and moves to step S2540.

In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, that is, if the first ball has already won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning flag is ON. (Step S2520). The "second winning flag" is a flag indicating that the second ball has won in the first grand prize opening 30 when the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is long opening. If the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process moves to step S2540. If the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is a long opening (step S2521). If it is not a long open (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is a short open, the process moves to step S2540. On the other hand, if it is a long open (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball has been detected (step S2522). If winning of the second ball is not detected (step S2522: NO), the process moves to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening/closing member 71 long and performs a V validity period setting process (step S2523). In the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long when the second ball wins (in this case, a maximum of 31.5 seconds). ). In addition, since the maximum playing time for one round is 31.5 seconds (29.5 seconds maximum opening time of the grand prize opening + 2 seconds interval closing time), generally speaking, the second ball will win the prize. The time from the end of the round to the end of the round will be less than 31.5 seconds. As will be described later, the V opening/closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, so the long opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, in the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is relatively long. configured to pass. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period while the V opening/closing member 71 is open, and sets the V invalid period when the V opening/closing member 71 is closed at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524) and moves to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the V opening/closing member 71 is open. If the V opening/closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round game has ended (step S2550). As mentioned above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round game has ended depending on whether a predetermined interval time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed after closing the big prize opening. Make a judgment.

If the round game has ended (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), and performs the V opening/closing member closing process and the V invalid period. Setting processing is performed (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening/closing member 71, and after several seconds (here, 1 second) have elapsed after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed, the V invalid period starts. Make the settings and finish this process.

If the round game has not ended (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition for the V opening/closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). For example, in the case of a short-circuit opening, the condition for closing the V opening/closing member 71 may include that a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds) has elapsed after opening the V opening/closing member 71. If the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), V opening/closing member closing processing and V invalid period setting processing are performed (step S2552), and the present processing ends. If the closing condition is not satisfied (step S2560: NO), the process ends with the V opening/closing member 71 in the open state and the V valid period continuing.

In step S2540, when the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the V opening/closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), it determines whether the round game has ended (step S2571). If the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572), and ends this process. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), the process ends.

[Game status setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the gaming state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2301). If the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the time saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and the time saving counter is set to "100" (step S2303). As a result, the gaming state after the current jackpot game becomes a "non-high probability state", a "time saving state", and a "high base state" (that is, a low probability high base). This low-probability-high base state ends when one of the following conditions is met: the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times, or the player wins the next jackpot.

On the other hand, in step S2301, if the V flag is ON (step S2301: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability variation flag (step S2304), sets the probability variation counter to "100" (step S2305), The V flag is turned OFF (step S2306). Further, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the time saving flag (step S2307) and sets the time saving counter to "100" (step S2308). As a result, the gaming state after the current jackpot game becomes a "high probability state", a "time saving state", and a "high base state" (that is, a high probability high base). This high-accuracy, high-base state ends when either of the following conditions is met: the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times, or the player wins the next jackpot.

In step S2310, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the ceiling flag, and the ceiling counter is set to "500" as the specified number of revolutions until b time saving (play time) is reached (step S2311). As a result, after the jackpot game, when the probability change flag is OFF, when the game is hit 500 times, the game enters b time saving (play time). In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command includes information regarding the set game state (time saving flag, time saving counter, probability change flag, probability change counter, ceiling flag, ceiling counter).

[V area sensor detection processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 16: Step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601). If no game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is a detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V is in the valid period (step S2602). The V valid period is a period set by the V valid period setting process (steps S2504, S2523) of the V opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V validity period is set to several seconds (ball brushing period) when the V opening/closing member 71 is opened or closed during the second, fourth, sixth, eighth, tenth, and twelfth rounds. be done. If it is not within the V validity period (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is within the V validity period (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets a V passing command (step S2604), and ends this process. .

[Held pitch count processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the pending pitch count process (FIG. 16: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the number of special symbol 1 reserved balls, the special symbol 2 reserved number of balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the number of reserved balls command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The number of reserved balls command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the number of reserved balls, and includes information regarding the number of reserved balls for special pattern 1, the number of reserved balls for special pattern 2, and the number of reserved balls for normal symbols. . After setting the number of reserved balls command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

7. Operation of the production control microcomputer 91 The operation of the production control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be explained based on FIGS. 35 to 45. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the production control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94.

[Sub control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main processing. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the performance control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing the sub-control main process from the sub-ROM 93. In the sub-control main processing, the production control microcomputer 91 first performs CPU initialization processing (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, settings of the sub CPU 92, reset of various flags, statuses, counters, etc. are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the CPU initialization process, the production control microcomputer 91 prohibits the interruption of the interrupt process (step S4015), and performs the random number update process (step S4020). In this random number update process, the production control microcomputer 91 updates the random number counter value shown in FIG. 7(B) by adding one. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. Furthermore, instead of adding up the random numbers one by one, two or more may be added. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the production control microcomputer 91 allows the interruption of the interrupt process (step S4025). While interrupts are enabled, sub-side timer interrupt processing (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at predetermined intervals. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined intervals. Then, the random number update process is repeatedly executed between the end of the sub-side timer interrupt process and the start of the next sub-side timer interrupt process.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 35: step S4035). The production control microcomputer 91 first performs received command analysis processing (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis process will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a process during variable performance (step S4305). The process during variable performance is a process for setting a pre-variation end command at a specific timing during the variable performance to cause the display screen 7a to execute a specific display performance, and the details will be described later. After the process during the variable performance, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch processing, the production control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the production button detection switch 63a. . After the switch process, the production control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the production control microcomputer 91 sends various commands set in the production command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 by the received command analysis process to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. , is transmitted to the relay board 108. The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute display effects according to the received commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 that has received various commands executes audio production to output audio from the speaker 67 in accordance with the received commands. The lamp control board 107 that has received the various commands executes a lamp effect that controls the light emission of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 in accordance with the received commands. After the command transmission process, the production control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends this process. Other processing includes, for example, random number updating processing.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The performance control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a preliminary determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has been received (step S4415: YES), prefetch effect determination processing is performed (step S4420). The "pre-reading effect determination process" is a process of determining whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect and the pre-reading effect pattern in the case of executing it. The details of the pre-read effect determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the above-mentioned prefetch effect determination process is skipped. The look-ahead performance is a performance that suggests that there is a high possibility that the reservation information newly stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a jackpot, and is executed during the variable performance.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a command for the number of reserved balls has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If it has been received (step S4445: YES), a hold display process is performed (step S4450). In the reservation display process, information is set in the counter set area 94d of the sub-RAM 94 based on the information regarding the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls included in the number of reserved balls command. The values of the first special symbol reservation performance counter, the second special symbol reservation performance counter, and the regular symbol reservation performance counter are updated. Thereby, information on each number of reserved balls can be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub control board 90 side. Furthermore, the production control microcomputer 91 controls the pending image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a, Update 9B. On the other hand, if the hold pitch count command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-described hold display process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). If it has been received (step S4455: YES), a variable effect start process is performed (step S4460). "Variation performance start processing" is a process of selecting a fluctuation performance pattern (content) to be executed during special symbol fluctuation. Details of the variable performance start process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4455: NO), the above-described variable effect start process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If it has been received (step S4465: YES), a variable effect end process is performed (step S4470). "Fluctuation performance end processing" is a process for stopping the fluctuation performance executed during special symbol fluctuation. In the fluctuating performance end process, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets a counter etc. based on the analysis result of the fluctuation stop command, and also sets a fluctuating performance end command for ending the fluctuating performance. As a result, the decorative pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 or 2 which is changing is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a prior determination information shift process (FIG. 39), which will be described later. Note that if the fluctuation stop command has not been received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation effect end process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If it has been received (step S4475: YES), opening performance pattern determination processing is performed (step S4480). The "opening performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an opening performance pattern (content) to be executed at the start of a special game (jackpot game). In the opening performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and sets in the sub-RAM 94 information regarding the special symbol stop pattern data set at the time of jackpot winning determination, which is included in the opening command. Then, select the performance pattern of the opening performance that has been set in advance corresponding to the winning type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data, and send the opening performance start command to start the selected opening performance to the performance command set area of the sub-RAM 94. Set to 94b. When the opening performance start command set in the performance command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 stores the predetermined opening performance image in the ROM 103. The image data is read from the image display device 7 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, in step S4475, if the opening command is not received (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If it has been received (step S4485: YES), round effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4490). The "round performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an opening game performance pattern (content) to be executed during opening of the big prize opening or during an interval between openings in a special game (jackpot game). In the round performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets information regarding the special figure stop symbol data and information regarding the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub-RAM 94. do. Then, select a preset round performance performance pattern corresponding to the winning type and number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data, and send a round performance start command to the sub-RAM 94 to start the selected round performance. Set it in the command set area 94b. When the round performance start command set in the performance command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round performance image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, in step S4485, if the round designation command is not received (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If it has been received (step S4495: YES), ending effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4500). The "ending performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an ending performance pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big win game or small win game). In the ending performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command and sets information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub-RAM 94. Then, an ending performance pattern corresponding to the winning type indicated by the special figure stop pattern data is selected, and an ending performance start command for starting the selected ending performance is set in the output buffer of the sub-RAM 94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. Note that if the ending command has not been received (step S4495: NO), the above-described ending effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4535). In other processes, for example, when the production control microcomputer 91 receives the gaming state designation command, the production control microcomputer 91 inputs information regarding the gaming state included in the gaming state designation command (time saving flag, time saving counter, probability variation flag, probability variation counter, ceiling flag). , ceiling counter, etc.) are held in the sub RAM 94. Specifically, based on the information included in the game state designation command, the values of the time-saving effect counter, probability-changing effect counter, and ceiling effect counter provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub-RAM 94 are updated. For example, the remaining number of fluctuations (number of games) in time saving is set in a time saving performance counter, the remaining number of fluctuations in probability changing is set in a probability variable performance counter, and the remaining number of fluctuations until reaching the ceiling is set in a ceiling performance counter. Thereby, information on the number of time reductions, the number of probability changes, and the number of ceilings can be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub control board 90 side. Moreover, the production control microcomputer 91 causes the sub-RAM 94 to hold information about passing the V when receiving the V passing command. Further, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (customer waiting standby command, RAM clear notification command, etc.) and ends this processing.

[Ahead production decision processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the pre-read effect determination process (FIG. 37: Step S4420). The performance control microcomputer 91 first performs advance determination information rewriting processing (step S4601). Specifically, the production control microcomputer 91 receives the jackpot preliminary judgment result (jackpot judgment information), the jackpot type preliminary judgment result (jackpot type information), and the variation included in the preliminary judgment command received from the main control board 80. The pattern preliminary determination result (fluctuation pattern information) is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c.

FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the preliminary determination information storage area 94c. In addition to the above-mentioned jackpot judgment information, jackpot type information, and fluctuation pattern information, the advance judgment information storage area 94c stores pre-read performance pattern information. The pre-read effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the pre-read effect executed during the variable effect, and is selected in step S4604, which will be described later. FIG. 39(A) shows that the jackpot judgment information “Lose” and the fluctuation pattern information “P72” and “P73” are the first to third pieces as the preliminary judgment results corresponding to the first to third pieces of special drawing 2 pending. A state is shown in which the data is stored in a storage area, and the preliminary determination result corresponding to the variation is stored in the area. FIG. 39(B) shows that from the state of FIG. 39(A), special drawing 2 has won, and the preliminary judgment information included in the preliminary judgment command received from the main control board 80 is added to the fourth special drawing 2 pending. A state in which the data is stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, jackpot judgment information "jackpot", jackpot type information "21H", and fluctuation pattern information "P61" are stored as advance judgment information. In addition, "Pattern A" is added as pre-reading performance pattern information to the first to fourth storage areas corresponding to the first to fourth special drawings 2 pending and the area corresponding to the fluctuation. " is set. FIG. 39(C) shows a state in which the variation has ended from the state in FIG. 39(B) and the advance determination information shift process has been executed. Specifically, the advance determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to this area, the advance determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas, and the advance determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas. 4. Pre-determination information in the storage area is cleared. The advance determination information shift process is executed in the variation effect end process (FIG. 37: Step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, the performance control microcomputer 91 then determines whether or not pre-read performance pattern information is stored in the advance determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not pre-read performance pattern information is stored in the corresponding area of the advance determination information storage area 94c, or any of the first to fourth storage areas. If the prefetch effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process ends. That is, if the pre-read effect pattern information is stored in the corresponding area of the pre-judgment information storage area 94c, or any of the first to fourth storage areas, the pre-read effect pattern information is newly selected and not stored. On the other hand, if the pre-read performance pattern information is not stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is a "jackpot". Alternatively, it is determined whether or not there is a "reach with reach" (step S4603). Whether it is a "big hit" or "a hit with reach" can be determined based on, for example, the preliminary determination result of the variation pattern (variation pattern information). If the preliminary determination result included in the received preliminary determination command is "no reach loss" (step S4603: NO), the performance control microcomputer 91 ends this process. This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead performance. On the other hand, if the pre-judgment result included in the received pre-judgment command is "Jackpot" or "Lose with reach" (step S4603: YES), a pre-read performance execution determination that determines whether or not to execute the pre-read performance; Then, prefetch effect pattern selection is performed (step S4604). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the pre-read performance random number random number, and performs the pre-read performance by referring to the acquired random number value and the pre-read performance pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub-ROM 93. It is determined whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect and the pre-reading effect pattern when performing the pre-reading effect.

FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. In Figure 40, if the pre-judgment result is "Jackpot" and the pre-read effect random number is "0 to 55", the pre-read effect is "none", and if the pre-read effect random value is "56 to 67", the pre-read effect is When "Pattern A" is selected and the pre-read effect random number is "68 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the pre-read effect. In addition, if the pre-judgment result is "Less with reach" and the pre-reading effect random number is "0-107", the pre-reading effect will be "none", and if the pre-reading effect random value is "108-114", the pre-reading effect will be When "Pattern A" is selected and the pre-reading effect random number is "115 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the pre-reading effect. Note that the type and content of the look-ahead effect pattern and the range of random numbers to be selected can be set arbitrarily.

Returning to FIG. 38, if it is determined in step S4604 that the pre-read effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected pre-read effect pattern is stored in the advance determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when storing the pre-read effect pattern in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received pre-judgment command among the first to fourth storage areas but also the storage area before the corresponding storage area are stored. A prefetch effect pattern is stored in the area and also in the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39(B), "pattern A" is not only set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received advance determination command, but also in the first to third storage areas and the corresponding area. Set "Pattern A" to "Pattern A". As a result, the look-ahead effect pattern A is executed even in the variable effects that are executed before the variable effects corresponding to the fourth storage area (the variable effects corresponding to this area and the first to third storage areas). . Note that whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the area depends on the progress of the variable effect. That is, in the variable performance, if the timing to execute the pre-read effect has already passed, the pre-read effect will not be executed, but if it is before the timing to execute the pre-read effect, it will be executed at that timing. This will be discussed later. In step S4604, if it is determined that the prefetch effect will not be executed (step S4605: NO), the process ends.

[Variable effect start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the variable performance start process (FIG. 37: Step S4460). The performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation start command (step S5000). Here, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the fluctuation start command and information regarding the fluctuation pattern in the sub-RAM 94. The set information includes game status information indicating the current gaming status, symbol information indicating the symbol as a determination result of the winning determination process of special symbol 1 or special symbol 2, and the like. The gaming state information and symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the performance control microcomputer 91.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs basic performance pattern determination processing (step S5010). The basic performance pattern determination process includes the basic configuration of the variable performance (for example, the display and switching of background images on the image display device 7, the display of predetermined characters and their movements, and the output of melodies and sound effects using the speaker 67). , lighting control of lamps, etc.). The variable performance is completed by superimposing additional performances such as chance-up production and look-ahead production on top of this basic production. The performance control microcomputer 91 determines the basic performance pattern by referring to the basic performance pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub-ROM 93.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the basic performance pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform normal reach performance, multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform SP1 performance, multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform SP2 performance, multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform SP3 performance, Multiple types of basic performance patterns are set to perform no-reach, no-lose performance. The type of basic performance pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, if the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1", the basic performance pattern for performing the SP1 performance is selected. Further, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P72", a basic performance pattern that performs a no-reach performance is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the basic performance pattern, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a chance-up performance pattern determination process (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. The performance control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the chance up random number counter, and determines the chance up performance pattern by referring to the acquired random number value and the chance up performance pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub ROM 93.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, only a portion of the chance up effect pattern determination table T53 that determines the variable effect pattern of the special figure 1 in the non-time saving state is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows a chance-up effect pattern that is executed when the variation patterns included in the variation start command are "P1" to "P16". The chance-up performance pattern determination table T53 includes a portion that determines the chance-up performance pattern to be executed when the variation patterns are "P21" to "P33", "P41" to "P56", "61" to "73". You may or may not be prepared.

In Figure 43, the chance-up effect patterns are "2-NO", "2-SP1", "2-SP2", "2-SP3", "3-NO", "3-SP1", "3-SP2", "3-SP3", " 4-NO,” “4-SP1,” “4-SP2,” “4-SP3,” and “ANO” are set. These chance effect patterns correspond to various chance-up effects described later.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up performance pattern, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a count performance pattern determination process (step S5016). Here, the count performance pattern determination process includes the remaining number of fluctuations (number of games) during the probability change, the remaining number of fluctuations during the time saving, the remaining number of fluctuations until reaching the ceiling, the number of fluctuations from the time the power is turned on, and the number of fluctuations after the jackpot game. This is a process for displaying the number of fluctuations, etc. on the display screen 7a. The performance control microcomputer 91 displays the remaining number of probability variations on the display screen 7a based on the value of the probability variation production counter at the time of probability variation. Moreover, the performance control microcomputer 91 displays the remaining number of probability changes based on the value of the time-saving performance counter when time is shortened.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 can execute various effects based on the value of the ceiling effect counter and the value of the evening effect counter. The ceiling effect counter stores the number of changes remaining until the ceiling is reached, and the overnight effect counter records the number of changes since the power is turned on. For example, the performance control microcomputer 91 can set the number of fluctuations since the power is turned on by incrementing the overnight performance counter each time it receives a variable performance end command from the main control board 80. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether the value of the ceiling effect counter is less than or equal to TH2 (for example, TH2=200) when the value of the evening effect counter is TH1 (for example, TH1=10). When the value of the ceiling effect counter is less than or equal to TH2, a predetermined chance image is displayed. If the value of the ceiling effect counter is greater than TH2, no chance image is displayed. Thereby, the player who sees the chance image can recognize that the gaming machine 1 has inherited the number of games from the previous day and that the ram has not been cleared. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 may display the value of the ceiling effect counter when the value of the evening effect counter is TH3 (for example, TH3=50). Further, the performance control microcomputer 91 may erase the display and chance image representing the value of the ceiling performance counter when the value of the evening performance counter is TH4 (for example, TH4=100). Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 may display again the value of the ceiling effect counter when the value of the evening effect counter is TH5 (for example, TH5=200). The production control microcomputer 91 may decide whether or not to display the value of the ceiling production counter based on the value of the evening production counter as described above, or may decide based on the value of the ceiling production counter. Good too. For example, the production control microcomputer 91 displays the value of the ceiling production counter when the value of the ceiling production counter is TH6 (for example, TH6=100), and displays the value of the ceiling production counter when the value of the ceiling production counter is TH7 (for example, TH7=70). At this time, the display of the value of the ceiling effect counter may be erased, and when the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH8 (for example, TH8=50), the value of the ceiling effect counter may be displayed again.

After the count performance pattern determination process, the combination of performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R to be stopped and displayed may be determined by referring to the performance control microcomputer 91, the random number value, and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54. Based on these, it is determined what kind of performance will be performed as a variable performance.

The performance control microcomputer 91 sets a variable performance start command in the performance command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 so that a variable performance based on the variable performance pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5016 is realized. Step S5020). When the variable effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 starts the variable effect image. The data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 sets a variable production timer (step S5030) and ends this process. A variation time (FIG. 42) corresponding to the variation pattern included in the variation start command is set in the variation effect timer. For example, when the variation pattern is "P1", the variation effect timer is set to "40 seconds".

[Processing during variable performance]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the process during fluctuation performance (FIG. 36: Step S4305). The performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variable performance is being performed (step S4701). Whether or not the variable performance is in progress can be determined, for example, by whether or not the variable performance timer has reached zero. If the variable performance is not in progress (step SS4701: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variable production is in progress (step SS4701: YES), the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether it is the timing to set the command before variation end to the production command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation end command is a command that the production control microcomputer 91 notifies the image control board 100 etc. that it is a specific timing during the variation production, and the image control board 100 receives the pre-variation end command. According to the information included in the pre-variation end command, the content of the presentation is switched, a specific image is displayed, etc.

If it is not the timing to set the before-variation-end command (step S4702: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is the timing to set the before-variation-end command (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is pre-read effect pattern information in the corresponding area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is pre-read effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), a pre-variation end command including the pre-read effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no pre-read effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-variation end command that does not include pre-read effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, if there is pre-read effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation end command including the pre-read effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the variable effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a prefetch effect that displays a prefetch effect image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. On the other hand, even if there is no look-ahead effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation end command is sent to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the variation. Here, if a preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a preview fade effect to fade the preview image.

8. Operation of the movable body and display effect of the sub-display screen 64 Using FIGS. 69) and the display effect of the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U) will be explained. The performance control microcomputer 91 performs drive control to operate the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69 during game performance (display performance), initial operation when power is turned on, etc. will be carried out. Furthermore, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a display performance to display a specific image on the sub display screen 64 during a game performance (display performance) or during an initial operation when the power is turned on.

FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the movement mode of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second aspect of the first movable accessory 14. The first movable accessory 14 is a vertically long rod-shaped member, and has an upper end located near the upper end of the image display device 7 and a lower end located near the lower end of the image display device 7. The upper and lower ends of the first movable accessory 14 are difficult to see, and the vicinity of the center is visible in front of the image display device 7 (front surface). As shown in FIG. 1, the first movable accessory 14 can stand still at a retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 (first mode). In the retracted position, the first movable accessory 14 may be partially stored so that the remaining part is visible, or may be completely stored and difficult to see. As shown in FIG. 46, the first movable accessory 14 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction in front of the image display device 7. It is configured to be able to move (advance) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a and move in the left-right direction in front of the display screen 7a. Moreover, it can stand still at any advance position in front of the display screen 7a. The movement mode of the first movable accessory 14 can be set arbitrarily. Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the first movable accessory 14 can move to the right end of the display screen 7a and stand still at that position (second mode). The first movable accessory 14 may have a decorative portion formed at least in part, or may have transparency.

FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory 15. The second movable accessory 15 includes a rectangular decorative part with "OARO" written on it, and is configured to be movable up and down. As shown in FIG. 1, the second movable accessory 15 can stand still at a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a (first mode). At this time, a part of the second movable accessory 15 becomes difficult to see. The second movable accessory 15 can move downward from the state shown in FIG. 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a and come to rest at the advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 48 (second mode) . In this second aspect, the decoration part stops in front of the image display device 7 so as to cover the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 can be moved upward (retracted) from the advanced position shown in FIG. 48 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, and can stop there.

FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the frame movable accessory 69. The frame movable accessory 69 is constituted by a pair of flat members arranged on both the left and right sides of the handle 60, and is configured to be movable in the left and right directions, respectively. The two members are made of flexible members and are configured such that one main surface of each member moves toward or away from the handle 60. As shown in FIG. 1, the two members of the frame movable accessory 69 are normally stationary at retracted positions (home positions) far from the handle 60 on the left and right sides of the handle 60, respectively (first mode) . As shown in FIG. 49, the two members of the frame movable accessory 69 each move (advance) from the retracted position in a direction approaching the handle 60, that is, move close to each other, and each move toward the handle 60. It can stand still at the position where it is touched (second mode). When the movable frame accessory 69 is in the advanced position, it touches the handle 60 or the right hand of the player who is operating the handle 60. The frame movable accessory 69 can move in the direction in which the two members are separated from each other so that the second mode changes to the first mode.

FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the display effects of the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U). The right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U can each independently display images. Further, it is possible to perform effects linked to the image on the display screen 7a.

9. Production Examples, Effect Examples, Modifications, and Mode Examples of the Present Embodiment Each production example (display production example, role object movable production example) of the present embodiment will be described below. In addition, examples of effects, modifications, and examples of aspects of the production example will also be explained. As mentioned above, the performance that will be described below is based on various information (jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, fluctuation pattern information, preliminary determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81. This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). Note that the following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, etc. Further, in some display presentation examples, a hold display (hold icon) may be omitted.

The same numeral decorative pattern row effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 51 to 53. This same number decorative pattern row performance is executed during the fluctuating performance of decorative patterns. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the same numeral decorative pattern array effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub display screen 64.

[Same number decorative pattern row production A]
FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the same numeral decorative pattern row effect A. The same number decorative pattern row performance is a performance in which a plurality of decorative patterns representing the same number are included in one pattern row in which a plurality of decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a are lined up along the direction of variation. 51(A) to (F) show an example of the first variation of the special figure variation, and FIGS. 51(G) to (L) show an example of the second variation following the first variation. When the same numeral decorative pattern string effect is executed in the first variation of the special figure variation, the same numeric decorative pattern sequence effect is always executed in the next second variation.

In the same number decorative pattern row effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 51(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in high-speed fluctuation on the display screen 7a. Although the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and during low-speed variable display, a plurality of numeric patterns are displayed vertically. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrays of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). When the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in high-speed fluctuations as shown in FIG. becomes visible. On the other hand, during low-speed variable display, a plurality of numerical symbols are vertically lined up and visibly displayed in each symbol arrangement, such as the left ornamental symbol 8L and right ornamental symbol 8R in FIG. 51(B). It enters the frame from the top end, moves downward, and goes out of the frame from the bottom end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 51(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are decelerated in order and change from high-speed fluctuation display to low-speed fluctuation display, and in each symbol row, Multiple number patterns arranged vertically become visible. On the other hand, the medium decorative pattern 8C maintains a high-speed fluctuation display, and the numerical pattern is difficult to see.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 51(C), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in order. Here, both are stopped and displayed at "3" and are in a reach state. Here, in the symbol row that is stopped and displayed, only one numerical symbol is displayed, and the display of other consecutive numerical symbols in the upper and lower directions disappears. In addition, at the time of stop display, the display of other numerical symbols may not disappear and may be displayed as they are. The medium decorative pattern 8C decelerates and changes from a high-speed fluctuation display to a low-speed fluctuation display, and a plurality of vertically arranged numerical symbols become visible.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 51(D), the same number decorative pattern sequence effect is executed. Specifically, an effect is performed in which all the number designs included in the pattern row of the medium decorative pattern 8C change to those representing the same number. Here, when the medium decorative pattern 8C is being displayed with slow fluctuation, the number patterns included in the pattern row of the medium decorative pattern 8C all change from "123456789" to "333333333", which is the ready-to-reach symbol "3". Switch to . Thereby, the player can be surprised that no matter which numerical symbol the medium decorative symbol 8C stops at, the player will always win. In addition, when the number patterns included in the pattern row of medium decorative pattern 8C change, they do not switch all at once, but the new patterns that enter the frame are all "3", and the original number patterns frame out in order, so that the entire number is changed. may be switched.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 51(E), the number patterns included in the pattern row of the medium decoration pattern 8C return to the original state "123456789". That is, in a plurality of number patterns representing the same number included in the pattern row of the medium decorative pattern 8C, the represented numbers change to become different numbers from each other. After that, as shown in FIG. 51(F), the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a stopped state, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are determined to stop in a losing mode (here, "323"). do. Alternatively, all the number symbols included in the pattern row of the medium decorative pattern 8C are stopped and displayed in the state of "3", and the game is confirmed and stopped in the winning mode of "333".

After FIG. 51(F), in the next variation (second variation), first, FIG. 51(A) and FIG. 51(B) are executed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 51(G), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in order. Here, both are stopped and displayed at "4" and are in a reach state. Similar to the first variation in FIG. 51(C), here, in the symbol row that is stopped and displayed, only one numeric symbol is displayed, and the display of other numeric symbols that are continuous above and below disappears. In addition, at the time of stop display, the display of other numerical symbols may not disappear and may be displayed as they are. The medium decorative pattern 8C is decelerated and changes from a high-speed fluctuation display to a low-speed fluctuation display, and a plurality of vertically arranged number designs become visible.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 51(H), the same number decorative pattern sequence effect is executed. Specifically, an effect is performed in which all the number designs included in the pattern row of the medium decorative pattern 8C change to represent the same number. Here, when the medium decorative pattern 8C is being displayed in slow fluctuation, the number symbols included in the pattern row of the medium decorative pattern 8C change from "123456789" to "444444444", which is a state in which all of them become the reach symbol "4". Switch to . Thereby, the player can be surprised that no matter which numerical symbol the medium decorative symbol 8C stops at, the player will always win. In addition, when the number patterns included in the pattern row of the medium decorative pattern 8C change, they do not switch all at once, but all the new patterns that enter the frame are "4", and the original number patterns frame out in order, so that the entire number pattern changes. may be switched.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 51(I), an effect is performed in which the number patterns included in the pattern row of the medium decorative pattern 8C return to the original state "123456789". That is, in a plurality of number patterns representing the same number included in the pattern row of the medium decorative pattern 8C, the represented numbers change to become mutually different numbers. This can disappoint the player. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 51(J), the same numeral decorative pattern sequence effect is executed again. Here, when the medium decorative pattern 8C is being displayed in slow fluctuation, the number symbols included in the pattern row of the medium decorative pattern 8C have changed from "123456789" to "3", which is different from the reach symbol, "333333333". all at once. As a result, the player can be disappointed that if things continue as they are, they will definitely lose, but can also be made to expect that something might happen.

After that, as shown in FIG. 51(K), while the slow fluctuation display of the medium decorative pattern 8C is maintained, the number symbols included in the pattern row of the medium decorative pattern 8C change from "333333333" to "all reach symbols" 4" changes all at once to "444444444". This makes the player happy that he will definitely win no matter which number pattern the medium decorative pattern 8C stops at, while also making him anxious that the medium decorative pattern 8C will switch to another number pattern.

After that, as shown in FIG. 51(L), all the number patterns included in the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C are stopped and displayed in the state of "4", and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern are displayed. The symbol 8R is determined to stop in a winning manner (here, "444"). As a result, the player can safely rest assured that all the number symbols included in the pattern row of the medium decorative pattern 8C are stopped and displayed in the state of "4" and that he has won the jackpot.

[Same number decorative pattern row production B]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the same numeral decorative pattern row effect B. The same number decorative pattern row performance is a performance in which a plurality of decorative patterns representing the same number are included in one pattern row in which a plurality of decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a are lined up along the direction of variation. 52(A) to (F) show an example of the first variation of the special figure variation, and FIGS. 52(G) to (L) show an example of the second variation following the first variation. When the same numeral decorative pattern string effect is executed in the first variation of the special figure variation, the same numeral decorative pattern sequence effect is always executed in the next second variation.

In the same numerical decorative pattern row effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 52(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in high-speed fluctuation on the display screen 7a. Although the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and during low-speed variable display, a plurality of numeric patterns are displayed vertically. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrays of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). When the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in high-speed fluctuations as shown in FIG. becomes visible. On the other hand, during low-speed variable display, a plurality of numerical symbols are vertically lined up and visibly displayed in each symbol arrangement, such as the left ornamental symbol 8L and the right ornamental symbol 8R in FIG. 52(B). It enters the frame from the top end, moves downward, and goes out of the frame from the bottom end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 52(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are decelerated and change from high-speed fluctuation display to low-speed fluctuation display, and in each symbol row, vertically Multiple number patterns lined up become visible. On the other hand, the medium decorative pattern 8C maintains a high-speed fluctuation display, and the numerical pattern is difficult to see.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 52(C), the same number decorative pattern sequence effect is executed. Specifically, an effect is performed in which all the numeric symbols included in the symbol rows of the left ornamental symbol 8L and the right ornamental symbol 8R of the ornamental symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change to those representing the same number. Here, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in slow fluctuation, the number patterns included in the respective pattern rows of the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R are all "3" from "123456789". The state changes to "333333333" all at once. Thereby, the player can be surprised that the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R stop at the same pattern and always become a reach. In addition, when the number patterns included in the respective pattern rows of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are switched, they do not switch all at once, but all the new symbols that enter the frame are "3", and the original number patterns are The whole may be switched by sequentially frame-out.

After that, as shown in FIG. 52(D), all the number patterns included in the respective pattern rows of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in the state of "3", and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern The symbol 8R is in a reach mode (here, "3↓3"). Here, in each symbol row that is stopped and displayed, three numerical symbols are displayed along the fluctuation direction (up and down direction), and the display of other consecutive numerical symbols above and below disappears. That is, here, the ready-to-reach symbols are stopped at three positions: the upper row, the middle row, and the lower row. In addition, at the time of stop display, the display of the other numerical symbols of the three numerical symbols in each symbol row may not disappear and may be displayed as they are.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 52(E), an effect is performed in which the number symbols included in each of the symbol rows of the left decorative symbol 8L and right decorative symbol 8R that are stopped and displayed return to the original state "123456789". That is, in a plurality of numerical symbols representing the same number included in each of the symbol rows of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, the represented numbers change to become mutually different numbers. Here, only three numerical symbols are displayed in a stopped state, so some of the original numerical symbols ("456" of the left decorative symbol 8L and "789" of the right decorative symbol 8R) are displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 52(F), the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are in three losing states (here, the upper row "417", It will definitely stop at the middle row "528" and the lower row "639").

After FIG. 52(F), in the next variation (second variation), FIG. 52(A) is executed first. After that, as shown in FIG. 52(G), the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R decelerate and change from high-speed fluctuation display to low-speed fluctuation display, and in each symbol row, Multiple number patterns arranged vertically become visible. On the other hand, the medium decorative pattern 8C maintains a high-speed fluctuation display, and the numerical pattern is difficult to see.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 52(H), the same number decorative pattern sequence effect is executed. Specifically, an effect is performed in which all the numeric symbols included in the symbol rows of the left ornamental symbol 8L and the right ornamental symbol 8R of the ornamental symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change to those representing the same number. Here, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in slow fluctuation, the number patterns included in the respective pattern rows of the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R are all "4" from "123456789". The state changes to "444444444" all at once. Thereby, the player can be surprised that the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R stop at the same pattern and always become a reach. In addition, when the number patterns included in the respective pattern rows of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are switched, they do not switch all at once, but all the new symbols that enter the frame are "4", and the original number patterns are The whole may be switched by sequentially frame-out.

After that, as shown in FIG. 52(I), all the number patterns included in the respective pattern rows of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in the state of "4", and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern The symbol 8R is in a reach mode (here, "4↓4"). Here, in each symbol row that is stopped and displayed, three numerical symbols are displayed along the fluctuation direction (up and down direction), and the display of other consecutive numerical symbols above and below disappears. That is, here, the ready-to-reach symbols are stopped at three positions: the upper row, the middle row, and the lower row. In addition, at the time of stop display, the display of the other numerical symbols of the three numerical symbols in each symbol row may not disappear and may be displayed as they are. The medium decorative pattern 8C is decelerated and changes from a high-speed fluctuating display to a low-speed fluctuating display, and a plurality of vertically arranged number symbols become visible in each symbol row.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 52(J), the same number decorative pattern sequence effect is executed. Specifically, an effect is performed in which some of the number designs included in the pattern row of the medium decorative pattern 8C change to those representing the same number. Here, when the medium decorative pattern 8C is being displayed with slow fluctuation, the number pattern included in the pattern row of the medium decorative pattern 8C changes from "123456789" to "124456789" and the reach pattern "4" becomes two. The state will change to the current state. As a result, the player can see that the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are reach at three positions: upper, middle, and lower, and two of the middle decorative symbols 8C are numbers that correspond to the jackpot. Since the symbol is "4", the player can feel excited and feel that it is easy to hit the jackpot.

After that, as shown in FIG. 52(K), the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed, and the combination of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is "414" in the upper row and "424" in the middle row. , lower row "444"), it is confirmed to stop. Since the jackpot symbol is included in the lower row of the upper, middle, and lower rows, the jackpot is notified as shown in FIG. 52(L).

[Same number decorative pattern row production C]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the same numeral decorative pattern row effect C. The same number decorative pattern row performance is a performance in which a plurality of decorative patterns representing the same number are included in one pattern row in which a plurality of decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a are lined up along the direction of variation. 53(A) to (F) show an example of the first variation of the special figure variation, and FIGS. 53(G) to (L) show an example of the second variation following the first variation. When the same numeral decorative pattern string effect is executed in the first variation of the special figure variation, the same numeric decorative pattern sequence effect is always executed in the next second variation.

In the same numerical decorative pattern row performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 53(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in high-speed fluctuation on the display screen 7a. Although the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and during low-speed variable display, a plurality of numeric patterns are displayed vertically. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrays of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). When the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in high-speed fluctuations as shown in FIG. becomes visible. On the other hand, during low-speed fluctuation display, a plurality of numerical symbols are vertically lined up in the pattern arrangement and displayed so as to be visible, like the medium decorative pattern 8C in FIG. , and frames out from the bottom edge of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 53(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are decelerated, change from high-speed fluctuation display to low-speed fluctuation display, and then stop display. Here, in each symbol row that is stopped and displayed, three numerical symbols are displayed along the fluctuation direction (up and down direction), and the display of other consecutive numerical symbols above and below disappears. That is, here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped at three positions: the upper row, the middle row, and the lower row (here, the upper row "4↓7", the middle row "5↓8", and the lower row "6↓9"). ”). In addition, at the time of the stop display, the display of the other numerical symbols of the three numerical symbols in each symbol row of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R may be displayed without disappearing. On the other hand, the medium decorative pattern 8C maintains a high-speed fluctuation display, and the numerical pattern is difficult to see.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53(C), the same number decorative pattern sequence effect is executed. Specifically, an effect is performed in which at least a part of the number symbols included in each of the symbol rows of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R that are stopped and displayed change to those representing the same number. Here, in each of the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R that are being stopped and displayed, the number patterns corresponding to the two tiers, the upper and middle tiers, are switched to "3" and the colors are changed. Thereby, the player can be surprised because the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are switched from the state in which none of the upper, middle, and lower rows were in the ready-to-win mode to the ready-to-reach mode in the upper and middle rows. In addition, when the number patterns included in each of the pattern rows of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are switched, here they are switched once all at once. However, instead of switching all at once, the switching may be performed randomly. Furthermore, instead of switching once and ending, the state may be switched multiple times and determined after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. The medium decorative pattern 8C is decelerated and changes from a high-speed fluctuating display to a low-speed fluctuating display, and a plurality of vertically arranged numerical symbols in the symbol row become visible.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53(D), the same number decorative pattern sequence effect is executed. Specifically, an effect is performed in which all the number designs included in the pattern row of the medium decorative pattern 8C change to represent the same number. Here, when the medium decorative pattern 8C is being displayed in slow fluctuation, the number patterns included in the pattern row of the medium decorative pattern 8C are switched all at once from "123456789" to "333333333" in which all are "3". As a result, the player can be surprised that the jackpot will definitely occur in the upper and middle rows of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. Furthermore, when the number patterns included in the pattern row of the medium decorative pattern 8C change, they do not switch all at once, but the new patterns that enter the frame are all "3", and the original number patterns frame out in order, making the whole structure change. may be switched.

After that, as shown in FIG. 53(E), the number patterns included in the respective pattern rows of the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R that were stopped and displayed, and the medium decorative pattern 8C that was displayed with slow fluctuation are returned to their original states. A production that returns to "123456789" is performed. That is, in a plurality of number patterns representing the same number included in each of the pattern rows of the left decorative pattern 8L, right decorative pattern 8R, and middle decorative pattern 8C, the represented numbers change to become mutually different numbers. In the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R, which are stopped and displayed, only three numerical patterns are stopped and displayed, so some of the original numerical patterns ("456" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern) are stopped and displayed. The symbol 8R "789") is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 53(F), the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are in three losing states (here, the upper row "417", It will definitely stop at the middle row "528" and the lower row "639").

After FIG. 53(F), in the next variation (second variation), first, FIGS. 53(A) and 53(B) are executed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53(G), the medium decorative pattern 8C decelerates and changes from a high-speed fluctuating display to a low-speed fluctuating display, and a plurality of vertically arranged numerical symbols in the symbol row become visible.

After that, as shown in FIG. 53(H), the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are in three losing states (here, the upper row "487", Stop (temporary stop) at the middle row "598" and the lower row "619").

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 53(I) to 53(K), the same numeral decorative pattern sequence effect is executed. Specifically, an effect is performed in which at least a part of the number patterns included in each of the stop-displayed left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R pattern rows change to those representing the same number. be done. Here, at least some of the number patterns included in each of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are randomly switched to "3" and the color changes. The number pattern once switched to "3" also randomly returns to the original number pattern.

At the point when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the same-number decorative pattern row presentation (in this case, Fig. 53(K)), the upper, middle, and lower rows of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed. If any of them is stopped in a jackpot mode, as shown in FIG. 53(L), the one set stopped in a jackpot mode is selected and displayed, and the display of the other two sets disappears.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the same number decorative pattern row effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, it is possible to perform an effect in which a symbol row in which a plurality of decorative symbols are lined up along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction) is displayed on the display screen 7a. , In this production, multiple decorative patterns representing the same number are included in one pattern row (for example, Fig. 51 (D) (H) (J) (K), Fig. 52 (C) (D) (H) (I) (J), Fig. 53 (C) (D) (I) (J) (K). According to this configuration, players can be visually entertained by unprecedented and innovative effects. , it is possible to improve interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, in the above performance, a plurality of decorative symbols included in a symbol row lined up along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction) all represent the same number (for example, 51(D)(H)(J)(K), FIG. 52(C)(D)(H)(I), FIG. 53(D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, in the above performance, a plurality of symbol rows are displayed, and each of the plurality of symbol rows includes a plurality of decorative symbols representing the same number ( For example, FIG. 52(C)(D)(H)(I), FIG. 53(C)(D)(I)(J)(K)). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, in the above production, the number represented in the decorative pattern changes from a state in which the pattern row does not include a plurality of decorative patterns representing the same number. 51(C)(D)(G)(H)(I)(J), FIG. 52(B)(C)(D)(G) (H) (I), Figure 53 (B) (D) (H) (I)). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, after the above performance, the displayed numbers change in a plurality of decorative patterns representing the same number to become different numbers (for example, in FIG. (D) (E) (H) (I), Figure 52 (D) (E), Figure 53 (D) (E)). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the above-mentioned performance is executed during the variation production of decorative symbols, and the above-mentioned production is also executed in the next variation production after the above-mentioned production is executed. . According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the same numeral decorative pattern row presentation is shown.
[Modification 1]
The configurations of the same number decorative pattern row effects A to C may be combined as appropriate. For example, FIGS. 52(A) to 52(F) of the same number decorative pattern row performance B may be executed in the next variation after the same number decorative pattern row performance A of FIGS. 51(A) to 51(F) are executed. .

[Modification 2]
In the same number decorative pattern row productions A to C, the numbers represented by a plurality of number patterns included in one pattern row are assumed to switch to the same number all at once. However, by covering a plurality of number symbols included in one symbol row with images representing the same number, the symbols may be switched to the same number. Alternatively, an image representing the same number may appear from the back side by cracking a plurality of number symbols included in one symbol row.

[Modification 3]
In the same number decorative pattern row performances A to C, the number patterns representing the same numbers included in one pattern row are the same numbers themselves as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. It is assumed that the numbers constitute a jackpot when they match. However, the numbers themselves that are the same are decorative numbers, and may be decorative numbers that do not result in a jackpot when they match. That is, the number symbols representing the same number included in one symbol row may represent the same number as a decoration, or may separately display a number for constituting a jackpot when aligned.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
It is possible to perform an effect in which the display means displays a pattern row in which a plurality of the decorative patterns are lined up along a fluctuation direction,
In the production, a plurality of decorative patterns representing the same number are included in one pattern row.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
In the production, the plurality of decorative patterns included in the pattern row all represent the same number.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
In the production, a plurality of the symbol rows are displayed, and each of the plurality of symbol rows includes a plurality of decorative symbols representing the same number.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
In the production, the number represented in the decorative pattern changes from a state in which the pattern row does not include a plurality of decorative patterns representing the same number, so that the same number is represented in the plurality of decorative patterns.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-4,
After the presentation, in the plurality of decorative patterns representing the same number, the represented numbers change to become different numbers from each other;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-5,
The production is executed when the decorative pattern fluctuates, and the production is performed also in the next variation production after the production is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Decorative symbol number change effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 54 to 56. This decorative pattern number change presentation is executed during the decorative pattern variation presentation. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a decorative pattern number change effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub display screen 64.

[Decorative pattern number change production A]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern number change effect A. In the decorative pattern number change production, when a plurality of decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a are lined up along the variable direction and move along the variable direction, at least one of the plurality of decorative patterns changes. This is a performance in which the numbers represented in the design move while changing.

In the decorative symbol number change performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 54(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in high-speed variation on the display screen 7a. Although the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and during low-speed variable display, a plurality of numeric patterns are displayed vertically. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from top to bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrays of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). When displaying the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R at high speed as shown in FIG. becomes visible. On the other hand, during low-speed variable display, a plurality of numerical symbols are vertically lined up and displayed in a visible manner in the symbol arrangement (symbol row), like the left decorative symbol 8L in FIG. 54(B). In, move downward, and frame out from the lower end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 54(B), the left decorative pattern 8L of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R decelerates and changes from a high-speed fluctuation display to a low-speed fluctuation display, and in the symbol row, a plurality of vertically arranged number symbols becomes visible. On the other hand, for the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, the high-speed fluctuation display is maintained, and the numerical patterns are difficult to see.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54(C), the right decorative pattern 8R decelerates and changes from a high-speed fluctuation display to a low-speed fluctuation display, and a plurality of vertically arranged number symbols become visible in the symbol row. In the left decorative pattern 8L, a numeral pattern of "2" expressed in a special manner enters the frame while maintaining a low-speed fluctuating display. Here, the special mode number pattern (special number pattern) is a relatively small number image of "2" in the center of a rectangular image. After the special number pattern enters the frame, when the entire number image of "2" is displayed on the display screen 7a, an effect is started in which the number in the "2" part changes to another number at high speed. Here, the numbers in the number image change randomly at high speed, but the numbers in the number image may change quickly in the order of "123456789". Moreover, the color of the special number pattern changes as the number of the number image changes. Here, a color is determined for each type of number, and the color changes depending on the type of number. Note that the color may change randomly regardless of the change in the number. Further, when the special numeric symbol is moving, the color may not change and it may be displayed in the same color, and when it stops near the center of the display screen 7a, the color may change to another color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 54(D), following the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R has a number pattern of "5" expressed in a special manner while maintaining a low-speed fluctuation display. Frame in. Here, as in the case of the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 54(D), a relatively small number image of "5" is displayed in the center of the rectangular image (special number pattern). After the special number pattern enters the frame, when the entire number image of "5" is displayed on the display screen 7a, an effect is started in which the number in the "5" part changes to another number at high speed. Here, the numbers in the number image change randomly at high speed, but the numbers in the number image may change quickly in the order of "123456789". In the left decorative pattern 8L, the special numeric pattern continues to move downward while the digits of the numeric image change randomly at high speed. The special numerical patterns of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R change in color as the numbers in the numerical images change. Here, a color is determined for each type of number, and the color changes depending on the type of number. Note that the color may change randomly regardless of the change in the number. Further, when the special numeric symbol is moving, the color may not change and it may be displayed in the same color, and when it stops near the center of the display screen 7a, the color may change to another color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 54(E), in the left decorative pattern 8L, the special numeric pattern in which the digits of the numeric image randomly change at high speed moves downward while maintaining the low-speed fluctuation display. When it reaches the center of the display screen 7a, the movement is stopped, and at that position, the random change of numbers ends and one number is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 54(F). Here, the display is stopped with "3" being displayed. In addition, here, in the symbol row that is stopped and displayed, only one numerical symbol "3" is displayed, and the display of other consecutive numerical symbols in the upper and lower directions disappears. In addition, at the time of stop display, the display of other numerical symbols may not disappear and may be displayed as they are. In the right decorative pattern 8R, the special numeric pattern continues to move downward while the digits of the numeric image change randomly at high speed. The medium decorative pattern 8C is decelerated and changes from a high-speed fluctuating display to a low-speed fluctuating display, and a plurality of vertically arranged number symbols become visible in the symbol row.

As shown in FIG. 54(F), similar to the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R is a special numeric pattern in which the numbers of the numeric image randomly change at high speed while maintaining a slow fluctuation display. When it moves downward and reaches the center of the display screen 7a, it stops moving, and at that position, as shown in FIG. 54(G), the random change of numbers ends and one number is stopped and displayed. Here, the number "3" is stopped and displayed in a ready-to-reach state. In the medium decorative pattern 8C, a numeral pattern of "1" expressed in a special manner enters the frame while maintaining a low-speed fluctuating display. Here, as in the case of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, a relatively small number image of "1" is displayed in the center of the rectangular image (special number pattern). After the special number pattern enters the frame, when the entire number image of "1" is displayed on the display screen 7a, an effect is started in which the number in the "1" part changes to another number at high speed. Here, the numbers in the number image change randomly at high speed, but the numbers in the number image may change quickly in the order of "123456789". The color of the special number pattern changes as the numbers in the number image change. Here, a color is determined for each type of number, and the color changes depending on the type of number. Note that the color may change randomly regardless of the change in the number. Further, when the special numeric symbol is moving, the color may not change and it may be displayed in the same color, and when it stops near the center of the display screen 7a, the color may change to another color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 54(H), in the medium decorative pattern 8C, the special numeric pattern in which the numbers in the numeric image are randomly changing at high speed moves downward while maintaining the low-speed fluctuation display. When reaching the center of the display screen 7a, the random change of numbers ends and one number is displayed while the movement is maintained. Here, in the case of a reach, the number change is always stopped with the reach symbol "3" being displayed. Then, an effect is performed in which the special number symbol "3" either stops at the center position or passes through the same position.

As shown in FIG. 54(I), the special number pattern "3" of the medium decorative pattern 8C passes through the position between the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are stopped and displayed, and moves downward. Then, the frame goes out and, as shown in FIG. 54(J), another number pattern (here, "6") is stopped and displayed instead at a position between the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. This will notify you of your loss. On the other hand, when the special number symbol "3" stops at the center position, a jackpot is announced.

FIGS. 54(K) and (L) are examples of effects different from those shown in FIGS. 54(H) to (J). In FIG. 54(K), it is assumed that when the special numeral pattern of the medium decorative pattern 8C reaches the center of the display screen 7a, the random change of the numerals ends while maintaining its movement. However, the special numeral pattern of the medium decorative pattern 8C may always stop moving when it reaches the center of the display screen 7a, and the random change of the numerals may be completed so that one digit is stopped and displayed. In this case, the number that is stopped and displayed is not always "3", but may be "3" or other times. In FIGS. 54(K) and (L), the random change of numbers is stopped at "9" and the loss of "393" is notified.

[Decorative pattern number change production B]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern number change effect B. In the decorative pattern number change production, when a plurality of decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a are lined up along the variable direction and move along the variable direction, at least one of the plurality of decorative patterns changes. This is a performance in which the numbers represented in the design move while changing.

In the decorative pattern number change performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 55(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in high-speed fluctuation on the display screen 7a. Although the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and during low-speed variable display, a plurality of numerical patterns are displayed vertically. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from top to bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrays of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). When the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in high-speed fluctuations as shown in FIG. becomes visible. On the other hand, during low-speed fluctuation display, a plurality of numerical symbols are displayed vertically in a vertically visible manner in the symbol arrangement (design row), like the middle decorative symbol 8C in FIG. In, move downward, and frame out from the lower end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 55(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are decelerated in order, changing from a high-speed fluctuating display to a low-speed fluctuating display, and then are stopped and displayed. Here, both the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at "3" and are in a ready-to-reach state. Here, in the symbol row that is stopped and displayed, only one numerical symbol is displayed, and the display of other consecutive numerical symbols in the upper and lower directions disappears. In addition, at the time of stop display, the display of other numerical symbols may not disappear and may be displayed as they are. On the other hand, the medium decorative pattern 8C maintains a high-speed fluctuation display, and the numerical pattern is difficult to see. When the game is in a ready-to-reach state, an effect is executed in which a number pattern in a special mode (special number pattern), which will be described later, is displayed with a predetermined probability.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55(C), the medium decorative pattern 8C decelerates and changes from a high-speed fluctuating display to a low-speed fluctuating display, and a plurality of vertically arranged numerical symbols become visible in the symbol row. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55(D), while the medium decorative pattern 8C maintains a low-speed fluctuating display, a numerical pattern expressed in a special manner enters the frame. Here, in the special mode number pattern (special number pattern), a number image is displayed relatively small in the center of a rectangular image. An effect in which the numbers represented by the number images change into various numbers at high speed is started. Here, the numbers in the number image change randomly at high speed, but the numbers in the number image may change quickly in the order of "123456789". The color of the special number pattern changes as the numbers in the number image change. Here, a color is determined for each type of number, and the color changes depending on the type of number. Note that the color may change randomly regardless of the change in the number. Further, when the special numeric symbol is moving, the color may not change and it may be displayed in the same color, and when it stops near the center of the display screen 7a, the color may change to another color.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55(E), in the medium decoration pattern 8C, an effect is performed in which all the numeric patterns that are newly framed from the upper end of the display screen 7a are special numeric patterns. All special numerical designs that are newly introduced into the frame enter the frame while the numbers in the numerical image change randomly. Regarding the special number pattern that is newly placed in the frame, the color of the number image changes as well as the number of the number image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 55(F), in the medium decorative pattern 8C, all the number designs included in the pattern row become special number designs, and the special number designs continue to change randomly while the numbers in the number image change rapidly. The frame goes out from the bottom end of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 55(G), the medium decoration pattern 8C continues to display slow fluctuations until the random changes in the numbers represented by the number images of all the displayed special number patterns are completed. One number will be displayed. Here, all the reach symbols "3" are displayed. Here, all the special number symbols always change to "3", which is a ready-to-win symbol, in the case of a ready-to-reach symbol. Then, either one of the special number symbols "3" stops at the center position, or all the special number symbols "3" pass through as they are. The medium decorative pattern 8C continues to display a low-speed fluctuation while all the special number patterns are "3". When all the special number patterns become "3" (when the numbers stop changing), the colors also stop changing. As described above, if a color is determined for each type of number, the color stops changing because the type of number no longer changes. Note that the color change will also stop if the color is changing randomly regardless of the number change. Furthermore, if the color does not change and is displayed in the same color while the number type is changing, the color changes to another color as the number type stops changing. The timing at which the random changes stop all at once in all special numerical symbols is arbitrary. As a result, the player strongly hopes that the special number symbol "3" will be stopped and displayed.

55(H) to (J) are examples in which after FIG. 55(G), the special number symbol "3" passes through as it is, resulting in a loss. As shown in FIG. 55(H), in the medium decorative pattern 8C, while maintaining a low-speed fluctuation display, ordinary numerical symbols that are not special numerical symbols enter the frame in order, and the special numerical symbol "3" stops. Frame out in sequence without stopping in position. Then, as shown in FIG. 55(I), all of the special number symbols "3" go out of frame. As a result, the player feels disappointed, thinking that his or her expectations for winning the jackpot are greatly reduced. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54(J), the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as "1". This will notify you of your loss. On the other hand, when the special number symbol "3" stops at the center position, a jackpot is announced.

FIG. 55(K) is an example in which, after FIG. 55(G), the special number symbol "3" is stopped and displayed at the center position to notify the jackpot. In the medium decorative pattern 8C, one of the special number patterns "3" is stopped and displayed between the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, and a jackpot is notified.

FIG. 55(L) is an example in which, after FIGS. 55(H) to (I), the normal number symbol "3" is stopped and displayed to notify the jackpot. After all the special number symbols "3" were out of frame and disappointed. Thereafter, the normal numeric symbol "3" that has entered the frame is stopped and displayed between the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R, and a jackpot is announced.

[Decorative pattern number change production C]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern number change effect C. In the decorative pattern number change production, when a plurality of decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a are lined up along the variable direction and move along the variable direction, at least one of the plurality of decorative patterns changes. This is a performance in which the numbers represented in the design move while changing.

In the decorative pattern number change performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 56(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in high-speed fluctuation on the display screen 7a. Although the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and during low-speed variable display, a plurality of numeric patterns are displayed vertically. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrays of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). When displaying the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R at a high speed as shown in FIG. becomes visible. On the other hand, during low-speed variable display, a plurality of numerical symbols are vertically lined up and displayed in a visible manner in the symbol arrangement (symbol row), like the medium decorative symbol 8C in FIG. In, move downward, and frame out from the lower end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 56(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are decelerated in order, changing from a high-speed fluctuating display to a low-speed fluctuating display, and then are stopped and displayed. Here, both the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at "3" and are in a ready-to-reach state. Here, in the symbol row that is stopped and displayed, only one numerical symbol is displayed, and the display of other consecutive numerical symbols in the upper and lower directions disappears. In addition, at the time of stop display, the display of other numerical symbols may not disappear and may be displayed as they are. On the other hand, the medium decorative pattern 8C maintains a high-speed fluctuation display, and the numerical pattern is difficult to see. When the game is in a ready-to-reach state, an effect is executed in which a number pattern in a special mode (special number pattern), which will be described later, is displayed with a predetermined probability.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(C), the medium decorative pattern 8C decelerates and changes from a high-speed fluctuating display to a low-speed fluctuating display, and a plurality of vertically arranged numerical symbols become visible in the symbol row. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(D), while the medium decorative pattern 8C maintains a low-speed fluctuating display, a numerical pattern expressed in a special manner enters the frame. Here, in the special mode number pattern (special number pattern), a number image is displayed relatively small in the center of a rectangular image. The number represented by the number image starts to change into various numbers at high speed. Here, the numbers in the number image change very quickly, either randomly or sequentially, so multiple numbers are displayed overlapping each other. Special number patterns change color. Here, the color does not change and is displayed in the same color until the special number pattern moves and reaches near the center of the display screen 7a, and when it reaches near the center of the display screen 7a, the color changes to another color. . No, the color may change randomly regardless of the position of the special digit image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 56(E), in the medium decorative pattern 8C, the special numeric pattern in which the numbers in the numeric image randomly change at high speed moves downward while maintaining the low-speed fluctuation display. When reaching the center of the display screen 7a, the random change of numbers ends and one number is displayed while the movement is maintained. Also, the color changes. Here, in the case of a reach, the number change is always stopped with the reach symbol "3" being displayed. Then, an effect is executed in which the special number symbol "3" passes.

After the special number pattern "3" goes out of frame, the medium decoration pattern 8C starts to display a high-speed fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 56(F). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(H), a battle performance is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 56(I), if you win in the battle performance, the medium decorative pattern 8C will appear with the number "3" stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 56(J), and a jackpot will be announced. Ru. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 56(K), if you lose in the battle performance, the medium decorative pattern 8C will appear with the number "6" stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 56(L), and you will be notified of your loss. Ru.

[Effect example]
An example of the effects of the decorative pattern number change effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54 to 56, it is possible to execute an effect in which a plurality of decorative symbols are lined up in the variable direction and move along the variable direction. The decorative patterns move while the numbers represented in at least one of the plurality of decorative patterns change (for example, Figs. 54(C) to (I), Figs. 55(D) to (H)). , FIGS. 56(D) to (F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54 to 56, in the above performance, the plurality of decorative symbols move while the number represented in at least one of the plurality of decorative symbols changes. After that, the numbers stop changing (for example, FIGS. 54(C) to (I), FIGS. 55(D) to (H), and FIGS. 56(D) to (F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54 to 56, in the above production, the plurality of decorative patterns are displayed while the number represented in at least one of the plurality of decorative patterns changes. 54(C) to (I), FIG. 55(D) to (H), and FIG. 56(D) to (F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54 to 56, in the above production, the decorative symbols whose numbers have stopped changing are out of frame while the numbers have stopped changing. (For example, FIGS. 54(G) to (I), FIGS. 55(G) to (H), and FIGS. 56(D) to (F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54 to 56, in the above production, the color of the number represented in at least one of the plurality of decorative patterns changes. (For example, FIGS. 54(C) to (I), FIGS. 55(D) to (H), and FIGS. 56(D) to (F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, the above-mentioned performance is executed when the decorative symbol is in the ready-to-win state. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the decorative pattern number change effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
The configurations of decorative pattern number change effects A to C may be combined as appropriate. For example, the decorative symbol number change performances A to C may be performed randomly, or a plurality of the decorative symbol number change performances A to C may be performed during one variation.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative pattern number change performances A to C, the type of the number is changed by switching the number of the special number pattern to another number. However, the numbers of the special number design may become other types of numbers by changing their form.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative pattern number change performances A to C, the numbers represented by the special numerical patterns are the numbers that constitute a jackpot when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are aligned. However, the changing numbers may be numbers that do not result in a jackpot when they match. That is, the numeric symbols whose numbers change may be configured to always pass through without being stopped and displayed.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
It is possible to perform an effect in which a plurality of the decorative patterns are arranged in the fluctuation direction and move along the fluctuation direction,
In the production, the plurality of decorative patterns move while the number represented in at least one of the plurality of decorative patterns changes.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1,
The gaming machine according to claim 1,
In the performance, the plurality of decorative patterns move while changing the number represented by at least one of the plurality of decorative patterns, and then the number stops changing.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1 or aspect A2-2,
In the production, the plurality of decorative patterns are framed in the display means while the number represented in at least one of the plurality of decorative patterns changes.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1 or aspect A2-2,
In the production, in the plurality of decorative patterns, the decorative pattern in which the number has stopped changing is framed out while maintaining the state in which the number has stopped changing.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1 or aspect A2-2,
In the performance, the color of the number represented in at least one of the plurality of decorative patterns changes.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1 or aspect A2-2,
The performance is executed when the decorative pattern is in a ready-to-reach state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Decorative symbol number image number change effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 57 to 59. This decorative pattern numeric image number change performance is executed during the decorative pattern variation performance. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to change the number of decorative symbols, numbers, and images, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of 7 and the sub display screen 64.

[Decorative design number image number change effect A]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern number image number change effect A. The decorative pattern numeric image number change effect is a presentation in which the number of numeric images represented (included) in one decorative pattern changes. 57(A) to (G) show the first example of the decorative pattern number image number change effect A, and FIGS. 57(H) to (L) show the second example of the decorative pattern number image number change effect A. An example is shown.

In the first example of the decorative pattern number image number change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 57(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in high-speed fluctuations on the display screen 7a. Although the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and during low-speed variable display, a plurality of numeric patterns are displayed vertically. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" (in ascending order) from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrays of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). When displaying the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R at a high speed as shown in FIG. becomes visible. On the other hand, during low-speed variable display, like the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. In, move downward, and frame out from the lower end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 57(B), the left decorative pattern 8L of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R decelerates and changes from a high-speed fluctuation display to a low-speed fluctuation display, and in the symbol row, a plurality of vertically arranged number symbols becomes visible. On the other hand, for the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, the high-speed fluctuation display is maintained, and the numerical patterns are difficult to see.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57(C), the right decorative pattern 8R decelerates and changes from a high-speed fluctuation display to a low-speed fluctuation display, and a plurality of vertically arranged number symbols become visible in the symbol row. The medium decorative pattern 8C maintains a high-speed fluctuating display, and the numerical pattern is difficult to see. In this state, a decorative pattern number image number change effect is performed. When this performance is performed, the expectation of winning is higher than when it is not performed. In the left decorative pattern 8L, the mode of all displayed numerical symbols changes (to special numerical symbols) while maintaining a low-speed fluctuation display. Specifically, in each number pattern, the number of number images represented in one number pattern changes. Here, the number of number images represented in one number pattern is the same as the number represented in the number pattern. For example, if the number image represented by a number pattern is "7", seven number images of "7" are displayed on one number pattern. In Figure 57(C), the number pattern for "7" is represented by seven number images of "7" (consisting of one upper row, three middle rows, and three lower rows), and the number pattern for "8" is represented by seven number images of "7". Eight number images of "8" are represented (consisting of two upper rows, three middle rows, and three lower rows), and the number image of "9" is represented by nine number images of "9" (three upper rows, three middle rows). 3, consisting of 3 in the lower row). The colors of the plurality of number images represented by one number pattern may be different from each other, or may all be the same color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57(D), the left decorative pattern 8L displays a plurality of special numeric patterns each composed of the same number of numeric images as the digits it represents, while maintaining the slow fluctuation display. After moving downward, it is stopped and displayed as a special number symbol. Here, in the stopped and displayed symbol row (left decorative symbol 8L), three numerical symbols (special numerical symbols) are displayed along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction), and other consecutive numerical symbols (special numerical symbols) are displayed above and below. The display of numeric symbols) disappears. That is, here, only the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the three positions of the upper, middle, and lower rows (here, the upper row is "5↓↓", the middle row is "6↓↓", and the lower row is "7↓↓"). . In addition, at the time of a stop display, the display of the other numerical symbols of the three numerical symbols in the symbol row of the left decorative symbols 8L may be displayed without disappearing.

Following the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R changes the mode of all displayed numerical symbols (to special numerical symbols) while maintaining a low-speed fluctuation display. Specifically, in each number pattern, the number of number images represented in one number pattern changes. Here, the number of number images represented in one number pattern is the same as the number represented in the number pattern. In FIG. 57(D), one number image of "1" is represented in the number pattern "1", two number images of "2" are shown in the number pattern "2", and two number images of "2" are shown in the number pattern "2". The number pattern shows three images of the number "3". The medium decorative pattern 8C is decelerated and changes from a high-speed fluctuating display to a low-speed fluctuating display, and a plurality of vertically arranged number symbols become visible in the symbol row.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57(E), the right decorative pattern 8R displays a plurality of special numeric patterns each composed of the same number of numeric images as the digits it represents, while maintaining the slow fluctuation display. After moving downward, it is stopped and displayed as a special number symbol. Here, in the stopped and displayed symbol row (right decorative symbol 8R), three numerical symbols (special numerical symbols) are displayed along the fluctuation direction (up and down direction), and other consecutive numerical symbols (special numerical symbols) are displayed above and below. The display of numeric symbols) disappears. That is, here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped at three positions: the upper row, the middle row, and the lower row (here, the upper row "5↓5", the middle row "6↓6", and the lower row "7↓7"). ”). In addition, at the time of the stop display, the display of the other numerical symbols of the three numerical symbols in each symbol row of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R may be displayed without disappearing.

Following the right decorative pattern 8R, the medium decorative pattern 8C changes the mode of all displayed numerical symbols (to special numerical symbols) while maintaining a low-speed fluctuating display. Specifically, in each number pattern, the number of number images represented in one number pattern changes. Here, the number of number images represented in one number pattern is the same as the number represented in the number pattern. In FIG. 57(E), the number symbol "5" has five number images of "5", the number symbol "6" has six number images of "6", and the number symbol "7" has five number images of "5". Seven number images of "7" are represented in the number pattern.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57(F), the medium decorative pattern 8C displays a plurality of special numeric patterns each composed of the same number of numeric images as the digits it represents, while maintaining the slow fluctuation display. After moving downward, it is stopped and displayed as a special number symbol. Here, in the stopped display pattern row (medium decorative pattern 8C), three number patterns (special number patterns) are displayed along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction), and other number patterns (special number patterns) that are continuous above and below are displayed. The display of numeric symbols) disappears. That is, here, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped at three positions: the upper row, the middle row, and the lower row (here, the upper row is "555", the middle row is "666", and the lower row is "767"). ). In other words, all rows are winning symbols. After that, as shown in Figure 57 (G), one of the three winning symbols, "666", changes to its original form (usually to a numerical symbol), and the remaining two winning symbols, "555" and " 777" disappears.

In the second example of decorative symbol number image number change effect A, after FIG. 57(A) and FIG. 57(B) are executed, FIG. 57(H) is executed. In FIG. 57(H), the left decorative pattern 8L maintains a low-speed fluctuating display and then is stopped and displayed without changing to a special number pattern. Here, in the stopped and displayed symbol row (left decorative symbol 8L), three numerical symbols (special numerical symbols) are displayed along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction), and other consecutive numerical symbols (special numerical symbols) are displayed above and below. The display of numeric symbols) disappears. That is, here, only the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the three positions of the upper, middle, and lower rows (here, the upper row is "5↓↓", the middle row is "6↓↓", and the lower row is "7↓↓"). . In addition, at the time of a stop display, the display of the other numerical symbols of the three numerical symbols in the symbol row of the left decorative symbols 8L may be displayed without disappearing. The right decorative pattern 8R is decelerated and changes from a high-speed fluctuating display to a low-speed fluctuating display, and a plurality of vertically arranged number symbols become visible in the symbol row. The medium decorative pattern 8C maintains a high-speed fluctuation display, and the numerical pattern is difficult to see.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57(I), an effect of changing the number of decorative symbol numeric images is performed. When this performance is performed, the expectation of winning is higher than when it is not performed. After the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed, the mode of all the number patterns that are stopped and displayed changes (to special number patterns). Specifically, in each number pattern, the number of number images represented in one number pattern changes. Here, the number of number images represented in one number pattern is the same as the number represented in the number pattern. For example, if the number image represented by a number pattern is "7", seven number images of "7" are displayed on one number pattern. In Fig. 57(I), the number image of "5" is represented by five number images of "5" (consisting of one upper row, two middle rows, and two lower rows), and the number pattern of "6" is represented by five number images of "5". Six number images of "6" are represented (consisting of two upper rows, two middle rows, and two lower rows), and the number image of "7" is represented by seven number images of "7" (one upper row, two middle rows). 3, consisting of 3 in the lower row). The colors of the plurality of number images represented by one number pattern may be different from each other, or may all be the same color. The right decorative pattern 8R maintains a low-speed fluctuating display and then is stopped and displayed as it is without changing to a special number pattern. Here, in the stopped and displayed symbol row (right decorative symbol 8R), three numerical symbols (special numerical symbols) are displayed along the fluctuation direction (up and down direction), and other consecutive numerical symbols (special numerical symbols) are displayed above and below. The display of numeric symbols) disappears. That is, here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped at three positions: the upper row, the middle row, and the lower row (here, the upper row "5↓5", the middle row "6↓6", and the lower row "7↓7"). ”). The medium decorative pattern 8C is decelerated and changes from a high-speed fluctuating display to a low-speed fluctuating display, and a plurality of vertically arranged number symbols become visible in the symbol row.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57(J), after the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed, the mode of all the number patterns that are stopped and displayed changes (to special number patterns). Specifically, in each number pattern, the number of number images represented in one number pattern changes. Here, the number of number images represented in one number pattern is the same as the number represented in the number pattern. In Figure 57 (J), the number image of "5" is represented by five number images of "5" (consisting of one upper row, two middle rows, and two lower rows), and the number pattern of "6" is represented by five number images of "5". Six number images of "6" are represented (consisting of two upper rows, two middle rows, and two lower rows), and the number image of "7" is represented by seven number images of "7" (one upper row, two middle rows). 3, consisting of 3 in the lower row). After maintaining the low-speed fluctuating display, the medium decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as it is without changing to the special numeric pattern. Here, in the stopped display pattern row (medium decorative pattern 8C), three number patterns (special number patterns) are displayed along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction), and other number patterns (special number patterns) that are continuous above and below are displayed. The display of numeric symbols) disappears. That is, here, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped at three positions: the upper row, the middle row, and the lower row (here, the upper row is "575", the middle row is "686", and the lower row is "797"). ).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57(K), after the medium decoration pattern 8C is stopped and displayed, the mode of all the number patterns that are stopped and displayed changes (to special number patterns). Specifically, in each number pattern, the number of number images represented in one number pattern changes. Here, the number of number images represented in one number pattern is the same as the number represented in the number pattern. In Figure 57 (K), the number pattern for "7" has seven number images of "7" (consisting of one upper row, three middle rows, and three lower rows), and the number pattern for "8" Eight number images of "8" are represented (consisting of two upper rows, three middle rows, and three lower rows), and the number image of "9" is represented by nine number images of "9" (three upper rows, three middle rows). 3, consisting of 3 in the lower row). After that, as shown in FIG. 57(L), one of the three losing symbols, the winning symbol "686", changes to its original form (usually to a numerical symbol), and the remaining two winning symbols, "575" and " 797" disappears.

[Decorative design number image number change effect B]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern number image number change effect B. The decorative pattern numeric image number change effect is a presentation in which the number of numeric images represented (included) in one decorative pattern changes. 58(A) to (F) show the first example of the decorative pattern number image number change effect B, and FIGS. 58(G) to (J) show the second example of the decorative pattern number image number change effect B. As an example, FIGS. 58(K) and 58(L) show a modification of the decorative pattern number image number change effect B.

In the first example of the decorative pattern number image number change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 58(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in high-speed fluctuation on the display screen 7a. Although the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and during low-speed variable display, a plurality of numeric patterns are displayed vertically. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" (in ascending order) from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrays of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). When displaying the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R at a high speed as shown in FIG. becomes visible. On the other hand, during low-speed variable display, a plurality of number symbols are vertically lined up and displayed in a visible manner in the symbol arrangement (symbol row), like the right decorative symbol 8R in FIG. In, move downward, and frame out from the lower end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 58(B), the left decorative pattern 8L of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is decelerated, changes from a high-speed fluctuating display to a low-speed fluctuating display, and is stopped and displayed without changing its mode. Here, in the stopped and displayed symbol row (left decorative symbol 8L), three numerical symbols (special numerical symbols) are displayed along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction), and other consecutive numerical symbols (special numerical symbols) are displayed above and below. The display of numeric symbols) disappears. That is, here, only the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the three positions of the upper, middle, and lower rows (here, the upper row is "5↓↓", the middle row is "6↓↓", and the lower row is "7↓↓"). . In addition, at the time of a stop display, the display of the other numerical symbols of the three numerical symbols in the symbol row of the left decorative symbols 8L may be displayed without disappearing. On the other hand, for the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, the high-speed fluctuation display is maintained, and the numerical patterns are difficult to see.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58(C), an effect of changing the number of decorative symbol numeric images is performed. When this performance is performed, the expectation of winning is higher than when it is not performed. Here, this is performed in the middle row of the symbols that are stopped and displayed. After the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed, the mode of one of the number patterns stopped and displayed changes (to a special number pattern). Specifically, in the middle number pattern, the number of number images represented in the number pattern changes. Here, the number of number images represented in one number pattern is the same as the number represented in the number pattern. The numeral pattern "6" in the middle row shows six numeral images of "6" (consisting of two upper rows, two middle rows, and two lower rows). The colors of the plurality of number images represented in one number pattern may be different from each other, or may all be the same color. The numerical patterns representing "5" in the upper row and "7" in the lower row do not change in appearance. On the other hand, the right decorative pattern 8R decelerates and changes from a high-speed fluctuating display to a low-speed fluctuating display, and a plurality of vertically arranged number symbols become visible in the symbol row. The medium decorative pattern 8C maintains a high-speed fluctuating display, and the numerical pattern is difficult to see.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58(D), the right decorative pattern 8R decelerates and changes from a high-speed fluctuating display to a low-speed fluctuating display, and is stopped and displayed without changing its appearance. Here, in the stopped and displayed symbol row (right decorative symbol 8R), three numerical symbols (special numerical symbols) are displayed along the fluctuation direction (up and down direction), and other consecutive numerical symbols (special numerical symbols) are displayed above and below. The display of numeric symbols) disappears. That is, here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped at three positions: the upper row, the middle row, and the lower row (here, the upper row "5↓5", the middle row "6↓6", and the lower row "7↓7"). ”). In addition, at the time of stop display, the display of the other numeric symbols of the three numeric symbols in the symbol row of the right decorative pattern 8R may be displayed without disappearing. On the other hand, the medium decorative pattern 8C is decelerated and changes from a high-speed fluctuating display to a low-speed fluctuating display, and a plurality of vertically arranged number symbols become visible in the symbol row.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58(E), the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed, and then the mode of one of the number patterns that are stopped and displayed changes (to a special number pattern). Specifically, in the middle number pattern, the number of number images represented in the number pattern changes. Here, the number of number images represented in one number pattern is the same as the number represented in the number pattern. The numeral pattern "6" in the middle row shows six numeral images of "6" (consisting of two upper rows, two middle rows, and two lower rows). The numerical patterns representing "5" in the upper row and "7" in the lower row do not change in appearance. On the other hand, the medium decorative pattern 8C is decelerated, changes from a high-speed fluctuating display to a low-speed fluctuating display, and is stopped and displayed without changing its appearance. Here, in the stopped display pattern row (medium decorative pattern 8C), three number patterns (special number patterns) are displayed along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction), and other number patterns (special number patterns) that are continuous above and below are displayed. The display of numeric symbols) disappears. That is, here, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped at three positions: the upper row, the middle row, and the lower row (here, the upper row is "525", the middle row is "636", and the lower row is "747"). ). In addition, at the time of stop display, the display of the other numeric symbols of the three numeric symbols in the pattern row of the medium decorative pattern 8C may be displayed without disappearing.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58(F), after the medium decoration pattern 8C is stopped and displayed, the mode of one of the number patterns stopped and displayed changes (to a special number pattern). Specifically, in the middle number pattern, the number of number images represented in the number pattern changes. Here, the number of number images represented in one number pattern is the same as the number represented in the number pattern. In the number pattern "3" in the middle row, three number images of "3" are represented (consisting of one upper row and two lower rows). The numerical patterns representing "2" in the upper row and "4" in the lower row do not change in appearance. As a result, the upper row "525", the middle row "636", and the lower row "747" all fail and are fixedly stopped.

In the second example of the decorative pattern number image number change effect B, after FIG. 58(A) and FIG. 58(B) are executed, FIG. 58(G) is executed. In FIG. 58(G), a decorative pattern number image number change effect is performed. When this performance is performed, the expectation of winning is higher than when it is not performed. Here, this is performed at the upper, middle, and lower rows of the symbols that are stopped and displayed. After the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed, the mode of all the number patterns that are stopped and displayed changes (to special number patterns). Specifically, in the upper, middle, and lower tier numeric symbols, the number of numeric images represented in the numeric symbols changes. Here, the number of number images represented in one number pattern is two. "567" in the upper, middle, and lower rows of the left decorative pattern 8L each represent two numeric images in one numeric pattern. This suggests that there is a high expectation of winning in the upper, middle, and lower rows. The colors of the plurality of number images represented by one number pattern may be different from each other, or may all be the same color. On the other hand, the right decorative pattern 8R decelerates and changes from a high-speed fluctuating display to a low-speed fluctuating display, and a plurality of vertically arranged number symbols become visible in the symbol row. The medium decorative pattern 8C maintains a high-speed fluctuating display, and the numerical pattern is difficult to see.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58(H), the right decorative pattern 8R decelerates and changes from a high-speed fluctuating display to a low-speed fluctuating display, and is stopped and displayed without changing its appearance. Here, in the stopped and displayed symbol row (right decorative symbol 8R), three numerical symbols (special numerical symbols) are displayed along the fluctuation direction (up and down direction), and other consecutive numerical symbols (special numerical symbols) are displayed above and below. The display of numeric symbols) disappears. That is, here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped at three positions: the upper row, the middle row, and the lower row (here, the upper row "5↓5", the middle row "6↓6", and the lower row "7↓7"). ”). In addition, at the time of stop display, the display of the other numeric symbols of the three numeric symbols in the symbol row of the right decorative pattern 8R may be displayed without disappearing. On the other hand, the medium decorative pattern 8C is decelerated and changes from a high-speed fluctuating display to a low-speed fluctuating display, and a plurality of vertically arranged number symbols become visible in the symbol row.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58(I), after the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed, the mode of all the number patterns that are stopped and displayed changes (to special number patterns). Specifically, in the upper, middle, and lower row number symbols, the number of number images represented in the number symbols changes. Here, the number of number images represented in one number pattern is two. "567" in the upper, middle, and lower rows of the right decorative pattern 8R each represent two number images in one number pattern. On the other hand, the medium decorative pattern 8C is decelerated, changes from a high-speed fluctuating display to a low-speed fluctuating display, and is stopped and displayed without changing its appearance. Here, in the stopped display pattern row (medium decorative pattern 8C), three number patterns (special number patterns) are displayed along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction), and other number patterns (special number patterns) that are continuous above and below are displayed. The display of numeric symbols) disappears. That is, here, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped at three positions: the upper row, the middle row, and the lower row (here, the upper row is "525", the middle row is "636", and the lower row is "747"). ). In addition, at the time of stop display, the display of the other numeric symbols of the three numeric symbols in the pattern row of the medium decorative pattern 8C may be displayed without disappearing.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58(J), after the medium decoration pattern 8C is stopped and displayed, the mode of all the number patterns that are stopped and displayed changes (to special number patterns). Specifically, in the upper, middle, and lower tier numeric symbols, the number of numeric images represented in the numeric symbols changes. Here, the number of number images represented in one number pattern is two. "234" in the upper, middle, and lower rows of the medium decorative pattern 8C each represent two number images in one number pattern. As a result, the upper stage "525", the middle stage "636", and the lower stage "747" are all lost and are determined to stop.

FIG. 58(K) shows a modification of the decorative pattern number image number change effect B. The mode of the decorative pattern number image number change effect is not limited to those shown in FIGS. 58(A) to 58(J). As a form of the special number pattern, for example, as shown in FIG. 58(K), two number images may be represented in one number pattern, and the sizes of the two number images may be different from each other. Further, as shown in FIG. 58(L), two number images may be displayed on one number pattern, and the two number images may have different sizes and may be displayed overlapping each other.

[Decorative design number image number change production C]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern number image number change effect C. The decorative pattern numeric image number change effect is a presentation in which the number of numeric images represented (included) in one decorative pattern changes. 59(A) to (F) show the first example of the decorative pattern number image number change effect C, and FIGS. 59(G) to (K) show the second example of the decorative pattern number image number change effect C. As an example, FIG. 59(L) shows a modification of the decorative pattern number image number change effect C.

In the first example of the decorative pattern number image number change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 59(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in high-speed fluctuations on the display screen 7a. Although the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and during low-speed variable display, a plurality of numeric patterns are displayed vertically. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrays of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). When the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in high-speed fluctuations as shown in FIG. becomes visible. On the other hand, during low-speed variable display, a plurality of number symbols are vertically lined up and visually recognized in the symbol arrangement (symbol row), like the right decorative symbol 8R in FIG. In, move downward, and frame out from the lower end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 59(B), the left decorative pattern 8L of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is decelerated and changes from a high-speed fluctuating display to a low-speed fluctuating display, and is stopped and displayed without changing its appearance. Here, in the stopped and displayed symbol row (left decorative symbol 8L), three numerical symbols (special numerical symbols) are displayed along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction), and other consecutive numerical symbols (special numerical symbols) are displayed above and below. The display of numeric symbols) disappears. That is, here, only the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the three positions of the upper, middle, and lower rows (here, the upper row is "5↓↓", the middle row is "6↓↓", and the lower row is "7↓↓"). . In addition, at the time of a stop display, the display of the other numerical symbols of the three numerical symbols in the symbol row of the left decorative symbols 8L may be displayed without disappearing. On the other hand, for the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, the high-speed fluctuation display is maintained, and the numerical patterns are difficult to see.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59(C), an effect of changing the number of decorative symbol numeric images is performed. When this performance is performed, the expectation of winning is higher than when it is not performed. Here, this is performed at the upper, middle, and lower rows of the symbols that are stopped and displayed. After the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed, the mode of all the number patterns that are stopped and displayed changes (to special number patterns). Specifically, in the upper, middle, and lower row number patterns, the number of number images represented in the number patterns and the numbers themselves change. Here, the number of number images represented in one number pattern is two. Also, two types of numbers are represented, each of which is different from the other (in this case, consecutive numbers). In the upper row of the left decorative pattern 8L, the number "5" becomes a number pattern including two number images "5" and "4". In the middle row of the left decorative pattern 8L, the number "6" becomes a number pattern including two number images "6" and "5". In the lower row of the left decorative pattern 8L, the number "7" becomes a number pattern including two number images "7" and "8". This suggests that there is a high expectation of winning in the upper, middle, and lower rows. The colors of the plurality of number images represented in one number pattern may be different from each other, or may all be the same color. On the other hand, the right decorative pattern 8R decelerates and changes from a high-speed fluctuating display to a low-speed fluctuating display, and a plurality of vertically arranged number symbols become visible in the symbol row. The medium decorative pattern 8C maintains a high-speed fluctuating display, and the numerical pattern is difficult to see.

Thereafter, the right decorative pattern 8R decelerates and changes from a high-speed fluctuating display to a low-speed fluctuating display, and is stopped and displayed without changing its appearance. Here, in the stopped and displayed symbol row (right decorative symbol 8R), three numerical symbols (special numerical symbols) are displayed along the fluctuation direction (up and down direction), and other consecutive numerical symbols (special numerical symbols) are displayed above and below. The display of numeric symbols) disappears. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59(D), after the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed, the mode of all the number patterns that are stopped and displayed changes (to special number patterns). Specifically, in the upper, middle, and lower row number symbols, the number of number images represented in the number symbols and the numbers themselves change. Here, the number of number images represented in one number pattern is two. Also, two types of numbers are represented, each of which is different from the other (in this case, consecutive numbers). In the upper row of the right decorative pattern 8R, the number "5" becomes a number pattern including two number images "5" and "4". In the middle row of the right decorative pattern 8R, the number "6" becomes a number pattern including two number images "6" and "5". In the lower row of the right decorative pattern 8R, the number "7" becomes a number pattern including two number images "7" and "8". As a result, "5↓5" and "4↓4" are reach in the upper row, "5↓5" and "6↓6" are reach in the middle row, and "7↓7" and "8↓8" in the lower row. It is a reach, indicating that there is a high expectation of winning. On the other hand, the medium decorative pattern 8C is decelerated and changes from a high-speed fluctuating display to a low-speed fluctuating display, and a plurality of vertically arranged number symbols become visible in the symbol row.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59(E), the medium decorative pattern 8C is decelerated, changes from a high-speed fluctuating display to a low-speed fluctuating display, and is stopped and displayed without changing its appearance. Here, in the stopped display pattern row (medium decorative pattern 8C), three number patterns (special number patterns) are displayed along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction), and other number patterns (special number patterns) that are continuous above and below are displayed. The display of numeric symbols) disappears. That is, here, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped at three positions: upper, middle, and lower. In the upper row, the numbers are "545" and "444", which include jackpot symbols. The middle row is ``555'' and ``656,'' which include jackpot symbols. In the lower row, "767" and "868" are both losing symbols.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59(F), the winning symbols in the upper and middle rows are displayed. Specifically, "444" in the upper row and "555" in the middle row are displayed, and then only one of them is displayed to notify the type of jackpot.

In the second example of the decorative pattern number image number change effect C, after FIG. 59(A) and FIG. 59(B) are executed, FIG. 59(G) is executed. In FIG. 59(G), a decorative pattern number image number change effect is performed. When this performance is performed, the expectation of winning is higher than when it is not performed. Here, this is performed in the middle row of the symbols that are stopped and displayed. After the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed, the mode of the number pattern in the middle row that is stopped and displayed changes (to a special number pattern). Specifically, in the middle number pattern, the number of number images represented in the number pattern and the number itself change. Here, the number of number images represented in one number pattern is two. Also, two types of numbers are represented, each of which is different from the other (in this case, consecutive numbers). In the middle row of the left decorative pattern 8L, the number "6" becomes a number pattern including two number images "6" and "5". Furthermore, the number images "6" and "5" in the middle row each move (rotate) in a circular manner, changing their positions with respect to each other. The colors of the plurality of number images represented by one number pattern may be different from each other, or may all be the same color. This suggests that the expectation of winning is high. On the other hand, the right decorative pattern 8R decelerates and changes from a high-speed fluctuating display to a low-speed fluctuating display, and a plurality of vertically arranged number symbols become visible in the symbol row. The medium decorative pattern 8C maintains a high-speed fluctuating display, and the numerical pattern is difficult to see.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59(H), the right decorative pattern 8R decelerates and changes from a high-speed fluctuating display to a low-speed fluctuating display, and is stopped and displayed without changing its appearance. Here, in the stopped and displayed symbol row (right decorative symbol 8R), three numerical symbols (special numerical symbols) are displayed along the fluctuation direction (up and down direction), and other consecutive numerical symbols (special numerical symbols) are displayed above and below. The display of numeric symbols) disappears. The medium decorative pattern 8C is decelerated and changes from a high-speed fluctuating display to a low-speed fluctuating display, and a plurality of vertically arranged number symbols become visible in the symbol row.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59(I), the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed, and then the mode of the number pattern in the middle row that is stopped and displayed changes (to a special number pattern). Specifically, in the middle number pattern, the number of number images represented in the number pattern and the number itself change. Here, the number of number images represented in one number pattern is two. Also, two types of numbers are represented, each of which is different from the other (in this case, consecutive numbers). In the middle row of the right decorative pattern 8R, the number "6" becomes a number pattern including two number images "6" and "5". Furthermore, the number images "6" and "5" in the middle row each move (rotate) in a circular manner, changing their positions with respect to each other. On the other hand, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the number itself represented in the numeric pattern further changes in the special numeric pattern in the middle row. Here, "6" and "5" are switched to "6" and "7". The medium decorative pattern 8C decelerates and changes from a high-speed fluctuating display to a low-speed fluctuating display, and is stopped and displayed without changing its appearance. Here, in the stopped display pattern row (medium decorative pattern 8C), three number patterns (special number patterns) are displayed along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction), and other number patterns (special number patterns) that are continuous above and below are displayed. The display of numeric symbols) disappears.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59(J), the middle decoration pattern 8C is stopped and displayed, and then the mode of the number pattern in the middle row that is stopped and displayed changes (to a special number pattern). Specifically, in the middle number pattern, the number of number images represented in the number pattern and the number itself change. Here, the number of number images represented in one number pattern is two. Also, two types of numbers are represented, each of which is different from the other (in this case, consecutive numbers). In the middle row of the medium decorative pattern 8C, the number "3" becomes a number pattern including two number images "2" and "3". Furthermore, the number images "2" and "3" in the middle row each move (rotate) in a circular manner, changing their positions with respect to each other. On the other hand, in the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, in the special numeric pattern in the middle row of each, the number itself represented in the numeric pattern further changes. In the middle row of the left decorative pattern 8L, "6" and "7" are switched to "7" and "8". In the middle row of the right decorative pattern 8R, "5" and "6" are switched to "6" and "7". As a result, "525" is a losing symbol in the upper row, "8 or 7, 2 or 3, 7 or 6" in the middle row is a losing symbol in any combination, and "747" is a losing symbol in the lower row. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59(K), "836" in the middle row is stopped and displayed in a normal manner, and the display of other symbols disappears.

FIG. 59(L) shows a modification of the decorative pattern number image number change effect C. The mode of the decorative pattern number image number change effect is not limited to those shown in FIGS. 59(C) to (J). For example, as shown in FIG. 59(L), the special number pattern may have three number images represented by one number pattern, and the types of numbers represented by the three number images may be different from each other.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decorative pattern number image number change effect will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 to 59, it is possible to perform an effect in which the number of number images represented in one decorative pattern changes. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 to 59, in the above production, the number of number images represented on one decorative pattern before the decorative pattern stops moving and after the decorative pattern stops moving. changes (for example, FIGS. 57(H) to (K), FIGS. 58(B) to (L), and FIGS. 59(B) to (K)). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, in the above effect, when a plurality of number images are displayed on one decorative pattern, the numerical values represented by the plurality of number images are the same ( For example, FIGS. 57(C) to (K), FIGS. 58(C) to (L)). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 to 59, in the above effect, when a plurality of number images are displayed on one decorative pattern, even if the plurality of number images are different in color from each other. good. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 to 59, in the above-mentioned production, a symbol row in which a plurality of decorative symbols are lined up along the fluctuation direction is displayed, and all the decorative symbols included in the symbol row are displayed. , the number of number images represented in one decorative pattern changes (for example, FIG. 57, FIGS. 58(G) to (L), and FIGS. 59(C) to (E)). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, in the above production, the number of number images represented in one decorative pattern changes in all the decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a. (Fig. 57(F)(K), Fig. 58(J) to (L)). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the effect of changing the number of decorative design numbers and images will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative pattern number image number change effects A to C, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in three stages: upper, middle, and lower. However, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may be configured such that only one row is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the decorative pattern number image number changing effects A to C, the decorative pattern number image number changing effect is performed for all of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. However, there may be a symbol sequence that is executed in at least one of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and in which the decorative symbol number image number change effect is not performed. In this case, for example, it may be configured such that the higher the number of symbol rows in which the decorative symbol number image number change effect is performed, the higher the expectation of winning.

[Modification 2]
In decorative pattern numeric image number change performance B, in FIG. 58(C), the mode of one numeric pattern (middle row) of the numeric patterns that are stopped and displayed is changed (to a special numeric pattern). However, the mode of two or more of the number symbols that are stopped and displayed may change (to special number symbols). Further, the number pattern that changes to the special number pattern is not limited to the middle row, but may be at least one of the upper row or the lower row.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative pattern number image number change effects A to C, the colors of the plurality of number images represented by one number pattern may be different from each other, or may all be the same color. Moreover, at least one of the plurality of number images represented by one number pattern may represent a decorative number instead of a number that constitutes a jackpot when all the numbers are aligned.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A3-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
It is possible to perform an effect in which the number of numerical images represented in one decorative pattern changes;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1,
In the production, the number of number images represented on one decorative pattern changes before the decorative pattern stops moving and after the decorative pattern stops moving.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-2,
In the production, when a plurality of number images are displayed on one of the decorative patterns, the numerical values represented by the plurality of number images are the same.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-3,
In the production, when a plurality of number images are displayed on one of the decorative patterns, the plurality of number images have different colors from each other.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-4,
In the production, a symbol row in which a plurality of decorative symbols are arranged along a variation direction is displayed, and in all the decorative symbols included in the symbol array, the number of number images represented in one decorative symbol is Change,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-5,
In the production, the number of number images represented in one decorative pattern changes among all the decorative patterns displayed on the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The fluctuation direction change effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 60 to 62. These fluctuation direction change performances A to C are executed during the fluctuation performance of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the first movable accessory interlocking effects A to C, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Fluctuating direction change effect A]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the variation direction change effect A. Fluctuation direction change production A is such that when a specific image YK is displayed during a variation production in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change, the variation direction of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R changes, and the specific image YK is recognized. When this becomes impossible, the direction of variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R returns to the original direction. It is assumed that the direction of variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the normal mode is the direction D1, and they are displayed moving linearly.

In the variable display, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the special symbol is created by the variable display of one set of symbols. It represents a variable display (special pattern variation), and announces the special pattern lottery result by stopping display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and at the time of deceleration fluctuation, two or more patterns become visible at the same time on the display screen 7a. They are displayed moving vertically. Furthermore, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed in such a way that they are difficult to visually recognize. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

First, as shown in FIG. 60(A), a fluctuating effect is started, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, making it difficult to see the contents of each. Although the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R at this time are displayed moving linearly, with the direction of variation always being the direction D1 from when each decorative pattern enters the frame until it goes out of the frame. It is assumed that the result of the special drawing lottery that triggered this variable performance was a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(B), while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed, the specific image YK is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, along with this, the direction of variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R changes while maintaining the display. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L gradually moves from the direction D1 to the direction D2, the middle decorative pattern 8C gradually moves from the direction D1 to the direction D3, and the right decorative pattern 8R gradually moves from the direction D1 to the direction D4. changes. Here, directions D2 to D4 are all directions that intersect with direction D1. Furthermore, while and after the changing direction of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. It is assumed that the direction in which the image is moved and the direction in which the image is moved out of the frame from the display screen 7a are always the same, and the image is displayed moving linearly. In addition to this change in the direction of variation, the size of each decorative pattern displayed in a variable manner in the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R also gradually changed, but since the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed, It shall be difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(C), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were fluctuating at high speed, decelerate and become decelerated fluctuations. With the deceleration fluctuation display, each decorative pattern that is displayed in a variable manner in the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is changed to the left enlarged pattern 8Lb, the middle, where the size of the decorative pattern in the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R has changed. It becomes possible to visually recognize that the enlarged symbol 8Cb and the right enlarged symbol 8Rb have changed, respectively. Note that here, after the direction of variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is changed, the variation speed is decelerated, but the variation direction may be changed after the variation speed is decelerated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(D), the specific image YK is rotated while maintaining the display and display position in the center of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, along with this, the direction of variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the size of each decorative pattern displayed in a variable manner change again. Specifically, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the direction of variation gradually changes from the direction D2 to the direction D2A, and each decorative pattern displayed in a variable manner gradually changes from the left enlarged pattern 8Lb to the left reduced pattern 8Ls. In the medium decorative pattern C, the direction of variation gradually changes from the direction D3 to the direction D3A, and each decorative pattern displayed in a variable manner gradually changes from the medium enlarged pattern 8Cb to the medium reduced pattern 8Cs. In the right decorative pattern R, the direction of variation gradually changes from the direction D4 to the direction D4A, and each decorative pattern displayed in a variable manner gradually changes from the right enlarged pattern 8Rb to the right reduced pattern 8Rs. Furthermore, during and after the changing direction of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. It is assumed that the direction in which the frame enters the frame and the direction in which the frame moves out from the display screen 7a are always the same, and the display moves linearly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(E), the specific image YK becomes difficult to see (in this case, it is not displayed), and accordingly, the direction of variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and each decorative pattern that is displayed in a variable manner returns to its original size. Specifically, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the direction of variation gradually returns from the direction D2A to the direction D1, and each decorative pattern displayed in a variable manner gradually returns from the left reduced pattern 8Ls to the left decorative pattern 8L in the normal mode. In the medium decorative pattern C, the direction of variation gradually returns from the direction D3A to the direction D1, and each decorative pattern displayed in a variable manner gradually returns from the medium reduced pattern 8Cs to the medium decorative pattern 8C in the normal mode. In the right decorative pattern R, the direction of variation gradually returns from the direction D4A to the direction D1, and each decorative pattern displayed in a variable manner gradually returns from the right reduced pattern 8Rs to the normal right decorative pattern 8R. Furthermore, during and after the change in which the fluctuation directions of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. It is assumed that the direction in which the frame enters the screen 7a and the direction in which the frame moves out from the display screen 7a are always the same, and the display moves linearly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which had been decelerating and fluctuating, are stopped and displayed in a losing manner in the order of left decorative symbol 8L → right decorative symbol 8R → middle decorative symbol 8C. Ru. After this, it is fixed and stopped, and the next variable performance is executed.

The above is an example of the display of the variation direction change effect A and the flow of execution. In the variation direction change production A, when the specific image YK is displayed during the variation production, the variation direction of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R changes from the direction D1 to the directions D2 to D4, respectively, and the variation display is performed. The size of each decorative pattern also changes. Thereafter, with the rotation of the specific image YK, the direction of variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the size of each decorative pattern displayed in a variable manner also change again. Furthermore, after that, when the specific image YK becomes difficult to see, the direction of variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R all return to the direction D1, and the size of each decorative pattern displayed in a variable manner also returns to its original size. . Therefore, by executing the fluctuating direction change performance A, it is possible to perform an unprecedented and novel performance, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Fluctuating direction change effect B]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation direction change effect B. In the variation direction change production B, first, during the variation production in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied, the variation direction of the left decorative symbol 8L changes, and furthermore, the left decorative symbol 8L that is displayed in a variable manner changes in size of the image. The expanded pattern 8Lr is expanded. Thereafter, the direction of variation of the left decorative pattern 8L returns to its original state, and the expanded pattern 8Lr that is displayed in a variable manner returns to the left decorative pattern 8L. It is assumed that the direction of variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the normal mode is the direction D1, and they are displayed moving linearly.

In the variable display, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the special symbol is created by the variable display of one set of symbols. It represents a variable display (special pattern fluctuation), and announces the special pattern lottery result by stopping display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and at the time of deceleration fluctuation, two or more patterns become visible at the same time on the display screen 7a. They are displayed moving vertically. Furthermore, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed in such a way that they are difficult to see. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

First, as shown in FIG. 61(A), a fluctuating effect is started, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, making it difficult to see the contents of each. Although the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R at this time are displayed moving linearly, with the direction of variation always being the direction D1 from when each decorative pattern enters the frame until it goes out of the frame. Furthermore, it is assumed that the result of the special drawing lottery that triggered this variable performance was a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(B), the left decorative pattern 8L, which was fluctuating at a high speed, decelerates and becomes a deceleration fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(C), while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing, the direction of movement of the left decorative pattern 8L gradually changes from the direction D1 to the direction D5, and is displayed in a variable manner. The left decorative pattern 8L changes to an expanded pattern 8Lr. That is, regarding the left decorative pattern 8L, the direction of variation changes and the size of the decorative pattern also changes. Note that during and after the changing direction of the decorative pattern 8L shown in FIG. It is assumed that the frame-out direction from the screen 7a is always the same, and the display moves linearly. Further, it is assumed that the direction D5 is in a direction intersecting the direction D1. Moreover, at this time, the fluctuation direction of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R does not change, and the size of the decorative pattern does not change either.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(D), the direction of variation of the left decorative pattern 8L gradually returns to the direction D1. Further, in conjunction with this, the expanded pattern 8Lr that has been variably displayed gradually returns to the left decorative pattern 8L in the normal mode. That is, for the left decorative pattern 8L, the direction of variation returns to the original, and the size of the decorative pattern also returns to the original. Note that during and after the direction of variation of the decorative pattern 8L shown in FIG. It is assumed that the direction of frame-out from the display screen 7a is always the same, and the display moves linearly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(E), the left decorative pattern 8L, which has been decelerating and fluctuating, is stopped and displayed. After this, other decorative patterns also stop in a losing manner, and the next variable performance is executed.

The above is an example of the display of the variation direction change effect B and the flow of execution. In the variation direction change performance B, during the variation performance, first, the variation direction of the left decorative pattern 8L gradually changes from the direction D1 to the direction D5, and furthermore, the size of the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern 8L also gradually changes. Thereafter, the direction of variation of the left decorative pattern 8L returns to the direction D1, and the size of the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern 8L also returns to its original size. Therefore, by executing the variation direction change performance B, it is possible to perform an unprecedented and novel performance, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Fluctuation direction change production C]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the variation direction change effect A. In the variation direction change performance B, first, during a variation performance in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating, after the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R decelerate, the fluctuation direction of the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C changes, Furthermore, the left decorative pattern 8L that is displayed in a variable manner becomes a reduced pattern 8Ls whose image size is reduced. Thereafter, the fluctuation directions of the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C change again, and furthermore, the reduced pattern 8Ls that is variably displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L becomes an expanded pattern 8Lr whose image size is expanded. Thereafter, the fluctuation directions of the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C return to the original direction, and the variably displayed expanded pattern 8Lr returns to the left decorative pattern 8L. It is assumed that the direction of variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the normal mode is the direction D1, and they are displayed moving linearly.

In the variable display, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and a special symbol is created by the variable display of one set of symbols. It represents a variable display (special pattern variation), and announces the special pattern lottery result by stopping display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and at the time of deceleration fluctuation, two or more patterns become visible on the display screen 7a at the same time. They are displayed moving vertically. Furthermore, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed in such a way that they are difficult to visually recognize. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

First, as shown in FIG. 62(A), a fluctuating effect is started, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, making it difficult to see the contents of each. Although the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R at this time are displayed moving in a straight line, with the direction of variation being the direction D1. It is assumed that the result of the special drawing lottery that triggered this variable performance was a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, which were fluctuating at high speed, are decelerated and become decelerated fluctuations.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(C), the direction of variation of the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C gradually changes from the direction D1 to the direction D6, and the left decorative pattern 8L that is displayed in a variable manner is reduced. The pattern gradually changes to 8Ls. Here, it is assumed that the direction D6 is a direction that intersects the direction D1. In other words, the direction of variation of the decorative pattern changes, and the size of the decorative pattern also changes. In addition, during and after the change direction of the left decorative pattern 8L shown in FIG. It is assumed that the direction in which the frame enters and the direction in which the frame moves out from the display screen 7a are always the same, and the display moves linearly. Further, at this time, the direction of variation of the right decorative pattern 8R does not change, and the size of the decorative pattern does not change either.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(D), the fluctuation direction of the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C changes again from the direction D6 to the direction D7, and the reduced pattern 8Ls that is variably displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L changes to an expanded pattern 8Lb. Note that direction D7 is different from both direction D1 and direction D6. In other words, the direction of variation of the decorative pattern changes again in a direction different from both the direction D1 and the direction D6, and the size of the decorative pattern also changes again. Note that during and after the change direction of the left decorative pattern 8L shown in FIG. 62(D) changes again, each decorative pattern variably displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C is It is assumed that the direction in which the frame enters the frame and the direction in which the frame moves out from the display screen 7a are always the same, and the display moves linearly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(E), the fluctuation directions of the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C return to the original direction. In other words, the direction of variation of the decorative pattern has returned to its original direction. Note that during and after the change direction of the left decorative pattern 8L returns to the direction D1 shown in FIG. It is assumed that the direction in which the frame enters the display screen 7a and the direction in which the frame moves out from the display screen 7a are always the same, and the display moves linearly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(F), the left decorative pattern 8L (inflated pattern 8Lb) and the right decorative pattern 8R, which have been decelerating and fluctuating, are stopped and displayed. After this, the expanded pattern 8Lb that is stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L returns to the size of the left decorative pattern 8L in the normal mode, the medium decorative pattern 8C stops in the losing mode, and the next variable performance is executed. Note that the timing at which the size of the expanded pattern 8Lb returns to the size of the left decorative pattern 8L in the normal mode may be changed arbitrarily.

The above is an example of the display of the variation direction change effect C and the flow of execution. In the variation direction change production C, during the variation production, the variation directions of the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C change by 3 degrees (direction D1 → direction D6 → direction D7 → direction D1), and the left decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The size of 8L also changes three times (left decorative pattern 8L in normal mode → reduced pattern 8Ls → expanded pattern 8Lb → left decorative pattern 8L in normal mode). Therefore, by executing the fluctuating direction change performance C, it is possible to perform an unprecedented and novel performance, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect example]
Examples of the effects of this embodiment are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, according to FIGS. 60 to 62, the first effect in which the decorative pattern changes in the direction D1, and the direction in which the decorative pattern changes from the direction D1 to one of the directions D2 to D6. It is possible to perform a second performance that changes. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, according to FIGS. 61 and 62, in the second performance, the size of the decorative pattern changes from the size of the decorative pattern in the first performance, and the expanded pattern 8Lr or It was configured with a reduced design of 8Ls. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, according to FIGS. 60 to 62, after the second performance, a third performance is executed in which the direction of variation of the decorative symbols returns from one of the directions D2 to D5 and D7 to the direction D1. It was a possible configuration. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, after the second performance and before the third performance, the direction of variation of the decorative pattern changes from the direction D6 to the direction D7. The configuration is such that it is possible to perform the effects of 4. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. The pattern changes to 8Lb). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8Lb returns to its normal size). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60, in the second performance, the direction of variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R changes from the direction D1 to directions D2 to D4, which are different directions. The structure is as follows. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
A modification of this embodiment is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the fluctuation direction change performance A, the directions D2 to D4 have different configurations. On the other hand, directions D2 to D4 may all be the same direction.

[Modification 2]
In the variation direction change effect A, when the specific image YK is displayed, the variation direction of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is changed. On the other hand, for example, when the movable accessory moves, or when the display area of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R becomes a specific area on the display screen 7a, the direction of variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is changed. You can.

[Modification 3]
In the variation direction change effects A to C, when the variation direction of any one of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R changes, the variation speed of the decorative symbol whose variation direction changes may be arbitrarily changed. For example, in variation direction change production A, after the left and right decorative symbols 8L, 8R change from high-speed variation display to deceleration variation display, the variation direction of each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R changes from direction D1 to direction D2, D3, It may be changed to D4.

[Modification 4]
In the variation direction change performance C, when the variation direction of the left decorative pattern 8L returns from the direction D7 to the direction D1, the size of the decorative pattern is configured to return to the original size after the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, the timing at which the decorative pattern returns to its original size may be arbitrarily changed.

[Modification 5]
In the fluctuation direction change performances B and C, at least one row of the three rows of decorative symbols had a configuration in which the fluctuation direction did not change. On the other hand, the direction of variation of the decorative patterns in all rows may be changed. Moreover, in this case, the size of the decorative patterns in all rows may be changed, or the size of the decorative patterns in at least one row may be made not to change.

[Modification 6]
In the variation direction change performance A, the variation directions of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change, but the sizes of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R do not change. On the other hand, the sizes of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may also be changed. Further, in this case, the sizes of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be changed to different sizes.

[Modification 7]
In the variation direction change productions A to C, each decorative pattern that is variably displayed in the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is always the same in the direction of frame-in to the display screen 7a and the direction of frame-out from the display screen 7a, It was displayed moving in a straight line. On the other hand, for example, the direction of variation at frame-in may be direction D1, the variation direction may change in the area on the display screen 7a, and the direction of variation at frame-out may be direction D2.

[Modification 8]
In the fluctuation direction change effects A to C, the effects described may be combined as appropriate.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect A4-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
a first effect in which the decorative pattern changes in a first direction;
A second performance in which the direction of variation of the decorative pattern changes from the first direction to a second direction intersecting the first direction,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
In the second performance, the size of the decorative pattern changes from the size of the decorative pattern in the first performance,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
After the second performance, it is possible to perform a third performance in which the direction of variation of the decorative pattern returns from the second direction to the first direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A4-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect 3,
After the second performance and before the third performance, the direction of variation of the decorative pattern is from the second direction to either the first direction or the second direction. It is possible to execute a fourth performance that changes in a different third direction,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect 4,
In the fourth performance, the size of the decorative pattern changes from the size of the decorative pattern in the second performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A4-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect 3,
In the third performance, the size of the decorative pattern changes from the size of the decorative pattern in the second performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A4-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
In the second performance, the direction of variation of another decorative pattern different from the decorative pattern is from the first direction to a fourth direction different from any of the first direction and the second direction. Change,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The first movable accessory interlocking performances A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 63 to 65. The first movable accessory-linked performances A to C are executed during the variable performance. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the first movable accessory interlocking effects A to C, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[First movable accessory linked production A]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the first movable accessory linked production A. The first movable accessory interlocking performance A is a performance in which the display position of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C also moves in conjunction with the movement of the first movable accessory 14 during the fluctuating performance. Note that the movement of the display position of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C is performed while maintaining the display. Further, it is assumed that the first movable accessory 14 is movable between position P1 and position P2.

In the variable display, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the special symbol is created by the variable display of one set of symbols. It represents a variable display (special pattern variation), and announces the special pattern lottery result by stopping display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and at the time of deceleration fluctuation, two or more patterns become visible at the same time on the display screen 7a. They are displayed moving vertically. Furthermore, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed in such a way that they are difficult to visually recognize. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

First, as shown in FIG. 63(A), a fluctuating effect is started, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, making it difficult to visually recognize the contents of each. Here, it is assumed that the first movable accessory 14 is stationary at position P1. Further, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at position P4 on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(B), while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed, the first movable accessory 14 moves linearly from position P1 to position P2. In conjunction with this movement, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C maintain their display state (without changing image orientation, size, color, etc.) from position P4 to position P5 on display screen 7a. , moving in a straight line at a constant speed. It is assumed that the positional relationship between the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C does not change compared to before the movement. It is also assumed that the orientation and size of the images of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C do not change compared to before the movement.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(C), while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed, the first movable accessory 14 moves again from position P2 to position P3. In conjunction with this movement, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C maintain their display state (without changing image orientation, size, color, etc.) from position P5 to position P4 on display screen 7a. , moving in a straight line at a constant speed. It is assumed that the positional relationship between the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C does not change compared to before the movement. Further, it is assumed that the orientation and size of the images of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C do not change compared to before the movement.

The above are the display examples and the flow of execution of the first movable accessory interlocking performance A. In the first movable accessory linked production A, first, in conjunction with the movement of the first movable accessory 14 from position P1 to position P2, the position where the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed also changes to position P4. to position P5. Furthermore, in conjunction with the movement of the first movable accessory 14 from position P2 to position P3, the position where the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed returns from position P5 to position P4. Therefore, by performing the first movable accessory-linked performance A, it is possible to perform an unprecedented and novel performance, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[First movable accessory linked production B]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the first movable accessory interlocking performance B. The first movable accessory interlocking performance B is a performance in which the display position of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C also moves in conjunction with the movement of the first movable accessory 14 during the fluctuating performance. Note that the movement of the display position of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C is performed while maintaining the display. Further, it is assumed that the first movable accessory 14 is movable between positions P1, P2, and P3.

In the variable display, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and a special symbol is created by the variable display of one set of symbols. It represents a variable display (special pattern variation), and announces the special pattern lottery result by stopping display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and at the time of deceleration fluctuation, two or more patterns become visible on the display screen 7a at the same time. They are displayed moving vertically. Furthermore, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed in such a way that they are difficult to visually recognize. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

First, as shown in FIG. 64(A), a fluctuating effect is started, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, making it difficult to see the contents of each. Here, it is assumed that the first movable accessory 14 is stationary at position P1. Further, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at position P4 on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(B), while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed, the first movable accessory 14 moves from position P1 to position P2. In conjunction with this movement, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C maintain their display state (without changing image orientation, size, color, etc.) from position P4 to position P5 on display screen 7a. , moving in a straight line at a constant speed. It is assumed that the positional relationship between the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C does not change compared to before the movement. Further, it is assumed that the orientation and size of the images of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C do not change compared to before the movement.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 64(C) and (D), the first movable accessory 14 moves again from position P2 to position P3 while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. In conjunction with this movement, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C first maintained their display state from position P5 on display screen 7a toward direction D1, as shown in FIG. 64(C). It moves linearly at a constant speed without changing the image orientation, size, color, etc., and reaches position P6. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 64(D), the pending icon 9A that has reached the position P6 and the variable icon 9C maintain their display state toward a direction D2 different from the direction D1 (image orientation and size , color, etc.), moves linearly at a constant speed, and returns to position P5. It is assumed that the positional relationship between the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C does not change compared to before the movement. It is also assumed that the orientation and size of the images of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C do not change compared to before the movement.

The above are the display examples and the flow of execution of the first movable accessory interlocking performance B. In the first movable accessory linked production B, first, in conjunction with the movement of the first movable accessory 14 from position P1 to position P2, the position where the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed also changes to position P4. to position P5. Furthermore, in conjunction with the movement of the first movable accessory 14 from position P2 to position P3, the position at which the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed changes from position P5 to position P6 to position P4. return. Therefore, by executing the first movable accessory interlocking performance B, it is possible to perform an unprecedented and novel performance, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[First movable accessory interlocking production C]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the first movable accessory linked production C. The first movable accessory interlocking performance B is performed in conjunction with the movement of the first movable accessory 14 during the fluctuation performance, and includes the hold icon 9A, the fluctuation icon 9C, the performance mode image EG, the number of fluctuations image KG, and the decorative pattern 8L. , 8C, and 8R are also moved. In addition, the movement of the display position of the hold icon 9A, the fluctuation icon 9C, the performance mode image EG, the fluctuation number image KG, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R must be performed while maintaining the display. shall be.

In the variable display, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and a special symbol is created by the variable display of one set of symbols. It represents a variable display (special pattern variation), and announces the special pattern lottery result by stopping display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed moving toward the direction H1, respectively, and at the time of deceleration fluctuation, two or more patterns are visible at the same time on the display screen 7a. They are displayed moving vertically. Furthermore, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed in such a way that they are difficult to visually recognize. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Note that the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can select any performance mode from a plurality of performance modes including "premier mode", and displays a performance mode image EG representing the currently selected performance mode on the display screen 7a. shall be displayed. Further, when the "premier mode" is selected, a variable number image KG representing the number of variable effects executed after selection is also displayed on the display screen 7a.

First, as shown in FIG. 65(A), a fluctuating effect is started, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R rapidly fluctuate at position P11 on the display screen, making it difficult to see the contents of each. Here, it is assumed that the first movable accessory 14 is stationary at position P1. Further, the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are displayed at position P4 on the display screen, the fluctuation number image KG is displayed at position P7, and the production mode image EG is displayed at position P9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(B), while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed, the first movable accessory 14 moves from position P1 to position P2. In conjunction with this movement, the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C move from position P4 to position P5, the fluctuation number image KG from position P7 to position P8, the production mode image EG from position P9 to position P10, and the decoration The symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move linearly from position P11 to position P12 at a constant speed while maintaining their respective display states on the display screen 7a (without changing image orientation, size, color, etc.). Further, in conjunction with the movement of the first movable accessory 14, the direction of variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R also changes rapidly from the direction H1 to the direction H2. It is assumed that the positional relationship between the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C does not change compared to before the movement. It is also assumed that the orientation and size of the pending icon 9A, the variable icon 9C, the variable number image KG, the performance mode image EG, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R do not change compared to before the movement.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(C), while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are rapidly changing at position P12 on the display screen 7a, the first movable accessory 14 moves again from position P2 to position P1. do. In conjunction with this movement, the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C move from position P5 to position P4, the fluctuation number image KG from position P8 to position P7, the production mode image EG from position P10 to position P9, and the decoration The symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move linearly from position P12 to position P11 at a constant speed while maintaining their respective display states on the display screen 7a (without changing image orientation, size, color, etc.). Further, in conjunction with the re-movement of the first movable accessory 14, the direction of variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R also rapidly returns from the direction H2 to the direction H1. It is assumed that the positional relationship between the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C does not change compared to before the movement. It is also assumed that the orientation and size of the pending icon 9A, the variable icon 9C, the variable number image KG, the performance mode image EG, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R do not change compared to before the movement.

The above are the display examples and the flow of execution of the first movable accessory interlocking performance C. In the first movable accessory interlocking performance C, first, in conjunction with the movement of the first movable accessory 14, the hold icon 9A, the fluctuation icon 9C, the performance mode image EG, and the number of fluctuation images KG are displayed on the display screen 7a. Move in a straight line while maintaining the display above. Therefore, by executing the first movable accessory-linked performance B, it is possible to perform an unprecedented and novel performance, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect example]
Examples of the effects of this embodiment are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, according to FIGS. 63 to 65, the display positions of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C on the display screen 7a change in conjunction with the movement of the first movable accessory 14. It is possible to perform the first effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 63 to 65, as the first movable accessory 14 moves from position P1 to position P2, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are The first effect moves from position P4 to position P5 on the display screen 7a, and after the first effect, the hold icon 9A moves in conjunction with the first movable accessory 14 moving from position P2 to position P3. Further, the variable icon 9C is configured to be able to execute a second effect in which the variable icon 9C returns from the position P5 to the position P4 on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64, in the second effect, the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C move from the position P5 on the display screen 7a in the direction indicated by the arrow D1, The configuration was such that it moves in the first direction through position P6, passes through the sixth position, then moves in the direction of arrow D2, which is different from arrow D1, and returns to position P5. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 65, in the first performance, the display positions of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a are changed in conjunction with the movement of the first movable accessory 14. It has a changing composition. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 65, in the first performance, the display position of the performance mode image EG on the display screen 7a changes in conjunction with the movement of the first movable accessory 14. It becomes. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 65, in the first performance, the display position of the variable number image KG on the display screen 7a changes in conjunction with the movement of the first movable accessory 14. It becomes. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
A modification of this embodiment is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the first movable accessory-linked performance B, like the first movable accessory-linked performance C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, performance mode image EG, and variation number image KG may also be moved.

[Modification 2]
In the first movable accessory interlocking performance C, the first movable accessory 14 moves from the first movement (movement from FIG. 65(A) to FIG. 65(B)) to the second movement (from FIG. 65(B) 65(C)), the direction of variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R was changed from the direction H1 to the direction H2. On the other hand, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may vary in different directions, or the directions of variation may not be changed.

[Modification 3]
In the first movable accessory-linked performances A to C, as the first movable accessory 14 moves, the image that was displayed on the entire display screen 7a is moved so that it is displayed in a specific area on the display screen 7a. Good too.

[Modification 4]
In the first movable accessory interlocking performances A to C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R were fluctuating at high speed. On the other hand, while at least one of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed as a deceleration variation or as stopped, the first movable accessory-linked effects A to C may be performed. Furthermore, the first movable accessory linked effects A to C may be executed when the variable effect is not being executed.

[Modification 5]
In the first movable accessory-linked productions A to C, the display positions of the hold icon 9A, the variable icon 9C, the production mode image EG, the number of variations image KG, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are maintained. It was running in this state. On the other hand, the display position of these images may be moved without maintaining the display.

[Modification 6]
In the first movable accessory interlocking effects A to C, the holding icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are configured so that their respective positional relationships do not change even if the display position on the display screen 7a moves. On the other hand, the positional relationship may change. That is, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C may move in different directions.

[Modification 7]
In the first movable accessory-linked performances A to C, the display positions of the hold icon 9A, the fluctuation icon 9C, the performance mode image EG, the number of fluctuation images KG, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move linearly. It was configured to be. On the other hand, it may move in a meandering manner, for example.

[Modification 8]
In the first movable accessory-linked performances A to C, the size and orientation of the images of the hold icon 9A, the fluctuation icon 9C, the performance mode image EG, the number of fluctuation images KG, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are different before and after the movement. It was configured so that it would not change. On the other hand, in addition to moving the display position, the size and orientation of the image may also be changed.

[Modification 9]
In the first movable accessory-linked performances A to C, the hold icon 9A, the fluctuation icon 9C, the performance mode image EG, the fluctuation number image KG, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed while the display position on the display screen 7a is being moved. , the size, orientation, and color of each image were configured so as not to change. On the other hand, for example, the display position may be moved while changing the size, orientation, color, etc. of each image. Further, in this case, the change may be made to change gradually, such as when the display position is moved, or may be made to change suddenly.

[Modification 10]
In the first movable accessory-linked performances A to C, the display positions of the hold icon 9A, the fluctuation icon 9C, the performance mode image EG, the fluctuation number image KG, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a are moved as follows. It was running at a constant speed. On the other hand, it is also possible to move with acceleration.

[Modification 11]
In the first movable accessory interlocking effects A to C, the effects described may be combined as appropriate.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect A5-1]
a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images;
A gaming machine comprising a movable body,
One of the plurality of types of images is a pending image representing pending special figure fluctuation;
capable of executing a first effect in which the display position of the held image changes in conjunction with the movement of the movable body;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The movable body is movable between a first position, a second position, and a third position,
In the first effect, the suspended image moves from the fourth position to the fifth position of the display means in conjunction with the movement of the movable body from the first position to the second position. death,
After the first performance, in conjunction with the movement of the movable body from the second position to the third position, the held image moves from the fifth position to the fourth position of the display means. It is possible to execute the second production that returns to
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 2,
In the second effect, the held image moves from the fifth position of the display means in a first direction, passes through a sixth position, and then moves in a second direction different from the first direction. and return to the fourth position,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
In the first performance, the display position of the decorative pattern changes in conjunction with the movement of the movable body.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
One of the plurality of types of images is a mode image representing a currently executed production mode,
In the first effect, the display position of the mode image changes in conjunction with the movement of the movable body.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
One of the plurality of types of images is a number image representing the current number of games;
In the first effect, the display position of the number of times image changes in conjunction with the movement of the movable body.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The effect symbol movement variation effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 66 to 68. In FIGS. 66 to 68, various movable accessories, various decorative members, and various background images arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing the drawings. FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance A, FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance B, and FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance C. It is a diagram.

In this performance symbol movement variation performance, when the performance symbol fluctuation performance (fluctuating display) is started, the performance symbols move in a predetermined direction to become separated from each other and spread out, and then the performance symbols remain as they are. It moves in the direction of variation and returns to the state before it was separated again during the variation production (variation display) of the production design, that is, the state before it spread. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the effect symbol movement variation effect is included, the image control microcomputer 101 reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

Here, first, performance symbols, pending icons, etc. will be briefly explained, and performance symbol movement fluctuation performance A, performance symbol movement fluctuation performance B, and performance symbol movement fluctuation performance C will be explained in order.

[Production pattern]
First, I will briefly explain the production patterns. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has three vertically elongated rectangular areas (that is, the display screen 7a is arranged in three rows) as variable display areas for three performance symbols (also referred to as "variable areas for performance symbols"). The area is divided into two equal areas). The left effect pattern 8L of the 3D image, the middle effect pattern 8C of the 3D image, and the right effect pattern 8R of the 3D image are the effect patterns (symbols: numbers) in a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top to the bottom of each variable display area. A variable performance (variable display) of numbers "1" to "9") is started. Specifically, the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the presentation symbol is started in a display mode in which the left presentation symbol 8L rotates the reel from the upper side of the left variable display area 8Lr to the lower side of the left variable display area 8Lr, The variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the presentation symbols is started in a display mode in which the middle presentation symbol 8C is rotated from the upper side of the medium variation display area 8Cr to the bottom of the medium variation display area 8Cr, and the right presentation symbol 8R is A variable performance (fluctuating display) of performance symbols is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side of the right variable display area 8Rr to the lower side of the right variable display area 8Rr. The vertical distance dimension of the left variable display area 8Lr, the vertical distance dimension of the middle variable display area 8Cr, and the vertical distance dimension of the right variable display area 8Rr are the same vertical distance dimension, and furthermore, the horizontal distance dimension of the left variable display area 8Lr, The lateral distance of the middle variable display area 8Cr and the lateral distance of the right variable display area 8Rr are the same lateral distance.

On the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a, there is a vertical line (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "left reference vertical line") passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the left variable display area 8Lr. The point where they intersect is the center of the left fluctuation display area, and the point where the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr (hereinafter referred to as "middle reference vertical line") intersects is the center of the left fluctuation display area. The center of the display area (the center of the medium fluctuation display area coincides with the center where the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a and the vertical line passing through the center of the top side and the center of the bottom side of the display screen 7a intersect. ), and the point where the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the right variable display area 8Rr (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "right side reference vertical line") intersects is the center of the right variable display area, and these In the center of each variable display area, each performance symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and when each performance symbol is aligned with the same numerical symbol and stopped and displayed, the player is notified of a win, and each performance If the symbols are not aligned with the same numbers and are stopped and displayed, the player is informed that he has lost.

In addition, in the center of the left variable display area, the center of the middle variable display area, and the center of the right variable display area, there are blank symbols that are symbols that do not temporarily stop or stop display and do not form a winning combination (preceding production symbols and subsequent ) may be temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state. The blank pattern is configured as a three-dimensional image of a vertically long, horizontally short rhombus having a dark blue color. In this embodiment, blank symbols are omitted in FIGS. 66 to 68 for ease of viewing the drawings.

In this embodiment, the lower part of the effect symbol to be temporarily stopped (stopped display) in the center of the variable display area is described as the "preceding effect pattern", and the effect pattern to be temporarily stopped (stopped display) in the center of the variable display area is The upper performance pattern is described as a "subsequent performance pattern." In addition, the lower part of the blank symbol that temporarily stops (stops displayed) in the center of the dynamic display area is described as the "preceding design", and the upper part of the blank symbol that temporarily stops (stops display) in the center of the variable display area. The design is described as a "subsequent production design."

Further, in this embodiment, a variable performance (fluctuating display) of performance symbols may be started in which each performance symbol is stopped and displayed only in the center of the left variable display area, the center of the middle variable display area, and the center of the right variable display area. In addition, in this embodiment, a blank symbol is displayed above each performance symbol that is stopped and displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area, the center of the middle fluctuation display area, and the center of the right fluctuation display area, and the subsequent performance symbols are stopped and displayed, and the left fluctuation A variable performance (fluctuating display) of performance symbols is started in which a blank symbol and a preceding performance symbol are stopped and displayed below each performance symbol that is stopped and displayed in the center of the display area, the center of the middle variation display area, and the center of the right variation display area. There may be cases where Of course, the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols will start in which blank symbols are stopped and displayed in one, two, or all of the center of the left fluctuation display area, the center of the middle fluctuation display area, and the center of the right fluctuation display area. In some cases.

In the variation production (variation display) of production symbols, the number symbols are number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number The reels rotate in the order of "7" → Number "8" → Number "9" → Number "1" → Number "2" → .... There is a blank pattern between the . Note that the number "7" has a bright red color, and the odd numbers "1", "3", "5", and "9" except the number "7" all have the same bright green color. Even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color. In this way, each production pattern is designed primarily in one of bright red, bright green, and bright blue. In addition, since the number symbols (odd number symbols and even number symbols) each have a different color, for example, the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in alignment with the same number symbol, reaching the reach. is formed and the effect is developed after that, the more the player experiences the effect that is developed through reach, the more the player becomes aware of the color of the temporarily stopped number symbol and the effect that will be developed. Players can now have the opportunity to discover for themselves the relationship (law) between and. Thereby, each number pattern (odd number pattern and even number pattern) has a color, which can contribute to improving interest.

In addition, the size of the numerical patterns (numbers "1" to "9") is such that the vertical distance dimension is approximately the same as the vertical distance dimension of the left variable display area 8Lr (middle variable display area 8Cr, right variable display area 8Rr). The distance dimension was one third, and the horizontal distance dimension was approximately one half of the horizontal distance dimension of the left variable display area 8Lr (middle variable display area 8Cr, right variable display area 8Rr). It is normal size. The numbers ``1'' to ``9'' are special typefaces (independently created) that are different from existing typefaces (commonly distributed typefaces) such as regular typefaces, Gothic typefaces, and Mincho typefaces. It is formed by a special font).

Normally, when the fluctuating performance (fluctuation display) of the performance symbols starts, the performance symbols (blank symbols are stopped and displayed) are stopped and displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area, the center of the middle fluctuation display area, and the center of the right fluctuation display area. ) from the center of each fluctuation display area toward the bottom (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "normal fluctuation direction") all at once (at the same time) gradually increasing speed from low speed to an opaque state. The display mode changes from to semi-transparent to a rapidly changing display mode. Thereby, the background image placed behind the performance pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent performance pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the production pattern decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the performance design is temporarily stopped and displayed, at the stop position, the reflected light reflected by the performance design rotates clockwise along the outline of the performance design, and then it rotates clockwise. When the reflected light stops and disappears, it becomes a state where the display is stopped.

On the other hand, in the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance A, the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance B, and the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance C, unlike the above-mentioned case where the performance symbol fluctuation performance (variation display) is normally started, , the effect symbols (blank symbols may be stopped and displayed) that are stopped and displayed in the center of the left variable display area, the center of the middle variable display area, and the center of the right variable display area move from the center of each variable display area to the bottom. As the speed gradually increases from low speed, the display changes from an opaque state to a translucent state and changes at high speed, and the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are spaced apart from each other. Then, in this expanded state, it starts moving in the normal fluctuation direction, and gradually increases its speed from low speed, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display state that fluctuates at high speed. .

Normally, when the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols starts, the performance symbols (blank symbols) that are stopped and displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area, the center of the middle fluctuation display area, and the center of the right fluctuation display area are normally displayed. In some cases, the display mode changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state at a high speed while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed (at the same time) in the direction of the change. However, when the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R move toward the normal variation direction, first the left effect pattern 8L moves by a predetermined distance (for example, 5 mm), and then the middle effect pattern 8C moves. Moves by a predetermined distance (for example, 5 mm), and finally the right production pattern 8R moves by a predetermined distance (for example, 5 mm), and gradually increases the speed from low speed, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state and fluctuating at high speed. It is also possible to use a display mode in which:

Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are, as described above, number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5". ” → number “6” → number “7” → number “8” → number “9” → number “1” → number “2” →... ) has been done. However, only for the left production pattern 8L, the order is reversed, number "9" → number "8" → number "7" → number "6" → number "5" → number "4" → number "3" → number " The reels may be rotated in the order of ``2'' → number ``1'' → number ``9'' → number ``8'' → . . . . Even in this case, there is a blank pattern between the number patterns.

[Hold icon, etc.]
Next, to explain the fluctuation icon 9C and the pending icons 9A and 9B, the fluctuation icon 9C corresponding to the left performance symbol 8L, middle performance symbol 8C, and right performance symbol 8R that are currently fluctuating as the expiration of the first special symbol reservation is as follows. It is displayed (placed) at a variable display position (above the white rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area to the left of the variable display position, a first holding display area is provided as a first special figure hold, and in the area to the right of the variable display position, a second hold display area is provided as a second special figure hold. It is being In the first reservation display area, four reservation icons 9A can be displayed in a straight line, and a maximum of four reservation icons 9A can be stocked. The hold icon 9A closest to the fluctuation icon 9C is called the first hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A second to the change icon 9C is called the second hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A third to the change icon 9C is called the third hold icon. 9A, and the pending icon 9A that is farthest from the variable icon 9C is called the fourth pending icon 9A. In the second reservation display area, four reservation icons 9B can be displayed in a straight line, and a maximum of four reservation icons 9B can be stocked. The hold icon 9B closest to the fluctuation icon 9C is called the first hold icon 9B, the hold icon 9B second to the change icon 9C is called the second hold icon 9B, and the hold icon 9B third to the change icon 9C is called the third hold icon. 9B, and the pending icon 9B that is farthest from the variable icon 9C is called a fourth pending icon 9B. In this embodiment, the variation icon 9C and the pending icons 9A and 9B can indicate the expectation of winning depending on the color, and the expectation of winning increases in the order of white → blue → green → red → yellow (gold). . Therefore, players are highly interested in the variable icon 9C and the pending icons 9A and 9B.

The variable display position, the variable icon 9C, and the hold icons 9A and 9B are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and include a left effect pattern 8L, a middle effect pattern 8C, a right effect pattern 8R, various effect images, and various other effects. Visibility is not obstructed by images. This is because the variable icon 9C and the pending icons 9A and 9B may change to other colors during the variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbols, making it easier for the player to see the color changes.

[Production symbol movement variation production A]
Next, the effect symbol movement variation effect A will be explained with reference to FIG. 66. Here, a game is played by shooting the game ball so that it flows down the left game area 3A, and the game ball is played by hitting the left hand.The game ball flowing down enters the first starting port 20, and the white first reservation The icon 9A is determined and displayed. When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbols is started. When the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols starts, the left performance symbol 8L, middle performance symbol 8C, and right performance symbol 8R change from opaque to translucent while gradually increasing the speed from low speed toward the normal fluctuation direction. This results in a display mode that changes at high speed. During this fluctuation, the game ball enters the first starting port 20, and is determined and displayed as the white first reservation icon 9A by pre-reading. As a result, the pending icon 9A is stocked and only one icon exists. Although the player continues to operate the handle 60, the game ball has not entered the first starting port 20.

After that, first, the left effect pattern 8L is displayed as a temporary stop in the center of the left variable display area with the bright green number "1", and the right effect pattern 8R is temporarily stopped in the center of the right variable display area with the bright green number "3". The middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium variation display area with the bright blue number "2", and then, as shown in FIG. 66(A), the left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the center of the left variation display area. , a medium effect pattern 8C is displayed in the center of the medium variation display area, and a right effect pattern 8R is stopped and displayed in the center of the right variation display area. As a result, the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are aligned in the same pattern in the left and right direction with the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a as the center line. The display will stop and the loss will be confirmed. Accordingly, the white fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbols is started, as shown in FIG. 66(B). When the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols starts, the performance symbols in the set of left performance symbol 8L, middle performance symbol 8C, and right performance symbol 8R usually start moving in the fluctuation direction (variation direction). , the left effect symbol 8L (number "1" in bright green) that was stopped and displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and is perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction. It starts moving horizontally towards the left side, which is the direction (orthogonal to the normal fluctuation direction), and the medium effect symbol 8C (number "2" with bright blue color), which was stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area, normally fluctuates. It starts moving toward the top, which is a direction different from the direction (that is, the bottom) and opposite to the normal fluctuation direction, and the right production symbol 8R (bright green) that was stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuation display area The number "3") starts moving in the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward). Here, the left presentation pattern 8L, middle presentation pattern 8C, and right presentation pattern 8R start moving all at once (at the same time). However, the left effect symbol 8L starts moving and the left effect symbol 8L is in the middle of moving, or after the movement is completed, the middle effect symbol 8C starts moving, and the middle effect symbol 8C is in the middle of movement, or after the movement is completed, the right effect The symbol 8R may start moving. Note that when the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, there is no stocked pending icon 9A at all.

When the left production symbol 8L starts moving horizontally to the left, which is a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) and perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction (a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction), the left The left side part of the effect pattern 8L (approximately 1/2 part of the left effect pattern 8L) jumps out from the left side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the right side part (the left side) which is the remaining part of the left effect pattern 8L Approximately 1/2 part of the production pattern 8L) stops moving while maintaining the display mode. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the left performance symbol 8L (a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of a virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the left performance symbol 8L, and the center of the left side and the center of the right side of this rectangular shape) (the point where the horizontal line that passes through the horizontal line and The condition remains maintained. Hereinafter, a vertical line moved to the left from the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left variable display area in the left variable display area 8Lr may be referred to as a "left vertical line."

When the medium effect pattern 8C starts moving upward, which is a direction different from the normal movement direction (that is, downward) and opposite to the normal movement direction, the upper part of the medium effect pattern 8C (middle effect Approximately one-third of the upper part of the pattern 8C) jumps out from the top of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the remaining part of the middle effect pattern 8C (approximately two-thirds of the middle effect pattern 8C) Part) Stops moving while maintaining the displayed mode. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the middle effect pattern 8C (a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the middle effect pattern 8C, and the center of the left side and the center of the right side of this rectangular shape) The point where the horizontal line that passes through and intersects is the middle reference vertical line that passes through the center of the middle variation display area in the middle variation display area 8Cr (that is, on the vertical line that passes through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a). The state in which 8C is placed remains maintained.

When the right performance symbol 8R starts moving toward the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), the lower part of the right performance symbol 8R (approximately one-third from the bottom of the right performance symbol 8R) is displayed on the display screen 7a. It jumps out from the lower side and becomes difficult to see, and it stops moving while the remaining part of the right performance pattern 8R (approximately two-thirds of the right performance pattern 8R) remains displayed. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the right performance symbol 8R (a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the right performance symbol 8R, and the center of the left side and the center of the right side of this rectangular shape) The point where the horizontal line intersects with the horizontal line) remains in a state where the right performance symbol 8R is placed on the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the right fluctuation display area in the right fluctuation display area 8Rr.

When the left presentation pattern 8L moves to the left, the middle presentation pattern 8C moves upward, and the right presentation pattern 8R moves downward, the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the presentation pattern is started, and the left presentation The pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R have changed to a state where they are separated from each other and spread out. When the symbols are spaced apart from each other and spread out, the colors of these performance symbols change to other colors, thereby indicating the expectation of winning with respect to the variation. Other colors include purple and yellow (gold), and when the color of these production patterns changes from their own color to purple, the probability of winning is higher, and it changes to yellow (gold) instead of purple. The expectation of winning is higher when the color changes than when the color changes to purple. The winning expectation for purple is the same as the red pending icon (red fluctuating icon), and the winning expectation for yellow (gold) is the same as the yellow (golden) pending icon (yellow ( The winning expectation is the same as that of the golden (Fluctuating icon). In addition, when changing to another color, when the movement of these performance symbols is completed, the color of the performance symbol returns to the original color of each performance symbol. Here, the colors of these performance symbols are kept in the color of their own performance symbols and are moving, and have not changed to any other color at all.

The horizontal movement of the left effect pattern 8L to the left, the vertical movement of the middle effect pattern 8C upward, and the vertical movement of the right effect pattern 8R downward are started all at once (at the same time), and then all at once (at the same time). The movement is stopped, and this state is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second).

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIGS. 66(C) and (D), the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R move toward the normal fluctuation direction. The display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state all at once (simultaneously) while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at high speed.

As the left presentation pattern 8L moves toward the normal fluctuation direction, the left presentation pattern 8L jumps out to the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, until the number "2" having a bright blue color, which is the subsequent left presentation pattern 8L, appears. appears from the upper side of the display screen 7a and heads in the direction of normal fluctuation. This subsequent left presentation pattern 8L is similar to the bright green left presentation pattern 8L with the number "1", and is similar to the left side portion of the subsequent left presentation pattern 8L (approximately 1/2 portion of the subsequent left presentation pattern 8L). ) also jumps out from the left side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the right side portion (approximately 1/2 of the subsequent left presentation pattern 8L), which is the remaining portion of the subsequent left presentation pattern 8L, is displayed. The same aspect remains unchanged. In other words, the left effect symbol 8L and the subsequent left effect symbol are placed on the left vertical line (actually on the left side of the display screen 7a) that moves leftward from the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left variable display area in the left variable display area 8Lr. The state in which 8L is placed remains maintained.

Further, as the medium performance pattern 8C moves toward the normal variation direction, the number "3" having a bright green color, which is the subsequent medium performance pattern 8C, also appears from the upper side of the display screen 7a and moves toward the normal variation direction. That is, the state in which the medium effect pattern 8C and the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C are arranged on the medium side reference vertical line passing through the center of the medium variation display area in the medium variation display area 8Cr remains maintained.

Further, as the right performance symbol 8R moves toward the normal variation direction, the number "4" having a bright blue color, which is the subsequent right performance symbol 8R, also appears from the upper side of the display screen 7a and moves toward the normal variation direction. That is, the state in which the right performance symbol 8R and the subsequent right performance symbol 8R are arranged on the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the right variation display region in the right variation display region 8Rr remains maintained.

In addition, the number "2" having a bright blue color is the left performance pattern 8L following the left performance pattern 8L, the number "3" has a bright green color which is the medium performance pattern 8C following the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R. The number "4" having a bright blue color, which is the subsequent right effect pattern 8R, appears all at once (at the same time) from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and is normally directed in the direction of fluctuation.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66(E), on the left vertical line (actually on the left side of the display screen 7a) moved leftward from the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left variable display area in the left variable display area 8Lr. The left effect symbol 8L which has been placed and is in the process of variable presentation (variable display) moves to the right side and is placed again on the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left variable display area. In other words, when the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is started, the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R become separated from each other and spread out, and then the normal fluctuation remains in this spread state. When the display mode starts to move toward the direction and gradually increases the speed from a low speed, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state and fluctuating at high speed, during the fluctuation, the state before separating again, that is, before spreading. It starts moving towards the state of , and then returns to its original state before spreading.

As a result, the left effect symbol 8L is placed on the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left variable display area, the middle effect symbol 8C is placed on the middle reference vertical line passing through the center of the medium variable display area, and the right effect symbol 8R is placed on the right They are placed on the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the variable display area, and the left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R move toward the normal variation direction (that is, downward) in each variable display area. It becomes a mode. At this time, the game ball enters the first starting port 20, and is determined and displayed as the white first holding icon 9A by pre-reading. As a result, the pending icon 9A is stocked and only one icon exists.

After that, the left presentation pattern 8L, middle presentation pattern 8C, and right presentation pattern 8R decelerate just before they stop and change from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and first, the left presentation pattern 8L has bright blue numbers " 4" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left variable display area, the right effect pattern 8R is a bright green number "9'' is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right variable display area, and the middle effect pattern 8C is a bright red number ``9''. 7", it is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area, and then, as shown in FIG. The right effect pattern 8R is stopped and displayed in the center of the display area. As a result, the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are aligned in the same pattern in the left and right direction with the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a as the center line. The display will stop and the loss will be confirmed. Accordingly, the white fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbols is started as shown in FIG. 66(G). When the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols starts, the performance symbols in the set of left performance symbol 8L, middle performance symbol 8C, and right performance symbol 8R usually start moving in the fluctuation direction (variation direction). , the left effect symbol 8L (number "4" in bright blue) that was stopped and displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and is perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction. It starts moving horizontally towards the left side, which is the direction (perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction), and the medium-effect symbol 8C (number "7" in bright red), which was stopped and displayed in the center of the medium-variation display area, normally fluctuates. It starts moving toward the top, which is a direction different from the direction (that is, the bottom) and opposite to the normal fluctuation direction, and the right production symbol 8R (bright green) that was stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuation display area The number "9") starts moving horizontally to the right, which is a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) and perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction (a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction). . Here, the left presentation pattern 8L, middle presentation pattern 8C, and right presentation pattern 8R start moving all at once (at the same time). However, the left effect symbol 8L starts moving and the left effect symbol 8L is in the middle of moving, or after the movement is completed, the middle effect symbol 8C starts moving, and the middle effect symbol 8C is in the middle of movement, or after the movement is completed, the right effect The symbol 8R may start moving. Note that when the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, there is no stocked pending icon 9A at all.

When the left production symbol 8L starts moving horizontally to the left, which is a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) and perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction (a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction), the above-mentioned As mentioned above, the left side part of the left performance pattern 8L (approximately 1/2 part of the left performance pattern 8L) jumps out from the left side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the remaining part of the left performance pattern 8L The movement is stopped while a certain right side part (about 1/2 part of the left performance pattern 8L) is maintained in a displayed manner. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the left performance symbol 8L (a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of a virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the left performance symbol 8L, and the center of the left side and the center of the right side of this rectangular shape) The point where the horizontal line that passes through the horizontal line intersects with ) is placed on the left vertical line (actually on the left side of the display screen 7a) that is moved to the left from the left reference vertical line that passes through the center of the left variable display area in the left variable display area 8Lr. The current state remains unchanged.

When the middle effect symbol 8C starts moving upward, which is a direction different from the normal variation direction (that is, downward) and opposite to the normal variation direction, as described above, the upper side of the middle production symbol 8C A part (approximately one-third from the top of the middle effect pattern 8C) jumps out from the top of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the remaining part of the middle effect pattern 8C (approximately one-third of the middle effect pattern 8C) 2/3 part) The display stops moving while maintaining the displayed mode. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the middle effect pattern 8C (a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the middle effect pattern 8C, and the center of the left side and the center of the right side of this rectangular shape) The point where the horizontal line that passes through and intersects is the middle reference vertical line that passes through the center of the middle variation display area in the middle variation display area 8Cr (that is, on the vertical line that passes through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a). The state in which 8C is placed remains maintained.

When the right production symbol 8R starts moving horizontally to the right, which is a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) and perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction (a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction), the right The right side part of the right performance pattern 8R (approximately 1/2 part of the right performance pattern 8R) jumps out from the right side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the left side part (the right part) that is the remaining part of the right performance pattern 8R Approximately 1/2 part of the production pattern 8R) stops moving while maintaining the display mode. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the right performance symbol 8R (a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the right performance symbol 8R, and the center of the left side and the center of the right side of this rectangular shape) (the point where the horizontal line that passes through and intersects with) is placed on a vertical line that has moved to the right from the right reference vertical line that passes through the center of the right variable display area in the right variable display area 8Rr (actually on the right side of the display screen 7a). The condition remains maintained. Hereinafter, a vertical line moved to the right from the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the right variable display area in the right variable display area 8Rr may be referred to as a "right side vertical line."

When the left production symbol 8L moves to the left, the middle production symbol 8C moves upward, and the right production symbol 8R moves to the right, the variation production (variation display) of production symbols is started, and the left production symbol 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R have changed to a state where they are separated from each other and spread out.

The horizontal movement of the left effect pattern 8L to the left, the vertical movement of the middle effect pattern 8C to the upper side, and the horizontal movement of the right effect pattern 8R to the right side start all at once (simultaneously), and then move all at once (simultaneously). It stops and this state is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second).

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIGS. 66(H) and (I), the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R move toward the normal fluctuation direction. The display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state all at once (simultaneously) while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at high speed.

As the left presentation pattern 8L moves toward the normal fluctuation direction, the left presentation pattern 8L jumps out to the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, until the number "5" with bright green color, which is the subsequent left presentation pattern 8L, appears. appears from the upper side of the display screen 7a and moves in the direction of normal fluctuation. This subsequent left performance pattern 8L is also similar to the left performance pattern 8L of the number "4" which has a bright blue color. ) also jumps out from the left side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the right side portion (approximately 1/2 of the subsequent left presentation pattern 8L), which is the remaining portion of the subsequent left presentation pattern 8L, is displayed. The same aspect remains unchanged. In other words, the left effect symbol 8L and the subsequent left effect symbol are placed on the left vertical line (actually on the left side of the display screen 7a) that moves to the left from the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left variable display area in the left variable display area 8Lr. The state in which 8L is placed remains maintained.

Further, as the medium performance pattern 8C moves toward the normal variation direction, the number "8" having a bright blue color, which is the subsequent medium performance pattern 8C, also appears from the upper side of the display screen 7a and moves toward the normal variation direction. That is, the state in which the medium effect pattern 8C and the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C are arranged on the medium side reference vertical line passing through the center of the medium variation display area in the medium variation display area 8Cr remains maintained.

As the right effect pattern 8R moves toward the normal fluctuation direction, the right effect pattern 8R jumps out to the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, until the number "1" having bright green color, which is the subsequent right effect pattern 8R, appears. appears from the upper side of the display screen 7a and moves in the direction of normal fluctuation. This subsequent right presentation pattern 8R is also similar to the right presentation pattern 8R of the number "9" which has bright green color, and is similar to the right side portion of the subsequent right presentation pattern 8R (approximately 1/2 portion of the subsequent right presentation pattern 8L). ) also jumps out from the right side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the left side portion (approximately half of the subsequent right presentation pattern 8R), which is the remaining portion of the subsequent right presentation pattern 8R, is displayed. The same aspect remains unchanged. In other words, the right effect symbol 8R and the subsequent right effect symbol are placed on the right vertical line (actually on the right side of the display screen 7a) that moves to the right from the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the right variable display area in the right variable display area 8Rr. The state in which 8R is placed remains unchanged.

In addition, the number "5" with a bright green color is the left performance pattern 8L that follows the left performance pattern 8L, the number "8" has a bright blue color that is the medium performance pattern 8C that follows the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R. The number "1" having a bright green color, which is the subsequent right effect pattern 8R, appears all at once (at the same time) from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and is normally directed in the direction of variation.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66(J), on the left vertical line (actually on the left side of the display screen 7a) moved leftward from the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left variable display area in the left variable display area 8Lr. The left effect symbol 8L, which has been placed and is in the process of a variable display (variable display), moves to the right and is placed again on the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left variable display area, and the right variable display in the right variable display area 8Rr. The right effect pattern 8R, which is placed on the right vertical line (actually on the right side of the display screen 7a) that has moved to the right from the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the area and is in the process of variable effect (fluctuating display), moves to the left. It is then placed again on the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the right variable display area. In other words, when the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is started, the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R become separated from each other and spread out, and then the normal fluctuation remains in this spread state. When the display mode starts to move toward the direction and gradually increases the speed from a low speed, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state and fluctuating at high speed, during the fluctuation, the state before separating again, that is, before spreading. It starts moving toward the state of , and then returns to the state before it spread.

As a result, the left effect symbol 8L is placed on the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left variable display area, the middle effect symbol 8C is placed on the middle reference vertical line passing through the center of the medium variable display area, and the right effect symbol 8R is placed on the right They are placed on the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the variable display area, and the left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R move toward the normal variation direction (that is, downward) in each variable display area. It becomes a mode.

After that, the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R decelerate just before they stop and change from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and first, the left effect pattern 8L has bright blue numbers " 8" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left variable display area, the right effect pattern 8R is a bright blue number "6'' is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right variable display area, and the middle effect pattern 8C is a bright green number ``6''. 1", a temporary stop is displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area, and then, as shown in FIG. The right effect pattern 8R is stopped and displayed in the center of the display area. As a result, the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are aligned in the same pattern in the horizontal direction with the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a as the center line. The display will stop and the loss will be confirmed. Accordingly, the white fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20 by the player's operation of the handle 60 and the first holding icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable effect of the effect design (fluctuating display) is started, and if the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are not aligned with the same pattern and are stopped and displayed, a loss is confirmed, whereas the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern When the symbol 8C and the right production symbol 8R are the same symbol and are stopped and displayed, a hit is confirmed, a jackpot opening is started, and then a jackpot game in which a profit is given to the player is started. .

[Production symbol movement variation production B]
Next, the effect symbol movement variation effect B will be explained with reference to FIG. 67. Here, a game is played by shooting the game ball so that it flows down the left game area 3A, and the game ball is played by hitting the left hand.The game ball flowing down enters the first starting port 20, and the white first reservation The icon 9A is determined and displayed. When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbols is started. When the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols starts, the left performance symbol 8L, middle performance symbol 8C, and right performance symbol 8R change from opaque to translucent while gradually increasing the speed from low speed toward the normal fluctuation direction. This results in a display mode that changes at high speed. During this fluctuation, the game ball enters the first starting port 20, and is determined and displayed as the white first reservation icon 9A by pre-reading. As a result, the pending icon 9A is stocked and only one icon exists. Although the player continues to operate the handle 60, the game ball has not entered the first starting port 20.

After that, first, the left effect symbol 8L is displayed as a temporary stop in the center of the left variable display area at the bright green number "9", and the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped in the center of the right variable display area at the bright blue number "4". is displayed, and a blank symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area. In this state, the bright blue number "8", which is the preceding left effect symbol 8L, is placed below the left effect symbol 8L, which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left variable display area, and the subsequent left effect symbol 8L is The number "1" having a certain bright green color is arranged above the left effect pattern 8L which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left variable display area. The lower part of the preceding left presentation pattern 8L (approximately one-half portion of the preceding left presentation pattern 8L) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the portion of the preceding left presentation pattern 8L. The remaining part, the upper part (approximately 1/2 part of the preceding left production symbol 8L), remains displayed, and the upper part of the subsequent left production symbol 8L (the subsequent left production symbol 8L) remains displayed. Approximately 1/2 part of the production pattern 8L) jumps out from the upper side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the lower part (the remaining part of the subsequent left production pattern 8L) (approximately one-half of the total) remains unchanged.

In addition, the number "3" having a bright green color, which is the preceding right production symbol 8R, is placed below the right production symbol 8R, which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right variable display area, and the number "3", which is the preceding right production symbol 8R, is placed below the right production symbol 8R, which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right variation display area, and the number "3", which is the bright green color that is the preceding right production symbol 8R, is placed below the right production symbol 8R, which is displayed temporarily in the center of the right fluctuation display area. The number "5" having green color is arranged above the right performance symbol 8R which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right variable display area. The lower part of the preceding right performance pattern 8R (approximately 1/2 part of the preceding right performance pattern 8R) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and at the same time, the lower part of the preceding right performance pattern 8R The remaining part, the upper part (approximately 1/2 part of the preceding right performance symbol 8R) remains displayed, and the upper part of the subsequent right production symbol 8R (the subsequent right Approximately 1/2 part of the production pattern 8R) jumps out from the upper side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the lower part (the remaining part of the subsequent right production pattern 8R) (approximately one-half of the total) remains unchanged.

In addition, the number "5" having a bright green color, which is the preceding medium effect symbol 8C, is placed below the blank symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium variation display area, and the number "5" having a bright green color, which is the preceding medium effect symbol 8C, is placed below the blank symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium variation display area, and the number "5" having a bright green color, which is the preceding medium effect symbol 8C, is placed below the blank symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area, and the number "5" having a bright green color, which is the preceding medium effect symbol 8C, is placed below the blank symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area, and the number "5" having a bright green color, which is the preceding medium effect symbol 8C, is placed below the blank symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area, and the number "5", which is a bright green color that is the preceding medium effect symbol 8C, is placed below the blank symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area. The number "6" having the number "6" is arranged above the blank symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area. Both the preceding medium effect pattern 8C and the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C remain displayed in a state where they can be viewed in their entirety without protruding from the lower or upper sides of the display screen 7a. ing.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67(A), a left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the center of the left variable display area, a blank symbol is displayed in the center of the middle variable display area, and a right effect symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in the center of the right variable display area. As a result, the left effect pattern 8L, the blank pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R are not aligned in the same pattern in a state where they are aligned in a line in the left and right direction with the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a as the center line, The display stops and the loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the white fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbols is started as shown in FIG. 67(B). When the variable display (variable display) of the production symbols starts, the preceding left production symbol 8L, the left production symbol 8L, the following left production symbol 8L, the preceding middle production symbol 8C, (here, the middle production symbol 8C is the middle production symbol) (It is not placed in the center of the variable display area, and a blank symbol is placed.), a set of production symbols: the following medium production symbol 8C, the preceding right production symbol 8R, the right production symbol 8R, and the following right production symbol 8R. Before starting to move in the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction), in the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, the left performance symbol 8L (number "9" in bright green) that was stopped and displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area It starts moving horizontally to the left, which is a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) and perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction (a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction), and at the center of the left fluctuation display area. The left presentation pattern 8L (number “4” with bright blue color) preceding the left presentation pattern 8L (number “9” with bright green color) that was stopped and displayed is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) Then, it started moving diagonally downward (45 degrees diagonally to the lower left) toward the lower left side, which is diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction, and the left effect symbol 8L (with bright green color) that was stopped and displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area The left production pattern 8L (number "1" with bright green color) following the number "9" is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, the lower side), and is on the upper left side, which is diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction. Start moving diagonally upward (45 degrees diagonally to the upper left) toward .

In addition, when the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbol is started, the preceding medium performance symbol 8C (the bright green number "5") moves in the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) in the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr. The next medium production symbol 8C (number "6" in bright blue) is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and upward, which is the opposite direction to the normal fluctuation direction. Start moving towards.

In addition, when the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbol is started, in the right fluctuating display area 8Rr, the right rendering symbol R (number "4" having a bright blue color) that has been stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuating display area is It starts moving horizontally to the right, which is a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) and perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction (a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction), and at the center of the right fluctuation display area. The right performance symbol 8R (number "3" with bright green color) preceding the right performance symbol 8R (number "4" with bright blue color) that was stopped and displayed is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward). Then, it started moving diagonally downward (45 degrees diagonally to the lower right) toward the lower right side, which is diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction, and the right production symbol 8R (bright blue) that had been stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuation display area The right production symbol 8R (the number "5" having bright green color) following the number "4" with a bright green color is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, the lower side) and in a direction diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction. Start moving diagonally upward (45 degrees diagonally to the upper right) toward the upper right side.

Here, the preceding left effect pattern 8L, the left effect pattern 8L, the subsequent left effect pattern 8L, the preceding medium effect pattern 8C, the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C, the preceding right effect pattern 8R, the right effect pattern 8R, the following The right performance symbols 8R start moving all at once (at the same time). However, the preceding left presentation pattern 8L, left presentation pattern 8L, and subsequent left presentation pattern 8L start moving, and while the preceding left presentation pattern 8L, left presentation pattern 8L, and subsequent left presentation pattern 8L are moving, or, After the movement is completed, the preceding medium effect symbol 8C and the following medium effect symbol 8C start moving, and during the movement of the preceding medium effect symbol 8C and the following medium effect symbol 8C, or after the movement is completed, the preceding right effect symbol 8C starts moving. The symbol 8R, the right production symbol 8R, and the subsequent right production symbol 8R may start moving. Note that when the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, there is no stocked pending icon 9A at all.

The left side where the left production pattern 8L (number "9" with bright green color) is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, the lower side) and in a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction (a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction). When it starts to move horizontally toward The vehicle stops moving while maintaining a state in which the vehicle can be visually recognized. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the left performance symbol 8L (a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of a virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the left performance symbol 8L, and the center of the left side and the center of the right side of this rectangular shape) The point where the horizontal line that passes through and intersects the left side of the display screen 7a is moved horizontally to the left by a predetermined distance (for example, 30 mm) from the left reference vertical line that passes through the center of the left variable display area in the left variable display area 8Lr. The state in which the left presentation pattern 8L is arranged on the vertical line remains maintained. Hereinafter, a vertical line that is shifted horizontally to the left by a predetermined distance (for example, 30 mm) from the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left variable display area in the left variable display area 8Lr and is closer to the left side of the display screen 7a is referred to as a "left vertical line". It may be written as

The preceding left production symbol 8L (number "8" with bright blue color) is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and is diagonally downward (toward the lower left side, which is a direction diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction). When the left side of the preceding left effect pattern 8L approaches the left side of the display screen 7a and does not jump out from the left side, making it difficult to see, the lower side of the preceding left effect pattern 8L A portion (approximately two-thirds of the preceding left effect pattern 8L) jumps out from the lower side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the upper portion (the remaining portion of the preceding left effect pattern 8L) Approximately one-third of the left performance symbol 8L) stops moving while maintaining the display mode. When the movement is stopped, the center of the preceding left performance symbol 8L (the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the preceding left performance symbol 8L, and the center of the left side of this rectangular shape) The point where the horizontal line passing through the center of the right side intersects remains on the left vertical line.

The subsequent left direction design 8L (number "1" with bright green color) is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and diagonally upward (toward the upper left side, which is a direction diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction). When the left side of the subsequent left effect pattern 8L approaches the left side of the display screen 7a and does not jump out from the left side and become difficult to see, the upper part of the subsequent left effect pattern 8L does not become difficult to see. (approximately two-thirds of the subsequent left presentation pattern 8L) jumps out from the top of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the remaining portion of the subsequent left presentation pattern 8L, the lower portion (the subsequent Approximately one-third of the left performance symbol 8L) stops moving while maintaining the display mode. When the movement is stopped, the center of the subsequent left performance symbol 8L (the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the subsequent left performance symbol 8L, and the center of the left side of this rectangular shape) The point where the horizontal line passing through the center of the right side intersects remains on the left vertical line.

In this way, on the left vertical line, a state is maintained in which the following left performance symbols 8L, 8L left performance symbols, and the preceding left performance symbols 8L are arranged in a line in the vertical direction in this order.

When the preceding medium effect pattern 8C (number "5" with bright green color and number "6" with bright blue color) starts moving toward the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), the lower part of the preceding medium effect pattern 8C (approximately a quarter of the preceding medium effect pattern 8C) jumps out from the lower side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the upper portion (the remaining portion of the preceding medium effect pattern 8C) Approximately three-quarters of the production pattern 8C) stops moving while maintaining the display mode. In the state where the movement is stopped, the preceding medium effect pattern 8C is on the medium reference vertical line passing through the center of the medium fluctuation display area in the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr (that is, on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a). The state in which it was placed remains maintained.

When the subsequent medium production symbol 8C (number "6" with bright blue color) starts moving upward in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) and opposite to the normal fluctuation direction, The upper part of the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C (approximately a quarter of the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C) jumps out from the upper side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the remainder of the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C The lower part (approximately three-quarters of the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C) is kept in the displayed state and stops moving. In the state where the movement is stopped, the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C remains arranged on the medium reference vertical line (that is, on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a). There is.

In this way, on the middle reference vertical line (that is, on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a), the following medium effect symbols 8C and the preceding medium effect symbols 8C are placed in a vertical line in the order of The state in which it was placed remains maintained.

The right side where the right production symbol 8R (number "4" with bright blue color) is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, the lower side) and in a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction (direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction). When the right side of the right performance pattern 8R starts to move horizontally toward The vehicle stops moving while maintaining a state in which the vehicle can be visually recognized. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the right performance symbol 8R (a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the right performance symbol 8R, and the center of the left side and the center of the right side of this rectangular shape) The point where the horizontal line that passes through and intersects the right side of the display screen 7a is moved horizontally to the right by a predetermined distance (for example, 30 mm) from the right reference vertical line that passes through the center of the right variable display area in the right variable display area 8Rr. The state in which the right effect pattern 8R is arranged on the vertical line remains maintained. Hereinafter, a vertical line that is shifted horizontally to the right by a predetermined distance (for example, 30 mm) from the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the right variable display area in the right variable display area 8Rr and is closer to the left side of the display screen 7a is referred to as a "right vertical line". It may be written as

The preceding right production symbol 8R (number "3" with bright green color) is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and diagonally downward toward the lower right side, which is diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction. (lower right diagonal 45 degrees), the right side of the preceding right effect pattern 8R approaches the right side of the display screen 7a and jumps out from the right side, and although it does not become difficult to see, the preceding right effect pattern 8R The lower part (approximately two-thirds of the right effect pattern 8R) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the upper part (the right effect), which is the remaining part of the preceding right effect pattern 8R. Approximately one-third of the symbol 8R) stops moving while maintaining the display mode. When the movement is stopped, the center of the preceding right performance symbol 8R (the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the preceding right performance symbol 8R, and the center of the left side of this rectangular shape) The point where the horizontal line passing through the center of the right side intersects remains on the right vertical line.

The subsequent right production symbol 8R (number "6" with bright blue color) is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and diagonally upward (towards the upper right side, which is a direction diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction). When the right side of the subsequent right effect pattern 8R approaches the right side of the display screen 7a and does not jump out from the right side, making it difficult to see, the upper part of the subsequent right effect pattern 8R (approximately two-thirds of the right performance pattern 8R) jumps out from the upper side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the lower part (approximately two-thirds of the right performance pattern 8R) that is the remaining portion of the subsequent right performance pattern 8R (approximately 1/3 of the area) remains in the displayed manner and stops moving. When the movement is stopped, the following right performance symbol 8R (a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the subsequent right performance symbol 8R, and the center of the left side and the center of the right side of this rectangular shape) The point where the horizontal line passing through and intersects remains on the right vertical line.

In this way, on the right vertical line, the following right performance pattern 8R, right performance pattern 8R, and preceding right performance pattern 8R remain arranged in a line in the vertical direction in this order.

The left presentation pattern 8L moves to the left, the preceding left presentation pattern 8L moves diagonally to the lower left at 45 degrees, the subsequent left presentation pattern 8L moves to the upper left diagonally at 45 degrees, and the preceding middle presentation pattern 8C moves to the bottom. The following middle effect pattern 8C moves upward, the right effect pattern 8R moves to the right, the preceding right effect pattern 8R moves diagonally to the lower right at 45 degrees, and the subsequent right effect pattern 8R moves diagonally to the upper right. When the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is started by moving to 45 degrees, the preceding left performance symbol 8L, left performance symbol 8L, subsequent left performance symbol 8L, preceding middle performance symbol 8C, and subsequent The middle effect pattern 8C, the preceding right effect pattern 8R, the right effect pattern 8R, and the subsequent right effect pattern 8R have changed to a state where they are separated from each other and spread out. When the symbols spread apart from each other, the color of these performance symbols changes to another color, thereby indicating the expectation of winning with respect to the variation. Other colors include purple and yellow (gold), and when the color of these production patterns changes from their own color to purple, the probability of winning is higher, and it changes to yellow (gold) instead of purple. The expectation of winning is higher when the color changes than when the color changes to purple. The winning expectation in purple is the same as the red pending icon (red fluctuating icon), and the winning expectation in yellow (gold) is the same as the yellow (golden) pending icon (yellow ( The winning expectation is the same as that of the golden (Fluctuating icon). In addition, when changing to another color, when the movement of these performance symbols is completed, the color of the performance symbol returns to the original color of each performance symbol. Here, the colors of these performance symbols are kept in the color of their own performance symbols and are moving, and have not changed to any other color at all.

Horizontal movement of the left effect pattern 8L to the left, movement of the preceding left effect pattern 8L to the lower left diagonally at 45 degrees, movement of the subsequent left effect pattern 8L to the upper left diagonally at 45 degrees, lower side of the preceding middle effect pattern 8C Vertical movement to, vertical movement upwards of the following medium production symbol 8C, horizontal movement to the right of the right production symbol 8R, movement of the preceding right production symbol 8R to the lower right diagonal 45 degrees, subsequent right production symbol The movement of the symbols 8R to the upper right diagonally at 45 degrees starts all at once (simultaneously), and then stops moving all at once (simultaneously), and this state is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). Although not shown, the blank symbol is also moved in a predetermined direction so as to be placed between the preceding performance symbol and the subsequent performance symbol. At this time, the blank design having a dark blue color changes from dark blue to another color when the color of the performance design changes from its own color to another color. You can also keep it dark blue.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIGS. 67(C) and (D), the preceding left presentation pattern 8L, left presentation pattern 8L, subsequent left presentation pattern 8L, and preceding The medium effect pattern 8C, the following medium effect pattern 8C, the preceding right effect pattern 8R, the right effect pattern 8R, and the following right effect pattern 8R all move toward the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) all at once (simultaneously) from low speed. The display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, resulting in a rapidly changing display mode.

As the left effect pattern 8L (the number "9" having a bright green color) moves towards the normal fluctuation direction, the preceding left effect pattern 8L (the number "8" having a bright blue color) jumps out to the lower side of the display screen 7a and is visible. At the same time, the subsequent left effect pattern 8L (number "1" in bright green) enters the display screen 7a, making it possible to visually recognize the entirety. Then, by the time the left presentation pattern 8L (number "9" with bright green color) jumps out to the lower side of the display screen 7a, the subsequent presentation pattern ( Hereinafter, the number "2" having a bright blue color (which may be referred to as "second succeeding left effect symbol") appears from the upper side of the display screen 7a and heads in the normal fluctuation direction. This second subsequent left effect pattern 8L also includes the preceding left effect pattern 8L of the number "8" having a bright blue color, the left effect pattern 8L of the number "9" having a bright green color, and the left effect pattern 8L of the number "1" having a bright green color. Like the subsequent left performance pattern 8L, the left side of the second subsequent left performance pattern 8L approaches the vicinity of the left side of the display screen 7a, but maintains an aspect in which it does not jump out from the left side and become difficult to see. In other words, the preceding left effect symbol 8L, the left effect symbol 8L, the subsequent left effect symbol 8L, and the second subsequent left effect symbol 8L are to the left of the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left variable display area in the left variable display area 8Lr. It remains positioned on the left vertical line as it moves towards the left side.

In addition, the preceding medium effect pattern 8C (number "5" in bright green color) jumps out to the bottom of the display screen 7a as it moves toward the normal fluctuation direction, making it difficult to see, and the following medium effect pattern 8C (bright blue color) The number ``6'') also usually goes in the direction of fluctuation. Then, by the time the subsequent middle effect pattern 8C (the number "6" having a bright blue color) reaches the bottom side of the display screen 7a, the further succeeding left effect pattern 8L (the number "6" having a bright blue color) A number "7" having a bright red color, which is a production pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "second succeeding medium production pattern"), appears from the upper side of the display screen 7a and heads in the direction of normal variation. This second subsequent medium effect pattern 8C is similar to the preceding medium effect pattern 8C of the number "5" having a bright green color and the left effect pattern 8L following the number "6" having a bright blue color, in the medium variation display area. It is arranged on the middle reference vertical line passing through the center of the medium fluctuation display area in 8Cr (in other words, on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a). In other words, the preceding medium effect pattern 8C, the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C, and the second subsequent medium effect pattern 8C are on the medium reference vertical line passing through the center of the medium variation display area in the medium variation display area 8Cr (that is, on the display screen 7a (on a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side) is maintained.

In addition, as the right effect pattern 8R (the number "4" having a bright blue color) moves towards the normal fluctuation direction, the preceding right effect pattern 8R (the number "3" having a bright green color) jumps out to the lower side of the display screen 7a. At the same time, the subsequent right effect pattern 8R (number "5" having bright green color) enters the display screen 7a and can be visually recognized as a whole. Then, by the time the right effect pattern 8R (number "4" with bright blue color) jumps out to the lower side of the display screen 7a, the effect pattern ( Hereinafter, the number "6" having a bright blue color (sometimes referred to as "second succeeding right effect symbol") appears from the upper side of the display screen 7a and heads in the normal fluctuation direction. This second subsequent right effect pattern 8R also includes the preceding right effect pattern 8R of the number "3" having a bright green color, the right effect pattern 8R of the number "4" having a bright blue color, and the right effect pattern 8R of the number "5" having a bright green color. Like the subsequent right performance pattern 8R, the right side of the second subsequent right performance pattern 8R approaches the vicinity of the right side of the display screen 7a, but maintains a mode in which it does not jump out from the right side and become difficult to see. In other words, the preceding right production symbol 8R, right production symbol 8R, subsequent right production symbol 8R, and second subsequent right production symbol 8R are to the right of the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the right variation display area in the right variation display area 8Rr. It remains positioned on the vertical line to the right.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67(E), it is placed on the left vertical line that moves leftward from the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left fluctuation display area in the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, and the The left performance symbol 8L (preceding left performance symbol 8L, subsequent left performance symbol 8L) moves to the right side and is placed again on the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left fluctuation display area, and the right fluctuation display area 8Rr The right production symbol 8R (preceding right production symbol 8R, subsequent right production symbol 8R) moves to the left and is again placed on the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the right variable display area. In other words, when the variable display (variable display) of the production symbols starts, the left production symbol 8L (preceding left production symbol 8L, subsequent left production symbol 8L), middle production symbol 8C (preceding middle production symbol 8C, subsequent left production symbol 8L), The middle effect pattern 8C) and the right effect pattern 8R (preceding right effect pattern 8R, subsequent right effect pattern 8R) are separated from each other and spread out, and then move in the normal fluctuation direction while staying in this spread state. When the display starts from a low speed and gradually increases the speed, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state and fluctuating at high speed, during the fluctuation, it returns to the state before separating, that is, the state before spreading. It starts moving and then returns to its original state before spreading.

As a result, the left effect pattern 8L (preceding left effect pattern 8L, subsequent left effect pattern 8L) is placed on the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left variable display area, and the middle effect pattern 8C (preceding medium effect pattern 8C, The subsequent medium effect pattern 8C) is placed on the middle reference vertical line passing through the center of the medium variation display area, and the right effect pattern 8R (preceding right effect pattern 8R, subsequent right effect pattern 8R) passes through the center of the right variation display area. It is in a state where it is placed on the right side standard vertical line that passes through, and the left effect pattern 8L (preceding left effect pattern 8L, subsequent left effect pattern 8L), middle effect pattern 8C (preceding medium effect pattern 8C, subsequent medium effect pattern 8C) ), the right performance symbol 8R (preceding right performance symbol 8R, subsequent right performance symbol 8R) moves in the normal variation direction (that is, downward) in each variation display area.

During this fluctuation, the game ball enters the first starting port 20 by the player's operation of the handle 60, and is determined and displayed as the green first holding icon 9A by pre-reading. As a result, the pending icon 9A is stocked and only one icon exists.

After that, the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R decelerate just before they stop and change from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and first, the left effect pattern 8L has bright green numbers " 3", a blank symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area, a blank symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuation display area, and finally a blank symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the middle fluctuation display area.

In this state, the number "2" having a bright blue color, which is the preceding left effect pattern 8L, is placed below the left effect pattern 8L, which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left variable display area, and the number "2", which is the preceding left effect pattern 8L, is placed below the left effect pattern 8L, which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left variable display area, and the subsequent left effect pattern 8L is The number "4" having a certain bright blue color is arranged above the left effect pattern 8L which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left variable display area. The lower part of the preceding left presentation pattern 8L (approximately one-half portion of the preceding left presentation pattern 8L) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the portion of the preceding left presentation pattern 8L. The remaining part, the upper part (approximately 1/2 part of the preceding left production symbol 8L), remains displayed, and the upper part of the subsequent left production symbol 8L (the subsequent left production symbol 8L) remains displayed. Approximately 1/2 part of the production pattern 8L) jumps out from the upper side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the lower part (the remaining part of the subsequent left production pattern 8L) (approximately one-half of the total) remains unchanged.

In addition, the number "1" having a bright green color, which is the preceding right production symbol 8R, is placed below the blank symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuation display area, and the number "1" having a bright green color, which is the preceding right production symbol 8R, is placed below the blank symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuation display area, and the number "1" having a bright green color, which is the preceding right production symbol 8R, is placed below the blank symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuation display area, and the number "1" having a bright green color, which is the preceding right production symbol 8R, is placed below the blank symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuation display area. The number "2" having the number "2" is arranged above the blank symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right variable display area. Both the preceding right performance pattern 8R and the subsequent right performance pattern 8R remain displayed in a state where they can be visually recognized in their entirety without protruding from the lower or upper sides of the display screen 7a. ing.

In addition, the number "7" having a bright red color which is the preceding medium effect symbol 8C is placed below the blank symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area, and the number "7" having a bright red color which is the preceding medium effect symbol 8C is placed below the blank symbol which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area, and the number "7" having a bright red color which is the preceding medium effect symbol 8C is placed below the blank symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area, The number "8" having the number "8" is arranged above the blank symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area. Both the preceding medium effect pattern 8C and the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C remain displayed in a state where they can be viewed in their entirety without protruding from the lower or upper sides of the display screen 7a. ing.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67(F), a left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the center of the left variable display area, a blank symbol is displayed in the center of the middle variable display area, and a blank symbol is stopped in the center of the right variable display area. As a result, the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are aligned in the same pattern in the left and right direction with the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a as the center line. The display will stop and the loss will be confirmed. Accordingly, the white fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbols is started as shown in FIG. 67(G). When the variable display (variable display) of the production symbols starts, the preceding left production symbol 8L, the left production symbol 8L, the following left production symbol 8L, the preceding middle production symbol 8C, (here, the middle production symbol 8C is the middle production symbol) It is not placed in the center of the variable display area, and a blank symbol is placed.), the following medium effect pattern 8C, the preceding right effect pattern 8R, (here, the right effect pattern 8R is not placed in the center of the right variable display area). , a blank symbol is arranged.), Before the set of subsequent right performance symbols 8R starts moving in the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction), the left fluctuation display is displayed in the left fluctuation display area 8Lr. The left production symbol 8L (the bright green number "3") that was stopped and displayed in the center of the area is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, the lower side), and in a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction (normal fluctuation direction). It starts moving horizontally towards the left in the direction perpendicular to the left direction (direction perpendicular to The bright blue number "2") moves diagonally downward (45 degrees diagonally to the lower left) toward the lower left side, which is a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) and is diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction. The left performance symbol 8L (number "3" with bright green color) that was stopped and displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area, followed by the left performance symbol 8L (number "4" with bright blue color), moves in the normal fluctuation direction ( In other words, it starts moving diagonally upward (45 degrees diagonally to the upper left) toward the upper left side, which is a direction different from the lower side) and diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction.

In addition, when the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbol is started, the preceding medium performance symbol 8C (the bright red number "7") moves in the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) in the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr. The subsequent medium production symbol 8C (number "8" in bright blue) is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and upward, which is the opposite direction to the normal fluctuation direction. Start moving towards.

In addition, when the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbol is started, in the right fluctuating display area 8Rr, the preceding right performance symbol R (the bright green number "1") is in the normal fluctuating direction (that is, downward). is in a different direction and starts moving diagonally downward (45 degrees diagonally to the lower right) toward the lower right side, which is diagonal to the normal movement direction, and the subsequent right production symbol 8R (number "2" with bright blue color) '') starts to move diagonally upward (45 degrees diagonally to the upper right) toward the upper right side, which is a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) and diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction.

Here, the preceding left effect pattern 8L, the left effect pattern 8L, the subsequent left effect pattern 8L, the preceding medium effect pattern 8C, the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C, the preceding right effect pattern 8R, and the subsequent right effect pattern 8R are , started moving all at once (at the same time). However, the preceding left presentation pattern 8L, left presentation pattern 8L, and subsequent left presentation pattern 8L start moving, and while the preceding left presentation pattern 8L, left presentation pattern 8L, and subsequent left presentation pattern 8L are moving, or, After the movement is completed, the preceding medium effect symbol 8C and the following medium effect symbol 8C start moving, and during the movement of the preceding medium effect symbol 8C and the following medium effect symbol 8C, or after the movement is completed, the preceding right effect symbol 8C starts moving. The symbol 8R and the subsequent right effect symbol 8R may start moving. Note that when the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, there is no stocked pending icon 9A at all.

The left side where the left production pattern 8L (the bright green number "3") is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, the lower side) and in a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction (a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction). When it starts to move horizontally toward The vehicle stops moving while maintaining a state in which the vehicle can be visually recognized. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the left performance symbol 8L (a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of a virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the left performance symbol 8L, and the center of the left side and the center of the right side of this rectangular shape) The point where the horizontal line that passes through and the intersection point) remains on the left vertical line.

The preceding left production symbol 8L (number "2" with bright blue color) is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and is diagonally downward (toward the lower left side, which is diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction). When the left side of the preceding left effect pattern 8L approaches the left side of the display screen 7a and does not jump out from the left side, making it difficult to see, the lower side of the preceding left effect pattern 8L A portion (approximately two-thirds of the preceding left effect pattern 8L) jumps out from the lower side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the upper portion (the remaining portion of the preceding left effect pattern 8L) Approximately one-third of the left performance symbol 8L) stops moving while maintaining the display mode. When the movement is stopped, the center of the preceding left performance symbol 8L (the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the preceding left performance symbol 8L, and the center of the left side of this rectangular shape) The point where the horizontal line passing through the center of the right side intersects remains on the left vertical line.

The subsequent left direction design 8L (number "4" with bright blue color) is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and diagonally upward (towards the upper left side, which is a direction diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction). When the left side of the subsequent left effect pattern 8L approaches the left side of the display screen 7a and does not jump out from the left side, making it difficult to see, the upper part of the subsequent left effect pattern 8L (approximately two-thirds of the subsequent left presentation pattern 8L) jumps out from the upper side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the remaining portion of the subsequent left presentation pattern 8L, the lower portion (the subsequent Approximately one-third of the left performance symbol 8L) stops moving while maintaining the display mode. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the subsequent left performance symbol 8L (the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the subsequent left performance symbol 8L, and the center of the left side of this rectangular shape) The point where the horizontal line passing through the center of the right side intersects remains on the left vertical line.

In this way, on the left vertical line, a state is maintained in which the following left performance symbols 8L, 8L left performance symbols, and the preceding left performance symbols 8L are arranged in a line in the vertical direction in this order.

When the preceding medium effect pattern 8C (number "7" with bright red color) starts moving towards the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), the lower part of the preceding medium effect pattern 8C (approximately 4 points of the medium effect pattern 8C) The upper part (approximately 3/4 of the middle effect pattern 8C) that is the remaining part of the preceding medium effect pattern 8C jumps out from the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see. It stops moving while maintaining the display mode. In the state where the movement is stopped, the preceding medium performance symbol 8C is placed on the medium reference vertical line passing through the center of the medium fluctuation display area in the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, that is, on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a. The current state has been maintained.

When the subsequent medium production symbol 8C (number "8" with bright blue color) starts moving upward in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) and opposite to the normal fluctuation direction, The upper part of the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C (approximately a quarter of the medium effect pattern 8C) jumps out from the upper side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the remaining part of the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C The movement is stopped while a certain upper part (approximately three-quarters of the middle effect pattern 8C) is maintained in a displayed manner. In the state where the movement is stopped, the subsequent medium performance pattern 8C remains arranged on the medium reference vertical line, that is, the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a.

In this way, on the middle reference vertical line (that is, on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a), the following medium effect symbols 8C and the preceding medium effect symbols 8C are placed in a vertical line in the order of The state in which it was placed remains maintained.

The preceding right production symbol 8R (number "1" with bright green color) is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and diagonally downward toward the lower right side, which is diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction. (lower right diagonal 45 degrees), the right side of the preceding right effect pattern 8R approaches the right side of the display screen 7a and jumps out from the right side, making it difficult to see, but the right side of the preceding right effect pattern 8R The lower part (approximately a quarter of the preceding right performance symbol 8R) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the upper portion (the remaining portion of the preceding right performance symbol 8R) Approximately three-quarters of the preceding right performance symbol 8R) moves and stops while the display mode is maintained. When the movement is stopped, the center of the preceding right performance symbol 8R (the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of a virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the preceding right performance symbol 8R, and the center of the left side of this rectangular shape) The point where the horizontal line passing through the center of the right side intersects remains on the right vertical line.

The subsequent left production symbol 8L (number "2" with bright blue color) is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and diagonally upward (toward the upper right side, which is a direction diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction). When the right side of the subsequent right effect pattern 8R approaches the right side of the display screen 7a and does not jump out from the right side and becomes difficult to see, the upper part of the subsequent right effect pattern 8R (approximately a quarter of the subsequent right performance symbol 8R) jumps out from the upper side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the lower portion (the remaining portion of the subsequent right performance symbol 8R) (the subsequent Approximately three-quarters of the right performance symbol 8R) stops moving while maintaining the display mode. When the movement is stopped, the following right performance symbol 8R (a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of a virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the subsequent right performance symbol 8R, and the center of the left side and the center of the right side of this rectangular shape) The point where the horizontal line passing through and intersects remains on the right vertical line.

In this way, on the right vertical line, the following right performance pattern 8R, right performance pattern 8R, and preceding right performance pattern 8R remain arranged in a line in the vertical direction in this order. In addition, the upper side of the preceding middle effect pattern 8C (the number "7" having a bright red color) and the upper side of the preceding right effect pattern 8R (the number "1" having a bright green color) are placed on the same horizontal line. The lower side of the following middle effect pattern 8C (number "8" with bright blue color) and the lower side of the subsequent right effect pattern 8R (number "2" with bright blue color) are on the same horizontal line. arranged and lined up.

The left presentation pattern 8L moves to the left, the preceding left presentation pattern 8L moves diagonally to the lower left at 45 degrees, the subsequent left presentation pattern 8L moves to the upper left diagonally at 45 degrees, and the preceding middle presentation pattern 8C moves to the bottom. The following medium performance symbol 8C moves upward, the preceding right performance symbol 8R moves diagonally to the lower right at 45 degrees, and the succeeding right performance symbol 8R moves diagonally to the upper right at 45 degrees. When the variable display (variable display) starts, the preceding left effect symbol 8L, the left effect symbol 8L, the following left effect symbol 8L, the preceding middle effect symbol 8C, the succeeding middle effect symbol 8C, the preceding right effect symbol. The pattern 8R and the subsequent right effect pattern 8R have changed to a state where they are separated from each other and spread out. When the symbols spread apart from each other, the color of these performance symbols changes to another color, thereby indicating the expectation of winning with respect to the variation. As mentioned above, other colors include purple and yellow (gold), and when the color of these production symbols changes from each person's own color to purple, the probability of winning is higher; The expectation of winning is higher when the color changes to yellow (gold) than when it changes to purple. The winning expectation in purple is the same as the red pending icon (red fluctuating icon), and the winning expectation in yellow (gold) is the same as the yellow (golden) pending icon (yellow ( The expectation of winning is the same as that of the Golden) fluctuating icon). In addition, when changing to another color, when the movement of these performance symbols is completed, the color of the performance symbol returns to the original color of each performance symbol. Here, the colors of these performance symbols are kept in the color of their own performance symbols and are moving, and have not changed to any other color at all.

Horizontal movement of the left effect pattern 8L to the left, movement of the preceding left effect pattern 8L to the lower left diagonally at 45 degrees, movement of the subsequent left effect pattern 8L to the upper left diagonally at 45 degrees, lower side of the preceding middle effect pattern 8C vertical movement to the upper side of the following medium production symbol 8C, horizontal movement to the right of the right production symbol 8R, movement of the preceding right production symbol 8R to the lower right diagonally 45 degrees, subsequent right production symbol The movement of the symbols 8R to the upper right diagonally at 45 degrees starts all at once (simultaneously), and then stops moving all at once (simultaneously), and this state is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). Although not shown, the blank symbol is also moved in a predetermined direction so as to be placed between the preceding performance symbol and the subsequent performance symbol. At this time, the blank design having a dark blue color changes from dark blue to another color when the color of the performance design changes from its own color to another color. You can also keep it dark blue.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIGS. 67(H) and (I), the preceding left presentation pattern 8L, left presentation pattern 8L, subsequent left presentation pattern 8L, and preceding left presentation pattern 8L remain as they are. The medium effect pattern 8C, the following medium effect pattern 8C, the preceding right effect pattern 8R, and the following right effect pattern 8R all move toward the normal variation direction (that is, downward) all at once (at the same time) and gradually increase the speed from low speed. However, the display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a rapidly changing display mode.

As the left effect pattern 8L (the number "3" having a bright green color) moves towards the normal fluctuation direction, the preceding left effect pattern 8L (the number "2" having a bright blue color) jumps out to the lower side of the display screen 7a and is visible. At the same time, the subsequent left effect pattern 8L (number "4" in bright blue) enters the display screen 7a and can be seen in its entirety. Then, by the time the left presentation pattern 8L (the bright green number "3") jumps out to the bottom of the display screen 7a, the second subsequent left presentation pattern 8L, the bright blue number "5", appears on the display screen 7a. It appears from the upper side and usually moves in the direction of fluctuation. This second subsequent left effect pattern 8L also includes the preceding left effect pattern 8L of the number "2" having a bright blue color, the left effect pattern 8L of the number "3" having a bright green color, and the left effect pattern 8L of the number "4" having a bright blue color. Like the subsequent left performance pattern 8L, the left side of the second subsequent left performance pattern 8L approaches the vicinity of the left side of the display screen 7a, but maintains an aspect in which it does not jump out from the left side and become difficult to see. In other words, the preceding left effect symbol 8L, the left effect symbol 8L, the subsequent left effect symbol 8L, and the second subsequent left effect symbol 8L are to the left of the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left variable display area in the left variable display area 8Lr. It remains positioned on the left vertical line as it moves toward the left side.

In addition, the preceding medium effect pattern 8C (number "7" with bright red color) jumps out to the lower side of the display screen 7a as it moves toward the normal fluctuation direction, making it difficult to see, and the following medium effect pattern 8C (bright blue color) The number ``8'') also usually goes in the direction of fluctuation. Then, by the time the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C (the number "8" having a bright blue color) reaches the lower side of the display screen 7a, the second subsequent medium effect pattern 8C, the number "9" having a bright green color, is displayed. It appears from the upper side of the screen 7a and goes in the direction of normal fluctuation. This second subsequent medium effect pattern 8C is also similar to the preceding medium effect pattern 8C with bright red number "7" and the subsequent left effect pattern 8L with bright blue color "8" in the medium variation display area. It is arranged on the middle reference vertical line passing through the center of the medium fluctuation display area in 8Cr (in other words, on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a). That is, the preceding medium effect pattern 8C, the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C, and the second subsequent medium effect pattern 8C are on the medium reference vertical line passing through the center of the medium variation display area in the medium variation display area 8Cr (that is, on the display screen 7a (on a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side) is maintained.

In addition, as the preceding right effect pattern 8R (number "1" with bright green color) moves toward the normal fluctuation direction, it jumps out to the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the subsequent right effect pattern 8R (bright blue color) The number ``2'') with ``2'') also usually goes in the direction of fluctuation. Then, by the time the subsequent right effect pattern 8R (number "2" having a bright blue color) reaches the lower side of the display screen 7a, the second subsequent right effect pattern 8R, a number "3" having a bright green color, is displayed. It appears from the upper side of the screen 7a and goes in the direction of normal fluctuation. This second succeeding right effect pattern 8R is also similar to the preceding right effect pattern 8R with the bright green number "1" and the subsequent right effect pattern 8R with the bright blue number "2", in the right fluctuation display area. It is arranged on the right vertical line passing through the center of the right variable display area at 8Rr. In other words, the preceding right production symbol 8R, the subsequent right production symbol 8R, and the second subsequent right production symbol 8R are on the right side moved to the right from the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the right variation display area in the right variation display area 8Rr. It remains aligned vertically.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67(J), the display is placed on the left vertical line that is moved leftward from the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left fluctuation display area in the left fluctuation display area 8Lr. The left performance symbol 8L (preceding left performance symbol 8L, subsequent left performance symbol 8L) moves to the right side and is placed again on the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left fluctuation display area, and the right fluctuation display area 8Rr The right production symbol 8R (preceding right production symbol 8R, subsequent right production symbol 8R) moves to the left and is again placed on the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the right variable display area. In other words, when the variable display (variable display) of the production symbols starts, the left production symbol 8L (preceding left production symbol 8L, subsequent left production symbol 8L), middle production symbol 8C (preceding middle production symbol 8C, subsequent left production symbol 8L), The middle effect pattern 8C) and the right effect pattern 8R (preceding right effect pattern 8R, subsequent right effect pattern 8R) are separated from each other and spread out, and then move in the normal fluctuation direction while staying in this spread state. When the display mode starts and gradually increases from a low speed and changes from an opaque state to a translucent state and fluctuates at high speed, during the fluctuation, it returns to the state before separating, that is, the state before spreading. It starts moving and then returns to its original state before spreading.

As a result, the left effect pattern 8L (preceding left effect pattern 8L, subsequent left effect pattern 8L) is placed on the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left variable display area, and the middle effect pattern 8C (preceding medium effect pattern 8C, The subsequent medium effect pattern 8C) is placed on the middle reference vertical line passing through the center of the medium variation display area, and the right effect pattern 8R (preceding right effect pattern 8R, subsequent right effect pattern 8R) passes through the center of the right variation display area. It is in a state where it is placed on the right side reference vertical line that passes through, and the left effect pattern 8L (preceding left effect pattern 8L, subsequent left effect pattern 8L), middle effect pattern 8C (preceding medium effect pattern 8C, subsequent medium effect pattern 8C) ), the right performance symbol 8R (preceding right performance symbol 8R, subsequent right performance symbol 8R) moves in the normal variation direction (that is, downward) in each variation display area.

After that, the left presentation pattern 8L, middle presentation pattern 8C, and right presentation pattern 8R decelerate just before they stop and change from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and first, the left presentation pattern 8L has bright blue numbers " 8", it is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left variable display area, the right effect pattern 8R has a bright blue color, and the number "6'' is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right variable display area, and finally, the middle effect pattern 8C has a bright green color. The number "1" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area.

In this state, the number "7" in bright red, which is the preceding left presentation symbol 8L, is placed below the left presentation symbol 8L, which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left variable display area, and the number "7", which is the preceding left presentation symbol 8L, is placed below the left presentation symbol 8L, which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left variable display area, and the number "7", which is the preceding left presentation symbol 8L, is placed below the left presentation symbol 8L, which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left variable display area. The number "9" having a certain bright green color is arranged above the left effect pattern 8L which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left variable display area. The lower part of the preceding left presentation pattern 8L (approximately one-half portion of the preceding left presentation pattern 8L) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the portion of the preceding left presentation pattern 8L. The remaining part, the upper part (approximately 1/2 part of the preceding left production symbol 8L), remains displayed, and the upper part of the subsequent left production symbol 8L (the subsequent left production symbol 8L) remains unchanged. Approximately 1/2 part of the production pattern 8L) jumps out from the upper side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the lower part (the remaining part of the subsequent left production pattern 8L) (approximately one-half of the original) remains unchanged.

In addition, the number "5" having a bright green color, which is the preceding right production symbol 8R, is placed below the right production symbol 8R, which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right variable display area, and the number "5", which is a bright green color that is the preceding right production symbol 8R, is placed below the right production symbol 8R, which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuation display area. The number "7" in red is arranged above the right performance symbol 8R which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right variable display area. The lower part of the preceding right performance pattern 8R (approximately 1/2 part of the preceding right performance pattern 8R) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and at the same time, the lower part of the preceding right performance pattern 8R The remaining upper part (approximately 1/2 part of the preceding right performance symbol 8R) remains displayed, and the upper part of the subsequent right production symbol 8R (the subsequent right Approximately 1/2 part of the production pattern 8R) jumps out from the upper side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the lower part (the remaining part of the subsequent right production pattern 8R) (approximately one-half of the total) remains unchanged.

In addition, the number "9" in bright green, which is the preceding medium effect pattern 8C, is placed below the medium effect pattern 8C, which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area, and the number "9", which is the bright green color which is the preceding medium effect pattern 8C, is placed below the medium effect pattern 8C, which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area, and The number "2" having a blue color is arranged above the medium effect pattern 8C which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area. The lower part of the preceding medium effect pattern 8C (approximately half the portion of the preceding medium effect pattern 8C) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and at the same time, the lower part of the preceding medium effect pattern 8C The remaining part, the upper part (approximately 1/2 part of the preceding medium effect pattern 8C) remains displayed, and the upper part of the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C (the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C) remains displayed. Approximately 1/2 part of the effect pattern 8C) jumps out from the upper side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the lower part (the remaining part of the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C) (approximately one-half of the total) remains unchanged.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67(K), a left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the center of the left variable display area, a medium effect symbol 8C is displayed in the center of the medium variable display area, and a right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the center of the right variable display area. As a result, the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are aligned in the same pattern in the horizontal direction with the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a as the center line. The display will stop and the loss will be confirmed. Accordingly, the white fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20 by the player's operation of the handle 60 and the first holding icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable effect of the effect design (fluctuating display) is started, and if the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are not aligned with the same pattern and are stopped and displayed, a loss is confirmed, whereas the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8R When the symbol 8C and the right performance symbol 8R are the same symbol and are stopped and displayed, a hit is confirmed, a jackpot opening is started, and then a jackpot game in which a profit is given to the player is started. .

[Production symbol movement variation production C]
Next, the effect symbol movement variation effect C will be explained with reference to FIG. 68. Here, a game is played by shooting the game ball so that it flows down the left game area 3A, and the game ball is played by hitting the left hand.The game ball flowing down enters the first starting port 20, and the white first reservation The icon 9A is determined and displayed. When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and takes over the white variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbols is started. When the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols starts, the left performance symbol 8L, middle performance symbol 8C, and right performance symbol 8R change from opaque to translucent while gradually increasing the speed from low speed toward the normal fluctuation direction. This results in a display mode that changes at high speed. During this fluctuation, the game ball enters the first starting port 20, and is determined and displayed as the white first reservation icon 9A by pre-reading. As a result, the pending icon 9A is stocked and only one icon exists. Although the player continues to operate the handle 60, the game ball has not entered the first starting port 20.

After that, first, the left effect symbol 8L is displayed as a temporary stop in the center of the left variable display area at the bright green number "9", and the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped in the center of the right variable display area at the bright blue number "4". is displayed, and a blank symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area. In this state, the number "8" having a bright blue color, which is the preceding left presentation symbol 8L, is placed below the left presentation symbol 8L, which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left variable display area, and the number "8", which is the preceding left presentation symbol 8L, is placed below the left presentation symbol 8L, which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left variable display area, and the number "8", which is the preceding left presentation symbol 8L, is placed below the left presentation symbol 8L, which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left variable display area, and the number "8", which is the preceding left presentation symbol 8L, is placed below the left presentation symbol 8L, which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left variable display area. The number "1" having a certain bright green color is arranged above the left effect symbol 8L which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left variable display area. The lower part of the preceding left presentation pattern 8L (approximately one-half portion of the preceding left presentation pattern 8L) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the portion of the preceding left presentation pattern 8L. The remaining part, the upper part (approximately 1/2 part of the preceding left production symbol 8L), remains displayed, and the upper part of the subsequent left production symbol 8L (the subsequent left production symbol 8L) remains unchanged. Approximately 1/2 part of the production pattern 8L) jumps out from the upper side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the lower part (the remaining part of the subsequent left production pattern 8L) (approximately one-half of the total) remains unchanged.

In addition, the number "3" having a bright green color, which is the preceding right production symbol 8R, is placed below the right production symbol 8R, which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right variable display area, and the number "3", which is the preceding right production symbol 8R, is placed below the right production symbol 8R, which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right variation display area, and the number "3", which is the bright green color that is the preceding right production symbol 8R, is placed below the right production symbol 8R, which is displayed temporarily in the center of the right fluctuation display area. The number "5" having green color is arranged above the right performance symbol 8R which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right variable display area. The lower part of the preceding right performance pattern 8R (approximately 1/2 part of the preceding right performance pattern 8R) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and at the same time, the lower part of the preceding right performance pattern 8R The remaining part, the upper part (approximately 1/2 part of the preceding right performance symbol 8R) remains displayed, and the upper part of the subsequent right production symbol 8R (the subsequent right Approximately 1/2 part of the production pattern 8R) jumps out from the upper side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the lower part (the remaining part of the subsequent right production pattern 8R) (approximately one-half of the total) remains unchanged.

In addition, the number "5" having a bright green color, which is the preceding medium effect symbol 8C, is placed below the blank symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area, and the number "5" having a bright green color, which is the preceding medium effect symbol 8C, is placed below the blank symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium variation display area, and the number "5" having a bright green color, which is the preceding medium effect symbol 8C, is placed below the blank symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area, and the number "5" having a bright green color, which is the preceding medium effect symbol 8C, is placed below the blank symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area, and the number "5" having a bright green color, which is the preceding medium effect symbol 8C, is placed below the blank symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area. The number "6" having the number "6" is arranged above the blank symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area. Both the preceding medium effect pattern 8C and the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C remain displayed in a state where they can be visually recognized in their entirety without protruding from the lower or upper sides of the display screen 7a. ing.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68(A), a left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the center of the left variable display area, a blank symbol is displayed in the center of the middle variable display area, and a right effect symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in the center of the right variable display area. As a result, the left effect pattern 8L, the blank pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R are not aligned in the same pattern in a state where they are aligned in a row in the left and right direction with the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a as the center line, The display stops and the loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the white fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, the variable performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is started as shown in FIG. 68(B). When the variable display (variable display) of the production symbols starts, the preceding left production symbol 8L, the left production symbol 8L, the following left production symbol 8L, the preceding middle production symbol 8C, (here, the middle production symbol 8C is the middle production symbol) (It is not placed in the center of the variable display area, and a blank symbol is placed.), a set of production symbols: the following medium production symbol 8C, the preceding right production symbol 8R, the right production symbol 8R, and the following right production symbol 8R. Before starting to move in the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction), in the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, the left effect symbol 8L (number "9" with bright green color) that was stopped and displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area The size of the effect pattern enlarged to the first stage is about 1.5 times larger than the size of the effect pattern before it is enlarged to the first stage. (The same applies hereafter), it starts moving horizontally to the left, which is a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) and perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction (a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction). , the left effect pattern 8L (number "8" in bright blue color) preceding the left effect pattern 8L (number "9" in bright green color) that was stopped and displayed in the center of the left variable display area is enlarged to the first stage. It becomes larger and starts to move diagonally downward (45 degrees diagonally to the lower left) toward the lower left side, which is a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) and diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction, and the left fluctuation The left presentation pattern 8L (number "1" having bright green color) following the left presentation pattern 8L (number "1" having bright green color) that was stopped and displayed in the center of the display area is enlarged to the first stage and becomes larger. Then, it starts moving diagonally upward (45 degrees diagonally to the upper left) toward the upper left side, which is a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) and diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction.

Furthermore, when the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is started, the preceding medium performance symbol 8C (number "5" with bright green color) is enlarged to the first stage and becomes larger in the medium variation display area 8Cr. Then, it starts moving in the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and the subsequent medium effect symbol 8C (number "6" with bright blue color) is enlarged to the first stage and becomes larger, and moves in the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward). It starts moving upward, which is a direction different from the direction (lower side) and opposite to the normal fluctuation direction.

Also, when the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is started, in the right fluctuation display area 8Rr, the right performance symbol R (number "4" having a bright blue color) that has been stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuation display area is In the first stage, it is enlarged and becomes larger, and it moves horizontally towards the right side, which is a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) and perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction (orthogonal to the normal fluctuation direction). The right effect symbol 8R (number "3" in bright green color) preceding the right effect symbol 8R (number "4" in bright blue color) that was stopped and displayed in the center of the right variable display area is the first It expands in stages and becomes larger, diagonally downward (45 degrees diagonally to the lower right) in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) and toward the lower right side, which is diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction. The right performance symbol 8R (number "5" with bright green color) following the right performance symbol 8R (number "5" with bright green color) that started to move and was stopped and displayed in the center of the right variable display area is in the first stage. It expands and becomes larger, and starts moving diagonally upward (45 degrees diagonally to the upper right) toward the upper right side, which is a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) and diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction. .

Here, the preceding left effect pattern 8L, the left effect pattern 8L, the subsequent left effect pattern 8L, the preceding medium effect pattern 8C, the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C, the preceding right effect pattern 8R, the right effect pattern 8R, the following The right performance symbols 8R are all at once (simultaneously) enlarged to the first stage, become larger, and start moving. However, the preceding left effect pattern 8L, left effect pattern 8L, and subsequent left effect pattern 8L are enlarged to the first stage, become larger, and start moving, and the preceding left effect pattern 8L, left effect pattern 8L, and subsequent left effect pattern 8L are enlarged to the first stage and begin to move. During the movement of the effect pattern 8L, or after the movement is completed, the preceding medium effect pattern 8C and the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C are enlarged to the first stage and become larger and begin to move, and the preceding medium effect pattern 8C and the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C Even if during the movement of the medium effect symbol 8C or after the movement is completed, the preceding right effect symbol 8R, right effect symbol 8R, and subsequent right effect symbol 8R are enlarged to the first stage and become larger and start moving. good. Note that when the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, there is no stocked pending icon 9A at all.

It should be noted that when each performance symbol is enlarged to the first stage and becomes larger, a lightning bolt of a predetermined color runs through each performance symbol, and the color of the lightning bolt indicates the expected degree of winning of the fluctuation. As for the predetermined colors, the probability of winning increases in the order of white → blue → purple. Here it is a white lightning bolt. same as below. The hit expectation level of the white lightning bolt is the same as the hit expectation level of the white pending icon (white fluctuation icon), and the hit expectation level of the blue lightning bolt is the same as the hit expectation level of the blue pending icon (blue fluctuation icon). The expected degree of winning is the same, and the expected degree of winning of the purple lightning bolt is the same as that of the red pending icon (red fluctuating icon).

The left production pattern 8L (the number "9" with bright green color) is enlarged in the first stage and becomes larger, and is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (i.e. downward) and in a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction ( When it starts moving horizontally to the left, which is a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction, the left side of the left production symbol 8L (approximately one third of the left production symbol 8L from the left side to the right side) is displayed on the display screen. It jumps out from the left side of 7a and becomes difficult to see, and moves while maintaining the state in which the right side part (approximately two-thirds of the left direction pattern 8L), which is the remaining part of the left direction pattern 8L, is displayed. Stop. When the movement is stopped, the center of the left performance symbol 8L (a vertical line passing through the center of the top side and the center of the bottom side of the virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the left performance symbol 8L, and the center of the left side and the center of the right side of this rectangular shape) The point where the horizontal line intersects the left side of the display screen 7a is moved horizontally to the left by a predetermined distance (for example, 40 mm) from the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left variable display area in the left variable display area 8Lr. The state in which the left presentation pattern 8L is placed on the vertical line remains maintained. Hereinafter, a vertical line closer to the left side of the display screen 7a that has been horizontally moved to the left by a predetermined distance (for example, 40 mm) from the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left variable display area in the left variable display area 8Lr will be referred to as a "first left vertical line". It may be written as "line".

The preceding left production symbol 8L (number "8" with bright blue color) is enlarged and enlarged in the first stage, and is in a direction different from the normal movement direction (that is, downward) and diagonal to the normal movement direction. When it starts moving diagonally downward (45 degrees diagonally to the lower left), the left side of the preceding left production symbol 8L (approximately one-third of the left side of the preceding left production symbol 8L from the left side to the right side) part) jumps out from the left side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the lower part of the preceding left presentation pattern 8L (approximately three-quarters of the portion from the bottom to the top of the preceding left presentation pattern 8L) part) jumps out from the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the movement is stopped while the upper right side part, which is the remaining part of the preceding left presentation pattern 8L, remains displayed. When the movement is stopped, the center of the preceding left performance symbol 8L (the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the preceding left performance symbol 8L, and the center of the left side of this rectangular shape) The horizontal line passing through the center of the right side intersects with the horizontal line) remains located on the first left vertical line.

The subsequent left production symbol 8L (number "1" with bright green color) is enlarged in the first stage and becomes larger, and is in a direction different from the normal movement direction (that is, downward) and diagonal to the normal movement direction. When you start moving diagonally upward (45 degrees diagonally to the upper left) toward the upper left direction, the left side of the subsequent left production symbol 8L (approximately 1/3 of the left side of the subsequent left production symbol 8L from the left side to the right side) part) jumps out from the left side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the upper part of the subsequent left presentation pattern 8L (approximately three-quarters of the portion from the top to the bottom of the subsequent left presentation pattern 8L) ) jumps out from the upper side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and stops moving while maintaining the display of the lower right side portion, which is the remaining portion of the subsequent left presentation pattern 8L. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the subsequent left performance symbol 8L (the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the subsequent left performance symbol 8L, and the center of the left side of this rectangular shape) The horizontal line passing through the center of the right side intersects with the horizontal line) remains located on the first left vertical line.

In this way, on the first left vertical line, a state is maintained in which the following left performance symbols 8L, 8L left performance symbols, and the preceding left performance symbols 8L are arranged in a line in the vertical direction in this order. There is.

When the preceding medium effect symbol 8C (number "5" with bright green color) is enlarged in the first stage and becomes larger and starts moving towards the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), the preceding medium effect symbol 8C The upper part (approximately 1/2 part of the preceding medium effect pattern 8C) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the upper part (the remaining part of the preceding medium effect pattern 8C) About one half of the middle production pattern 8C) is kept in the displayed state and stops moving. In the state where the movement is stopped, the preceding medium effect pattern 8C is on the medium reference vertical line passing through the center of the medium fluctuation display area in the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr (that is, on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a). The state in which it was placed remains maintained.

The subsequent medium production pattern 8C (number "6" with bright blue color) is enlarged in the first stage and becomes larger, and is in a direction different from the normal movement direction (that is, downward) and opposite to the normal movement direction. When the movement starts toward the upper side, the upper part of the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C (approximately 1/2 part of the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C) jumps out from the upper side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see. At the same time, the movement is stopped while the lower part (approximately 1/2 part of the subsequent medium performance pattern 8C) which is the remaining part of the subsequent medium performance pattern 8C is displayed. In the state where the movement is stopped, the subsequent medium performance symbol 8C remains arranged on the medium reference vertical line (that is, on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a). There is.

In this way, on the middle reference vertical line (that is, on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a), the following medium effect symbols 8C and the preceding medium effect symbols 8C are placed in a vertical line in the order of The state in which it was placed remains maintained.

The right production symbol 8R (the number "4" with bright blue color) is enlarged and enlarged in the first stage, and is placed in a direction different from the normal movement direction (i.e. downward) and in a direction perpendicular to the normal movement direction ( When it starts moving horizontally towards the right side (direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction), the right side of the right effect symbol 8R (approximately 1/3 of the right direction of the right effect symbol 8R from the right side to the left side) is displayed on the display screen. It jumps out from the right side of 7a and becomes difficult to see, and moves while maintaining the state in which the left side part (approximately two-thirds of the right presentation pattern 8R), which is the remaining portion of the right presentation pattern 8R, is displayed. Stop. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the right performance symbol 8R (a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the right performance symbol 8R, and the center of the left side and the center of the right side of this rectangular shape) The point where the horizontal line that passes through and intersects the right side of the display screen 7a is moved horizontally to the right by a predetermined distance (for example, 40 mm) from the right reference vertical line that passes through the center of the right variable display area in the right variable display area 8Rr. The state in which the right effect pattern 8R is arranged on the vertical line remains maintained. Hereinafter, a vertical line closer to the left side of the display screen 7a that has been horizontally moved to the right by a predetermined distance (for example, 40 mm) from the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the right variable display area in the right variable display area 8Rr will be referred to as "first right vertical line". It may be written as "line".

The preceding right production symbol 8R (number "3" with bright green color) is enlarged and enlarged in the first stage, and is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) and diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction. When you start moving diagonally downward (45 degrees diagonally to the lower right), the right side of the preceding right effect pattern 8R (approximately 3 minutes from the right side of the preceding right effect pattern 8R to the left) 1) jumps out from the right side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the lower part of the preceding right presentation pattern 8R (approximately 4 minutes from the bottom to the top of the preceding right presentation pattern 8R) The part 3) jumps out from the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the movement is stopped while the upper left part, which is the remaining part of the preceding right performance pattern 8R, remains displayed. When the movement is stopped, the center of the preceding right performance symbol 8R (the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the preceding right performance symbol 8R, and the center of the left side of this rectangular shape) The horizontal line passing through the center of the right side intersects with the horizontal line) remains located on the first right vertical line.

The subsequent right production symbol 8R (number "6" with bright blue color) is enlarged in the first stage and becomes larger, and is in a direction different from the normal movement direction (that is, downward) and diagonal to the normal movement direction. When you start moving diagonally upward (45 degrees diagonally to the upper right) toward the upper right direction, the right side of the subsequent right production symbol 8R (approximately 1/3 of the right side of the subsequent right production symbol 8R from the right side to the left side) part) jumps out from the right side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the upper part of the subsequent right effect pattern 8R (approximately three-quarters of the area from the top to the bottom of the subsequent right effect pattern 8R) ) jumps out from the upper side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and it stops moving while maintaining the display of the lower left part, which is the remaining part of the subsequent right effect pattern 8R. When the movement is stopped, the following right performance symbol 8R (a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of a virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the subsequent right performance symbol 8R, and the center of the left side and the center of the right side of this rectangular shape) The point where the horizontal line passing through and intersects remains located on the first right vertical line.

In this way, on the first right vertical line, the following right performance symbol 8R, right performance symbol 8R, and preceding right performance symbol 8R remain arranged in a line in the vertical direction in this order. There is.

The left performance symbol 8L is enlarged to the first stage, becomes larger, and moves to the left, the preceding left production symbol 8L is enlarged to the first stage, becomes larger, and moves diagonally to the lower left at 45 degrees, and the subsequent left production symbol 8L is enlarged to the first stage, becomes larger, and moves diagonally to the upper left at 45 degrees, the preceding medium effect pattern 8C is enlarged to the first stage, becomes larger, and moves downward, and the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C is The right effect symbol 8R is enlarged to the first stage and becomes larger and moves to the right side, and the preceding right effect symbol 8R is enlarged to the first stage and becomes larger. and moves to the lower right diagonally at 45 degrees, and the subsequent right production symbol 8R is enlarged to the first stage and becomes larger and moves to the upper right diagonally at 45 degrees, thereby starting the fluctuating production (variation display) of the production symbol. Then, the preceding left effect pattern 8L, the left effect pattern 8L, the following left effect pattern 8L, the preceding medium effect pattern 8C, the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C, the preceding right effect pattern 8R, the right effect pattern 8R, the following The right effect pattern 8R has changed to a mode in which they are separated from each other and spread out.

Enlargement of the left production symbol 8L to the first stage and horizontal movement to the left, enlargement of the preceding left production symbol 8L to the first stage and movement to the lower left diagonally at 45 degrees, first stage of the subsequent left production symbol 8L Expand to and move diagonally to the upper left at 45 degrees, expand the preceding medium effect pattern 8C to the first stage and move vertically downward, expand the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C to the first stage and move upward Vertical movement, enlargement of the right production symbol 8R to the first stage, horizontal movement to the right, enlargement of the preceding right production symbol 8R to the first stage, movement to the lower right diagonally 45 degrees, subsequent right production symbol The expansion to the first stage of 8R and the movement to the upper right diagonally at 45 degrees are started all at once (simultaneously), and then stopped all at once (simultaneously), and this state is maintained for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second). Ru. Although not shown, the blank symbol is also enlarged to the first stage and moved in a predetermined direction so that it is placed between the preceding performance symbol and the subsequent performance symbol.

In addition, the left production pattern 8L is enlarged to the first stage and moved horizontally to the left, the preceding left production pattern 8L is enlarged to the first stage and moved to the lower left diagonally at 45 degrees, and the subsequent left production pattern 8L is moved to the first stage. Even when expanding to the first stage and moving to the upper left diagonally at 45 degrees, the preceding left performance symbol 8L, left performance symbol 8L, and subsequent left performance symbol 8L are in a state of straddling the left fluctuation display area 8Lr to the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr. It is not. Also, when the preceding medium effect pattern 8C expands to the first stage and moves vertically downward, and when the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C expands to the first stage and moves upward vertically, the preceding medium effect pattern 8C, the subsequent medium performance symbol 8C is not in a state of straddling the left fluctuation display area 8Lr from the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, nor is it in a state of straddling the right fluctuation display area 8Rr from the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr. In addition, the right production symbol 8R expands to the first stage and moves horizontally to the right, the preceding right production symbol 8R expands to the first stage and moves to the lower right diagonally at 45 degrees, and the subsequent right production symbol 8R Even when expanding to the first stage and moving to the upper right diagonally at 45 degrees, the preceding right effect symbol 8R, right effect symbol 8R, and subsequent right effect symbol 8R straddle the right variation display area 8Rr to the middle variation display area 8Cr. It is not in the state.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIGS. 68(C) and (D), the preceding left effect symbol 8L, The left effect pattern 8L, the following left effect pattern 8L, the preceding medium effect pattern 8C, the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C, the preceding right effect pattern 8R, the right effect pattern 8R, and the subsequent right effect pattern 8R are in the normal fluctuation direction (i.e. The display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from low speed toward the bottom), resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at high speed.

As the left effect pattern 8L (number "9" with bright green color), which has been enlarged and enlarged in the first stage, moves towards the normal fluctuation direction, the preceding left effect pattern 8L (number "8" with bright blue color) jumps out to the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the subsequent left effect pattern 8L (the bright green number "1") enters the display screen 7a, making the right side of the subsequent left effect pattern 8L visible. be able to. Then, by the time the left presentation pattern 8L (number "9" with bright green color) jumps out to the lower side of the display screen 7a, the subsequent presentation pattern ( Hereinafter, the number "2" having a bright blue color (which may be referred to as "second succeeding left effect pattern") appears from the upper side of the display screen 7a in a state of being enlarged to the first stage and becoming larger, Usually heading in the direction of fluctuation. This second subsequent left effect pattern 8L also includes the preceding left effect pattern 8L of the number "8" having a bright blue color, the left effect pattern 8L of the number "9" having a bright green color, and the left effect pattern 8L of the number "1" having a bright green color. Similar to the subsequent left presentation pattern 8L, the left side portion of the second subsequent left presentation pattern 8L (approximately one third of the left presentation pattern 8L from the left side to the right side) jumps out from the left side of the display screen 7a. The aspect that is difficult to visually recognize remains. In other words, the preceding left effect symbol 8L, the left effect symbol 8L, the subsequent left effect symbol 8L, and the second subsequent left effect symbol 8L are to the left of the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left variable display area in the left variable display area 8Lr. The state of being placed on the first left vertical line that has been moved toward the left side remains maintained.

In addition, as the preceding medium effect pattern 8C (number "5" with bright green color) moves toward the normal fluctuation direction, it jumps out to the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the following medium effect pattern 8C (bright blue color) The number ``6'') also usually goes in the direction of fluctuation. Then, by the time the subsequent middle effect pattern 8C (the number "6" having a bright blue color) reaches the bottom side of the display screen 7a, the further succeeding left effect pattern 8L (the number "6" having a bright blue color) A bright red number "7" which is a production pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "second subsequent medium production pattern") appears from the upper side of the display screen 7a and heads in the direction of normal variation. This second subsequent medium effect pattern 8C is similar to the preceding medium effect pattern 8C of the number "5" having a bright green color and the left effect pattern 8L of the number "6" having a bright blue color, in the medium variation display area. It is arranged on the middle reference vertical line passing through the center of the medium fluctuation display area in 8Cr (in other words, on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a). That is, the preceding medium effect pattern 8C, the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C, and the second subsequent medium effect pattern 8C are on the medium reference vertical line passing through the center of the medium variation display area in the medium variation display area 8Cr (that is, on the display screen 7a (on a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side) is maintained.

In addition, as the right effect pattern 8R (the number "4" having a bright blue color) moves towards the normal fluctuation direction, the preceding right effect pattern 8R (the number "3" having a bright green color) jumps out to the lower side of the display screen 7a. At the same time, the subsequent right presentation pattern 8R (number "5" having bright green color) enters the display screen 7a, making it possible to visually recognize the left side portion of the subsequent right presentation pattern 8R. Then, by the time the right effect pattern 8R (number "4" having a bright blue color) jumps out to the lower side of the display screen 7a, the effect pattern ( Hereinafter, the number "6" having a bright blue color (sometimes referred to as "second succeeding right effect symbol") appears from the upper side of the display screen 7a and heads in the normal fluctuation direction. This second subsequent right effect pattern 8R also includes the preceding right effect pattern 8R of the number "3" having a bright green color, the right effect pattern 8R of the number "4" having a bright blue color, and the right effect pattern 8R of the number "5" having a bright green color. Similar to the subsequent right presentation pattern 8R, the right side portion of the second subsequent right presentation pattern 8R (approximately one third of the right presentation pattern 8R from the right side to the left side) jumps out from the right side of the display screen 7a. The aspect that is difficult to visually recognize remains. In other words, the preceding right performance symbol 8R, right performance symbol 8R, subsequent right performance symbol 8R, and second subsequent right performance symbol 8R are to the right of the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the right variation display area in the right variation display area 8Rr. The state of being disposed on the first right vertical line that has been moved towards is maintained.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68(E), the variable effect (fluctuating display) is placed on the first left vertical line that moves leftward from the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left variable display area 8Lr in the left variable display area 8Lr. The middle left effect pattern 8L (preceding left effect pattern 8L, subsequent left effect pattern 8L) changes from the size enlarged in the first stage to the original size (left effect pattern 8L shown in FIG. 68(A)). (The size of the preceding left effect symbol 8L, the following left effect symbol 8L)), moves to the right, and is placed again on the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left variable display area, and the right variable display area In 8Rr, the right effect symbol 8R (preceding right effect symbol 8R, subsequent right effect symbol The right performance pattern 8R) changes from the size enlarged in the first stage to the original size (the right performance pattern 8R (preceding right performance pattern 8R, subsequent right performance pattern 8R) shown in FIG. 68(A)). It returns to the size) and moves to the left, and is placed again on the right reference vertical line that passes through the center of the right variable display area, and is placed on the middle reference vertical line and is in the middle production design (variation display). 8C (preceding medium effect pattern 8C, subsequent medium effect pattern 8C) is changed from the enlarged size in the first stage to the original size (medium effect pattern 8C (preceding medium effect pattern 8C) shown in FIG. 68(A) Return to pattern 8C, size of subsequent medium effect pattern 8C). In other words, when the variable display (variable display) of the production symbols starts, the left production symbol 8L (preceding left production symbol 8L, subsequent left production symbol 8L), middle production symbol 8C (preceding middle production symbol 8C, subsequent left production symbol 8L), The medium effect pattern 8C) and the right effect pattern 8R (preceding right effect pattern 8R, subsequent right effect pattern 8R) are each enlarged in the first stage, become larger, move in a predetermined direction, and spread apart from each other. After that, it starts moving in the direction of normal fluctuation in this expanded state, and gradually increases the speed from low speed, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state, and becomes a display state that changes at high speed. In the first stage, the enlarged size returns to the original size and starts moving toward the state before being separated again, that is, the state before spreading, and then returns to the original state before spreading.

As a result, the left effect pattern 8L (preceding left effect pattern 8L, subsequent left effect pattern 8L) is placed on the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left variable display area, and the middle effect pattern 8C (preceding medium effect pattern 8C, The subsequent medium effect pattern 8C) is placed on the middle reference vertical line passing through the center of the medium variation display area, and the right effect pattern 8R (preceding right effect pattern 8R, subsequent right effect pattern 8R) passes through the center of the right variation display area. It is in a state where it is placed on the right side reference vertical line that passes through, and the left effect pattern 8L (preceding left effect pattern 8L, subsequent left effect pattern 8L), middle effect pattern 8C (preceding medium effect pattern 8C, subsequent medium effect pattern 8C) ), the right performance symbol 8R (preceding right performance symbol 8R, subsequent right performance symbol 8R) moves in the normal variation direction (that is, downward) in each variation display area.

During this fluctuation, the game ball enters the first starting port 20 by the player's operation of the handle 60, and is determined and displayed as the green first holding icon 9A by pre-reading. As a result, the pending icon 9A is stocked and only one icon exists.

After that, the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R decelerate just before they stop and change from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and first, the left effect pattern 8L has bright green numbers " 3", a blank symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area, a blank symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuation display area, and finally a blank symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the middle fluctuation display area.

In this state, the bright blue number "2", which is the preceding left effect symbol 8L, is placed below the left effect symbol 8L, which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left variable display area, and the number "2", which is the preceding left effect symbol 8L, is placed below the left effect symbol 8L, which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left variable display area, and the subsequent left effect symbol 8L is The number "4" having a certain bright blue color is arranged above the left effect pattern 8L which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left variable display area. The lower part of the preceding left presentation pattern 8L (approximately one-half portion of the preceding left presentation pattern 8L) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the portion of the preceding left presentation pattern 8L. The remaining part, the upper part (approximately 1/2 part of the preceding left production symbol 8L), remains displayed, and the upper part of the subsequent left production symbol 8L (the subsequent left production symbol 8L) remains unchanged. Approximately 1/2 part of the production pattern 8L) jumps out from the upper side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the lower part (the remaining part of the subsequent left production pattern 8L) (approximately one-half of the total) remains unchanged.

In addition, the number "1" having a bright green color, which is the preceding right production symbol 8R, is placed below the blank symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuation display area, and the number "1" having a bright green color, which is the preceding right production symbol 8R, is placed below the blank symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuation display area, and the number "1", which is a bright green color that is the preceding right production symbol 8R, is placed below the blank symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuation display area, and the number "1", which is a bright green color that is the preceding right production symbol 8R, is placed below the blank symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuation display area, and the number "1" that is a bright green color that is the preceding right production symbol 8R is placed below the blank symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuation display area. The number "2" having the number "2" is arranged above the blank symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right variable display area. Both the preceding right effect pattern 8R and the subsequent right effect pattern 8R remain displayed in a state where they can be visually recognized in their entirety without protruding from the lower or upper sides of the display screen 7a. ing.

In addition, the number "7" having a bright red color which is the preceding medium effect symbol 8C is placed below the blank symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area, and the number "7" having a bright red color which is the preceding medium effect symbol 8C is placed below the blank symbol which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area, and the number "7" having a bright red color which is the preceding medium effect symbol 8C is placed below the blank symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area, The number "8" having the number "8" is arranged above the blank symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area. Both the preceding medium effect pattern 8C and the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C remain displayed in a state where they can be viewed in their entirety without protruding from the lower or upper sides of the display screen 7a. ing.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68(F), a left effect symbol 8L is displayed at the center of the left variable display area, a blank symbol is stopped at the center of the medium variable display area, and a blank symbol is stopped at the center of the right variable display area. As a result, the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are aligned in the same pattern in the left and right direction with the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a as the center line. The display will stop and the loss will be confirmed. Accordingly, the white fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

When the green first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the green variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbols is started, as shown in FIG. 68(G). When the variable display (variable display) of the production symbols starts, the preceding left production symbol 8L, the left production symbol 8L, the following left production symbol 8L, the preceding middle production symbol 8C, (here, the middle production symbol 8C is the middle production symbol) It is not placed in the center of the variable display area, and a blank symbol is placed.), the following medium effect pattern 8C, the preceding right effect pattern 8R, (here, the right effect pattern 8R is not placed in the center of the right variable display area). , a blank symbol is arranged.), Before the set of subsequent right performance symbols 8R starts moving in the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction), the left fluctuation display is displayed in the left fluctuation display area 8Lr. The left production symbol 8L (number "3" in bright green) that was stopped and displayed in the center of the area is enlarged to the first stage and becomes larger, in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), It started moving horizontally to the left, which is a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction (orthogonal to the normal fluctuation direction), and the left effect symbol 8L (numbers in bright green) that was stopped and displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area 3), the preceding left production symbol 8L (number "2" with bright blue color) is enlarged in the first stage and becomes larger, and is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and the normal fluctuation The left effect symbol 8L (number "3" in bright green) started to move diagonally downward (45 degrees diagonally to the lower left) toward the lower left side, which is diagonal to the direction, and was stopped and displayed in the center of the left variable display area. The subsequent left production pattern 8L (number "4" with bright blue color) is enlarged in the first stage and becomes larger, and is in a direction different from the normal movement direction (that is, downward) and diagonal to the normal movement direction. It starts moving diagonally upward (45 degrees diagonally to the upper left) toward the upper left side, which is the direction of .

In addition, when the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is started, the preceding medium performance symbol 8C (the bright red number "7") is enlarged to the first stage and becomes larger in the medium variation display area 8Cr. Then, it starts moving in the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and the subsequent medium effect symbol 8C (number "8" with bright blue color) is enlarged to the first stage and becomes larger, and moves in the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward). It starts moving upward, which is a direction different from the direction (lower side) and opposite to the normal fluctuation direction.

In addition, when the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is started, the preceding right performance symbol R (the bright green number "1") is enlarged to the first stage and becomes larger in the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. Then, it starts moving diagonally downward (45 degrees diagonally to the lower right) toward the lower right side, which is a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) and diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction, and the subsequent right The production pattern 8R (number "2" with bright blue color) is enlarged and enlarged in the first stage, and is in a direction different from the normal movement direction (that is, downward) and in a direction diagonal to the normal movement direction. Start moving diagonally upward (45 degrees diagonally to the upper right) toward the upper right side.

Here, the preceding left effect pattern 8L, the left effect pattern 8L, the subsequent left effect pattern 8L, the preceding medium effect pattern 8C, the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C, the preceding right effect pattern 8R, the right effect pattern 8R, the following The right performance symbols 8R are all at once (simultaneously) enlarged to the first stage, become larger, and start moving. However, the preceding left effect pattern 8L, left effect pattern 8L, and subsequent left effect pattern 8L are enlarged to the first stage, become larger, and start moving, and the preceding left effect pattern 8L, left effect pattern 8L, and subsequent left effect pattern 8L are enlarged to the first stage and begin to move. During the movement of the effect pattern 8L, or after the movement is completed, the preceding medium effect pattern 8C and the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C are enlarged to the first stage and become larger and begin to move, and the preceding medium effect pattern 8C and the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C Even if during the movement of the medium effect symbol 8C or after the movement is completed, the preceding right effect symbol 8R, right effect symbol 8R, and subsequent right effect symbol 8R are enlarged to the first stage and become larger and start moving. good. Note that when the first green pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the green variable icon 9C, there is no stocked pending icon 9A at all.

In addition, when each performance symbol is enlarged to the first stage and becomes larger, as mentioned above, a lightning bolt of a predetermined color runs through each performance symbol, and the color of the lightning bolt indicates the expected degree of winning of the fluctuation. There is. As for the predetermined colors, the probability of winning increases in the order of white → blue → purple. Here it is a white lightning bolt. same as below. The hit expectation level of the white lightning bolt is the same as the hit expectation level of the white pending icon (white fluctuation icon), and the hit expectation level of the blue lightning bolt is the same as the hit expectation level of the blue pending icon (blue fluctuation icon). The expected degree of winning is the same, and the expected degree of winning of the purple lightning bolt is the same as that of the red pending icon (red fluctuating icon).

The left production pattern 8L (number "3" with bright green color) is enlarged and enlarged in the first stage, and is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (i.e., downward) and in a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction ( When it starts moving horizontally to the left, which is a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction, the left side of the left production symbol 8L (approximately one third of the left production symbol 8L from the left side to the right side) is displayed on the display screen. It jumps out from the left side of 7a and becomes difficult to see, and moves while maintaining the state in which the right side part (approximately two-thirds of the left direction pattern 8L), which is the remaining part of the left direction pattern 8L, is displayed. Stop. When the movement is stopped, the center of the left performance symbol 8L (a vertical line passing through the center of the top side and the center of the bottom side of the virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the left performance symbol 8L, and the center of the left side and the center of the right side of this rectangular shape) The point where the horizontal line that passes through and the intersection point) remains located on the first left vertical line.

The preceding left production symbol 8L (number "2" with bright blue color) is enlarged and enlarged in the first stage, and is in a direction different from the normal movement direction (that is, lower side) and diagonal to the normal movement direction. When it starts moving diagonally downward (45 degrees diagonally to the lower left), the left side of the preceding left production symbol 8L (approximately one-third of the left side of the preceding left production symbol 8L from the left side to the right side) part) jumps out from the left side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the lower part of the preceding left presentation pattern 8L (approximately three-quarters of the portion from the bottom to the top of the preceding left presentation pattern 8L) part) jumps out from the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the movement is stopped while the upper right side part, which is the remaining part of the preceding left presentation pattern 8L, remains displayed. When the movement is stopped, the center of the preceding left performance symbol 8L (the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the preceding left performance symbol 8L, and the center of the left side of this rectangular shape) The horizontal line passing through the center of the right side intersects with the horizontal line) remains located on the first left vertical line.

The subsequent left production pattern 8L (number "4" with bright blue color) is enlarged in the first stage and becomes larger, and is in a direction different from the normal movement direction (that is, downward) and diagonal to the normal movement direction. When you start moving diagonally upward (45 degrees diagonally to the upper left) toward the upper left direction, the left side of the subsequent left production symbol 8L (approximately 1/3 of the left side of the subsequent left production symbol 8L from the left side to the right side) part) jumps out from the left side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the upper part of the subsequent left presentation pattern 8L (approximately three-quarters of the portion from the top to the bottom of the subsequent left presentation pattern 8L) ) jumps out from the upper side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and stops moving while maintaining the display of the lower right side portion, which is the remaining portion of the subsequent left presentation pattern 8L. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the subsequent left performance symbol 8L (the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the subsequent left performance symbol 8L, and the center of the left side of this rectangular shape) The horizontal line passing through the center of the right side intersects with the horizontal line) remains located on the first left vertical line.

In this way, on the first left vertical line, the state is maintained in which the following left performance symbols 8L, 8L left performance symbols, and the preceding left performance symbols 8L are arranged in a line vertically in this order. There is.

When the preceding medium effect symbol 8C (number "7" with bright red color) is enlarged in the first stage and becomes larger and starts moving towards the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), the preceding medium effect symbol 8C The lower part (approximately 1/2 part of the middle effect pattern 8C) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the upper part (the middle effect part) that is the remaining part of the preceding medium effect pattern 8C. The pattern 8C (approximately 1/2 portion of the pattern 8C) stops moving while being displayed in the same manner. In the state where the movement is stopped, the preceding medium performance symbol 8C is placed on the medium reference vertical line passing through the center of the medium fluctuation display area in the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, that is, on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a. The current state has been maintained.

The subsequent medium production pattern 8C (number "8" with bright blue color) is enlarged in the first stage and becomes larger, and is in a direction different from the normal movement direction (that is, downward) and opposite to the normal movement direction. When the movement starts toward the upper side, the upper part of the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C (approximately 1/2 part of the medium effect pattern 8C) jumps out from the lower side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see. , the movement is stopped while the upper part (approximately 1/2 part of the middle effect pattern 8C) which is the remaining part of the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C is displayed. In the state where the movement is stopped, the subsequent medium performance pattern 8C remains arranged on the medium reference vertical line, that is, the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a.

In this way, on the middle reference vertical line (that is, on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a), the following medium effect symbols 8C and the preceding medium effect symbols 8C are placed in a vertical line in the order of The state in which it was placed remains maintained.

The preceding right production symbol 8R (number "1" with bright green color) is enlarged and enlarged in the first stage, and is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) and diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction. When you start moving diagonally downward (45 degrees diagonally to the lower right), the right side of the preceding right effect pattern 8R (approximately 3 minutes from the right side of the preceding right effect pattern 8R to the left) 1) jumps out from the right side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the lower part of the preceding right presentation pattern 8R (approximately 4 minutes from the bottom to the top of the preceding right presentation pattern 8R) The part 3) jumps out from the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the movement is stopped while the upper left part, which is the remaining part of the preceding right performance pattern 8R, remains displayed. When the movement is stopped, the center of the preceding right performance symbol 8R (the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the preceding right performance symbol 8R, and the center of the left side of this rectangular shape) The horizontal line passing through the center of the right side intersects with the horizontal line) remains located on the first right vertical line.

The subsequent right production symbol 8R (number "2" with bright blue color) is enlarged in the first stage and becomes larger, and is in a direction different from the normal movement direction (that is, downward) and diagonal to the normal movement direction. When you start moving diagonally upward (45 degrees diagonally to the upper right) toward the upper right direction, the right side of the subsequent right production symbol 8R (approximately 1/3 of the right side of the subsequent right production symbol 8R from the right side to the left side) part) jumps out from the right side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the upper part of the subsequent left presentation pattern 8L (approximately three-quarters of the portion from the top to the bottom of the subsequent right presentation pattern 8R) ) jumps out from the upper side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and stops moving while maintaining the display mode of the lower left part, which is the remaining part of the subsequent right effect pattern 8R. When the movement is stopped, the center of the subsequent right performance symbol 8R (the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the subsequent right performance symbol 8R, and the center of the left side of this rectangular shape) The horizontal line passing through the center of the right side intersects with the horizontal line) remains located on the first right vertical line.

In this way, on the first right vertical line, a state is maintained in which the succeeding right performance symbols 8R and the preceding right performance symbols 8R are arranged in a line in the vertical direction in that order. In addition, the upper side of the preceding middle effect pattern 8C (the number "7" having a bright red color) and the upper side of the preceding right effect pattern 8R (the number "1" having a bright green color) are placed on the same horizontal line. The lower side of the following middle effect pattern 8C (number "8" with bright blue color) and the lower side of the subsequent right effect pattern 8R (number "2" with bright blue color) are on the same horizontal line. arranged and lined up.

The left performance symbol 8L is enlarged to the first stage, becomes larger, and moves to the left, the preceding left production symbol 8L is enlarged to the first stage, becomes larger, and moves diagonally to the lower left at 45 degrees, and the subsequent left production symbol 8L is enlarged to the first stage, becomes larger, and moves diagonally to the upper left at 45 degrees, the preceding medium effect pattern 8C is enlarged to the first stage, becomes larger, and moves downward, and the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C is The preceding right production symbol 8R is enlarged in the first stage, becomes larger, and moves upward to the lower right, and the subsequent right production symbol 8R is When the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbol starts by enlarging it in stages and moving it diagonally to the upper right at 45 degrees, the preceding left performance symbol 8L, left performance symbol 8L, and subsequent left performance symbol 8L, the preceding medium presentation pattern 8C, the subsequent medium presentation pattern 8C, the preceding right presentation pattern 8R, and the subsequent right presentation pattern 8R have changed to a state in which they are separated from each other and spread out.

Enlargement of the left production symbol 8L to the first stage and horizontal movement to the left, enlargement of the preceding left production symbol 8L to the first stage and movement to the lower left diagonally at 45 degrees, first stage of the subsequent left production symbol 8L Expand to and move diagonally to the upper left at 45 degrees, expand the preceding medium effect pattern 8C to the first stage and move vertically downward, expand the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C to the first stage and move upward Vertical movement, expansion of the preceding right production symbol 8R to the first stage and movement to the lower right diagonal 45 degrees, expansion of the subsequent right production symbol 8R to the first stage and movement to the upper right diagonal 45 degrees all at once. (simultaneously) and then stop moving all at once (simultaneously), and this state is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second).

In addition, the left production pattern 8L is enlarged to the first stage and moved horizontally to the left, the preceding left production pattern 8L is enlarged to the first stage and moved to the lower left diagonally at 45 degrees, and the subsequent left production pattern 8L is moved to the first stage. Even when expanding to the first stage and moving to the upper left diagonally at 45 degrees, the preceding left performance symbol 8L, left performance symbol 8L, and subsequent left performance symbol 8L are in a state of straddling the left fluctuation display area 8Lr to the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr. It is not. Also, when the preceding medium effect pattern 8C expands to the first stage and moves vertically downward, and when the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C expands to the first stage and moves upward vertically, the preceding medium effect pattern 8C, the subsequent medium performance symbol 8C is not in a state of straddling the left fluctuation display area 8Lr from the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, nor is it in a state of straddling the right fluctuation display area 8Rr from the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr. In addition, the preceding right performance symbol 8R expands to the first stage and moves diagonally to the lower right at 45 degrees, and the subsequent right performance symbol 8R expands to the first stage and moves to the upper right diagonally at 45 degrees. The right performance symbol 8R and the subsequent right performance symbol 8R are not in a state where they straddle the right variation display area 8Rr to the middle variation display area 8Cr.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, the left variation display area 8Lr is enlarged to the first stage, as shown in FIG. The left effect pattern 8L (number "3" with bright green color) that has been enlarged and enlarged is further enlarged from the first stage to the second stage (the size of the effect pattern enlarged in the second stage is It is approximately 1.5 times larger than the size of the performance design that is enlarged in the first stage.As a result, the size of the performance design that is expanded in the second stage is the same as before it is expanded in the first stage. It is approximately 2.25 times larger than the size of a certain original production pattern (the same applies hereinafter), in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (i.e. downward), and in a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction ( The left effect symbol preceding the left effect symbol 8L (number "3" with bright green color) starts to move horizontally towards the left side, which is a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction, and is enlarged and enlarged in the first stage. 8L (number "2" with bright blue color) is further enlarged and becomes larger from the first stage to the second stage, and is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (i.e. downward) and diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction. The subsequent left effect pattern 8L (number "3" with bright green color) starts to move diagonally downward (45 degrees diagonally to the lower left side) and is enlarged in the first stage to become larger. The symbol 8L (the number "4" with bright blue color) is further enlarged and becomes larger from the first stage to the second stage, and is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, the lower side) and diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction. It starts moving diagonally upward (45 degrees diagonally to the upper left) toward the upper left side, which is the direction of .

It should be noted that when each effect pattern is further enlarged from the first stage to the second stage and becomes larger, the white lightning bolt changes to a purple lightning bolt, and the purple lightning bolt runs through each effect pattern. As mentioned above, the probability of winning increases in the order of lightning colors: white → blue → purple. Here, although the green fluctuation icon 9C is intentionally used, it is actually a purple lightning bolt that suggests the same level of winning expectation as the red pending icon (red fluctuation icon). same as below.

In addition, when the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbol is started, in the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, the preceding medium performance symbol 8C (number "7" having a bright red color) is enlarged to the first stage and becomes larger. is further enlarged and becomes larger from the first stage to the second stage, and starts moving towards the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C (bright The number "6" with blue color is further enlarged and becomes larger from the first stage to the second stage, and is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (i.e. downward) and in the opposite direction to the normal fluctuation direction. Start moving upwards.

In addition, when the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is started, in the right fluctuation display area 8Rr, the preceding right performance symbol 8R (number "1" having bright green color) is enlarged to the first stage and becomes larger. is further enlarged and becomes larger from the first stage to the second stage, and starts moving towards the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C (bright The number "6" with blue color is further enlarged and becomes larger from the first stage to the second stage, and is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (i.e. downward) and in the opposite direction to the normal fluctuation direction. Start moving upwards.

Here, the preceding left effect pattern 8L, the left effect pattern 8L, the subsequent left effect pattern 8L, the preceding medium effect pattern 8C, the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C, and the preceding right effect pattern have been enlarged and enlarged in the first stage. The performance pattern 8R, the right performance pattern 8R, and the subsequent right performance pattern 8R are further enlarged from the first stage to the second stage all at once (simultaneously), become larger, and start moving. However, the preceding left performance symbol 8L, left performance symbol 8L, and subsequent left performance symbol 8L, which have been enlarged and enlarged in the first stage, are further enlarged and enlarged from the first stage to the second stage and begin to move. , further enlarges and becomes larger from the first stage to the second stage, and expands to the first stage during the movement of the preceding left performance symbol 8L, left performance symbol 8L, and subsequent left performance symbol 8L, or after the movement is completed. The preceding medium effect symbol 8C and the subsequent medium effect symbol 8C, which have been enlarged and enlarged, are further enlarged from the first stage to the second stage and begin to move, and are further enlarged from the first stage to the second stage. During the movement of the preceding medium effect symbol 8C, which becomes larger and becomes larger, or after the movement of the following medium effect symbol 8C, the preceding right effect symbol 8R, which enlarges to the first stage and becomes larger, and the subsequent right effect symbol. 8R may be further expanded from the first stage to the second stage, becoming larger and starting to move.

The left production pattern 8L (number "3" with bright green color) is further enlarged and becomes larger from the first stage to the second stage, and is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, the lower side), and is in the normal fluctuation direction. When it starts to move horizontally to the left in the direction perpendicular to (normally orthogonal to the direction of fluctuation), the left side of the left production symbol 8L (approximately two-thirds of the left production symbol 8L from the left side to the right side) part) jumps out from the left side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and at the same time, the right side part (approximately one-third of the left presentation pattern 8L), which is the remaining portion of the left presentation pattern 8L, is displayed. It stops moving while being maintained. When the movement is stopped, the center of the left performance symbol 8L (a vertical line passing through the center of the top side and the center of the bottom side of the virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the left performance symbol 8L, and the center of the left side and the center of the right side of this rectangular shape) The point where the horizontal line that passes through and intersects the left side of the display screen 7a is further moved horizontally to the left by a predetermined distance (for example, 50 mm) from the left reference vertical line that passes through the center of the left variable display area in the left variable display area 8Lr. The state in which the left presentation pattern 8L is placed on the vertical line remains maintained. Hereinafter, a vertical line that is further closer to the left side of the display screen 7a that has moved horizontally to the left by a predetermined distance (for example, 50 mm) from the left reference vertical line that passes through the center of the left variable display area in the left variable display area 8Lr will be referred to as "second left side". It is sometimes written as "vertical line". The second left vertical line is arranged to the left of the first left vertical line, and is arranged closer to the left side of the display screen 7a than the first left vertical line.

The preceding left production symbol 8L (number "2" with bright blue color) is further enlarged and becomes larger from the first stage to the second stage, and is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and is When it starts to move diagonally downward (45 degrees diagonally to the lower left) toward the lower left side, which is a direction diagonal to the direction of variation, it stops moving with the preceding left performance symbol 8L disappearing from the display screen 7a. When the movement is stopped, the center of the preceding left performance symbol 8L (the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the preceding left performance symbol 8L, and the center of the left side of this rectangular shape) The horizontal line passing through the center of the right side intersects with the horizontal line) remains located on the second left vertical line.

The subsequent left production pattern 8L (number "4" with bright blue color) is further enlarged and becomes larger from the first stage to the second stage, and is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and is normally When it starts moving diagonally upward (45 degrees diagonally to the upper left) toward the upper left side, which is a direction diagonal to the direction of variation, the movement stops with the subsequent left performance symbol 8L disappearing from the display screen 7a. When the movement is stopped, the center of the subsequent left performance symbol 8L (the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the subsequent left performance symbol 8L, and the center of the left side of this rectangular shape) The horizontal line passing through the center of the right side intersects with the horizontal line) remains located on the second left vertical line.

In this way, on the second left vertical line, the following left performance symbol 8L, left performance symbol 8L, and preceding left performance symbol 8L remain arranged in a line in the vertical direction in this order. There is.

When the preceding medium effect pattern 8C (number "7" with bright red color) is further enlarged and enlarged from the first stage to the second stage and starts moving towards the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), The upper part of the middle effect pattern 8C (approximately three-quarters of the area from the bottom to the top of the preceding medium effect pattern 8C) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and The movement is stopped while the remaining upper part of the effect pattern 8C (approximately 1/4 of the preceding medium effect pattern 8C) is displayed. In the state where the movement is stopped, the preceding medium effect pattern 8C is on the medium reference vertical line passing through the center of the medium fluctuation display area in the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr (that is, on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a). The state in which it was placed remains maintained.

The subsequent medium effect pattern 8C (number "8" with bright blue color) is further enlarged and becomes larger from the first stage to the second stage, and is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and is normally When you start moving upwards, which is the opposite direction to the direction of movement, the upper part of the subsequent medium effect symbol 8C (approximately three-quarters of the portion from the top to the bottom of the subsequent medium effect symbol 8C) will be displayed. A mode in which it protrudes from the upper side of the screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and a lower portion (approximately a quarter of the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C) that is the remaining portion of the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C is displayed. The movement will stop while the is maintained. In the state where the movement is stopped, the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C remains arranged on the medium reference vertical line (that is, on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a). There is.

In this way, on the middle reference vertical line (that is, on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a), the following medium effect symbols 8C and the preceding medium effect symbols 8C are placed in a vertical line in the order of The state in which it was placed remains maintained.

The preceding right production symbol 8R (number "3" with bright green color) is further enlarged and becomes larger from the first stage to the second stage, and is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward). When it starts to move diagonally downward (45 degrees diagonally to the lower right) toward the lower right side, which is diagonal to the direction of fluctuation, the right side of the preceding right production symbol 8R (from the right side of the preceding right production symbol 8R to the left) Approximately two-thirds of the part) jumps out from the right side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the lower part of the preceding right presentation pattern 8R (from the bottom of the preceding right presentation pattern 8R to the top) (approximately three-quarters of the part) jumps out from the lower side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the remaining part of the preceding right production pattern 8R, a part of the upper left side, remains displayed. Stop moving. When the movement is stopped, the center of the preceding right performance symbol 8R (the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the preceding right performance symbol 8R, and the center of the left side of this rectangular shape) The point where the horizontal line passing through the center of the right side intersects with the horizontal line passing through the center of the right side of the display screen 7a that has been horizontally moved to the right by a predetermined distance (for example, 50 mm) from the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the right variable display area in the right variable display area 8Rr. The state in which the right effect pattern 8R is placed on the vertical line further toward the right side is maintained. Hereinafter, a vertical line further closer to the right side of the display screen 7a that has been horizontally moved to the right by a predetermined distance (for example, 50 mm) from the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the right variable display area in the right variable display area 8Rr will be referred to as a "second right side reference vertical line". It is sometimes written as "vertical line". The second right vertical line is arranged to the right of the first right vertical line, and is arranged closer to the right side of the display screen 7a than the first right vertical line.

The subsequent right production symbol 8R (number "2" with bright blue color) is further enlarged and becomes larger from the first stage to the second stage, and is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and is When it starts to move diagonally upward (45 degrees diagonally to the upper right) toward the upper right side, which is the direction diagonal to the fluctuation direction, the right side of the subsequent right production symbol 8R (from the right side of the subsequent right production symbol 8R toward the left side) The two-thirds part) jumps out from the right side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the upper part of the subsequent right effect pattern 8R (approximately 3/3 part) jumps out from the upper side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the movement stops while a part of the lower left side part, which is the remaining part of the subsequent right effect symbol 8R, remains displayed. do. When the movement is stopped, the center of the subsequent right performance symbol 8R (the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the subsequent right performance symbol 8R, and the center of the left side of this rectangular shape) The point where the horizontal line passing through the center of the right side intersects remains on the second right vertical line.

In this way, on the second right vertical line, a state is maintained in which the succeeding right performance symbols 8R and the preceding right performance symbols 8R are arranged in a line in the vertical direction in that order. In addition, the upper side of the preceding middle effect pattern 8C (the number "7" having a bright red color) and the upper side of the preceding right effect pattern 8R (the number "1" having a bright green color) are placed on the same horizontal line. The lower side of the following middle effect pattern 8C (number "8" with bright blue color) and the lower side of the subsequent right effect pattern 8R (number "2" with bright blue color) are on the same horizontal line. arranged and lined up.

The left performance symbol 8L is further enlarged from the first stage to the second stage, becomes larger, and moves to the left, and the preceding left performance symbol 8L is further enlarged from the first stage to the second stage, becomes larger, and moves to the lower left diagonal 45. The subsequent left direction design 8L is further enlarged from the first stage to the second stage, becomes larger and moves diagonally to the upper left at 45 degrees, and the preceding middle direction design 8C moves from the first stage to the second stage. It is further enlarged, becomes larger, and moves to the lower side, and the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C is further enlarged from the first stage to the second stage, becomes larger, and moves upward, and the preceding right effect pattern 8R is moved to the first stage. From there, it is further enlarged from the first stage to the second stage, becomes larger, and moves diagonally to the lower right at 45 degrees, and the subsequent right production symbol 8R is further enlarged from the first stage to the second stage, becomes larger, and moves to the upper right diagonally at 45 degrees. As a result, when the variable display (variable display) of the production symbols is started, the preceding left production symbol 8L, the left production symbol 8L, the subsequent left production symbol 8L, the preceding middle production symbol 8C, and the subsequent middle production symbol 8C. , the preceding right performance pattern 8R and the subsequent right performance pattern 8R have been enlarged and enlarged in the first stage, and have changed to a state in which they are further spaced apart from each other and spread out.

Enlargement of the left production symbol 8L from the first stage to the second stage and horizontal movement to the left, expansion of the preceding left production symbol 8L from the first stage to the second stage and movement to the lower left diagonally at 45 degrees, the subsequent Expansion of the left production symbol 8L from the first stage to the second stage and movement to the upper left diagonally at 45 degrees, expansion of the preceding middle production symbol 8C from the first stage to the second stage and vertical movement downward, and subsequent Expansion of the middle effect pattern 8C from the first stage to the second stage and vertical movement upward, expansion of the preceding right effect pattern 8R from the first stage to the second stage and movement to the lower right diagonally at 45 degrees, The enlarging of the subsequent right direction design 8R from the first stage to the second stage and the movement to the upper right diagonally at 45 degrees start all at once (simultaneously), and then stop moving all at once (simultaneously), and this state is set as a predetermined state. It is maintained for a period of time (eg 1 second). Although not shown, the blank symbols are also enlarged from the first stage to the second stage and moved in a predetermined direction so that they are placed between the preceding performance symbols and the subsequent performance symbols.

In addition, the expansion of the left production pattern 8L from the first stage to the second stage and horizontal movement to the left, the expansion of the preceding left production pattern 8L from the first stage to the second stage and movement to the lower left diagonally at 45 degrees, Even when the subsequent left direction pattern 8L expands from the first stage to the second step and moves diagonally to the upper left at 45 degrees, the preceding left direction pattern 8L, the left direction pattern 8L, and the subsequent left direction pattern 8L move to the left. The display area 8Lr is not in a state where it straddles the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr. In addition, the preceding right production symbol 8R expands from the first stage to the second stage and moves to the lower right diagonal 45 degrees, and the subsequent right production symbol 8R expands from the first stage to the second stage and moves to the upper right diagonal 45 degrees. Even in the movement to the degree, the preceding right performance symbol 8R and the subsequent right performance symbol 8R are not in a state of straddling the right fluctuation display area 8Rr to the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr. In contrast, the preceding medium effect pattern 8C expands from the first stage to the second step and moves vertically downward, and the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C expands from the first stage to the second stage and moves upward. In the vertical movement, the preceding medium effect symbol 8C and the following medium effect symbol 8C are in a state of straddling the left variation display area 8Lr from the medium variation display area 8Cr, and the right variation display from the medium variation display area 8Cr. It is in a state where it straddles region 8Rr.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIGS. 68(I) and (J), the previous state remains the same, that is, the state has been further enlarged and enlarged from the first stage to the second stage. The left effect pattern 8L, the left effect pattern 8L, the following left effect pattern 8L, the preceding medium effect pattern 8C, the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C, the preceding right effect pattern 8R, and the subsequent right effect pattern 8R are in the normal fluctuation direction (i.e. The display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from low speed toward the bottom), resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at high speed.

As the left performance symbol 8L (number "3" with bright green color), which has been further enlarged and enlarged from the first stage to the second stage, moves toward the normal fluctuation direction, the subsequent left performance symbol 8L (with bright blue color) The number "4") enters the display screen 7a again and the right side of the subsequent left presentation pattern 8L can be seen, and the further subsequent presentation of the subsequent left presentation pattern 8L (number "4" having bright blue color) The bright green number "5", which is a symbol (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "second succeeding left effect symbol"), is further enlarged and displayed in a larger state from the first stage to the second stage. It appears from the upper side of the screen 7a and goes in the direction of normal fluctuation. This second subsequent left effect pattern 8L also includes the preceding left effect pattern 8L of the number "2" having a bright blue color, the left effect pattern 8L of the number "3" having a bright green color, and the left effect pattern 8L of the number "4" having a bright blue color. Similar to the subsequent left presentation pattern 8L, the left side portion of the second subsequent left presentation pattern 8L (approximately two-thirds of the left presentation pattern 8L from the left side to the right side) jumps out from the left side of the display screen 7a. The aspect that is difficult to visually recognize remains. In other words, the preceding left performance symbol 8L, the left performance symbol 8L, the subsequent left performance symbol 8L, and the second subsequent left performance symbol 8L are to the left of the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left fluctuation display area in the left fluctuation display area 8Lr. The state of being placed on the second left vertical line that has been moved toward the left side remains maintained.

In addition, the preceding medium effect pattern 8C (number "7" in bright red), which has been further enlarged and enlarged from the first stage to the second stage, moves in the normal fluctuation direction and jumps out to the lower side of the display screen 7a, making it visible. The situation has become difficult, and as the subsequent medium performance symbol 8C (number "8" with bright blue color), which has been further enlarged and enlarged from the first stage to the second stage, moves towards the normal fluctuation direction, the subsequent By the time the medium effect pattern 8C (number "8" with bright blue color) jumps out to the bottom side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C (number "8" with bright blue color) A bright green number "9", which is a production pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "second subsequent medium production pattern"), appears from the upper side of the display screen 7a and heads in the direction of normal variation. This second subsequent medium effect pattern 8C is also similar to the preceding medium effect pattern 8C of the number "7" in bright red and the left effect pattern 8L following the number "8" in bright blue, in the medium variation display area. It is arranged on the middle reference vertical line passing through the center of the medium fluctuation display area in 8Cr (in other words, on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a). In other words, the preceding medium effect pattern 8C, the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C, and the second subsequent medium effect pattern 8C are on the medium reference vertical line passing through the center of the medium variation display area in the medium variation display area 8Cr (that is, on the display screen 7a (on a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side) is maintained.

In addition, the preceding right effect pattern 8R (number "1" with bright green color), which has been further enlarged and enlarged from the first stage to the second stage, moves in the normal fluctuation direction and jumps out to the lower side of the display screen 7a, making it visible. The situation has become difficult, and the subsequent right production symbol 8R (number "2" with bright blue color), which has been further enlarged and enlarged from the first stage to the second stage, moves towards the normal fluctuation direction. By the time the right effect pattern 8R (number "2" with bright blue color) jumps out to the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, the subsequent right effect pattern 8R (number "2" with bright blue color) A bright green number "3", which is a production pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "second succeeding right production pattern"), appears from the upper side of the display screen 7a and heads in the normal fluctuation direction. This second subsequent right effect pattern 8R is similar to the preceding right effect pattern 8R with the number "1" having a bright green color and the right effect pattern 8R following the number "2" having a bright blue color. The right side part of the left performance pattern 8L (approximately two-thirds of the right performance pattern 8R from the right side to the left side) protrudes from the right side of the display screen 7a and remains difficult to see. In other words, the preceding right effect pattern 8R, the subsequent right effect pattern 8R, and the second subsequent right effect pattern 8R are the first right effect symbols that have moved to the right from the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the right variable display area in the right variable display area 8Rr. 2 remains on the right vertical line.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68(K), the variable effect (fluctuating display) is placed on the second left vertical line that moves leftward from the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left variable display area in the left variable display area 8Lr. The middle left effect pattern 8L (preceding left effect pattern 8L, subsequent left effect pattern 8L) changes from the size further enlarged from the first stage to the second stage to the original size (Fig. 68 (A), ( Return to the size of the left effect pattern 8L (preceding left effect pattern 8L, subsequent left effect pattern 8L) shown in F), move it to the right, and place it again on the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left fluctuation display area. is placed on the first right vertical line that moves to the right from the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the right fluctuation display area in the right fluctuation display area 8Rr, and the right effect symbol 8R ( The preceding right performance symbol 8R and the subsequent right performance symbol 8R) are changed from the size further enlarged from the first stage to the second stage to the original size (the right performance symbol shown in FIGS. 68(A) and 68(F)). The size of the symbol 8R (preceding right effect symbol 8R, subsequent right effect symbol 8R) is returned to the left side, and it is placed again on the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the right variable display area, and the center side The medium effect pattern 8C (preceding medium effect pattern 8C, subsequent medium effect pattern 8C) placed on the reference vertical line and undergoing a variable effect (fluctuating display) is further enlarged in size from the first stage to the second stage. to the original size (the size of the medium effect pattern 8C (preceding medium effect pattern 8C, subsequent medium effect pattern 8C) shown in FIGS. 68(A) and 68(F)). In other words, the left performance pattern 8L (preceding left performance pattern 8L, subsequent left performance pattern 8L), which started the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance design, was enlarged in the first stage, became larger, and moved in a predetermined direction. The middle effect pattern 8C (preceding medium effect pattern 8C, subsequent medium effect pattern 8C) and right effect pattern 8R (preceding right effect pattern 8R, subsequent right effect pattern 8R) are further moved from the first stage to the second stage. They expand, become larger, move in a predetermined direction, move away from each other, and spread further, and then, in this spread state, they start moving in the normal fluctuation direction, gradually increasing their speed from a low speed and changing from an opaque state. When the display mode changes to a semi-transparent state and changes at high speed, during the change, from the enlarged size in the second stage, it returns to the original size and returns to the state before separating again, that is, the state before expanding. It starts moving toward the target, and then returns to its original state before spreading.

As a result, the left effect pattern 8L (preceding left effect pattern 8L, subsequent left effect pattern 8L) is placed on the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left variable display area, and the middle effect pattern 8C (preceding medium effect pattern 8C, The subsequent medium effect pattern 8C) is placed on the middle reference vertical line passing through the center of the medium variation display area, and the right effect pattern 8R (preceding right effect pattern 8R, subsequent right effect pattern 8R) passes through the center of the right variation display area. It is in a state where it is placed on the right side reference vertical line that passes through, and the left effect pattern 8L (preceding left effect pattern 8L, subsequent left effect pattern 8L), middle effect pattern 8C (preceding medium effect pattern 8C, subsequent medium effect pattern 8C) ), the right performance symbol 8R (preceding right performance symbol 8R, subsequent right performance symbol 8R) moves in the normal variation direction (that is, downward) in each variation display area.

After that, the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R decelerate just before they stop and change from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and first, the left effect pattern 8L has bright blue numbers " 8", it is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left variable display area, the right effect pattern 8R has a bright blue color, and the number ``6'' is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right variable display area, and finally, the middle effect pattern 8C has a bright green color. The number "1" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area.

In this state, the number "7" in bright red, which is the preceding left presentation symbol 8L, is placed below the left presentation symbol 8L, which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left variable display area, and the number "7", which is the preceding left presentation symbol 8L, is placed below the left presentation symbol 8L, which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left variable display area, and the number "7", which is the preceding left presentation symbol 8L, is placed below the left presentation symbol 8L, which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left variable display area. The number "9" having a certain bright green color is arranged above the left effect pattern 8L which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left variable display area. The lower part of the preceding left presentation pattern 8L (approximately one-half portion of the preceding left presentation pattern 8L) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the portion of the preceding left presentation pattern 8L. The remaining part, the upper part (approximately 1/2 part of the preceding left production symbol 8L), remains displayed, and the upper part of the subsequent left production symbol 8L (the subsequent left production symbol 8L) remains unchanged. Approximately 1/2 part of the production pattern 8L) jumps out from the upper side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the lower part (the remaining part of the subsequent left production pattern 8L) (approximately one-half of the total) remains unchanged.

In addition, the number "5" having a bright green color, which is the preceding right production symbol 8R, is placed below the right production symbol 8R, which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuation display area, and the right production symbol 8R that follows the right production symbol 8R is placed below the right production symbol 8R, which is displayed temporarily in the center of the right fluctuation display area. The number "7" having a bright red color as a symbol is arranged above the right effect symbol 8R which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right variable display area. The lower part of the preceding right performance symbol 8R (approximately 1/2 portion of the preceding right performance symbol 8R) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see. The remaining upper part (approximately 1/2 part of the preceding right performance symbol 8R) remains displayed, and the upper part of the subsequent right production symbol 8R (the subsequent right Approximately 1/2 part of the production pattern 8R) jumps out from the upper side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the lower part (the remaining part of the subsequent right production pattern 8R) (approximately one-half of the total) remains unchanged.

In addition, the bright green number "9", which is the preceding medium effect symbol 8C, is placed below the medium effect symbol 8C, which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area, and is placed below the medium effect symbol 8C that follows the medium effect symbol 8C. The number "2" having a bright blue color as a symbol is arranged above the medium performance symbol 8C which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area. The lower part of the preceding medium effect pattern 8C (approximately half the portion of the preceding medium effect pattern 8C) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and at the same time, the lower part of the preceding medium effect pattern 8C The remaining part, the upper part (approximately 1/2 part of the preceding medium effect pattern 8C) remains displayed, and the upper part of the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C (the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C) remains displayed. Approximately 1/2 part of the effect pattern 8C) jumps out from the upper side of the display screen 7a, making it difficult to see, and the lower part (the remaining part of the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C) (approximately one-half of the total) remains unchanged.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68(L), a left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the center of the left variable display area, a medium effect symbol 8L is displayed in the center of the medium variable display area, and a right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the center of the right variable display area. As a result, the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are aligned in the same pattern in the left and right direction with the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a as the center line. The display will stop and the loss will be confirmed. Accordingly, the green fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20 by the player's operation of the handle 60 and the first holding icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable effect of the effect design (fluctuating display) is started, and if the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are not aligned with the same pattern and are stopped and displayed, a loss is confirmed, whereas the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8R When the symbol 8C and the right performance symbol 8R are the same symbol and are stopped and displayed, a hit is confirmed, a jackpot opening is started, and then a jackpot game in which a profit is given to the player is started. .

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the effect symbol movement variation effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, and one of the plurality of types of images is a left effect symbol 8L that can notify a hit or a loss. (Including the preceding left effect pattern 8L and the following left effect pattern 8L.), Middle effect pattern 8C (Including the preceding medium effect pattern 8C and the following medium effect pattern 8C.), Right effect pattern 8R (Preceding right effect pattern 8C.) It is a set of performance symbols such as the production symbol 8R and the subsequent right production symbol 8R. A first performance is executed in which a plurality of production symbols among the symbols move in mutually different directions and in directions different from the normal variation direction (variation direction), and then move in the normal variation direction (variation direction). (Figures 66 (B) to (D), (G) to (I) in the effect symbol movement variation effect A, and Figures 67 (B) to (D) in the effect symbol movement variation effect B) , (G) to (I), Figure 68 (B) to (D), (G) to (J)) in the effect symbol movement variation effect C. According to this configuration, before a set of performance symbols starts moving in the normal variation direction (variation direction), a plurality of production symbols in the set of production symbols are moved in different directions from each other, and It is now possible to move in a direction different from the direction (fluctuation direction). In the conventional manner in which a set of performance symbols simply moves in one direction, the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols tends to become monotonous, and the player's motivation decreases, making it difficult to improve interest. was difficult. On the other hand, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the left presentation pattern 8L (including the preceding left presentation pattern 8L and the subsequent left presentation pattern 8L), the middle presentation pattern 8C (the preceding medium presentation pattern 8C, and the subsequent left presentation pattern 8L), A set of production symbols such as the middle production symbol 8C (including the middle production symbol 8C) and the right production symbol 8R (including the preceding right production symbol 8R and the subsequent right production symbol 8R) usually move in the fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction). Before starting, by moving multiple production symbols in a set of production symbols in different directions from each other and in directions different from the normal variation direction (variation direction), unlike in the past, all Since the performance symbols do not move in one direction, the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is less likely to be monotonous, which can contribute to improving the player's motivation. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the first performance in the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance A of FIG. 66, the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance B of FIG. 67, and the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance C of FIG. One or more of the performance symbols can move in a direction opposite to the direction of variation. Specifically, the medium performance symbol 8C (number "2" having bright blue color) in the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance A in FIG. 66(B) moves upward, which is the opposite direction to the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction). However, the medium performance symbol 8C (number "7" having bright red color) in the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance A in FIG. 66(G) is moving upward, which is the opposite direction to the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction). . In addition, the subsequent medium performance symbol 8C (number "6" having bright blue color) in the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance B of FIG. 67(B) moves upward, which is the opposite direction to the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction). , The subsequent medium performance symbol 8C (number "8" having bright blue color) in the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance B in FIG. 67(G) moves upward, which is the opposite direction to the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction). There is. In addition, the subsequent medium performance symbol 8C (number "6" with bright blue color) in the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance C in FIG. 68(B) moves upward, which is the opposite direction to the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction). , The subsequent medium performance symbol 8C (number "8" having bright blue color) in the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance C in FIG. 68(G) moves upward, which is the opposite direction to the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction). There is. According to this configuration, since there is one or more production symbols that move in the opposite direction to the normal variation direction (variation direction), unlike the conventional method, all the production symbols do not move in one direction, and the production It is possible to prevent the variation performance (variation display) of symbols from becoming monotonous. Furthermore, by having one or more performance symbols that move in the opposite direction to the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction), it is possible to change to a mode in which the performance symbols are separated and a set of performance symbols is spread out.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the first performance in the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance A of FIG. 66, the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance B of FIG. 67, and the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance C of FIG. One or more of the performance symbols can move in a direction perpendicular to the normal variation direction (variation direction) (direction perpendicular to the normal variation direction). Specifically, the left performance symbol 8L (number "1" having bright green color) in the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance A of FIG. 66(B) is perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction (variation direction). The left effect symbol 8L (number "4" with bright blue color) in the effect symbol movement variation effect A in FIG. It moves horizontally to the left, which is the vertical direction (direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction), and the right production symbol 8R (number "9" with bright green color) moves in the direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction (the normal fluctuation direction). It is moving horizontally to the right (direction perpendicular to the direction of fluctuation). In addition, the left performance symbol 8L (number "9" having bright green color) in the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance B in FIG. ), and the right production pattern 8R (number "4" with bright blue color) moves horizontally to the right side, which is a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction (direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction). The left effect symbol 8L (bright green number "3") in the effect symbol movement variation effect B in FIG. is moving horizontally to the left (orthogonal direction). In addition, the left performance symbol 8L (number "9" having bright green color) in the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance C in FIG. ), and the right production pattern 8R (number "4" with bright blue color) moves horizontally to the right side, which is a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction (direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction). The left effect symbol 8L (bright green number "3") in the effect symbol movement variation effect C in FIG. is moving horizontally to the left (orthogonal direction). According to this configuration, because there is one or more performance symbols that move in a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction (direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction), all the performance symbols are aligned in the same direction, unlike in the past. There is no movement in the direction, and the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols can be prevented from becoming monotonous. In addition, due to the presence of one or more production symbols that move in a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction (direction perpendicular to the normal variation direction), the production symbols are spaced apart and a set of production symbols spreads out. Can change.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the first performance in the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance B of FIG. 67 and the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance C of FIG. 68, one or more performance symbols among the plurality of performance symbols normally fluctuate. It is now possible to move in both directions (fluctuation direction) and diagonal directions. Specifically, the preceding left effect symbol 8L (number "8" having a bright blue color) in the effect symbol movement variation effect B in FIG. Moves diagonally to 45 degrees, and the subsequent left direction design 8L (number "1" with bright green color) moves to the upper left diagonally at 45 degrees, which is the direction diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction (variation direction), and moves to the upper left diagonally at 45 degrees to match the preceding right direction. The symbol 8R (number "3" with bright green color) moves to the lower right diagonally at 45 degrees, which is diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction), and the subsequent right production symbol 8R (number "5" with bright green color '') moves diagonally to the upper right at 45 degrees, which is diagonal to the normal variation direction (variation direction), and moves to the upper right diagonally at 45 degrees, which is diagonal to the normal variation direction (variation direction). "2") moves diagonally to the lower left at 45 degrees, which is diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction), and the subsequent left production symbol 8L (number "4" with bright blue color) moves in the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction). The preceding right production symbol 8R (number "1" in bright green) moves to the lower right diagonal, which is diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction). 45 degrees, and the subsequent right effect pattern 8R (number "2" in bright blue) is moved diagonally to the upper right 45 degrees, which is a direction diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction). In addition, the preceding left effect symbol 8L (number "8" with bright blue color) in the effect symbol movement variation effect C in FIG. , and the subsequent left production symbol 8L (number "1" with bright green color) moves to the upper left diagonally at 45 degrees, which is diagonal to the normal variation direction (variation direction), and moves to the upper left diagonal 45 degrees, and the preceding right production symbol 8R ( The number "3" with bright green color moves to the lower right diagonally at 45 degrees, which is diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction), and the subsequent right production symbol 8R (number "5" with bright green color) , moves to the upper right diagonally at 45 degrees, which is a direction diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction), and moves to the upper right diagonal 45 degrees, which is a direction diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction), and moves the preceding left performance symbol 8L (number "2" with bright blue color) in the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance C of FIG. 68 (G) ) moves diagonally to the lower left at 45 degrees, which is diagonal to the normal variation direction (variation direction), and the subsequent left production symbol 8L (number "4" with bright blue color) moves in a direction diagonal to the normal variation direction (variation direction). Moves diagonally to the upper left diagonally at 45 degrees, and the preceding right production symbol 8R (number "1" with bright green color) moves to the lower right diagonally at 45 degrees, which is diagonally to the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction). The subsequent right effect symbol 8R (number "2" having bright blue color) is moved diagonally to the upper right at 45 degrees, which is a direction diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction). According to this configuration, because there is one or more performance symbols that move in a direction perpendicular to the normal variation direction (variation direction) (a direction perpendicular to the normal variation direction), all production symbols are uniform, unlike the conventional method. There is no movement in the direction, and the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols can be prevented from becoming monotonous. Furthermore, by having one or more performance symbols that move in a direction diagonal to the normal variation direction (fluctuation direction), it is possible to change to a mode in which the performance symbols are separated and a set of performance symbols is spread out.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the first performance in the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance A of FIG. 66, the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance B of FIG. 67, and the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance C of FIG. 68, a set of performance symbols are spaced apart from each other, and after the first performance, it is possible to perform a second performance in which the set of performance symbols returns to the state before they were separated and stops changing (performance symbol movement). 66 (D) to (F), (I) to (K) in variable performance A, movement of the effect symbols in Figures 67 (D) to (F), (I) to (K), and effect pattern movement in variable effect B. 68 (D) to (F), (J) to (L)) for variable performance C. According to this configuration, by making a set of performance symbols spaced apart from each other, the set of performance symbols is spread out, and then the shape before the set of performance symbols is separated from each other, that is, the state before spreading. Since it is now possible to return to the pattern and stop the fluctuation, when it is stopped and displayed, it will be in the familiar state as before, that is, the state before spreading, and by a set of performance symbols that have stopped fluctuating. It is possible to easily inform the player of a win or a loss.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the performance symbol movement variation performance will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance A of FIG. 66, the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance B of FIG. 67, and the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance C of FIG. 68 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the game ball enters the first starting port 20 It was based on what was done. In other words, the game was played in a so-called left-handed game state. However, the game may be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 210. In other words, the game may be played in a so-called right-handed game state.

[Modification 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance A of FIG. 66, the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance B of FIG. 67, and the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance C of FIG. Three vertically elongated rectangular areas (that is, areas in which the display screen 7a is divided into three equal parts in a row) are provided as variable display areas for one effect pattern (also referred to as ``effect pattern variable areas''). The left effect symbol 8L of the image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the 3D image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the 3D image are the effect symbols (symbols: numbers " A fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) from "1" to the number "9" had started. However, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, there are three horizontally long rectangular areas (in other words, the display screen 7a is arranged in a row) as variable display areas for the three performance symbols (also referred to as "variation areas for the performance symbols"). The reels are rotated from the right side of the upper fluctuating display area to the left side of the upper variable display area. ”), start the variable display (variable display) of the 3D image, and change the symbols (number “1” to number Start the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the number "9"), and move the symbol (number "1") so that the lower right effect symbol of the 3D image becomes a display mode in which the reels rotate from the right side of the lower fluctuating display area to the left side. ” to number “9”) is configured to start a variable display (variable display), the preceding upper display symbol is placed to the left of the upper display symbol, and the upper display is stopped and displayed in the center of the upper variable display area. A symbol, a subsequent upper effect symbol placed to the right of the upper effect symbol, a preceding medium effect symbol placed to the left of the medium effect symbol, a medium effect symbol stopped and displayed in the center of the medium variation display area, a medium effect The following medium effect symbol placed to the right of the symbol, the preceding right effect symbol placed to the left of the right effect symbol, the right effect symbol stopped and displayed in the center of the right variable display area, the right side of the right effect symbol For a set of performance symbols that can notify a hit or a loss, which is composed of the subsequent right performance symbols placed in , the performance symbol movement variation performance A in FIG. The effect symbol movement variation effect C shown in FIG. 68 may be applied. Even with this configuration, it is possible to achieve the same effects as those of the above-mentioned effect symbol movement variation effect A of FIG. 66, effect symbol movement variation effect B of FIG. 67, and effect symbol movement variation effect C of FIG. 68. can.

[Modification 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance A of FIG. 66, the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance B of FIG. 67, and the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance C of FIG. , including the following left effect pattern 8L), middle effect pattern 8C (including the preceding medium effect pattern 8C, and subsequent medium effect pattern 8C), right effect pattern 8R (preceding right effect pattern 8R, subsequent right effect pattern) Before a set of production symbols such as production symbol 8R (including production symbol 8R) usually starts to move in the fluctuating direction (fluctuation direction), a plurality of production symbols in the set of production symbols are moved in different directions from each other, and Each of them was moving in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction). In this movement, the specific image may be placed in front of the background image and behind the set of performance symbols, and a portion of the specific image may be covered by the set of performance symbols. This specific image may be a specific character that indicates the degree of winning expectation, or may be a premium image that is an image that rarely appears. In this way, the player can have a special opportunity to visually check the specific image during the variation exercise (variation display) of the production symbols without developing to super reach (SP reach), so the player can The fluctuating performance (fluctuation display) is less likely to become monotonous, and can contribute to improving the player's motivation.

[Modification 4]
In the performance symbol movement variation performance C of FIG. 68 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when each performance symbol is enlarged to the first stage and becomes larger, each performance symbol is further enlarged from the first stage to the second stage. When they grew up, each design had a predetermined color of rice running through it. The probability of hitting increases in the order of the colors of lightning: white → blue → purple. However, instead of lightning, when each performance symbol is enlarged to the first stage and becomes larger, when each production symbol is further enlarged from the first stage to the second stage and becomes larger, the original color of each production symbol The color may be changed from to another color. The other colors are the same as the lightning bolt color, and the probability of winning increases in the order of white → blue → purple. Even with this configuration, it is possible to suggest to the player the degree of expectation of winning.

[Modification 5]
In the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance A of FIG. 66(B) in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the right performance symbol 8R (number "3" having bright green color) that was stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuation display area normally fluctuates. It started moving in the direction (in other words, downward). However, like the medium effect pattern 8C (number "2" with bright blue color) that was stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area, the direction is different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, the lower side), and the normal fluctuation direction It is also possible to start moving upward in the opposite direction. In addition, in the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance B of FIG. 67(B) in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the right performance symbol 8R (number "4" having bright blue color) which was stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuation display area is followed by The right production symbol 8R (number "5" with bright green color) is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, the lower side), and is diagonally upward (upper right) toward the upper right side, which is a direction diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction. It started moving at an angle of 45 degrees. However, like the subsequent medium performance symbol 8C (the number "6" with bright blue color), it moves in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and toward the upper side, which is the opposite direction to the normal fluctuation direction. Alternatively, the movement may be started. In addition, in the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance C of FIG. 68(B) in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the right performance symbol 8R (number "4" having bright blue color) which was stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuation display area is followed by The right production pattern 8R (number "5" with bright green color) is enlarged in the first stage and becomes larger, in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) and in a direction diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction. It started moving diagonally upward (45 degrees diagonally to the upper right) toward the upper right side. However, like the subsequent medium performance symbol 8C (the number "6" with bright blue color), it moves in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and toward the upper side, which is the opposite direction to the normal fluctuation direction. Alternatively, the movement may be started. Even with this configuration, it is possible to change to a mode in which each effect pattern is spaced apart and a set of effect patterns is spread out.

[Modification 6]
In the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance C of FIG. 68 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the size of each performance symbol in the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, and the right fluctuation display area 8Rr is enlarged in stages. It was getting bigger. However, the left performance pattern 8L (preceding left performance pattern 8L, subsequent left performance pattern 8L) in the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, and the right performance pattern 8L (preceding right performance pattern 8R, subsequent left performance pattern 8L) in the right fluctuation display area 8Rr The size of the right effect pattern 8R) is maintained without being enlarged at all, whereas only the medium effect pattern 8C (preceding medium effect pattern 8C, subsequent medium effect pattern 8C) in the medium variation display area 8Cr is enlarged. The size may be enlarged step by step. In this way, the variations in the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols are increased, so that the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is less likely to become monotonous, which can contribute to improving the player's motivation.

[Modification 7]
In the performance symbol movement variation performance C of FIG. 68 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the size is further enlarged from the first stage to the second stage. However, the second stage may be further expanded to a third stage. The size of the effect pattern enlarged in the third stage is approximately 1.5 times the size of the effect pattern enlarged in the second stage. As a result, the size of the effect pattern enlarged to the third stage becomes approximately 3.375 times the size of the original effect pattern. Further, the expectation of winning may be increased by enlarging the effect symbols in the order of 1st stage → 2nd stage → 3rd stage. At this time, the color of the effect design expanded in the first stage is changed from the original color to white, the color of the effect design further expanded from the first stage to the second stage is changed from white to blue, and the color of the effect design expanded in the first stage is changed from white to blue. The color of the performance pattern further enlarged from the stage to the third stage is changed from blue to purple. The expectation of winning increases in the order of white → blue → purple. Even with this configuration, it is possible to suggest to the player the degree of expectation of winning.

[Modification 8]
In the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance A of FIG. 66 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the fluctuation performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is started, the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are mutually moved. The pattern is changing to one where they spread apart. When the symbols spread apart from each other, the color of these performance symbols changes to another color, thereby indicating the expectation of winning with respect to the variation. In addition, in the performance symbol movement variation performance B of FIG. 67 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is started, the preceding left performance symbol 8L, the left performance symbol 8L, and the subsequent The left presentation pattern 8L, the preceding medium presentation pattern 8C, the subsequent medium presentation pattern 8C, the preceding right presentation pattern 8R, and the subsequent right presentation pattern 8R have changed to a state where they are separated from each other and spread out. In the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance A of FIG. 66 and the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance B of FIG. It was beginning to suggest expectations. Other colors include purple and yellow (gold), and when the color of these production patterns changes from their own color to purple, the probability of winning is higher, and it changes to yellow (gold) instead of purple. The expectation of winning was higher when the color changed than when the color changed to purple. The winning expectation in purple is the same as the red pending icon (red fluctuating icon), and the winning expectation in yellow (gold) is the same as the yellow (golden) pending icon (yellow ( The expectation of winning was the same as that of the Golden (Fluctuating icon). However, the other colors are red and yellow (gold), and the expectation of winning for red is the same as the expectation of winning for red pending icon (red fluctuation icon), and the expectation for winning for yellow (gold) is the same as the expectation of winning for red (red pending icon). may be set to the same winning expectation as the yellow (golden) pending icon (yellow (golden) fluctuating icon).

[Modification 9]
In the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance B of FIG. 67 and the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance C of FIG. 68 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the preceding left performance symbol 8L is at the lower left in a direction diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction). The subsequent left production symbol 8L moves diagonally to the upper left at 45 degrees, which is diagonal to the normal variation direction (variation direction), and the preceding right production symbol 8R moves diagonally to the normal variation direction (variation direction). It moved diagonally to the lower right at 45 degrees, and the subsequent right performance symbol 8R moved to the upper right diagonally at 45 degrees, which was diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction). However, instead of the lower left diagonal of 45 degrees, the upper left diagonal of 45 degrees, the lower right diagonal of 45 degrees, and the upper right diagonal of 45 degrees, the lower left diagonal of 30 degrees, the upper left diagonal of 30 degrees, the lower right diagonal of 30 degrees, and the upper right diagonal of 30 degrees may be used. , lower left diagonal 60 degrees, upper left diagonal 60 degrees, lower right diagonal 60 degrees, and upper right diagonal 60 degrees. Even with this configuration, it is possible to change to a mode in which the performance symbols are spaced apart and a set of performance symbols is spread out.

[Modification 10]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect symbol movement variation effect A in FIG. 66, the effect symbol movement variation effect B in FIG. 67, and the effect symbol movement variation effect C in FIG. 68 do not include some of the effects described. Alternatively, other effects may be added.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A6-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of performance symbols that can notify a hit or a loss;
Before the set of performance symbols starts moving in the fluctuation direction, a plurality of performance symbols in the set of performance symbols move in directions different from each other and in directions different from the fluctuation direction, After that, the first performance of moving in the fluctuation direction can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-1,
In the first production, one or more production symbols among the plurality of production symbols move in a direction opposite to the fluctuation direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A6-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-2,
In the first production, one or more production symbols among the plurality of production symbols move in a direction perpendicular to the fluctuation direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A6-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-3,
In the first performance, one or more performance symbols among the plurality of performance symbols move in a direction diagonal to the fluctuation direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A6-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-4,
In the first performance, the set of performance symbols are spaced apart from each other,
After the first performance, performing a second performance in which the set of performance symbols is returned to the state before being separated and the fluctuation is stopped;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Frame-out variation effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 69 to 71. This frame-out variation performance is executed when the production pattern starts the variation performance. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a frame-out variation effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Frame out variation effect A]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining frame-out variation effect A. The frame-out fluctuation performance is a performance in which at least a part of the performance symbols displayed on the display screen 7a frames out from the display screen 7a, and then a fluctuation display is started. 69(A) to (F) show a first example of the frame-out variation effect A, and FIGS. 69(G) to (L) show a second example of the frame-out variation effect A.

In the first example of the frame-out variation effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 69(A), a fixed stop effect is executed and the effect symbols are fixed and stopped. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L is a "1" pattern, the middle presentation pattern 8C is a "2" pattern, and the right presentation pattern 8R is an "8" pattern. Although the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed, they may be displayed (the same applies below).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 69(B) and 69(C), a frame-out effect is executed. The frame-out performance is a performance in which at least a part of the performance pattern is framed out from the display screen.
In FIG. 69(B), the left production symbol 8L (“1” symbol) has started moving to the left of the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow YG1. In addition, the right performance symbol 8R (“8” symbol) has started moving to the right of the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow YG2.
In FIG. 69(C), the left effect pattern 8L ("1" pattern) is further moved in the direction indicated by arrow YG1, and a part of it is out of frame from the display screen 7a. Specifically, about one-third of the left side of the "1" symbol is out of frame. In addition, the right effect pattern 8R ("8" pattern) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG2, and a part of it is out of frame from the display screen 7a. Specifically, about one-third of the right side of the "8" symbol is out of frame.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 69(D) to (F), a variable display start effect is executed. The fluctuating display start performance is a performance that starts the fluctuating display of performance symbols.

In FIG. 69(D), the effect pattern 8L (“1” pattern), the effect pattern 8C (“2” pattern), and the effect pattern 8R (“8” pattern) are fluctuating in the direction HD (downwards of the display screen 7a). has started moving to. At this time, the effect pattern 8L ("1" pattern) and the effect pattern 8R ("8" pattern) are both moving in the fluctuation direction HD in a state where they are out of frame from the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 69(E), the effect pattern 8L (“1” pattern), the effect pattern 8C (“2” pattern), and the effect pattern 8R (“8” pattern) are fluctuating in the direction HD (downwards of the display screen 7a). has been moved further to As a result, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R (the "1" symbol, the "2" symbol, and the "8" symbol) on the left-center right side move out of the frame from the lower part of the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 69(F), the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently.

In the first example of the frame-out variation performance A, in the frame-out performance, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R (the "1" symbol and the "8" symbol) are caused to frame out in a direction intersecting the fluctuation direction HD.

In the second example of the frame-out variation effect A, as in the first example, first, as shown in FIG. 69(G), a fixed stop effect is executed and the effect symbols are fixed and stopped. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L is a "1" pattern, the middle presentation pattern 8C is a "2" pattern, and the right presentation pattern 8R is an "8" pattern. Although the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed, they may be displayed (the same applies below).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 69(H) to (K), a frame-out effect is executed. The frame-out performance is a performance in which at least a part of the performance pattern is framed out from the display screen.
In FIG. 69(H), the left effect symbol 8L (“1” symbol) has started moving to the left of the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow YG1. In addition, the right performance symbol 8R (“8” symbol) has started moving to the right of the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow YG2. Furthermore, the middle effect pattern 8C ("2" pattern) has started moving upward on the display screen 7a as shown by arrow YG3.
In FIG. 69(I), the left effect pattern 8L ("1" pattern) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG1, and a part of it is out of frame from the display screen 7a. Specifically, about one-third of the left side of the "1" symbol is out of frame. Further, the right effect pattern 8R ("8" pattern) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG2, and a part of it is out of frame from the display screen 7a. Specifically, about one-third of the right side of the "8" symbol is out of frame. Further, the middle effect pattern 8C ("2" pattern) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG3, and a part of it is out of frame from the display screen 7a. Specifically, about the upper fifth of the "2" symbol is out of frame.

In FIG. 69(J), a color change effect is being executed. The color change performance is a performance that changes the display color of at least a part of the performance design. The color change effect is performed when the expectation level of a jackpot is relatively high. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R ("1" symbol, "2" symbol, and "8" symbol) on the left-center right are changed from white to red (shown by hatching).
In FIG. 69(K), a color return effect is being executed. The color restoration performance is a performance that returns the display color of the performance pattern changed by the color change performance to the original display color. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R ("1" symbol, "2" symbol, and "8" symbol) on the left-center right side are changed from red to white.

The color change effect and the color return effect are executed in the middle of the frame-out effect. Further, the background image of the display screen 7a is changing in accordance with the color change effect and the color return effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(L), a variable display start effect is executed. The fluctuating display start performance is a performance that starts the fluctuating display of performance symbols. Here, the production pattern 8L ("1" symbol), the production symbol 8C ("2" symbol), and the production symbol 8R ("8" symbol) move in the fluctuation direction HD (downward of the display screen 7a). It has started. At this time, the performance symbol 8L ("1" symbol) and the performance symbol 8R ("8" symbol) are both moving in the fluctuation direction HD in a state where they are out of frame from the display screen 7a. The background image continues to change here as well. Thereafter, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R (the "1" symbol, the "2" symbol, and the "8" symbol) on the left-center right side move out of the frame from the bottom of the display screen 7a. Then, similarly to FIG. 69(F), the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate at high speed.

In the second example of frame-out variation effect A, in the frame-out effect, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R ("1" symbol, "8" symbol) are made to frame out in the direction intersecting the fluctuation direction HD. There is. Further, the medium performance symbol 8C (“2” symbol) is frame-outed in the direction opposite to the fluctuation direction HD.

[Frame out variation effect B]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining frame-out variation effect B. The frame-out fluctuation performance is a performance in which at least a part of the performance symbols displayed on the display screen 7a frames out from the display screen 7a, and then a fluctuation display is started. 70(A) to (F) show a first example of the frame-out variation effect B, and FIGS. 70(G) to (L) show a second example of the frame-out variation effect B.

In the first example of the frame-out variation effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 70(A), a fixed stop effect is executed and the effect symbols are fixed and stopped. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L is a "1" pattern, the middle presentation pattern 8C is a "2" pattern, and the right presentation pattern 8R is an "8" pattern. Although the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed, they may be displayed (the same applies below).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 70(B) and 70(C), a frame-out effect is executed. The frame-out performance is a performance in which at least a part of the performance pattern is framed out from the display screen.
In FIG. 70(B), the left effect symbol 8L (“1” symbol) has started moving to the left of the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow YG1. In addition, the right performance symbol 8R (“8” symbol) has started moving to the right of the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow YG2.
In FIG. 70(C), the left effect pattern 8L ("1" pattern) is further moved in the direction indicated by arrow YG1, and a part of it is out of frame from the display screen 7a. Specifically, about one-third of the left side of the "1" symbol is out of frame. In addition, the right effect pattern 8R ("8" pattern) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG2, and a part of it is out of frame from the display screen 7a. Specifically, about one-third of the right side of the "8" symbol is out of frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(D), a large area frame-out effect is executed. The large-area frame-out performance is a performance in which the frame-out area is larger in the area of the performance pattern compared to the frame-out performance. Here, the left effect pattern 8L ("1" pattern) is further moved in the direction indicated by arrow YG1, and most of it is out of frame from the display screen 7a. Specifically, about two-thirds of the left side of the "1" symbol is out of frame. Further, the right effect pattern 8R ("8" pattern) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG2, and most of it is out of frame from the display screen 7a. Specifically, about two-thirds of the right side of the "8" symbol is out of frame.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 70(E) and 70(F), a variable display start effect is executed. The fluctuating display start performance is a performance that starts the fluctuating display of performance symbols.
In FIG. 70(E), the effect pattern 8L (“1” pattern), the effect pattern 8C (“2” pattern), and the effect pattern 8R (“8” pattern) are fluctuating in the direction HD (downwards of the display screen 7a). has started moving to. At this time, the effect pattern 8L ("1" pattern) and the effect pattern 8R ("8" pattern) are both moving in the fluctuation direction HD in a state where they are out of frame from the display screen 7a.

Then, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R ("1" symbol, "2" symbol, and "8" symbol) on the left center right move out of the frame from the bottom of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 70(F). , the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate at high speed. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently.

In the first example of the frame-out variation effect B, in the frame-out effect and the large-area frame-out effect, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R ("1" symbol, "8" symbol) are in the direction that intersects the fluctuation direction HD. is forced out of frame.

In the second example of the frame-out variation effect B, as in the first example, first, as shown in FIG. 70(G), the fixed stop effect is executed and the effect symbols are fixed and stopped. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L is a "1" pattern, the middle presentation pattern 8C is a "2" pattern, and the right presentation pattern 8R is an "8" pattern. Although the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed, they may be displayed (the same applies below).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 70(H) and (I), a frame-out effect is executed. The frame-out performance is a performance in which at least a part of the performance pattern is framed out from the display screen.
In FIG. 70(H), the left production symbol 8L (“1” symbol) has started moving to the left of the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow YG1. In addition, the right performance symbol 8R (“8” symbol) has started moving to the right of the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow YG2. Furthermore, the medium performance symbol 8C (“2” symbol) has started moving upward on the display screen 7a as shown by arrow YG3.
In FIG. 70(I), the left effect pattern 8L ("1" pattern) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG1, and a part of it is out of frame from the display screen 7a. Specifically, about one-third of the left side of the "1" symbol is out of frame. In addition, the right effect pattern 8R ("8" pattern) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG2, and a part of it is out of frame from the display screen 7a. Specifically, about one-third of the right side of the "8" symbol is out of frame. Furthermore, the middle effect pattern 8C ("2" pattern) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG3, and a part of it is out of frame from the display screen 7a. Specifically, about the upper fifth of the "2" symbol is out of frame.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 70(J) and (K), a large area frame-out effect is executed. The large-area frame-out performance is a performance in which the frame-out area is larger in the area of the performance pattern compared to the frame-out performance. Here, the left effect pattern 8L ("1" pattern) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG1, and most of it is out of frame from the display screen 7a. Specifically, about two-thirds of the left side of the "1" symbol is out of frame. Further, the right effect pattern 8R ("8" pattern) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG2, and most of it is out of frame from the display screen 7a. Specifically, about two-thirds of the right side of the "8" symbol is out of frame. Further, the middle effect pattern 8C ("2" pattern) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG3, and most of it is out of frame from the display screen 7a. Specifically, about two-thirds of the upper part of the "2" symbol is out of frame.

In FIG. 70(J), a color change effect is being executed. The color change performance is a performance that changes the display color of at least a part of the performance design. The color change effect is performed when the expectation level of a jackpot is relatively high. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R ("1" pattern, "2" pattern, and "8" pattern) on the left-center right are changed from white to red (shown by hatching).
In FIG. 70(K), a color return effect is being executed. The color restoration performance is a performance that returns the display color of the performance pattern changed by the color change performance to the original display color. Here, the left-center right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R ("1" symbol, "2" symbol, and "8" symbol) are changed from red to white.

The color change effect and color return effect are executed during the large area frame-out effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(L), a variable display start effect is executed. The fluctuating display start performance is a performance that starts the fluctuating display of performance symbols. Here, the production pattern 8L ("1" symbol), the production symbol 8C ("2" symbol), and the production symbol 8R ("8" symbol) move in the fluctuation direction HD (downward of the display screen 7a). It has started. At this time, the performance symbol 8L ("1" symbol) and the performance symbol 8R ("8" symbol) are both moving in the fluctuation direction HD in a state where they are out of frame from the display screen 7a. Thereafter, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R (the "1" symbol, the "2" symbol, and the "8" symbol) on the left-center right side move out of the frame from the bottom of the display screen 7a. Then, similarly to FIG. 70(F), the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate at high speed.

In the second example of frame-out variation effect B, in the frame-out effect, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R ("1" symbol, "8" symbol) are made to frame out in the direction that intersects the variation direction HD. There is. In addition, the medium performance symbol 8C (“2” symbol) is frame-outed in the direction opposite to the fluctuation direction HD.

[Frame out variation effect C]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the frame-out variation effect C. The frame-out fluctuation performance is a performance in which at least a part of the performance symbols displayed on the display screen 7a frames out from the display screen 7a, and then a fluctuation display is started. 71(A) to (F) show a first example of the frame-out variation effect C, and FIGS. 71(G) to (L) show a second example of the frame-out variation effect C.

In the first example of the frame-out variation effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 71(A), a fixed stop effect is executed and the effect symbols are fixed and stopped. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L is a "1" pattern, the middle presentation pattern 8C is a "2" pattern, and the right presentation pattern 8R is an "8" pattern. Although the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed, they may be displayed (the same applies below).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 71(B) and 71(C), a frame-out effect is executed. The frame-out performance is a performance in which at least a part of the performance pattern is framed out from the display screen.
In FIG. 71(B), the left effect symbol 8L (“1” symbol) has started moving to the left of the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow YG1. In addition, the right performance symbol 8R (“8” symbol) has started moving to the right of the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow YG2.
In FIG. 71(C), the left effect pattern 8L ("1" pattern) is further moved in the direction indicated by arrow YG1, and a part of it is out of frame from the display screen 7a. Specifically, about one-third of the left side of the "1" symbol is out of frame. Further, the right effect pattern 8R ("8" pattern) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG2, and a part of it is out of frame from the display screen 7a. Specifically, about one-third of the right side of the "8" symbol is out of frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(D), a large area frame-out effect is executed. The large-area frame-out performance is a performance in which the frame-out area is larger in the area of the performance pattern compared to the frame-out performance. Here, the left effect pattern 8L ("1" pattern) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG1, and most of it is out of frame from the display screen 7a. Specifically, about two-thirds of the left side of the "1" symbol is out of frame. Further, the right effect pattern 8R ("8" pattern) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG2, and most of it is out of frame from the display screen 7a. Specifically, about two-thirds of the right side of the "8" symbol is out of frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(E), a position return effect is executed. The position return performance is a performance in which a performance pattern that has been out of frame is returned to its original stop position. Here, the left performance symbol 8L (“1” symbol) is moved in the direction indicated by arrow YG1 and returned to its original stop position. In addition, the right performance symbol 8R (“8” symbol) is moved in the direction indicated by arrow YG2 and returned to its original stop position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(F), a variable display start effect is executed. The fluctuating display start performance is a performance that starts the fluctuating display of performance symbols. The performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a variable area within the display screen 7a. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is variably displayed in a variable region 8LR, the middle performance symbol 8C is variably displayed in a variable region 8CR, and the right performance symbol 8R is variably displayed in a variable region 8RR.

In the second example of the frame-out variation effect C, as in the first example, first, as shown in FIG. 71(G), a fixed stop effect is executed and the effect symbols are fixed and stopped. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L is a "1" pattern, the middle presentation pattern 8C is a "2" pattern, and the right presentation pattern 8R is an "8" pattern. Although the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed, they may be displayed (the same applies below).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 71(H) and (I), a frame-out effect is executed. The frame-out performance is a performance in which at least a part of the performance pattern is framed out from the display screen.
In FIG. 71(H), the left production symbol 8L (“1” symbol) has started moving to the left of the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow YG1. In addition, the right performance symbol 8R (“8” symbol) has started moving to the right of the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow YG2. Furthermore, the middle effect pattern 8C ("2" pattern) has started moving upward on the display screen 7a as shown by arrow YG3.
In FIG. 71(I), the left effect pattern 8L ("1" pattern) is further moved in the direction indicated by arrow YG1, and a part of it is out of frame from the display screen 7a. Specifically, about one-third of the left side of the "1" symbol is out of frame. Further, the right effect pattern 8R ("8" pattern) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG2, and a part of it is out of frame from the display screen 7a. Specifically, about one-third of the right side of the "8" symbol is out of frame. Further, the middle effect pattern 8C ("2" pattern) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG3, and a part of it is out of frame from the display screen 7a. Specifically, about the upper fifth of the "2" symbol is out of frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(J), a large area frame-out effect is executed. The large-area frame-out performance is a performance in which the frame-out area is larger in the area of the performance pattern compared to the frame-out performance. Here, the left effect pattern 8L ("1" pattern) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG1, and most of it is out of frame from the display screen 7a. Specifically, about two-thirds of the left side of the "1" symbol is out of frame. Further, the right effect pattern 8R ("8" pattern) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG2, and most of it is out of frame from the display screen 7a. Specifically, about two-thirds of the right side of the "8" symbol is out of frame. Further, the middle effect pattern 8C ("2" pattern) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG3, and most of it is out of frame from the display screen 7a. Specifically, about two-thirds of the upper part of the "2" symbol is out of frame.

In FIG. 71(J), a color change effect is being executed. The color change performance is a performance that changes the display color of at least a part of the performance design. The color change effect is performed when the expectation level of a jackpot is relatively high. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R ("1" pattern, "2" pattern, and "8" pattern) on the left-center right are changed from white to red (shown by hatching). The color change effect is executed in the middle of the large area frame-out effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(K), a position return effect is executed. The position return performance is a performance in which a performance pattern that has been out of frame is returned to its original stop position. Here, the left performance symbol 8L ("1" symbol) is moved in the direction indicated by arrow YG1 and returned to its original stop position. In addition, the right performance symbol 8R (“8” symbol) is moved in the direction indicated by arrow YG2 and returned to its original stop position. Further, the middle effect symbol 8C (“2” symbol) is moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG3 and returned to the original stop position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(L), a variable display start effect is executed. The variable display start performance is a performance that starts variable display of performance symbols. The performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a variable area within the display screen 7a. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is variably displayed in a variable region 8LR, the middle performance symbol 8C is variably displayed in a variable region 8CR, and the right performance symbol 8R is variably displayed in a variable region 8RR.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the flameout variation effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 69 to 71, a frame-out effect is performed in which at least a part of the effect symbols are framed out from the display screen, and after the frame-out effect, variable display of the effect symbols is started. A variable display start effect is executed. According to this configuration, since the variation is started after the performance symbols go out of frame, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented and innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.
69(B)(C), (H) to (K), FIG. 70(B)(C), (H)(I), FIG. 71(B)(C), FIG. 71(H)( The frame-out effect in I) corresponds to the "frame-out effect", and is shown in FIGS. 69(D) to (F), (L), FIG. 70(E), (F), (L), FIG. The variable display start effect of L) corresponds to the "variable display start effect", and the effect control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the "effect execution means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 70 to 71, after the frame-out effect and before the variable display start effect, the area of the effect pattern that is frame-out is smaller than that in the frame-out effect. Executes a large, large-area frame-out effect. According to this configuration, since the large-area frame-out effect is executed following the frame-out effect, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented and innovative effect, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. can.
Note that the large-area frame-out effects shown in FIGS. 70(D), (J), and (K), and FIGS. 71(D), and (J) correspond to "large-area frame-out effects."

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, a color change effect (FIG. 69 (J), FIG. 70 (J), Fig. 71 (J)), and a color restoration effect (Fig. 69 (K), Fig. 70 (K)) that returns the display color of the effect design changed by the color change effect to the original display color. , execute. According to this configuration, in addition to the frame-out effect and large-area frame-out effect, the display color of the effect pattern changes, resulting in an even more innovative effect, which can visually entertain the player and improve interest. can be achieved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the frame-out performance, the performance symbols are framed out in the direction intersecting the fluctuation direction HD of the performance symbols (FIGS. 69(C), (I) to (K), FIG. 70(C) ), (I)). According to this configuration, since the performance symbols are framed out in a direction different from the direction in which the performance symbols fluctuate, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented and innovative performance, thereby improving interest. Can be done.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the frame-out performance, the performance symbols are framed out in the direction opposite to the direction of variation HD of the performance symbols (FIGS. 69(I) to (K), FIG. 70(I)). According to this configuration, since the performance symbols are framed out in a direction different from the direction in which the performance symbols fluctuate, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented and innovative performance, thereby improving interest. Can be done.

[Modified example]
A modified example of the frame-out variation effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, in the frame-out performance, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R move apart in the left-right direction, and the middle performance symbol 8C moves upward. On the other hand, the moving direction is not particularly limited because it is sufficient that at least a part of the performance symbol goes out of frame. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move in the same direction while maintaining a relative positional relationship, and at least one of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R frames out.

[Modification 2]
In the embodiment described above, a color change effect is performed in which the display color of at least a part of the effect pattern is changed (FIG. 69 (J), FIG. 70 (J), FIG. 71 (J)). On the other hand, it may be configured to be able to execute an aspect change performance that changes at least a part of the aspect of the performance symbol. Further, in addition to the mode change effect, a configuration may be adopted in which a mode return effect for returning the mode changed by the mode change effect to the original mode can be executed. The change in the aspect here is, for example, a change in at least one of the shape, size, orientation, and transparency (density) of the performance pattern.

[Modification 3]
The frame-out effect of the above embodiment has a configuration in which the frame-out effect occurs when the effect pattern moves. On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which the effect pattern is enlarged and then framed out. At this time, at least one of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right may be enlarged, or the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right may be made into one set of production symbols. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the effect design is enlarged. Further, when a plurality of performance symbols are stopped and displayed in the changing direction, all of the performance symbols displayed on the display screen 7a may be enlarged.

[Modification 4]
The frame-out effect and the large-area frame-out effect of the above embodiments have a configuration in which a part of the effect pattern is framed out. On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which the entire performance pattern is framed out.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, in the color change effect, the display color of the effect pattern was changed from white to red. On the other hand, for example, the display color of the effect pattern may be determined from among a plurality of display color candidates depending on the degree of expectation for the jackpot game. For example, the display colors may be selected in the order of blue, green, purple, red, gold, and rainbow as the expectation level increases.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A7-1]
A gaming machine,
Equipped with a performance execution means capable of executing a frame-out performance in which at least a part of the performance design is framed out from the display screen, and a variable display start performance in which a variable display of the performance design is started after the frame-out performance,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A7-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-1,
After the frame-out performance and before the variable display start performance, the performance execution means executes a large-area frame-out performance in which an area of the performance pattern to be framed out is larger than that of the frame-out performance. It is possible to
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A7-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-2,
In the middle of the large-area frame-out performance, the performance execution means:
a color change effect that changes the display color of at least a portion of the effect design;
It is possible to perform a color restoration performance that returns the display color of the performance pattern changed by the color change performance to the original display color,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A7-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-3,
In the frame-out performance, the performance execution means frames out the performance symbol in a direction intersecting a direction of variation of the performance symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A7-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-3,
In the frame-out performance, the performance execution means causes the performance symbol to frame out in a direction opposite to the direction of variation of the performance symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The effect pattern mode change effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 72 to 74. In FIGS. 72 to 74, various movable accessories, various decorative members, and various background images arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing the drawings. FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the performance pattern change effect A, FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the performance pattern change effect B, and FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the performance pattern change effect C. It is a diagram.

In this production pattern mode change production, when the variation production (fluctuating display) of the production pattern is started, the production pattern changes to various modes until it is stopped and displayed. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the effect pattern change effect is included, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

Here, first, the production symbols, the hold icons, etc. will be briefly explained, and the production symbol mode change production A, the production symbol mode change production B, and the production symbol mode change production C will be explained in order.

[Production pattern]
First, I will briefly explain the production design. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, showing a left effect pattern 8L of a stereoscopic image, a middle effect pattern 8C of a three-dimensional image, and a right effect pattern 8R of a three-dimensional image. A fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols (designs: numbers "1" to "9") is started in the display mode. In the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance design, each performance design is a numeric design: number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → A variable effect (fluctuating display) is performed in a display mode in which the reels rotate in the order of number "7" → number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" →... Note that the number "7" has a bright red color, and the odd numbers "1", "3", "5", and "9" except the number "7" all have the same bright green color. Even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color. In this way, each production pattern is designed primarily in one of bright red, bright green, and bright blue. In addition, since the number symbols (odd number symbols and even number symbols) each have a different color, for example, the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in alignment with the same number symbol, reaching the reach. is formed and the effect is developed after that, the more the player experiences the effect that is developed through reach, the more the player becomes aware of the color of the temporarily stopped number symbol and the effect that will be developed. Players can now have the opportunity to discover for themselves the relationship (law) between and. Thereby, each number pattern (odd number pattern and even number pattern) has a color, which can contribute to improving interest.

When the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is started, the performance symbols that are stopped and displayed at the stop position will move all at once (at the same time) toward the bottom (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "fluctuation direction"). The display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a rapidly changing display mode. Thereby, the background image placed behind the performance pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent performance pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the production pattern decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the performance design is temporarily stopped and displayed, at the stop position, the reflected light reflected by the performance design rotates clockwise along the outline of the performance design, and then it rotates clockwise. The reflected light stops and disappears, resulting in a stopped display.

Furthermore, when the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is started, as mentioned above, the performance symbols that are stopped and displayed at the stop position will all at once (at the same time) gradually move from a low speed toward the fluctuation direction (that is, downward). The display mode changed from an opaque state to a translucent state as the speed increased, resulting in a rapidly changing display mode. However, when the left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R move toward the direction of variation (that is, downward), the left effect symbol 8L first moves by a predetermined distance (for example, 5 mm), and then The presentation pattern 8C moves by a predetermined distance (for example, 5 mm), and finally the right presentation pattern 8R moves by a predetermined distance (for example, 5 mm), changing from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from low speed. It is also possible to use a display mode that changes at high speed.

The configuration of the performance symbols in the performance pattern change performance A is different from the configuration of the performance symbols in the performance pattern change performance B and the performance pattern change performance C. First, in the composition of the production pattern in the production pattern change production B and the production pattern variation production C, it is a coin-shaped three-dimensional image, and the above-mentioned number patterns ``1'' to ``9'' and the character The first element consists of characters A to I, which are symbols of . The character design is a three-dimensional image, and the image is arranged so as to fit within the outer shape of a coin. The number design is a three-dimensional image, and a portion of the number design is a coin-shaped three-dimensional image from the lower right side of the character design (that is, the lower right side of the coin-shaped outline) to the lower right side of the character design that makes up the production design. The numbers protrude toward the front side and are arranged in front of the character design and merge with each other, so that the number design covers at least a portion of the character design. The performance pattern includes a number pattern and a character pattern corresponding to the number pattern. Each number design (odd number design and even number design) is configured with a different character design having multiple colors (full color), and the character design is displayed in a large size as the main part of the production design. Ru. Therefore, the size of the number design is smaller than the size of the character design attached to the number design.

As for the production design, character A is attached to the number “1”, character B is attached to the number “2”, character C is attached to the number “3”, and character D is attached to the number “4”. The number "5" is marked with the character E, the number "6" is marked with the character F, the number "7" is marked with the character G, the number "8" is marked with the character H, The character I is attached to the number "9", and the number design is provided with a different character design having a plurality of colors (full colors). For example, the character A may be attached to the number "1" and the number "7" and overlap, and the character C may be attached to the number "3" and the number "8" and overlap. In this case, the number "7" has a character A that is displayed differently from the character A attached to the number "1," and the number "8" has a different display than the character C attached to the number "3." Let us assume that the character C is the mode.

On the other hand, the structure of the effect pattern in the effect pattern change effect A is composed of the second element consisting only of the numbers "1" to "9", which are the above-mentioned numerical patterns. The number design is a three-dimensional image, and the size (vertical size) of the number design is the same as that of the coin-shaped three-dimensional image that is the performance pattern in the performance pattern change performance B and the performance pattern change performance C. The size (vertical size) is almost the same.

On the lower right side of the display screen 7a, fluctuations of a small left effect pattern 8LZ, a small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and a small right effect pattern 8RZ, which correspond to the left effect pattern 8L, medium effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R, are shown. A sub-variable area is provided where the effect (fluctuation display) is started. Due to this variation (variation with respect to the variation icon 9C), when the variation display (variation display) of the left production symbol 8L, middle production symbol 8C, and right production symbol 8R is started, the small left The variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the presentation pattern 8LZ, small medium presentation pattern 8CZ, and small right presentation pattern 8RZ starts, and at the same time as the left presentation pattern 8L, medium presentation pattern 8C, and right presentation pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed. , the corresponding small left effect pattern 8LZ, small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and small right effect pattern 8RZ are also all stopped and displayed. The small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ are smaller versions of the numbered symbols of the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R, and the stop display. The small left effect pattern 8LZ that is displayed has the same color as the number pattern of the left effect pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed, and the small medium effect pattern 8CZ that is stopped and displayed is the same as that of the medium effect pattern 8C that is stopped and displayed. The numbers have the same design and color, and the small right performance pattern 8RZ that is stopped and displayed has the same number design and color as the right performance pattern 8R that is stopped and displayed. In this way, each small performance pattern is designed primarily in one of bright red, bright green, and bright blue.

The small left production symbol 8LZ, the small medium production symbol 8CZ, and the small right production symbol 8RZ are different from the above-mentioned fluctuating production (fluctuating display) of the production symbol, in which the reels are not rotated, and the small At the display position of the left effect pattern 8LZ, the display position of the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the display position of the small right effect pattern 8RZ, a number pattern (design: number "1" to number "9") appears and is updated. This results in a display mode that changes rapidly.

The small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, are always displayed, and are the effect patterns (that is, the right effect pattern). 8R), visibility is not obstructed by various effect images or other various images.

A state in which one or more of the left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are the same symbol and are temporarily stopped and displayed, and reach is reached. Even if the corresponding small performance symbols (for example, the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed), the small left performance symbol 8LZ and the right performance symbol 8R corresponding to the left performance symbol 8L are temporarily stopped. Even if they are displayed, all the small right performance symbols 8RZ) corresponding to the right performance symbols 8R continue to be in a state where they are variablely rendered (variably displayed). In addition, if the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they are not aligned to the same pattern and are out of alignment, the small left effect pattern 8LZ, small size A medium performance pattern 8CZ and a small right performance pattern 8RZ are stopped and displayed as the same symbols as the left performance pattern 8L, medium performance pattern 8C, and right performance pattern 8R. In addition, if the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same pattern becomes a hit, the small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small A medium performance pattern 8CZ and a small right performance pattern 8RZ are stopped and displayed in the same pattern as the left performance pattern 8L, medium performance pattern 8C, and right performance pattern 8R.

In addition, in the production pattern mode change productions A to C, when the variation production (variation display) of the production pattern is started, the production pattern is a production that changes to various modes until it is stopped and displayed. In contrast, the variable effects (fluctuating display) of the small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ (hereinafter referred to as "fluctuating effects (fluctuating display) of the small effect pattern") ) is started, the above-mentioned effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed and change to various modes, but the small effect symbols are in the process of variable display (fluctuating display), and the small left The production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ, and the small right production pattern 8RZ do not have a state of temporary stop display in the first place. In other words, the small-sized left performance pattern 8LZ, the small-sized medium performance pattern 8CZ, and the small-sized right performance pattern 8RZ do not change their appearance at all during the temporary stop display like the above-mentioned performance patterns.

Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all aligned in the same pattern and are displayed in a stopped state, and the same pattern has the number "1" in bright green and the number "1" in bright blue. Number "2" with light green color, Number "3" with light green color, Number "4" with light blue color, Number "5" with light green color, Number "6" with light blue color, Number "8" with light blue color. , if the number "9" is bright green, the gaming state after the jackpot will be a low probability time saving state (low probability high base state), whereas the same symbol will be bright red. In the case of the number "7" having a jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot becomes a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state). In addition, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all aligned in the same pattern and are displayed in a stopped state, and the same pattern has a bright red color in addition to the number "7". In the case of "3", the gaming state after the jackpot may be a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state). In this case, the number "3" has a bright red color like the number "7".

[Hold icon, etc.]
Next, to explain the fluctuation icon 9C and the pending icons 9A and 9B, the fluctuation icon 9C corresponding to the left performance symbol 8L, middle performance symbol 8C, and right performance symbol 8R that are currently fluctuating as the expiration of the first special symbol reservation is as follows. It is displayed (placed) at a variable display position (above the white rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area to the left of the variable display position, a first holding display area is provided as a first special figure hold, and in the area to the right of the variable display position, a second hold display area is provided as a second special figure hold. It is being In the first reservation display area, four reservation icons 9A can be displayed in a straight line, and a maximum of four reservation icons 9A can be stocked. The hold icon 9A closest to the fluctuation icon 9C is called the first hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A second to the change icon 9C is called the second hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A third to the change icon 9C is called the third hold icon. 9A, and the pending icon 9A that is farthest from the variable icon 9C is called the fourth pending icon 9A. In the second reservation display area, four reservation icons 9B can be displayed in a straight line, and a maximum of four reservation icons 9B can be stocked. The hold icon 9B closest to the fluctuation icon 9C is called the first hold icon 9B, the hold icon 9B second to the change icon 9C is called the second hold icon 9B, and the hold icon 9B third to the change icon 9C is called the third hold icon. 9B, and the pending icon 9B that is farthest from the variable icon 9C is called a fourth pending icon 9B. In this embodiment, the variation icon 9C and the pending icons 9A and 9B can indicate the expectation of winning depending on the color, and the expectation of winning increases in the order of white → blue → green → red → yellow (gold). . Therefore, players are highly interested in the variable icon 9C and the pending icons 9A and 9B.

[Production pattern change production A]
Next, the effect pattern change effect A will be explained with reference to FIG. 72. Here, a left-handed game is performed by shooting a game ball so that it flows down the left game area 3A, and the game ball that flows down continuously enters the first starting port 20, and the white ball is 1 pending icon 9A is determined and displayed. When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbols is started. When the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols starts, the left performance symbol 8L, middle performance symbol 8C, and right performance symbol 8R change from opaque to translucent while gradually increasing the speed from low speed toward the normal fluctuation direction. This results in a display mode that changes at high speed. At this time, variable presentation (fluctuating display) of small-sized presentation symbols such as the small-sized left presentation pattern 8LZ, the small-sized medium presentation pattern 8CZ, and the small-sized right presentation pattern 8RZ is also started. During this fluctuation, three game balls enter the first starting port 20, and the white first holding icon 9A, the white second holding icon 9A, and the white third holding icon 9A are determined by pre-reading. Is displayed. As a result, there are three pending icons 9A in stock.

After that, first, the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the bright green number "1," then the right effect pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the bright green number "3," and finally, the middle effect pattern 8C is displayed. The bright blue number "2" is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 72(A), they are aligned in a row in the left-right direction with the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a as the center line. In this state, the left performance pattern 8L, middle performance pattern 8C, and right performance pattern 8R are not aligned to the same pattern and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, and the variation (variation with respect to the white variation icon 9C) ends. The left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R that are stopped and displayed are displayed in the first mode in which no protrusion that expands outward is formed in a part of the number pattern. has been done.

At the timing when the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R stop and display, the small left effect pattern 8LZ stops and displays the bright green number "1," and the small medium effect pattern 8CZ stops and displays the bright blue color. The small right effect pattern 8RZ is stopped and displayed at the number "3" having a bright green color. Accordingly, the white variation icon 9C is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a).

When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbols is started as shown in FIG. 72(B). At this time, variable presentation (fluctuating display) of small-sized presentation symbols such as the small-sized left presentation pattern 8LZ, the small-sized medium presentation pattern 8CZ, and the small-sized right presentation pattern 8RZ is also started. When the white first hold icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white change icon 9C, both the white third hold icon 9A and the white second hold icon 9A move to the right and become the white second hold icon 9A. The hold icon 9A becomes the white first hold icon 9A, and there are two stocked hold icons 9A.

The left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R are presented in the first mode in which no protrusion that expands outward is formed in a part of the number design. The fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the symbols starts, and then, as shown in FIG. 72(C), first, the left effect symbol 8L decelerates and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and displays a bright green color. The left performance symbol 8L having the number "5" is enlarged and displayed for a predetermined period (approximately 1 second) and temporarily stopped. At this time, a protrusion 8Lf that expands outward is formed at the upper right end of the bright green number "5" which is the left presentation pattern 8L, changing to the second mode. In other words, the left presentation pattern 8L has a protrusion 8Lf formed at the upper right end of the bright green number "5" that expands outward when the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the presentation pattern starts. The temporary stop display has changed from the first mode in which the temporary stop display is different from the first mode, to the second mode in which a protrusion 8Lf is formed at the upper right end of the number "5" having a bright green color.

During this fluctuation, two game balls enter the first starting port 20, and are determined and displayed as the white third reservation icon 9A and the white fourth reservation icon 9A by pre-reading. As a result, there are four reserved icons 9A in stock, and the tank becomes full, and the player stops operating the handle 60.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, the enlarged left effect pattern 8L returns to its original size (the size of the left effect pattern 8L shown in FIG. 72A), as shown in FIG. 72(D). Returning to (a), the left effect pattern 8L of the second mode in which a protruding portion 8Lf is formed at the upper right end of the number "5" having bright green color is temporarily stopped and displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). At this time, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are in a variable effect (variable display).

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 72(E), the protrusion 8Lf formed at the upper right end of the number "5" having bright green color disappears, and the number "5" having bright green color disappears. A protruding portion 8Lf that expands outward is formed at the right end of the center portion of ``, changing to the third aspect. That is, when the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, it first changes from the first mode in which the protrusion 8Lf that expands outward is not formed at the upper right end of the number "5" having bright green color. After changing to the second mode in which the protruding portion 8Lf is formed at the upper right end of the number "5" having a bright green color different from the first mode, the second mode further changes from the second mode to a bright green color different from the second mode. The third protrusion 8Lf formed at the upper right end of the number "5" disappears and a bright green protrusion 8Lf expanding outward is formed at the center right end of the number "5". The situation is changing. In addition, in the effect pattern mode change effect A, as the third mode, a protrusion 8Lf that expands outward is formed at the right end of the central part of the bright green number "5". The first aspect, which is different from the second aspect, is that the protrusion 8Lf that expands outward is not formed at the upper right end of the number "5" having a bright green color (that is, the protrusion 8Lf has a bright green color). (first aspect) in which the number "5" is not formed at all.

The protruding part 8Lf formed at the upper right end of the bright green number "5", which is the left production pattern 8L, disappears and expands outward at the center right end of the bright green number "5". When the protrusion 8Lf is formed and changes to the third mode, the right presentation symbol 8R decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and the right presentation symbol of the number “6” having a bright blue color 8R is enlarged and displayed for a predetermined period (approximately 1 second) and temporarily stopped. At this time, a protrusion 8Rf that expands outward is formed at the upper right end of the bright blue number "6" which is the right effect pattern 8R, changing to the second mode. In other words, the right performance pattern 8R has a protrusion 8Rf formed at the upper right end of the bright blue number "6" that expands outward when the variable performance (fluctuating display) of the performance pattern starts. In the temporary stop display, the temporary stop display has changed to a second mode in which a projection 8Rf is formed at the upper right end of the number "6" having a bright blue color, which is different from the first mode.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, the enlarged right effect symbol 8R returns to its original size (the size of the right effect symbol 8R shown in FIG. 72(A)), as shown in FIG. 72(F). Returning to step (a), the right effect pattern 8R of the second mode in which the protruding portion 8Rf is formed at the upper right end of the number "6" having bright blue color is temporarily stopped and displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). At this time, the medium effect pattern 8C is in a variable effect (variable display).

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 72(G), the protrusion 8Rf formed at the upper right end of the bright blue number "6" disappears, and the bright blue number "6" disappears. A protruding portion 8Rf that expands outward is formed at the right end of the central portion of ``, changing to the third aspect. That is, when the right effect pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, it first changes from the first mode in which the protrusion 8Rf that expands outward is not formed at the upper right end of the number "6" having bright blue color. After changing to the second mode in which the protrusion 8Rf is formed at the upper right end of the number "6" having a bright blue color different from the first mode, the second mode further changes from the second mode to a bright blue color different from the second mode. The third protrusion 8Rf formed at the upper right end of the number "6" disappears, and a third protrusion 8Rf that expands outward is formed at the center right end of the number "6" having a bright blue color. The situation is changing. In addition, in the effect symbol mode change effect A, as the third mode, a protrusion 8Rf that expands outward is formed at the right end of the central part of the bright blue number "6". The first aspect, which is different from the second aspect, is that the protrusion 8Rf that expands outward is not formed at the upper right end of the number "6" having a bright blue color (that is, the protrusion 8Rf has a bright blue color). It is also possible (first aspect) in which the number "6" is not formed at all.

The protrusion 8Rf formed at the upper right end of the bright blue number "6", which is the right production pattern 8R, disappears and expands outward at the center right end of the bright blue number "6". When the protruding part 8Rf is formed and changes to the third mode, finally, the medium effect pattern 8C decelerates and changes from the semi-transparent state to the opaque state again, and the medium effect pattern of the number "7" having a bright red color is formed. 8C is enlarged and displayed for a predetermined period (approximately 1 second) and temporarily stopped. At this time, a protrusion 8Cf that expands outward is formed at the upper left end of the number "7" having a bright red color, which is the middle effect pattern 8C, changing to the second mode. In other words, in the middle effect pattern 8C, when the variable effect (fluctuating display) of the effect pattern is started, a protrusion 8Cf that expands outward is formed at the upper left end of the bright red number "7". The temporary stop display has changed from the first mode in which a projection 8Cf is formed at the upper left end of the number "7" having a bright red color, which is different from the first mode.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, the enlarged medium effect pattern 8C returns to its original size (the size of the medium effect pattern 8C shown in FIG. 72(A)), as shown in FIG. 72(H). Returning to step (a), the medium effect pattern 8C of the second mode in which the protruding portion 8Cf is formed at the upper left end of the number "7" having a bright red color is temporarily stopped and displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second).

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 72(I), the protrusion 8Cf formed at the upper left end of the bright red number "7" disappears, and the bright red number "7" disappears. A protruding portion 8Cf that expands outward is formed at the right end of the center portion of ``, changing to the third aspect. In other words, when the medium effect pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed, it first changes from the first mode in which the protrusion 8Cf that expands outward is not formed at the upper left end of the number "7" having bright red color. After changing to the second mode in which the protruding portion 8Cf is formed at the upper left end of the number "7" having a bright red color different from the first mode, the second mode further changes from the second mode to a bright red color different from the second mode. The third protrusion 8Cf formed at the upper left end of the number "7" disappears, and a third protrusion 8Cf that expands outward is formed at the right end of the center of the number "7" having a bright red color. The situation is changing. In addition, in the effect pattern mode change effect A, as the third mode, a protruding portion 8Cf that expands outward is formed at the right end of the central part of the bright red number "7". The first aspect, which is different from the second aspect, is that the protrusion 8Cf that expands outward is not formed at the upper left end of the number "7" having a bright red color (that is, the protrusion 8Cf has a bright red color). The first aspect may be such that the number "7" is not formed at all.

As a result, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all changed to the third mode, and the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a is the center line, and the horizontal direction is are temporarily stopped and displayed in a line arranged in a line, and then, as shown in FIG. (at the same time), the symbols do not line up in the same pattern, and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, and the variation (variation with respect to the white variation icon 9C) ends. In other words, even if the left presentation pattern 8L, middle presentation pattern 8C, and right presentation pattern 8R are variable presentation (fluctuating display) and change from the first mode to the other mode (second mode and third mode), they will stop. By the time it is displayed, it returns to the original first mode again.

At the timing when the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R stop and display, the small left effect pattern 8LZ stops and displays the number "5" in bright green, and the small medium effect pattern 8CZ stops and displays in bright red. The small right production pattern 8RZ is stopped and displayed at the number "6" having a bright blue color. Accordingly, the white variation icon 9C is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a).

When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and changes to the green variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbols is started, as shown in FIG. 72(K). At this time, variable presentation (fluctuating display) of small-sized presentation symbols such as the small-sized left presentation pattern 8LZ, the small-sized medium presentation pattern 8CZ, and the small-sized right presentation pattern 8RZ is also started. When the white first hold icon 9A moves to the variable display position and changes to the green change icon 9C, the white fourth hold icon 9A to the white second hold icon 9A move to the right and change to the white second hold icon 9A. 3 pending icons 9A, a white second pending icon 9A, and a white first pending icon 9A, resulting in a state where three stocked pending icons 9A exist.

In this variation, the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed as symbols having the same number to form a reach. The changes from the first mode to the third mode of the left effect pattern 8L and the changes from the first mode to the third mode of the right effect pattern 8R until the reach is formed are as shown in FIGS. 72(C) to () above. Since this is the same as F), detailed explanation will be omitted here.

When the left presentation pattern 8L temporarily stopped and displayed changes to the third mode, the right presentation pattern 8R changes from the first mode to the second mode, and then changes to the third mode, and the left presentation pattern 8L and the right presentation pattern change from the first mode to the second mode. In the state where both the symbols 8R have changed to the third mode, as described above, the protrusions 8Lf and 8Rf that expand outward are formed at the right end of the central part of the bright green number "5". It has become. When a predetermined period of time (approximately 1 second) has elapsed since the right effect pattern 8R has changed to the third mode, the protrusions 8Lf and 8Rf move around within the effect pattern to change the effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 72(L). An animation video that becomes a fourth aspect in which a part of the image becomes larger starts.

Specifically, for example, the protruding portion 8Lf moves around inside the number "5" having a bright green color, which is the left performance pattern 8L, and a part of the number "5" having a bright green color, which is the left performance pattern 8L, becomes larger. As a result, the left effect pattern 8L changes from the third mode in which a protrusion 8Lf that expands outward is formed at the right end of the central part of the bright green number "5" to a protrusion different from the third mode. The portion 8Lf moves around within the number "5" having bright green color, changing to a fourth mode in which a part of the number "5" having bright green color becomes larger.

In addition, the right production pattern 8R, like the left production pattern 8L, has a protrusion 8Rf that moves around within the bright green number "5", which is the right production pattern 8R, and the number "5", which has a bright green color, which is the right production pattern 8R. 5" becomes larger. As a result, the right effect pattern 8R changes from the third mode in which a protrusion 8Rf that expands outward is formed at the right end of the central part of the bright green number "5" to a protrusion different from the third mode. The portion 8Rf moves around within the number "5" having bright green color, changing to a fourth mode in which a part of the number "5" having bright green color becomes larger.

The animation video starts, and when a predetermined period of time (for example, 2.5 seconds) has elapsed, the animation video ends, and as shown in FIG. A protrusion 8Lf that expands outward is formed at the left end of the central portion, changing to the fifth aspect. That is, when the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, it first changes from the first mode in which the protrusion 8Lf that expands outward is not formed at the upper right end of the number "5" having bright green color. After changing to the second mode in which the protruding portion 8Lf is formed at the upper right end of the number "5" having a bright green color different from the first mode, the second mode further changes from the second mode to a bright green color different from the second mode. The third protrusion 8Lf formed at the upper right end of the number "5" disappears, and a third protrusion 8Lf that expands outward is formed at the center right end of the number "5" having a bright green color. Then, by starting the animation video at reach, the protruding portion 8Lf moves around within the number "5" having a bright green color, which is different from the third aspect, and changes to a bright green color. The number "5" having a color changes to a fourth mode in which a part of the number "5" becomes larger, and then, as the animation video ends, the number "5" having a bright green color, which is different from the fourth mode, changes from this fourth mode. This has changed to a fifth aspect in which a protruding portion 8Lf that expands outward is formed at the left end of the center portion. In addition, in the performance symbol mode change production A, as the fifth mode, a protrusion 8Lf that expands outward is formed at the left end of the central part of the bright green number "5". The first aspect, which is different from the fourth aspect, is that the protrusion 8Lf that expands outward is not formed at the upper right end of the number "5" having a bright green color (that is, the protrusion 8Lf has a bright green color). The first aspect may be such that the number "5" is not formed at all.

In addition, the right effect pattern 8R, like the left effect pattern 8L, has a protrusion 8Rf that expands outward at the left end of the central part of the bright green number "5" and changes to the fifth aspect. ing. That is, when the right effect pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, it first changes from the first mode in which the protrusion 8Rf that expands outward is not formed at the upper right end of the number "5" having bright green color. After changing to the second mode in which the protrusion 8Rf is formed at the upper right end of the number "5" having a bright green color different from the first mode, the second mode further changes from the second mode to a bright green color different from the second mode. The third protrusion 8Rf formed at the upper right end of the number "5" disappears, and a third protrusion 8Rf that expands outward is formed at the center right end of the number "5" having a bright green color. After that, the animation video starts at reach, and further, from this third mode, the protrusion 8Rf, which is different from the third mode, moves around within the number "5" having a bright green color. A part of the number "5" having a bright green color changes to a fourth aspect in which it becomes larger, and then, as the animation video ends, the number "5" further changes from this fourth aspect to a bright green color different from the fourth aspect. The configuration has changed to a fifth aspect in which a protrusion 8Rf that expands outward is formed at the left end of the center portion of the number "5". In addition, in the performance symbol mode change production A, as the fifth mode, a protrusion 8Rf that expands outward is formed at the left end of the central part of the bright green number "5". The first aspect, which is different from the fourth aspect, is that the protrusion 8Rf that expands outward is not formed at the upper right end of the number "5" having a bright green color (that is, the protrusion 8Rf has a bright green color). (first aspect) in which the number "5" is not formed at all.

In addition, the middle effect pattern 8C, like the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R, has a protrusion 8Cf that expands outwardly formed at the left end of the central part of the bright blue number "4". It has changed into 5 aspects. Note that the bright blue number "4", which is the medium effect pattern 8C, was displayed for the first time in FIG. 72(M) because the reach was formed. In addition, in the performance symbol mode change production A, as the fifth mode, a protrusion 8Cf that expands outward is formed at the left end of the central part of the bright blue number "4". A first aspect, which is different from the fourth aspect, in which a protrusion 8Cf that expands outward is not formed at the upper right end of the bright blue number "4" (in other words, the protrusion 8Cf is a bright blue number "4"). 4) may be adopted (the first embodiment in which no part is formed at all).

Here, for example, if the number "4" having a bright blue color forms a reach with the left effect pattern 8L, when the temporary stop display is displayed, first the number "4" having a bright blue color will be displayed at the upper right end to the outside. A change from the first mode in which the protrusion 8Lf that expands in the direction is not formed to the second mode in which the protrusion 8Lf is formed at the upper right end of the number "4" having a bright blue color, which is different from the first mode. After that, further, from this second aspect, the protrusion 8Lf formed at the upper right end of the number "4" having a bright blue color, which is different from the second aspect, disappears, and the center of the number "4" having a bright blue color disappears. The third mode changes to a third mode in which a protruding portion 8Lf that expands outwardly is formed at the right end of the part, and then an animation video starts at the reach, and the third mode is further changed from this third mode to the third mode. The projecting portion 8Lf moves around inside the bright blue number "4" and changes to a fourth mode in which a part of the bright blue number "4" becomes larger, and then the animation video ends. Furthermore, this fourth aspect changes to a fifth aspect, which is different from the fourth aspect, in which a protrusion 8Lf that expands outward is formed at the left end of the center part of the number "4", which has a bright blue color. . In addition, as a fifth aspect, a protrusion 8Lf that expands outward is formed at the left end of the central part of the bright blue number "4", but as described above, the fifth aspect is not the same as the fourth aspect. The first aspect, which is different from the above-mentioned number "4" having a bright blue color, in which the protrusion 8Rf that expands outward is not formed at the upper right end of the number "4" (that is, the number "4" having a bright blue color) 4) may be adopted (the first aspect in which no portion is formed at all).

As a result, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all changed to the fifth mode, and the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a is the center line, and the horizontal direction is are temporarily stopped and displayed in a line arranged in a line, and then, as shown in FIG. (at the same time), the symbols do not line up in the same pattern, and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, and the variation (variation with respect to the green variation icon 9C) ends. In other words, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variablely effected (variably displayed), and from the first aspect to the other aspects (the second aspect, the third aspect, the fourth aspect, and the fifth aspect) ), the display returns to the original first mode before it is stopped and displayed.

At the timing when the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R stop and display, the small left effect pattern 8LZ stops and displays the bright green number "5," and the small medium effect pattern 8CZ stops and displays the bright blue color. The small right production pattern 8RZ is stopped and displayed at the number "5" having a bright green color. Accordingly, the green variation icon 9C is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a).

When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbols is started. At this time, variable presentation (fluctuating display) of small-sized presentation symbols such as the small-sized left presentation pattern 8LZ, the small-sized medium presentation pattern 8CZ, and the small-sized right presentation pattern 8RZ is also started. When the white first hold icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white change icon 9C, the white third hold icon 9A to the white second hold icon 9A move to the right and become the white second hold icon. The icon 9A becomes the white first pending icon 9A, and there are two stocked pending icons 9A.

After that, if the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are not aligned with the same pattern and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, whereas the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern are stopped. When the performance symbols 8R are all the same and are stopped and displayed, a win is confirmed, a jackpot opening is started, and then a jackpot game in which a profit is given to the player is started.

[Production pattern change production B]
Next, the effect pattern mode change effect B will be explained with reference to FIG. 73. Here, a left-handed game is performed by shooting the game ball so that it flows down the left game area 3A, and the game ball that flows down continues to enter the first starting port 20, and the white ball is 1 pending icon 9A is determined and displayed. When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbols is started. When the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols starts, the left performance symbol 8L, middle performance symbol 8C, and right performance symbol 8R change from opaque to translucent while gradually increasing the speed from low speed toward the normal fluctuation direction. This results in a display mode that changes at high speed. At this time, variable presentation (fluctuating display) of small-sized presentation symbols such as the small-sized left presentation pattern 8LZ, the small-sized medium presentation pattern 8CZ, and the small-sized right presentation pattern 8RZ is also started. During this fluctuation, three game balls enter the first starting port 20, and the white first holding icon 9A, the white second holding icon 9A, and the white third holding icon 9A are determined by pre-reading. Is displayed. As a result, three pending icons 9A are kept in stock.

After that, first, the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a coin-shaped three-dimensional image with the bright green number "1" pattern 8La and the character A pattern 8Lb, and then the right effect pattern 8R is displayed in bright red. A coin-shaped three-dimensional image with a character G symbol 8Rb attached to the number "7" symbol 8Ra is temporarily stopped and displayed, and finally, a medium effect symbol 8C is displayed as a bright green number "5" symbol 8Ca with the character E. A coin-shaped three-dimensional image with the symbol 8Cb is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. When they are lined up in a row, the left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R are not aligned in the same pattern and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, and the variation (variation with respect to the white variation icon 9C) is finish. The left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R, which are stopped and displayed, are displayed in a first mode in which both arms of the character of each effect pattern are lowered.

At the timing when the left effect pattern 8L, medium effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R stop and display, the small left effect pattern 8LZ stops and displays the bright green number "1," and the small medium effect pattern 8CZ is bright green. The small right production pattern 8RZ is stopped and displayed at the number "7" having a bright red color. Accordingly, the white variation icon 9C is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a).

When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the blue variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbols is started, as shown in FIG. 73(B). At this time, variable presentation (fluctuating display) of small-sized presentation symbols such as the small-sized left presentation pattern 8LZ, the small-sized medium presentation pattern 8CZ, and the small-sized right presentation pattern 8RZ is also started. When the white first hold icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the blue change icon 9C, both the white third hold icon 9A and the white second hold icon 9A move to the right and become the white second hold icon 9A. The hold icon 9A becomes the white first hold icon 9A, and there are two stocked hold icons 9A.

For the left presentation pattern 8L, middle presentation pattern 8C, and right presentation pattern 8R, the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the presentation pattern is started in a state where the character of each presentation pattern is in the first mode with both arms down. , Then, as shown in FIG. 73(C), first, the left presentation pattern 8L decelerates and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and the left presentation pattern 8L changes to the bright green number "5". A coin-shaped three-dimensional image in which a symbol 8Lb of the character E is attached to a symbol 8La is temporarily stopped and displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). At this time, the character E of the left effect pattern 8L changes to a second mode in which the right arm 8Lba is extended upward. In other words, when the variable presentation (variable display) of the left presentation pattern 8L starts, the right arm 8Lba of the character E in the left presentation pattern 8L is not extended upward, but both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) are In the temporary stop display, the first mode in which the character is lowered is changed to a second mode in which the right arm 8Lba of the character E of the left effect pattern 8L is extended upward, which is different from the first mode. At this time, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are in a variable effect (variable display).

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 73(D), the right arm 8Lba of the character E of the left effect pattern 8L is put down, and the state changes to a third state in which the left arm 8Lba is stretched upward. are doing. In other words, when the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped, the right arm 8Lba of the character E of the left effect pattern 8L is not stretched upward, but the first mode is in which both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) are lowered down. After changing from the first mode to the second mode in which the right arm 8Lba of the character E of the left direction pattern 8L is stretched upward, from this second mode, the left direction pattern is different from the second mode. The right arm 8Lba of the 8L character E is in a state of being lowered down, and the state has changed to a third state in which the left arm 8Lba is extended upward. In addition, in the production pattern mode change production B, as the third mode, the right arm 8Lba of the character E of the left production pattern 8L is put down and the left arm 8Lba is stretched upward, but the third mode is not the second mode. is different from the above-mentioned first mode in which the right arm 8Lba of the character E in the left production pattern 8L is not stretched upward, and both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are lowered (that is, the character E in the left production pattern 8L). It may also be a first mode in which both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) are lowered.

When the right arm 8Lba of the character E in the left presentation pattern 8L is lowered down and changes to the third mode in which the left arm 8Lba is stretched upward, the right presentation pattern 8R decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again. The right production pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) as a coin-shaped three-dimensional image in which the bright green number ``5'' pattern 8Ra and the character E pattern 8Rb are attached. . At this time, the right effect pattern 8R changes to a second mode in which the right arm 8Rba of the character E is stretched upward. In other words, when the variable display (variable display) of the right production symbol 8R starts, the right production symbol 8R has both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) of the character E whose right arm 8Rba is not extended upward. In the temporary stop display, the first mode in which the character is lowered is changed to a second mode in which the right arm 8Rba of the character E of the right effect pattern 8R is extended upward, which is different from the first mode. At this time, the medium effect pattern 8C is in a variable effect (variable display).

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 73(E), the right arm 8Rba of the character E of the right effect pattern 8R is put down, and the state changes to a third state in which the left arm 8Rba is stretched upward. are doing. In other words, when the right effect pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, the right effect pattern 8R is first in the first state in which the right arm 8Rba of the character E is not stretched upward, but both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are lowered. After changing to the second mode in which the right arm 8Rba of the character E of the right effect pattern 8R is stretched upward, which is different from the first mode, further, from this second mode, the right effect pattern is different from the second mode. The right arm 8Rba of character E of 8R is in a state of being lowered down, and the state has changed to a third state in which the left arm 8Rba is extended upward. In addition, in the production pattern mode change production B, as the third mode, the right arm 8Rba of the character E of the right production pattern 8R is put down and the left arm 8Rba is stretched upward, but the third mode is not the second mode. is different from the above-mentioned first mode in which the right arm 8Rba of the character E in the right production pattern 8R is not stretched upward, and both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are lowered (that is, the first mode of the character E in the right production pattern 8R). It may also be a first mode in which both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are lowered.

As a result, when both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are temporarily stopped in the third mode and a reach is formed, the character of the performance symbol moves upward from within the coin-shaped frame, as shown in FIG. 73(F). An animation video that will be the fourth aspect of jumping out towards .

Specifically, the character E of the left effect pattern 8L moves both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) while increasing in size upward from inside the coin-shaped frame to outside the frame and jumps out. As a result, the left presentation pattern 8L changes from the third mode in which the right arm 8Lba of the character E of the left presentation pattern 8L is put down and the left arm 8Lba is stretched upward, to the left presentation pattern 8L, which is different from the third mode. The character E changes from inside the coin-shaped frame to outside the frame and moves upward while moving both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) to jump out into a fourth mode.

In addition, in the right effect pattern 8R, like the left effect pattern 8L, the character E of the right effect pattern 8R extends both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) while increasing upward from inside the coin-shaped frame to outside the frame. It moves and pops out. As a result, the right effect pattern 8R changes from the third mode in which the right arm 8Rba of the character E of the right effect pattern 8R is lowered and the left arm 8Rba is stretched upward, to the right effect pattern 8R, which is different from the third mode. The character E changes from inside the coin-shaped frame to outside the frame, increasing in size upwards, moving both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) and jumping out into a fourth mode.

The animation video starts, and when a predetermined period of time (for example, 2.5 seconds) has elapsed, the animation video ends, and as shown in FIG. It has changed to the fifth mode in which the right arm (8Lba) is stretched upward. In other words, when the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped, the right arm 8Lba of the character E of the left effect pattern 8L is not stretched upward, but the first mode is in which both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) are lowered down. After changing from the first mode to the second mode in which the right arm 8Lba of the character E of the left direction pattern 8L is stretched upward, from this second mode, the left direction pattern is different from the second mode. The 8L character E's right arm 8Lba is put down, and the left arm 8Lba is stretched upward, changing to the third mode, and then, at the reach, an animation video starts, and from this third mode to the third mode. Changes to the fourth mode, which is different from the mode, in which the character E of the left production pattern 8L moves both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) and jumps out while increasing upward from inside the coin-shaped frame to outside the frame. After that, when the animation video ends, the fourth mode changes to a fifth mode in which both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) are extended upward, which is different from the fourth mode. In addition, in the production pattern mode change production B, as the fifth mode, both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) are stretched upward, but the fifth mode is different from the fourth mode, as described above, the left production pattern 8L The first mode in which character E's right arm 8Lba is not stretched upward and both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) are down (that is, the character E's both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) with left production pattern 8L) It may also be the first aspect (lowered).

Further, in the right performance pattern 8R, similarly to the left performance pattern 8L, the character E of the right performance pattern 8R has changed to a fifth mode in which both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are extended upward. In other words, when the right effect pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, the right effect pattern 8R is first in the first state in which the right arm 8Rba of the character E is not stretched upward, but both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are lowered. After changing to the second mode in which the right arm 8Rba of the character E of the right effect pattern 8R is stretched upward, which is different from the first mode, further, from this second mode, the right effect pattern is different from the second mode. The right arm 8Rba of character E in 8R is put down and the left arm 8Rba is stretched upward, changing to the third mode.After that, when reaching, the animation video starts, and from this third mode to the third mode. Changes to the fourth mode, which is different from the mode, in which the character E of the right production pattern 8R moves both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) and jumps out while increasing upward from inside the coin-shaped frame to outside the frame. However, when the animation video ends, the fourth mode changes to a fifth mode in which both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are extended upward, which is different from the fourth mode. In addition, in the production pattern mode change production B, both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are stretched upward as the fifth mode, but the fifth mode is different from the fourth mode, and is the above-mentioned right production pattern 8R. The first mode in which the right arm 8Rba of character E is not stretched upward, and both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are lowered (that is, both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) of character E in the right production pattern 8R) It may also be the first aspect (lowered).

In addition, the middle effect pattern 8C is a coin-shaped three-dimensional image in which a bright blue number "6" pattern 8Ca is attached with a character F pattern 8Lb, and like the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R, It has changed to a fifth mode in which both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are stretched upward. In the fifth mode in which the character F extends both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) upward, the character F holds a sword with both hands, and is in a state where the sword is raised upward. In addition, the coin-shaped three-dimensional image in which the symbol 8Lb of the character F is attached to the bright blue symbol 8Ca of the number "6", which is the middle production symbol 8C, is shown in FIG. 73 (G) due to the formation of the reach. It was displayed for the first time. In addition, in the production pattern mode change production B, the fifth mode is a coin-shaped three-dimensional image in which a symbol 8Lb of a character F is attached to a bright blue symbol 8Ca of the number "6", and the left production pattern 8L and the right Similar to the production pattern 8R, both arms (left arm 8Cba, right arm 8Cba) are stretched upward, but the fifth mode is different from the fourth mode, and the right arm 8Cba of the character F in the middle production pattern 8C is stretched upward. No, the first mode in which both arms (left arm 8Cba, right arm 8Cba) are lowered and the sword is lowered (in other words, the first mode in which both arms (left arm 8Cba, right arm 8Cba) of character F in medium production pattern 8C are lowered Aspect) may also be used.

Here, for example, if a coin-shaped three-dimensional image in which a bright blue number "6" symbol 8Ca is attached with a character F symbol 8Lb forms a reach with the left production symbol 8L, the temporary stop display will be displayed. Then, first, the first mode in which the right arm 8Lba of the character F with the left production pattern 8L is not stretched upward, and both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) are lowered and the sword is hung, is different from the first mode. , after changing to the second mode in which the right arm 8Lba of the character F with the left production pattern 8L is stretched upward and holding the sword with the right hand and raised it upward, from this second mode, the left direction is different from the second mode. The right arm 8Lba of the character F with the production pattern 8L is put down, the left arm 8Lba is extended upward, and the character changes to the third mode in which he holds the sword with his left hand and raises it upward, and then, at the reach, the animation video starts. By doing so, from this third aspect, the character F of the left effect pattern 8L, which is different from the third aspect, increases in size upward from inside the coin-shaped frame to outside the frame, while moving both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba). It changes to the fourth mode, which is a movement of moving and jumping out, and then, as the animation video ends, from this fourth mode, both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) are stretched upward, which is different from the fourth mode. He then changed into his fifth form, holding the sword with both hands and raising it upwards. In addition, as the fifth aspect, both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) are stretched upward and the sword is raised with both hands, but as mentioned above, the fifth aspect is different from the fourth aspect. The above-mentioned first mode (that is, the character F with medium effect pattern 8C) in which the right arm 8Cba of character F with medium effect pattern 8C is not extended upward, and both arms (left arm 8Cba, right arm 8Cba) are lowered and the sword is lowered (that is, the character with medium effect pattern 8C) It may also be the first mode in which both arms of F (left arm 8Cba, right arm 8Cba) are put down.

As a result, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all changed to the fifth mode, and the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a is the center line, and the horizontal direction is are temporarily stopped and displayed in a state where they are lined up in a line, and then, as shown in FIG. (at the same time), the symbols do not line up in the same pattern, and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, and the variation (variation with respect to the green variation icon 9C) ends. In other words, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are variablely effected (variably displayed), and from the first aspect to the other aspects (the second aspect, the third aspect, the fourth aspect, and the fifth aspect) ), the display returns to the original first mode before it is stopped and displayed.

At the timing when the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the small left effect pattern 8LZ stops and displays the number "5" with bright green color, and the small medium effect pattern 8CZ is bright blue. The small right production pattern 8RZ is stopped and displayed at the number "5" having a bright green color. Accordingly, the blue variation icon 9C is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a).

When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbols is started. At this time, variable presentation (fluctuating display) of small-sized presentation symbols such as the small-sized left presentation pattern 8LZ, the small-sized medium presentation pattern 8CZ, and the small-sized right presentation pattern 8RZ is also started. When the white first hold icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, the white second hold icon 9A moves to the right and becomes the white first hold icon 9A, and the stocked hold icon 9A moves to the right and becomes the white first hold icon 9A. A state is reached in which one icon 9A exists.

After that, if the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are not aligned with the same pattern and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, whereas the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern are stopped. When the performance symbols 8R are all the same and are stopped and displayed, a win is confirmed, a jackpot opening is started, and then a jackpot game in which a profit is given to the player is started.

[Production pattern change production C]
Next, the effect pattern change effect C will be explained with reference to FIG. 74. Here, a left-handed game is performed by shooting a game ball so that it flows down the left game area 3A, and the game ball that flows down continuously enters the first starting port 20, and the white ball is 1 pending icon 9A is determined and displayed. When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbols is started. When the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols starts, the left performance symbol 8L, middle performance symbol 8C, and right performance symbol 8R change from opaque to translucent while gradually increasing the speed from low speed toward the normal fluctuation direction. This results in a display mode that changes at high speed. At this time, variable presentation (fluctuating display) of small-sized presentation symbols such as the small-sized left presentation pattern 8LZ, the small-sized medium presentation pattern 8CZ, and the small-sized right presentation pattern 8RZ is also started. During this fluctuation, three game balls enter the first starting port 20, and by pre-reading, the first holding icon 9A is yellow (gold), the second holding icon 9A is white, and the third holding icon is white 9A. determined and displayed. As a result, three pending icons 9A are kept in stock. When the first hold icon 9A turns yellow (gold), the player stops operating the handle 60 in order to watch (concentrate on) the progress of the performance in the future.

After that, first, the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a coin-shaped three-dimensional image with the bright green number "1" pattern 8La and the character A pattern 8Lb, and then the right effect pattern 8R is displayed in bright red. A coin-shaped three-dimensional image with a character G symbol 8Rb attached to the number "7" symbol 8Ra is temporarily stopped and displayed, and finally, a medium effect symbol 8C is displayed as a bright green number "5" symbol 8Ca with the character E. A coin-shaped three-dimensional image with the symbol 8Cb is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. When they are lined up in a row, the left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R are not aligned in the same pattern and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, and the variation (variation with respect to the white variation icon 9C) is finish. The left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R, which are stopped and displayed, are displayed in a first mode in which both arms of the character of each effect pattern are lowered.

At the timing when the left effect pattern 8L, medium effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R stop and display, the small left effect pattern 8LZ stops and displays the bright green number "1," and the small medium effect pattern 8CZ is bright green. The small right production pattern 8RZ is stopped and displayed at the number "7" having a bright red color. Accordingly, the white variation icon 9C is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a).

When the yellow (gold) first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the yellow (gold) variable icon 9C, the variable effect (fluctuating display) of the effect pattern starts, as shown in FIG. 74(B). be done. At this time, variable presentation (fluctuating display) of small-sized presentation symbols such as the small-sized left presentation pattern 8LZ, the small-sized medium presentation pattern 8CZ, and the small-sized right presentation pattern 8RZ is also started. When the yellow (gold) first hold icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the yellow (gold) change icon 9C, both the white third hold icon 9A and the white second hold icon 9A move to the right. Then, the second pending icon 9A becomes white and the first pending icon 9A becomes white, resulting in a state where two stocked pending icons 9A exist.

For the left presentation pattern 8L, middle presentation pattern 8C, and right presentation pattern 8R, the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the presentation pattern is started in a state where the character of each presentation pattern is in the first mode with both arms down. , Then, as shown in FIG. 74(C), first, the left presentation pattern 8L decelerates and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and the left presentation pattern 8L changes to the bright green number "5". A coin-shaped three-dimensional image in which a symbol 8Lb of the character E is attached to a symbol 8La is temporarily stopped and displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). At this time, the character E of the left effect pattern 8L changes to a second mode in which the right arm 8Lba is stretched upward. In other words, when the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the left performance symbol 8L starts, the right arm 8Lba of the character E in the left performance symbol 8L is not extended upward, but both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) are In the temporary stop display, the first mode in which the character is lowered is changed to a second mode in which the right arm 8Lba of the character E of the left effect pattern 8L is extended upward, which is different from the first mode. At this time, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are in a variable effect (variable display).

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 74(D), the right arm 8Lba of the character E of the left effect pattern 8L is put down, and the state changes to a third state in which the left arm 8Lba is stretched upward. are doing. In other words, when the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped, the right arm 8Lba of the character E of the left effect pattern 8L is not stretched upward, but the first mode is in which both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) are lowered down. After changing from the first mode to the second mode in which the right arm 8Lba of the character E of the left direction pattern 8L is stretched upward, from this second mode, the left direction pattern is different from the second mode. The right arm 8Lba of the 8L character E is in a state of being lowered down, and the state has changed to a third state in which the left arm 8Lba is extended upward. In addition, in the production pattern mode change production B, as the third mode, the right arm 8Lba of the character E of the left production pattern 8L is put down and the left arm 8Lba is stretched upward, but the third mode is not the second mode. is different from the above-mentioned first mode in which the right arm 8Lba of the character E in the left production pattern 8L is not stretched upward, and both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are lowered (that is, the character E in the left production pattern 8L). It may also be a first mode in which both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) are lowered.

When the right arm 8Lba of the character E in the left presentation pattern 8L is lowered down and changes to the third mode in which the left arm 8Lba is stretched upward, the right presentation pattern 8R decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again. The right production pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) as a coin-shaped three-dimensional image in which the bright green number ``5'' pattern 8Ra and the character E pattern 8Rb are attached. . At this time, the right effect pattern 8R changes to a second mode in which the right arm 8Rba of the character E is stretched upward. In other words, when the variable display (variable display) of the right production symbol 8R starts, the right production symbol 8R has both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) of the character E whose right arm 8Rba is not extended upward. In the temporary stop display, the first mode in which the character is lowered is changed to a second mode in which the right arm 8Rba of the character E of the right effect pattern 8R is extended upward, which is different from the first mode. At this time, the medium effect pattern 8C is in a variable effect (variable display).

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 74(E), the right arm 8Rba of the character E of the right effect pattern 8R is put down, and the state changes to a third state in which the left arm 8Rba is stretched upward. are doing. In other words, when the right effect pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, the right effect pattern 8R is first in the first state in which the right arm 8Rba of the character E is not stretched upward, but both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are lowered. After changing to the second mode in which the right arm 8Rba of the character E of the right effect pattern 8R is stretched upward, which is different from the first mode, further, from this second mode, the right effect pattern is different from the second mode. The right arm 8Rba of character E of 8R is in a state of being lowered down, and the state has changed to a third state in which the left arm 8Rba is extended upward. In addition, in the production pattern mode change production C, as the third mode, the right arm 8Rba of the character E of the right production pattern 8R is put down and the left arm 8Rba is stretched upward, but the third mode is not the second mode. is different from the above-mentioned first mode in which the right arm 8Rba of the character E in the right production pattern 8R is not stretched upward, and both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are lowered (that is, the character E in the right production pattern 8R). It may also be a first mode in which both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are lowered.

As a result, when both the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are temporarily stopped in the third mode and a reach is formed, the character of the effect pattern moves upward from within the coin-shaped frame, as shown in FIG. 74(F). Animation video 1, which is the fourth aspect of jumping out toward , starts.

Specifically, the character E of the left effect pattern 8L moves both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) while increasing in size upward from inside the coin-shaped frame to outside the frame and jumps out. As a result, the left presentation pattern 8L changes from the third mode in which the right arm 8Lba of the character E of the left presentation pattern 8L is put down and the left arm 8Lba is stretched upward, to the left presentation pattern 8L, which is different from the third mode. The character E changes from inside the coin-shaped frame to outside the frame and moves upward while moving both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) to jump out into a fourth mode.

In addition, in the right effect pattern 8R, like the left effect pattern 8L, the character E of the right effect pattern 8R extends both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) while increasing upward from inside the coin-shaped frame to outside the frame. It moves and pops out. As a result, the right effect pattern 8R changes from the third mode in which the right arm 8Rba of the character E of the right effect pattern 8R is lowered and the left arm 8Rba is stretched upward, to the right effect pattern 8R, which is different from the third mode. The character E changes from inside the coin-shaped frame to outside the frame, increasing in size upwards, moving both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) and jumping out into a fourth mode.

Animation video 1 starts, and when a predetermined period of time (for example, 2.5 seconds) has elapsed, animation video 1 ends, and as shown in FIG. 74(G), left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, right effect pattern 8R, the variable display position, the yellow (gold) variable icon 9C, the white first pending icon 9A, and the white second pending icon 9A are hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a), and the battle performance is started.

In this battle production, a full-color ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, a full-color enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA and enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. This is a super reach effect (SP reach effect) in which the expectation of winning is set high in advance. If the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle production, it is a loss, whereas if the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated in the battle production, it is a win.

After that, as shown in FIG. 74(H), in the battle performance, when the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated, the ally character CRA is displayed in a large size near the center left of the display screen 7a, and a message saying "Victory" is displayed. The image MS1 is displayed in a large size near the center right of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 74(I), the ally character CRA and the message image MS1 are hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a), and the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R appear (re-displayed). ), and a temporary stop is displayed.

At this time, the character E of the left effect pattern 8L has changed to a fifth mode in which both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) are extended upward. In other words, when the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped, the right arm 8Lba of the character E of the left effect pattern 8L is not stretched upward, but the first mode is in which both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) are lowered down. After changing from the first mode to the second mode in which the right arm 8Lba of the character E of the left direction pattern 8L is stretched upward, from this second mode, the left direction pattern is different from the second mode. The 8L character E's right arm 8Lba is put down, and the left arm 8Lba is extended upward, changing to the third mode. Then, when reaching, animation video 1 starts, and from this third mode to the third mode. To the fourth mode, which is different from the third mode, the character E of the left production pattern 8L jumps out by moving both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) while increasing upward from inside the coin-shaped frame to outside the frame. Then, when the animation video 1 ends, the fourth mode changes to a fifth mode in which both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) are extended upward, which is different from the fourth mode. In addition, in the production pattern mode change production C, both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) are stretched upward as the fifth mode, but the fifth mode is different from the fourth mode, as described above, the left production pattern 8L. The first mode in which character E's right arm 8Lba is not stretched upward and both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) are down (that is, the character E's both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) with left production pattern 8L) It may also be the first aspect (lowered).

Further, in the right performance pattern 8R, similarly to the left performance pattern 8L, the character E of the right performance pattern 8R has changed to a fifth mode in which both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are extended upward. In other words, when the right effect pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, the right effect pattern 8R is first in the first state in which the right arm 8Rba of the character E is not stretched upward, but both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are lowered. After changing to the second mode in which the right arm 8Rba of the character E of the right effect pattern 8R is stretched upward, which is different from the first mode, further, from this second mode, the right effect pattern is different from the second mode. The right arm 8Rba of the character E in 8R is put down and the left arm 8Rba is stretched upward, changing to the third mode, and then, in reach, animation video 1 starts, and from this third mode to the third mode. To the fourth mode, which is different from the third mode, the character E of the right production pattern 8R jumps out by moving both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) while increasing upward from inside the coin-shaped frame to outside the frame. Then, when the animation video 1 ends, the fourth mode changes to a fifth mode in which both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are extended upward, which is different from the fourth mode. In addition, in the production pattern mode change production C, both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are stretched upward as the fifth mode, but the fifth mode is different from the fourth mode, and is the above-mentioned right production pattern 8R. The first mode in which the right arm 8Rba of character E is not stretched upward, and both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are lowered (that is, both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) of character E in the right production pattern 8R) It may also be the first aspect (lowered).

In addition, the middle effect pattern 8C is a coin-shaped three-dimensional image in which the character E pattern 8Rb is attached to the bright green number "5" pattern 8Ra, and like the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R, The character E of the medium effect pattern 8C has changed to a fifth mode in which both arms (left arm 8Cba, right arm 8Cba) are stretched upward. In addition, in the production pattern mode change production C, both arms (left arm 8Cba, right arm 8Cba) are stretched upward as the fifth mode, but the character E of the middle production pattern 8C has the fifth mode different from the fourth mode. The first mode in which the right arm 8Cba of character E is not stretched upward, and both arms (left arm 8Cba, right arm 8Cba) are lowered (in other words, both arms (left arm 8Cba, right arm 8Cba) of character E in medium production pattern 8C are lowered) (first aspect).

As a result, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all changed to the fifth mode, and the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a is the center line, and the horizontal direction is They are temporarily stopped and displayed in a lined-up state, and then, as shown in FIG. 74(J), the promotion effect is started.

In this promotion effect, the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R, which are currently being temporarily stopped and displayed, change from the bright green number "5" symbol to a predetermined number symbol (for example, "7"). By promoting to the symbol), the gaming state after the jackpot becomes a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state). In addition, when the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the bright green number "5", the gaming state after the jackpot becomes a low probability time saving state (low probability high base state). Become.

When the promotion effect starts, the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R, which are temporarily stopped and displayed, move downward all at once (simultaneously) while remaining in the fifth mode, and along with this, , each subsequent effect pattern enters from the upper side of the display screen 7a in the first mode (the first mode with both arms of each character lowered down), resulting in a so-called full rotation display mode.

After that, in FIG. 74(K), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are aligned in a line in the left and right direction with the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a as the center line. When the symbol (here, the bright green number "5") and the same character (here, the character E) are temporarily stopped and displayed again in the fifth mode, then the Animation video 2, which is the sixth mode, starts in which the character of the production design moves its arms and horns while increasing in size upward from within the coin-shaped frame and jumps out.

Animation video 2 differs from animation video 1 described above in that an action of closing and opening the corners of the character is added to animation video 1 described above.

Specifically, the character E of the left production pattern 8L moves both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) while increasing upward from inside the coin-shaped frame to outside the frame to jump out, and then the character E It also performs the action of closing and opening the corners. In other words, the character E of the left production pattern 8L moves both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) while growing upward from inside the coin-shaped frame to outside the frame and jumps out, and furthermore, the corner part of the character E closes. It's open. As a result, the left production pattern 8L changes from the fifth mode in which both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) of the character E of the left production pattern 8L are stretched upward, to the character E of the left production pattern 8L, which is different from the fifth mode. Character E moves both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) while increasing upwards from inside the coin-shaped frame to outside the frame to make a jumping motion, and also performs a motion in which the corners of Character E close and open. It has changed to the sixth aspect.

In addition, in the right effect pattern 8R, like the left effect pattern 8L, the character E of the right effect pattern 8R extends both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) while increasing upward from inside the coin-shaped frame to outside the frame. The character moves and pops out, and the corner portions of character E also perform actions to close and open. In other words, the character E of the right production pattern 8R moves both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) while growing upward from inside the coin-shaped frame to outside the frame and jumps out, and then the corner part of the character E closes. It's open. As a result, the right presentation pattern 8R changes from the fifth mode in which both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) of the character E of the right presentation pattern 8R are stretched upward, to the character E of the right presentation pattern 8R, which is different from the fifth mode. Character E moves both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) while increasing upward from inside the coin-shaped frame to outside the frame to make a jumping motion, and also performs a motion in which the corners of Character E close and open. It has changed to the sixth aspect.

In addition, in the middle effect pattern 8C, like the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R, the character E of the medium effect pattern 8C increases upward from within the coin-shaped frame to outside the frame, while holding both arms (left arm 8Cba). , right arm 8Cba) to perform a jumping motion, and further perform a motion in which the corners of the character E close and open. In other words, the character E of the middle production pattern 8C moves both arms (left arm 8Cba, right arm 8Cba) while growing upward from inside the coin-shaped frame to outside the frame and jumps out, and then the corner part of the character E closes. It's open. As a result, the medium effect pattern 8C changes from the fifth mode in which both arms (left arm 8Cba, right arm 8Cba) of the character E of the medium effect pattern 8C are stretched upward, to the character E of the medium effect pattern 8C, which is different from the fifth mode. moves both arms (left arm 8Cba, right arm 8Cba) while increasing in size upwards from inside the coin-shaped frame to outside the frame, and also performs an action in which the corners of character E close and open. It has changed to the sixth aspect.

Animation video 2 starts, and when a predetermined period of time (for example, 2.5 seconds) has elapsed, animation video 2 ends, and the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are all (simultaneously) first The display returns to the mode (the first mode in which both arms of character E (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are lowered) and is temporarily stopped, and then, as shown in FIG. 74(M), the same symbol (here, The bright green number "5") and the same character (in this case, character E) are all stopped and displayed, and a win is confirmed.

At the timing when the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the small left effect pattern 8LZ stops and displays the number "5" in bright green, and the small medium effect pattern 8CZ is bright green. The small right production pattern 8RZ is stopped and displayed at the number "5" having a bright green color.

When the win is confirmed, as shown in FIG. 74(N), the jackpot opening starts, and the message image MS2 "Jackpot" is displayed in a large size in the left and right center of the display screen 7a, and the message image MS2 is displayed above the message image MS2. A message image MS3 "Please hit right" is displayed near the top of the display screen 7a, and a right-handed image MY with "Right hit" written in the right arrow image is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a. . After that, a jackpot game in which a profit is given to the player will begin.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the effect pattern change effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, and one of the plurality of types of images is a left effect pattern 8L, a middle effect pattern 8C, and a right effect pattern. It is a production pattern such as the pattern 8R, and is a first production (production pattern) that fluctuates (fluctuation display) (variation start) the production patterns such as the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R in the first mode. In the aspect change effect A, for example, FIGS. 72(A) to (B), in the effect pattern change effect B, for example, FIGS. ) to (B)), after the first performance, the performance symbols such as the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are changed from the first mode to the second mode different from the first mode. 72 (B) to (D), right presentation pattern 8R: Fig. 72 (B) to (F), middle Performance pattern 8C: Figures 72(B) to (H), In the performance pattern change performance B, left performance pattern 8L: Figures 73(B) to (C), right performance pattern 8R: Figures 73(B) to (D ), in the production pattern change production C, it is now possible to execute the left production pattern 8L: Fig. 74 (B) to (C), the right production pattern 8R: Fig. 73 (B) to (D)). It has become. According to this configuration, when variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the presentation symbols such as the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R is started in the first mode (when the variation is started), the left presentation pattern 8L is then changed. , the middle effect pattern 8C, the right effect pattern 8R, etc. change from the first mode to the second mode different from the first mode and temporarily stop, so the variation effect (fluctuation) of the effect pattern Display) is less likely to become monotonous, and can contribute to improving player motivation. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the second performance in the performance pattern change performance A of FIG. 72, the performance pattern change performance B of FIG. 73, and the performance pattern change performance C of FIG. 74, the left performance pattern 8L It is now possible to execute a third performance in which the performance symbols such as , middle performance symbol 8C, and right performance symbol 8R are changed from the second mode to a third mode different from the second mode and temporarily stopped. (In the effect pattern change effect A, for example, left effect pattern 8L: Fig. 72 (D) to (I), right effect pattern 8R: Fig. 72 (F) to (I), middle effect pattern 8C: Fig. 72 (H) ) ~ (I), In the production pattern mode change production B, the left production pattern 8L: Fig. 73 (C) - (E), the right production pattern 8R: Fig. 73 (D) - (E), the production pattern pattern change production C Now, the left effect pattern 8L: Fig. 74 (C) to (E), the right effect pattern 8R: Fig. 73 (D) to (E)). With this configuration, the production symbols such as the left production symbol 8L, the middle production symbol 8C, and the right production symbol 8R are changed from the first mode to the second mode and are further changed from the temporarily stopped state to the second mode. It is possible to provide the player with an unprecedented and novel effect of changing the mode of temporary stopping, that is, changing to the third mode and temporarily stopping.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the third performance in the performance pattern change performance A of FIG. 72, the performance pattern change performance B of FIG. 73, and the performance pattern change performance C of FIG. 74, the left performance pattern 8L , When a production pattern such as middle production pattern 8C, right production pattern 8R, etc. is in a ready-to-reach state (for example, a number "5" symbol) with a predetermined pattern, the production pattern in the ready-to-reach state is changed from the third mode to the third mode. It is now possible to execute a fourth effect that changes to the fourth mode and temporarily stops (in the effect pattern change effect A, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R: FIG. 72(L) In the animation video and performance pattern change performance B, the left performance pattern 8L and right performance pattern 8R: Fig. 73 (F) In the animation video and performance pattern change performance C, the left performance pattern 8L and the right performance pattern 8R: Fig. 74 Animation video 1) of (F). With this configuration, the production symbol that is in the reach state changes from the third mode to the fourth mode different from the third mode and temporarily stops, so the production symbol that is in the reach state changes from the third mode to the fourth mode different from the third mode and temporarily stops. When the variable performance (fluctuating display) starts in the first mode, it temporarily stops in the second mode, and then the modes change one after another in the order of the third mode, and then the fourth mode. By various changes in the form of the temporarily stopped performance symbols, it is possible to direct the player's line of sight to the temporarily stopped performance symbols, thereby contributing to suppressing a decline in interest in the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols. can.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the fourth performance in the performance pattern change performance A in FIG. 72, the performance pattern change performance B in FIG. 73, and the performance pattern change performance C in FIG. It is now possible to execute a fifth production in which the symbol changes from the fourth mode to a fifth mode different from the fourth mode and temporarily stops (in production pattern mode change production A, all production symbols: 72(M), in the performance pattern change performance B, all performance symbols: FIG. 73(G); in the performance pattern change performance C, all performance symbols: FIG. 74(I)). With this configuration, not only the temporary stop before reaching the ready-to-reach state, but also when the ready-to-reach state is reached, the production pattern in the ready-to-reach state changes from the fourth mode to the fifth mode, which is different from the fourth mode. By doing this, it is possible to have variations in the manner in which the production symbols are temporarily stopped before and after reaching the ready-to-reach state. In addition, the change in the appearance of the performance symbols at the temporary stop can arouse the player's expectation that the game may develop into a super reach (SP reach) after this.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode in the production symbol mode change production A of FIG. 72, the production symbol mode change production B of FIG. 73, and the production symbol mode change production C of FIG. At least one of the aspect, the fourth aspect, and the fifth aspect is an animation video. Specifically, in the effect pattern change effect A, the fourth aspect in FIG. 72(L) is an animation video, and in the effect pattern change effect B, the fourth aspect in FIG. 73(F) is an animation video. In the effect pattern mode change effect C, the fourth mode shown in FIG. 74(F) is the animation video 1. According to this configuration, since the mode in which the production pattern is temporarily stopped includes a mode in which it is an animation video, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the variation production (fluctuating display) of the production pattern. . Furthermore, by having the player experience the animation video, it is possible to stimulate the player's expectation that the game may develop into a super reach (SP reach).

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the effect pattern mode change effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the performance pattern change performance A of FIG. 72 in the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the performance pattern change performance B of FIG. 73, and the performance pattern change performance C of FIG. 74, the game ball enters the first starting port 20. It was based on what was done. In other words, the game was played in a so-called left-handed game state. However, the game may be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 210. In other words, the game may be played in a so-called right-handed game state.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the fourth aspect of the effect pattern change effect A in FIG. 72(L) is an animation video, and the fourth aspect of the effect pattern change effect B in FIG. 73(F) is an animation. The animation video 1 is the fourth aspect of the effect pattern change effect C shown in FIG. 74(F). However, among the first, second, third, fourth, and fifth aspects, the second, third, and fifth aspects may be animated videos instead of still images. In this way, it is possible to increase variations in the manner in which the performance symbols are temporarily stopped. As a result, since the mode in which the production pattern is temporarily stopped includes a mode in which it is an animated moving image, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the variable production (variation display) of the production pattern.

[Modification 3]
In the performance pattern mode change performance C of FIG. 74 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the promotion performance is started, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R all change to the fifth mode. In contrast, each subsequent production pattern enters from the upper side of the display screen 7a in the first mode (the first mode with both arms of each character down), and appears in a so-called full rotation. The display style was However, before the promotion effect starts, the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R have all changed to the fifth mode, but at the timing when the promotion effect starts, the left effect pattern 8L , the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R all change to the first mode, and move downward while maintaining this first mode, and each subsequent effect pattern changes to the first mode (both arms of each character downwards). The display screen 7a may enter from the upper side of the display screen 7a as it is in the first mode (lowered first mode), and may be in a so-called full rotation display mode. In this way, the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R can all change their appearance before and after the start of the promotion effect, and the player can receive a predetermined number of symbols (for example, "7" symbol), it is possible to arouse expectations that the gaming state after the jackpot may become a high-probability time-saving state (high-probability, high-base state).

[Modification 4]
In the structure of the performance symbols in the performance symbol mode change production B of FIG. 73 and the production pattern mode change production C of FIG. The first element consisted of numbers ``1'' to ``9'' and characters A to I, which were character designs. The character design was a three-dimensional image, and the image was arranged so as to fit within the outer shape of a coin. However, although the image of the character is arranged so as to fit within the outer shape of the coin, a part of the character may be arranged as an image protruding from the outer shape of the coin. In this case, in the animation video (animation video 1), the character of the performance pattern moves downward so as to fit within the coin-shaped frame. Even with this configuration, the monotony of the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance pattern can be reduced, even though the state where the performance pattern is temporarily stopped still includes the state of being an animation video. . Furthermore, by having the player experience the animation video, it is possible to stimulate the player's expectation that the game may develop into a super reach (SP reach).

[Modification 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the performance symbol mode change production A of FIG. 72, the production symbol mode change production B of FIG. 73, and the production pattern mode change production C of FIG. 74, the production symbols are in the first mode, the second mode, A temporary stop sound may be played from the speaker 67 when temporarily stopping in the third mode, fourth mode, and fifth mode (in the production symbol mode change production C in FIG. 74, the sixth mode). The temporary stop sound may be one type of sound that is commonly used in the first, second, third, fourth, fifth, and sixth aspects, or may be one type of sound that is commonly used in the first, second, third, and sixth aspects. Dedicated sounds corresponding to the three modes, the fourth mode, the fifth mode, and the sixth mode may also be used. In this way, it is possible to notify the player that the performance symbols have temporarily stopped using the temporary stop sound, and the temporary stop sound can be mixed with other sound effects and performance sounds depending on the timing of the progress of the performance, thereby enhancing the game. This may give a different impression to the viewer and give a sense of discomfort to the performance. Since the player can freely assume this strange feeling and consider the law between it and the expectation of winning, this can contribute to improving the interest of the game.

[Modification 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the effect pattern change effect A shown in FIG. 72, the effect pattern change effect B shown in FIG. 73, and the effect pattern change effect C shown in FIG. When changing from one mode to another, the posture may not be simply switched and displayed, but may be a continuous motion that smoothly connects from the first mode to the second mode. Also, when the production pattern changes from the second mode to the third mode, when the production pattern changes from the third mode to the fourth mode, and when the production pattern changes from the fourth mode to the fifth mode, the production pattern Similar to when changing from the first aspect to the second aspect, the posture is not simply switched and displayed, but is displayed from the second aspect to the third aspect, from the third aspect to the fourth aspect, and from the fourth aspect. It is also possible to perform continuous motions that smoothly connect to the fifth mode. Of course, when the performance pattern changes from the fifth mode to the first mode, the posture may not simply be switched and displayed, but may be a continuous motion that smoothly connects from the fifth mode to the first mode.

[Modification 7]
In the game machine 1 of the embodiment described above, in the performance pattern change performance A shown in FIG. 72, the performance pattern change performance B shown in FIG. 73, and the performance pattern change performance C shown in FIG. When the first mode is temporarily stopped and displayed, the first mode always changes to another mode. However, in a particular variation of the effect pattern that is composed of the second element consisting only of the numbers "1" to "9" which are the above-mentioned numerical patterns, the effect pattern mode of FIG. 72 is applied. As in change production A, a protrusion is formed in a part of the production pattern and changes, whereas in a normal variation (normal variation) that is not a specific variation, no protrusion is formed in the production pattern. It may also be configured not to change. In addition, the variation of the production pattern is composed of a first element consisting of the numbers "1" to "9" which are the above-mentioned number patterns, and the characters A to I which are the character patterns, In certain variations, the posture of the character in the performance pattern changes or the character in the performance pattern moves, as in the performance pattern change performance B in Figure 73 and the performance pattern change performance C in Figure 74. On the other hand, in a normal variation (normal variation) that is not a specific variation, the posture of the character of the performance pattern does not change at all, and the character of the performance pattern may not move. In this way, when the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is started, the performance pattern change performance A in FIG. 72, the performance pattern change performance B in FIG. 73, and the performance pattern change performance C in FIG. 74 are performed. Since there are times when the change is performed and times when it is not performed, it is possible to prevent the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols from becoming monotonous.

[Modification 8]
In the effect pattern change effect C shown in FIG. 74(M) in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the animation movie 2 starts, and after a predetermined period (for example, 2.5 seconds) has elapsed, the animation movie 2 ends and the left The production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R all return (at the same time) to the first mode (the first mode in which both arms of character E (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are lowered) and temporarily stop. After that, the same symbol (here, the bright green number "5") and the same character (here, the character E) were all stopped and displayed, and the win was confirmed. However, the entirety of the left presentation pattern 8L, middle presentation pattern 8C, and right presentation pattern 8R (that is, the character design, the number design, and the coin shape itself) is simultaneously (simultaneously) colored in a predetermined color (for example, white or yellow). (gold)) to start animation video 2, stop emitting light in a predetermined color by the time animation video 2 ends, and when animation video 2 ends, left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, The right effect symbols 8R may all be returned to the first mode (the first mode in which both arms of the character E (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are lowered) to be temporarily stopped and displayed. In this way, the effect design itself becomes an effect image for the animation video 2, and the animation video 2 can be made to stand out from other images.

[Modification 9]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect pattern change effect A shown in FIG. 72, the effect pattern change effect B shown in FIG. 73, and the effect pattern change effect C shown in FIG. 74 do not include some of the effects described. Alternatively, other effects may be added.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A8-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a production pattern,
a first performance in which the performance pattern starts to fluctuate in a first manner;
After the first performance, performing a second performance in which the performance pattern is changed from the first mode to a second mode different from the first mode and temporarily stopped;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A8-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A8-1,
After the second performance, execute a third performance in which the performance pattern is changed from the second mode to a third mode different from the second mode and temporarily stopped;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A8-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A8-2,
After the third performance, when the performance symbol becomes a ready-to-reach state with a predetermined symbol, the performance symbol in the ready-to-reach state changes from the third mode to a fourth mode different from the third mode and temporarily stops. execute the fourth performance,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A8-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A8-3,
After the fourth performance, execute a fifth performance in which the performance symbol in the ready-to-reach state changes from the fourth mode to a fifth mode different from the fourth mode and temporarily stops.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A8-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A8-4,
At least one of the first aspect, the second aspect, the third aspect, the fourth aspect, and the fifth aspect is an animation video.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Decorative pattern arrangement change effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 75 to 77. This decorative pattern arrangement change performance is executed during the decorative pattern variation performance. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a decorative pattern arrangement change effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub display screen 64.

[Decorative pattern arrangement change production A]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern arrangement change effect A. The decorative pattern arrangement change performance is a performance in which the relative positional relationship of two decorative patterns included in a pattern row of one decorative pattern changes. 75(A) to (F) show a first example of the decorative pattern arrangement change effect A, and FIGS. 75(G) to (L) show a second example of the decorative pattern arrangement change effect A. There is.

In the first example of decorative pattern arrangement change performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 75(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in high-speed variation on the display screen 7a. Although the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and during low-speed variable display, a plurality of numeric patterns are displayed vertically. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" (in ascending order) from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrays of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). When displaying the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R at high speed as shown in FIG. becomes visible. On the other hand, during low-speed fluctuation display, as shown in FIG. 75(B), in each symbol arrangement (symbol row), a plurality of number symbols are vertically lined up and displayed so that they can be visually recognized. , and frames out from the bottom edge of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 75(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R decelerate all at once, changing from a high-speed fluctuation display to a low-speed fluctuation display, and multiple number symbols arranged vertically become visible in the symbol row. Become. After that, as shown in FIG. 75(C), the left decorative pattern 8L of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R accelerates and becomes a high-speed fluctuating display again, making each pattern difficult to see and producing a decorative pattern arrangement change effect. is executed.

In the decorative pattern arrangement change performance, as shown in FIG. 75(D), the left decorative pattern 8L displays a high-speed fluctuation display, then decelerates again and becomes a low-speed fluctuation display, and in the pattern row, multiple vertically arranged The numerical pattern becomes visible. At this time, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative patterns 8L is in a state opposite to that before the high-speed variable display. That is, in FIG. 75(B), the pattern arrangement of the left decorative patterns 8L is arranged in the order (ascending order) of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, but in FIG. 75(D), the pattern arrangement is arranged from the top to the bottom. They are arranged in the order of "987654321" (descending order) toward the bottom. In other words, the relative positional relationship between the two number symbols included in the symbol row of the left decorative symbol 8L changes (switches). For example, in "4" and "5", "4" is relatively above "5", but it changes (switches) to be relatively below "5". Moreover, the relative positional relationship of the three numerical symbols included in the symbol row of the left decorative symbol 8L changes. For example, the relative positions of "3", "4", and "5" with respect to two other numerical symbols change. When this decorative pattern arrangement change effect is executed, the expectation of winning is higher than when it is not executed. Following the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R accelerates and becomes a high-speed fluctuating display again, each pattern becomes difficult to see, and a decorative pattern arrangement change effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 75(E), the right decorative symbol 8R decelerates again and changes from a high-speed fluctuating display to a low-speed fluctuating display, and a plurality of vertically arranged number symbols become visible in the symbol row. At this time, the pattern arrangement of the right decorative pattern 8R is in a state opposite to that before the high-speed variable display. That is, in FIG. 75(C), the pattern arrangement of the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order (ascending order) of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, but in FIG. 75(E), it is arranged from the top to the bottom. They are arranged in the order of "987654321" (descending order) toward the bottom. When the decorative pattern arrangement change effect is executed on the right decorative pattern 8R following the left decorative pattern 8L, the expectation of winning is further increased compared to the case where it is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 75(E), the left decorative symbols 8L are displayed in a state where the symbols are arranged in reverse (descending order) from a low-speed fluctuating display to a stop display. Here, in the stopped display pattern row (left decorative pattern 8L), three numerical symbols are displayed along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction), and the display of other consecutive numerical symbols above and below disappears. That is, here, only the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the three positions of the upper, middle, and lower rows (here, the upper row is "5↓↓", the middle row is "4↓↓", and the lower row is "3↓↓"). . In addition, at the time of a stop display, the display of the other numerical symbols of the three numerical symbols in the symbol row of the left decorative symbols 8L may be displayed as they are without disappearing. On the other hand, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R maintain a low-speed fluctuating display, and in each pattern row, a plurality of vertically arranged number patterns are visible. The right decorative pattern 8R is in a state where the pattern arrangement is reversed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75(F), the right decorative symbols 8R are displayed in a state where the symbols are arranged in reverse (descending order) from the low-speed fluctuating display to the stationary display. Here, in the stop-displayed symbol row (right decorative symbol 8R), three numerical symbols are displayed along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction), and the display of other consecutive numerical symbols above and below disappears. That is, here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped at three positions: the upper row, the middle row, and the lower row (here, the upper row "5↓7", the middle row "4↓6", and the lower row "3↓5"). ”). In addition, at the time of a stop display, the display of the other numerical symbols of the three numerical symbols in the symbol row of the left decorative symbols 8L may be displayed as they are without disappearing.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75(F), the medium decorative patterns 8C are displayed in a stopped state from the low-speed fluctuating display with the pattern array arranged in ascending order from top to bottom. Here, in the stopped display pattern row (medium decorative pattern 8C), three numerical symbols are displayed along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction), and the display of other consecutive numerical symbols above and below disappears. That is, here, the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C are stopped at three positions: the upper row, the middle row, and the lower row (here, the upper row "517", the middle row "426", and the lower row "335"). ). In this way, here, in each of the left and right decorative patterns 8K and 8R among the respective pattern rows of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the relative positional relationship of the two number patterns included in each pattern row will be explained. changes, and the relative positional relationships of all the number patterns included in the pattern row of the medium decorative pattern 8C do not change.

In the second example of decorative pattern arrangement change effect A, after FIGS. 75(A) to 75(C) are executed, FIG. 75(G) is executed. In FIG. 75(C), the left decorative pattern 8L of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R accelerates and becomes a high-speed fluctuation display again, each pattern becomes difficult to see, and a decorative pattern arrangement change effect is executed. In FIG. 75(G), the speed is decelerated again to a low-speed fluctuating display, and a plurality of vertically arranged number symbols become visible in the symbol row. At this time, in a part of the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the relative positional relationship of the numerical patterns continues to change. Here, the number "6" in the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L becomes two numeric symbols "6" and "5". Furthermore, the number symbols "6" and "5" each move (rotate) in a circular manner, changing their positions with respect to each other. The left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed in this state. In the middle of the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed, two number patterns "6" and "5" are displayed while moving with respect to each other. When this decorative pattern arrangement change effect is executed, the expectation of winning is higher than when it is not executed. Following the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R accelerates and becomes a high-speed fluctuating display again, each pattern becomes difficult to see, and a decorative pattern arrangement change effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 75(H), the right decorative pattern 8R decelerates again and becomes a low-speed fluctuating display, and a plurality of vertically arranged number patterns become visible in the pattern row. At this time, in a part of the pattern arrangement of the right decorative pattern 8R, the relative positional relationship of the numerical patterns continues to change. Here, the number "6" in the pattern arrangement of the right decorative pattern 8R becomes two numeric symbols "6" and "5". Furthermore, the number symbols "6" and "5" each move (rotate) in a circular manner, changing their positions with respect to each other. The right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed in this state. In the middle of the right decorative pattern 8R that is stopped and displayed, two number patterns "6" and "5" are displayed while moving with respect to each other. When this decorative pattern arrangement change effect is executed, the expectation of winning becomes higher than when it is not executed. Following the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C accelerates and becomes a high-speed fluctuating display again, making each pattern difficult to see.

As shown in FIG. 75(I), the medium decorative pattern 8C decelerates again and becomes a low-speed fluctuating display, and a plurality of vertically arranged number patterns become visible in the pattern row. At this time, the decorative pattern arrangement change effect is not performed, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of "123456789" (ascending order) from top to bottom. Here, in the medium decorative pattern 8C, "6" is displayed in the upper row, "7" is in the middle row, and "8" is displayed in the lower row.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75(J), a decorative pattern arrangement change effect is performed on the medium decorative pattern 8C that is stopped and displayed. Specifically, among the symbol rows of the medium decorative symbols 8C that are stopped and displayed, the display positions of "6" in the upper row and "7" in the middle row are alternately switched. That is, the case where the upper row is "6" and the middle row is "7" and the case where the upper row is "7" and the middle row is "6" are alternately switched. That is, here, the relative positional relationship of the numerical patterns of the medium decorative pattern 8C is alternately replaced.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75(J), a decorative pattern arrangement change effect is further performed on the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative right pattern 8R that are stopped and displayed. Specifically, in the lower row of each of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative right pattern 8R that are stopped and displayed, the number "7" becomes two numerical symbols "7" and "8". Further, the number patterns "7" and "8" each move (rotate) in a circular manner and change their positions with respect to each other. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative right pattern 8R maintain the stop display in this state. When this decorative pattern arrangement change effect is executed, the expectation of winning becomes higher than when it is not executed. Due to this decorative pattern arrangement change performance, the lower rows of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative right pattern 8R become one of "888", "787", "887", and "788". After that, as shown in FIG. 75(L), one of the above four types is selected in the lower rows of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative right pattern 8R (here, "888" is selected). ) will be displayed, and other symbols will disappear.

[Decorative pattern arrangement change production B]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern arrangement change effect B. The decorative pattern arrangement change performance is a performance in which the relative positional relationship of two decorative patterns included in a pattern row of one decorative pattern changes. 76(A) to (F) show a first example of decorative pattern arrangement change effect B, and FIGS. 76(G) to (L) show a second example of decorative pattern arrangement change effect B. There is.

In the first example of decorative pattern arrangement change performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 76(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in high-speed variation on the display screen 7a. Although the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and during low-speed variable display, a plurality of numerical patterns are displayed vertically. Here, each pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" (ascending order) from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrays of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). When displaying the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R at high speed as shown in FIG. becomes visible. On the other hand, during low-speed fluctuation display, as shown in FIG. 76(B), in each symbol arrangement (symbol row), a plurality of number symbols are vertically lined up and displayed so that they can be visually recognized. , and frame out from the bottom edge of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 76(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R decelerate all at once, changing from a high-speed fluctuation display to a low-speed fluctuation display, and in the symbol row, multiple number symbols arranged vertically become visible. Become. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 76(C), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed all at once. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a state where the symbols are arranged in (ascending order) from a slow variable display to a stopped display. Here, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed on the middle active line in a winning manner (winning symbol) of "666", and other consecutive numerical symbols "555" and " 777" is also displayed. Other numerical patterns that are continuous above and below may be displayed in a small size or may be displayed in a semi-transparent manner.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 76(D), a decorative pattern arrangement change effect is executed. Specifically, in the medium decorative pattern 8C among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are being stopped and displayed, the pattern arrangement is switched to a state in which they are lined up in reverse. That is, in FIG. 76(C), the pattern arrangement of the medium decorative pattern 8C is arranged in the order (ascending order) of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, but in FIG. 76(D), it is arranged from the top to the bottom. They are arranged in the order of "987654321" (descending order) toward the bottom. In other words, the relative positional relationship between the two number patterns included in the pattern row of the medium decorative pattern 8C changes. For example, in "5" and "6", "5" is relatively above "6", but it changes (switches) to be relatively below. Moreover, the relative positional relationship of the three numerical symbols included in the symbol row of the medium decorative pattern 8C changes. For example, the relative positions of "5", "6", and "7" with respect to two other numerical symbols change. When this decorative pattern arrangement change effect is executed, the expectation level of increasing the jackpot is higher than when it is not executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 76(E), the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R disappears, and a character image of "promotion", which is a promotion notification image, is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 76(F), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that were stopped and displayed are displayed again. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were "666" before the display disappeared, have become "777", and it is reported that they have been promoted. Also, at this time, the pattern arrangement of the medium decorative patterns 8C is arranged in reverse. In this way, here, in the pattern row of the medium decorative pattern 8C among the pattern rows of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the relative positional relationship of the two number patterns included in the pattern row changes, and the left and right The relative positional relationship of all the numerical patterns included in each pattern row of the decorative patterns 8L and 8R does not change.

In the second example of decorative pattern arrangement change effect B, after FIGS. 76(A) to 76(B) are executed, FIG. 76(G) is executed. In FIG. 76(G), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed all at once. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a state where the symbols are arranged in (ascending order) from a slow variable display to a stopped display. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at the losing symbol "258", and other consecutive numerical symbols "147" and "369" above and below this "258" are also displayed. Other numerical patterns that are continuous above and below may be displayed in a small size or may be displayed in a semi-transparent manner.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 76(H), a decorative pattern arrangement change effect is executed. Specifically, in the medium decorative pattern 8C among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are being stopped and displayed, the pattern arrangement is switched to a state in which they are lined up in reverse. That is, in FIG. 76(G), the pattern arrangement of the medium decorative pattern 8C is arranged in the order (ascending order) of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, but in FIG. 76(H), it is arranged from the top to the bottom. They are arranged in the order of "987654321" (descending order) toward the bottom. When this decorative pattern arrangement change performance is executed, the expectation level of a jackpot is higher than when it is not executed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 76(I), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate again, and become a high-speed fluctuation display again. At this time, each pattern becomes difficult to see. After that, the speed is decelerated again and the display becomes a low-speed fluctuation display, and in each symbol row, a plurality of vertically arranged number symbols become visible.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 76(J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed all at once. At this time, not only the middle decorative pattern 8C among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed, but also the right decorative pattern 8R are switched to a state in which the pattern arrangement is reversed. That is, in FIG. 76(H), the pattern arrangement of the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order (ascending order) of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, but in FIG. 76(J), it is arranged from the top to the bottom. They are arranged in the order of "987654321" (descending order) toward the bottom. By performing the decorative pattern arrangement change performance on the right decorative pattern 8R following the middle decorative pattern 8C, the expectation level of a jackpot is further increased compared to the case where it is not performed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 76(K), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate again, and become a high-speed fluctuation display again. At this time, each pattern becomes difficult to see. Thereafter, the speed is decelerated again and the display becomes a low-speed fluctuation display, and a plurality of vertically arranged number symbols become visible in each symbol row.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 76(L), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed all at once. At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a winning mode of "777" (winning symbol).

[Decorative pattern arrangement change production C]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern arrangement change effect C. The decorative pattern arrangement change performance is a performance in which the relative positional relationship of two decorative patterns included in a pattern row of one decorative pattern changes. 77(A) to (F) show a first example of the decorative pattern arrangement change effect C, and FIGS. 77(G) to (L) show a second example of the decorative pattern arrangement change effect C. There is.

In the first example of the decorative pattern arrangement change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 77(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in high-speed fluctuations on the display screen 7a. Although the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and during low-speed variable display, a plurality of numerical patterns are displayed vertically. Here, each pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" (ascending order) from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrays of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). When displaying the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R at a high speed as shown in FIG. becomes visible. On the other hand, during low-speed fluctuation display, as shown in FIG. 77(B), in each symbol arrangement (symbol row), a plurality of numerical symbols are vertically lined up and displayed so that they can be visually recognized. , and frame out from the bottom edge of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 77(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R decelerate all at once, changing from a high-speed fluctuation display to a low-speed fluctuation display, and multiple number symbols arranged vertically become visible in the symbol row. Become. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 77(C) and 77(D), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the order of the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are sequentially stopped and displayed from a low-speed variable display with the symbols arranged in ascending order. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed are displayed in two rows, "555" on the upper row and "666" on the lower row, and all of them are winning modes (winning symbols). Here, both the upper and lower rows are valid lines.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77(E), a decorative pattern arrangement change effect is executed. Specifically, in the medium decorative pattern 8C among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are being stopped and displayed, the pattern arrangement is switched to a state in which they are lined up in reverse. That is, in FIG. 77(D), the pattern arrangement of the medium decorative pattern 8C is arranged in the order (ascending order) of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, but in FIG. 77(E), it is arranged from the top to the bottom. They are arranged in the order of "987654321" (descending order) toward the bottom. In other words, the relative positional relationship between the two number patterns included in the pattern row of the medium decorative pattern 8C changes. For example, even though "6" is below "5", it changes (switches) to below "7". When this decorative pattern arrangement change effect is executed, the expectation level for increasing the jackpot is higher than when it is not executed.

Thereafter, the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R disappears, and the stopped display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed again, as shown in FIG. 77(F). At this time, the lower rows of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were "666" before the display disappeared, have become "777", and it is reported that they have been promoted. Also, at this time, the pattern arrangement of the medium decorative patterns 8C is arranged in reverse. In this way, here, in the pattern row of the medium decorative pattern 8C among the pattern rows of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the relative positional relationship between the two number patterns included in the pattern row changes, and the left and right The relative positional relationship of all the numerical patterns included in each pattern row of the decorative patterns 8L and 8R does not change.

In the second example of the decorative pattern arrangement change effect C, after FIGS. 77(A) to 77(B) are executed, FIGS. 77(G) to (H) are executed. In FIGS. 77(G) to (H), a slow fluctuating display is performed when the numbers of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are aligned (jackpot mode).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77(I), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed all at once. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed are displayed in two rows, "555" in the upper row and "666" in the lower row, and all of them are winning symbols. Here, both the upper and lower rows are valid lines.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77(J), a decorative pattern arrangement change effect is executed. Specifically, in the medium decorative pattern 8C among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are being stopped and displayed, the pattern arrangement is switched to a state in which they are lined up in reverse. That is, in FIG. 77(I), the pattern arrangement of the medium decorative pattern 8C is arranged in the order (ascending order) of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, but in FIG. 77(J), it is arranged from the top to the bottom. They are arranged in the order of "987654321" (descending order) toward the bottom. In other words, the relative positional relationship between the two number patterns included in the pattern row of the medium decorative pattern 8C changes. For example, even though "6" is below "5", it changes (switches) to below "7". When this decorative pattern arrangement change effect is executed, the expectation level of increasing the jackpot is higher than when it is not executed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77(K), a decorative pattern arrangement change effect is further executed. Specifically, the pattern arrangement is switched to a state in which not only the middle decorative pattern 8C among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed, but also the right decorative pattern 8R are lined up in reverse. That is, in FIG. 77(J), the pattern arrangement of the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order (ascending order) of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, but in FIG. 77(K), it is arranged from the top to the bottom. They are arranged in the order of "987654321" (descending order) toward the bottom. In other words, the relative positional relationship between the two number patterns included in the pattern row of the right decorative pattern 8R changes. For example, even though "6" is below "5", it changes to below "7". By performing the decorative pattern arrangement change effect on the right decorative pattern 8R following the middle decorative pattern 8C, the expectation level of increasing the jackpot is further increased compared to the case where it is not performed.

Thereafter, the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R disappears, and the stopped display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed again, as shown in FIG. 77(L). At this time, the lower rows of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were "666" before the display disappeared, have become "777", and it is reported that they have been promoted.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the decorative pattern arrangement change effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 75 to 77, it is possible to perform an effect in which a symbol row in which a plurality of decorative symbols are arranged along the direction of variation is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the above effect can be executed. In this case, the relative positional relationship between two decorative patterns included in one pattern row changes (for example, FIGS. 75(B) to (K), FIGS. 76(C) to (J), and FIG. 77(D)). ～(F),(I)～(K)). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 75 to 77, in the above production, the relative positional relationship of two decorative symbols included in one symbol row is swapped (for example, as shown in FIG. 75(B) , (D), "4" and "5" of the left decorative pattern 8L are replaced with "4" being relatively above "5", but being relatively below "5"). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 75 to 77, in the above production, the relative positional relationship of two decorative symbols included in one symbol row changes when they are stopped ( For example, FIGS. 75(G) to (K), FIGS. 76(C) to (J), FIGS. 77(D) to (F), (I) to (K)). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, in the above performance, when the decorative symbols are stopped in a winning manner, two decorative symbols included in one symbol row are The relative positional relationship changes (for example, FIGS. 76(C) to (F), FIGS. 77(D) to (F), and (I) to (K)). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 75 to 77, in the above production, the relative positional relationship between two decorative symbols included in one of the plurality of symbol columns changes. , the relative positional relationship of all the decorative patterns included in another one of the plurality of pattern rows does not change (for example, FIGS. 75(B) to (F), FIG. 76(C) to ()). J), Figures 77 (D) to (F), (I) to (K)). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 75 and 76, in the above production, the relative positional relationship of three decorative symbols included in one symbol row changes (for example, FIG. ) to (F), Figures 76(C) to (J)). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the decorative pattern arrangement change effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
The decorative pattern arrangement change effects A to C may be combined as appropriate. For example, in the decorative pattern arrangement change performance B shown in FIGS. 76(A) to (F), between the performances shown in FIGS. 76(B) and (C), the decorative pattern arrangement change performance shown in FIGS. 77(G) to (H) C may be executed.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative pattern arrangement change effects A to C, the decorative pattern is made up of only images representing numbers, but a portion representing a number and a decorative portion representing a character or the like may be combined.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative pattern arrangement change performances A to C, the effective line for informing whether the decorative pattern is correct or not is horizontal, but the effective line may be vertical or diagonal.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect B1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
It is possible to perform an effect in which the display means displays a pattern row in which a plurality of the decorative patterns are lined up along a fluctuation direction,
In the production, the relative positional relationship between two decorative patterns included in one pattern row is changed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1,
In the production, the relative positional relationship of the two decorative patterns included in one pattern row is swapped.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1 or aspect B1-2,
In the production, the relative positional relationship of the two decorative patterns included in one pattern row is changed while the two decorative patterns are stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-3,
In the performance, the relative positional relationship between two decorative patterns included in one pattern row changes while the decorative pattern is stopped in a winning manner.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1 or aspect B1-2,
A plurality of the symbol rows are displayed on the display means,
In the above performance,
The relative positional relationship of two decorative designs included in one of the plurality of symbol rows changes,
The relative positional relationship of all the decorative patterns included in another one of the plurality of pattern rows does not change;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1 or aspect B1-2,
In the production, the relative positional relationship of three decorative patterns included in one pattern row is changed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative pattern partial display/disappearance effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 78 to 80. This decorative pattern partial display/disappearance effect is executed during a variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a partial display/disappearance effect of a decorative pattern, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of 7 and the sub display screen 64.

[Decorative design partial display disappearing effect A]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern partial display/disappearance effect A. The decorative pattern partial display/disappearance performance is a performance in which a part of the decorative pattern disappears, and a decorative pattern with the part of the display disappeared is displayed. 78(A) to (F) show the first example of the decorative pattern partial display/disappearance effect A, and FIGS. 78(G) to (J) show the second example of the decorative pattern partial display/disappearance effect A. As an example, FIGS. 78(K) to 78(L) show a third example of partial display/disappearance effect A of decorative patterns.

In the first example of the decorative pattern partial display/disappearance effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 78(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in high-speed fluctuations on the display screen 7a. Although the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and during low-speed variable display, a plurality of numerical patterns are displayed vertically. Here, each pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" (ascending order) from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, each number in "123456789" is represented by seven segments. Here, each of the seven segments is also referred to as "upper horizontal," "middle horizontal," "lower horizontal," "upper right vertical," "lower right vertical," "upper left vertical," and "lower left vertical." "3" is composed of "upper horizontal," "middle horizontal," "lower horizontal," "upper right vertical," and "lower right vertical." "2" is composed of "upper horizontal," "middle horizontal," "lower horizontal," "upper right vertical," and "lower left vertical." “1” is composed of “upper right vertical” and “lower left vertical”. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrays of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). When the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in high-speed fluctuations as shown in FIG. becomes visible. On the other hand, during low-speed fluctuation display, as shown in FIG. 78(B), in each symbol arrangement (symbol row), a plurality of numerical symbols are vertically lined up and displayed so that they can be visually recognized. , and frame out from the bottom edge of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 78(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R decelerate all at once, changing from a high-speed fluctuation display to a low-speed fluctuation display, and in the symbol row, multiple number symbols arranged vertically become visible. Become. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78(C), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed all at once. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped and displayed) in a loss mode of "353" (loss pattern).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78(D), a partial display/disappearance effect of decorative patterns is executed. Specifically, the upper half of the numeral image "5" of the medium decorative pattern 8C that is being stopped and displayed disappears (disappears), and only the lower half is displayed. Specifically, among the 7 segments that make up "5", "upper horizontal", "middle horizontal", "lower horizontal", "upper left vertical", and "lower right vertical", "upper horizontal" and "upper left vertical" disappear, The U-shaped parts of "middle horizontal," "lower horizontal," and "lower right vertical" remain. When this decorative pattern partial display/disappearance performance is executed, the expectation level of a jackpot is higher than when it is not executed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78(E), a new image is displayed in the upper half of the medium decorative pattern 8C, resulting in the number "3" as a whole. Specifically, "Top Horizontal" and "Top Right Vertical" are newly displayed in the area where "Top Horizontal" and "Top Left Vertical" have disappeared. When newly displayed, it is displayed in a fade-in manner. The U-shaped portions of "middle horizontal," "bottom horizontal," and "bottom right vertical" are continuously displayed.

Thereby, as shown in FIG. 78(F), the medium decorative pattern 8C becomes "3" as a whole. That is, a part of the display of the number image "5" of the medium decorative pattern 8C disappears, and a new display appears in the part where the display disappeared, thereby performing an effect of changing the number image to "3". At this time, the speaker 67 also outputs the content regarding the changed numerical pattern in the form of audio. Here, the message "After the change, it became 3" is issued. This results in a jackpot symbol of "333" and a jackpot is announced.

In the second example of the decorative pattern partial display/disappearance effect A, after FIGS. 78(A) to 78(B) are executed, FIG. 78(G) is executed. In FIG. 78(G), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed all at once. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped and displayed) in a loss mode of "941" (loss pattern).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78(H), a partial display/disappearance effect of decorative symbols is executed. Specifically, the display of the upper half of the statically displayed number image "941" disappears (disappears), and only the lower half is displayed. Specifically, among the 7 segments that make up "9" of the left decorative pattern 8L, "upper horizontal", "middle horizontal", "upper right vertical", "lower right vertical", and "upper left vertical", "upper horizontal", "middle horizontal" ”, “Top right vertical” and “Top left vertical” disappear, and “Bottom right vertical” remains. Of the 7 segments that make up "4" in the middle decorative pattern 8C, "middle horizontal," "top right vertical," "bottom right vertical," and "top left vertical," "middle horizontal," "top right vertical," and "top left vertical" disappear, and " "Bottom right vertical" remains. Of the seven segments "upper right vertical" and "lower right vertical" that constitute "1" of the right decorative pattern 8R, "upper right vertical" disappears and "lower right vertical" remains.

After that, as shown in FIG. 78(I), a new image is displayed in the upper half of each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, resulting in the number "7" as a whole. in particular,
“Upper horizontal” and “upper right vertical” are newly displayed in the upper half where the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R have disappeared. When newly displayed, it is displayed in a fade-in manner. The "lower right vertical" of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are continuously displayed.

Thereby, as shown in FIG. 78(J), each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R becomes "7" as a whole. In other words, in the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, a part of each display of "941" disappears, and a new display appears in the part where the display disappeared, so that all of them change to the number image "7". be done. At this time, the speaker 67 also outputs the content regarding the changed numerical pattern in the form of audio. Here, the message "After the change, it became 7" is issued. This results in a jackpot symbol of "777" and a jackpot is announced.

In the third example of the decorative pattern partial display/disappearance effect A, after FIGS. 78(A) to 78(B) are executed, FIG. 78(K) is executed. In FIG. 78(K), when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a low-speed fluctuating manner, a partial display/disappearance effect of the decorative symbols is executed. Specifically, "1", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "8", "9" among the numerical images of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are displayed in a slow and variable manner. , the upper half of the number image disappears (disappears) and only the lower half is displayed. For "1", "4", "7", and "9", only the "lower right vertical" portion remains in the lower half. For "3" and "5", the U-shape "middle horizontal", "lower horizontal", and "lower right vertical" remain in the lower half. ``6'' and ``8'' leave squares in the lower half: ``middle horizontal,'' ``bottom horizontal,'' ``bottom left vertical,'' and ``bottom right vertical.''

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78(L), in the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, only the lower half of the numerical patterns are displayed in a stopped state (temporary stopped display). Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a U-shape of "middle horizontal," "lower horizontal," and "bottom right vertical." After that, there are cases where the winning symbols are ``333'' and ``555'', and cases where the winning symbols are ``353'' and ``553''.

[Decorative design partial display disappearing effect B]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern partial display/disappearance effect B. The decorative pattern partial display/disappearance performance is a performance in which a part of the decorative pattern disappears, and a decorative pattern with the part of the display disappeared is displayed. 79(A) to (E) show the first example of the decorative pattern partial display/disappearance effect B, and FIGS. 79(F) to (L) show the second example of the decorative pattern partial display/disappearance effect B. An example is shown.

In the first example of the decorative pattern partial display/disappearance effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 79(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a. Although the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and during variable display, a plurality of numerical patterns are displayed vertically. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrays of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner, as shown in FIG. 79(A), in each pattern arrangement (symbol row), a plurality of number patterns can be visually recognized as being lined up vertically. is displayed, enters the frame from the top end of the display screen 7a, moves downward, and goes out of the frame from the bottom end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 79(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" (in ascending order) from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. There is. Here, each number pattern of "123456789" includes a number image representing a number and a face image representing a face, and the number image is placed at the forehead position of the face image. A face image is composed of a combination of a contour image representing the contour of the face and a parts image representing facial parts such as the eyes and mouth. The contour image may be any image that can identify the inside and outside of the face image, including the parts image. For example, the outline image may be a frame-like line or a surface (area) expressed in a predetermined color. In addition to the eyes and mouth, the parts image may include a facial surface image (skin partial image) expressed in a predetermined color.

Here, the outline image of the number pattern with the number images "1", "4", and "7" is a "triangle", and the outline image of the number pattern with the number images "2", "5", and "8" is a "square". The outline image of the numeric pattern with the numeric images "3", "6", and "9" is "circular". Also, the parts images with number patterns with number images of "1", "2", and "3" are "smiling faces", and the parts images with number patterns with number images of "4", "5", and "6" are "surprised faces". , and the part image with the number image "7", "8", and "9" is a "glasses face". For example, for the number pattern "1", the outline image is a "triangle" and the part image is a "smile".

As shown in FIG. 79(B), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed all at once. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped and displayed) in a loss mode of "123" (loss pattern).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79(C), a decorative pattern partial display/disappearance effect is executed. Specifically, the number images and part of the face image (contour image) of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed disappear (disappear), and part of the face image (parts image) only is displayed. Here, the part images of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "smiling faces". Thereafter, a game is started in which the display switches to another number pattern including the remaining "smile" part image. When this decorative pattern partial display/disappearance performance is executed, the expectation level of a jackpot is higher than when it is not executed.

FIG. 79(D) shows a case where the symbol becomes a jackpot after that. For the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, new number images and outline images are displayed for each of the "smile" parts images while maintaining the display. Here, a numeral image of "3" and a "circular" outline image are newly displayed on each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. At this time, the speaker 67 also outputs the content regarding the changed numerical pattern in the form of audio. Here, a message is issued saying, ``After the change, everyone has a circular outline and the number is 333.'' This results in a jackpot symbol of "333" and a jackpot is announced.

FIG. 79(E) shows a case where the symbol becomes a losing symbol after that. For the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, new number images and outline images are displayed for each of the "smile" parts images while maintaining the display. Here, a number image of "2" and an outline image of "square" are newly displayed on the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R, and a number image of "3" and a "circle" are newly displayed on the middle decorative pattern 8C. A new outline image is displayed. This results in a losing symbol of "232", and the loss is notified.

In the second example of the decorative pattern partial display/disappearance effect B, after FIGS. 79(A) to 79(B) are executed, FIG. 79(F) is executed. In FIG. 79(F), a decorative pattern partial display/disappearance effect is executed. Specifically, the number images and part of the face image (parts image) of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed disappear (disappear), and part of the face image (contour image) only is displayed. Here, the outline images of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are "triangle," "quadrilateral," and "circle." Thereafter, a game is started in which the display switches to another number pattern having the remaining outline image. When this decorative pattern partial display/disappearance performance is executed, the expectation level of a jackpot is higher than when it is not executed. After that, there are cases where the image becomes as shown in FIG. 79(G), and there are cases where the image becomes as shown in FIG. 79(H).

After that, in the case of FIG. 79(G), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are updated with new number images and parts while maintaining the display of the outline images of "triangle," "square," and "circle." The image is displayed. Here, a number image of "7" and a parts image of "glasses face" are newly displayed on the left decorative pattern 8L, and a number image of "5" and a "surprised face" are newly displayed on the middle decorative pattern 8C. A new parts image is displayed, and a number image of "3" and a "smile" parts image are newly displayed on the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, the speaker 67 also outputs the content regarding the changed numerical pattern in the form of audio. Here, a message is issued saying, ``After the change, he wore glasses, was surprised, and smiled, and his number became 753.'' This results in a losing symbol of "753", and the loss is notified.

After that, in the case of FIG. 79(H), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change from displaying only the outline images of "triangle," "quadrangular," and "circle," to displaying only the outline images of "square" for all three. will be displayed. After that, there are cases where the image becomes FIG. 79(I), FIG. 79(J), and FIG. 79(K).

FIG. 79(I) shows a case where the symbol becomes a jackpot after that. For the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, new number images and part images are displayed for each of the "quadrangular" outline images while maintaining the display. Here, a number image of "5" and a part image of a "surprised face" are newly displayed on each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. At this time, the speaker 67 also outputs the content regarding the changed numerical pattern in the form of audio. Here, a message is issued saying, ``After the change, everyone has a square outline with a surprised look on their face, and the number has become 555.'' This results in a jackpot symbol of "555" and a jackpot is announced.

On the other hand, FIG. 79(J) shows a case where the symbol becomes a losing symbol after that. For the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, new number images and part images are displayed for each of the "quadrangular" outline images while maintaining the display. Here, a number image of "2" and a parts image of "smile" are newly displayed on the left decorative pattern 8L, and a number image of "8" and a parts image of "face with glasses" are newly displayed on the middle decorative pattern 8C. is displayed, and a number image of "5" and a part image of a "surprised face" are newly displayed on the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, the speaker 67 also outputs the content regarding the changed numerical pattern in the form of audio. Here, a message is issued saying, ``After the change, everyone has a smiling face with a rectangular outline, a face with glasses, and a surprised face, and the number has become 285.'' This results in a losing symbol of "285", and the loss is notified.

In FIG. 79(K), after that, for the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the display changes from displaying only "quadrangular" outline images for all three to displaying only "triangular" outline images for all three. Thereafter, there are cases where the jackpot symbol as shown in FIG. 79(L) is obtained, and cases where the pattern becomes a loss symbol (not shown). In FIG. 79(L), new number images and part images are displayed for each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R while maintaining the display of the "triangle" outline image. Here, a number image of "1" and a "smile" parts image are newly displayed on each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. This results in a jackpot symbol of "111" and a jackpot is announced. After FIG. 79(K), in the case of a losing symbol, a number image and a part image in which at least one of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is different from the others are newly displayed.

[Decorative design partial display disappearing effect C]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern partial display/disappearance effect C. The decorative pattern partial display/disappearance performance is a performance in which a part of the decorative pattern disappears, and a decorative pattern with the part of the display disappeared is displayed. 80(A) to (J) show a first example of the decorative pattern partial display/disappearance effect C, and FIG. 80(K) shows a second example of the decorative pattern partial display/disappearance effect C. There is. FIG. 80(L) shows a third example of the partial display/disappearance effect C of decorative symbols.

In the first example of the decorative pattern partial display/disappearance effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 80(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a. Although the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and during variable display, a plurality of numerical patterns are displayed vertically. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrays of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner, as shown in FIG. 80(A), a plurality of number patterns are vertically lined up and visible in each pattern arrangement (symbol row). is displayed, enters the frame from the top end of the display screen 7a, moves downward, and goes out of the frame from the bottom end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 80(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" (in ascending order) from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. There is. Here, each number pattern of "123456789" includes a number image representing a number and a face image representing a face, and the number image is placed at the forehead position of the face image. A face image is composed of a combination of a contour image representing the contour of the face and a parts image representing facial parts such as the eyes and mouth. The contour image may be any image that can identify the inside and outside of the face image, including the parts image. For example, the outline image may be a frame-like line or a surface (area) expressed in a predetermined color. In addition to the eyes and mouth, the parts image may include a facial surface image (skin partial image) expressed in a predetermined color.

Here, the outline image of the number pattern with the number images "1", "4", and "7" is a "triangle", and the outline image of the number pattern with the number images "2", "5", and "8" is a "square". The outline image of the numeric pattern with the numeric images "3", "6", and "9" is "circular". Also, the parts images with number patterns with number images of "1", "2", and "3" are "smiling faces", and the parts images with number patterns with number images of "4", "5", and "6" are "surprised faces". , and the part image with the number image "7", "8", and "9" is a "glasses face". For example, for the number pattern "1", the outline image is a "triangle" and the part image is a "smile".

As shown in FIG. 80(B), the decorative pattern partial display/disappearance effect is executed in a state where the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, the numerical images and face images of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are being displayed in a variable manner disappear (disappear), and part of the face image (contour image) disappears. only is displayed. When this decorative pattern partial display/disappearance performance is executed, the expectation level of a jackpot is higher than when it is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 80(C), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed all at once. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed as only outline images. Here, the outline images of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed are "triangle," "quadrilateral," and "circle." After that, a game is started to determine what the numerical patterns of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R will be in the end.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 80(D), for the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been stopped and displayed, a number image and a part image are newly displayed, respectively, while maintaining the outline image display. Here, a number image of "1" and a part image of "smile" are newly displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L, and a number image of "2" and a part image of "smile" are newly displayed in the middle decorative pattern 8C. The number image "3" and the part image "smile" are newly displayed on the right decorative pattern 8R.

After that, as shown in FIG. 80(E), the display of the "smile" part image disappears from each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the outline image and number image remain. The numerical images of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R do not change and remain "1," "2," and "3."

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 80(F), an effect in which the contour image changes is performed. Here, the outline image of the left decorative pattern 8L changes from "triangle" to "circular", the outline image of the middle decorative pattern 8C changes from "square" to "circular", and the outline image of the right decorative pattern 8R changes. It remains "circular". The numerical images of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R do not change and remain "1," "2," and "3."

FIG. 80(G) shows a case where the symbol becomes a winning symbol after that. For the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, new part images are displayed for each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R while maintaining the display of the "circular" outline image and the number image "123". Here, "smile" part images are newly displayed on the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, respectively. Even though the number image corresponding to the "smile" part image and the "circular" outline image is "3", "123" is displayed. At this time, since the parts images of the "smile" and the outline images of the "circle" are aligned, the player can be pleased with the number images that are aligned with "3".

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 80(H), the number image switches from "123" to "333" corresponding to the changed parts image and outline image, and becomes a winning mode (winning pattern). At this time, the speaker 67 also outputs the content regarding the changed numerical pattern in the form of audio. Here, the message ``After the change, everyone has a circular outline of a smiling face, and the number has become 333.''

FIG. 80(I) shows a case where the symbol becomes a losing symbol after that. For the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, new part images are displayed for each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R while maintaining the display of the "circular" outline image and the number image "123". Here, a "glasses face" part image is newly displayed on the left decorative pattern 8L, a "smiling face" part image is newly displayed on the middle decorative pattern 8C, and a "surprised face" part image is displayed on the right decorative pattern 8R. will be newly displayed. Even though the number image corresponding to the "glasses face" part image and the "circular" contour image of the left decorative pattern 8L is "9", "1" is displayed. Further, even though the number image corresponding to the "smile" part image and the "circular" contour image of the medium decorative pattern 8C is "3", "2" is displayed. Further, even though the number image corresponding to the "surprised face" part image and the "circular" outline image of the right decorative pattern 8R is "6", "3" is displayed. At this time, the player is suggested that the number images are not aligned because the part images and outline images of the decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are not aligned.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 80(J), the number image switches from "123" to "936" corresponding to the changed parts image and outline image, resulting in a losing mode (losing pattern). At this time, the speaker 67 also outputs the content regarding the changed numerical pattern in the form of audio. Here, the message ``After the change, everyone has a circular outline of glasses, a smile, and a surprised face, and the number has become 936.''

In the second example of the decorative pattern partial display/disappearance effect C, after FIGS. 80(A) to 80(F), FIG. 80(K) is executed. In FIG. 80(K), an effect in which the outline image changes is further performed. Here, the outline image of the left decorative pattern 8L changes from "circular" to "square", the outline image of the middle decorative pattern 8C changes from "circular" to "triangular", and the outline image of the right decorative pattern 8R changes from "circular" to "triangular". Changes from "circular" to "rectangular". The numerical images of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R do not change and remain "1," "2," and "3." After that, similarly to the first example explained in FIGS. 80(G) to (J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R display the outline images of "square, triangle, square" and the number image of "123". In this state, each part image is newly displayed, and then changes to a number image corresponding to the part image and the outline image to become a winning symbol or a losing symbol. Alternatively, the shape of the contour image changes again as shown in FIGS. 80(E), (F), and FIGS. 80(F) and (K). Here, since the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R have different outline images of "quadrangular" and "triangular", they will be lost unless the shapes of the outline images change again.

In the third example of the decorative pattern partial display/disappearance effect C, after FIGS. 80(A) to 80(H), FIG. 80(L) is executed. As shown in FIG. 80(H), from the state where the number image was "333", the "smile" part image, and the "circle" outline image, the parts image disappeared again, and then the outline image changed to " The shape changes from "circular" to "triangular" as shown in FIG. 80(L). Thereafter, a parts image of a "face with glasses" is displayed, and a promotion effect is executed in which the number image is switched from "333" to "777".

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the partial display/disappearance effect of a decorative pattern is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 78 to 80, the first effect (for example, FIG. 78(C), FIG. 79(B), FIG. 80(D)), and a second effect in which part of the decorative pattern disappears after the first effect (for example, FIG. 78(D), FIG. 79(C)( F), FIG. 80(E)), and after the second presentation, a third presentation (for example, FIG. 78(D), FIG. 79(C)) in which a decorative pattern is displayed with a part of the display disappeared. )(F) and FIG. 80(E)) can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 78 to 80, after the third effect, a fourth effect (for example, a 78(E), FIGS. 79(D)(G), and FIGS. 80(H)(J)). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R include number images representing numbers, and in the second effect, part of the display of the number images disappears. (For example, Fig. 78 (D)), in the third effect, a decorative pattern in which part of the number image disappears is displayed (for example, Fig. 78 (D)), and in the fourth effect, the number image A new display appears in the part where the previous display disappeared, so that the number represented by the number image becomes a different number from the number represented by the number image in the first effect (for example, FIG. 78(E)). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, the decorative pattern includes a face image (parts image) representing a specific target, and in the second effect, the face image disappears. (For example, FIG. 79(F), FIG. 80(E)), In the third effect, a decorative pattern with the face image disappeared is displayed (For example, FIG. 79(F), FIG. 80(E)), In this effect, a new face image appears in the part of the decorative pattern where the face image has disappeared (for example, FIGS. 79(G), 80(H), and (J)). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, in the second effect, the face image disappears, and the outline (contour image) corresponding to the face image remains (for example, as shown in FIG. 79(F) , FIG. 80(E)); in the third effect, a decorative pattern with the outline corresponding to the face image remaining is displayed (e.g., FIG. 79(F), FIG. 80(E)); in the fourth effect, A new outline is displayed in place of the outline corresponding to the face image, and then a new image appears (for example, FIGS. 79(H) to (J), FIGS. 80(F), (H), and (J)). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 78 to 80, in the fourth effect, when a new image appears, a sound corresponding to the new image is output (for example, 78(E), FIG. 79(D)(G), FIG. 80(H)(J)). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the decorative pattern partial display/disappearance effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative pattern partial display/disappearance effects A to C, the contour image may be any image that can distinguish between the inside and the outside of the face image including the parts image. For example, the outline image may be a frame-like line or a surface (area) expressed in a predetermined color. Further, when the parts image includes the first contour image and the parts image is displayed, the first contour image and the second contour image are displayed overlappingly or in parallel, and the parts image is The second contour image may remain when the contour image disappears.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative pattern partial display/disappearance effects A to C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed may once change to other patterns and then return to the original patterns. For example, in the decorative pattern partial display/disappearance effect B, after FIGS. 79(B) to (D), FIG. 79(C) is executed, and then the process may be finalized and stopped at FIG. 79(B). In addition, in the decorative pattern partial display disappearance effect C, after FIGS. 80(D) to (G), FIG. 80(F) is executed, then FIG. 80(E) is executed, and then FIG. 80(D) is executed. ) to confirm the stop. Alternatively, after FIGS. 80(D) to (F) and (I), FIG. 80(F) is executed, then FIG. 80(E) is executed, and then the final stop is made in FIG. 80(D). Good too.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative pattern partial display/disappearance effects A to C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed once stop at the jackpot pattern, and then the face image changes to another image without changing the number pattern, and You can go back. For example, after the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stop at FIG. ” part image appears, then the ``surprised face'' part image disappears, all outline images change from ``triangle'' to ``circle'', and then a ``smile'' part image appears and the process stops. You can.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect B2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
a first effect in which the decorative pattern is displayed on the display means;
After the first performance, a second performance in which a part of the decorative pattern disappears;
After the second performance, the gaming machine is capable of executing a third performance in which the decorative pattern is displayed with the part of the display disappeared.
◇[Aspect B2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, after the third performance, a fourth performance can be performed in which a new display appears in the part of the decorative pattern where the display has disappeared.
◇[Aspect B2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-2,
The decorative pattern includes a number image representing a number,
In the second effect, a part of the number image disappears,
In the third performance, the decorative pattern is displayed with a part of the number image disappearing,
In the fourth performance, a new display appears in the part of the number image where the display has disappeared, so that the number represented by the number image is different from the number represented by the number image in the first performance. A gaming machine that is characterized by turning into numbers.
◇[Aspect B2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-2,
The decorative pattern includes a specific image representing a specific object,
In the second effect, the specific image disappears,
In the third performance, the decorative pattern in which the specific image has disappeared is displayed,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, in the fourth effect, a new image appears in a portion of the decorative pattern where the specific image disappears.
◇[Aspect B2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-4,
In the second effect, the specific image disappears and an outline corresponding to the specific image remains;
In the third performance, the decorative pattern whose outline corresponding to the specific image remains is displayed,
In the fourth effect, a new outline is displayed in place of the outline corresponding to the specific image, and then the new image appears.
◇[Aspect B2-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-5,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the fourth effect, when the new image appears, a sound corresponding to the new image is output.

The winning game type notification performances A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 81 to 83. This winning game type notification performance is executed when a special symbol lottery is won. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90 and, if it contains an instruction to execute the winning game type notification effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Winning game type notification performance A]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining winning game type notification performance A. The winning game type notification performance is a winning notification performance that notifies you that you have won a special symbol lottery, and which one of the first special game and the second special game that is more advantageous than the first special game has been won. This is a performance that executes a game type notification performance.

In the winning game type notification performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 81(A), a confirmed stop effect is executed and the effect symbols are fixed and stopped. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L is a "1" pattern, the middle presentation pattern 8C is a "2" pattern, and the right presentation pattern 8R is an "8" pattern. Although the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed, they may be displayed (the same applies below).

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(B), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are fluctuating at high speed. The performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R during high-speed fluctuation are displayed transparently or semi-transparently.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(C), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols stop in a predetermined reach mode. Here, both the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8C are stopped at the "2" symbol. Medium performance pattern 8C maintains high-speed fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(D), a reach symbol overlapping effect is executed. The ready-to-win symbol overlapping effect is a presentation in which ready-to-reach symbols that have stopped in a ready-to-win mode are displayed in a superimposed manner. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R ("2" symbols) are displayed in an overlapping manner. In addition, with the execution of the ready-to-win symbol overlap performance, the mode of the performance symbols is changed. Specifically, the design is a design that imitates a 7-segment display (also referred to as a "7-segment design").

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(E), a normal reach effect is executed. Here, the medium performance symbol 8C is fluctuating with respect to the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R (“2” symbol) which are reach symbols. At this time, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R have a 7-segment design. After this, the medium effect pattern 8C slows down and becomes visible, and then stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(F), a winning notification effect is executed. The winning notification performance is a performance to notify that the player has won the special symbol lottery. Here, the middle production pattern 8C stops at the "2" symbol, and the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right are all "2" symbols. At this time, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R ("2" symbols) have a 7-segment design.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 81(G) to (L), a game type notification effect is executed. The game type notification performance is a performance to notify which of the first special game and the second special game, which is more advantageous than the first special game, has been won. For example, the "16R (actually 13R) jackpot not expected to pass through V" corresponds to the "first special game," and the "jackpot scheduled to pass 16RV" corresponds to the "second special game." If the second special game is won, a "7" symbol is displayed, and if the first special game is won, a symbol other than the "7" symbol is displayed.

In FIG. 81(G), a re-fluctuation start effect is executed. The re-fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols that have stopped in a winning manner start to fluctuate again. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed.
In FIG. 81(H), a symbol stop effect is executed. The symbol stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbol that has started changing again stops. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are all stopped at the "7" symbol. As a result, it is announced that the second special game has been won. With the execution of the symbol stop performance, the mode of the performance symbols is changed. Specifically, the design is a vertically long simple design (also referred to as a "simple design").

In FIG. 81(I), a winning symbol overlapping effect is executed. The winning symbol overlapping effect is a presentation in which a set of winning symbols are displayed in an overlapping manner. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R ("7" symbols) on the left-center right are displayed in an overlapping manner. At this time, the "7" pattern has a simple design.
In FIG. 81(J), a position return effect is executed. The position return performance is a performance in which the performance symbols overlapped in the winning symbol overlap performance are returned to their original stop positions. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R ("7" symbols) have returned to their original stop positions.

In FIG. 81(K), the first color change effect is executed. The color change performance is a performance that changes the appearance of a performance pattern by changing the display color of the performance pattern. Here, the display color of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R has been changed from white to green (shown by hatching in the figure).
In FIG. 81(L), the second color change effect is executed. The color change performance is a performance that changes the appearance of a performance pattern by changing the display color of the performance pattern. Here, the display color of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R has been changed from green to red (shown by hatching in the figure).
Note that a configuration may be adopted in which the color is gradually changed in the color change effect. For example, in the first color change effect, the color is changed continuously from white to gradually approaching green. For example, in the second color change effect, the color is changed continuously from green to gradually approach red.

[Winning game type notification performance B]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining winning game type notification effect B. Winning game type notification performance B is another example of winning game type notification performance A.

In the winning game type notification performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 82(A), a confirmed stop effect is executed and the effect symbols are fixed and stopped. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L is a "1" pattern, the middle presentation pattern 8C is a "2" pattern, and the right presentation pattern 8R is an "8" pattern. Although the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed, they may be displayed (the same applies below).

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(B), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are fluctuating at high speed. The performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R during high-speed fluctuation are displayed transparently or semi-transparently.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(C), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols stop in a predetermined reach mode. Here, both the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8C are stopped at the "2" symbol. Medium production pattern 8C maintains high-speed fluctuation. In addition, with the execution of the reach formation effect, the mode of the effect pattern is changed. Specifically, the design is a design that imitates a 7-segment display (also referred to as a "7-segment design"). The mode of the performance pattern may be changed at a timing before the performance pattern stops, at a timing that coincides with the stop of the performance pattern, or at a timing after the performance pattern stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(D), a reach symbol frame-out effect is executed. The ready-to-win symbol frame-out performance is a performance in which the ready-to-win symbol that has stopped in the ready-to-win mode is framed out. Here, a part of the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R ("2" symbol) is out of frame from the display screen 7a. Specifically, the left half of the left presentation pattern 8L (“2” pattern) is out of frame, and the right half of the right presentation pattern 8R (“2” pattern) is out of frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(E), a normal reach effect is executed. Here, the medium performance symbol 8C is fluctuating with respect to the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R (“2” symbols) which are reach symbols. At this time, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R have a 7-segment design. After this, the medium effect pattern 8C slows down and becomes visible, and then stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(F), a rejection notification effect is executed. The winning notification performance is a performance that notifies the player that he or she has failed in the special symbol lottery. Here, the medium performance symbol 8C stops at the "3" symbol, and the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R become the "2" symbol. At this time, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R have a 7-segment design.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(G), a mode return effect is executed. The mode return production is a production that returns the mode of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the 7-segment design to the mode before the start of the variable production. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are "2" symbols, and the middle performance symbol 8C is a "3" symbol, but both have returned to the state before the start of the variation start performance.

[Winning game type notification performance C]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the winning game type notification effect C. The winning game type notification performance C is another example of the winning game type notification performances A and B.

In the winning game type notification performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 83(A), a confirmed stop effect is executed and the effect symbols are fixed and stopped. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L is a "1" pattern, the middle presentation pattern 8C is a "2" pattern, and the right presentation pattern 8R is an "8" pattern. Although the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed, they may be displayed (the same applies below).

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(B), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are fluctuating at high speed. The performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R during high-speed fluctuation are displayed transparently or semi-transparently.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(C), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols stop in a predetermined reach mode. Here, both the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8C are stopped at the "2" symbol. Medium performance pattern 8C maintains high-speed fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(D), a cut-in effect is executed. The cut-in performance is a performance in which a predetermined image or the like is displayed for a certain period of time. Here, an image of the ally character CRA is displayed. Although the ready-to-win symbol is not displayed, the ready-to-win symbol may be displayed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(E), a normal reach effect is executed. Here, the medium performance symbol 8C is fluctuating with respect to the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R (“2” symbols) which are reach symbols. In addition, with the execution of the normal reach effect, the mode of the effect pattern is changed. Specifically, the design is a design that imitates a 7-segment display (also referred to as a "7-segment design"). After this, the medium effect pattern 8C slows down and becomes visible, and then stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(F), a winning notification effect is executed. The winning notification performance is a performance to notify that the player has won the special symbol lottery. Here, the middle production pattern 8C stops at the "2" symbol, and the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right are all "2" symbols. At this time, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R ("2" symbols) have a 7-segment design.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(G), a winning symbol overlapping effect is executed. The winning symbol overlapping effect is a presentation in which a set of winning symbols are displayed in an overlapping manner. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R ("2" symbols) on the left-center right are arranged diagonally and displayed in an overlapping manner. At this time, the "2" symbol has a 7-segment design.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 83(H) to (L), a game type notification effect is executed. The game type notification performance is a performance to notify which of the first special game and the second special game, which is more advantageous than the first special game, has been won. For example, the "16R (actually 13R) jackpot not expected to pass through V" corresponds to the "first special game," and the "jackpot scheduled to pass 16RV" corresponds to the "second special game." If the second special game is won, a "7" symbol is displayed, and if the first special game is won, a symbol other than the "7" symbol is displayed.

In FIG. 83(H), a re-fluctuation start effect is executed. The re-fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols that have stopped in a winning manner start to fluctuate again. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed.
In FIG. 83(I), a symbol stop effect is executed. The symbol stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbol that has started changing again stops. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are all stopped at the "7" symbol. As a result, it is announced that the second special game has been won. With the execution of the symbol stop performance, the mode of the performance symbols is changed. Specifically, the design has returned to the design (also referred to as "normal design") at the time of definite stop (FIG. 83(A)).

In FIG. 83(J), a symbol position change effect is executed. The symbol position change performance is a performance that changes the position of at least one performance symbol among a set of performance symbols (winning symbols) forming a winning mode. Here, a set of performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R (winning symbols, "7" symbols) are arranged diagonally.

In FIG. 83(K), the first decoration image addition effect is executed. The decoration image addition performance is a performance that changes the aspect of the performance pattern by adding a decoration image to the identification information (numbers) of the performance pattern. Here, a "moon" image MG is added to the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R ("7" symbols).
In FIG. 83(L), the second decoration image addition effect is executed. The decoration image addition performance is a performance that changes the aspect of the performance pattern by adding a decoration image to the identification information (numbers) of the performance pattern. Here, a "sun" image SG is added to the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R ("7" symbols).
It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which the image is gradually changed in the decoration image addition effect. For example, in the first decorative image addition performance, a small image appears from nothing and gradually changes continuously until it becomes the "moon" image MG. For example, in the second decorative image addition performance, the "moon" image MG gradually changes continuously to become the "sun" image SG.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the winning game type notification effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 81 to 83, the winning notification effect (FIGS. 81(F) and 83(F)) is performed using the effect pattern of the first mode, which is different from the first mode. Game type notification effects (FIGS. 81 (G) to (L), FIGS. 83 (H) to (L)) are performed using the effect patterns of the modes. According to this configuration, since the type of game is notified by a performance pattern different from that used to notify of winning, the result is an unprecedented and innovative performance, which can visually entertain the players and improve their interest. be able to.
The production symbols shown in FIGS. 81(D) to (F) correspond to "production symbols of the first mode", and the production symbols shown in FIGS. 81(H) to (L) correspond to "modes different from the first mode". It corresponds to "the production pattern". The effect symbols shown in FIGS. 82(C) to (F) correspond to "the effect symbols of the first mode". The production symbols shown in FIGS. 83(E) to (G) correspond to "production symbols of the first mode", and the production symbols shown in FIGS. 83(I) to (L) correspond to "modes different from the first mode". It corresponds to "the production pattern". Further, the performance control microcomputer 91 corresponds to "performance execution means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the game type notification performance, after the performance symbols of the second mode are stopped (FIGS. 81(H) and 83(I)), the performance symbols of the second mode are changed to the second mode. 81(K), FIG. 83(K)). According to this configuration, the third mode is started after the second mode of production pattern stops, resulting in an unprecedented and novel presentation, which can visually entertain the player and improve interest. Can be done.
The production symbols shown in FIGS. 81(H) to (J) and FIGS. 83(I) and (J) correspond to "production symbols of the second mode", and are shown in FIGS. 81(K) and 83(K). The effect pattern corresponds to the "third mode effect pattern", and the color change effect in FIG. 81 and the decorative image addition effect in FIG. 83 correspond to the "mode change effect".

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the game type notification performance, the performance symbols of the third mode (FIGS. 81(K), 83(K)) are changed to the performance symbols of the fourth mode, which is different from the third mode. (Fig. 81(L), Fig. 83(L)). According to this configuration, after the production pattern of the second mode stops, it changes to the third mode and then to the fourth mode, resulting in an unprecedented and innovative production, which can visually entertain the player and add interest. It is possible to improve the
The production patterns shown in FIGS. 81(K) and 83(K) correspond to the "third mode production pattern", and the production patterns shown in FIGS. 81(L) and 83(L) correspond to the "fourth mode production pattern". It corresponds to "the production pattern". The color change effect shown in FIG. 81 and the decorative image addition effect shown in FIG. 83 correspond to the "aspect change effect".

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, after the production pattern starts a variable production (FIGS. 81(B), 82(B), and 83(B)), the production pattern is stopped in a predetermined ready-to-reach manner. When the production pattern is changed to the production pattern of the first mode using the formation production (FIGS. 81(C), 82(C), and 83(C)) as a trigger, and the lottery of the special symbol is won, The winning notification effect (FIG. 81(F), FIG. 83(F)) is executed. According to this configuration, since the appearance of the production pattern changes when the reach is formed, the production accompanying the reach becomes a novel production, which can visually entertain the player and improve interest. can.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, if the special symbol lottery is unsuccessful after the reach formation performance, the performance symbols in the first mode are returned to the state before the start of the variable performance (FIG. 82(F) (G )). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the fluctuations of the performance symbols when forming the reach look impressive, and it is possible to visually entertain the player, thereby increasing the interest of the player.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the winning game type notification performance will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the embodiment described above, the effect pattern changes to the effect pattern before the start of variation, the first form, the second form, the third form, and the fourth form. The change in the aspect of the effect pattern may be, for example, as long as at least one of the shape, size, orientation, display color, and transparency (density) of the effect pattern changes.

[Modification 2]
In the winning game type notification performance C of the above embodiment, the performance pattern in the second mode is the same as the mode (normal design) before the start of variation. Similarly, in the winning game type notification performances A to C, the performance design of the fourth mode may be the same as the mode (normal design) before the start of variation.

[Modification 3]
In the winning game type notification performance C of the above embodiment, after the cut-in performance following the reach formation performance, the mode of the performance symbol was changed to the first mode (FIGS. 83(C) to (E)). On the other hand, a cut-in performance may be performed first without performing a reach formation performance, and the mode of the performance pattern may be changed to the first mode together with the formation of a reach after the cut-in performance (predetermined performance).

[Modification 4]
In the winning game type notification performance C of the above embodiment, after the cut-in performance following the reach formation performance, the mode of the performance pattern was changed to the first mode (FIGS. 83(C) to (E)). However, the performance following the reach formation performance is not limited to the cut-in performance. For example, it may be a blackout effect or an animation effect that displays a moving image.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, after the winning notification effect (FIGS. 81(F) and 83(F)), the re-variation effect is performed (FIGS. 81(G) and 83(H)), and then the game type notification effect is performed. It was being executed (FIGS. 81(H) to (L), FIGS. 83(I) to (L)). On the other hand, instead of the re-fluctuation effect, a predetermined effect such as a cut-in effect may be performed.

[Modification 6]
The winning game type notification performance B of the above embodiment shows the case where the lottery with a special symbol is unsuccessful, but the failure notification performance (FIG. 82(F)) is also executed when the lottery with a special symbol is won. However, after that, a winning type notification effect may be executed. For example, after the rejection notification effect (Fig. 82 (F)), the effects shown in Figs. 81 (G) to (L) are executed, the effects shown in Figs. 81 (H) to (L) are executed, ) to (L), the effects shown in FIGS. 83(H) to (L), and the effects shown in FIGS. 83(I) to (L) are conceivable.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect B3-1]
A gaming machine capable of executing either a first special game or a second special game more advantageous than the first special game when winning a special symbol lottery,
A winning notification performance that notifies you that you have won the special symbol lottery; and after the winning notification performance, a game type notification performance that notifies you of which of the first special game and the second special game you have won. Equipped with an executable production execution means,
The performance execution means performs the winning notification performance with a performance pattern of a first mode, and performs the game type notification performance with a performance pattern of a different mode from the first mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1,
In the game type notification performance, the performance execution means changes the performance symbols of the second mode to performance symbols of a third mode different from the second mode after stopping the performance symbols of the second mode. Execute change production,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-2,
The performance execution means changes, in the mode change performance, the performance symbol that has changed to the third mode to a performance symbol of a fourth mode different from the third mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B3-1 to B3-3,
The performance execution means changes the performance pattern to the performance pattern of the first mode, triggered by a reach formation performance in which the performance pattern stops in a predetermined reach mode after the performance pattern starts the variable production, and changes the production pattern to the performance pattern of the first mode, and changes the production pattern to the production pattern of the first mode, If you have won the lottery, execute the winning notification performance;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-4,
The production execution means returns the production symbols in the first mode to the mode before the start of the variable production if the special symbol lottery is unsuccessful after the reach formation production.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Specific symbol stop effects A and B will be explained below using FIGS. 84 to 86. This specific symbol stop performance is executed when the performance symbols change. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a specific symbol stop effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Specific symbol stop effect A]
The specific symbol stop performance is a performance in which a variable display is performed using only specific performance symbols included in the performance symbols. Before explaining the specific symbol stop performance, the arrangement of the performance symbols will be explained using FIG. 84.

FIG. 84(A) shows a normal arrangement of production symbols. The normal arrangement is an arrangement of effect symbols displayed in each column when the effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a plurality of columns. In the normal arrangement, the production symbols are "0" symbol EZ0, "1" symbol EZ1, "2" symbol EZ2, "3" symbol EZ3, "4" symbol EZ4, "5" symbol EZ5, "6" symbol EZ6, " They are arranged in the order of 7'' pattern EZ7, ``8'' pattern EZ8, ``9'' pattern EZ9, ``sun'' pattern EZ10, ``moon'' pattern EZ11, and ``star'' pattern EZ12, and are composed of 13 types of patterns. Therefore, when variable display of the normally arranged performance symbols is performed, 13 types of performance symbols will appear on the display screen 7a in this arrangement order.

FIG. 84(B) shows special arrangement 1 of production symbols. The special array 1 is an arrangement of specific performance symbols included in the performance symbols displayed in each of the plurality of columns. In special arrangement 1, the effect symbols are arranged in the order of "sun" symbol EZ10, "moon" symbol EZ11, and "star" symbol EZ12. Special array 1 is composed of three types of effect patterns. Therefore, when the performance symbols of the special array 1 are displayed in a variable manner, three types of performance symbols will appear on the display screen 7a in this order.

FIG. 84(C) shows special arrangement 2 of production symbols. The special arrangement 2 is an arrangement of specific performance symbols included in the performance symbols displayed in each of the plurality of columns. In special arrangement 2, the production symbols are arranged in the order of "sun" symbol EZ10 and "moon" symbol EZ11. Special array 2 is composed of two types of effect patterns. Therefore, when the performance symbols of the special array 2 are displayed in a variable manner, two types of performance symbols will appear on the display screen 7a in this order.

FIG. 84(D) shows special arrangement 3 of production symbols. The special arrangement 3 is an arrangement of specific performance symbols included in the performance symbols displayed in each of the plurality of columns. In special arrangement 3, the production symbols are arranged in the order of "sun" symbol EZ10 and "star" symbol EZ12. Special array 3 is composed of two types of effect patterns. Therefore, when the performance symbols of the special array 3 are displayed in a variable manner, two types of performance symbols will appear on the display screen 7a in this order.

FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining specific symbol stop effect A. The specific symbol stop performance is a performance in which a variable display is performed using only specific performance symbols included in the performance symbols. 85(A) to (F) show a first example of the specific symbol stop effect A, and FIGS. 85(G) to (L) show a second example of the specific symbol stop effect A.

In the first example of the specific symbol stop effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 85(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At this time, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in special arrangement 1 (FIG. 84(B)). In the first example of the specific symbol stop effect A, the effective lines are so-called 5 lines. In each row, the upper, middle, and lower tiers of the display screen 7a are the stopping positions, and connect "upper tier" - "upper tier" - "upper tier" in the order of left production symbol 8L, middle production symbol 8C, and right production symbol 8R. The first line, the second line that connects "middle tier" - "middle tier" - "middle tier", the third line that connects "lower tier" - "lower tier" - "lower tier", the "upper tier" - "middle tier" - "lower tier" A winning pattern is formed when a production pattern with the same identification information stops on any of the five lines, the fourth line connecting the lines, and the fifth line connecting the "lower row", "middle row", and "upper row".

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop performance is a performance in which the fluctuation (movement) speed of the left performance symbol 8L becomes slow and it stops at a predetermined stop position. Here, a "sun" symbol EZ10 is stopped in the upper row in the vertical direction (variation direction), a "moon" symbol EZ11 is stopped in the middle row, and a "star" symbol EZ12 is stopped in the lower row. The middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(C), a right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop performance is a performance in which the fluctuation (movement) speed of the right performance symbol 8R becomes slow and it stops at a predetermined stop position. Here, a "moon" symbol EZ11 is stopped in the upper row in the vertical direction (variation direction), a "star" symbol EZ12 is stopped in the middle row, and a "sun" symbol EZ10 is stopped in the lower row. The middle effect pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(D), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The medium symbol stop performance is a performance in which the fluctuation (movement) speed of the medium design pattern 8C becomes slow and it stops at a predetermined stop position. Here, a "star" symbol EZ12 is stopped in the upper row in the vertical direction (variation direction), a "sun" symbol EZ10 is stopped in the middle row, and a "moon" symbol EZ11 is stopped in the lower row. As a result, the "sun" symbol EZ10 is stopped at the upper stage of the left performance symbol 8L, the middle stage of the middle performance symbol 8C, and the lower stage of the right performance symbol 8R, forming a hit notification mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(E), a background change effect is executed. The background change performance is a performance that changes the background image of the display screen 7a to a background image of the same color for a certain period of time to hide the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, changes to the background image are shown by hatching.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(F), another mode formation effect is executed. The alternate mode formation performance is a performance that changes the stop position of at least one of the stopped performance symbols to form another winning notification mode. Here, a "sun" symbol EZ10 is displayed in the middle of the left-center right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, forming a win notification mode different from that in FIG. 85(D). At this time, effect symbols other than the "sun" symbol EZ10 forming the hit notification mode are hidden.

In the second example of the specific symbol stop effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 85(G), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At this time, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in special arrangement 1 (FIG. 84(B)). In the second example of the specific symbol stop effect A, the effective line is so-called one line. In each row, the upper, middle, and lower tiers of the display screen 7a are the stop positions, and the line connecting the "middle tier" of the left presentation symbol 8L, the "middle tier" of the middle presentation symbol 8C, and the "middle tier" of the right presentation symbol 8R. A winning pattern is formed by stopping performance symbols with the same identification information.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(H), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop performance is a performance in which the fluctuation (movement) speed of the left performance symbol 8L becomes slow and it stops at a predetermined stop position. Here, a "star" symbol EZ12 is stopped in the upper row in the vertical direction (variation direction), a "sun" symbol EZ10 is stopped in the middle row, and a "moon" symbol EZ11 is stopped in the lower row. The middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(I), a right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop performance is a performance in which the fluctuation (movement) speed of the right performance symbol 8R becomes slow and it stops at a predetermined stop position. Here, a "star" symbol EZ12 is stopped in the upper row in the vertical direction (variation direction), a "sun" symbol EZ10 is stopped in the middle row, and a "moon" symbol EZ11 is stopped in the lower row. The middle effect pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed. Furthermore, a reach line image RLG connecting the left and right "sun" symbols EZ10 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(J), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The medium symbol stop performance is a performance in which the fluctuation (movement) speed of the medium design pattern 8C becomes slow and it stops at a predetermined stop position. Here, a "star" symbol EZ12 is stopped in the upper row in the vertical direction (variation direction), a "sun" symbol EZ10 is stopped in the middle row, and a "moon" symbol EZ11 is stopped in the lower row. As a result, the "sun" symbol EZ10 is stopped at the middle stage of the left performance pattern 8L, the middle stage of the middle performance pattern 8C, and the middle stage of the right performance pattern 8R, forming a hit notification mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(K), a symbol movement effect is executed. The symbol movement performance is a performance in which the performance symbols other than the "sun" symbol EZ10 that formed the hit notification mode are moved and framed out from the display screen 7a. Here, a pair of "star" images EZ12 on the left-center right are moved upward as shown by the arrow YG1 and are framed out from the upper side of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, a pair of "moon" images EZ11 on the left-center right are moved downward as shown by arrow YG2 and are out of frame from the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(L), a winning mode display effect is executed. The winning mode display performance is a performance that displays a performance pattern of a winning notification mode. Here, a "sun" symbol EZ10 is displayed in the middle of the left-center right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Specific symbol stop effect B]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining specific symbol stop effect B. The specific symbol stop performance is a performance in which a variable display is performed using only specific performance symbols included in the performance symbols. 86(A) to (F) show a first example of the specific symbol stop performance B, and FIGS. 86(G) to (L) show a second example of the specific symbol stop performance B.

In the first example of the specific symbol stop effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 86(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At this time, the left presentation pattern 8L is in special arrangement 2 (FIG. 84(C)), and the middle presentation pattern 8C and right presentation pattern 8R are in special arrangement 3 (FIG. 84(D)). In the first example of specific symbol stop performance B, the effective lines are so-called 5 lines. In each row, the upper, middle, and lower tiers of the display screen 7a are the stopping positions, and connect "upper tier" - "upper tier" - "upper tier" in the order of left production symbol 8L, middle production symbol 8C, and right production symbol 8R. The first line, the second line that connects "middle tier" - "middle tier" - "middle tier", the third line that connects "lower tier" - "lower tier" - "lower tier", the "upper tier" - "middle tier" - "lower tier" A winning pattern is formed when a production pattern with the same identification information stops on any of the five lines, the fourth line connecting the lines, and the fifth line connecting the "lower row", "middle row", and "upper row".

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop performance is a performance in which the fluctuation (movement) speed of the left performance symbol 8L becomes slow and it stops at a predetermined stop position. Here, a "moon" symbol EZ11 is stopped in the upper row in the vertical direction (variation direction), a "sun" symbol EZ10 is stopped in the middle row, and a "moon" symbol EZ11 is stopped in the lower row. The middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(C), a right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop performance is a performance in which the fluctuation (movement) speed of the right performance symbol 8R becomes slow and it stops at a predetermined stop position. Here, a "star" symbol EZ12 is stopped in the upper row in the vertical direction (variation direction), a "sun" symbol EZ10 is stopped in the middle row, and a "star" symbol EZ12 is stopped in the lower row. The middle effect pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(D), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The medium symbol stop performance is a performance in which the fluctuation (movement) speed of the medium design pattern 8C becomes slow and it stops at a predetermined stop position. Here, a "star" symbol EZ12 is stopped in the upper row in the vertical direction (variation direction), a "sun" symbol EZ10 is stopped in the middle row, and a "star" symbol EZ12 is stopped in the lower row. As a result, the "sun" symbol EZ10 is stopped at the middle stage of the left performance pattern 8L, the middle stage of the middle performance pattern 8C, and the middle stage of the right performance pattern 8R, forming a hit notification mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(E), a background change effect is executed. The background change performance is a performance that changes the background image of the display screen 7a to a background image of the same color for a certain period of time to hide the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, changes to the background image are shown by hatching.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(F), a winning mode display effect is executed. The winning mode display performance is a performance that displays a performance pattern of a winning notification mode. Here, a "sun" symbol EZ10 is displayed in the middle of the left-center right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. At this time, effect symbols other than the "sun" symbol EZ10 forming the hit notification mode are hidden.

In the second example of the specific symbol stop effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 86(G), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At this time, the left presentation pattern 8L is in special arrangement 2 (FIG. 84(C)), and the middle presentation pattern 8C and right presentation pattern 8R are in special arrangement 3 (FIG. 84(D)). In the second example of specific symbol stop performance B, the effective lines are so-called 5 lines. In each row, the upper, middle, and lower tiers of the display screen 7a are the stopping positions, and connect "upper tier" - "upper tier" - "upper tier" in the order of left production symbol 8L, middle production symbol 8C, and right production symbol 8R. The first line, the second line that connects "middle tier" - "middle tier" - "middle tier", the third line that connects "lower tier" - "lower tier" - "lower tier", the "upper tier" - "middle tier" - "lower tier" A winning pattern is formed when a production pattern with the same identification information stops on any of the five lines, the fourth line connecting the lines, and the fifth line connecting the "lower row", "middle row", and "upper row".

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(H), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop performance is a performance in which the fluctuation (movement) speed of the left performance symbol 8L becomes slow and it stops at a predetermined stop position. Here, a "moon" symbol EZ11 is stopped in the upper row in the vertical direction (variation direction), a "sun" symbol EZ10 is stopped in the middle row, and a "moon" symbol EZ11 is stopped in the lower row. The middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(I), a right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop performance is a performance in which the fluctuation (movement) speed of the right performance symbol 8R becomes slow and it stops at a predetermined stop position. Here, a "star" symbol EZ12 is stopped in the upper row in the vertical direction (variation direction), a "sun" symbol EZ10 is stopped in the middle row, and a "star" symbol EZ12 is stopped in the lower row. The middle effect pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(J), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The medium symbol stop performance is a performance in which the fluctuation (movement) speed of the medium design pattern 8C becomes slow and it stops at a predetermined stop position. Here, a "star" symbol EZ12 is stopped in the upper row in the vertical direction (variation direction), a "sun" symbol EZ10 is stopped in the middle row, and a "star" symbol EZ12 is stopped in the lower row. As a result, the "sun" symbol EZ10 is stopped at the middle stage of the left performance pattern 8L, the middle stage of the middle performance pattern 8C, and the middle stage of the right performance pattern 8R, forming a hit notification mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(K), a cut-in effect is executed. The cut-in performance is a performance in which a predetermined image is displayed for a certain period of time and the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are hidden. Here, an image of the ally character CRA is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(L), another mode formation effect is executed. The alternate mode formation performance is a performance that changes the stop position of at least one of the stopped performance symbols to form another winning notification mode. Here, the "sun" symbol EZ10 is displayed in the lower row of the left performance symbol 8L, the middle row of the middle performance symbol 8C, and the upper row of the right performance symbol 8R, and a different hit notification mode from that shown in FIG. 86(J) is formed. ing. At this time, a performance pattern other than the specific performance pattern is displayed. An "8" symbol EZ8 and a "9" symbol EZ9 are displayed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the specific symbol stop effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, a specific effect pattern (FIG. 84 (B) ( C) Perform variable display of multiple columns using only (D)). According to this configuration, since a variable display is performed using only specific performance symbols, it is possible to create an unprecedented and novel performance, which can visually entertain the player and improve interest. The performance control microcomputer 91 corresponds to "performance execution means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a special stop performance (FIG. 85(B) -(D), (H)-(J), FIG. 86(B)-(D), (H)-(J)) are executed. According to this configuration, since the winning notification mode is formed with a specific performance pattern, it becomes an unprecedented and novel performance, which can visually entertain the player and improve interest.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the special stop performance, a change mode display performance ( 85(F) and FIG. 86(L)). According to this configuration, since the winning notification mode is changed, it is possible to create an unprecedented and novel performance, visually entertaining the player, and increasing interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the special stop performance and before the change mode display performance, a hard-to-see performance (FIGS. 85(E) and (K)) is executed to make the stopped performance symbols difficult to see. do. According to this configuration, since the changed winning notification mode is displayed with the hard-to-see effect in between, it is possible to surprise the player and increase interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the special stop performance, a performance pattern other than the specific performance pattern is displayed in at least one of the plurality of rows (FIG. 86(B)). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the special stop performance, performance symbols other than the performance symbols forming the winning notification mode are hidden in at least one of the plurality of rows (FIGS. 85(F), (L) ), Figure 86(F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the specific symbol stop performance is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, a background change effect (FIG. 85(E)) and a cut-in effect (FIG. 86(K)) are performed as difficult-to-see effects. On the other hand, the difficult to see effect may be any other effect as long as it makes the stopped effect symbols difficult to see. For example, it may be a blackout effect, an animation effect that displays a moving image, or an accessory effect that moves a movable accessory to a position overlapping the display screen 7a.

[Modification 2]
In the embodiment described above, the example was a variable display in which the left presentation pattern 8L, the right presentation pattern 8R, and the middle presentation pattern 8C are stopped in this order. On the other hand, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right may be stopped in any order. Further, at least two of the left-center right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be stopped almost simultaneously.

[Modification 3]
In the embodiment described above, the display screen 7a is configured to perform a variable display using only specific performance symbols. On the other hand, the display screen may be made different between a variable display using all the production symbols included in the production symbols and a variable display using only specific production symbols. For example, a variable display using all the effect symbols can be performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and a variable display using only specific effect symbols can be performed on the sub display screen 64 (right sub The display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U) may be used. As an example, it is conceivable that the variable display using only specific performance symbols be displayed across the display screen 7a and the upper sub-display screen 64U.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect B4-1]
A gaming machine comprising a performance execution means for variably displaying performance symbols in multiple rows,
The performance execution means is capable of performing a variable display of the plurality of columns using only specific performance symbols included in the performance symbols displayed in each of the plurality of columns.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a special stop performance that forms a hit notification mode in which any of the specific performance symbols in each row stops at a predetermined stop position to notify a win.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-2,
After the special stop performance, the performance execution means executes a change mode display performance that changes the stop position of at least one of the stopped performance symbols to form another win notification mode different from the hit notification mode. It is possible,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B4-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-3,
After the special stop performance and before the change mode display performance, the performance execution means executes a hard-to-see performance that makes the stopped performance symbols difficult to see.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B4-2 to B4-4,
The performance execution means displays a performance pattern other than the specific performance pattern in at least one of the plurality of rows after the special stop performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B4-2 to B4-4,
The performance execution means hides performance symbols other than the performance symbols forming the winning notification mode in at least one of the plurality of rows after the special stop performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The winning pattern display performances A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 87 to 89. This winning mode symbol display performance is executed in a variable performance when a special symbol lottery is won. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the winning pattern display effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Win pattern display effect A]
The winning mode symbol display performance is a performance that displays performance symbols of predetermined formats in various areas in conjunction with the jackpot performance.
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the winning pattern display performance A. In the winning mode symbol display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 87(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. Although the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are not displayed, they may be displayed (the same applies below).

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop performance is a performance in which the fluctuation (movement) speed of the left performance symbol 8L becomes slow and it stops at a predetermined stop position. Here, the "3" symbol is stopped in the upper row in the vertical direction (variation direction), the "2" symbol is stopped in the middle row, and the "1" symbol is stopped in the lower row. The middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(C), a right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop performance is a performance in which the fluctuation (movement) speed of the right performance symbol 8R becomes slow and it stops at a predetermined stop position. Here, the "3" symbol is stopped in the upper row in the vertical direction (variation direction), the "4" symbol is stopped in the middle row, and the "5" symbol is stopped in the lower row. The middle effect pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(D), a reach mode notification effect is executed. The reach mode notification performance is a performance that notifies the active line on which the reach mode is formed. In the winning mode symbol display performance A, there are so-called 5 active lines. In each row, the upper, middle, and lower tiers of the display screen 7a are the stopping positions, and connect "upper tier" - "upper tier" - "upper tier" in the order of left production symbol 8L, middle production symbol 8C, and right production symbol 8R. The first line, the second line that connects "middle tier" - "middle tier" - "middle tier", the third line that connects "lower tier" - "lower tier" - "lower tier", the "upper tier" - "middle tier" - "lower tier" A winning pattern is formed when a production pattern with the same identification information stops on any of the five lines, the fourth line connecting the lines, and the fifth line connecting the "lower row", "middle row", and "upper row". Here, the "3" symbol is stopped at the upper row of the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R to form a ready-to-win mode. A reach line image RL connecting the left and right "3" symbols is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 87(E) and 87(F), a medium symbol stop effect is executed. The medium symbol stop performance is a performance in which the fluctuation (movement) speed of the medium performance symbol 8C becomes slow and stops at a predetermined stop position.
In FIG. 87(E), the fluctuation (movement) speed of the medium effect pattern 8C becomes slow and it moves slowly downward as shown by arrow Y. In FIG. 87(F), a "3" symbol is stopped in the upper row of the middle performance symbol 8C, a "4" symbol is stopped in the middle row, and a "5" symbol is stopped in the lower row. As a result, the "3" symbol is stopped at the upper stage of the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R, forming a winning pattern.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 87(G) to (I), a visual recognition difficulty effect is executed. The difficult-to-see performance is a performance that makes the stopped performance symbols difficult to see.
In FIG. 87(G), the moon image TG has begun to be displayed overlapping the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In FIG. 87(H), the number of moon images TG increases, and it gradually becomes difficult to visually recognize the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In FIG. 87(I), the number of moon images TG further increases, and the effect pattern becomes difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(J), a blessing performance is performed. The blessing performance is a performance in which a winning pattern is displayed to notify the player of a win. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MS saying "Congratulations" is displayed on the left side of the ally character CRA. At this time, reduced production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed at the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. In addition, a winning image AG "333" is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(K), an opening effect is performed. Here, the image of the ally character CRA is switched from the image in FIG. 87(J), and a message image MS saying "Jackpot" is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a. At this time, the reduced production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R at the bottom right of the display screen 7a are hidden, and the winning image AG "333" at the bottom left of the display screen 7a remains displayed. There is.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(L), a round effect is executed. Here, the image display of the ally character CRA continues. In addition, a right-handed hitting image RG called "right-handed hitting" is displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, a round display RH "1R" is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. At this time, the winning image AG "333" at the lower left of the display screen 7a remains displayed.

[Win pattern display effect B]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the winning pattern display performance B. The winning pattern display performance B is another example of the winning pattern display performance A. In the winning mode symbol display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 88(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. Although the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are not displayed, they may be displayed (the same applies below).

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop performance is a performance in which the fluctuation (movement) speed of the left performance symbol 8L becomes slow and it stops at a predetermined stop position. Here, the left production symbol 8L (“2” symbol) is stopped. The middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(C), the right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop performance is a performance in which the fluctuation (movement) speed of the right performance symbol 8R becomes slow and it stops at a predetermined stop position. Here, the right production symbol 8R (“2” symbol) is stopped. The middle effect pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(D), a reach mode notification effect is executed. The reach mode notification performance is a performance that notifies that a reach mode is formed. Here, a reach line image RL connecting the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R ("2" symbol) is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 88(E) and 88(F), a medium symbol stop effect is executed. The medium symbol stop performance is a performance in which the fluctuation (movement) speed of the medium performance symbol 8C becomes slow and it stops at a predetermined stop position.
In FIG. 88(E), the fluctuation (movement) speed of the medium effect pattern 8C becomes slow and it moves slowly downward as shown by arrow Y. In FIG. 88(F), the middle effect pattern 8C ("2" pattern) is stopped. As a result, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left-center right all become "2" symbols, forming a winning mode.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 88(G) to (I), a difficult-to-see effect is executed. The difficult-to-see performance is a performance that makes the stopped performance symbols difficult to see.
In FIG. 88(G), the brightness of the entire display screen 7a is low. In FIG. 88(H), the brightness of the entire display screen 7a is further reduced, and it gradually becomes difficult to visually recognize the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In FIG. 88(I), the brightness of the entire display screen 7a is further reduced, making it difficult to see the performance symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(J), a blessing performance is performed. The blessing performance is a performance in which a winning pattern is displayed to notify the player of a win. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MS saying "Congratulations" is displayed on the left side of the ally character CRA. At this time, reduced production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed at the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(K), a promotion effect is executed. The promotion performance is a performance in which stopped performance symbols are promoted. Here, the message image MS "MAX" is displayed at the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a are changed from the "2" symbol to the "7" symbol. A winning image AG "777" is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(L), a round effect is executed. Here, the image of the ally character CRA is switched from the image in FIG. 88(K). In addition, a right-handed hitting image RG called "right-handed hitting" is displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, a round display RH "1R" is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. At this time, the reduced production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R at the bottom right of the display screen 7a are hidden, and the winning image AG "777" at the bottom left of the display screen 7a remains displayed. There is.

[Win pattern display performance C]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the winning mode symbol display effect C. The winning pattern display performance C is another example of the winning pattern display performances A and B. In the winning mode symbol display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 89(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. Although the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are not displayed, they may be displayed (the same applies below).

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop performance is a performance in which the fluctuation (movement) speed of the left performance symbol 8L becomes slow and it stops at a predetermined stop position. Here, the left production symbol 8L (“2” symbol) is stopped. The middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(C), a right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop performance is a performance in which the fluctuation (movement) speed of the right performance symbol 8R becomes slow and it stops at a predetermined stop position. Here, the right production symbol 8R (“2” symbol) is stopped. The middle effect pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(D), a reach mode notification effect is executed. The reach mode notification performance is a performance that notifies that a reach mode is formed. Here, a reach line image RL connecting the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R ("2" symbol) is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 89(E) and 89(F), a medium symbol stop effect is executed. The medium symbol stop performance is a performance in which the fluctuation (movement) speed of the medium performance symbol 8C becomes slow and stops at a predetermined stop position.
In FIG. 89(E), the fluctuation (movement) speed of the medium effect pattern 8C becomes slow and it moves slowly downward as shown by arrow Y. In FIG. 89(F), the medium effect pattern 8C (“1” pattern) is stopped. As a result, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are "2" symbols, and the middle performance symbol is "1" symbols, forming a reach-loss mode.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 89(G) to (I), a difficult-to-see effect is executed. The difficult-to-see performance is a performance that makes the stopped performance symbols difficult to see.
In FIG. 89(G), a crack image WG that appears as if a crack has appeared on the display screen 7a starts to be displayed. In FIG. 89(H), the number of crack images WG further increases, and it gradually becomes difficult to visually recognize the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In FIG. 89(I), the entire display screen 7a is black, as if it has been destroyed, and the performance symbols are difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(J), a blessing performance is performed. The blessing performance is a performance in which a winning pattern is displayed to notify the player of a win. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MS saying "Congratulations" is displayed on the left side of the ally character CRA. At this time, reduced production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed at the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. In addition, a winning image AG "222" is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(K), an animation effect is executed. The animation performance is a performance that displays a moving image on the display screen 7a. Here, the ally character CRA displayed in FIG. 89(J) is enlarged while moving to the left side of the display screen 7a as indicated by arrow Y. At this time, the display of the reduced performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R at the lower right of the display screen 7a and the display of the winning image AG "222" at the lower left of the display screen 7a continue as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(L), a round effect is executed. Here, the image of the ally character CRA is switched from the image in FIG. 89(K). In addition, a right-handed hitting image RG called "right-handed hitting" is displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, a round display RH "1R" is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. At this time, the reduced production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R at the bottom right of the display screen 7a are hidden, and the winning image AG "777" at the bottom left of the display screen 7a remains displayed. There is.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the winning pattern display effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 87 to 89, first display effects (FIGS. 87 (F) and 88 (F)) display effect symbols in a predetermined manner in the first area of the display screen 7a. , Fig. 89(F)), and then performs a difficult-to-see effect (Fig. 87(G) to (I), Fig. 88(G) to (I ) and FIGS. 89(G) to (I)), a second display effect (FIG. 87(J), 88(J)(K) and FIG. 89(J)(K)). According to this configuration, after the effect pattern is displayed in the first area in a predetermined manner, the effect pattern in the winning mode is displayed in the second area through the difficult-to-see effect, resulting in a novel effect that has not been seen before, and the game It is possible to visually entertain people and improve their interest.
In addition, the stop areas of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 87(F) (the entire area where the nine symbols stop), and the production symbols shown in FIGS. 88(F) and 89(F) The stop areas 8L, 8C, and 8R (areas where the three symbols stop) correspond to the "first area", and are shown in Figures 87 (J), 88 (J) (K), and 89 (J) (K). The display area of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R at the lower right of the display screen 7a shown in 1 corresponds to the "second area". Further, the performance control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the "performance execution means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in parallel with the second display effect, the third display effect (FIGS. 87(J), 88(K), FIG. 89(J)) displays the image AG in the third area. K)) is possible. According to this configuration, since the third area effect is performed in parallel with the second display effect, it becomes an unprecedented and innovative effect, which can visually entertain the player and improve interest. can.
In addition, the winning images AG in Figures 87 (J) to (L), Figures 88 (K) (L), and Figures 89 (J) to (L) correspond to the "winning pattern effect design", and the winning images AG The displayed area corresponds to the "third area".

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the third display effect executes an image switching effect that switches the displayed image while maintaining the display of the effect symbol displayed in the third area, and the second display effect The effect symbols displayed in the second area are hidden (FIGS. 87(K), 88(L), and 89(L)). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as a difficult-to-see effect, a effect that makes part of the effect pattern difficult to see is repeated and the entire effect pattern in a predetermined manner is made difficult to see in stages (FIGS. 87(G) to ( I), Figures 88 (G) to (I), Figures 89 (G) to (I)). According to this configuration, the performance symbols in the first area become invisible in stages, making it possible for the player to have a sense of expectation that something will happen, thereby increasing the player's interest. can.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as a difficult-to-see effect, the display screen on which the effect pattern is displayed is repeatedly destroyed in stages, thereby making the entire effect pattern difficult to see (FIG. 89(G) ) ~ (I)). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player feel even more hopeful that something will happen, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the winning pattern display effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the effect that makes part of the effect pattern difficult to see is repeated and the entire effect pattern of a predetermined mode is made difficult to see in stages (FIGS. 87(G) to (I), FIG. 88(G)) ~ (I), Figures 89 (G) ~ (I)). On the other hand, an effect may be performed that instantly makes the effect design difficult to see. For example, a blackout effect, a cut-in effect, or an accessory effect in which a movable accessory is moved so as to overlap the effect pattern displayed on the display screen may be performed.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the performance symbols of the predetermined mode displayed in the first area are the performance symbols of the winning mode (FIGS. 87(F) and 88(F)), and the performance symbol of the reach-loss mode (FIG. 89(F)). It became. On the other hand, the performance pattern of the predetermined mode displayed in the first area may be a performance pattern of a variation pattern (a mode in which the performance patterns on the left center right side are all different).

[Modification 3]
In the embodiment described above, the example was a variable display in which the left presentation pattern 8L, the right presentation pattern 8R, and the middle presentation pattern 8C are stopped in this order. On the other hand, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right may be stopped in any order. Further, at least two of the left-center right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be stopped almost simultaneously.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, the display screen 7a is provided with the first area, the second area, and the third area, but at least one area of the first area, the second area, and the third area is used as the sub display screen. 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect B5-1]
A gaming machine,
After executing a first display effect of displaying the effect pattern in a predetermined manner in a first area of the display screen, and then executing a difficult-to-see effect of making the effect pattern stopped and displayed in the first area difficult to see, comprising a performance execution means for executing a second display performance that displays a performance pattern of a winning mode in a second area, which is a mode of notifying that it is a win;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-1,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a third display performance that displays a performance symbol of the winning mode in a third area in parallel with the second display performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-2,
The performance execution means executes an image switching performance that switches the displayed image while maintaining the display of the performance symbol displayed in the third area by the third display performance, and Hiding the display of the production pattern displayed in the second area by production;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-1 to B5-3,
The performance execution means repeats a performance that makes a part of the performance pattern difficult to see as the hard-to-see performance, and gradually makes the entire performance pattern in the predetermined mode difficult to see.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B5-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-4,
The performance execution means makes the entire performance pattern difficult to see by repeatedly performing a performance in which a display screen on which the performance pattern is displayed is destroyed in stages as the difficult-to-visibility performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The effect pattern mode change effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 90 to 92. This performance symbol mode change performance is executed in conjunction with the variation performance of the performance symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the effect pattern change effect is included, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Production pattern change production A]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the effect pattern change effect A. In the effect symbol mode change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 90(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a game number display GH of "151 times" is displayed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, four pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The four reservation icons 9A indicate the number of reservations for the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1).

The special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5) includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a where the first special figure reservation is stored and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b where the second special figure reservation is stored. Contains. The first special figure reservation storage area 85a stores a group of random numbers (reservation information) such as random numbers per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the first special figure reservation. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for storage. The second special figure reservation storage area 85b has a first memory area for storing random value groups (reservation information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the second special figure reservation. A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided.

The four reservation icons 9A are the random numbers stored in the first storage area, second storage area, third storage area, and fourth storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a in order from the rightmost reservation icon 9A. Corresponds to a group of numerical values (pending information). The hold icons 9A corresponding to the first storage area, second storage area, third storage area, and fourth storage area are changed to "first hold," "second hold," "third hold," and "fourth hold," respectively. Also called. These pending icons 9A shift to the right for each change. That is, the hold icon 9A of "1st hold" becomes the corresponding variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A of "2nd hold" becomes the hold icon 9A of "1st hold", and the hold icon 9A of "3rd hold" becomes The "second hold" hold icon 9A becomes the hold icon 9A, and the "fourth hold" hold icon 9A becomes the "third hold" hold icon 9A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(B), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "2" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "5" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "6" symbol. The mode of the effect pattern here is assumed to be a normal mode (also referred to as a "normal mode"). As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. Four pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, too, the game number display GH of "151 times" is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(C), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, four pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The number of pending icons 9A (fourth pending) indicated by the symbol T increases due to winnings in the first starting port 20. The explanation will be continued assuming that the determination result (pre-read result) of the lottery for the pending icon 9A indicated by the symbol T is a "big win". At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a game number display GH of "152 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(D), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "9" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "3" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "4" symbol. In particular, the modes of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have changed to the first mode. The first aspect has a design that imitates a 7-segment display (also referred to as a "7-segment design"), and the display color is white. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. Four pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a game number display GH of "152 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(E), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A indicated by the symbol T is "3rd hold". At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a game number display GH of "153 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(F), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "5" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "6" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "7" symbol. The mode of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is the first mode (7 segment design), and the display color is white. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. Three pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a game number display GH of "153 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(G), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two pending icons 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A indicated by the symbol T is "second hold". At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a game number display GH of "154 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(H), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "1" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "8" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "0" symbol. In particular, the modes of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have changed to the second mode. The second aspect has a design that imitates a 7-segment display (also referred to as a "7-segment design"), and the display color is green. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. Two hold icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a game number display GH of "154 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(I), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, a pending icon 9A and a variable icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A indicated by the symbol T is "first hold". At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a game number display GH of "155 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(J), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "7" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "5" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "2" symbol. In particular, the modes of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have changed to the third mode. The third aspect has a design that imitates a 7-segment display (also referred to as a "7-segment design"), and the display color is red. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. A hold icon 9A is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a game number display GH of "155 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(K), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, the fluctuation icon 9C indicated by the symbol T is displayed. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a game number display GH of "156 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(L), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are all fixed and stopped at the "7" symbol. This notifies you that you have won the jackpot. In particular, the modes of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have changed to the normal mode. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a game number display GH of "156 times" is displayed.

In the production symbol mode change production A, the production symbols 8L, 8C, The aspect of 8R has been changed to the first aspect. In addition, the mode of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is changed to the second mode on the condition that the pending icon 9A corresponding to the pending jackpot becomes "second pending" (second condition). . The mode of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is changed to the third mode on the condition that the pending icon 9A corresponding to the pending jackpot becomes "first pending" (third condition). In the variation that results in a jackpot, the modes of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed to the normal mode (fourth mode).

[Production pattern change production B]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the effect pattern change effect B. The performance pattern change performance B is another example of the performance pattern change performance A.
In the effect symbol mode change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 91(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a game number display GH of "151 times" is displayed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, four pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The four reservation icons 9A indicate the number of reservations for the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). The four pending icons 9A are also referred to as "first pending", "second pending", "third pending", and "fourth pending" in order from the right end. These pending icons 9A shift to the right for each change. That is, the hold icon 9A of "1st hold" becomes the relevant variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A of "2nd hold" becomes the hold icon 9A of "1st hold", and the hold icon 9A of "3rd hold" becomes The "second hold" hold icon 9A becomes the hold icon 9A, and the "fourth hold" hold icon 9A becomes the "third hold" hold icon 9A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(B), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "2" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "5" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "6" symbol. The mode of the effect pattern here is assumed to be a normal mode (also referred to as a "normal mode"). As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. Four pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, too, the game number display GH of "151 times" is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(C), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, four pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The number of pending icons 9A (fourth pending) indicated by the symbol T increases due to winnings in the first starting port 20. The explanation will be continued assuming that the determination result (pre-read result) of the lottery for the pending icon 9A indicated by the symbol T is a "jackpot". At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a game number display GH of "152 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(D), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "9" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "3" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "4" symbol. In particular, the modes of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have changed to the first mode. The first aspect has a design that imitates a 7-segment display (also referred to as a "7-segment design"), and the display color is white. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. Four pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a game number display GH of "152 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(E), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A indicated by the symbol T is "3rd hold". At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a game number display GH of "153 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(F), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "5" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "6" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "7" symbol. In particular, the modes of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have changed to the second mode. The second aspect has a design that imitates a 7-segment display (also referred to as a "7-segment design"), and the display color is green. Furthermore, the second mode has a larger production pattern compared to the first mode. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. Three pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a game number display GH of "153 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(G), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two pending icons 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A indicated by the symbol T is "second hold". At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a game number display GH of "154 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(H), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "1" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "8" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "0" symbol. The production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the second mode. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. Two hold icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a game number display GH of "154 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(I), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, a pending icon 9A and a variable icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A indicated by the symbol T is "first hold". At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a game number display GH of "155 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(J), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "7" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "5" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "2" symbol. In particular, the modes of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have changed to the third mode. The third aspect has a design that imitates a 7-segment display (also referred to as a "7-segment design"), and the display color is red. In the third mode, the effect pattern is larger than that in the second mode. As a result, some of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are out of frame from the display screen 7a. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. A hold icon 9A is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a game number display GH of "155 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(K), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, the fluctuation icon 9C indicated by the symbol T is displayed. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a game number display GH of "156 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(L), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are all fixed and stopped at the "7" symbol. This notifies you that you have won the jackpot. In particular, the mode of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R has changed to the normal mode (the mode shown in FIG. 91(B)). As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a game number display GH of "156 times" is displayed.

In production pattern mode change production B, the mode of production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is changed to the first condition on the condition (first condition) that the pending icon 9A corresponding to the pending jackpot becomes "4th pending". The format has changed. In addition, on the condition (second condition) that the hold icon 9A corresponding to the hold that has become a jackpot has become “3rd hold” or “2nd hold”, the modes of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed to the second hold. The format has changed. The mode of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is changed to the third mode on the condition that the pending icon 9A corresponding to the pending jackpot becomes "first pending" (third condition). In the variation that results in a jackpot, the modes of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed to the normal mode (fourth mode).

[Production pattern change production C]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the effect pattern change effect C. The performance symbol mode change performance C is an example of a case where a pseudo continuous performance is performed.
In the effect symbol mode change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 92(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a game number display GH of "151 times" is displayed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, four pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The four reservation icons 9A indicate the number of reservations for the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). The four pending icons 9A are also referred to as "first pending", "second pending", "third pending", and "fourth pending" in order from the right end. These pending icons 9A shift to the right for each change. That is, the hold icon 9A of "1st hold" becomes the relevant variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A of "2nd hold" becomes the hold icon 9A of "1st hold", and the hold icon 9A of "3rd hold" becomes The "second hold" hold icon 9A becomes the hold icon 9A, and the "fourth hold" hold icon 9A becomes the "third hold" hold icon 9A. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the lottery determination result (pre-reading result) for the hold icon 9A (third hold) indicated by the symbol T is a "jackpot".

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(B), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "2" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "5" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "6" symbol. The mode of the effect pattern here is assumed to be a normal mode (also referred to as a "normal mode"). As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. Four pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, too, the game number display GH of "151 times" is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(C), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A indicated by the symbol T is "second hold". At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a game number display GH of "152 times" is displayed. In particular, the game number display GH is in a different form from the normal game number display. Here, it is in white text.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(D), a temporary stop effect is executed. The temporary stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L temporarily stops at the "6" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C temporarily stops at the "5" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stops at the "3" symbol. In particular, the modes of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have changed to the second mode. The second aspect has a design that imitates a 7-segment display (also referred to as a "7-segment design"), and the display color is green. In the second mode, the effect pattern is larger than the first mode (the modes shown in FIGS. 90(D)(F) and 91(D)(F)). Three pending icons 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a game number display GH in white letters "152 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(E), a re-fluctuation effect is executed. The re-fluctuation performance is a performance in which the temporarily stopped performance symbols start to fluctuate again. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and right sides have started to fluctuate again and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A indicated by the symbol T is "second hold". At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a game number display GH in white letters "152 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(F), a temporary stop effect is executed. The temporary stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L temporarily stops at the "2" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C temporarily stops at the "8" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stops at the "9" symbol. In particular, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the second mode. Three pending icons 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a game number display GH in white letters "152 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(G), a re-fluctuation effect is executed. The re-fluctuation performance is a performance in which the temporarily stopped performance symbols start to fluctuate again. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and right sides have started to fluctuate again and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A indicated by the symbol T is "second hold". At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a game number display GH in white letters "152 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(H), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "4" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "0" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "8" symbol. The production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the second mode. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. Three pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a game number display GH in white letters "152 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(I), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two pending icons 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A indicated by the symbol T is "first hold". At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a game number display GH of "153 times" is displayed. The game number display GH has returned to the normal mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(J), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "7" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "5" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "2" symbol. In particular, the modes of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have changed to the third mode. The third aspect has a design that imitates a 7-segment display (also referred to as a "7-segment design"), and the display color is red. In the third mode, the effect pattern is larger than that in the second mode. As a result, parts of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are out of frame from the display screen 7a. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. Two hold icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a game number display GH of "153 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(K), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, a pending icon 9A and a variable icon 9C indicated by the symbol T are displayed. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a game number display GH of "154 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(L), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are all fixed and stopped at the "7" symbol. This notifies you that you have won the jackpot. In particular, the modes of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have changed to the normal mode. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a game number display GH of "154 times" is displayed.

In the performance symbol mode change performance C, the mode of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is changed to the second mode over the period of the pseudo-continuous performance. In addition, the mode of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is changed to the third mode on the condition that the pending icon 9A corresponding to the pending jackpot becomes "first pending" (third condition). . In the variation that results in a jackpot, the modes of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed to the normal mode (fourth mode).

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the effect pattern change effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the first condition is satisfied, the mode of the effect pattern is changed to the first mode during the variation of the effect pattern, and the mode of the effect pattern in the first mode is stopped (FIG. 90(D)(F) ), Figure 91(D)). According to this configuration, since the aspect of the performance pattern changes to the first aspect when the first condition is met, it becomes an unprecedented and novel performance, which can visually entertain the player and improve interest. be able to. The performance control microcomputer 91 corresponds to "performance execution means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the second condition is satisfied, the mode of the effect pattern is changed to the second mode different from the first mode during the variation of the effect pattern, and the mode of the effect pattern in the second mode is stopped (Fig. 90 (H), Figure 91 (F) (H)). According to this configuration, since the aspect of the performance pattern changes to the second aspect when the second condition is satisfied, it becomes an unprecedented and novel performance, which can visually entertain the player and improve interest. be able to.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the third condition is satisfied, the mode of the effect pattern is changed to the third mode different from the first mode and the second mode during the variation of the effect pattern, and the mode of the effect pattern in the third mode is stopped. (Fig. 90 (J), Fig. 91 (J), Fig. 92 (J)). According to this configuration, since the aspect of the performance pattern changes to the third aspect when the third condition is satisfied, it becomes an unprecedented and novel performance, which can visually entertain the player and improve interest. be able to.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in a pseudo-continuous performance in which a pseudo-continuous change is produced during one change in the performance symbol, the mode of the performance symbol is changed to the second mode over the period of the pseudo-continuous performance. (Fig. 92(C) to (H)). According to this configuration, the period of the pseudo-continuous performance can be highlighted, resulting in an unprecedented and innovative performance, which can visually entertain the player and improve interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of games is displayed as the number of times information based on the number of fluctuations of the performance symbols, and in the pseudo continuous performance that produces pseudo continuous fluctuations during one change of the performance symbols, the number of games is displayed. 92 (C) to (H)). According to this configuration, the period of the pseudo-continuous performance can be highlighted, resulting in an unprecedented and innovative performance, which can visually entertain the player and improve interest. The performance control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the "number of times display means".

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when there is a jackpot, the fourth mode (normal mode) different from the first mode, second mode, and third mode is changed while the performance symbols are changing, and the fourth mode is The production symbols are stopped (FIG. 90(L), FIG. 91(L), FIG. 92(L)). According to this configuration, when there is a jackpot, the mode of the production pattern changes to the fourth mode, resulting in an unprecedented and innovative production, which can visually entertain the player and improve interest. can be achieved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the effect pattern mode change effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, in the performance pattern mode change performances A and B, the mode of the performance pattern is changed from normal mode → first mode → second mode → third mode → normal mode (fourth mode). In addition, in the production pattern mode change production C, the mode of the production pattern was changed from the normal mode to the second mode to the third mode to the normal mode (fourth mode). On the other hand, the mode of the performance symbols may be changed in any order. For example, the normal mode may be changed to the third mode, the first mode may be changed to the third mode, or the third mode may be changed to the second mode, the second mode may be changed to the first mode, or the first mode may be changed to the normal mode. You may let them.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the mode of the effect pattern is changed to the second mode over the period of the pseudo-continuous effect (FIGS. 92(C) to (H)). On the other hand, the mode of the performance symbols may be changed to the first mode or the third mode over the period of the pseudo-continuous performance.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the condition is whether the hold icon 9A corresponding to the hold that has become a jackpot has become one of "first hold,""secondhold,""thirdhold," and "fourth hold." As a result, the appearance of the production pattern was changed. The conditions for determining whether the status is ``1st reservation,'' ``2nd reservation,'' ``3rd reservation,'' or ``4th reservation,'' are the 1st, 2nd, or 3rd conditions. good. How to set the first to third conditions may be determined by, for example, scheduling using a dedicated table or the like in advance determination processing.

[Modification 4]
In the embodiment described above, the reservation that has become a jackpot is set as the target reservation (the reservation indicated by the symbol T), but the target reservation may be selected including the reservation that is a loss. In this case, the appearance of the effect symbols may be changed depending on the level of expectation for a jackpot. For example, the higher the expectation of a jackpot, the more likely it is to change to the third mode.

[Modification 5]
In the embodiment described above, the configuration is such that the effect patterns change to the normal mode (fourth mode), the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode. The change in the aspect of the effect pattern may be, for example, as long as at least one of the shape, size, orientation, display color, and transparency (density) of the effect pattern changes.

[Modification 6]
In the above embodiment, the normal mode is the fourth mode, but the fourth mode may be provided separately from the normal mode.

[Modification 7]
In the above embodiment, when the target reservation (the reservation indicated by the symbol T) is a jackpot, the mode of the production symbol is changed to the fourth mode in the variation corresponding to the reservation. On the other hand, if the target hold includes a loss (or a fake), the mode of the performance symbol may be changed to the fourth mode in at least one of the hit variation and the loss variation.

[Modification 8]
In the embodiment described above, the first to third conditions are set on the premise that there is a target hold (a hold indicated by the symbol T). On the other hand, the first to third conditions may be set in any way. For example, the first to third conditions may be satisfied when a specific number of games is reached. As an example, the first condition is satisfied when the number of games is a multiple of 2, the second condition is satisfied when the number of games is a multiple of 3, and the second condition is satisfied when the number of games is a multiple of 5. It is conceivable to adopt a configuration that satisfies the third condition. Furthermore, for example, the first to third conditions may be satisfied when the number of games is within a predetermined range. As an example, when the number of games is 0 to 99, the first condition is satisfied, when the number of games is 100 to 199, the second condition is satisfied, and when the number of games is 200 or more, the third condition is satisfied. It is conceivable to create a configuration that makes this possible.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect C1-1]
A gaming machine comprising a performance execution means for executing a fluctuating stop display that stops and displays fluctuating performance symbols in a plurality of rows,
The performance execution means changes the mode of the performance symbol to a first mode during the variation of the performance symbol when a first condition is satisfied, and executes the fluctuation stop display that stops the performance symbol in the first mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect C1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1,
The production execution means changes the mode of the production pattern to a second mode different from the first mode during the variation of the production pattern when a second condition is satisfied, and changes the mode of the production pattern to stop the production pattern in the second mode. Execute stop display,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect C1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-2,
The performance execution means changes the mode of the performance pattern to a third mode different from the first mode and the second mode during the variation of the performance pattern when a third condition is satisfied, and changes the mode of the performance pattern in the third mode. executing the fluctuation stop display to stop the
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect C1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-3,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to perform a pseudo-continuous performance that produces a pseudo-continuous variation during one variation of the production pattern,
In the pseudo-continuous presentation, the aspect of the presentation pattern is changed to any one of the first aspect, the second aspect, and the third aspect over the period of the pseudo-continuous presentation;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect C1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-3,
The production execution means is capable of executing a pseudo continuous production that produces a pseudo continuous variation during one variation of the production pattern,
comprising a number display means capable of displaying number information based on the number of fluctuations of the performance symbol in parallel with the fluctuation stop display by the performance execution means;
The number of times display means changes the display mode of the number of times information to a different mode from the normal time during the pseudo continuous performance,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect C1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-3 to C1-5,
In the case of a jackpot, the performance execution means changes to a fourth mode different from the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode during the variation of the performance symbol, and changes the performance symbol of the fourth mode. executing the fluctuation stop display to stop the
A gaming machine characterized by:

The game number display effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 93 to 95. This game number display performance is executed in conjunction with the fluctuating performance of the performance symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the game number display effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Game number display effect A]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the game number display effect A. In the game number display effect A, a first mode of game number display and a second mode of game number display different from the first mode are performed. 93(A) to (F) show a first example of the number of games display effect A, and FIGS. 93(G) to (L) show a second example of the number of games display effect A.

In the first example of the game number display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 93(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a first mode game number display GH1 of "151 times" is displayed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, four pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The four reservation icons 9A indicate the number of reservations for the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1).

The special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5) includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a where the first special figure reservation is stored and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b where the second special figure reservation is stored. Contains. The first special figure reservation storage area 85a stores a group of random numbers (reservation information) such as random numbers per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the first special figure reservation. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for storage. The second special figure reservation storage area 85b has a first memory area for storing random value groups (reservation information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the second special figure reservation. A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided.

The four pending icons 9A are the disturbances stored in the first storage area, second storage area, third storage area, and fourth storage area of the first special symbol storage area 85a in order from the rightmost storage icon 9A. Corresponds to a group of numerical values (pending information). The hold icons 9A corresponding to the first storage area, second storage area, third storage area, and fourth storage area are changed to "first hold,""secondhold,""thirdhold," and "fourth hold," respectively. Also called. These pending icons 9A shift to the right for each change. That is, the hold icon 9A of "1st hold" becomes the corresponding variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A of "2nd hold" becomes the hold icon 9A of "1st hold", and the hold icon 9A of "3rd hold" becomes The "second hold" hold icon 9A becomes the hold icon 9A, and the "fourth hold" hold icon 9A becomes the "third hold" hold icon 9A.
In particular, the explanation will be continued on the assumption that the lottery determination result (pre-reading result) for the second pending hold icon 9A indicated by the symbol T is a "jackpot".

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(B), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "2" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "5" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "6" symbol. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. Four pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, too, the first mode of game number display GH1 of "151 times" is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(C), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A indicated by symbol T is the first hold. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a first mode game number display GH1 of "152 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(D), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "9" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "3" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "4" symbol. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. Three pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a first mode game number display GH1 of "152 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(E), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two pending icons 9A and a variable icon 9C indicated by the symbol T are displayed. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a second game number display GH2 of "153 times" is displayed. The number of games display GH2 in the second mode is different from the number of games display GH1 in the first mode, and is displayed in bold letters.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(F), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are all fixed and stopped at the "7" symbol. This notifies you that you have won the jackpot. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a second game number display GH2 of "153 times" is displayed.

In the second example of the game number display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 93(G), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a first mode game number display GH1 of "151 times" is displayed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, four pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The four reservation icons 9A indicate the number of reservations for the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). The hold icon 9A is also referred to as "first hold", "second hold", "third hold", and "fourth hold" in order from the right end. These pending icons 9A shift to the right for each change. That is, the hold icon 9A of "1st hold" becomes the relevant variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A of "2nd hold" becomes the hold icon 9A of "1st hold", and the hold icon 9A of "3rd hold" becomes The "second hold" hold icon 9A becomes the hold icon 9A, and the "fourth hold" hold icon 9A becomes the "third hold" hold icon 9A.
In particular, the explanation will be continued on the assumption that the lottery determination result (pre-reading result) for the second pending hold icon 9A indicated by the symbol T is a "jackpot".

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(H), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "2" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "5" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "6" symbol. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. Four pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, too, the first mode of game number display GH1 of "151 times" is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(I), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "2" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "5" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "6" symbol. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. Four pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, too, the first mode of game number display GH1 of "151 times" is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(I), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A indicated by symbol T is the first hold. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a first mode game number display GH1 of "152 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(J), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "9" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "3" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "4" symbol. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. Three pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a first mode game number display GH1 of "152 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(K), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two pending icons 9A and a variable icon 9C indicated by the symbol T are displayed. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a first mode game number display GH1 of "153 times" is displayed. Further, in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, a second mode of game number display GH2 of "153 times" is displayed. The number of games display GH2 in the second mode is different from the number of games display GH1 in the first mode, and is displayed in bold letters.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(L), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are all fixed and stopped at the "7" symbol. This notifies you that you have won the jackpot. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a first mode game number display GH1 of "153 times" is displayed. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, a second mode of game number display GH2 of "153 times" is displayed.

[Game number display effect B]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the game number display effect B. In game number display effect B, a first mode of game number display and a second mode of game number display different from the first mode are performed. 94(A) to (F) show a first example of the number of games display effect B, and FIGS. 94(G) to (L) show a second example of the number of games display effect B.

In the first example of the game number display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 94(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a first mode game number display GH1 of "151 times" is displayed. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, a second mode of game number display GH2 "2 times" is displayed. The number of games display GH2 in the second mode is different from the number of games display GH1 in the first mode, and is displayed in bold letters.

At the bottom of the display screen 7a, four pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The four reservation icons 9A indicate the number of reservations for the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). The four pending icons 9A are also referred to as "first pending", "second pending", "third pending", and "fourth pending" in order from the right end. These pending icons 9A shift to the right for each change. That is, the hold icon 9A of "1st hold" becomes the corresponding variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A of "2nd hold" becomes the hold icon 9A of "1st hold", and the hold icon 9A of "3rd hold" becomes The "second hold" hold icon 9A becomes the hold icon 9A, and the "fourth hold" hold icon 9A becomes the "third hold" hold icon 9A.
In particular, the explanation will be continued on the assumption that the lottery determination result (pre-reading result) for the second pending hold icon 9A indicated by the symbol T is a "jackpot".

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(B), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "2" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "5" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "6" symbol. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. Four pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, too, the first mode of game number display GH1 of "151 times" is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, a second game number display GH2 of "2 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(C), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A indicated by symbol T is the first hold. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a first mode game number display GH1 of "152 times" is displayed. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, a second mode of game number display GH2 of "1 time" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(D), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "9" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "3" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "4" symbol. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. Three pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a first mode game number display GH1 of "152 times" is displayed. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, a second mode of game number display GH2 of "1 time" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(E), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two pending icons 9A and a variable icon 9C indicated by the symbol T are displayed. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a first mode game number display GH1 of "153 times" is displayed. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, a second mode of game number display GH2 of "0 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(F), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are all fixed and stopped at the "7" symbol. This notifies you that you have won the jackpot. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a first mode game number display GH1 of "153 times" is displayed. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, a second mode of game number display GH2 of "0 times" is displayed.

In the second example of the game number display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 94(G), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a first mode game number display GH1 of "151 times" is displayed. In the upper region R of the display screen 7a, a second game number display GH2 of "2 times" is displayed, moving in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. The game number display GH2 in the second mode is displayed in bold letters, unlike the game number display in the first mode.

At the bottom of the display screen 7a, four pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The four reservation icons 9A indicate the number of reservations for the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). The hold icons 9A are also referred to as "first hold,""secondhold,""thirdhold," and "fourth hold," in order from the right end. These pending icons 9A shift to the right for each change. That is, the hold icon 9A of "1st hold" becomes the corresponding variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A of "2nd hold" becomes the hold icon 9A of "1st hold", and the hold icon 9A of "3rd hold" becomes The "second hold" hold icon 9A becomes the hold icon 9A, and the "fourth hold" hold icon 9A becomes the "third hold" hold icon 9A.
In particular, the explanation will be continued on the assumption that the lottery determination result (pre-reading result) for the second pending hold icon 9A indicated by the symbol T is a "jackpot".

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(H), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "2" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "5" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "6" symbol. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. Four pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, too, the first mode of game number display GH1 of "151 times" is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. In the upper region R of the display screen 7a, a second game number display GH2 of "2 times" is displayed, moving in the direction indicated by the arrow Y.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(I), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A indicated by symbol T is the first hold. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a first mode game number display GH1 of "152 times" is displayed. In the area R at the top of the display screen 7a, a second game number display GH2 of "1 time" is displayed, moving in the direction indicated by the arrow Y.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(J), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "9" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "3" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "4" symbol. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. Three pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a first mode game number display GH1 of "152 times" is displayed. In the area R at the top of the display screen 7a, a second game number display GH2 of "1 time" is displayed, moving in the direction indicated by the arrow Y.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(K), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two pending icons 9A and a variable icon 9C indicated by the symbol T are displayed. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a first mode game number display GH1 of "153 times" is displayed. In the upper region R of the display screen 7a, a second game number display GH2 of "0 times" is displayed, moving in the direction indicated by the arrow Y.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(L), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are all fixed and stopped at the "7" symbol. This notifies you that you have won the jackpot. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a first mode game number display GH1 of "153 times" is displayed. In the upper region R of the display screen 7a, a second game number display GH2 of "0 times" is displayed, moving in the direction indicated by the arrow Y.

[Game number display effect C]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the game number display effect C. In the number of games display effect C, the number of games is displayed in a first mode, the number of games is displayed in a second mode different from the first mode, and the number of games is displayed in a third mode different from the first mode and the second mode. 95(A) to (F) show a first example of the number of games display effect C, and FIGS. 95(G) to (L) show a second example of the number of games display effect C.

In the first example of the game number display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 95(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a first mode game number display GH1 of "151 times" is displayed. In the upper region R of the display screen 7a, a second game number display GH2 of "2 times" is displayed, moving in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. The game number display GH2 in the second mode is displayed in bold letters, unlike the game number display in the first mode. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, a third mode of game number display GH3 "2 times" is displayed. The number of games display GH3 in the third mode is different from the number of games display GH1 in the first mode and the number of games display GH2 in the second mode, and is displayed in outline characters.

At the bottom of the display screen 7a, four pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The four reservation icons 9A indicate the number of reservations for the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). The four pending icons 9A are also referred to as "first pending", "second pending", "third pending", and "fourth pending" in order from the right end. These pending icons 9A shift to the right for each change. That is, the hold icon 9A of "1st hold" becomes the corresponding variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A of "2nd hold" becomes the hold icon 9A of "1st hold", and the hold icon 9A of "3rd hold" becomes The "second hold" hold icon 9A becomes the hold icon 9A, and the "fourth hold" hold icon 9A becomes the "third hold" hold icon 9A.
In particular, the explanation will be continued on the assumption that the lottery determination result (pre-reading result) for the second pending hold icon 9A indicated by the symbol T is a "jackpot".

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(B), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "2" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "5" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "6" symbol. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. Four pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, too, the first mode of game number display GH1 of "151 times" is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. In the upper region R of the display screen 7a, a second game number display GH2 of "2 times" is displayed, moving in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, a third mode of game number display GH3 "2 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(C), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A indicated by symbol T is the first hold. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a first mode game number display GH1 of "152 times" is displayed. In the area R at the top of the display screen 7a, a second game number display GH2 of "1 time" is displayed, moving in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, a third mode of game number display GH3 of "1 time" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(D), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "9" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "3" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "4" symbol. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. Three pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a first mode game number display GH1 of "152 times" is displayed. In the area R at the top of the display screen 7a, a second game number display GH2 of "1 time" is displayed, moving in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, a third mode of game number display GH3 of "1 time" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(E), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two pending icons 9A and a variable icon 9C indicated by the symbol T are displayed. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a first mode game number display GH1 of "153 times" is displayed. In the upper region R of the display screen 7a, a second game number display GH2 of "0 times" is displayed, moving in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, a third mode of game number display GH3 of "0 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(F), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are all fixed and stopped at the "7" symbol. This notifies you that you have won the jackpot. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a first mode game number display GH of "153 times" is displayed. In the upper region R of the display screen 7a, a second game number display GH2 of "0 times" is displayed, moving in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, a third mode of game number display GH3 of "0 times" is displayed.

In the second example of the game number display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 95(G), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a first mode game number display GH1 of "151 times" is displayed. In the upper region R of the display screen 7a, a second game number display GH2 of "2 times" is displayed, moving in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. The game number display GH2 in the second mode is displayed in bold letters, unlike the game number display in the first mode. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, a third mode of game number display GH3 "2 times" is displayed. The number of games display GH3 in the third mode is different from the number of games display GH1 in the first mode and the number of games display GH2 in the second mode, and is displayed in outline characters.

At the bottom of the display screen 7a, four pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The four reservation icons 9A indicate the number of reservations for the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). The hold icons 9A are also referred to as "first hold,""secondhold,""thirdhold," and "fourth hold," in order from the right end. These pending icons 9A shift to the right for each change. That is, the hold icon 9A of "1st hold" becomes the corresponding variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A of "2nd hold" becomes the hold icon 9A of "1st hold", and the hold icon 9A of "3rd hold" becomes The "second hold" hold icon 9A becomes the hold icon 9A, and the "fourth hold" hold icon 9A becomes the "third hold" hold icon 9A.
In particular, the explanation will be continued on the assumption that the lottery determination result (pre-reading result) for the second pending hold icon 9A indicated by the symbol T is a "jackpot".

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(H), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "2" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "5" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "6" symbol. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. Four pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, too, the first mode of game number display GH1 of "151 times" is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, a third mode of game number display GH3 "2 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(I), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A indicated by symbol T is the first hold. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a first mode game number display GH1 of "152 times" is displayed. In the area R at the top of the display screen 7a, a second game number display GH2 of "1 time" is displayed, moving in the direction indicated by the arrow Y.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(J), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "9" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "3" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "4" symbol. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. Three pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a first mode game number display GH1 of "152 times" is displayed. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, a third mode of game number display GH3 of "1 time" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(K), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two pending icons 9A and a variable icon 9C indicated by the symbol T are displayed. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a first mode game number display GH1 of "153 times" is displayed. In the upper region R of the display screen 7a, a second game number display GH2 of "0 times" is displayed, moving in the direction indicated by the arrow Y.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(L), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are all fixed and stopped at the "7" symbol. This notifies you that you have won the jackpot. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. At the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a first mode game number display GH1 of "153 times" is displayed. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, a third mode of game number display GH3 of "0 times" is displayed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the game number display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, it is possible to display the number of games GH1 of the first mode and the number of games display GH2 of the second mode different from the first mode. According to this configuration, the display of the number of games related to the number of games becomes an unprecedented and novel effect, which can visually entertain the players and improve their interest. Note that the performance control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the "number of times display means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the game number display GH1 in the first aspect displays the number of games related to the number of games in the first area, and does not move the display of the number of games related to the number of games within the first area. The game number display GH2, which is the first display and has the second aspect, displays the number of times related to the number of games in the second area, and moves the display of the number of times related to the number of games within the second area. (Figures 94 (G) to (L), Figure 95). According to this configuration, the display of the number of games related to the number of games becomes an unprecedented and novel effect, which can visually entertain the players and improve their interest.
In addition, in FIGS. 94(G) to (L) and FIG. 95, the lower right area of the display screen 7a where the game number display GH1 is displayed corresponds to the "first area", and the display screen where the game number display GH2 is performed. The upper region R of 7a corresponds to the "second region". The number of games display GH1 in FIGS. 94(G) to (L) and FIG. 95 corresponds to the "first display", and the number of games display GH2 corresponds to the "second display".

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of games display GH1 in the first aspect displays the number of times related to the number of games in the first area, and displays an increase to increase the number of times in the display of the number of times related to the number of games. The game number display GH2 of the second aspect displays the number of times related to the number of games in the second area, and is a decreasing display that decreases the number of times related to the number of games displayed (Fig. 94, Figure 95). According to this configuration, the display of the number of games related to the number of games becomes an unprecedented and novel effect, which can visually entertain the players and improve their interest.
In FIGS. 94 and 95, the lower right area of the display screen 7a where the game number display GH1 is displayed corresponds to the "first area", and in FIGS. 94(A) to (F), the game number display GH2 is The upper left area of the display screen 7a where the game number is displayed and the area R at the top of the display screen 7a where the game number display GH2 is displayed in FIGS. 94(G) to (L) and FIG. 95 correspond to the "second area". The game number display GH1 in FIGS. 94 and 95 corresponds to an "increase display", and the game number display GH2 corresponds to a "decrease display".

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to execute the game number display GH3 of the third mode, which is a mode different from the first mode and the second mode, and the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode. At least two of the game number displays GH1, GH2, and GH3 can be executed in parallel (FIG. 95). According to this configuration, the display of the number of games related to the number of games becomes an unprecedented and novel effect, which can visually entertain the players and improve their interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, the number of games display GH3 in the third aspect displays the number of times related to the number of games in the third area, and displays a decrease to decrease the number of times in the display of the number of times related to the number of games. (Figure 95). According to this configuration, the display of the number of games related to the number of games becomes an unprecedented and novel effect, which can visually entertain the players and improve their interest.
In addition, in FIG. 95, the upper left area of the display screen 7a where the game number display GH3 is performed corresponds to the "third area". The game number display GH3 in FIG. 95 corresponds to a "decrease display".

[Modified example]
A modified example of the game number display effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the embodiment described above, the area where the game number displays GH1, GH2, and GH3 are performed is provided at the periphery of the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the area where the number of games is displayed may be provided anywhere on the display screen 7a.
For example, an area where the number of games is displayed may be provided overlapping at least a portion of the area where the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner. In this case, it is conceivable to adopt a configuration in which the number of games is displayed when the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed. Further, for example, as shown in FIGS. 93(A) to 93(F), areas may be provided such that the areas where the game number displays GH1, GH2, and GH3 are performed overlap with each other.

[Modification 2]
In the game number display effect A (FIG. 93) in the above-described embodiment, the second mode of game number display GH2 is performed in the fluctuation that results in a jackpot. Furthermore, in the game number display performances B and C (FIGS. 94 and 95), the number of games remaining until the jackpot is reached is shown in the game number displays GH2 and GH3 in the second and third modes. The display of the number of games may be a display of the number of times related to the number of games, and is not limited to these. For example, the manner in which the number of games is displayed may be changed during a period such as a zone performance that is performed over a plurality of variations.

[Modification 3]
In the embodiment described above, the reservation that has become a jackpot is set as the target reservation (the reservation indicated by the symbol T), but the target reservation may be selected including the reservation that is a loss. In this case, the manner in which the number of games is displayed may be changed depending on the degree of expectation for a jackpot.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, when performing the game number display GH1, GH2, and GH3 in the first, second, and third aspects, the game number display GH2 in the second aspect is displayed in bold letters, and the game number display GH2 in the third aspect is displayed in bold. The game number display GH3 had a white text display. The mode of displaying the number of games may be such that, for example, at least one of the shape, size, orientation, display color, and transparency (density) of the characters is different.

[Modification 5]
In the embodiment described above, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is provided with the first to third areas in which the game number displays GH1, GH2, and GH3 are displayed. On the other hand, at least one of the first to third areas may be provided on the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect C2-1]
A gaming machine comprising a number display means capable of displaying a number of times that is related to the number of games that indicates the number of changes in a special symbol,
The number display means is capable of displaying the number of times in a first mode and displaying the number of times in a second mode different from the first mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect C2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1,
The number of times display of the first aspect is a first display in which a number of times related to the number of games is displayed in a first area, and the display of the number of times related to the number of games is not moved within the first area,
The number of times display of the second aspect is a second display in which a number of times related to the number of games is displayed in a second area, and the display of the number of times related to the number of games is moved within the second area.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect C2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1,
The display of the number of times in the first aspect is an increasing display that displays a number of times related to the number of games in a first area and increases the number of times in the display of the number of times related to the number of games;
The display of the number of times in the second aspect is a decreasing display in which a number of times related to the number of games is displayed in a second area, and the number of times related to the number of games is decreased in the display of the number of times related to the number of games.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect C2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-3,
The number display means is capable of displaying the number of times in a third mode that is different from the first mode and the second mode, and the number display means can display the number of times in a third mode that is different from the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode. at least two of the number of display times can be executed in parallel;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect C2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-4,
The display of the number of times in the third aspect is a decreasing display in which the number of times related to the number of games is displayed in a third area, and the number of times in the display of the number of times related to the number of games is decreased.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The enlarged symbol display effects A and B and the reduced symbol display effects will be explained below using FIGS. 96 to 98. These enlarged symbol display performances A, B, and reduced symbol display performances are executed during the variable performance. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the enlarged symbol display performance A, B or the reduced symbol display performance, the corresponding image is stored from the ROM 103. The data is read and an image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Enlarged pattern display effect A]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the enlarged symbol display performance A. The enlarged symbol display performance A is a performance in which, during a variable performance, instead of a certain decorative pattern, an enlarged symbol whose aspect ratio has been changed is displayed in a variable manner and stopped. Note that the change in the aspect ratio here refers to a change in the aspect ratio in the reading direction of the numbers representing the contents of the decorative pattern. Furthermore, the display of images in this performance is executed by the display screen 7a.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and at the time of deceleration fluctuation, two or more patterns become visible on the display screen 7a at the same time. They are displayed moving vertically. Furthermore, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed in such a way that they are difficult to visually recognize. In addition, when the display is stopped, there are cases where the display screen 7a stops so that two symbols can be seen at the same time, and cases where it is displayed so that one symbol can be seen at the same time. If the result is a win, the game stops so that any one of the three sets of symbols lined up in a straight line (not necessarily horizontal) becomes a win. Note that the three symbols arranged in a straight line include those arranged almost in a straight line. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

First, as shown in FIG. 96(A), a fluctuating effect is started, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, making it difficult to see the contents of each. Although the hold icons 9A and 9B and the fluctuation icon 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed. The explanation will continue assuming that the result of the special drawing lottery that triggered this variable performance was a win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(B), only the left decorative pattern 8L is decelerated and fluctuated, and the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are in a state of high speed fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(C), the enlarged symbol 8Lb enters the frame in the left decorative symbol 8L that is being displayed at a reduced speed. Here, instead of the decorative pattern 8L representing "6", an enlarged pattern 8Lb is displayed in a deceleration variation manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(D), in the left decorative pattern 8L, the enlarged pattern 8Lb representing "6", which was framed in FIG. 111(C), is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(E), the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in a deceleration variation manner, and its contents become visible. At this time, all of the right decorative symbols 8R displayed in deceleration variation are replaced and displayed with the enlarged symbols 8Rb. Here, a decorative pattern 8R representing "2" and a decorative pattern 8R representing "3" are displayed in a deceleration variation manner while being replaced by an enlarged pattern 8Rb representing the respective contents. That is, after the enlarged symbol 8Lb stops on the left decorative symbol 8L, a plurality of enlarged symbols 8Rb are displayed in a variable manner on the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(F), the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed. Here, the enlarged symbols 8Rb representing "5" and "6" are stopped. Therefore, at this point, two patterns of arrangement are formed: "6↓5" and "6↓6".

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(G), the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a deceleration variation manner. Furthermore, among the two patterns of decorative pattern arrangement formed in FIG. 96(F), a background image representing a chance zone is displayed in a straight line forming a "6↓6" arrangement, and a background image representing a chance zone is displayed. A message image CM "CHANCE ZONE" indicating that the displayed position is a chance zone is displayed. This chance zone CZ is displayed only when a reach is formed, and if a decorative pattern with the same content as the decorative pattern forming the reach stops within a range where the background image is different, a win occurs. This is intended to suggest that. Therefore, since the chance zone CZ shown in FIG. 96(G) is due to the reach formed by the enlarged symbols 8Lb and 8Rb, it is wider than the width in the fluctuating direction of the chance zone when reaching by the decorative symbols 8L and 8R in the normal mode. Also, it is assumed that the width of the chance zone in the fluctuation direction at the time of reaching with the enlarged symbols 8Lb and 8Rb is wider.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(H), the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed. Here, the medium decorative patterns 8C representing "5" and "6" are stopped and displayed so as to be visible. In addition, the medium decorative pattern 8C representing "6" is stopped and displayed within the chance zone CZ, suggesting that the fluctuation is a win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(I), among the decorative symbols that were stopped and displayed in FIG. 96(H), only the decorative symbols 8Lb, 8C, and 8Rb forming the sequence "666" are displayed, and the The decorative pattern becomes difficult to see. Furthermore, the opportunity zone CZ and message image CM are also hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(J), among the decorative patterns 8Lb, 8C, and 8Rb that were stopped and displayed in FIG. 96(I), the aspect ratio of the medium decorative pattern 8C, which was not an enlarged pattern, gradually changes. Then, the enlarged pattern becomes 8Cb. That is, after the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a stopped state after being fluctuated, the aspect ratio of the medium decorative pattern 8C that was stopped and displayed is changed and changed to the enlarged pattern 8Cb. After this, a fixed stop is executed and a jackpot game is executed.

The above are the display examples and the flow of execution of the enlarged symbol display effect A. In enlarged symbol display effect A, when a reach is formed with enlarged symbols 8Lb and 8Rb, a chance zone with a wider width in the fluctuation direction is displayed than the chance zone when reach is achieved with decorative symbols 8R and 8L in the normal mode. , the player is more likely to have a sense of expectation for winning than when reaching with the decorative symbols 8L and 8R in the normal mode. Therefore, by executing the enlarged symbol display effect A, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Enlarged pattern display effect B]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the enlarged symbol display performance B. It is assumed that all decorative patterns are composed of a numerical image representing the content of the pattern and a decorative image forming a decorative part. Enlarged symbol display performance B is a performance in which, during a variable performance, instead of a certain decorative pattern, an enlarged symbol whose aspect ratio has been changed by expanding the decorative image of the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner and in a stopped state. . In addition, in the enlarged pattern, the size of the number image mentioned above is not changed and the decorative image is expanded, so the size in the direction of variation of the enlarged pattern is the same as the size of the decorative pattern in the normal mode and the size of the decorative pattern between each other. The size of the interval shall be greater than the sum of . Further, the change in the aspect ratio here refers to a change in the aspect ratio in the reading direction of the numbers representing the contents of the decorative pattern. Furthermore, the display of images in this performance is executed by the display screen 7a.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and at the time of deceleration fluctuation, two or more patterns become visible on the display screen 7a at the same time. They are displayed moving vertically. Furthermore, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed in such a way that they are difficult to visually recognize. In addition, when the display is stopped, there are cases where the display screen 7a stops so that two symbols can be seen at the same time, and cases where it is displayed so that one symbol can be seen at the same time. If the result is a win, the game stops so that any one of the three sets of symbols lined up in a straight line (not necessarily horizontal) becomes a win. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

First, as shown in FIG. 97(A), a fluctuating effect is started, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, making it difficult to see the contents of each. Although the hold icons 9A and 9B and the fluctuation icon 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed. The explanation will continue assuming that the result of the special drawing lottery that triggered this variable performance was a win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(B), only the left decorative pattern 8L is decelerated and fluctuated, and the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are in a state of high speed fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(C), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed. Here, left decorative patterns 8L representing "5" and "6" are stopped and displayed so as to be visible. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in high-speed fluctuations as in FIG. 97(B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(D), the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in a deceleration variation manner. Therefore, the left decorative pattern 8L is in a state in which "5" and "6" are displayed in a stopped state, the right decorative pattern 8R is in a deceleration fluctuation display, and the middle decorative design 8C is in a high speed fluctuation display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(E), the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed. Here, right decorative patterns 8R representing "6" and "7" are displayed in a stopped state. In this case, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R can be arranged in four patterns: "6↓7", "6↓6", "5↓7", and "5↓6". The arrangement of "6↓6", that is, the left decorative pattern 8L representing "6" that is stopped and displayed at the top left of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R representing "6" that is stopped and displayed at the bottom right This means that the reach is formed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(F), the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a deceleration variation manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(G), in the medium decorative pattern 8C in which the deceleration variation is displayed, an enlarged pattern 8Cb also representing "6" is placed in the frame instead of the medium decorative pattern 8C representing "6". do.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(H), an enlarged pattern 8Cb representing "6" is stopped and displayed in the medium decorative pattern 8C. That is, in FIG. 97(G), after the enlarged symbol 8Cb is displayed in a variable manner, the enlarged symbol 8Cb is stopped and displayed so as to be visible. Therefore, the left decorative pattern 8L representing "6" is stopped and displayed at the top left of the display screen 7a, the enlarged pattern 8Cb representing "6" is stopped and displayed at the center, and the left decorative pattern 8Cb is stopped and displayed at the bottom right. The right decorative pattern 8R representing "6" and the winning pattern of the decorative pattern "666" are formed, suggesting that the fluctuation is a win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(I), in FIG. 97(H), the left decorative pattern 8L representing "6" is stopped and displayed at the top left of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the bottom right of the display screen 7a. The right decorative pattern 8R representing "6" gradually changes to enlarged "6" patterns 8Lb and 8Rb, respectively. That is, after the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed, the aspect ratios of the respective decorative patterns change. It is assumed that when the left decorative pattern 8L that has been stopped and displayed gradually changes to the enlarged pattern 8Lb, the decorative image of the left decorative pattern 8L is expanded in the direction of variation, and the position of the number image is also moved in the direction of variation. Furthermore, when the right decorative pattern 8R that had been stopped and displayed gradually changes to the enlarged pattern 8Rb, the decorative image of the right decorative pattern 8R is expanded vertically upward, and the position of the number image is also moved vertically upward. do. In addition, along with this, the left decorative pattern 8L representing "5" and the right decorative pattern 8R representing "7", which had been stopped and displayed respectively, have been changed to enlarged patterns 8Lb and 8Rb of the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R, respectively. It gradually becomes difficult to see due to the change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(J), the enlarged symbols 8Lb, 8Cb, and 8Rb representing "6" gradually change to decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the normal mode, and then are fixed and stopped. That is, after the enlarged symbols 8Lb, 8Cb, and 8Rb have been stopped and displayed, the aspect ratios of the enlarged symbols 8Lb, 8Cb, and 8Rb have returned to those before the change. As a result, it is determined that the fluctuation is a win, and thereafter, a jackpot game is executed.

The above are the display examples and the flow of execution of the enlarged symbol display performance B. In the enlarged symbol display performance B, after forming a reach with the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R, an enlarged symbol 8Cb having the same content as the decorative symbol forming the reach is displayed in a deceleration variation in the middle decorative symbol 8C. In this case, it takes longer for the enlarged symbol 8Cb to pass through the straight line forming the reach, so there is a possibility that the player will have higher expectations for winning than when the medium decorative symbol 8C in the normal mode passes. becomes higher. Therefore, by executing the enlarged symbol display effect B, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Reduced pattern display effect]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the reduced symbol display effect. The reduced symbol display performance is a performance in which, during a variable performance, instead of a certain decorative pattern, a reduced pattern whose aspect ratio of the size of the decorative pattern has been changed is displayed in a variable manner and stopped. Note that the change in the aspect ratio here refers to a change in the aspect ratio in the reading direction of the numbers representing the contents of the decorative pattern. Furthermore, the display of images in this performance is executed by the display screen 7a.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and at the time of deceleration fluctuation, two or more patterns become visible on the display screen 7a at the same time. They are displayed moving vertically. Furthermore, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed in such a way that they are difficult to visually recognize. In addition, when the display is stopped, there are cases where the display screen 7a stops so that two symbols can be seen at the same time, and cases where it is displayed so that one symbol can be seen at the same time. If the result is a win, the game stops so that any one of the three sets of symbols lined up in a straight line (not necessarily horizontal) becomes a win. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

First, as shown in FIG. 98(A), a fluctuating effect is started, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R each fluctuate at high speed, making it difficult to visually recognize the contents of each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Although the hold icons 9A and 9B and the fluctuation icon 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed. The explanation will continue assuming that the result of the special drawing lottery that triggered this variable performance was a win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(B), only the left decorative pattern 8L is decelerated and fluctuated, and the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are in a state of high speed fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(C), in the left decorative pattern 8L in which the deceleration variation is displayed, a plurality of reduced symbols 8Ls also representing "6" replace the left decorative pattern 8L representing "6". Frame in.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(D), the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in a decelerating and variable manner so as to be filled with a countless number of reduced symbols 8Ls representing "6", and then is displayed in a stopped state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(E), the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in a deceleration variation manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(F), in the right decorative pattern 8R, after a plurality of reduced symbols 8Rs also representing "6" are framed in place of the right decorative pattern 8R representing "6", The reduced symbol 8Rs representing a countless number of "6"s is stopped and displayed. This suggests that a reach is formed such that no matter where the medium decorative pattern 8C representing "6" stops in the medium decorative pattern 8C, a sequence of "666" is formed in a winning manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(G), in order to notify that no matter where the medium decorative pattern 8C representing "6" stops at any position in the medium decorative pattern 8C, it will result in a winning pattern of "666". A message image SM saying "Big chance!!! Stop 6!!!" is displayed. While this message image SM is displayed, all decorative patterns and reduced patterns are difficult to see, but may be made visible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(H), the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a deceleration variation manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(I), the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed. Here, medium decorative patterns 8C representing "6" and "7" are stopped and displayed. Therefore, at least one of the countless reduced symbols 8Ls representing "6" that are stopped and displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a medium decorative design 8C representing "6" that is stopped and displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a. At least one of the countless reduced symbols 8Rs representing "6" that are stopped and displayed on the right side forms a winning sequence of "666", suggesting that the fluctuation is a win. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(J), in FIG. 98(H), a reduced symbol 8Ls representing countless "6"s is stopped and displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a reduced symbol 8Ls is stopped and displayed on the right side. The reduced symbol 8Rs representing a countless number of "6"s changes into the decorative symbols 8L and 8R representing "6" in a normal manner, and then stops. As a result, it is determined that the fluctuation is a win, and a jackpot game is then executed.

The above are display examples and the flow of execution of the reduced symbol display performance. In the reduced pattern display performance, countless reduced patterns with the same content are displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, so that the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R display the same content as the one forming the reach of the medium decorative pattern 8C. Since the medium decorative pattern can be recognized as a win no matter where it stops, the player can have a higher expectation of winning than when a reach is formed by the normal decorative patterns 8L and 8R. becomes more sexual. Therefore, by executing the reduced symbol display performance, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect example]
Examples of effects of this embodiment are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, according to FIGS. 96 to 98, a first performance in which a symbol row in which decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are arranged in a varying direction is displayed in a variable manner, and after the first performance, In the symbol row, the enlarged symbols 8Lb, 8Rb, 8Cb, or the reduced symbols 8Ls, 8Rs, which are symbols with the aspect ratio of the decorative symbols changed, are displayed. After the second production, the enlarged symbols are displayed. It is possible to execute a third effect in which 8Lb, 8Rb, 8Cb, or reduced symbols 8Ls and 8Rs are stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

Note that the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponds to "display means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111, in the first performance, a plurality of symbol rows of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, and in the second performance, for example, "6" The enlarged symbol 8Lb is displayed, and in the third performance, after the "6" enlarged symbol 8Lb is stopped and displayed, all of the decorative symbols displayed in deceleration fluctuation in the right decorative symbol 8R are replaced with the enlarged symbol 8Rb. The configuration was such that it was displayed in a fluctuating manner. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

Note that the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponds to "display means".

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, after the third performance, the aspect ratio of the enlarged symbols 8Lb, 8Rb, 8Cb or the reduced symbols 8Ls, 8Rs that are stopped and displayed is before the change. The configuration was such that it was possible to execute the fourth effect that returns to . According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112, the decorative pattern includes a number image and a decorative image, and the number images included in the enlarged patterns 8Lb, 8Rb, and 8Cb are usually It is configured to have the same size as the numerical image of the decorative pattern of the aspect. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112, the length of the enlarged symbol 8Cb in the fluctuation direction is equal to the length of the decorative symbol in the normal mode and the interval between the decorative symbols included in the symbol row. The composition is larger than the sum. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 111 and 112, a first effect is performed in which a symbol row in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are arranged in a variable direction is displayed in a variable manner, and after the first effect, A second effect in which the medium decorative pattern 8C, or the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed, and after the second effect, the vertical and horizontal directions of the medium decorative pattern 8C, or the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R, which are stopped and displayed. The configuration is such that it is possible to perform a third performance in which the enlarged symbol 8Cb or the enlarged symbols 8Lb and 8Rb are compared. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
A modification of this embodiment is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the enlarged pattern display performance B, the number image of the decorative pattern was displayed in the center of the decorative pattern. On the other hand, the position of the numeric image within the decorative pattern may be changed arbitrarily.

[Modification 2]
In the enlarged symbol display performances A and B, for example, when the enlarged symbol 8Cb representing "6" enters the frame, the enlarged symbol 8Cb representing "6" is always stopped and displayed. On the other hand, it may be configured to perform an effect in which the enlarged symbol goes out of frame.

[Modification 3]
In enlarged symbol display performances A, B, and reduced symbol display performances, the orientation of the enlarged symbol whose aspect ratio has been changed and the number image representing the content in the reduced symbol will be the same as before the aspect ratio was changed. It was configured. On the other hand, the aspect ratio of the size of the decorative pattern may be changed by changing the orientation of the numerical image representing the content of the decorative pattern or the orientation of the decorative pattern itself.

[Modification 4]
In enlarged symbol display performance B, as shown in FIGS. 97(H) and (I), when a decorative image among the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed is expanded and changed to an enlarged symbol, the position of the number image is also changed. It was configured to be On the other hand, the position of the numeric image may be configured not to be changed.

[Modification 5]
In enlarged symbol display performances A, B, and reduced symbol display performances, after the enlarged symbol 8Lb or the reduced symbol 8Ls is stopped and displayed in one symbol row (here, the left decorative symbol 8L), the other symbol row ( Here, the right decorative pattern 8R) is configured such that the enlarged pattern 8Rb or the reduced pattern 8Rs is placed in the frame and displayed in a variable manner. On the other hand, resized symbols whose aspect ratios have been changed may be displayed variably in a plurality of symbol rows at the same time.

[Modification 6]
In the numerical image display effects A to C, the effects described may be combined as appropriate.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect C3-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
a first performance in which a pattern row in which a plurality of decorative patterns are arranged in a variable direction is displayed in a variable manner;
After the first performance, a second performance in which a resized pattern in which the aspect ratio of the decorative pattern is changed is displayed in the pattern row;
After the second performance, a third performance in which the resized symbol is stopped and displayed;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
In the first performance, a plurality of symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner,
In the second performance, the resized symbol is displayed in one symbol row of the plurality of symbol rows,
In the third performance, after the resized symbol is stopped and displayed, a plurality of the resized symbols are variably displayed in another symbol row different from the symbol row in which the resized symbol is stopped and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
After the third performance, it is possible to execute a fourth performance in which the aspect ratio of the resized symbol that is stopped and displayed returns to the original state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
The decorative pattern includes a number image and a decorative image,
The number image included in the resized pattern is the same size as the number image of the decorative pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
In the fluctuation direction, the length of the resized pattern is greater than the sum of the length of the decorative pattern and the interval between the decorative patterns included in the pattern row.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-6]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
a first production that variably displays a pattern row in which a plurality of decorative patterns are arranged in a variably direction;
After the first performance, a second performance in which decorative patterns included in the pattern row are stopped and displayed;
After the second performance, a third performance in which the aspect ratio of the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed is changed;
A gaming machine characterized by:

The pending image simultaneous change effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 99 to 101. This pending image simultaneous change effect is executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the simultaneous change effect of pending images, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub display screen 64.

[Holding image simultaneous change effect A]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the pending image simultaneous change effect A. The pending image simultaneous change effect is a presentation that suggests the expectation of winning by sequentially changing the colors of the plurality of pending icons in a state where the plurality of pending icons are displayed in a line.

In the pending image simultaneous change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 99(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, a pending icon 9A, and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. Ru.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R displayed above the display screen 7a. The variable display represents a variable display of special symbols (special symbol variation), and the stop display of a set of symbols notifies the special symbol lottery result. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In FIG. 99(A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each displayed in high-speed variation in response to the current special symbol variation (the variation).

In FIG. 99(A), two pending icons 9A are displayed according to the number of stored first special symbols, and a variable icon 9C is displayed on a rectangular image indicating the variable icon display position. Here, the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are white circular images. The hold icons 9A are displayed in a line horizontally at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending icon 9A indicates the degree of expectation of a jackpot depending on the color. Here, when the pending icon 9A changes to white, blue, red, or gold, the expectation of a jackpot at the time of special symbol change corresponding to the changed color of the pending icon 9A increases. Here, expectations increase in the order of white, blue, red, and gold. The expectation level of jackpot when it is white is 1%, the expectation level of jackpot when it is blue is 10%, the expectation level of jackpot when it is red is 30%, and the expectation level of jackpot when it is gold. is 50%. The hold icon 9A of this embodiment changes to black, green, and purple in addition to the above four colors. When the pending icon 9A changes to black, green, or purple, the expectation level of the jackpot in the special pattern change (the change) at the time when the color changes (currently), not at the time of the special pattern change corresponding to the changed pending icon 9A, changes to black, green, or purple. It gets expensive. When the color is black, the expected level of jackpot for the variation is 10%, when it is green, the expected level of jackpot for the variation is 30%, and when it is purple, the expected level of jackpot for the variation is 50%. . Here, the colors of the hold icon 9A are black, green, and purple, giving priority to blue, red, and gold. That is, during the special figure fluctuation, there are cases where the colors change from blue, red, and gold to black, green, and purple, but there is no reverse. In addition, at the end of the change, the colors may return from black, green, and purple to blue, red, and gold.

In this state, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20, a third hold icon 9A is newly displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 99(B). Here, all three pending icons 9A are white. Thereafter, a simultaneous pending image change effect may be executed at a specific timing after the start of the change. When this pending image simultaneous change effect is executed, the expectation level of a jackpot in the special figure change (the change) at the time of execution (current moment) increases.

When the pending image simultaneous change effect is executed, all the displayed (three) pending icons 9A change to black all at once (simultaneously), as shown in FIG. 99(C). This suggests that the expectation level of a jackpot in this fluctuation has increased to 10%. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99(D), a pending image disappearance effect is executed in which the three pending icons 9A disappear all at once.

Thereafter, when a game ball enters the first starting slot 20, four pending icons 9A are displayed on the display screen 7a at once, as shown in FIG. 99(E). At this time, all four pending icons 9A appear in black.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99(F), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in the losing mode of "326" (losing pattern). At the same time as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears due to the pending expiration. Thereafter, the hold icon 9A is shifted to the right.

When the hold icon 9A is shifted to the right, the rightmost hold icon 9A moves to the variable icon display position and becomes a variable icon (the hold icon) 9C, as shown in FIG. 99(G). Further, at the same time as the shift movement, a variable display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the next special symbol variation is displayed. Further, the color of all the pending icons 9A changes from black to white. Therefore, the white fluctuation icon 9C and the three pending icons 9A are displayed. Thereafter, a simultaneous pending image change effect may be executed at a specific timing after the start of the change. When this pending image simultaneous change effect is executed, the expectation level of a jackpot in the special figure change (the change) at the time of execution (current moment) increases.

When the pending image simultaneous change effect is executed, the three pending icons 9A change to black all at once (simultaneously) as shown in FIG. 99(H). This suggests that the expectation level of a jackpot in this fluctuation has increased to 10%. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99(I), a pending image disappearance effect is executed in which the three pending icons 9A disappear all at once.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99(J), three pending icons 9A are displayed all at once (simultaneously) in green on the display screen 7a. This suggests that the expectation level of a jackpot in this fluctuation has increased to 30%. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99(K), a pending image disappearance effect is executed in which the three pending icons 9A disappear all at once.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99(L), three pending icons 9A are displayed all at once (simultaneously) in a purple state on the display screen 7a. This suggests that the expectation level of a jackpot in this fluctuation has increased to 50%.

[Holding image simultaneous change effect B]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the pending image simultaneous change effect B. The pending image simultaneous change effect is a presentation that suggests the expectation of winning by sequentially changing the colors of the plurality of pending icons in a state where the plurality of pending icons are displayed in a line.

In the pending image simultaneous change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 100(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, a pending icon 9A, and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. Ru.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R displayed above the display screen 7a. The variable display represents a variable display of special symbols (special symbol variation), and the stop display of a set of symbols notifies the special symbol lottery result. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In FIG. 100(A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each displayed in high-speed variation in response to the current special symbol variation (the variation).

In FIG. 100(A), four pending icons 9A are displayed according to the number of stored first special symbols, and a variable icon 9C is displayed on a rectangular image indicating a variable icon display position. Here, the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are white circular images. The hold icons 9A are displayed in a line horizontally at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending icon 9A indicates the degree of expectation of a jackpot depending on the color. Here, when the pending icon 9A changes to white, blue, red, or gold, the expectation of a jackpot at the time of special symbol change corresponding to the changed color of the pending icon 9A increases. Here, expectations increase in the order of white, blue, red, and gold. The expectation level of jackpot when it is white is 1%, the expectation level of jackpot when it is blue is 10%, the expectation level of jackpot when it is red is 30%, and the expectation level of jackpot when it is gold. is 50%. The hold icon 9A of this embodiment changes to black, green, and purple in addition to the above four colors. When the pending icon 9A changes to black, green, or purple, the expectation level of the jackpot in the special pattern change (the change) at the time when the color changes (currently), not at the time of the special pattern change corresponding to the changed pending icon 9A, changes to black, green, or purple. It gets expensive. When the color is black, the expected level of jackpot for the variation is 10%, when it is green, the expected level of jackpot for the variation is 30%, and when it is purple, the expected level of jackpot for the variation is 50%. . Here, the colors of the hold icon 9A are black, green, and purple, giving priority to blue, red, and gold. That is, during the special figure fluctuation, there are cases where the colors change from blue, red, and gold to black, green, and purple, but there is no reverse. In addition, at the end of the change, the colors may return from black, green, and purple to blue, red, and gold.

A simultaneous change performance of pending images may be executed at a specific timing after the start of the change. When this pending image simultaneous change effect is executed, the expectation level of a jackpot in the special figure change (the change) at the time of execution (current moment) increases.

When the simultaneous pending image change effect is executed, the four pending icons 9A sequentially change to black from left to right, as shown in FIGS. 100(B) to (D). Specifically, among the four hold icons 9A, the leftmost hold icon 9A, the second hold icon 9A from the left, the third hold icon 9A from the left, and the rightmost hold icon 9A are white in order. The color changes from to black. When the color of each hold icon 9A changes, the color changes in order from the left end to the right end of the hold icon 9A, and the area of the black portion gradually increases. As a result, all (four) displayed hold icons 9A change to black, as shown in FIG. 100(D). This suggests that the expectation level of a jackpot in this fluctuation has increased to 10%.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 100(E), a pending image disappearance effect is executed in which the four pending icons 9A disappear all at once. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 100(F), a pending image number change effect in which the displayed number of pending icons 9A changes randomly is executed. That is, even though the number of stored first special symbols is "4", an effect is performed in which the number of displayed pending icons 9A is randomly changed to "1", "2", or "3". Thereby, it is possible to temporarily confuse the player and make him or her interested in the number of displayed pending icons 9A. Here, the number of displayed hold icons 9A is temporarily set to "1".

Thereafter, the display for changing the number of pending images ends, and the displayed number of pending icons 9A returns to the original "4" as shown in FIG. 100(G). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 100(H), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a loss mode of "326" (loss pattern). At the same time as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears due to the pending expiration. Thereafter, the hold icon 9A is shifted to the right.

When the hold icon 9A is shifted to the right, the rightmost hold icon 9A moves to the variable icon display position and becomes a variable icon (the hold icon) 9C, as shown in FIG. 100(I). Further, at the same time as the shift movement, a variable display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the next special symbol variation is displayed. Further, the color of all the pending icons 9A changes from black to white. Therefore, the white fluctuation icon 9C and the three pending icons 9A are displayed. Thereafter, a simultaneous pending image change effect may be executed at a specific timing after the start of the change. When this pending image simultaneous change effect is executed, the expectation level of a jackpot in the special figure change (the change) at the time of execution (current moment) increases.

When the simultaneous pending image change effect is executed, the three pending icons 9A sequentially change to black from the bottom to the top, as shown in FIGS. 100(J) to 100(K). Specifically, the color of each of the three hold icons 9A changes in order from the bottom end to the top end, and the area of the black portion gradually increases. As a result, all (three) displayed hold icons 9A change to black, as shown in FIG. 100(K). This suggests that the expectation level of a jackpot in this fluctuation has increased to 10%.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 100(L), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a loss mode of "567" (loss pattern). At the same time as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears due to the pending expiration. Thereafter, the hold icon 9A is shifted to the right.

When the hold icon 9A is shifted to the right, the rightmost hold icon 9A moves to the variable icon display position and becomes a variable icon (the hold icon) 9C. Further, at the same time as the shift movement, a variable display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the next special symbol variation is displayed. Further, the color of all the pending icons 9A changes from black to white. Therefore, a white fluctuation icon 9C and two pending icons 9A are displayed.

[Holding image simultaneous change effect C]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining the pending image simultaneous change effect C. The pending image simultaneous change effect is a presentation that suggests the expectation of winning by sequentially changing the colors of the plurality of pending icons in a state where the plurality of pending icons are displayed in a line.

In the pending image simultaneous change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 101(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, a pending icon 9A, and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. Ru.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R displayed above the display screen 7a. The variable display represents a variable display of special symbols (special symbol variation), and the stop display of a set of symbols notifies the special symbol lottery result. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In FIG. 101(A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each displayed in high-speed variation in response to the current special symbol variation (the variation).

In FIG. 101(A), two pending icons 9A are displayed according to the number of stored first special symbols, and a variable icon 9C is displayed on a rectangular image indicating a variable icon display position. Here, the fluctuation icon 9C is a white circular image. The hold icons 9A are white character images, and are displayed in a row horizontally at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The character content of the pending icon 9A changes depending on the number of displayed icons. Here, when the number of displayed pending icons 9A is "2", the two pending icons 9A are "i" and "nu", which becomes "dog", and when the number of displayed pending icons 9A is "3", 3 The three pending icons 9A are "mi", "ru", and "ku", which becomes "milk", and when the number of displayed pending icons 9A is "4", the four pending icons 9A are "ta" and "ko". “Ya” and “ku” form “Takoyaki”.

The pending icon 9A indicates the degree of expectation of a jackpot depending on the color. Here, when the pending icon 9A changes to white, blue, red, or gold, the expectation of a jackpot at the time of special symbol change corresponding to the changed color of the pending icon 9A increases. Here, expectations increase in the order of white, blue, red, and gold. The expectation level of jackpot when it is white is 1%, the expectation level of jackpot when it is blue is 10%, the expectation level of jackpot when it is red is 30%, and the expectation level of jackpot when it is gold. is 50%. The hold icon 9A of this embodiment changes to black, green, and purple in addition to the above four colors. When the pending icon 9A changes to black, green, or purple, the expectation level of the jackpot in the special pattern change (the change) at the time when the color changes (currently), not at the time of the special pattern change corresponding to the changed pending icon 9A, changes to black, green, or purple. It gets expensive. When the color is black, the expected level of jackpot for the variation is 10%, when it is green, the expected level of jackpot for the variation is 30%, and when it is purple, the expected level of jackpot for the variation is 50%. . Here, the colors of the hold icon 9A are black, green, and purple, giving priority to blue, red, and gold. That is, during the special figure fluctuation, there are cases where the colors change from blue, red, and gold to black, green, and purple, but there is no reverse. In addition, at the end of the change, the colors may return from black, green, and purple to blue, red, and gold.

As shown in FIG. 101(A), when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 in a state where the two pending icons 9A, ``I'' and ``NU'', are displayed, FIG. As shown in B), once the two pending icons 9A, "i" and "nu" disappear, as shown in FIG. 101(C), the three pending icons 9A, "" ``mi'', ``ru'', and ``ku'' are displayed all at once. In addition, there is a case where a simultaneous change effect of pending images is executed at a specific timing after the start of the change. When this pending image simultaneous change effect is executed, the expectation level of a jackpot in the special figure change (the change) at the time of execution (current moment) increases.

When the simultaneous pending image change effect is executed, the three pending icons 9A sequentially change to black from left to right, as shown in FIGS. 101(D) to (F). Specifically, among the three pending icons 9A, the colors are changed in the order of "mi" for the leftmost pending icon 9A, "ru" for the middle pending icon 9A, and "ku" for the rightmost pending icon 9A. changes from white to black. When the color of each hold icon 9A changes, the color changes in order from the left end to the right end of the hold icon 9A, and the area of the black portion gradually increases. As a result, all (three) displayed hold icons 9A change to black, as shown in FIG. 101(F). This suggests that the expectation level of a jackpot in this fluctuation has increased to 10%. Thereafter, a second pending image simultaneous change effect may be performed at a specific timing. When this second pending image simultaneous change effect is executed, the expectation level of a jackpot in the special figure change (the change) at the time of execution (currently) becomes even higher.

When the simultaneous pending image change effect is executed, the three pending icons 9A sequentially change to green from left to right, as shown in FIGS. 101(G) to (H). Specifically, among the three pending icons 9A, the colors are changed in the order of "mi" for the leftmost pending icon 9A, "ru" for the middle pending icon 9A, and "ku" for the rightmost pending icon 9A. changes from black to green. When the color of each hold icon 9A changes, the color changes in order from the left end to the right end of the hold icon 9A, and the area of the green portion gradually increases. As a result, all (three) displayed hold icons 9A change to green, as shown in FIG. 101(H). This suggests that the expectation level of a jackpot in this fluctuation has increased to 30%.

As shown in FIG. 101(H), when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 in a state where the three pending icons 9A, ``mi'', ``ru'', and ``ku'' are displayed, , as shown in FIG. 101(I), four pending icons 9A, "ta", "ko", "ya", and "ki", are displayed all at once on the display screen 7a. After the game ball enters the first starting slot 20, the display of "Milk" may disappear and "Takoyaki" is displayed, or the display of "Milk" may be switched to the display of "Takoyaki". Good too.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 101(J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a loss mode of "567" (loss pattern). At the same time as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears due to the pending expiration. Thereafter, the hold icon 9A is shifted to the right.

When the hold icon 9A is shifted to the right, the rightmost hold icon 9A, ``ki'', moves to the variable icon display position and becomes a variable icon (the hold icon) 9C. Specifically, when the hold icon 9A "ki" reaches the variable icon display position, it emits light as shown in FIG. 101(K), and then, as shown in FIG. 101(L), a white circular shape become. As shown in FIG. 101(K), the pending icons 9A other than "ki" on the rightmost side, such as "ta", "ko", and "ya", disappear at the same time as the shift moves, and then, It is redisplayed in white as shown in L). Therefore, the white circular fluctuation icon 9C and the white "Takoya" which are the three pending icons 9A are displayed. Simultaneously with the shift movement, a variable display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the next special symbol variation is displayed.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effects of the simultaneous change performance of pending images will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 99 to 101, during special symbol fluctuation, a plurality of pending icons 9A are displayed in a row on the display screen 7a, indicating the expectation of winning by color. After the first effect (for example, FIG. 99(B), FIG. 100(A), FIG. 101(C)) and the first effect, at least two or more of the plurality of pending icons 9A are displayed. A second effect (for example, Fig. 99(C), Figs. 100(B) to (D), Fig. 101(D)) in which the colors change in order to suggest at least the expectation of winning in the special symbol variation. ～(F)) can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 99 to 101, in the second effect, the colors of all the pending icons 9A displayed on the display screen 7a change in order (for example, in FIG. 99 (C), Figure 100 (D), Figure 101 (F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 100 and FIG. The color changes in order toward the hold icon 9A (for example, FIGS. 100(B) to (D), FIGS. 101(D) to (F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 and 101, in the second effect, when the color changes in each pending icon 9A, from the left end side of one of the pending icons 9A The color changes toward the right end (for example, FIGS. 100(B) to (D), FIGS. 101(D) to (F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 100, after the second performance, a smaller number of reservation icons 9A than the number of reservation icons 9A that were displayed at the time of the second performance is displayed on the display screen. The third effect displayed in 7a can be executed (for example, FIGS. 100(D) to 100(F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 99 to 101, in the third performance, after the display of the hold icon 9A that was displayed during the second performance disappears, the second performance is started. The number of pending icons 9A that is two or more smaller than the number of pending icons 9A that were displayed at the time is redisplayed on the display screen 7a (for example, FIGS. 100(D) to (F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the simultaneous change performance of pending images will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the pending image simultaneous change effect A, for example, as shown in FIGS. 99(B) and 99(C), the colors of the plurality of pending icons 9A have been described as changing all at once. However, even in the held image simultaneous change effect A, as shown in FIGS. may change.

[Modification 2]
In the pending image simultaneous change effects A to C, when the color of the pending icon 9A changes, the entire icon may vaguely switch to another color. Alternatively, a hold icon 9A of another color may appear and replace the hold icon 9A of the previous color. Further, in the pending image simultaneous change effects B and C, when the plurality of pending icons 9A change in order, the entire pending icons may be switched at once in each pending icon 9A. Further, in the pending image simultaneous change effects B and C, when the colors of the plurality of pending icons 9A change in order, the order of change is not limited to left to right or bottom to top. For example, it may be from right to left or from top to bottom.

[Modification 3]
In the pending image simultaneous change effects A to C, when the plurality of pending icons 9A change in order, the variable icon 9C may also change color. For example, the variation icon 9C in FIG. 99(C) or FIG. 100(D) may also be black. In the pending image simultaneous change effects A to C, only some of the pending icons 9A, not all of the plurality of pending icons 9A, may change color in order, and some pending icons 9A may not change color. The color of only a part of the hold icon 9A may be changed instead of the entire hold icon 9A.

[Modification 4]
In the held image simultaneous change effects A and C, as shown in FIG. 100(F) of the held image simultaneous change effect B, a held image number change effect may be performed in which the number of displayed hold icons 9A changes randomly. In other words, an effect may be performed in which the number of displayed holding icons 9A is randomly changed to ``1'', ``2'', or ``3'' even though the number of stored first special symbols is ``4''. . Thereby, it is possible to temporarily confuse the player and make him or her interested in the number of displayed pending icons 9A. For example, after FIG. 99(D), only one hold icon 9C may be displayed, and then four hold icons 9C may be displayed as shown in FIG. 99(E). For example, after FIG. 101(H), the display of the hold icon 9C disappears, then only "mi" is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 101(I), four hold icons 9C are displayed. Good too.

[Modification 5]
In the held image simultaneous change performances A to C, the held image simultaneous change performance suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot in the change. However, the expectation level of a jackpot in special symbol fluctuations other than the fluctuation may be suggested by the simultaneous change performance of the reserved images. For example, the expected level of jackpot in the next special symbol change after the pending image simultaneous change performance may be suggested. Furthermore, in the pending image simultaneous change performances A to C, the expectation level of a jackpot is suggested by the pending image simultaneous change performance. However, the types of small wins, normal symbol wins, winnings to the general prize opening 27, jackpots, etc. may be suggested by the simultaneous change performance of the reserved images. Furthermore, in the held image simultaneous change effects A to C, the color of the held icon 9A is changed by the held image simultaneous change effect. However, the simultaneous pending image change effect may be performed using images other than the pending icon 9A, which indicates the expectation level of a jackpot in the change in color.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect D1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image that expresses the expectation of winning by color,
A first effect in which a plurality of the specific images are displayed in a line on the display means during the special figure fluctuation;
After the first effect, the color of at least two or more specific images among the plurality of specific images changes in order, thereby suggesting at least the expectation of winning in the special symbol variation. , executable,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, in the second effect, the colors of all the specific images displayed on the display means change in order.
◇[Aspect D1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-2,
The second effect is characterized in that the color changes in order from the specific image at one end of the plurality of specific images arranged in a row toward the specific image at the other end. A gaming machine that does.
◇[Aspect D1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-3,
In the second effect, when the color changes in each specific image, the color changes from one end of the specific image to the other end.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D1-1 to D1-4,
After the second performance, it is possible to execute a third performance in which a smaller number of the specific images than the number of specific images that were being displayed at the time of the second performance are displayed on the display means. A gaming machine featuring:
◇[Aspect D1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-5,
In the third performance, after the display of the specific images that were displayed during the second performance disappears, the number of specific images that were displayed during the second performance is 2 or more. A gaming machine characterized in that a small number of the specific images are redisplayed on the display means.

The special symbol hold display performances A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 102 to 104. This special symbol pending display performance is executed in conjunction with the fluctuating performance of the performance symbols. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the special symbol hold display effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Special design hold display effect A]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol retention display performance A. In the special symbol reservation display performance A, the first reservation display in the first mode is performed for the reservation (first special symbol reservation) of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) among the reserved lottery drawings. , a second suspension display is performed in a second mode different from the first mode. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 102(A), a reservation icon 9A indicating the first special symbol reservation is displayed in the lower right area of the display screen 7a, and a reservation icon 9A is displayed in the upper left area of the display screen 7a. A holding lamp 9D indicating 1 special figure holding is displayed. Special symbol pending display performance A is an example of a normal game state (“low base state”). Here, the hold icon 9A is a triangular white icon. On the other hand, the hold lamp 9D is a circular icon that switches between a lit state and an unlit state. The hold lamp 9D indicates the number of holds by the number of lit icons. The fluctuation icon 9C is displayed in the lower center area of the display screen 7a. The fluctuation icon 9C is the same icon as the pending icon 9A. In the upper right area of the display screen 7a, a hold lamp 9E indicating the hold of the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) (second special figure hold) is displayed. The hold lamp 9E is an icon similar to the hold lamp 9D, and the number of held icons is indicated by the number of lit icons.

The special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5) includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a where the first special figure reservation is stored and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b where the second special figure reservation is stored. Contains. The first special figure reservation storage area 85a stores a group of random numbers (reservation information) such as random numbers per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the first special figure reservation. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for storage. The second special figure reservation storage area 85b has a first memory area for storing random value groups (reservation information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the second special figure reservation. A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided.

The hold icons 9A at the lower right of the display screen 7a are, in order from the left end hold icon 9A, the first storage area, the second storage area, the third storage area, and the fourth storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a. This corresponds to a group of random numbers (pending information) stored in .
Further, the holding lamps 9D at the upper left of the display screen 7a are arranged in order from the rightmost holding lamp 9D to the first storage area, the second storage area, the third storage area, and the fourth storage area of the first special figure holding storage area 85a. It corresponds to a group of random numbers (pending information) stored in the storage area. Below, the hold icons 9A, 9B and hold lamps 9D, 9E corresponding to the first storage area, second storage area, third storage area, and fourth storage area are referred to as "first hold", "second hold", " Also referred to as "third reservation" or "fourth reservation."

Regarding the special symbol hold display performance A, first, we will start from the confirmed stop state shown in FIG. 102(B). Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "2" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "5" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "6" symbol. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. Four pending icons 9A are displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, four hold lamps 9D are displayed at the upper left of the display screen 7a, and all four hold lamps 9D are in a lit state (indicated by hatching in the figure). From this, it can be seen that there are four first special symbols on hold. Four hold lamps 9E are displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and all four hold lamps 9E are in an extinguished state. This shows that there is no second special drawing reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(C), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. The hold icon 9A at the lower right of the display screen 7a is moved and displayed in accordance with the fluctuation start effect. Specifically, as shown by the arrow Y1, the first pending hold icon 9A moves to become the variable icon 9C, and as shown by the arrow Y2, the second held hold icon 9A becomes the first held hold icon. 9A, the hold icon 9A of the third hold becomes the hold icon 9A of the second hold, and the hold icon 9A of the fourth hold becomes the hold icon 9A of the third hold. In addition, in accordance with the variation start effect, the hold lamp 9D corresponding to the fourth hold among the hold lamps 9D at the upper left of the display screen 7a is turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(D), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "9" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "3" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "4" symbol. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. Three hold icons 9A are displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, three hold lamps 9D are lit at the upper left of the display screen 7a (indicated by hatching in the figure). This shows that there are three first special symbols on hold. At the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, all four hold lamps 9E are off. This shows that there is no second special drawing reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(E), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. The hold icon 9A at the lower right of the display screen 7a is moved and displayed in accordance with the fluctuation start effect. Specifically, as shown by the arrow Y1, the first pending hold icon 9A moves to become the variable icon 9C, and as shown by the arrow Y2, the second held hold icon 9A becomes the first held hold icon. 9A, and the third hold icon 9A becomes the second hold icon 9A. In addition, in accordance with the variation start effect, the hold lamp 9D corresponding to the third hold among the hold lamps 9D at the upper left of the display screen 7a is turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(F), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "0" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "1" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "8" symbol. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. Two hold icons 9A are displayed at the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, two hold lamps 9D are lit at the upper left of the display screen 7a (indicated by hatching in the figure). This shows that there are two first special symbols on hold. At the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, all four hold lamps 9E are off. This shows that there is no second special drawing reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(G), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. The hold icon 9A at the lower right of the display screen 7a is moved and displayed in accordance with the fluctuation start effect. Specifically, as shown by the arrow Y1, the first pending hold icon 9A moves to become the variable icon 9C, and as shown by the arrow Y2, the second held hold icon 9A becomes the first held hold icon. It becomes 9A. In addition, in accordance with the variation start effect, the hold lamp 9D corresponding to the second hold among the hold lamps 9D at the upper left of the display screen 7a is turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(H), a hold increase effect is executed. Here, it is assumed that the number of second special drawings reserved has increased due to winning in the second starting opening 21. At this time, the hold lamp 9E corresponding to the first hold among the four hold lamps 9E at the upper right of the display screen 7a is turned on (indicated by hatching in the figure).

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(I), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "7" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "3" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "5" symbol. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. One hold icon 9A is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. Further, one hold lamp 9D is lit at the upper left of the display screen 7a (indicated by hatching in the figure). This shows that there is only one first special symbol on hold. One hold lamp 9E is lit in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a. This shows that there is only one second special figure on hold. In this embodiment, the second special figure reservation is preferentially digested.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(J), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At this time, the second special symbol reservation is preferentially consumed. Therefore, in accordance with the variation start performance, the hold lamp 9E corresponding to the first hold among the hold lamps 9E at the upper right of the display screen 7a is turned off. Note that the variation icon 9C is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(K), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "2" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "1" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "9" symbol. One hold icon 9A is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. Further, one hold lamp 9D is lit at the upper left of the display screen 7a (indicated by hatching in the figure). This shows that there is only one first special symbol on hold. At the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, all four hold lamps 9E are off. This shows that there is no second special figure reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(L), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. The hold icon 9A at the lower right of the display screen 7a is moved and displayed in accordance with the fluctuation start effect. Specifically, as shown by arrow Y1, the first pending hold icon 9A moves to become the variable icon 9C. In addition, in accordance with the variation start effect, the hold lamp 9D corresponding to the first hold among the hold lamps 9D at the upper left of the display screen 7a is turned off.

[Special design hold display effect B]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol retention display effect B. In the special symbol reservation display performance B, the first reservation display in the first mode is performed for the reservation of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) of the reserved lottery (second special symbol reservation). , a second suspension display is performed in a second mode different from the first mode. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 103(A), a hold icon 9B indicating second special symbol hold is displayed in the lower right area of the display screen 7a, and a hold icon 9B is displayed in the upper right area of the display screen 7a. The holding lamp 9E indicating 2 special figure holding is displayed. The special symbol hold display performance B is an example of a variable probability gaming state or a time saving gaming state (“high base state”). Here, the hold icon 9B is an inverted triangular white icon. On the other hand, the hold lamp 9E is a circular icon that switches between a lit state and an unlit state. The hold lamp 9E indicates the number of hold items by the number of lit icons. The fluctuation icon 9C is displayed in the lower center area of the display screen 7a. The fluctuation icon 9C is the same icon as the pending icon 9B. In the upper left area of the display screen 7a, a hold lamp 9D indicating the hold of the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) (first special figure hold) is displayed. The hold lamp 9D is an icon similar to the hold lamp 9E, and the number of held icons is indicated by the number of lit icons.

The special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5) includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a where the first special figure reservation is stored and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b where the second special figure reservation is stored. Contains. The first special figure reservation storage area 85a stores a group of random numbers (reservation information) such as random numbers per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the first special figure reservation. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for storage. The second special figure reservation storage area 85b has a first memory area for storing random value groups (reservation information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the second special figure reservation. A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided.

The hold icons 9B at the lower right of the display screen 7a are the first storage area, the second storage area, the third storage area, and the fourth storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a, starting from the leftmost hold icon 9B. This corresponds to a group of random numbers (pending information) stored in .
Further, the holding lamps 9E at the upper right of the display screen 7a are arranged in order from the leftmost holding lamp 9E to the first storage area, the second storage area, the third storage area, and the fourth storage area of the first special figure holding storage area 85a. It corresponds to a group of random numbers (pending information) stored in the storage area. Below, the hold icons 9A, 9B and hold lamps 9D, 9E corresponding to the first storage area, second storage area, third storage area, and fourth storage area are referred to as "first hold", "second hold", " Also referred to as "third reservation" or "fourth reservation."

Regarding the special symbol pending display performance B, first, the explanation will start from the confirmed stop state shown in FIG. 103(B). Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "9" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "5" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "3" symbol. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. Four pending icons 9B are displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. Further, four hold lamps 9E are displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, and all four hold lamps 9E are in a lit state (indicated by hatching in the figure). This shows that there are four second special symbols on hold. Four hold lamps 9D are displayed at the upper left of the display screen 7a, and all four hold lamps 9D are in an extinguished state. This shows that there is no 1st special drawing reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(C), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. The hold icon 9B at the lower right of the display screen 7a is moved and displayed in accordance with the fluctuation start effect. Specifically, as shown by the arrow Y1, the first pending hold icon 9B moves to become the variable icon 9C, and as shown by the arrow Y2, the second held hold icon 9B becomes the first held hold icon. 9B, the third hold icon 9B becomes the second hold icon 9B, and the fourth hold icon 9B becomes the third hold icon 9B. In addition, in accordance with the variation start effect, the hold lamp 9E corresponding to the fourth hold among the hold lamps 9E at the upper right of the display screen 7a is turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(D), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "2" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "4" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "1" symbol. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. Three hold icons 9B are displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, three hold lamps 9E are lit in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a (indicated by hatching in the figure). This shows that there are three second special symbols on hold. At the upper left of the display screen 7a, all four hold lamps 9D are off. This shows that there is no 1st special drawing reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(E), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. The hold icon 9B at the lower right of the display screen 7a is moved and displayed in accordance with the fluctuation start effect. Specifically, as shown by the arrow Y1, the first pending hold icon 9B moves to become the variable icon 9C, and as shown by the arrow Y2, the second held hold icon 9B becomes the first held hold icon. 9B, and the third hold icon 9B becomes the second hold icon 9B. In addition, in accordance with the variation start effect, the hold lamp 9E corresponding to the third hold among the hold lamps 9E at the upper right of the display screen 7a is turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(F), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "6" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "1" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "9" symbol. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. Two hold icons 9B are displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, two hold lamps 9E are lit in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a (indicated by hatching in the figure). This shows that there are two second special symbols on hold. At the upper left of the display screen 7a, all four hold lamps 9D are off. This shows that there is no 1st special drawing reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(G), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. The hold icon 9B at the lower right of the display screen 7a is moved and displayed in accordance with the fluctuation start effect. Specifically, as shown by the arrow Y1, the hold icon 9B of the first hold moves and becomes the variable icon 9C, and as shown by the arrow Y2, the hold icon 9B of the second hold moves to the hold icon 9B of the first hold. It becomes 9B. In addition, in accordance with the variation start effect, the hold lamp 9E corresponding to the second hold among the hold lamps 9E at the upper right of the display screen 7a is turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(H), a hold increase effect is executed. Here, it is assumed that the number of reserved first special drawings increases due to winning in the first starting slot 20. At this time, among the four hold lamps 9D at the upper left of the display screen 7a, the hold lamp 9D corresponding to the first hold is turned on (indicated by hatching in the figure).

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(I), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "8" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "2" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "7" symbol. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. One hold icon 9B is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, one hold lamp 9E is lit in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a (indicated by hatching in the figure). This shows that there is only one second special figure on hold. One hold lamp 9D is lit at the upper left of the display screen 7a. This shows that there is only one first special symbol on hold. In this embodiment, the second special figure reservation is preferentially digested.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(J), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. The hold icon 9B at the lower right of the display screen 7a is moved and displayed in accordance with the fluctuation start effect. Specifically, as shown by arrow Y1, the first pending hold icon 9B moves and becomes the variable icon 9C. In addition, in accordance with the variation start effect, the hold lamp 9E corresponding to the first hold among the hold lamps 9E at the upper right of the display screen 7a is turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(K), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "5" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "0" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "9" symbol. The hold icon 9B is not displayed at the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. In addition, all four hold lamps 9E are off at the upper right of the display screen 7a. This shows that there is no second special drawing reservation. One hold lamp 9D is lit at the upper left of the display screen 7a. This shows that there is only one first special figure on hold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(L), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. In accordance with the variation start effect, the hold lamp 9D corresponding to the first hold among the hold lamps 9D at the upper left of the display screen 7a is turned off. Note that the variation icon 9C is not displayed.

[Special symbol hold display effect C]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol retention display effect C. The special symbol retention display performance C is another example of the special symbol retention performance A.
Regarding the special symbol hold display effect C, first, we will begin to explain it from the fluctuating state shown in FIG. 104(A). Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are fluctuating at high speed. At this time, it is assumed that a prize is won in the first starting port 20. As a result, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the fourth hold among the hold icons 9A at the lower right of the display screen 7a is newly displayed. The explanation will be continued assuming that the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the fourth reservation has a lottery determination result (pre-read result) of "jackpot". The hold icon 9A corresponding to the fourth hold is changed to a predetermined display color (for example, red). Furthermore, by winning a prize in the first starting port 20, the holding lamp 9D corresponding to the fourth holding among the holding lamps 9D at the upper left of the display screen 7a is turned on.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(B), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "2" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "5" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "6" symbol. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. Four pending icons 9A are displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, four hold lamps 9D are displayed at the upper left of the display screen 7a, and all four hold lamps 9D are in a lit state (indicated by hatching in the figure). From this, it can be seen that there are four first special symbols on hold. Four hold lamps 9E are displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and all four hold lamps 9E are in an extinguished state. This shows that there is no second special drawing reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(C), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. The hold icon 9A at the lower right of the display screen 7a is moved and displayed in accordance with the fluctuation start effect. Specifically, as shown by the arrow Y1, the first pending hold icon 9A moves to become the variable icon 9C, and as shown by the arrow Y2, the second held hold icon 9A becomes the first held hold icon. 9A, the hold icon 9A of the third hold becomes the hold icon 9A of the second hold, and the hold icon 9A of the fourth hold becomes the hold icon 9A of the third hold. The hold icon 9A that has changed to hold becomes the third hold. In addition, in accordance with the variation start effect, the hold lamp 9D corresponding to the fourth hold among the hold lamps 9D at the upper left of the display screen 7a is turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(D), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "9" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "3" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "4" symbol. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. Three hold icons 9A are displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, three hold lamps 9D are lit at the upper left of the display screen 7a (indicated by hatching in the figure). This shows that there are three first special symbols on hold. At the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, all four hold lamps 9E are off. This shows that there is no second special drawing reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(E), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. The hold icon 9A at the lower right of the display screen 7a is moved and displayed in accordance with the fluctuation start effect. Specifically, as shown by the arrow Y1, the first pending hold icon 9A moves to become the variable icon 9C, and as shown by the arrow Y2, the second held hold icon 9A becomes the first held hold icon. 9A, and the third hold icon 9A becomes the second hold icon 9A. The hold icon 9A that has changed to hold becomes the second hold. In addition, in accordance with the variation start effect, the hold lamp 9D corresponding to the third hold among the hold lamps 9D at the upper left of the display screen 7a is turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(F), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "0" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "1" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "8" symbol. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. Two hold icons 9A are displayed at the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, two hold lamps 9D are lit at the upper left of the display screen 7a (indicated by hatching in the figure). This shows that there are two first special symbols on hold. At the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, all four hold lamps 9E are off. This shows that there is no second special drawing reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(G), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. The hold icon 9A at the lower right of the display screen 7a is moved and displayed in accordance with the fluctuation start effect. Specifically, as shown by the arrow Y1, the first pending hold icon 9A moves to become the variable icon 9C, and as shown by the arrow Y2, the second held hold icon 9A becomes the first held hold icon. It becomes 9A. The hold icon 9A that has changed to hold becomes the first hold. In addition, in accordance with the variation start effect, the hold lamp 9D corresponding to the second hold among the hold lamps 9D at the upper left of the display screen 7a is turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(H), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "7" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "3" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "5" symbol. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden. One hold icon 9A is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, one hold lamp 9D is lit in the upper left part of the display screen 7a (indicated by hatching in the figure). This shows that there is only one first special symbol on hold. At the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, all four hold lamps 9E are off. This shows that there is no second special drawing reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(I), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. The hold icon 9A at the lower right of the display screen 7a is moved and displayed in accordance with the fluctuation start effect. Specifically, as shown by the arrow Y1, the hold icon 9A of the first hold that has been changed on hold moves to become the variable icon 9C. In addition, in accordance with the variation start effect, the hold lamp 9D corresponding to the first hold among the hold lamps 9D at the upper left of the display screen 7a is turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(J), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The confirmed stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are all fixed and stopped at the "7" symbol. This notifies you that you have won a jackpot. Here, the hold icon 9A is not displayed at the bottom right of the display screen 7a. The four hold lamps 9D at the upper left of the display screen 7a and the four hold lamps 9E at the upper right of the display screen 7a are all off. This shows that there is neither the first special figure reservation nor the second special figure reservation.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the special symbol retention display effect will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when a particular lottery among the reserved lottery tickets is suspended, a first suspension display is displayed in the first mode, and a second suspension display is displayed in a second mode different from the first mode. 2 Displays pending status. Specifically, in special symbol retention display productions A and C, the first special symbol retention is displayed by the retention icon 9A at the lower right of the display screen 7a, and by the retention lamp 9D at the upper left of the display screen 7a. Display is performed (FIGS. 102 and 104). In the special symbol retention display performance B, the second special symbol retention is displayed by the retention icon 9B at the lower right of the display screen 7a, and by the retention lamp 9E at the upper right of the display screen 7a (Fig. 103 ). According to this configuration, the display of the hold is a novel effect that has not been seen before, and it is possible to visually entertain the players and improve their interest. In addition, in the special symbol holding display performances A and C, the display of the holding icon 9A corresponds to the "first holding display", and the display of the holding lamp 9D corresponds to the "second holding display". In the special symbol holding display performance B, the display of the holding icon 9B corresponds to the "first holding display", and the display of the holding lamp 9E corresponds to the "second holding display". The effect control microcomputer 91 corresponds to a "reserved image control means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 to 104, when the gaming state is switched, the mode of display of the hold icons 9A and 9B at the lower right of the display screen 7a changes depending on the gaming state. On the other hand, the display of the hold lamps 9D and 9E at the top of the display screen 7a does not change even if the gaming state is changed. According to this configuration, the hold display becomes an unprecedented and novel performance, which can visually entertain the players and improve their interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 to 104, regarding the display of the hold icons 9A and 9B at the lower right of the display screen 7a, when the hold is expired, an image indicating the hold is displayed in a moving manner, Regarding the display of the hold lamps 9D and 9E at the upper part of the display screen 7a, the image indicating the hold is not moved and displayed when the hold is extinguished. According to this configuration, the hold display becomes an unprecedented and novel performance, which can visually entertain the players and improve their interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, regarding the display of the pending icons 9A and 9B at the lower right of the display screen 7a, a display indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery of the reserved special symbol will be won is performed, and the display screen 7a Regarding the display of the hold lamps 9D and 9E at the upper part of , there is no display indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery of the held special symbol will be won (FIG. 104). According to this configuration, the hold display becomes an unprecedented and novel performance, which can visually entertain the players and improve their interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the holding of the lottery for the first special symbol (first special symbol suspension) or the suspension of the lottery for the second special symbol (second special symbol suspension) is selected depending on the game state. Certain drawings have been put on hold. According to this configuration, the hold display becomes an unprecedented and novel performance, which can visually entertain the players and improve their interest.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the special symbol retention display performance will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, in the special symbol retention display performance A, when the second special symbol retention is exhausted, the variable icon 9C is not displayed (FIG. 102 (J)). Further, in the special symbol retention display performance B, when the first special symbol retention is exhausted, the variable icon 9C is not displayed (FIG. 103(L)). In contrast, the variable icon 9C may be displayed.

[Modification 2]
In the embodiment described above, the reservation icon 9A indicating the first special symbol reservation and the reservation icon 9B indicating the second special symbol reservation are selectively displayed depending on the gaming state. On the other hand, similarly to the hold lamps 9D and 9E, the hold icons 9A and 9B may be displayed together. When the reservation icons 9A, 9B and the reservation lamps 9D, 9E are displayed together, the first special symbol reservation and the second special symbol reservation correspond to "the reservation of a specific lottery."

[Modification 3]
In the special symbol retention display productions A and C of the above embodiments, the first special symbol retention is "reservation of a specific lottery", and in the special symbol retention display performance B, the second special symbol retention is "reservation of a specific lottery". ” On the other hand, the suspension of a particular lottery may be selected in any manner. For example, among the reserved lottery tickets, a specific lottery lottery with a relatively high expectation of a jackpot may be suspended.

[Modification 4]
In the embodiment described above, both the first hold display and the second hold display are performed within the display screen 7a. On the other hand, at least one of the first hold display and the second hold display may be performed on the sub display screen 64 (the right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the upper sub display screen 64U). .

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect D2-1]
A gaming machine,
It is possible to suspend special symbol drawings, and includes a suspension image control means that displays an image on a display screen to display a suspension corresponding to the number of reserved lottery drawings,
The pending image control means displays a first pending display in a first mode with respect to a specific lottery out of the suspended lottery tickets, and displays a first pending display in a second mode different from the first mode. 2 Show pending display,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1,
The pending image control means changes the aspect of the first pending display according to the gaming state when the gaming state is switched regarding the first pending display, and changes the aspect of the first pending display according to the gaming state when the gaming state is switched regarding the second pending display. does not change the mode of the second pending display even if
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1,
The suspended image control means displays a moving image indicating suspension when the suspension is extinguished for the first suspension display, and displays a moving image indicating suspension when the suspension expires regarding the second suspension display. do not have,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1,
Regarding the first pending display, the suspended image control means performs a display suggesting the degree of expectation that the lottery of the reserved special symbol will be won, and regarding the second pending display, displays the pending image of the special symbol. There will be no display that suggests the level of expectation that the special symbol lottery will be a winner.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-4,
The special symbol lottery includes a first special symbol lottery and a second special symbol lottery,
The suspension image control means selectively suspends the lottery of the first special symbol or the lottery of the second special symbol, depending on the gaming state,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The pseudo continuous effects A to C at the time of specific fluctuation will be explained below using FIGS. 105 to 107. In FIGS. 105 to 107, various movable accessories and various decorative members arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing the drawings. FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo-continuous effect A at the time of a specific variation, FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo-continuous effect B at the time of a specific variation, and FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo-continuous effect C at the time of a specific variation. This is a diagram for

In this specific fluctuation time pseudo-continuous performance, the performance of a specific gaming state that is executed in a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state) after the jackpot gaming state is replaced with a performance in a low probability low base state which is a non-time saving state ( (normal conditions). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a pseudo continuous effect at the time of a specific variation is included, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

In addition, in this embodiment, the high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state) which is a time-saving state controlled after a jackpot game is compared to the low-accuracy low base state (normal state) which is a non-time-saving state. This is a time-saving state in which the fluctuation time tends to be shortened.

In addition, when the movable accessory 15 is activated during the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance design, the movable accessory 15 is activated after the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance design ends, compared to when the movable accessory 15 is not activated. This suggests to the player that there is a high expectation of winning (that is, after the performance symbols are stopped and displayed). Therefore, the player has a high interest in the operation (movement) of the movable accessory 15.

Here, we will first briefly explain the performance symbols, hold icons, etc., and then explain the pseudo-continuous performance A at specific fluctuations, the pseudo-continuous performance B at specific fluctuations, the pseudo-continuous performance C at specific fluctuations, and the pseudo-continuous performance D at specific fluctuations in order. Explain.

[Production pattern]
First, I will briefly explain the production patterns. The performance symbols are composed of a non-time-saving performance (normal performance), which is a performance performed in a low-accuracy low base state (normal state) that is a non-time-saving state, and a high-accuracy time-saving state (high accuracy) after the jackpot game state. The structure differs from the configuration in the production of a specific gaming state executed in the high base state). Thereby, the player can also determine whether or not the performance of a specific game state is being executed based on the configuration of the performance symbols.

The performance pattern in the non-time-saving performance (normal performance) performed in the low-accuracy, low-base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state, is a coin-shaped three-dimensional image, and the number design is the number "1" to the number "9". ” and characters A to I, which are character designs. The character design is a three-dimensional image, and the image is arranged so as to fit within the outer shape of a coin. The number design is a three-dimensional image, and a part of the number design is a coin-shaped three-dimensional image from the lower right side of the character design (that is, the lower right side of the coin-shaped outline) to the lower right side of the character design that makes up the production design. The numbers protrude toward the front and are arranged in front of the character's design to join together, so that the number design covers at least a portion of the character's design. The performance pattern includes a number pattern and a character pattern corresponding to the number pattern.

Specifically, the number "7" has a bright red color, and the odd numbers "1," "3," "5," and "9" except the number "7" all have the same bright green color. . Even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color. Each number design (odd number design and even number design) is configured with a different character design having multiple colors (full color), and the character design is displayed in a large size as the main part of the production design. Ru. Therefore, the size of the number design is smaller than the size of the character design attached to the number design.

As for the production design, character A is attached to the number “1”, character B is attached to the number “2”, character C is attached to the number “3”, and character D is attached to the number “4”. The number "5" is marked with the character E, the number "6" is marked with the character F, the number "7" is marked with the character G, the number "8" is marked with the character H, The number "9" is marked with the character I, and each number design is provided with a different character design having a plurality of colors (full colors). For example, the character A may be attached to the number "1" and the number "7" and overlap, and the character C may be attached to the number "3" and the number "8" and overlap. In this case, the number "7" has a character A that is displayed differently from the character A attached to the number "1", and the number "8" has a different display style than the character C attached to the number "3". Let us assume that the character C is the mode.

On the other hand, the performance symbols in the performance of a specific game state that is executed in the high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state) after the jackpot game state are number symbols ranging from the number "1" to the number " The second element consists of only "9". The number design is a three-dimensional image, and the size (vertical size) of the number design is coin-shaped, which is a performance design in a performance performed in a low-accuracy, low-base state (normal state), which is a non-time saving state. The size (vertical size) is almost the same as that of the stereoscopic image.

Specifically, the number "7" has a bright red color, and the odd numbers "1," "3," "5," and "9" except the number "7" all have the same bright green color. . Even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color. Regarding the color attached to the number design of the production pattern in the performance performed in the high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state), which is the time-saving state, The color is the same as that of the performance design in the performance to be performed.

In this way, the number symbols of the performance symbols in the non-time-saving performance (normal performance) performed in the low-accuracy low base state (normal state) that is the non-time-saving state, and the high-accuracy time-saving state after the jackpot game state. The numbers of the performance symbols in the performance of the specific game state executed in the high-accuracy, high-base state are each colored, so for example, the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are the same. When the numbers are temporarily stopped and displayed in line with the pattern of the numbers to form a reach, and the effect is developed after that, the more times the player experiences the effect that is developed via the reach, the more the numbers displayed in the temporary stop are displayed. Players have the opportunity to discover for themselves the relationship (law) between the colors of the symbols and the effects that are developed. Thereby, each number pattern (odd number pattern and even number pattern) has a color, which can contribute to improving the interest.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, showing a left effect pattern 8L of a stereoscopic image, a middle effect pattern 8C of a three-dimensional image, and a right effect pattern 8R of a three-dimensional image. A fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols (number symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in the display mode. In the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance design, each performance design is a numeric design: number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → A variable effect (fluctuating display) is performed in a display mode in which the reels rotate in the order of number "7" → number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" →...

When the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance design is started, the performance design that is stopped and displayed at the stop position moves slowly (at low speed) in a display mode in which it floats a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) upwards. After that (in other words, after the stop display of the production design is released and the production design is set to the display mode in which it is about to move), it moves from the opaque state to the bottom while gradually increasing the speed from low speed. The display mode changes to a semi-transparent state and changes at high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the performance pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent performance pattern that is changing at high speed. The production design decelerates just before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed at the stop position (temporarily stopped, then stopped) ). When the production pattern is temporarily stopped, it moves slowly up and down (for example, 2.5 mm upwards and 2.5 mm downwards (in other words, only a swing width of 5 mm) based on the stop position). It becomes a moving display mode. Note that the performance pattern may disappear from the display screen 7a.

On the lower right side of the display screen 7a, fluctuations of a small left effect pattern 8LZ, a small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and a small right effect pattern 8RZ, which correspond to the left effect pattern 8L, medium effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R, are shown. A sub-variation area is provided in which the effect (variation display) is started. Due to this variation (variation with respect to the variation icon 9C), when the variation display (variation display) of the left production symbol 8L, middle production symbol 8C, and right production symbol 8R is started, the small left The variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the presentation pattern 8LZ, small medium presentation pattern 8CZ, and small right presentation pattern 8RZ starts, and at the same time as the left presentation pattern 8L, medium presentation pattern 8C, and right presentation pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed. , the corresponding small left effect pattern 8LZ, small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and small right effect pattern 8RZ are also all stopped and displayed. The small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ are smaller versions of the numbered symbols of the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R, and the stop display. The small left effect pattern 8LZ that is displayed has the same color as the number pattern of the left effect pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed, and the small medium effect pattern 8CZ that is stopped and displayed is the same as that of the medium effect pattern 8C that is stopped and displayed. The numbers have the same design and color, and the small right performance pattern 8RZ that is stopped and displayed has the same number design and color as the right performance pattern 8R that is stopped and displayed. In this way, each small performance pattern is designed primarily in one of bright red, bright green, and bright blue.

As mentioned above, the left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R are effect symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to When the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the number "9" is started and the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the presentation pattern is started, the presentation pattern that is stopped and displayed at the stop position will once move upward by a predetermined distance (for example, , about 5 mm) After moving slowly (at low speed) in a floating display mode (in other words, after the stop display of the production symbol has been canceled and the production symbol is in a display format in which it is about to move), it moves downward. The display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from low speed toward the side, resulting in a display mode that changes at high speed. On the other hand, the small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ are different from the above-mentioned variable effect (fluctuating display) of the effect pattern, and have a display mode in which the reels are rotated. However, at the display position of the small left effect pattern 8LZ, the display position of the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the display position of the small right effect pattern 8RZ, number patterns (symbols: number "1" to number "9") are displayed. appears and is updated, resulting in a display mode that changes rapidly.

The small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and are always displayed, and various effect images and other various Visibility is not obstructed by images.

A state in which one or more of the left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are the same symbol and are temporarily stopped and displayed, and reach is reached. Even if the corresponding small performance symbols (for example, the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed), the small left performance symbol 8LZ and the right performance symbol 8R corresponding to the left performance symbol 8L are temporarily stopped. Even if they are displayed, all the small right performance symbols 8RZ) corresponding to the right performance symbols 8R continue to be in a state where they are variablely rendered (variably displayed). In addition, if the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they are not aligned to the same pattern and are out of alignment, the small left effect pattern 8LZ, small size A medium performance pattern 8CZ and a small right performance pattern 8RZ are stopped and displayed as the same symbols as the left performance pattern 8L, medium performance pattern 8C, and right performance pattern 8R. In addition, if the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same pattern becomes a hit, the small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small A medium performance pattern 8CZ and a small right performance pattern 8RZ are stopped and displayed in the same pattern as the left performance pattern 8L, medium performance pattern 8C, and right performance pattern 8R. As a result, the small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ are variable effects (fluctuating displays) from the start to the end of the variation (variation for the variation icon 9C). will continue.

Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all aligned and stopped in the same pattern, and the same pattern has a bright green number "1" and a bright blue color. Number "2" with light green color, Number "3" with light green color, Number "4" with light blue color, Number "5" with light green color, Number "6" with light blue color, Number "8" with light blue color. , if the number "9" is bright green, the gaming state after the jackpot will be a low probability time saving state (low probability high base state), whereas the same symbol will be bright red. If the number is "7", the gaming state after the jackpot becomes a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state). In addition, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all aligned in the same pattern and are displayed in a stopped state, and the same pattern has a bright red color in addition to the number "7". In the case of "3", the gaming state after the jackpot may be set to a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state). In this case, the number "3" has a bright red color like the number "7".

In addition, the background image is designed in full color, and shows the low probability low base state (normal state), which is a non-time saving state, and the high probability time saving state (high probability), which is a time saving state controlled after a jackpot game. It is different when it is in a certain high base state) and when it is in a certain high base state). For example, background images such as city images, forest images, sea images, seabed images, underground images, etc. are background images (hereinafter referred to as "non-time saving background images") in non-time saving states (low certainty low base states (normal states)). ) and are still images or moving images. Background images such as space images, spacecraft images, spacecraft interior images, planetary ground images, planetary underground images, etc. are background images in the time saving state (high accuracy and high base state) (hereinafter referred to as "time saving background images"). ).

[Hold icon, etc.]
Next, to explain the fluctuation icon 9C and the pending icons 9A and 9B, the fluctuation icon 9C corresponding to the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special figure reservation is as follows: It is displayed (placed) at a variable display position (above the white rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area to the left of the variable display position, a first holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding, and in the area to the right of the variable display position, a second holding display area is provided as a second special figure holding. It is being In the first reservation display area, four reservation icons 9A can be displayed in a straight line, and a maximum of four reservation icons 9A can be stocked. The pending icon 9A closest to the variable icon 9C is called the first pending icon 9A, the second pending icon 9A to the variable icon 9C is called the second pending icon 9A, and the third pending icon 9A to the variable icon 9C is called the third pending icon. 9A, and the pending icon 9A that is farthest from the variable icon 9C is called the fourth pending icon 9A. In the second reservation display area, four reservation icons 9B can be displayed in a straight line, and a maximum of four reservation icons 9B can be stocked. The hold icon 9B closest to the fluctuation icon 9C is called the first hold icon 9B, the hold icon 9B second to the change icon 9C is called the second hold icon 9B, and the hold icon 9B third to the change icon 9C is called the third hold icon. 9B, and the hold icon 9B that is farthest from the variable icon 9C is called a fourth hold icon 9B. In this embodiment, the variation icon 9C and the pending icons 9A and 9B can indicate the expectation of winning depending on the color, and the expectation of winning increases in the order of white → blue → green → red → yellow (gold). . Therefore, players are highly interested in the variable icon 9C and the pending icons 9A and 9B.

[Pseudo-continuous effect A during specific fluctuation]
Next, the specific variation time pseudo-continuous effect A will be explained with reference to FIG. 105. Here, it is assumed that the player is in a low-accuracy, low-base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state, and the player shoots the game ball so that it flows down the left game area 3A and hits the ball to the left. Play a game by. In the low accuracy low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state, the background image is the non-time saving background image GG1 (underground image). In a left-handed game, a non-time saving performance (normal performance) is performed in a low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state. In this non-time saving performance (normal performance), when the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols starts, first the left performance symbol 8L temporarily stops, then the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stops, and finally the middle performance symbol After 8C is temporarily stopped, the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at the same time (all at once). In addition, in a non-time saving performance (normal performance), the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R may temporarily stop at the same time, and finally the middle performance symbol 8C may temporarily stop, and the left performance symbol 8L and the middle performance symbol 8C may temporarily stop. And the right effect pattern 8R may temporarily stop at the same time (all at once).

The player shoots the game ball so that it flows down the left game area 3A, plays a game by hitting the game left, one game ball enters the first starting port 20, and about the game ball that entered the ball. is determined and displayed as the white first pending icon 9A by pre-reading. When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, there is no stocked pending icon 9A at all.

When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbols is started, as shown in FIG. 105(A). At this time, variable presentation (fluctuating display) of small-sized presentation symbols such as the small-sized left presentation pattern 8LZ, the small-sized medium presentation pattern 8CZ, and the small-sized right presentation pattern 8RZ is also started.

When the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is started, as shown in FIG. A movable accessory image KMG imitating the second movable accessory 15 appears on the front side of the performance pattern 8C and the right performance pattern 8R while moving from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. This results in a display mode in which the movable accessory image KMG suddenly appears. In addition, in this embodiment, the size of the movable accessory image KMG is one size larger than the size of the second movable accessory 15. However, the size of the movable accessory image KMG may be the same as the size of the second movable accessory 15, or may be twice larger than the size of the second movable accessory 15.

The movable accessory image KMG that suddenly appeared was caused by a non-time-saving performance (normal performance) being performed in a low-accuracy, low-base state (normal state) that is a non-time-saving state while playing a left-handed game. This change occurs suddenly when the player is in a low-probability, low-base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state, but after a jackpot gaming state. This is a specific image that suggests the start of a performance of a specific gaming state that is executed in a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy, high-base state). By displaying the movable accessory image KMG, which is the specific image, as a notice of the start of the performance of the specific game state, it is possible to subtly inform the player that the performance of the specific game state will start soon.

The player's expectation of winning increases due to the sudden appearance of the movable accessory image KMG, which is a specific image, and the player stops operating the handle 60 in order to focus on the fluctuation (on the white fluctuation icon 9C). .

The movable accessory image KMG here moves along the same route as the second movable accessory 15 at the same speed as the second movable accessory 15 moves. That is, the movable accessory image KMG is displayed in a display mode that imitates the movement of the second movable accessory 15.

The movable accessory image KMG is a crystal-shaped replica of the second movable accessory 15, and emits light in a predetermined single color (for example, white, blue, green, red, purple, yellow (gold)). It is displayed in a display mode (here, it is displayed in a display mode in which the movable accessory image KMG is emitting white light). At this time, the second movable accessory 15 remains in a retracted (standby) state at the retracted position and has not yet started moving. Note that the movable accessory image KMG may be one that directly imitates the shape and color of the second movable accessory 15. The predetermined single colors indicate the expectation of winning, and the expectation of winning increases in the order of white → blue → green → red → purple → yellow (gold).

The fluctuation icon 9C is a specific game state that is executed in a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state) after the jackpot gaming state while being in a low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state. When the effect is started, it is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), so in the effect of a specific game state, the color of the variation icon 9C is changed to respond to the variation (variation with respect to the variation icon 9C). It is difficult to suggest the expected degree of success. Therefore, in the specific fluctuation time pseudo-continuous performance A, by setting the color of the movable accessory image KMG to a predetermined color, it is possible to suggest the winning expectation level for the performance of the specific game state instead of the fluctuation icon 9C. It looks like this. The expected winning level set to the color of the movable accessory image KMG is the same as the expected winning level set to the color of the variable icon 9C. Therefore, the player has a high interest in the movable accessory image KMG.

In addition, the color of the movable accessory image KMG may jump up to a color with a high expectation of winning, or jump down to a color with a low expectation of a win, and the color of the fluctuation icon 9C may jump up to a color with a high expectation of winning. The relationship (law) between the color of 9C and the color of the movable accessory image KMG can be made difficult to understand and aroused.

Further, the second movable accessory 15 emits light in a predetermined single color (for example, white, blue, green, red, purple, yellow (gold)) (here, the second movable accessory 15 emits blue light). ). When the second movable accessory 15 emits light in a predetermined single color, it may emit light in a first monochrome (e.g., blue) and a second monochrome (e.g., red) alternately. , a loop in which the first single color (e.g., white) switches to another single color different from the first color and then returns to the first single color again (e.g., white → blue → green → red → purple → yellow (gold) → white → blue → ) may be used to emit light repeatedly.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 105(C), when the movable accessory image KMG completes moving to the advanced position of the second movable accessory 15, the second movable accessory 15 moves to the retracted position (the second movable accessory in FIG. 15 position) to the center position of the display screen 7a (the intersection of the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a and the vertical line passing through the center of the top side and the center of the bottom side of the display screen 7a). Start moving downward until As a result, the player's expectation of winning increases due to the operation (movement) of the second movable accessory 15.

Since the second movable accessory 15 moves in front of the display screen 7a, as the second movable accessory 15 moves toward the advanced position, the movable accessory image KMG displayed on the display screen 7a changes. The area (portion) covered by the second movable accessory 15 gradually becomes larger, and the portion where the movable accessory image KMG can be visually recognized becomes smaller. Note that when the second movable accessory 15 starts moving from the retracted position to the advanced position, the movable accessory image KMG changes from white to pink, which is the effect emission color. The rear of the second movable accessory 15 is brightly illuminated by the effect light emission color from the movable accessory image KMG, which is the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the second movable accessory 15. The outer shape (outline) becomes clear, and the action of the second movable accessory 15 can be highlighted. In this embodiment, the pink color is used only as an effect emission color and is a dedicated color that is not used in other effects.

As the movable role image KMG moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R in the variable effect (fluctuating display) become movable roles. The area (portion) covered by the object image KMG gradually becomes larger. Then, in a state in which the movable accessory image KMG has completed its movement to the advanced position, the left performance symbol 8L, middle performance symbol 8C, and right performance symbol 8R in the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) are completely covered by the movable accessory image KMG. , the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R are each covered.

Instead, as the movable accessory image KMG moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R during the variable effect (fluctuating display) Although the area (portion) covered by the movable accessory image KMG gradually increases, even when the movable accessory image KMG has completed its movement to the advance position, the left performance symbol 8L and middle performance during the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) The pattern 8C and the right performance pattern 8R may not be completely covered by the movable accessory image KMG, and the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R may be partially uncovered. As a result, it can be visually recognized that the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R are in variable presentation (variable display).

The small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ are the same as the movable accessory image KMG even if the movable accessory image KMG moves to the advanced position and stops. They do not overlap in the front-rear direction, and visibility is not obstructed by the movable accessory image KMG.

After that, when the second movable accessory 15 completes its movement to the advanced position, it stops at the advanced position for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), as shown in FIG. 105(D). In addition, the small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ are the second movable role even if the second movable accessory 15 moves to the advanced position and stops. It does not overlap with the object 15 in the front-rear direction, and visibility is not obstructed by the second movable accessory 15.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 105(E), the second movable accessory 15 starts moving upward from the advanced position to the retracted position. When the second movable accessory 15 completes its movement to the retracted position, the movable accessory image KMG starts moving upward from the advanced position, as shown in FIGS. 105(F) and (G). When the movable accessory image KMG starts moving upward from the advancing position, it is in the low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state, but it is performed in the low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non time saving state. The non-time-saving performance (normal performance) is switched to the performance of a specific game state executed in a high-probability time-saving state (high-probability high base state) after the jackpot game state, and the performance of the specific game state is started.

As a result, in left-handed games, as mentioned above, although the non-time saving performance (normal performance) performed in the low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state progresses, the fluctuation (white fluctuation icon 9C) as a specific variation, it is executed in a low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state, but in a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state) after the jackpot gaming state. By starting the performance of the specific game state, the background image is switched from the non-time-saving background image GG1 (underground image) to the time-saving background image KHG (city image). The player can also determine whether or not the performance of a specific game state is being executed based on the background image.

At the timing when the background image switches from the non-time saving background image GG1 (underground image) to the time saving background image KHG (city image) (in other words, the non-time saving is performed in the low certainty low base state (normal state) which is the non-time saving state). At the timing of switching from the performance (normal performance) to the performance of a specific gaming state that is executed in the high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state) after the jackpot game state), the fluctuation icon 9C and the fluctuation display position are hidden. (disappears from the display screen 7a). Note that when the hold icon 9A (9B) exists, the hold icon 9A (9B) is also hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a). On the other hand, the left effect pattern 8L, medium effect pattern 8C, right effect pattern 8R, small left effect pattern 8LZ, small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and small right effect pattern 8RZ are not hidden (display screen 7a ), it remains in a fluctuating performance (fluctuating display).

When the movable accessory image KMG moves upward from the advancing position and disappears from the display screen 7a, it is in a low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state, but in the performance of a specific game state, a pseudo continuous performance is performed. Begins. In the pseudo continuous performance, the left performance symbol 8L, middle performance symbol 8C, and right performance symbol 8R, which started the fluctuation performance (fluctuating display), temporarily stop and start the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) again. Or do it multiple times. In the pseudo continuous performance, the order in which the performance symbols temporarily stop is different from the non-time saving performance (normal performance), first the left performance symbol 8L temporarily stops, then the middle performance symbol 8C temporarily stops, and finally the right performance symbol. 8R temporarily stops. In addition, in the pseudo-continuous performance, the higher the number of pseudo fluctuations, the higher the expectation of winning, and the maximum number of pseudo-numbers with the highest expectation of winning is set to 8 (for example, , the expectation of winning is higher when the number of pseudo fluctuations is 8 times than when the number of pseudo fluctuations is 4 times). Due to the pseudo fluctuation in the pseudo continuous performance (the time (variation time) for one pseudo fluctuation in the pseudo continuous performance is set to, for example, 2 seconds), temporary stop and re-variation may be caused. It can be performed rhythmically and at a good tempo, and the monotony of the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols due to the pseudo-continuous performance can be reduced. In addition, in the pseudo-continuous performance A at the time of specific fluctuation, pseudo fluctuations are performed four times in the performance of the specific game state.

Although the production of the specific game state is in a low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state at the time the performance of the specific game state is started, the composition of the production symbol is performed in a low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non time saving state. The game is switched from a non-time-saving performance (normal performance) that is performed to a specific game state performance that is executed in a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state) after the jackpot game state. In other words, the production patterns in FIGS. 105(A) to 105(E) are coin-shaped three-dimensional images, and include the number patterns ``1'' to ``9'' and the character designs characters A to I. , whereas the effect pattern in FIG. 105(F) is formed only from the numbers ``1'' to ``9'', which are numerical patterns, and the structure of the effect pattern is switched.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 105(H), the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a is the center line, and on this center line, first, the left production pattern 8L is marked with the number "4" having a bright blue color. It is temporarily stopped, then it is temporarily stopped at the number "7" where the middle presentation pattern 8C is bright red, and finally it is temporarily stopped at the number "9" where the right presentation pattern 8R is bright green. At this time, the small-sized left presentation pattern 8LZ, the small-sized medium presentation pattern 8CZ, and the small-sized right presentation pattern 8RZ are all in the process of changing performance (variation display) at high speed. After that, as shown in FIG. 105 (I), the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) is started again, temporarily stopped, and the re-fluctuation and temporary stop are repeated, and the pseudo fluctuation is performed 4 times (4th pseudo series) , as shown in FIG. 105(J), first, the left presentation pattern 8L temporarily stops at the bright green number "5", then the middle presentation pattern 8C temporarily stops at the bright blue number "6", Finally, the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stops at the bright blue number "8". At this time, the small-sized left presentation pattern 8LZ, the small-sized medium presentation pattern 8CZ, and the small-sized right presentation pattern 8RZ are all in the process of changing performance (variation display) at high speed. In other words, in the pseudo-continuous presentation, the small left presentation pattern 8LZ, the small medium presentation pattern 8CZ, and the small right presentation pattern 8RZ are all in the process of changing performance (variation display) at high speed.

Thereafter, while the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R remain temporarily stopped on the above-mentioned center line, as shown in FIG. 105(K), the above-mentioned movable accessory image KMG is displayed on the display screen 7a. It appears while moving from the top to the bottom. As a result, the movable accessory image KMG becomes displayed again in a suddenly generated manner.

The movable accessory image KMG here is executed in a low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state, but in a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state) after the jackpot game state. This image suddenly occurs during a pseudo continuous performance in a specific game state, and is a specific image that indicates the end of the specific game state performance. By displaying the movable accessory image KMG, which is the specific image, as a notice of the end of the performance of the specific game state, it is possible to subtly inform the player that the performance of the specific game state will end soon.

Here, as described above, the movable accessory image KMG is a crystal-like model of the second movable accessory 15, and is a predetermined single color (for example, white, blue, green, red, purple, etc.). (Here, the movable accessory image KMG is displayed in a display mode that emits white light, similar to FIGS. 105(B) to (F)). . At this time, the second movable accessory 15 remains in a retracted (standby) state at the retracted position and has not yet started moving. As mentioned above, the predetermined single color indicates the degree of expectation of winning, and the degree of expectation of winning increases in the order of white → blue → green → red → purple → yellow (gold). Note that the movable accessory image KMG may be displayed in a display mode in which it emits light in a different color (for example, red) from those shown in FIGS. 105(B) to (F), or the movable accessory image KMG may The KMG may be one that directly imitates the shape and color of the second movable accessory 15.

After that, as the movable role image KMG moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R, which have temporarily stopped on the above-mentioned center line, become movable roles. The area (portion) covered by the object image KMG gradually becomes larger, and when the movable accessory image KMG has completed its movement to the advanced position, as shown in FIG. The pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are completely covered by the movable accessory image KMG. As a result, the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R, which are temporarily stopped on the above-mentioned center line, cannot be visually recognized. In addition, the small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ are movable accessory images even if the movable accessory image KMG is in a display mode in which it moves to the advanced position and stops. It does not overlap with KMG in the front-rear direction, and visibility is not obstructed by the movable accessory image KMG.

In addition, until just before the movable accessory image KMG completes its movement to the advanced position and stops, as described above, the left effect pattern 8L temporarily stops at the number "5" with bright green color, and the middle effect pattern 8C is bright blue. It temporarily stopped at the number "6" with a bright blue color, and it temporarily stopped at the number "8" where the right production pattern 8R has a bright blue color. However, in the display mode in which the movable accessory image KMG completes its movement to the advance position and stops, although the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R cannot be visually recognized, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect There is a case where the symbol 8C and the right performance symbol 8R are the same symbol and are temporarily stopped. For this reason, in the pseudo-continuous performance A at the time of specific fluctuation, the color of the movable accessory image KMG suggests the degree of expectation of winning when the movable accessory image KMG completes its movement to the advancing position and stops in the display mode in which the same pattern is aligned. can do. In the display mode where the movable accessory image KMG completes its movement to the advance position and stops, if the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are the same pattern and are temporarily stopped, then , the same symbol is stopped and displayed, a win is confirmed, a jackpot opening is started, and then a jackpot game in which a profit is given to the player is started.

When the movable accessory image KMG is displayed while being stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) at the advanced position, the movable accessory image KMG starts moving upward from the advanced position, as shown in FIG. 105(M). do. The movable accessory image KMG starts moving upward from the advance position. This completes the pseudo continuous performance. In addition, in the pseudo-continuous performance, when a reach is formed, the win is confirmed.

When the movable accessory image KMG starts moving upward from the advancing position, it is in the low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state, but it is performed in the low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non time saving state. From the non-time-saving performance (normal performance) to the specific gaming state performance that is executed after the jackpot game state and in the high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state), the original non-time-saving performance ( Return to normal performance). As a result, the performance of the specific game state ends.

As a result, the background image switches from the non-time-saving background image GG1 (underground image) to the time-saving background image KHG (city image) while in the low-accuracy, low-base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state. , returns to the original non-time saving background image GG1 (underground image).

At the timing when the background image switches from the time-saving background image KHG (city image) to the non-time-saving background image GG1 (underground image) (in other words, after the jackpot game state and in the high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state) The fluctuation icon 9C and the fluctuation display position are displayed again at the timing of switching from the specific game state performance executed in the non-time saving state to the non-time saving performance (normal performance) performed in the low probability low base state (normal state). Ru. Note that if the pending icon 9A (9B) exists, the pending icon 9A (9B) is also displayed again.

Furthermore, at the timing when the background image switches from the time-saving time background image KHG (city image) to the non-time-saving time background image GG1 (underground image) (in other words, after the jackpot game state and in the high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high base At the timing of switching from a performance in a specific game state executed in a state) to a non-time saving performance (normal performance) performed in a low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state), the composition of the performance symbols is in a non-time saving state. From non-time-saving performance (normal performance) performed in a low-probability low base state (normal state), to specific games performed in a high-probability time-saving state (high-probability high base state) after the jackpot game state. The state is switched from the state in which the performance has been switched to that in the state performance to the non-time-saving performance (normal performance) performed in the low-accuracy, low-base state (normal state) which is the non-time-saving state which is the original performance pattern configuration.

Here, the left production pattern 8L, which is composed of only the number symbols temporarily stopped on the center line mentioned above, is a coin-shaped three-dimensional object in which the character E symbol 8La is attached to the bright green number "5" symbol 8Lb. Switching to the image, the middle production pattern 8C consisting of only the number pattern temporarily stopped on the center line mentioned above is a coin-shaped pattern with a bright blue number ``6'' pattern 8Cb and a character F pattern 8Ca attached. The right effect pattern 8R, which switches to a three-dimensional image and consists of only the number symbols temporarily stopped on the center line mentioned above, is coin-shaped with a bright blue number "8" symbol 8Rb and a character H symbol 8Ra attached. Switch to 3D image. At this time, the small-sized left presentation pattern 8LZ, the small-sized medium presentation pattern 8CZ, and the small-sized right presentation pattern 8RZ are all in the process of changing performance (variation display) at high speed.

When the movable accessory image KMG moves upward from the advancing position and disappears from the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. The symbols are not aligned and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, and the specific variation (the variation with respect to the white variation icon 9C) ends. At the timing when the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the small left effect pattern 8LZ stops and displays the number "5" with bright green color, and the small medium effect pattern 8CZ is bright blue. The small right effect pattern 8RZ is stopped and displayed at the number "8" having a bright blue color. Accordingly, the white variation icon 9C is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a).

The player starts operating the handle 60 again, and when the game ball enters the first starting port 20 and the first holding icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable effect of the effect pattern is started. (Fluctuating display) is started, and if the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are not aligned with the same pattern and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, whereas the left effect pattern 8L, When the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are the same pattern and are stopped and displayed, a win is confirmed, a jackpot opening is started, and then a jackpot game in which a profit is given to the player is started. becomes.

In this way, in the specific fluctuation time pseudo-continuous performance A, the fluctuation for the white fluctuation icon 9C in FIG. As a specific variation in a certain low probability low base state (normal state), in this specific variation, a performance of a specific gaming state that is executed in a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state) after the jackpot gaming state. is now possible to execute. As a result, players can experience the performance of a specific gaming state, which previously could only be experienced in a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state) after a jackpot gaming state, in a low-accuracy, non-time-saving state. Since players have the opportunity to experience the low base state (normal state), they feel that the performance in the low base state (normal state), which is a non-time saving state, is monotonous. It can be made difficult.

In addition, in the specific fluctuation time pseudo-continuous performance A, the non-time saving performance ( Even if the performance changes from the normal performance) to the performance of a specific gaming state that is executed in the high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state) after the jackpot gaming state, when the performance of the specific gaming state ends, the original The specific fluctuation will end after returning to the non-time saving performance (normal performance). Although the game is actually progressing in a low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state, it is as if the game is progressing from a low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non time saving state to a high probability which is a time saving state. In the past, players are given the illusion of being controlled into a time-saving state (high-accuracy, high-base state), and then are forced to face the reality that they are still in a low-accuracy, low-base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state. It is possible to provide players with performances that are not available in other countries.

[Pseudo-continuous performance B during specific fluctuations]
Next, the specific variation time pseudo-continuous effect B will be explained with reference to FIG. 106. Here, it is assumed that the player is in a low-accuracy, low-base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state, and the player shoots the game ball so that it flows down the left game area 3A and hits the ball to the left. Play a game by. In the low accuracy low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state, the background image is the non-time saving background image GG1 (underground image). In a left-handed game, a non-time saving performance (normal performance) is performed in a low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state. In this non-time saving performance (normal performance), when the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols starts, first the left performance symbol 8L temporarily stops, then the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stops, and finally the middle performance symbol After 8C is temporarily stopped, the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at the same time (all at once). In addition, in a non-time saving performance (normal performance), the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R may temporarily stop at the same time, and finally the middle performance symbol 8C may temporarily stop, and the left performance symbol 8L and the middle performance symbol 8C may temporarily stop. And the right effect pattern 8R may temporarily stop at the same time (all at once).

The player shoots the game ball so that it flows down the left game area 3A, plays a game by hitting the game left, one game ball enters the first starting port 20, and about the game ball that entered the ball. is determined and displayed as the white first pending icon 9A by pre-reading. When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, there is no stocked pending icon 9A at all.

When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbols is started as shown in FIG. 106(A). At this time, variable presentation (fluctuating display) of small-sized presentation symbols such as the small-sized left presentation pattern 8LZ, the small-sized medium presentation pattern 8CZ, and the small-sized right presentation pattern 8RZ is also started.

When the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is started, two game balls enter the first starting port 20, and among the two game balls entering the first starting port 20, the first The game balls that have entered are determined and displayed as the white first reservation icon 9A through pre-reading, and the game balls that have entered last are determined and displayed as the white second reservation icon 9A through pre-reading. Accordingly, there are two stocked hold icons 9A.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 106(B), the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a is the center line, and on this center line, first, the number "1" with the left presentation pattern 8L in bright green is displayed. It temporarily stopped at a coin-shaped three-dimensional image with a symbol 8La of character A attached to the symbol 8Lb, and then a symbol 8Ra of character G was attached to the symbol 8Rb of the number "7" in which the right production symbol 8R had a bright red color. It temporarily stops at a coin-shaped three-dimensional image, and finally temporarily stops at a coin-shaped three-dimensional image in which the character E symbol 8Ca is attached to the number "5" symbol 8Cb in which the middle production symbol 8C is bright green, and then, The left presentation pattern 8L, middle presentation pattern 8C, and right presentation pattern 8R are the same pattern and are not aligned and are stopped and displayed, and a loss is confirmed. At the timing when the left effect pattern 8L, medium effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R stop and display, the small left effect pattern 8LZ stops and displays the bright green number "1," and the small medium effect pattern 8CZ stops and displays the bright green color. The small right production pattern 8RZ is stopped and displayed at the number "7" having a bright red color. Accordingly, the white variation icon 9C is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a).

When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbols is started as shown in FIG. 106(C). At this time, variable presentation (fluctuating display) of small-sized presentation symbols such as the small-sized left presentation pattern 8LZ, the small-sized medium presentation pattern 8CZ, and the small-sized right presentation pattern 8RZ is also started. When the white first hold icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white change icon 9C, the white second hold icon 9A moves to the right and becomes the white first hold icon 9A. Accordingly, there is one stocked pending icon 9A.

When the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols starts, after that, as shown in FIG. An upper shutter image USG1 forming a pair of upper and lower shutter images that moves downward from the upper side of the display screen 7a on the near side of the effect pattern 8C and the right effect image 8R appears, and also moves upward from the lower side of the display screen 7a. A lower shutter image LSG1 that constitutes a pair of upper and lower shutter images that move toward the lower side appears. As a result, the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1, which constitute a pair of upper and lower shutter images, suddenly appear in a display mode. Note that the shapes of the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1 here both have a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the lower side of the upper shutter image USG1 and the upper side of the lower shutter image LSG1 are both as described above. The shape is a horizontal straight line parallel to the center line of.

The upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1, which make up the pair of upper and lower shutter images that suddenly occur, occur during a left-handed game, that is, in a low-accuracy, low-base state (normal state) that is a non-time saving state. This occurs suddenly while the non-time-saving performance (normal performance) is in progress, and the fluctuation (variation with respect to the white fluctuation icon 9C) is regarded as a specific fluctuation, which is a low-probability low-base state that is a non-time-saving state. (normal state), it is a specific image that suggests the start of a performance of a specific gaming state that is executed in a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state) after the jackpot gaming state. The upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1, which constitute the pair of upper and lower shutter images that are the specific images, are displayed as a notice of the start of the performance of the specific game state, so that the performance of the specific game state will start soon. It is possible to tell the player what will happen.

The player's expectation of winning increases due to the upper shutter image USG1 and lower shutter image LSG1, which make up a pair of upper and lower shutter images, which are specific images that suddenly occur, and the player feels that the fluctuation (the fluctuation with respect to the white fluctuation icon 9C) increases. In order to gaze (concentrate), the operation of the handle 60 is stopped.

The upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1, which constitute a pair of upper and lower shutter images, imitate shutters and are of a predetermined monochrome color (for example, silver, beige, green, red, or yellow). (Here, the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1, which constitute the pair of upper and lower shutter images, are displayed in silver). The predetermined single color indicates the degree of expectation of winning, and the degree of expectation of winning increases in the order of silver → beige → green → red → purple → yellow (gold).

The fluctuation icon 9C is a specific game state that is executed in a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state) after the jackpot gaming state while being in a low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non time saving state. When the performance starts, it is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), so the color of the fluctuation icon 9C is changed in the performance of a specific game state to respond to the fluctuation (variation with respect to the fluctuation icon 9C). It is difficult to suggest the expected degree of success. Therefore, in the specific fluctuation time pseudo-continuous performance B, by setting the colors of the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1 that make up the pair of upper and lower shutter images to predetermined colors, the expectation level of winning for the performance of a specific game state is increased. , it can be suggested instead of the fluctuation icon 9C. The winning expectation set for the color of the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1 that constitute the pair of upper and lower shutter images is silver, which corresponds to the winning expectation set for the white color of the fluctuation icon 9C, Beige corresponds to the winning expectation set to the blue color of the fluctuation icon 9C, and green, red, purple, and yellow (gold) correspond to the winning expectation set to the green, red, purple, and yellow (gold) of the fluctuation icon 9C. Each corresponds to a degree.

Note that the colors of the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1 may jump up to a color with a high probability of winning, or may jump down to a color with a low probability of a probability of winning, depending on the color of the fluctuation icon 9C. Also, the relationship (rule) between the color of the fluctuation icon 9C and the colors of the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1 can be made difficult to understand.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 106(E), the upper shutter image USG1 constituting the pair of upper and lower shutter images moves downward, and the lower side of the upper shutter image USG1 forms a horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a. As the center line, reach this center line. In addition, the lower shutter image LSG1 constituting the pair of upper and lower shutter images moves upward, and the upper side of the lower shutter image LSG1 is centered on a horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a. reach. The downward movement speed of the upper shutter image USG1 and the upward movement speed of the lower shutter image LSG1 are the same speed, and the timing when the lower side of the upper shutter image USG1 reaches the center line and the downward movement speed of the lower shutter image USG1 are the same. The timing at which the upper side of the side shutter image LSG1 reaches the center line coincides with the timing.

As the upper shutter image USG1 moves downward, the first area extending from the upper side of the display screen 7a to the lower side of the upper shutter image USG1 is gradually covered and enlarged by the upper shutter image USG1. The area (part) of the displayed non-time-saving background image GG1 (underground image), left performance pattern 8L, middle performance pattern 8C, and right performance pattern 8R gradually covered by the upper shutter image USG1 becomes larger. Further, as the lower shutter image LSG1 moves upward, the second area extending from the lower side of the display screen 7a to the upper side of the lower shutter image LSG1 is gradually covered and enlarged by the lower shutter image LSG1. , the area (portion) where the non-time saving background image GG1 (underground image), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R displayed on the display screen 7a are gradually covered by the lower shutter image LSG1. growing. In addition, even if the lower shutter image LSG1 moves upward, the small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ are all placed at the frontmost side, so the high speed The small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ, which are being fluctuated (variably displayed), are obstructed by the lower shutter image LSG1 moving upward, and their visibility is obstructed. never be done.

When the lower side of the upper shutter image USG1 reaches the above-mentioned center line and the upper side of the lower shutter image LSG1 reaches the above-mentioned center line, the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1 form a pair of upper and lower shutter images. As a result, the entire display screen 7a is covered, resulting in a display mode as if the display screen 7a had been closed by a shutter. When the display mode is such that the shutter is closed, the upper horizontal character string forming the horizontal character string arranged on the surface along the lower side of the upper shutter image USG1 and the horizontal character string arranged on the surface along the upper side of the lower shutter image LSG1. The lower horizontal character strings forming the column match, and the horizontal character string "OARO" is completed. This horizontal character string "OARO" is the same horizontal character string as "OARO" formed on the surface of the second movable accessory 15, and is one of the character strings representing the world view expressed by the game board 2. be.

Due to the display mode in which the shutter is closed, the size of the upper shutter image USG1 becomes the size of the entire area above the above-mentioned center line of the display screen 7a. In other words, as the upper shutter image USG1 moves downward, the first area extending from the upper side of the display screen 7a to the lower side of the upper shutter image USG1 will eventually move away from the above-mentioned center line of the display screen 7a. This is the size of the entire upper area. Furthermore, due to the display mode in which the shutter is closed, the size of the lower shutter image LSG1 becomes the size of the entire area below the above-mentioned center line of the display screen 7a. In other words, as the lower shutter image LSG1 moves upward, the second area extending from the lower side of the display screen 7a to the upper side of the lower shutter image LSG1 finally reaches the above-mentioned center of the display screen 7a. This is the size of the entire area below the line.

When the display mode in which the shutter is closed is maintained for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds), the upper shutter image USG1 constituting the pair of upper and lower shutter images moves upward, as shown in FIGS. 106(F) and (G). In addition, the lower shutter image LSG1 forming the pair of upper and lower shutter images moves downward. In this way, the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1, which constitute the pair of upper and lower shutter images, move upward and downward so as to be separated from each other.

When the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1 that make up the pair of upper and lower shutter images start moving upward and downward so as to separate from each other, they are in a low-accuracy low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state. , from a non-time saving performance (normal performance) performed in a low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state, to a non-time saving performance (normal performance) performed in a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state) after the jackpot gaming state. The display switches to the specific game state and starts the specific game state.

As a result, in left-handed games, as mentioned above, although the non-time saving performance (normal performance) performed in the low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state progresses, the fluctuation (white fluctuation icon 9C) as a specific variation, it is executed in a low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state, but in a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state) after the jackpot gaming state. By starting the performance of the specific game state, the background image is switched from the non-time-saving background image GG1 (underground image) to the time-saving background image KHG (city image). The player can also determine whether or not the performance of a specific game state is being executed based on the background image.

At the timing when the background image switches from the non-time saving background image GG1 (underground image) to the time saving background image KHG (city image) (in other words, the non-time saving is performed in the low certainty low base state (normal state) which is the non-time saving state). At the timing of switching from the performance (normal performance) to the performance of a specific gaming state that is executed in the high probability time saving state (high probability high base state) after the jackpot gaming state) fluctuation icon 9C, hold icon 9A, fluctuation display The position is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a). Note that if the hold icon 9B exists, the hold icon 9B is also hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a). On the other hand, the left effect pattern 8L, medium effect pattern 8C, right effect pattern 8R, small left effect pattern 8LZ, small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and small right effect pattern 8RZ are not hidden (display screen 7a ), it remains in a fluctuating performance (fluctuating display).

The upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1, which constitute the pair of upper and lower shutter images, start moving upward and downward so as to separate from each other, and the upper shutter image USG1 disappears from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the lower shutter image USG1 disappears from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the lower shutter image When LSG1 disappears from the lower side of the display screen 7a, although the game is in a low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state, a pseudo continuous performance is started in the performance of the specific game state. In the pseudo continuous performance, the left performance symbol 8L, middle performance symbol 8C, and right performance symbol 8R, which started the fluctuation performance (fluctuating display), temporarily stop and start the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) again. Or do it multiple times. In the pseudo continuous performance, the order in which the performance symbols temporarily stop is different from the non-time saving performance (normal performance), first the left performance symbol 8L temporarily stops, then the middle performance symbol 8C temporarily stops, and finally the right performance symbol. 8R temporarily stops. In addition, in the pseudo-continuous performance, the higher the number of pseudo fluctuations, the higher the expectation of winning, and the maximum number of pseudo-numbers with the highest expectation of winning is set to 8 (for example, , the expectation of winning is higher when the number of pseudo fluctuations is 8 times than when the number of pseudo fluctuations is 5 times). Due to the pseudo fluctuation in the pseudo continuous performance (the time (variation time) for one pseudo fluctuation in the pseudo continuous performance is set to, for example, 2 seconds), temporary stop and re-variation may be caused. It can be performed rhythmically and at a good tempo, and the monotony of the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols due to the pseudo-continuous performance can be reduced. In addition, in the pseudo-continuous presentation B at the time of specific fluctuation, pseudo-variation is performed five times in the presentation of the specific game state.

Although the production of the specific game state is in a low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state at the time the performance of the specific game state is started, the composition of the production symbol is performed in a low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non time saving state. The game is switched from a non-time-saving performance (normal performance) that is performed to a specific game state performance that is executed in a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state) after the jackpot game state. In other words, the production patterns in FIGS. 106(A) to 106(E) are coin-shaped three-dimensional images, and include the number designs ``1'' to ``9'' and the character designs characters A to I. , whereas the production pattern in FIG. 106(F) is composed only of the number symbols ``1'' to ``9'', and the structure of the production pattern is switched.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 106(H), the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a is the center line, and on this center line, first, the number "4" having a bright blue color is displayed on the left direction pattern 8L. It is temporarily stopped, then it is temporarily stopped at the number "7" where the middle presentation pattern 8C is bright red, and finally it is temporarily stopped at the number "9" where the right presentation pattern 8R is bright green. At this time, the small-sized left presentation pattern 8LZ, the small-sized medium presentation pattern 8CZ, and the small-sized right presentation pattern 8RZ are all in the process of changing performance (variation display) at high speed. After that, as shown in FIG. 106(I), the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) is started again, it is temporarily stopped, the re-fluctuation and the temporary stop are repeated, and the pseudo fluctuation is performed 5 times (fifth pseudo series) , as shown in FIG. 106(J), first the left presentation pattern 8L temporarily stops at the bright green number "5", then the middle presentation pattern 8C temporarily stops at the bright blue number "6", Finally, the right production symbol 8R temporarily stops at the bright blue number "8". At this time, the small-sized left presentation pattern 8LZ, the small-sized medium presentation pattern 8CZ, and the small-sized right presentation pattern 8RZ are all in the process of changing performance (variation display) at high speed. In other words, in the pseudo-continuous presentation, the small left presentation pattern 8LZ, the small medium presentation pattern 8CZ, and the small right presentation pattern 8RZ are all in the process of changing performance (variation display) at high speed.

After that, while the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are temporarily stopped on the center line, as shown in FIG. 106(K), in front of the time saving background image KHG (city image). An upper shutter image USG2 that constitutes a pair of upper and lower shutter images that moves downward from the upper side of the display screen 7a appears on the front side of the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R. At the same time, a lower shutter image LSG2 forming a pair of upper and lower shutter images that moves upward from the lower side of the display screen 7a appears. As a result, the upper shutter image USG2 and the lower shutter image LSG2, which constitute a pair of upper and lower shutter images, suddenly appear in a display mode. Note that the upper shutter image USG2 and lower shutter image LSG2 that make up this pair of upper and lower shutter images have different shapes from the upper shutter image USG1 and lower shutter image LSG1 that make up the above-mentioned pair of upper and lower shutter images. Although the upper shutter image USG2 and the lower shutter image LSG2 both have a horizontally long rectangular shape, the lower side of the upper shutter image USG2 and the upper side of the lower shutter image LSG2 are both vertically arranged. It has a bent polyline shape.

The upper shutter image USG2 and the lower shutter image LSG2, which constitute the pair of upper and lower shutter images here, are in a low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state, but are after the jackpot gaming state and are high. This occurs suddenly during a pseudo continuous performance in a specific game state performance executed in a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state), and is a specific image that suggests the end of the performance in a specific game state. The upper shutter image USG2 and the lower shutter image LSG2, which constitute the pair of upper and lower shutter images that are the specific images, are displayed as a notice of the end of the performance of the specific game state, so that the performance of the specific game state will end soon. You can tell the player what you want to do.

Here, the upper shutter image USG2 and the lower shutter image LSG2, which constitute a pair of upper and lower shutter images, imitate shutters and are colored in a predetermined single color (for example, silver, beige, green, red, purple, (Here, the upper shutter image USG2 and lower shutter image LSG2, which make up the pair of upper and lower shutter images, are displayed in red.) The predetermined single color indicates the degree of expectation of winning, and the degree of expectation of winning increases in the order of silver → beige → green → red → purple → yellow (gold).

In addition, in the production of a specific game state, the variation icon 9C is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), so the color of the variation icon 9C is changed to indicate the variation (variation with respect to the variation icon 9C). It is difficult to suggest the expected degree of success. Therefore, in the specific fluctuation time pseudo-continuous performance B, by setting the shape and color of the upper shutter image USG2 and lower shutter image LSG2, which constitute the pair of upper and lower shutter images, to predetermined colors, the winning expectation for the performance of the specific game state is increased. The degree can be suggested by changing to the fluctuation icon 9C. The shapes of the upper shutter image USG2 and the lower shutter image LSG2 that make up the pair of upper and lower shutter images are different from the shapes of the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1 that make up the pair of upper and lower shutter images, and The expectation of winning set for the colors of the shutter image USG2 and the lower shutter image LSG2 is slightly higher.

Specifically, the winning expectation set for the color of the upper shutter image USG2 and the lower shutter image LSG2 that make up the pair of upper and lower shutter images is silver, which is the winning expectation set for the white color of the fluctuation icon 9C. Although it is higher than the expected hit level set to the blue color of the fluctuating icon 9C, it is lower than the expected hit level set to the blue color of the fluctuating icon 9C. The winning expectation level is lower than the set winning expectation level, and the green color is higher than the winning expectation level set in green for the fluctuation icon 9C, but lower than the winning expectation level set for the red fluctuation icon 9C. Although it is higher than the hit expectation set in red for the fluctuation icon 9C, it is lower than the hit expectation set in purple for the fluctuation icon 9C, and purple is the hit expectation set in purple for the fluctuation icon 9C. Although it is higher than the winning expectation set to yellow (gold) of the fluctuation icon 9C, it is lower than the winning expectation set to yellow (gold) of the fluctuation icon 9C, and higher than the winning expectation set to yellow (gold) of the fluctuation icon 9C.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 106(L), the upper shutter image USG2 constituting the pair of upper and lower shutter images moves downward, and the lower side of the upper shutter image USG2 forms a horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a. As the center line, reach on this center line. Further, the lower shutter image LSG2 constituting the pair of upper and lower shutter images moves upward, and the upper side of the lower shutter image LSG2 is set on the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a as the center line, and the upper side of the lower shutter image LSG2 is on the center line. reach. The downward movement speed of the upper shutter image USG2 and the upward movement speed of the lower shutter image LSG2 are the same speed, and the timing when the lower side of the upper shutter image USG2 reaches the center line and the downward movement speed of the lower shutter image USG2 are the same. The timing at which the upper side of the side shutter image LSG2 reaches the center line coincides with the timing.

As the upper shutter image USG2 moves downward, the third area extending from the upper side of the display screen 7a to the lower side of the upper shutter image USG2 is gradually covered and enlarged by the upper shutter image USG2. The area (portion) where the displayed time-saving background image KHG (city image), left performance pattern 8L, middle performance pattern 8C, and right performance pattern 8R are gradually covered by the upper shutter image USG2 becomes larger. Furthermore, as the lower shutter image LSG2 moves upward, a fourth area extending from the lower side of the display screen 7a to the upper side of the lower shutter image LSG2 is gradually covered and enlarged by the lower shutter image LSG2. , the area (portion) of the time-saving background image KHG (city image), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R displayed on the display screen 7a that are gradually covered by the lower shutter image LSG2 is large. Become. In addition, even if the lower shutter image LSG2 moves upward, the small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ are all placed closest to you, so the high speed The small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ, which are being fluctuated (variably displayed), are obstructed by the lower shutter image LSG2 moving upward, and their visibility is obstructed. never be done.

When the lower side of the upper shutter image USG2 reaches the above-mentioned center line and the upper side of the lower shutter image LSG2 reaches the above-mentioned center line, the polygonal lower side of the upper shutter image USG2 constituting the pair of upper and lower shutter images and , and the polygonal line-shaped upper side of the lower shutter image LSG2 constituting the pair of upper and lower shutter images fit together in a comb-teeth shape, so that the entire display screen 7a was covered by the upper shutter image USG2 and the lower shutter image LSG2. The display screen 7a becomes in a display mode as if it were closed by a shutter. In the display mode with the shutter closed, the upper horizontal character string forming the horizontal character string arranged on the surface along the lower side of the upper shutter image USG2 and the horizontal character string arranged on the surface along the upper side of the lower shutter image LSG2. The lower horizontal character strings forming the column match, and the horizontal character string "OARO" is completed. This horizontal character string "OARO" is the same horizontal character string as "OARO" formed on the surface of the second movable accessory 15, and is one of the character strings representing the world view expressed by the game board 2. be.

Due to the display mode in which the shutter is closed, the size of the upper shutter image USG2 becomes the size of the entire area above the above-mentioned center line of the display screen 7a. In other words, as the upper shutter image USG2 moves downward, the third area extending from the upper side of the display screen 7a to the lower side of the upper shutter image USG1 will eventually move away from the above-mentioned center line of the display screen 7a. This is the size of the entire upper area. Further, due to the display mode in which the shutter is closed, the size of the lower shutter image LSG2 becomes the size of the entire area below the above-mentioned center line of the display screen 7a. In other words, as the lower shutter image LSG2 moves upward, the fourth area extending from the lower side of the display screen 7a to the upper side of the lower shutter image LSG1 finally reaches the above-mentioned center of the display screen 7a. This is the size of the entire area below the line.

In addition, until just before the shutter closes, as mentioned above, the left presentation pattern 8L temporarily stops at the bright green number "5", the middle presentation pattern 8C temporarily stops at the bright blue number "6", and the right The production pattern 8R was temporarily stopped at the bright blue number "8". However, in the display mode where the shutter is closed, the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R cannot be visually recognized, but the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are the same pattern. In some cases, the brakes are temporarily stopped at the same time. Therefore, in the specific fluctuation time pseudo-continuous performance B, the expectation of winning is that the colors of the upper shutter image USG2 and the lower shutter image LSG2, which make up the pair of upper and lower shutter images, will align to the same symbol in the display mode in which the shutter is closed. can be suggested. In the display mode where the shutter is closed, if the left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R are the same pattern and temporarily stop, then the same pattern will be stopped and displayed, and the winning will occur. Once this is confirmed, a jackpot opening is started, and then a jackpot game in which a profit is given to the player is started.

When the display mode in which the shutter is closed is maintained for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds), the upper shutter image USG2 that makes up the pair of upper and lower shutter images moves upward, and The lower shutter image LSG2 constituting the pair of shutter images moves downward. In this way, the upper shutter image USG2 and the lower shutter image LSG2, which constitute the pair of upper and lower shutter images, move upward and downward so as to be separated from each other. This completes the pseudo continuous performance. In addition, in the pseudo-continuous performance, when a reach is formed, a win is confirmed.

When the upper shutter image USG2 and the lower shutter image LSG2, which constitute the pair of upper and lower shutter images, start moving upward and downward so as to be separated from each other, they are in a low-accuracy low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state. , from a non-time saving performance (normal performance) performed in a low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state, to a non-time saving performance (normal performance) performed in a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state) after the jackpot gaming state. The state where the performance has been switched to the specific game state returns to the original non-time saving performance (normal performance). As a result, the performance of the specific game state ends.

As a result, the background image has been switched from the non-time-saving background image GG1 (underground image) to the time-saving background image KHG (city image) while in the low-accuracy, low-base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state. , returns to the original non-time saving background image GG1 (underground image).

At the timing when the background image switches from the time-saving time background image KHG (city image) to the non-time-saving time background image GG1 (underground image) (in other words, after the jackpot game state and in the high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state)) At the timing of switching from the specific game state performance executed in the non-time saving state to the non-time saving performance (normal performance) performed in the low probability low base state (normal state)) the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the variable display position will be displayed again. Note that if the hold icon 9B exists, the hold icon 9B is also displayed again.

Furthermore, at the timing when the background image switches from the time-saving time background image KHG (city image) to the non-time-saving time background image GG1 (underground image) (in other words, after the jackpot game state and in the high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high base At the timing of switching from a performance in a specific game state executed in a state) to a non-time saving performance (normal performance) performed in a low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state), the composition of the performance symbols is in a non-time saving state. From non-time-saving performance (normal performance) performed in a low-probability low base state (normal state), to specific games performed in a high-probability time-saving state (high-probability high base state) after the jackpot game state. The state is switched from the state in which the performance has been switched to that in the state performance to the non-time-saving performance (normal performance) performed in the low-accuracy, low-base state (normal state) which is the non-time-saving state which is the original performance pattern configuration.

Here, the left production pattern 8L, which is composed of only the number symbols temporarily stopped on the center line, is a coin-shaped three-dimensional object in which the character E symbol 8La is attached to the bright green number "5" symbol 8Lb. Switching to the image, the middle effect pattern 8C, which is composed of only the number patterns temporarily stopped on the center line mentioned above, is a coin-shaped pattern with a bright blue number ``6'' pattern 8Cb and a character F pattern 8Ca attached. The right effect pattern 8R, which switches to a three-dimensional image and consists of only the number patterns temporarily stopped on the center line mentioned above, is coin-shaped with a bright blue number "8" pattern 8Rb and a character H pattern 8Ra attached. Switch to 3D image. At this time, the small-sized left presentation pattern 8LZ, the small-sized medium presentation pattern 8CZ, and the small-sized right presentation pattern 8RZ are all in the process of changing performance (variation display) at high speed.

The upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1, which constitute the pair of upper and lower shutter images, start moving upward and downward so as to be separated from each other, and the upper shutter image USG1 disappears from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the lower shutter image USG1 disappears from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the lower shutter image When LSG1 disappears from the lower side of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 106(N), the left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R are the same symbols and are not aligned and are stopped and displayed, resulting in a loss. is determined, and the specific variation (the variation with respect to the white variation icon 9C) ends. At the timing when the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R stop and display, the small left effect pattern 8LZ stops and displays the bright green number "5," and the small medium effect pattern 8CZ stops and displays the bright blue color. The small right production pattern 8RZ is stopped and displayed at the number "8" having a bright blue color. Accordingly, the white variation icon 9C is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a).

The player starts operating the handle 60 again, and when the first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbols starts, and the left presentation symbol 8L, If the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are the same and are not aligned and are stopped and displayed, a loss is confirmed, whereas the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are the same pattern. When all are stopped and displayed, a win is confirmed, a jackpot opening is started, and then a jackpot game in which a profit is given to the player is started.

In this way, in the specific fluctuation time pseudo-continuous performance B, the fluctuation for the white fluctuation icon 9C in FIG. As a specific variation in a certain low probability low base state (normal state), in this specific variation, a performance of a specific gaming state that is executed in a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state) after the jackpot gaming state. is now possible to execute. As a result, players can experience the performance of a specific gaming state, which previously could only be experienced in a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state) after a jackpot gaming state, in a low-accuracy, non-time-saving state. Since players have the opportunity to experience the low base state (normal state), they feel that the performance in the low base state (normal state), which is a non-time saving state, is monotonous. It can be made difficult.

In addition, in the specific fluctuation time pseudo-continuous performance B, while the non-time saving state is a low probability low base state (normal state), the non-time saving performance ( Even if the performance changes from the normal performance) to the performance of a specific gaming state that is executed in the high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state) after the jackpot gaming state, when the performance of the specific gaming state ends, the original The specific fluctuation will end after returning to the non-time saving performance (normal performance). Although the game is actually progressing in a low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state, it is as if the game is progressing from a low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non time saving state to a high probability which is a time saving state. In the past, players are given the illusion of being controlled into a time-saving state (high-accuracy, high-base state), and then are forced to face the reality that they are still in a low-accuracy, low-base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state. It is possible to provide players with performances that are not available in other countries.

[Pseudo-continuous performance C during specific fluctuations]
Next, the specific variation time pseudo-continuous effect C will be explained with reference to FIG. 107. Here, it is assumed that the player is in a low-accuracy, low-base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state, and the player shoots the game ball so that it flows down the left game area 3A and hits the ball to the left. Play a game by. In the low accuracy low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state, the background image is the non-time saving background image GG1 (underground image). In a left-handed game, a non-time saving performance (normal performance) is performed in a low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state. In this non-time saving performance (normal performance), when the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols starts, first the left performance symbol 8L temporarily stops, then the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stops, and finally the middle performance symbol After 8C is temporarily stopped, the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at the same time (all at once). In addition, in a non-time saving performance (normal performance), the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R may temporarily stop at the same time, and finally the middle performance symbol 8C may temporarily stop, and the left performance symbol 8L and the middle performance symbol 8C may temporarily stop. And the right effect pattern 8R may temporarily stop at the same time (all at once).

The player plays a game by firing the game ball so that it flows down the left game area 3A, and one game ball enters the first starting port 20, and regarding the entered game ball. is determined and displayed as the yellow (gold) first pending icon 9A by pre-reading. The yellow (gold) first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the yellow (gold) variable icon 9C. The player's expectation of winning increases as the yellow (gold) first pending icon 9A is displayed and the yellow (gold) fluctuation icon 9C becomes visible. In order to observe (concentrate on) the changes in the amount of time, the user stops operating the handle 60, and as a result, there is no stocked hold icon 9A at all.

When the yellow (gold) first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the yellow (gold) variable icon 9C, the variable effect (fluctuating display) of the effect pattern starts, as shown in FIG. 107(A). be done. At this time, variable presentation (fluctuating display) of small-sized presentation symbols such as the small-sized left presentation pattern 8LZ, the small-sized medium presentation pattern 8CZ, and the small-sized right presentation pattern 8RZ is also started.

Since it is a fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of performance symbols in a low-accuracy, low-base state (normal state) that is a non-time saving state, the configurations of the left performance symbol 8L, middle performance symbol 8C, and right performance symbol 8R are coins. It is a three-dimensional image of a shape, and is made up of numeric designs of numbers "1" to "9" and character designs of characters A to I.

When the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is started, as shown in FIG. An upper shutter image USG1 forming a pair of upper and lower shutter images that moves downward from the upper side of the display screen 7a on the near side of the effect pattern 8C and the right effect image 8R appears, and also moves upward from the lower side of the display screen 7a. A lower shutter image LSG1 that constitutes a pair of upper and lower shutter images that move toward each other appears. As a result, the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1, which constitute a pair of upper and lower shutter images, suddenly appear in a display mode. Note that the shapes of the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1 here are both horizontally long rectangular shapes, and the lower side of the upper shutter image USG1 and the upper side of the lower shutter image LSG1 are both The shape is a horizontal straight line parallel to the horizontal line (center line) passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a.

The upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1, which make up the pair of upper and lower shutter images that suddenly occur, occur during a left-handed game, that is, in a low-accuracy, low-base state (normal state) that is a non-time saving state. This occurs suddenly while a non-time-saving performance (normal performance) is in progress, and the fluctuation (variation with respect to the yellow (gold) fluctuation icon 9C) is regarded as a specific fluctuation, and is a low probability that is a non-time-saving state. Although it is a low base state (normal state), it is a specific image that suggests the start of a performance of a specific gaming state that is executed in a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state) after the jackpot gaming state. . The upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1, which constitute the pair of upper and lower shutter images that are the specific images, are displayed as a notice of the start of the performance of the specific game state, so that the performance of the specific game state will start soon. It is possible to tell the player what will happen.

The player's expectation of winning is further increased by the upper shutter image USG1 and lower shutter image LSG1, which constitute a pair of upper and lower shutter images, which are specific images that suddenly appear. Incidentally, even if the player continues to operate the handle 60 up to this point, the player stops firing useless balls because the expectation of winning increases due to the upper shutter image USG1 and lower shutter image LSG1. Therefore, the operation of the handle 60 is stopped.

The upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1, which constitute a pair of upper and lower shutter images, imitate shutters, and are of a predetermined monochrome color (for example, silver, beige, green, red, or yellow). is displayed. The predetermined single color indicates the degree of expectation of winning, and the degree of expectation of winning increases in the order of silver → beige → green → red → purple → yellow (gold).

The fluctuation icon 9C is a specific game state that is executed in a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state) after the jackpot gaming state while being in a low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state. When the effect is started, it is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), so in the effect of a specific game state, the color of the variation icon 9C is changed to respond to the variation (variation with respect to the variation icon 9C). It is difficult to suggest the expected degree of success. Therefore, in the specific fluctuation time pseudo-continuous performance C, by setting the colors of the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1 that make up the pair of upper and lower shutter images to predetermined colors, the expectation level of winning for the performance of a specific game state is increased. , it can be suggested instead of the fluctuation icon 9C. The winning expectation set in the colors of the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1, which constitute the pair of upper and lower shutter images, is silver, which corresponds to the winning expectation set in the white color of the fluctuation icon 9C. Beige corresponds to the winning expectation set to the blue color of the fluctuation icon 9C, and green, red, purple, and yellow (gold) correspond to the winning expectation set to the green, red, purple, and yellow (gold) of the fluctuation icon 9C. Each corresponds to a degree.

Note that the colors of the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1 may jump up to a color with a high probability of winning, or may jump down to a color with a low probability of a probability of winning, depending on the color of the fluctuation icon 9C. Also, the relationship (rule) between the color of the fluctuation icon 9C and the colors of the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1 can be made difficult to understand.

Here, the color of the upper shutter image USG1 and lower shutter image LSG1, which constitute the pair of upper and lower shutter images, is intentionally displayed in silver, which has the lowest expectation of winning. This is because the color of the fluctuation icon 9C is already displayed as yellow (gold), which suggests that there is a high expectation of winning, and gives players a sense of expectation. By setting the color of the lower shutter image LSG1 to silver, which has the lowest probability of winning, the color of the fluctuation icon 9C does not necessarily jump up to the color with the highest probability of winning, as described above. By jumping down to a color with a low probability of winning, the aim is to make the relationships (rules) difficult to understand and make players anxious. Of course, since the color of the fluctuation icon 9C is already displayed as yellow (gold), the color of the upper shutter image USG1 and lower shutter image LSG1 may also be yellow (gold).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 107(C), the upper shutter image USG1 constituting the pair of upper and lower shutter images moves downward, and the lower side of the upper shutter image USG1 forms a horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a. As the center line, reach on this center line. Further, the lower shutter image LSG1 constituting the pair of upper and lower shutter images moves upward, and the upper side of the lower shutter image LSG1 is on the center line with the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a as the center line. reach. The downward movement speed of the upper shutter image USG1 and the upward movement speed of the lower shutter image LSG1 are the same speed, and the timing when the lower side of the upper shutter image USG1 reaches the center line and the downward movement speed of the lower shutter image USG1 are the same. The timing at which the upper side of the side shutter image LSG1 reaches the center line coincides with the timing.

As the upper shutter image USG1 moves downward, the first area extending from the upper side of the display screen 7a to the lower side of the upper shutter image USG1 is gradually covered and enlarged by the upper shutter image USG1. The area (part) of the displayed non-time-saving background image GG1 (underground image), left performance pattern 8L, middle performance pattern 8C, and right performance pattern 8R gradually covered by the upper shutter image USG1 becomes larger. Further, as the lower shutter image LSG1 moves upward, the second area extending from the lower side of the display screen 7a to the upper side of the lower shutter image LSG1 is gradually covered and enlarged by the lower shutter image LSG1. , the area (portion) where the non-time saving background image GG1 (underground image), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R displayed on the display screen 7a are gradually covered by the lower shutter image LSG1. growing. In addition, even if the lower shutter image LSG1 moves upward, the small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ are all placed at the frontmost side, so the high speed The small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ, which are being fluctuated (variably displayed), are obstructed by the lower shutter image LSG1 moving upward, and their visibility is obstructed. never be done.

When the lower side of the upper shutter image USG1 reaches the above-mentioned center line and the upper side of the lower shutter image LSG1 reaches the above-mentioned center line, the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1 form a pair of upper and lower shutter images. As a result, the entire display screen 7a is covered, resulting in a display mode as if the display screen 7a had been closed by a shutter. When the display mode is such that the shutter is closed, the upper horizontal character string forming the horizontal character string arranged on the surface along the lower side of the upper shutter image USG1 and the horizontal character string arranged on the surface along the upper side of the lower shutter image LSG1. The lower horizontal character strings forming the column match, and the horizontal character string "OARO" is completed. This horizontal character string "OARO" is the same horizontal character string as "OARO" formed on the surface of the second movable accessory 15, and is one of the character strings representing the world view expressed by the game board 2. be.

Due to the display mode in which the shutter is closed, the size of the upper shutter image USG1 becomes the size of the entire area above the above-mentioned center line of the display screen 7a. In other words, as the upper shutter image USG1 moves downward, the first area extending from the upper side of the display screen 7a to the lower side of the upper shutter image USG1 will eventually move away from the above-mentioned center line of the display screen 7a. This is the size of the entire upper area. Furthermore, due to the display mode in which the shutter is closed, the size of the lower shutter image LSG1 becomes the size of the entire area below the above-mentioned center line of the display screen 7a. In other words, as the lower shutter image LSG1 moves upward, the second area extending from the lower side of the display screen 7a to the upper side of the lower shutter image LSG1 finally reaches the above-mentioned center of the display screen 7a. This is the size of the entire area below the line.

When the display mode in which the shutter is closed is maintained for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds), the upper shutter image USG1 constituting the pair of upper and lower shutter images moves upward, as shown in FIGS. 107(D) and (E). In addition, the lower shutter image LSG1 forming the pair of upper and lower shutter images moves downward. In this way, the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1, which constitute the pair of upper and lower shutter images, move upward and downward so as to be separated from each other.

When the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1 that make up the pair of upper and lower shutter images start moving upward and downward so as to separate from each other, they are in a low-accuracy low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state. , from a non-time saving performance (normal performance) performed in a low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state, to a non-time saving performance (normal performance) performed in a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state) after the jackpot gaming state. The display switches to the specific game state and starts the specific game state.

As a result, in left-handed games, as mentioned above, although the non-time saving performance (normal performance) performed in the low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state progresses, the fluctuation (yellow (gold) (variation with respect to the fluctuation icon 9C) as a specific variation, it is in a low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state, but is in a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state) after the jackpot gaming state. By starting the performance of the specific game state executed in , the background image is switched from the non-time-saving background image GG1 (underground image) to the time-saving background image KHG (city image). The player can also determine whether or not the performance of a specific game state is being executed based on the background image.

At the timing when the background image switches from the non-time saving background image GG1 (underground image) to the time saving background image KHG (city image) (in other words, the non-time saving is performed in the low certainty low base state (normal state) which is the non-time saving state). At the timing of switching from the performance (normal performance) to the performance of a specific gaming state that is executed in the high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state) after the jackpot game state), the fluctuation icon 9C and the fluctuation display position are hidden. (disappears from the display screen 7a). Note that when the hold icon 9A (9B) exists, the hold icon 9A (9B) is also hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a). On the other hand, the left effect pattern 8L, medium effect pattern 8C, right effect pattern 8R, small left effect pattern 8LZ, small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and small right effect pattern 8RZ are not hidden (display screen 7a ), it remains in a fluctuating performance (fluctuating display).

The upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1, which constitute the pair of upper and lower shutter images, start moving upward and downward so as to separate from each other, and the upper shutter image USG1 disappears from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the lower shutter image USG1 disappears from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the lower shutter image When LSG1 disappears from the lower side of the display screen 7a, although the game is in a low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state, a pseudo continuous performance is started in the performance of the specific game state. In the pseudo continuous performance, the left performance symbol 8L, middle performance symbol 8C, and right performance symbol 8R, which started the fluctuation performance (fluctuating display), temporarily stop and start the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) again. Or do it multiple times. In the pseudo continuous performance, the order in which the performance symbols temporarily stop is different from the non-time saving performance (normal performance), first the left performance symbol 8L temporarily stops, then the middle performance symbol 8C temporarily stops, and finally the right performance symbol. 8R temporarily stops. In addition, in the pseudo-continuous performance, the higher the number of pseudo fluctuations, the higher the expectation of winning, and the maximum number of pseudo-numbers with the highest expectation of winning is set to 8 (for example, , the expectation of winning is higher when the number of pseudo fluctuations is 8 times than when the number of pseudo fluctuations is 3 times). Due to the pseudo fluctuation in the pseudo continuous performance (the time (variation time) for one pseudo fluctuation in the pseudo continuous performance is set to, for example, 2 seconds), temporary stop and re-variation may be caused. It can be performed rhythmically and at a good tempo, and the monotony of the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols due to the pseudo-continuous performance can be reduced. In addition, in the pseudo-continuous performance C at the time of specific fluctuation, pseudo fluctuations are performed eight times in the performance of the specific game state.

Although the production of the specific game state is in a low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state at the time the performance of the specific game state is started, the composition of the production symbol is performed in a low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non time saving state. The game is switched from a non-time-saving performance (normal performance) that is performed to a specific game state performance that is executed in a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state) after the jackpot game state. In other words, the production patterns in FIGS. 107(A) to 107(C) are coin-shaped three-dimensional images, and include numbers "1" to "9" which are numerical designs, and characters A to I which are character designs. , whereas the effect pattern in FIG. 107(D) is formed only from the number symbols ``1'' to ``9'', and the structure of the effect pattern is switched.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 107(F), the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a is the center line, and the left direction pattern 8L is first marked with the number "4" having a bright blue color on this center line. It is temporarily stopped, then it is temporarily stopped at the number "7" where the middle performance pattern 8C is bright red, and finally it is temporarily stopped at the number "9" where the right performance pattern 8R is bright green. At this time, the small-sized left presentation pattern 8LZ, the small-sized medium presentation pattern 8CZ, and the small-sized right presentation pattern 8RZ are all in the process of changing performance (variation display) at high speed. After that, as shown in FIG. 107 (G), the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) is started again, temporarily stopped, and the re-fluctuation and temporary stop are repeated, and the pseudo fluctuation is performed 8 times (8th pseudo series) , as shown in FIG. 107(H), here the rule is broken and the left presentation pattern 8L temporarily stops at the bright red number "7", and then the right presentation pattern 8R stops at the bright red number 7. It temporarily stops at "7", the medium effect pattern 8C becomes variable effect (fluctuating display), and a reach is formed. The pseudo continuous performance ends when the reach is formed. In addition, in the pseudo-continuous performance, when a reach is formed, a win is confirmed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 107(I), on the front side of the time-saving background image KHG (city image), behind the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R, a golden color shines. The winged ally character CRA is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a, and then the middle effect pattern 8C temporarily stops at the bright red number "7," followed by the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern. All 8Rs temporarily stop at the bright red number "7".

Thereafter, the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are stopped and displayed as the same symbol (here, the bright red number "7"), and a win is confirmed. At the timing when the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R stop and display, the small left effect pattern 8LZ stops and displays the bright red number "7," and the small medium effect pattern 8CZ stops and displays the bright red color. The small right production pattern 8RZ is stopped and displayed at the number "7" having a bright red color. That is, the small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ are also stopped and displayed as the same pattern (here, the number "7" having a bright red color).

As the left production symbol 8L, middle production symbol 8C, and right production symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the bright red number "7", the gaming state after the jackpot becomes a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state). .

After that, as shown in FIG. 107(J), the background image switches from the time-saving background image KHG (city image) to the jackpot opening background image AOG, which is the background image of the jackpot opening, and at this time, the background image has golden shining wings. The ally character CRA, the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and a jackpot opening is started. When the jackpot opening starts, a large message image MS1 "Jackpot" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the game ball is launched from the left-handed game so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B. In order to switch to a right-handed game, a right-handed game image MY with "right-handed game" written in the right arrow image is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a. Since the right-handed image MY is an image that suggests to the player that the game is played by right-handed players, it is an image that suggests the game state of "right-handed game." In addition, the right-handed image MY is always placed and displayed at the forefront in right-handed games such as the jackpot game state and the time saving state, and is obstructed by various effect images and other various images. visibility is not obstructed.

Even when the jackpot opening starts, the small left effect symbol 8LZ, the small medium effect symbol 8CZ, and the small right effect symbol 8RZ are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the bright red number "7"). The current state is maintained.

After that, as shown in FIG. 107(K), the background image switches from the jackpot opening background image AOG to the jackpot game background image RHG1, which is the background image of the jackpot game, and a jackpot game advantageous to the player starts. . Accordingly, the player starts operating the handle 60 again and plays a right-handed game. When the jackpot game starts, a round image RG called "Round 1" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, informing the player of the number of rounds currently being played. In addition, even if the jackpot game starts, the small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ will stop at the same pattern (here, the bright red number "7"). The displayed state is maintained.

After that, as shown in FIG. 107(L), when all rounds are played in the jackpot game, the background image switches from the jackpot game background image RHG1 to the jackpot ending background image AEG, which is the background image of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot ending starts. be done. When the jackpot ending starts, a message image MS2 indicating the number of game balls acquired by the player in the jackpot game, "Total: XXXX GET" (XXXX indicates the number of balls) is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Displayed large. In addition, even if the jackpot ending starts, the small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ will stop at the same pattern (here, the bright red number "7"). The displayed state is maintained.

After that, as shown in FIG. 107(M), when the jackpot ending ends, the background image switches from the jackpot ending background image AEG to the time-saving background image KHG (city image), and the low probability low base state (which is a non-time saving state) Normal state) is controlled to a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state), which is a time-saving state, and the production of a specific game state is started, and the left production symbol 8L, which is stopped and displayed on the above-mentioned center line, is controlled again. Production pattern 8C, the right production pattern, appears. At this time, the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern are stopped and displayed as the same pattern (here, the number "7" having a bright red color). At this point, the pending icons 9A and 9B do not exist at all.

After that, two game balls entered the second starting port 21 due to the game by hitting right-handed, and among the two game balls entering the second starting port 21, the player received the first game ball that entered the ball. The game ball that entered last is determined and displayed as the white first reservation icon 9B by pre-reading, and the game ball that entered last is determined and displayed as the white second reservation icon 9B by pre-reading. As a result, there are two stocked pending icons 9B.

When the white first pending icon 9B moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, the variable performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is started as shown in FIG. 107(N). At this time, variable presentation (fluctuating display) of small-sized presentation symbols such as the small-sized left presentation pattern 8LZ, the small-sized medium presentation pattern 8CZ, and the small-sized right presentation pattern 8RZ is also started. When the white first pending icon 9B moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, the white second pending icon 9B moves to the left and becomes the white first pending icon 9A. Accordingly, there is one stocked hold icon 9A.

After that, if the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are not aligned with the same pattern and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, whereas the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern are stopped. When the performance symbols 8R are all the same and are stopped and displayed, a win is confirmed, a jackpot opening is started, and then a jackpot game in which a profit is given to the player is started.

In this way, in the specific fluctuation time pseudo-continuous effect C, the fluctuation for the yellow (gold) fluctuation icon 9C in FIG. As a specific variation in a low probability low base state (normal state) which is a time saving state, in this specific variation, a specific game that is executed in a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state) after the jackpot game state It is now possible to perform state effects. As a result, players can experience the performance of a specific gaming state, which previously could only be experienced in a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy, high base state) after the jackpot gaming state, in a low-accuracy, non-time-saving state. Since players are given the opportunity to experience the low base state (normal state), they feel that the performance in the low base state (normal state), which is a non-time saving state, is monotonous. It can be made difficult.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the pseudo-continuous effect at the time of specific fluctuation is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the performance of a specific gaming state that is executed after the jackpot gaming state (winning gaming state) can be executed in a specific variation before the jackpot gaming state (winning gaming state) occurs. (Fig. 105 (F) to (L) for pseudo continuous effect A at specific fluctuation, Fig. 106 (F) to (K) for pseudo continuous effect B at specific change, pseudo continuous effect C at specific change) Now, see Figures 107 (D) to (I)). According to this configuration, the player can enjoy the performance of a specific gaming state, which could conventionally only be experienced after the jackpot gaming state (winning gaming state), before the jackpot playing state (winning gaming state) occurs. Now you have the opportunity to experience it. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that the performance before the jackpot game state (win game state) occurs is monotonous. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when a specific variation is started in the specific variation pseudo continuous performance A shown in FIG. 105, the specific variation pseudo continuous performance B shown in FIG. 106, and the specific variation pseudo continuous performance C shown in FIG. , a specific image is displayed, then the specific image disappears, and a specific game state effect is executed. Specifically, in the specific variation time pseudo-continuous performance A, the variation for the white variation icon 9C in FIG. When a specific variation is started, the movable accessory image KMG (specific image) is displayed in FIGS. 105(B) to (F), and then disappears, and the movable accessory image KMG (specific image) is displayed in FIGS. 105(F) to (L). The performance is now executed. In the specific variation time pseudo-continuous performance B, the variation for the white variation icon 9C in FIG. 106(D) to (F), the upper shutter image USG1 (specific image) and lower shutter image LSG1 (specific image) that constitute a pair of upper and lower shutter images are displayed, and then disappear. Performances of specific game states in (F) to (K) are executed. In the specific variation time pseudo-continuous performance C, the variation for the yellow (gold) variation icon 9C in FIG. When the fluctuation starts, the upper shutter image USG1 (specific image) and the lower shutter image LSG1 (specific image) that constitute the pair of upper and lower shutter images in FIGS. 107(B) to (D) are displayed, and then disappear. , the effects of the specific game state shown in FIGS. 107(D) to (I) are executed. According to this configuration, instead of suddenly executing the performance of a specific gaming state that is executed after the jackpot gaming state (winning gaming state) at the timing when a specific fluctuation starts, a specific image is displayed first, and then By disappearing, it can be used as a notice of the start of the performance of the specific game state, and it is possible to subtly inform the player that the performance of the specific game state will start soon.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a specific image is displayed during the performance of a specific game state in the specific fluctuation time pseudo continuous performance A in FIG. 105 and the specific fluctuation time pseudo continuous performance B in FIG. When the image disappears, the performance of the specific game state ends and the specific variation ends. Specifically, in the specific variation time pseudo-continuous effect A, the movable accessory image KMG (specific image) is displayed in FIGS. 105 (K) to (M) during the execution of the specific game state effect, and then disappears. Then, the presentation of the specific game state ends, and the specific variation ends in FIG. 105(N). In the specific variation time pseudo-continuous performance B, during the performance of the specific game state, the upper shutter image USG2 (specific image) and the lower shutter image that constitute a pair of upper and lower shutter images in FIGS. 106(K) to (M) are LSG2 (specific image) is displayed, then disappears, and the specific variation ends in FIG. 106(N). According to this configuration, instead of suddenly ending the production of a specific game state at the timing when a specific variation ends, a specific image is first displayed and then disappears, giving a notice of the end of the production of a specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to subtly inform the player that the performance of the specific game state will end soon.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the performance of the specific game state in the pseudo continuous performance A at specific fluctuation time in FIG. 105, the pseudo continuous performance B at specific fluctuation time in FIG. 106, and the pseudo continuous performance C at specific fluctuation time in FIG. A continuous performance can be executed multiple times, and if a reach is formed in a pseudo continuous performance, it becomes a win. According to this configuration, it is possible to notify the player of a win at the stage when a reach is formed in a pseudo-sequential performance, so that the player can be notified of a win during the period in which the pseudo-sequential performance is executed in a performance in a specific gaming state. Thus, it is possible to continue to give the player a sense of expectation of winning with respect to the variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbols (left presentation pattern 8L, middle presentation pattern 8C, right presentation pattern 8R).

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the specific images in the specific fluctuation time pseudo continuous performance A shown in FIG. 105, the specific fluctuation time pseudo continuous performance B shown in FIG. 106, and the specific fluctuation time pseudo continuous performance C shown in FIG. It is arranged in front of the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R (a set of effect patterns) that can be notified, and at least the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R (a set of It is now possible to cover the production pattern). Specifically, in the pseudo-continuous performance A at the time of specific fluctuation, the movable accessory images KMG (specific images) in FIGS. It is placed in front of the left direction pattern 8L, middle direction pattern 8C, and right direction pattern 8R (one set of direction patterns), and can cover at least a part or the entirety of the left direction pattern 8L, middle direction pattern 8C, and right direction pattern 8R (one set of direction patterns). ing. In the specific variation time pseudo-continuous effect B, the upper shutter image USG1 (specific image) and the lower shutter image LSG1 (specific image) that constitute the pair of upper and lower shutter images in FIGS. 106(D) to (F) are the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, right effect pattern 8R (a set of effect patterns) are placed in front of it, and at least a part of the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, right effect pattern 8R (a set of effect patterns) , or can be completely covered. In the specific variation time pseudo continuous effect C, the upper shutter image USG1 (specific image) and the lower shutter image LSG1 (specific image) that constitute the pair of upper and lower shutter images in FIGS. 107(B) to (D) are the left effect pattern. 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, right effect pattern 8R (a set of effect patterns) are placed in front of it, and at least a part of the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, right effect pattern 8R (a set of effect patterns) , or can be completely covered. According to this configuration, by covering the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R (a set of performance symbols) with the specific image, in addition to announcing the start of the performance of the specific game state, It is also possible to create a sense of expectation that the performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R (a set of performance symbols) may change into a winning symbol.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the pseudo-continuous effect at the time of a specific change is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the pseudo continuous effect in the specific variation time pseudo continuous effect A in FIG. 105 and the specific variation pseudo continuous effect B in FIG. In pseudo-continuous performance A, pseudo-variations are performed four times, and in the final stage, the fourth pseudo-continuation (Fig. 105 (J)), in pseudo-continuous performance B at the time of specific variation, pseudo-variations are performed five times, and the final (in Fig. 106 (J) of the pseudo continuous 5 sea level), in the pseudo continuous effect A at the time of a specific change, the movable accessory image KMG, which is a specific image that suggests the end of the specific effect, moves from the upper side of the display screen 7a to the lower side. The upper shutter image USG2 and the lower shutter image LSG2, which constitute a pair of upper and lower shutter images, are specific images that indicate the end of the specific effect in the specific variation time pseudo continuous effect B, and the lower shutter image LSG2 moves downward and upward. They appeared while moving. However, even before the pseudo fluctuation reaches the final round, a specific image may appear one or more times and disappear, and the pseudo continuous effect may continue until the final round is reached. . In this way, it is possible to arouse the sense of crisis in the player that the pseudo-continuous performance may end and the specific performance may end. , it is possible to increase the variations of specific performances performed in the high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy, high base state), which is the time-saving state.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the specific fluctuation time pseudo continuous performance A of FIG. 105, the specific fluctuation time pseudo continuous performance B of FIG. 106, and the specific fluctuation time pseudo continuous performance C of FIG. 107, after the jackpot game state, It is now possible to perform a specific gaming state performance that is executed in a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state) in a specific variation in a low-accuracy low base state (normal state) that is a non-time-saving state. Ta. In addition, the production of a specific gaming state that is executed in a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy, high-base state) after the jackpot gaming state is performed in the time-saving state that is controlled after the jackpot game. . In addition to the high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state), the time-saving states include the so-called a time saving, b time saving, and c time saving. In a time saving, b time saving, and c time saving, although the specific game state effect is not executed, there is a time saving specific game state effect that is executed only in a time saving, and b time saving specific effect that is executed only in b time saving. It is also possible to provide a performance of a game state and a performance of a specific game state for time saving c which is executed only in time saving c. In this case, in a specific variation in a low-accuracy low base state (normal state) that is a non-time saving state, a performance of a specific game state for time saving, b performance of a specific gaming state for time saving, and c performance of a specific gaming state for time saving are performed. It may also be possible to execute it. In this way, in the low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state, in addition to the performance of the specific gaming state, the player can perform a performance of the specific gaming state for saving time, and b performance of the specific gaming state for saving time. , c You can also get an opportunity to experience the performance of a specific game state for time saving. This can contribute to making the performance in the low-accuracy, low-base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state, less likely to feel monotonous to the player.

[Modification 3]
In the pseudo continuous performance in the specific performance in the specific variation pseudo continuous performance A in FIG. 105, the specific variation pseudo continuous performance B in FIG. 106, and the specific variation pseudo continuous performance C in FIG. 107 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, The greater the number of pseudo fluctuations, the higher the expectation of winning. This pseudo number of times was 1 to 8 times. However, the maximum number of pseudo-numbers may be further increased from 8 times. For example, the pseudo number of times may be 1 to 15 times, 1 to 20 times, or 1 to 30 times. By doing this, the maximum number of pseudo-numbers will increase, which will increase the number of pseudo-variations in the pseudo-continuous performance, allowing temporary stops and re-variations to be performed rhythmically and at a good tempo. This can contribute to further reducing the monotony of variable effects (variable displays).

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the specific fluctuation time pseudo continuous effect B shown in FIG. 106 and the specific change time pseudo continuous effect C shown in FIG. 107 constitute a pair of upper and lower shutter images that move downward from the upper side of the display screen 7a. An upper shutter image USG1 (specific image) appears, and a lower shutter image LSG1 (specific image) forming a pair of upper and lower shutter images moving upward from the lower side of the display screen 7a also appears. In addition, in the specific variation time pseudo continuous effect B in FIG. 106, an upper shutter image USG2 (specific image) forming a pair of upper and lower shutter images that moves downward from the upper side of the display screen 7a appears, and the A lower shutter image LSG2 (specific image) forming a pair of upper and lower shutter images that moves upward from the lower side has appeared. However, a left side shutter image forming a pair of left and right shutter images moving from the left side of the display screen 7a to the right appears, and a left side shutter image forming a pair of left and right shutter images moving from the right side of the display screen 7a to the left appears. The constituent left shutter images may also appear. In other words, the specific image may be a pair of left and right shutter images. In this case, the left shutter image constituting the pair of left and right shutter images moves to the right, and the right side of the right shutter image is positioned on the center line, with the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a as the center line. reach. In addition, the right shutter image constituting the pair of left and right shutter images moves to the left, and the left side of the right shutter image reaches the center line with the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a as the center line. do. The rightward movement speed of the left shutter image and the leftward movement speed of the right shutter image are the same speed, and the timing when the right side of the left shutter image reaches the center line and the left shutter image coincides with the timing when the left side of reaches the center line.

Note that the left shutter image and the right shutter image that make up the pair of left and right shutter images are similar to the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1 that make up the pair of upper and lower shutter images. displayed in a single color (for example, silver, beige, green, red, purple, yellow). Similar to the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1 that constitute the pair of upper and lower shutter images, this predetermined single color indicates the expectation of winning, and is silver → beige → green → red → purple. →The expectation of winning increases in the order of yellow (gold). Even with this configuration, the player's expectation of winning increases due to the left shutter image and right shutter image that make up the pair of left and right shutter images, which are specific images that suddenly appear, and the player's expectation of winning increases due to the sudden occurrence of a specific image, the left shutter image and the right shutter image. In a specific fluctuation in the low probability base state (normal state), instead of suddenly executing the performance of the specific gaming state that is executed in the high probability time saving state (high probability high base state) after the jackpot gaming state. By displaying the specific image as a preview of the start of the performance of the specific game state, it is possible to subtly inform the player that the performance of the specific game state will start soon. In addition, in certain fluctuations in the low-probability, low-base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state, the production of a specific gaming state that is executed in the high-probability, time-saving state (high-probability, high-base state) after the jackpot gaming state. However, by displaying a specific image as a notice of the end of the performance of a specific game state instead of suddenly ending it, it is possible to subtly inform the player that the performance of the specific game state will soon end.

Additionally, when a pair of left and right shutter images creates a display mode in which the shutter is closed, the left side vertical character string that constitutes the vertical character string arranged on the surface along the right side of the left shutter image and the left side of the right shutter image and the vertical character string on the right side constituting the vertical character string arranged on the surface, and the vertical character string "OARO" is completed. This vertical character string "OARO" is an arrangement of the horizontal character string "OARO" formed on the surface of the second movable accessory 15 as a vertical character string, and is a character string representing the worldview expressed by the game board 2. There is one.

[Modification 5]
In the specific fluctuation time pseudo continuous effect B shown in FIG. 106 and the specific change time pseudo continuous effect C shown in FIG. 107 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the display mode is such that the shutter is closed by a pair of upper and lower shutter images, the upper shutter image USG1 The upper horizontal character string forming the horizontal character string arranged on the front side along the lower side of the lower shutter image LSG1 and the lower horizontal character string forming the horizontal character string arranged on the front side along the upper side of lower shutter image LSG1 are combined. As a result, the horizontal character string "OARO" was completed. However, it may be a pattern instead of a character string. The pattern may be a simple symbol such as a circle, triangle, or square, a projected drawing of a three-dimensional structure, or a figure representing the world view expressed by the game board 2. You can. In this way, variations in shutter images can be increased. Furthermore, the pattern may be changed when a pair of upper and lower shutter images appears. Furthermore, when a pair of upper and lower shutter images appears, the pattern of the shutter images may indicate the degree of expectation of winning.

[Modification 6]
In the specific fluctuation time pseudo-continuous effect A of FIG. 105(C) in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the second movable accessory 15 moves from the retracted position (the position of the second movable accessory 15 in FIG. 1) to the display screen 7a. It started moving downward to the advanced position which is the center position (the intersection of the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a and the vertical line passing through the center of the top side and the center of the bottom side of the display screen 7a). However, instead of the second movable accessory 15 or together with the second movable accessory 15, the first movable accessory 14 may appear on the display screen 7a and move in the left and right direction, or the frame can be moved. The accessories 69 may be moved from the retracted position toward the handle 60 so as to approach each other. Similarly to the second movable accessory 15, when the first movable accessory 14 and the frame movable accessory 69 are activated during the fluctuating performance (variable display) of the performance symbol, the first movable accessory 14 and the frame movable accessory Compared to when the object 69 is not activated, the player has a high expectation of winning that a win will occur after the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is completed (that is, after the performance symbols are stopped and displayed). This suggests that Therefore, the player is highly interested in the operation (movement) of the first movable accessory 14 and the frame movable accessory 69. As a result, the player's expectation of winning increases due to the operation (action) of the first movable accessory 14 and the frame movable accessory 69, as well as the operation (action) of the second movable accessory 15. Furthermore, since the first movable accessory 14 and the frame movable accessory 69, which are different from the second movable accessory 15 corresponding to the movable accessory image KMG, operate (move), it is possible to provide the player with a sense of discomfort. It can also contribute to increasing the variety of performances.

[Modification 7]
In the specific variation time pseudo-continuous effect A shown in FIG. 105 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the movable accessory image KMG that is a specific image appears, it can be used as a notice of the start of the specific game state effect, and soon, It was possible to subtly inform the player that the production of a specific game state would start. Furthermore, in the specific variation pseudo continuous effect B shown in FIG. 106 and the specific variation pseudo continuous effect C shown in FIG. This could be used as a notice of the start of the performance of a specific game state, and it was possible to subtly inform the player that the performance of the specific game state would start soon. However, the specific image may appear not only as a notice of the start of a performance of a specific game state but also as a notice of development to a super reach performance (SP reach) with high expectation of winning. In this way, by the appearance of a specific image, it is possible to increase variations in whether the subsequent performance will be a performance of a specific game state or a super reach performance (SP reach).

[Modification 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pseudo-continuous performance A at the time of specific fluctuation shown in FIG. 105, the pseudo-continuous performance B at the time of specific fluctuation shown in FIG. 106, and the pseudo-continuous performance C at the time of specific fluctuation shown in FIG. It may be omitted, or other effects may be added.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect E1-1]
A gaming machine,
The performance of a specific game state that is executed after the winning game state can be executed in a specific variation before the winning game state occurs;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect E1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1,
When the specific variation is started, a specific image is displayed, and then the specific image disappears, and the production of the specific gaming state is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect E1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-2,
The specific image is displayed during execution of the performance of the specific gaming state, and when the specific image disappears thereafter, the performance of the specific gaming state ends and the specific variation ends;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect E1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-3,
In the performance of the specific game state, a pseudo continuous performance can be executed multiple times, and if a reach is formed in the pseudo continuous performance, it becomes a win.
characterized by

◇[Aspect E1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-4,
The specific image is placed in front of a set of performance symbols that can notify a win or a loss, and covers at least the set of performance symbols.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The operation means image display effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 108 to 110. This operation means image display effect is executed in conjunction with the variation effect of the effect design. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the operation means image display effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Operation means image display effect A]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the operation means image display effect A. Regarding the operation means image display effect A, we will first begin by explaining the changing effect shown in FIG. 108(A). Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left-center right are performing high-speed fluctuations. At this time, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as transparent or semi-transparent. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, a button image BG1 and a button image BG2 imitating the performance button 63 are displayed. The button image BG1 is displayed below the left effect pattern 8L that is changing. The button image BG2 is displayed below the right effect pattern 8R that is changing. The button image BG1 is oscillating and turns red (indicated by hatching in the figure), and the button image BG2 is white, and their appearance is different.

Next, when the player presses the performance button 63, the left symbol stop performance is executed as shown in FIG. 108(B). The left symbol stop performance is a performance in which the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the left design becomes slow and stops. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is stopped at the "2" symbol. The middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8C are fluctuating at high speed. At this time, the button image BG1 becomes white, and the button image BG2 swings and becomes red.

Next, when the player presses the performance button 63, the right symbol stop performance is executed as shown in FIG. 108(C). The right symbol stop performance is a performance in which the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the right performance symbol slows down and stops. Here, the right performance symbol 8R has stopped at the "4" symbol. The middle effect pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed. At this time, both button images BG1 and BG2 are white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(D), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The medium symbol stop performance is a performance in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the medium design becomes slow and stops. Here, the medium performance symbol 8C has stopped at the "3" symbol. At this time, both button images BG1 and BG2 are white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(E), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At this time, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as transparent or semi-transparent. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, a button image BG1 and a button image BG2 imitating the performance button 63 are displayed. The button image BG1 is displayed below the left effect pattern 8L that is changing. The button image BG2 is displayed below the right effect pattern 8R that is changing. The button image BG1 is oscillating and turns red (indicated by hatching in the figure), and the button image BG2 is white, and their appearance is different.

Next, when the player presses the performance button 63, the left symbol stop performance is executed as shown in FIG. 108(F). The left symbol stop performance is a performance in which the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the left design becomes slow and stops. Here, the left performance symbol 8L has stopped at the "7" symbol. The middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8C are fluctuating at high speed. At this time, the button image BG1 becomes white, and the button image BG2 swings and becomes red.

Next, when the player presses the performance button 63, the right symbol stop performance is executed as shown in FIG. 108(G). The right symbol stop performance is a performance in which the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the right performance symbol slows down and stops. Here, the right performance symbol 8R has stopped at the "7" symbol. Both the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R stop at the "7" symbol to form a reach mode. The middle effect pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed. At this time, both button images BG1 and BG2 are white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(H), a development effect is executed. The development performance is a performance that notifies the development from normal reach to SP reach (super reach). Here, a message image MS "Development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A reduced left effect pattern 8L ("7" pattern) is displayed at the top left of the display screen 7a, and a reduced right effect pattern 8R ("7" pattern) is displayed at the top right of the display screen 7a. There is.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 108(I) and (J), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character and an enemy character engage in a battle.
In FIG. 108(I), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are facing each other at the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the reduced left effect pattern 8L ("7" pattern) is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the reduced right effect pattern 8R ("7" pattern) is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. Displayed.
In FIG. 108(J), the final stage of the battle performance is reached, and the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB are about to deliver the final blow to each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(K), an operation promotion effect is executed. The operation promotion performance is a performance that encourages operation of the operating means. Here, a sword image BG3 imitating the sword member 65 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, an arrow image YG is displayed to the left of the sword image BG3, and a message image MS saying "push in" is displayed to the right of the sword image BG3. Displayed. Further, a button image BG1 is displayed on the left side of the center of the display screen 7a, and a button image BG2 is displayed on the right side of the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG1 is red (indicated by hatching in the figure), and the button image BG2 is white.

When the player pushes the sword member 65 or when the player presses the performance button 63, a win/loss notification performance as shown in FIG. 108(L) is executed. The winning/losing notification performance is a performance that notifies whether the special symbol lottery has been won or not. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are all "7" symbols. This notifies you that you have won (a jackpot). On the other hand, when notifying the player of a loss, the middle performance pattern 8C becomes a pattern other than the "7" pattern (for example, an "8" pattern) with respect to the left and right performance patterns 8L and 8R (the "7" pattern). Note that if the sword member 65 and the performance button 63 are not operated, the winning/losing notification performance is executed after the operation validity period has elapsed.

[Operation means image display performance B]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the operation means image display effect B. Regarding the operation means image display effect B, first, the explanation will start from the effect in progress shown in FIG. 109(A). Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left-center right are performing high-speed fluctuations. At this time, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as transparent or semi-transparent. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, a sword image BG1 imitating the sword member 65 and a button image BG2 imitating the performance button 63 are displayed. The sword image BG1 is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. The button image BG2 is displayed at the lower right part of the display screen 7a (below the right effect pattern 8R that is changing).

When the player operates the sword member 65 during the fluctuation, a game number display effect is executed as shown in FIG. 109(B). The game number display performance is a performance that displays the number of games (number of changes of special symbols) after a jackpot. Here, a game number image GH of "187G" is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a. The game number image GH is hidden after a predetermined time (for example, "1" second) has elapsed. Also at this time, the sword image BG1 and button image BG2 are displayed.

When the player presses the performance button 63 during the fluctuation, a reliability suggesting performance is executed as shown in FIG. 109(C). The reliability suggesting performance is a performance that suggests the reliability of winning the special symbol lottery. Here, a reliability image SH of "reliability 10%" is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a. The reliability image SH is hidden after a predetermined time (for example, "1" second) has elapsed. Also at this time, the sword image BG1 and button image BG2 are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(D), a confirmed stop effect is executed. The definite stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to stop. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is determined and stopped at the "2" symbol, the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at the "3" symbol, and the right performance symbol 8R is determined and stopped at the "4" symbol. Also at this time, the sword image BG1 and button image BG2 are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(E), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are performing high-speed fluctuations. At this time, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as transparent or semi-transparent. A sword image BG1 imitating the sword member 65 and a button image BG2 imitating the performance button 63 are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The sword image BG1 is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. The button image BG2 is displayed at the lower right part of the display screen 7a (below the right effect pattern 8R that is changing).

When the player operates the sword member 65 during the fluctuation, a game number display effect is executed as shown in FIG. 109(F). The game number display performance is a performance that displays the number of games (number of changes of special symbols) after a jackpot. Here, a game number image GH of "188G" is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a. The game number image GH is hidden after a predetermined time (for example, "1" second) has elapsed. Also at this time, the sword image BG1 and button image BG2 are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(G), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols stop in a predetermined reach mode. Here, both the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are stopped at the "7" symbol. Even during the reach, when the player presses the performance button 63, the reliability suggesting performance is executed. The reliability suggesting performance is a performance that suggests the reliability of winning the special symbol lottery. Here, the reliability image SH "Very Hot" is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a. The reliability image SH is hidden after a predetermined time (for example, "1" second) has elapsed. Also at this time, the sword image BG1 and button image BG2 are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(H), a development effect is executed. The development performance is a performance that notifies the development from normal reach to SP reach (super reach). Here, a message image MS "Development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A reduced left effect pattern 8L ("7" pattern) is displayed at the top left of the display screen 7a, and a reduced right effect pattern 8R ("7" pattern) is displayed at the top right of the display screen 7a. There is.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 109(I) and 109(J), a battle effect is performed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character and an enemy character engage in a battle.
In FIG. 109(I), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are facing each other at the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a reduced left effect pattern 8L ("7" pattern) is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a, and a reduced right effect pattern 8R ("7" pattern) is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. Displayed.
In FIG. 109(J), the final stage of the battle performance is reached, and the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB are about to deliver the final blow to each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(K), an operation promotion effect is executed. The operation promotion performance is a performance that encourages operation of the operating means. Here, a button image BG3 imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG3 is red (indicated by hatching), appears to be vibrating finely, and has a character image "PUSH" superimposed on it. An arrow image YG is displayed above the button image BG3, a message image MS saying "Press!" is displayed above the arrow image YG, and a validity period image VG is displayed above the message image MS. The valid period image VG is an image showing a period during which pressing of the production button 63 is valid, and a hatched portion displayed within a rectangular frame indicates the remaining time of the valid period. Also at this time, the sword image BG1 and button image BG2 are displayed.

When the player presses the performance button 63, a winning/losing notification performance as shown in FIG. 109(L) is executed. The winning/losing notification performance is a performance that notifies whether the special symbol lottery has been won or not. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are all "7" symbols. This notifies you that you have won (a jackpot). On the other hand, when notifying the player of a loss, the middle performance pattern 8C becomes a pattern other than the "7" pattern (for example, an "8" pattern) with respect to the left and right performance patterns 8L and 8R (the "7" pattern). Note that if the performance button 63 is not operated, the winning/losing notification performance will be executed after the operation validity period has elapsed. Further, when the sword member 65 is operated, the number of games may be displayed.

[Operation means image display performance C]
FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the operation means image display effect C. Regarding the operation means image display effect C, we will first begin by explaining the effect during fluctuation shown in FIG. 110(A). Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left-center right are performing high-speed fluctuations. At this time, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as transparent or semi-transparent. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, a button image BG1, a button image BG2, and a button image BG3 imitating the performance button 63 are displayed. The button image BG1 is displayed below the left effect pattern 8L that is changing. The button image BG2 is displayed below the right effect pattern 8R that is changing. The button image BG3 is displayed below the changing medium effect pattern 8C. The button images BG1 to BG3 have different degrees of elevation of the button portions. The degree of elevation increases in the order of button image BG1, button image BG2, and button image BG3.

Next, when the player presses the performance button 63, the left symbol stop performance is executed as shown in FIG. 110(B). The left symbol stop performance is a performance in which the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the left design becomes slow and stops. Here, the left performance symbol 8L is stopped at the "2" symbol. The middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8C are fluctuating at high speed. Here too, button images BG1 to BG3 are displayed.

Next, when the player presses the performance button 63, the right symbol stop performance is executed as shown in FIG. 110(C). The right symbol stop performance is a performance in which the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the right performance symbol slows down and stops. Here, the right performance symbol 8R has stopped at the "4" symbol. The middle effect pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed. Here too, button images BG1 to BG3 are displayed.

Next, when the player presses the performance button 63, a middle symbol stop performance is executed as shown in FIG. 110(D). The medium symbol stop performance is a performance in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the medium design becomes slow and stops. Here, the medium performance symbol 8C has stopped at the "3" symbol. Here too, button images BG1 to BG3 are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(E), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At this time, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as transparent or semi-transparent. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, a button image BG1, a button image BG2, and a button image BG3 imitating the performance button 63 are displayed. The button image BG1 is displayed below the left effect pattern 8L that is changing. The button image BG2 is displayed below the right effect pattern 8R that is changing. The button image BG3 is displayed below the changing medium effect pattern 8C. The button images BG1 to BG3 have different degrees of elevation of the button portions. The degree of elevation increases in the order of button image BG1, button image BG2, and button image BG3.

Next, when the player presses the performance button 63, the left symbol stop performance is executed as shown in FIG. 110(F). The left symbol stop performance is a performance in which the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the left design becomes slow and stops. Here, the left performance symbol 8L has stopped at the "7" symbol. The middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8C are fluctuating at high speed. Here too, button images BG1 to BG3 are displayed.

Next, when the player presses the performance button 63, the right symbol stop performance is executed as shown in FIG. 110(G). The right symbol stop performance is a performance in which the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the right performance symbol slows down and stops. Here, the right performance symbol 8R has stopped at the "7" symbol. Both the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R stop at the "7" symbol to form a reach mode. The middle effect pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed. Here too, button images BG1 to BG3 are displayed.

Next, when the player presses the performance button 63, an advanced performance is executed as shown in FIG. 110(H). The development performance is a performance that notifies the development from normal reach to SP reach (super reach). Here, a message image MS "Development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A reduced left effect pattern 8L ("7" pattern) is displayed at the top left of the display screen 7a, and a reduced right effect pattern 8R ("7" pattern) is displayed at the top right of the display screen 7a. There is.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 110(I) and 110(J), a battle effect is performed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character and an enemy character engage in a battle.
In FIG. 110(I), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are facing each other at the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the reduced left effect pattern 8L ("7" pattern) is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the reduced right effect pattern 8R ("7" pattern) is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. Displayed.
In FIG. 110(J), the final stage of the battle performance is reached, and the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB are about to deliver the final blow to each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(K), an operation promotion effect is executed. The operation promotion performance is a performance that encourages operation of the operating means. Here, a button image BG3 imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG3 is red (indicated by hatching) and has a text image "PUSH" superimposed thereon. A message image MS saying "Press!" is displayed above the button image BG3. A sword image BG1 imitating the sword member 65 is displayed on the left side of the button image BG3. A downward arrow image YG1 is displayed to the left of the sword image BG1, and a message image MS1 saying "push in" is displayed so as to overlap the sword image BG1. A sword image BG2 imitating the sword member 65 is displayed on the right side of the button image BG3. An upward arrow image YG2 is displayed on the right side of the sword image BG2, and a message image MS2 saying "pull through" is displayed above the sword image BG2.

When the player presses the performance button 63, when the player pushes in the sword member 65, or when the player pulls out the sword member 65, a winning/losing notification performance as shown in FIG. 110(L) is performed. executed. The winning/losing notification performance is a performance that notifies whether the special symbol lottery has been won or not. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are all "7" symbols. This notifies you that you have won (a jackpot). On the other hand, when notifying the player of a loss, the middle performance pattern 8C becomes a pattern other than the "7" pattern (for example, an "8" pattern) with respect to the left and right performance patterns 8L and 8R (the "7" pattern). Note that if the sword member 65 and the performance button 63 are not operated, the winning/losing notification performance is executed after the operation validity period has elapsed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation means image display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 108 to 110, the first operating means image, which is an image imitating the operating means, is displayed in the first area of the display screen, and the second area of the display screen is A second operating means image is displayed which is an image imitating the operating means and has a different aspect from the first operating means image.
Specifically, in the operation means image display effect A, a button image BG1 is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a, and a button image BG2 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. The button images BG1 and BG2 have different modes (FIGS. 108(A), (B), (E), (F), and (K)). In operation means image display effect B, a sword image BG1 is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a, and a button image BG2 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a (FIGS. 109(A) to (G) and (K)). In the operation means image display effect C, a button image BG1 is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a, and a button image BG2 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. The button images BG1 and BG2 have different aspects (FIGS. 110(A) to 110(G)). Further, a sword image BG1 is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a, and a sword image BG2 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. The sword images BG1 and BG2 have different aspects (FIG. 110(K)).
According to this configuration, the performance using the operating means becomes a novel performance that has not been seen before, making it possible to entertain the players and improve their interest.

Note that the button image BG1 or the sword image BG1 corresponds to the "first operation means image", the lower left area of the display screen 7a where the image BG1 is displayed corresponds to the "first area", and the button image BG2 or the sword image corresponds to the "first operation means image". The image BG2 corresponds to the "second operation means image", the lower right area of the display screen 7a where the image BG2 is displayed corresponds to the "second area", and the production control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the "image display means". Equivalent to.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, at least one of the first operating means image and the second operating means image is continuously displayed over a plurality of variations in the special symbol (FIGS. 108(A) to 108(G), 109(A)-(G), FIG. 110(A)-(G)). According to this configuration, the operation of the operating means can be impressed, the player can be entertained, and the player's interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a first operating means image and a second operating means image are displayed, and a third operating means image imitating the operating means is displayed in a third area of the display screen, and the first operating means The third operating means image is displayed in a different manner from the image and the second operating means image.
Specifically, in the operation means image display performance A, button images BG1 and BG2 are displayed, and a sword image BG3 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (FIG. 108(K)). In operation means image display effect B, a sword image BG1, a button image BG2 are displayed, and a button image BG3 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (FIG. 109(K)). In operation means image display effect C, button images BG1 and BG2 are displayed, and button image BG3 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (FIGS. 110(A) to 110(G)). In addition, the sword images BG1 and BG2 are displayed, as well as the button image BG3 (FIG. 110(K)).
According to this configuration, the performance using the operating means becomes an even more innovative performance, which can entertain the players and improve their interest. Note that the button image BG3 or the sword image BG3 corresponds to a "third operation means image", and the area at the center of the display screen 7a where the image BG3 is displayed corresponds to a "third area".

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the first operating means image, the second operating means image, and the third operating means image are displayed, the first operating means corresponding to the first operating means image, the second operating means image Both of the second operating means corresponding to the operating means image and the third operating means corresponding to the third operating means image are operable (FIG. 108(K), FIG. 109(K), 110(A)-(G)(K)). According to this configuration, the performance using the operating means becomes an even more innovative performance, which can entertain the players and improve their interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a display indicating the valid period of the operation of the third operating means is performed, and a display indicating the valid period of the operations of the first operating means and the second operating means is not displayed (FIG. 109(K) ). According to this configuration, even when a plurality of operation means images are displayed, the main operation means can be easily understood, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modified example]
Below, a modification of the operation means image display performance will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the operating means image display effects A and C of the above embodiments, the effect is such that the effect pattern stops when the effect button 63 is pressed (Fig. 108(B)(C)(F)(G), Fig. 110 (B) to (D) (F) (G)). At this time, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the performance symbols was slowed down and then stopped. On the other hand, the performance symbols scheduled to be stopped may be stopped at the timing when the performance button 63 is pressed. Furthermore, if the player does not press the production button 63, the left production symbol, the right production symbol, and the middle production symbol may be stopped in this order at predetermined time intervals (for example, 3 seconds), or the left production symbol may be stopped in the order of the middle production symbol. The right performance symbols may be stopped simultaneously at a predetermined timing.

[Modification 2]
In the operation means image display effect A of the above embodiment, there was a period in which the button images BG1 and BG2 had the same aspect (FIGS. 108(C), (D), and (G)). On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which the button images BG1 and BG2 are always displayed in different modes.

[Modification 3]
In the operation means image display performance B of the above embodiment, the game number image GH was displayed by operating the sword member 65 (FIGS. 109(B) and 109(F)). In addition, by operating the presentation button 63, the reliability image SH was displayed (FIGS. 109(C) and 109(G)). These game number image GH and reliability image SH are not displayed after a predetermined time (for example, "1" second) has elapsed after being displayed. On the other hand, the display of the number of games image GH and the reliability image SH may be continued until a predetermined timing (for example, the timing of a fixed stop, the timing of starting the next variation, or the timing of forming a reach). Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the game number image GH continues to be displayed until the sword member 65 is operated again, or the reliability image SH continues to be displayed until the production button 63 is operated again.

[Modification 4]
In the embodiment described above, the first operating means image, the second operating means image, and the third operating means image have different aspects. Such an aspect of the operation means image may be, for example, one in which at least one of the shape, size, orientation, display color, transparency (density), and animation (movement of the image) of the operation means image is different. .

[Modification 5]
In the embodiment described above, the first operating means image, the second operating means image, and the third operating means image were displayed within the display screen 7a. In contrast, at least one of the first operating means image, the second operating means image, and the third operating means image is displayed on the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen It may be displayed on the display screen 64U).

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect F1-1]
A gaming machine,
An operation means that can be operated by a player;
A first operating means image, which is an image imitating the operating means, is displayed in a first area of the display screen, and a first operating means image, which is an image imitating the operating means, is displayed in a second area of the display screen. comprises an image display means capable of displaying images of the second operation means in different modes;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect F1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-1,
The image display means is capable of continuously displaying at least one of the first operating means image and the second operating means image over a plurality of variations in the special symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect F1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-1 or aspect F1-2,
The image display means displays the first operation means image and the second operation means image, and displays a third operation means image imitating the operation means in a third area of the display screen, It is possible to display a third operating means image in a manner different from the means image and the second operating means image;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect F1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-3,
When the first operating means image, the second operating means image, and the third operating means image are displayed, the first operating means image and the second operating means image corresponding to the first operating means image are displayed. Any of the corresponding second operating means and the third operating means corresponding to the third operating means image can be operated;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect F1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-4,
The image display means displays a valid period of operation of the third operation means, and does not display a valid period of operation of the first operation means and the second operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The numerical image display effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 111 to 113. This numerical image display performance is executed during the fluctuation performance. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a numerical image display effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Numeric image display performance A]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining numerical image display effect A. The numerical image display performance is a type of performance that suggests the win or loss of the fluctuation after two of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R form a reach during the fluctuation performance, and the numerical value represented by the displayed numerical image It is a performance that changes. In particular, the numerical image display effect A determines the success or failure of the fluctuation based on whether the numerical values represented by the meter images KMG, MMG displayed as numerical images are greater than or equal to a predetermined value (here, "350") or less. It is a suggestive performance.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and at the time of deceleration fluctuation, three or more patterns become visible on the display screen 7a at the same time. They are displayed moving vertically. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a.

First, as shown in FIG. 111(A), a fluctuating effect is started, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, making it difficult to see the contents of each. Although the hold icons 9A and 9B and the fluctuation icon 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed. In addition, the explanation will be continued assuming that the result of the special drawing lottery that triggered this variable performance was a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(B), in the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R, the left and right decorative patterns 8R and 8L representing "7" are stopped and displayed in the order of left decorative pattern 8L → right decorative pattern 8R. be done. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach mode of "7↓7", and after indicating the win or loss of the fluctuation in the numerical image display performance that will be executed afterwards, the medium decorative pattern 8C stops. By doing so, the winning or losing of the fluctuation is notified.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(C), the images displayed on the display screen 7a are switched, and an opening effect is executed to notify that the numerical image display effect is to be started. Here, a message image NM saying "Throw over 350 meters!!!" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 111(D) and (E), the numerical image display effect is started, and the symbol image T7 representing the decorative symbol "7", the character image CR throwing the symbol image T7, and the character image CR throwing the symbol image T7 are displayed. A meter image KMG representing the flying distance of the symbol image T7, and numeric images KH, KT, KO representing the number of each digit of the numerical value represented in the meter image KMG are displayed. Here, the number image representing each digit of the numerical value in the meter image KMG is such that the represented number changes randomly.

Furthermore, the meter image KMG displayed in FIG. 111(D) and the number images KH, KT, and KO representing the number of each digit of the numerical value represented in the meter image KMG are displayed directed toward the character CR. It is displayed as if it were there. That is, the numeric image KH is displayed tilted in the direction along the display surface of the display screen 7a, and the numeric image KH is displayed as if it is located further from the plane formed by the display screen 7a than the numeric image KO. Therefore, the numbers are displayed so that the size increases in the order of numeric image KH → numeric image KT → numeric image KO, that is, the sizes are different. Furthermore, since the left side of the number image KH is displayed as if it is farther from the plane formed by the display screen 7a than the right side, the number image KH is displayed in a distorted state. This also applies to the numerical images KT and KO. That is, the meter image KMG and the numeric images KH, KT, and KO in FIG. 111(D) are on the same plane, and the normal to the plane is in the horizontal direction with respect to the normal to the plane of the display screen 7a. It is in a state where it is tilted.

Furthermore, the meter image KMG and number images KH, KT, KO displayed in FIG. 111(E) are different from each other in that the upper part of the meter image KMG and number images KH, KT, KO in FIG. 111(D) is The display appears to be falling in a direction approaching the plane formed by the display screen 7a. That is, the meter image KMG and the numeric images KH, KT, and KO in FIG. 111(E) are on the same plane, and the normal to the plane is in the horizontal direction with respect to the normal to the plane of the display screen 7a. It is also tilted vertically.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 111(F), (G), and (H), the flying and landing symbol image T7, the meter image MMG, and the number of each digit of the numerical value represented in the meter image MMG are calculated. Numerical images MH, MT, and MO are displayed. The meter image MMG and the numerical images MH, MT, MO representing the number of digits of the numerical value represented in the meter image MMG are arranged horizontally with respect to the display surface of the display screen 7a and are displayed in the vertical direction. Therefore, unlike the meter image KMG in FIGS. 111(D) and (E), the numerical images MH, MT, and MO are all displayed in the same size, and each numerical image is displayed in an undistorted state. Also, unlike the meter image KMG, the number images MH, MT, and MO representing the number of each digit of the numerical value in the meter image MMG represent the flight distance of the symbol image T7, and the numbers represented by the number image KO are displayed at regular intervals. The number represented by the number image KT is updated every 10 times (for example, updated twice in one second), and the number represented by the number image KH is updated every 10 times the number image KO is updated. The update is executed every time it is updated. Furthermore, the number image KH represents the hundreds digit, the number image KT represents the gun digit, and the number image KO represents the ones digit, thus representing one number. In FIG. 111(H), the numerical value represented by the meter image MMG is "349 m", which is smaller than "350 m" in the message image NM displayed in FIG. 111(C), indicating that the change is a loss. is suggested.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(I), an ending effect is executed to notify the end of the numerical image display effect. Here, based on the difference between the numerical value represented by the meter image MMG displayed in FIG. 111(H) and the numerical value specified in the message image NM displayed in FIG. 111(C), "1 meter short. !!” message image ZM is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(J), the image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched, and after reaching a state similar to that shown in FIG. 111(B), the medium decorative pattern 8C decelerates. ,Stop. Since the fluctuation was a loss, the medium decorative pattern 8C has stopped representing "8" and has stopped in a loss manner of "787". After this, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the variable performance of the next special drawing lottery starts.

If the fluctuation is a hit, the numerical value represented by the meter image MMG in FIG. 111(H) will be "350m" or more, and in FIG. 111(I), for example, "Exceeded 350m! Great success! ” is displayed, and then, in FIG. 111(J), the decorative symbols stop in a winning manner.

The above is an example of the display of the numerical image display effect A and the flow of execution. In numeric image display effect A, the meter image KTG displayed in FIGS. 111(D) and (E) is displayed tilted with respect to the display surface of the display screen 7a so as to face the character image CR, Since the meter images MMG displayed in F) to (H) are displayed parallel to the display surface, there is a high possibility that the player will feel as if he or she is the character CR. In addition, there is not only the expectation that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will stop in a winning manner, but also whether the numerical value displayed on the meter images KMG and MMG will be a predetermined value (350 in this case) or higher. They are more likely to have expectations for the future. Therefore, by executing the number image display effect A, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Numeric image display performance B]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining numerical image display effect B. The numerical image display performance is a type of performance that suggests a win or loss of the fluctuation after the decorative symbols form a reach during the fluctuation performance, and is a performance in which the numerical value represented by the displayed numerical image changes. In particular, in the numerical image display effect B, the numerical values represented by the timer images HTG and STG displayed as numerical images represent the timer time, and depending on whether or not the predetermined state is reached before the timer reaches 0, the corresponding This is a performance that suggests the success or failure of fluctuations.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and at the time of deceleration fluctuation, three or more patterns become visible on the display screen 7a at the same time. They are displayed moving vertically. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a.

First, as shown in FIG. 112(A), a fluctuating effect is started, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, making it difficult to see the contents of each. Further, although the hold icons 9A and 9B and the fluctuation icon 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed. In addition, the explanation will be continued assuming that the result of the special drawing lottery that triggered this variable performance was a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(B), in the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R, the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R representing "7" are stopped and displayed in the order of left decorative pattern 8L → right decorative pattern 8R. be done. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach mode of "7↓7", and after indicating the win or loss of the fluctuation in the numerical image display performance that will be executed afterwards, the medium decorative pattern 8C stops. By doing so, the winning or losing of the fluctuation is notified.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 112(C) and 112(D), the images displayed on the display screen 7a are switched, and a numerical image display effect is started. Here, a bomb image BG, an image of the character CR, a timer image HTG representing the time limit until the bomb explodes, and numeric images H1 to H5 representing the number of each digit of the numerical value represented in the timer image HTG are shown. , is displayed. In FIG. 112(C), the number images H1 to H5 representing each digit of the numerical value in the timer image HTG are displayed in such a way that the numbers are difficult to see, as if the remaining time until a bomb explodes is being charged. It is designed to change at high speed (for example, 10 times per second). In FIG. 112(D), the timer image HTG represents 1 minute 00 seconds 00 and has stopped due to the time being charged in FIG. 112(C). In addition, the timer image HTG displayed in FIGS. 112(C) and (D) and the number images H1 to H5 representing the number of digits of the numerical value represented in the timer image HTG are directed toward the character CR. It is displayed as if it were a display. That is, the timer image is rotated 180 degrees from the direction facing the player from the display surface of the display screen 7a, and the timer image is displayed to the player in an inverted state, and the number images H1 to H5 are also displayed in an inverted state. Displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(E), a message image RM for suggesting operation of the timer is displayed. Here, a message image RM saying "Escape within 1 minute!!!" is displayed. This indicates that the winner is determined by whether or not the character CR can escape within one minute before the bomb explodes.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 112(F) and (G), a character CR runs away from the bomb, a timer image STG, and numeric images S1 and S2 representing the number of digits of the numerical value represented in the timer image STG. , is displayed. The timer image STG and the number images S1 and S2 representing the number of digits of the numerical value represented in the timer image STG are displayed facing toward the player from the display surface of the display screen 7a, so that the player The time represented by the timer image STG is displayed so that it can be easily recognized. Further, the number images S1 and S2 representing the number of each digit of the numerical value in the timer image STG are designed to represent one numerical value, and unlike the timer image HTG in FIGS. 112(C) and (D), 1 At least one of them is updated every second. In FIG. 112(F), the value represented by the timer image STG is "59 seconds left until explosion", and in FIG. 112(G), the value represented by timer image STG is "2 seconds left until explosion". There is. Note that the countdown using the timer image STG executed in FIGS. 112(F) and (G) starts from 59 seconds, and display in milliseconds is not executed, so FIGS. 112(C) and (D) The number of displayed number images is different from the timer image HTG in .

Next, as shown in FIGS. 112(H) and (I), an ending effect is executed to notify the end of the numerical image display effect. In FIG. 112(H), an image that looks as if a bomb has exploded is displayed. In FIG. 112(I), a character CR that appears to have fallen down due to an explosion and a message image BM saying "I didn't make it in time..." are displayed. This suggests that the result of the fluctuation is a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(J), the image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched, and after reaching a state similar to that shown in FIG. 112(B), the medium decorative pattern 8C stops. , all decorative patterns are stopped. Since the fluctuation was a loss, the medium decorative pattern 8C has stopped representing "8" and has stopped in a loss manner of "787". After this, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the variable performance of the next special drawing lottery is executed.

If the change is a hit, for example, in FIG. 112(I), a character CR who appears to be happy and a message image saying "We escaped!" are displayed, and then in FIG. 111(J) , the decorative pattern stops in a winning manner.

The above is an example of the display of number image display effect B and the flow of execution. In number image display performance B, the timer image HTG that was displayed in FIGS. 112(C) and (D) is turned from the display surface of the display screen 7a in the opposite direction to the player so as to face the character CR. The timer image STG shown in FIGS. 112(F) to 112(G) is displayed facing toward the player from the display surface, so the player feels as if he or she is the character CR. are more likely to embrace In addition, there is not only the expectation that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R will stop in a winning manner, but also whether or not they will reach a predetermined state within the time displayed on the timer images HTG and STG (here, from the bomb to They are more likely to have expectations regarding whether they will be able to escape or not. Therefore, by executing the number image display effect B, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Numeric image display performance C]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining numerical image display effect C. The numerical image display performance is a type of performance that suggests a win or loss of the fluctuation after the decorative symbols form a reach during the fluctuation performance, and is a performance in which the numerical value represented by the displayed numerical image changes. In particular, in the numerical image display effect C, the numerical values represented by the timer images GTG and KTG displayed as numerical images represent the period during which the operation of the effect button 63 is valid, and the timer images displayed as numerical images represent the period during which the operation of the effect button 63 is valid. This is an effect that suggests the success or failure of the fluctuation depending on whether the remaining time represented becomes a predetermined remaining time or not.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and at the time of deceleration fluctuation, three or more patterns become visible on the display screen 7a at the same time. They are displayed moving vertically. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a.

First, as shown in FIG. 113(A), a fluctuating effect is started, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, making it difficult to see the contents of each. Further, although the hold icons 9A and 9B and the fluctuation icon 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed. The explanation will continue assuming that the result of the special drawing lottery that triggered this variable performance was a win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(B), in the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R, the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R representing "7" are stopped and displayed in the order of left decorative pattern 8L → right decorative pattern 8R. be done. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach mode of "7↓7", and after indicating the win or loss of the fluctuation in the numerical image display performance that will be executed afterwards, the medium decorative pattern 8C stops. By doing so, the winning or losing of the fluctuation is notified.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 113(C) and 113(D), the images displayed on the display screen 7a are switched, and numerical image display effect is started. Here, an image of the character CR, a timer image GTG representing the period during which the operation of the production button 63 is valid, and numeric images G1 to G4 representing the number of each digit of the numerical value represented in the timer image GTG are displayed. be done. In FIG. 113(C), the number image representing the number of each digit of the numerical value in the timer image GTG is displayed at high speed (for example, 10 times per second) so that the period during which the operation of the effect button 63 is valid is charged. ). In FIG. 113(D), the timer image GTG represents 33 seconds and 33 because the time was charged in FIG. 113(C). In addition, the timer image GTG displayed in FIGS. 113(C) and (D) and the number images G1 to G4 representing the number of digits of the numerical value represented in the timer image GTG are directed toward the character CR. It is displayed as if it were a display. That is, the display surface of the display screen 7a is rotated 180 degrees from the player's direction, and the timer image is displayed to the player in an inverted state, and the number images G1 to G4 are also displayed in an inverted state. has been done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(E), a message image OM prompting the user to operate the effect button 63 is displayed. Here, a message image OM saying "Stop at 7:77!!!" is displayed. This indicates that by operating the performance button 63, a win or loss is indicated based on whether or not the timer image can stop the countdown in GTG at 7:77.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 113(F) and (G), a timer image KTG, numeric images K1 to K4 representing the number of each digit of the numerical value represented in the timer image KTG, and "Press at 7:77" are displayed. !!!”, an operation promotion message image PM and a production button image PG are displayed, and furthermore, a seek bar SB is displayed as another means for representing the period represented by the timer image KTG. The timer image KTG and the numerical images K1 to K4 representing the number of digits of the numerical value represented in the timer image KTG are displayed facing toward the player from the display surface of the display screen 7a, so that the player The time represented by the timer image KTG is displayed so that it can be easily recognized. Also, unlike the timer images GTG in FIGS. 113(C) and (D), the numeric images K1 to K4 representing the number of each digit of the numerical value in the timer image KTG are different from the timer images GTG in FIGS. 113(C) and (D). On the other hand, updates are executed, and at least one of K3 and K4 is updated every 0.01 seconds. Furthermore, the display mode of the seek bar SB changes as the remaining time represented by the timer image KTG decreases (in FIG. 113(F), there is a pattern all over it, and in FIG. 113(G), there is a pattern all over it, and in FIG. There is a pattern only on the part.) In FIG. 113(F), the numerical value represented by timer image KTG is "33:33", and in FIG. 113(G), the numerical value represented by timer image KTG is "07:77". The explanation will be continued assuming that the production button 63 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 113(G). In addition, the effect button 63 is configured to perform an effect in which the effect button 63 vibrates, regardless of whether the change is a success or failure, if the operation in the numerical image display effect C is valid. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(H), a timer image KTG representing the remaining time at the time when the production button 63 is operated and simulated decorative patterns 8Lu, 8Cu, and 8Ru are displayed. The simulated decorative patterns 8Lu, 8Cu, and 8Ru are displayed in a stopped state with various hits. Therefore, since the timer stop time due to the operation of the production button 63 became 7:77, it is suggested that the result of the variation was a win. Note that at this time, the seek bar SB, operation promotion message image PM, and production button image PG that were displayed in FIGS. 113(F) and (G) are not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(I), the timer image KTG and the simulated decorative patterns 8Lu, 8Cu, and 8Ru that were displayed in FIG. 113(H) become difficult to see, similar to the state shown in FIG. 113(B). After reaching this state, the medium decorative pattern 8C stops. Since the fluctuation was a win, the medium decorative pattern 8C stops at "7" and is stopped and displayed in a winning mode of "777". After this, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(J), the opening performance of the jackpot game is executed. Here, a message image KM saying "Jackpot!!!" is displayed.

Note that if the fluctuation is a loss, the remaining time represented by the timer image KTG in FIG. "787") is displayed, and then, in FIG. 113(I), the decorative pattern stops in a losing manner.

The above is an example of the display of the numerical image display effect C and the flow of execution. In number image display effect C, the timer image GTG that was displayed in FIGS. Since the timer image KTG displayed in FIGS. 113(F) to (H) is displayed facing toward the player from the display surface, the player feels as if he or she is the character CR. are more likely to embrace In addition, not only can you expect the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R to stop showing the same number, but you can also operate the production button when the remaining time displayed on the timer images GTG and KTG reaches a predetermined time. There is a high possibility that you will feel nervous about whether or not it will happen. Therefore, by executing the number image display effect C, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect example]
Examples of effects of this embodiment are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, according to FIGS. 111 to 113, the meter image KMG including the numeric images KH, KT, and KO, or the timer image HTG including the numeric images H1 to H5, or the numeric images G1 to G4. A first effect in which a timer image GTG including the following is displayed, and after the first effect, a number image in which a number is displayed in a different direction from the number represented by each number image displayed in the first effect. , a second effect in which a meter image MMG including numeric images MH, MT, and MO, or a timer image STG including numeric images S1 and S2, or a timer image KTG including numeric images K1 to K4 is displayed. It is doable. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

Note that the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponds to "display means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111, in the first effect, numerical images KH, KT, and KO included in the meter image KMG are displayed, and each has a configuration in which the sizes thereof are different from each other. It had become. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111, in the first effect, the numeric images KH, KT, and KO in the meter image KMG are tilted in the direction along the display surface of the display screen 7a, and In the second effect, in the meter image MMG, the numeric images MH, MT, and MO are arranged horizontally, and each of the plurality of numeric images is displayed vertically, and a predetermined period of time has elapsed. It was configured so that the numerical value represented would change in order each time. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112, the number of number images (here, 2) in the timer image STG displayed in the second performance is The number of number images in image HTG (here, five) is different from the size of number images S1 and S2 in timer image STG displayed in the second effect, and the size of number images S1 and S2 in timer image STG displayed in the second effect is different from that displayed in the first effect. The numbers are displayed in a size different from the size of the number images H1 to H5 in the timer image HTG. Furthermore, the numerical values represented by the number images S1 and S2 in the timer image STG displayed in the second effect change every second, but the numerical values H1 to H5 in the timer image HTG displayed in the first effect change every second. The speed at which the displayed numerical values change is so fast that the numerical values are difficult to visually recognize, and each has a different configuration. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113, timer images GTG and KTG composed of number images G1 to G4 and K1 to K4 are displayed in the first effect and the second effect. In the second effect, the timer image KTG is configured to represent the remaining period during which the effect button 63 can be operated. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113, the seek bar SB is displayed in the second effect, and the display mode of the seek bar SB changes in accordance with the change in the remaining time represented by the timer image KTG. It has become. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
A modification of this embodiment is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the numerical image display effects A to C, are the numerical images KH, KT, KO, numerical images H1 to H5, or numerical images G1 to G4 in the first effect all directed toward the character CR? It was displayed like this. On the other hand, the character CR does not need to be displayed, and the direction in which it is displayed may be changed arbitrarily.

[Modification 2]
Numerical image display performances A to C are performed after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R form a reach, but they may be configured to be performed at any appropriate timing.

[Modification 3]
In numerical image display performance C, a performance linked to the operation of the performance button 63 was executed. In addition to or in place of this, it may be made to operate in conjunction with other operating means (for example, the handle 60).

[Modification 4]
In the numerical image display effect A, a timer image representing time like the numerical image display effect B may be displayed. Furthermore, in this case, before executing the countdown (countup), an effect may be executed such that the updating speed of the numerical value is different from that of the countdown (countup).

[Modification 5]
In the numerical image display effect B or C, a meter image representing distance like the numerical image display effect A may be displayed. Furthermore, in this case, the updating speed of the numerical values may be changed arbitrarily.

[Modification 6]
In the numerical image display effects A and B, a timer image indicating a period during which the operation of the operating means (here, the effect button 63) is valid may be displayed, as in the numerical image display effect C.

[Modification 7]
In the numerical image display effects A to C, the effects described may be combined as appropriate.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect F2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a number image representing a number,
a first effect in which a first number image is displayed on the display means;
After the first effect, a second effect is displayed in which a second number image representing a number having a different direction from the number represented by the first number image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect F2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
The first number image includes a plurality of number images,
In the first effect, the plurality of number images are displayed, and each of the plurality of number images has a different size from each other.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect F2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
The second number image includes a plurality of number images,
In the first performance,
The first numerical image is displayed tilted and distorted in a direction along the display surface of the display means,
In the second performance,
The second number images are displayed, the second number images are arranged along the first direction of the display means, and each of the second number images is oriented perpendicular to the first direction. is displayed,
Each time a predetermined period of time elapses, the numerical value represented by at least one of the second numerical images changes in order.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect F2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
The second number image is
Displayed in a number different from the number of the first number images, and in a size different from the size of the first number image, and displayed at a speed different from the speed at which the number represented by the first number image changes. numbers change,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect F2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4, further comprising:
Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
The first number image and the second number image are timer images composed of a plurality of number images,
In the second effect, the timer image represents the remaining period during which the operating means can be operated.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect F2-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect 5,
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image whose appearance changes over time,
In the second effect, the specific image is displayed, and the aspect of the specific image changes in accordance with the change in the remaining time represented by the timer image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The expectation level suggestion effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 114 to 116. This expectation level suggesting performance is executed during the jackpot game. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the expectation level suggestion effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Expectation level suggestion performance A]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining the expectation level suggestion effect A. Regarding the expectation level suggestion performance A, we will first start by explaining the winning notification performance shown in FIG. 114(A). The winning notification performance is a performance that notifies you of the fact that you have won the jackpot using a performance pattern. Here, all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are stopped at the "7" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(B), an opening effect is performed. The opening performance is a performance executed at the beginning of the jackpot. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MS is displayed below the ally character CRA saying, "The jackpot has begun."

Next, as shown in FIGS. 114(C) to (H), a round effect is executed. The round performance is a performance executed in conjunction with a round game that constitutes a jackpot.
In FIG. 114(C), a round image RH "1R" is displayed at the upper left of the display screen 7a. This shows that the 1st round is a jackpot. An ally character CRA is displayed on the right side of the round image RH. To the right of the ally character CRA, a message image MS saying "Obtain 0060 pts" is displayed. This indicates the cumulative number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game.

In FIG. 114(D), a round image RH "5R" is displayed at the upper left of the display screen 7a. This shows that the 5th round is the jackpot. Also here, the ally character CRA is displayed on the right side of the round image RH. To the right of the ally character CRA, a message image MS saying "0075 pt acquired" is displayed. In particular, a suggestion image SH1 in which "Super Lucky" is written is displayed above the message image MS. Suggestive image SH1 indicates that the pending lottery has been won.

In the next FIG. 114(E), the suggestion image SH1 written as "Super Lucky" is hidden. The timing at which the suggestion image SH1 is hidden is any timing after the suggestion image SH1 is displayed and when a plurality of game balls enter the first big winning hole 30.
In the next FIG. 114(F), a winning image TH that three-dimensionally represents the letter "V" is displayed above the message image MS. The display of the winning image TH is performed almost simultaneously with the non-display of the above-mentioned suggestion image SH1.

In the next FIG. 114(G), the winning image TH is moved below the round image RH "5R" so as to overlap with the front of the ally character CRA as shown by the arrow Y. At this time, the winning image TH is reduced in size from the beginning.
In the next FIG. 114(H), a round image RH "10R" is displayed at the upper left of the display screen 7a. This shows that the 10th round is the jackpot. Also here, the ally character CRA is displayed on the right side of the round image RH. To the right of the ally character CRA, a message image MS saying "1410 points acquired" is displayed. In particular, below the round image RH, a winning image TH that three-dimensionally represents the letter "V" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(I), an ending effect is performed. The ending performance is a performance executed at the end of the jackpot game. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed slightly to the left of the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MS saying "It's a jackpot" is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a. A winning image TH that three-dimensionally represents the letter "V" is displayed at the upper left of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(J), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. This shows the first fluctuation after the end of the jackpot game, but if the pending lottery is won, the jackpot will be achieved within the first four fluctuations.

After the fluctuation that results in a jackpot is started, a winning notification effect is executed as shown in FIG. 114(K). The winning notification performance is a performance that notifies you of the fact that you have won the jackpot using a performance pattern. Here, all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are stopped at the "7" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(L), an opening effect is performed. The opening performance is a performance executed at the beginning of the jackpot. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MS is displayed below the ally character CRA saying, "The jackpot has begun."

[Expectation level suggestion performance B]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the expectation level suggestion effect B. Regarding the expectation level suggestion performance B, we will first start by explaining the winning notification performance shown in FIG. 115(A). The winning notification performance is a performance that notifies you of the fact that you have won the jackpot using a performance pattern. Here, all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are stopped at the "7" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(B), an opening effect is performed. The opening performance is a performance executed at the beginning of the jackpot. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MS is displayed below the ally character CRA saying, "The jackpot has begun."

Next, as shown in FIGS. 115(C) to 115(F), a round effect is executed. The round performance is a performance executed in conjunction with a round game that constitutes a jackpot.
In FIG. 115(C), a round image RH "1R" is displayed at the upper left of the display screen 7a. This shows that the 1st round is a jackpot. An ally character CRA is displayed on the right side of the round image RH. To the right of the ally character CRA, a message image MS saying "Obtain 0060 pts" is displayed. This indicates the cumulative number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game.

In FIG. 115(D), a round image RH "5R" is displayed at the upper left of the display screen 7a. This shows that the 5th round is the jackpot. Also here, the ally character CRA is displayed on the right side of the round image RH. To the right of the ally character CRA, a message image MS saying "0075 pt acquired" is displayed. In particular, a suggestion image SH2 in which "Lucky?" is written is displayed above the message image MS. Suggestive image SH2 indicates that there is a relatively high degree of expectation that the pending lottery will be won.

In the next FIG. 115(E), the suggestion image SH2 written with "Lucky?" is hidden. The timing at which the suggestion image SH2 is hidden is any timing after the suggestion image SH2 is displayed and when a plurality of game balls enter the first big winning hole 30.
In the next FIG. 115(F), a round image RH "10R" is displayed at the upper left of the display screen 7a. This shows that the 10th round is the jackpot. Also here, the ally character CRA is displayed on the right side of the round image RH. To the right of the ally character CRA, a message image MS saying "1410 points acquired" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(G), an ending effect is performed. The ending performance is a performance executed at the end of the jackpot game. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed slightly to the left of the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MS saying "It's definitely different" is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(H), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. This shows the first fluctuation after the end of the jackpot game.

Here, we have given an example in which the pending lottery does not result in a winning lottery. On the other hand, if the pending lottery is won, after FIG. 115(E), for example, the same effect as that shown after FIG. 114(F) will be performed.

[Expectation level suggestion direction C]
FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining the expectation level suggestion effect C. Regarding the expectation level suggestion performance C, we will first start by explaining the winning notification performance shown in FIG. 116(A). The winning notification performance is a performance that notifies you of the fact that you have won the jackpot using a performance pattern. Here, all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are stopped at the "7" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(B), an opening effect is performed. The opening performance is a performance executed at the beginning of the jackpot. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MS is displayed below the ally character CRA saying, "The jackpot has begun."

Next, as shown in FIGS. 116(C) to (F), a round effect is executed. The round performance is a performance executed in conjunction with a round game that constitutes a jackpot.
In FIG. 116(C), a round image RH "1R" is displayed at the upper left of the display screen 7a. This shows that the 1st round is a jackpot. An ally character CRA is displayed on the right side of the round image RH. To the right of the ally character CRA, a message image MS saying "Obtain 0060 pts" is displayed. This indicates the cumulative number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game.

In FIG. 116(D), a round image RH "5R" is displayed at the upper left of the display screen 7a. This shows that the 5th round is the jackpot. Also here, the ally character CRA is displayed on the right side of the round image RH. To the right of the ally character CRA, a message image MS saying "Obtain 0075 points" is displayed. In particular, the message image MS is displayed with its position moved minutely so as to vibrate. The vibrating message image MS indicates that there is a relatively high expectation that the pending lottery will be won.
In FIG. 116(E), a winning image TH with the words "Win Confirmed" written on it is displayed above the message image MS. The display timing of the winning image TH is one of the winning timings of a plurality of game balls into the first grand prize opening 30.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(G), an ending effect is performed. The ending performance is a performance executed at the end of the jackpot game. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed slightly to the left of the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MS saying "It's a jackpot" is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(H), a fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and center right start to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. This shows the first fluctuation after the end of the jackpot game, but if the pending lottery is won, the jackpot will be achieved within the first four fluctuations.

After the fluctuation that results in a jackpot is started, a winning notification effect is executed as shown in FIG. 116(I). The winning notification performance is a performance that notifies you of the fact that you have won the jackpot using a performance pattern. Here, all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are stopped at the "7" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(J), an opening effect is performed. The opening performance is a performance executed at the beginning of the jackpot. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MS is displayed below the ally character CRA saying, "The jackpot has begun."

Here, we have given an example in which a pending lottery has been won. On the other hand, if the pending lottery has not been won, after FIG. 116(E), for example, the same effect as that shown after FIG. 115(F) will be performed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the expectation level suggestion effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114 to 116, when a jackpot lottery is suspended while a jackpot game is being executed, the pending lottery is considered to be a winning (jackpot). An expectation level suggestion effect that suggests the expected level of expectation is executed (FIG. 114(D), FIG. 115(D), FIG. 116(D)). According to this configuration, the performance during the jackpot becomes a novel performance that has not been seen before, making it possible to visually entertain the player and improve interest.
Note that the effect of displaying the suggestion image SH1 in FIG. 114(D), the effect of displaying the suggestion image SH2 in FIG. 115(D), and the effect of displaying the vibrating message image MS in FIG. The performance control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the "performance execution means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as the expectation level suggesting performance, a specific image suggesting the expectation level that the pending lottery is a winning is displayed during the round game. Specifically, suggestion images SH1 and SH2 and message image MS are displayed (FIG. 114(D), FIG. 115(D), FIG. 116(D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The suggestion image SH1 in FIG. 114(D), the suggestion image SH2 in FIG. 115(D), and the vibrating message image MS in FIG. 116(D) correspond to the "specific image."

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, there are two cases in which a specific image is displayed: a first specific image indicating that there is a relatively high expectation that the pending lottery will be won; )), a second specific image indicating that the pending lottery has been won may be displayed (FIG. 115(D), FIG. 116(D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player nervous by displaying the first specific image, and it is possible to reassure the player and give him a sense of superiority by displaying the second specific image, thereby increasing his interest. can.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the expectation level suggesting effect is executed, if a pending lottery has won during a round game, a winning notification effect that displays a winning image indicating that the lottery has been won is performed. Execute (FIGS. 114(F) to (H), FIG. 116(F)). According to this configuration, since the next jackpot is confirmed during the round game, it is possible to surprise the player and improve his/her interest. Note that the winning image TH in FIGS. 114(F) to (H) and the winning image TH in FIG. 116(F) correspond to the "winning image."

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after displaying the suggestion image SH1 in the expectation level suggestion performance (FIG. 114(D)), the suggestion image SH1 is hidden when the game ball enters the first grand prize opening 30. At the same time, a winning notification effect is executed (FIGS. 114(E) to (H)). According to this configuration, since the performance progresses when the game ball wins, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modified example]
A modified example of the expectation level suggestion performance is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the embodiment described above, the timing at which the suggestion images SH1 and SH2 are hidden is the timing at which any one of the plurality of game balls won into the first big winning hole 30 wins. On the other hand, for example, the suggestion images SH1 and SH2 may be hidden when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the suggestion images SH1 and SH2 were displayed.

[Modification 2]
In the embodiment described above, in 5R, the suggestion images SH1 and SH2 are displayed and the message image MS is vibrated to provide an expectation level suggestion effect. On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which the expectation level suggesting performance is performed continuously or intermittently over a plurality of rounds. When performing the expectation level suggesting performance multiple times, it is conceivable to perform the winning notification performance after the execution of the last expectation level suggesting performance.

[Modification 3]
In the embodiment described above, the timing of displaying the suggestion images SH1 and SH2 and the timing of vibrating the message image MS are not particularly limited. For example, the suggestion images SH1 and SH2 may be displayed or the message image MS may be vibrated at the timing of the start of a round game with a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 5R). For example, the suggestion images SH1 and SH2 may be displayed at the timing when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 3) have won after a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 5R) of round games have started, or the message image MS may be displayed. It may also be vibrated. For example, the suggestion images SH1 and SH2 may be displayed or the message image MS may be vibrated at a timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after a round game with a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 5R) has started. You can.

[Modification 4]
In the embodiment described above, the suggestion images SH1 and SH2 and the message image MS are displayed only within the display screen 7a. In addition to or in place of the display screen 7a, the sub display screens 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U) are used to display the suggestion images SH1 and SH2 and the message image MS. It may also be displayed. For example, it is possible to display the winning image TH on the display screen 7a, and then move it and display it on the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U). It will be done. For example, it is thought that the message image MS indicating the cumulative number of game balls paid out is displayed on the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U) from the beginning. I can see it.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect G1-1]
A gaming machine that executes a special game when winning a special symbol lottery,
When the lottery of the special symbol is suspended while the special game is being executed, execution of a performance that can execute an expectation level suggesting performance that indicates the expectation level that the suspended lottery is a winning result. have the means,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect G1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect G1-1,
The special game is composed of multiple round games,
The performance execution means displays, as the expectation level suggesting performance, a specific image that suggests the level of expectation that the pending lottery has been won during the round game.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect G1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect G1-2,
The effect execution means may display the specific image, and may display a first specific image indicating that the expectation that the pending lottery will be won is relatively high; A second specific image indicating that the lottery has been won may be displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect G1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect G1-2 or aspect G1-3,
After executing the expectation level suggestion performance, the performance execution means executes a winning notification performance that displays a winning image indicating that the lottery has been won if the pending lottery has won during the round game. Execute,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect G1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect G1-4,
After displaying the specific image in the expectation level suggesting performance, the performance execution means hides the specific image when a game ball enters a specific ball entrance, and executes the winning notification performance. do,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The screen cracking effects A to D will be explained below using FIGS. 117 to 119. In FIGS. 117 to 119, various movable accessories and various decorative members arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing the drawings. FIG. 117 is a diagram for explaining screen cracking effect A, FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining screen breaking effect B and screen breaking effect C, and FIG. 119 is a diagram for explaining screen breaking effect D. It is.

In this screen cracking effect, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is mainly displayed with a crack (cracks), the display screen 7a is cracked and broken, or the display screen 7a is cracked and broken. (Of course, in the screen cracking effect, various characters, various effect images, various effect images, etc. are also displayed on the display screen 7a). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a screen cracking effect is included, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and sends the image data to the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a.

In addition, when the second movable accessory 15 is activated during the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance design, the fluctuation performance (fluctuating display) of the performance design is different from when the second movable accessory 15 is not activated. This suggests to the player that there is a high degree of expectation that a win will occur after the game ends (that is, after the performance symbols are stopped and displayed). Therefore, the player has a high interest in the operation (movement) of the second movable accessory 15.

In this embodiment, when the second movable accessory 15 moves from its retracted position to its advanced position and stops, the second movable accessory 15 then rotates counterclockwise from a horizontal state at its advanced position and tilts. (tilted about 10 degrees with respect to the horizon), then rotates clockwise and returns to the original horizontal state, moving from the advanced position to the retracted position.

Here, first, the effect symbols, pending icons, etc. will be briefly explained, and then the screen breaking effect A, the screen breaking effect B, the screen breaking effect C, and the screen breaking effect D will be explained in order.

[Production pattern]
First, I will briefly explain the production patterns. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, showing a left effect pattern 8L of a stereoscopic image, a middle effect pattern 8C of a three-dimensional image, and a right effect pattern 8R of a three-dimensional image. A fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols (designs: numbers "1" to "9") is started in the display mode. In the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance design, each performance design is a numeric design: number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → A variable effect (fluctuating display) is performed in a display mode in which the reels rotate in the order of number "7" → number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" →... Note that the number "7" has a bright red color, and the odd numbers "1", "3", "5", and "9" except the number "7" all have the same bright green color. Even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color. In this way, each production pattern is designed primarily in one of bright red, bright green, and bright blue. In addition, since the number symbols (odd number symbols and even number symbols) each have a different color, for example, the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in alignment with the same number symbol, reaching the reach. is formed and the effect is developed after that, the more the player experiences the effect that is developed through reach, the more the player becomes aware of the color of the temporarily stopped number symbol and the effect that will be developed. Players can now have the opportunity to discover for themselves the relationship (law) between and. Thereby, each number pattern (odd number pattern and even number pattern) has a color, which can contribute to improving interest.

When the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance design is started, the performance design that is stopped and displayed at the stop position moves slowly (at low speed) in a display mode in which it floats a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) upwards. After that (in other words, after the stop display of the production design is canceled and the production design is set to the display mode in which it is about to move), it moves from the opaque state to the bottom while gradually increasing the speed from low speed. The display mode changes to a semi-transparent state and changes at high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the performance pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent performance pattern that is changing at high speed. The production design decelerates just before stopping, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed at the stop position (temporarily stopped and then stopped) ). When the production pattern is temporarily stopped, it moves slowly up and down (for example, 2.5 mm upward and 2.5 mm downward (with a swing width of 5 mm) based on the stop position). It becomes a moving display mode. Note that the production pattern may disappear from the display screen 7a.

On the lower right side of the display screen 7a, fluctuations of a small left effect pattern 8LZ, a small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and a small right effect pattern 8RZ, which correspond to the left effect pattern 8L, medium effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R, are shown. A sub-variation area is provided in which the effect (fluctuating display) is started. When the variation (variation display) of the left production symbol 8L, middle production symbol 8C, and right production symbol 8R is started due to the variation (variation icon 9C), a small left production symbol is displayed in the sub variation area. The variable effects (fluctuating displays) of 8LZ, small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and small right effect pattern 8RZ are started, and at the same time, all of the left effect pattern 8L, medium effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are stopped and displayed. The corresponding small left effect pattern 8LZ, small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and small right effect pattern 8RZ are also all stopped and displayed. The small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ are smaller versions of the numbered symbols of the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R, and the stop display. The small left effect pattern 8LZ that is displayed has the same color as the number pattern of the left effect pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed, and the small medium effect pattern 8CZ that is stopped and displayed is the same as that of the medium effect pattern 8C that is stopped and displayed. The numbers have the same design and color, and the small right performance pattern 8RZ that is stopped and displayed has the same number design and color as the right performance pattern 8R that is stopped and displayed. In this way, each small performance pattern is designed primarily in one of bright red, bright green, and bright blue.

As mentioned above, the left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R are effect symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to When the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the number "9" is started and the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the presentation pattern is started, the presentation pattern that is stopped and displayed at the stop position will once move upward by a predetermined distance (for example, , about 5 mm) After moving slowly (at low speed) in a floating display mode (in other words, after the stop display of the production symbol has been canceled and the production symbol is in a display format in which it is about to move), it moves downward. The display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from low speed toward the side, resulting in a display mode that changes at high speed. On the other hand, the small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ are different from the above-mentioned variable effect (fluctuating display) of the effect pattern, and have a display mode in which the reels are rotated. However, at the display position of the small left effect pattern 8LZ, the display position of the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the display position of the small right effect pattern 8RZ, number patterns (symbols: number "1" to number "9") are displayed. appears and is updated, resulting in a display mode that changes rapidly.

The small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and are always displayed, and various effect images and other various Visibility is not obstructed by images.

A state in which one or more of the left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are the same symbol and are temporarily stopped and displayed, and reach is reached. Even if the corresponding small performance symbols (for example, the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed), the small left performance symbol 8LZ and the right performance symbol 8R corresponding to the left performance symbol 8L are temporarily stopped. Even if they are displayed, all the small right performance symbols 8RZ) corresponding to the right performance symbols 8R continue to be in a state where they are variablely rendered (variably displayed). In addition, if the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they are not aligned to the same pattern and are out of alignment, the small left effect pattern 8LZ, small size A medium performance pattern 8CZ and a small right performance pattern 8RZ are stopped and displayed as the same symbols as the left performance pattern 8L, medium performance pattern 8C, and right performance pattern 8R. In addition, if the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same pattern becomes a hit, the small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small A medium performance pattern 8CZ and a small right performance pattern 8RZ are stopped and displayed in the same pattern as the left performance pattern 8L, medium performance pattern 8C, and right performance pattern 8R. As a result, the small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ will be variable effects (fluctuating display) from the start to the end of the variation (variation for the variation icon 9C). will continue.

Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all aligned in the same pattern and are displayed in a stopped state, and the same pattern has the number "1" in bright green and the number "1" in bright blue. Number "2" with light green color, Number "3" with light green color, Number "4" with light blue color, Number "5" with light green color, Number "6" with light blue color, Number "8" with light blue color. , if the number "9" is bright green, the gaming state after the jackpot will be a low probability time saving state (low probability high base state), whereas the same symbol will be bright red. In the case of the number "7" having a jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot becomes a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state). In addition, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all aligned in the same pattern and are displayed in a stopped state, and the same pattern has a bright red color in addition to the number "7". In the case of "3", the gaming state after the jackpot may be a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state). In this case, the number "3" has a bright red color like the number "7".

In addition, the background image is designed in full color, and is displayed when in the low-accuracy, low-base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state, and when in the high-accuracy, time-saving state, which is a time-saving state (high-accuracy, high-base state). and are different. For example, background images such as city images, forest images, sea images, seabed images, underground images, etc. are background images (hereinafter referred to as "non-time saving background images") in non-time saving states (low certainty low base states (normal states)). ) and are still images or moving images. Background images such as space images, spacecraft images, spacecraft interior images, planetary ground images, and planetary underground images are background images in a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high-base state) (hereinafter referred to as ``time-saving background images''). ).

[Hold icon, etc.]
Next, to explain the fluctuation icon 9C and the pending icons 9A and 9B, the fluctuation icon 9C corresponding to the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special figure reservation is as follows: It is displayed (placed) at a variable display position (above the white rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area to the left of the variable display position, a first holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding, and in the area to the right of the variable display position, a second holding display area is provided as a second special figure holding. It is being In the first reservation display area, four reservation icons 9A can be displayed in a straight line, and a maximum of four reservation icons 9A can be stocked. The pending icon 9A closest to the variable icon 9C is called the first pending icon 9A, the second pending icon 9A to the variable icon 9C is called the second pending icon 9A, and the third pending icon 9A to the variable icon 9C is called the third pending icon. 9A, and the pending icon 9A that is farthest from the variable icon 9C is called the fourth pending icon 9A. In the second reservation display area, four reservation icons 9B can be displayed in a straight line, and a maximum of four reservation icons 9B can be stocked. The hold icon 9B closest to the fluctuation icon 9C is called the first hold icon 9B, the hold icon 9B second to the change icon 9C is called the second hold icon 9B, and the hold icon 9B third to the change icon 9C is called the third hold icon. 9B, and the hold icon 9B that is farthest from the variable icon 9C is called a fourth hold icon 9B. In this embodiment, the variation icon 9C and the pending icons 9A and 9B can indicate the expectation of winning depending on the color, and the expectation of winning increases in the order of white → blue → green → red → yellow (gold). . Therefore, players are highly interested in the variable icon 9C and the pending icons 9A and 9B.

[Screen cracking effect A]
Next, screen cracking effect A will be explained with reference to FIG. 117. Here, it is assumed that after hitting the jackpot, the state has transitioned to the high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy, high base state), which is a time-saving state, and the player should move the game ball so that it flows down the right gaming area 3B. A right-handed game is played by firing a game ball. In a right-handed game, a right-handed image MY with "Right-handed" written in the right arrow image is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a. The right-handed image MY is a three-dimensional image designed in full color. Note that the right-handed image MY may be a flat image designed in full color.

The right-hitting image MY is arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, similar to the above-mentioned small left effect pattern 8LZ, small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and small right effect pattern 8RZ. In addition, the right-handed image MY is always displayed in the jackpot gaming state and the time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state), and various effect images and other various Visibility is not obstructed by images. Here, since the time saving state is a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy, high-base state), the background image is the time-saving background image HG1 (image inside the spacecraft).

The player plays a right-handed game by firing the game ball so that it flows down the right game area 3B, and two game balls enter the second starting port 21 and enter the second starting port 21. Of the two game balls that entered the ball, the game ball that entered first is determined and displayed as the first green holding icon 9B based on pre-reading, and the game ball that entered last is displayed as the second white holding icon based on pre-reading. The hold icon 9B is determined and displayed. When the first green pending icon 9B moves to the variable display position and becomes the green variable icon 9C, there is one stocked pending icon 9B.

When the green first pending icon 9B moves to the variable display position and becomes the green variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbols is started as shown in FIG. 117(A). At this time, variable presentation (fluctuating display) of small-sized presentation symbols such as the small-sized left presentation pattern 8LZ, the small-sized medium presentation pattern 8CZ, and the small-sized right presentation pattern 8RZ is also started. At this point, the display screen 7a is in a state where no cracks have occurred in the display screen 7a. The player stops operating the handle 60 in order to gaze (concentrate) on the variation (the green variation icon 9C) as the variation presentation (variation display) of the presentation pattern by the green variation icon 9C has started. .

When the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is started, thereafter, as shown in FIG. 117(B), a cracked screen image CLK in which cracks run from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions appears on the entire display screen 7a. will be displayed. The screen crack image CLK imitates a colorless and transparent glass-like screen, and includes a right-handed image MY, a small left effect pattern 8LZ, a small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and a small right effect pattern placed at the forefront. It is located at the rear of 8RZ. In other words, as described above, the screen cracked image CLK imitates a colorless and transparent glass-like screen. , the display screen 7a is displayed in an unbroken state, and in FIG. 117(B), the display screen 7a changes from an unbroken state to a state in which cracks run from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions. There is.

As a result, the right-hitting image MY, the small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ maintain their own aspects. In other words, the right-handed image MY, the small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ can each realize a display mode that does not change to the broken mode due to the screen crack image CLK. In this way, the right-hitting image MY, the small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ are not visible through the cracked screen image CLK, so Visibility is not hindered by the screen cracked image CLK. On the other hand, the time saving background image HG1 (image inside the spaceship), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, the right effect pattern 8R, the hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9B, the variable icon 9C, and the variable display position are screen cracked. It is placed behind the image CLK. As a result, a crack ran through the time saving background image HG1 (image inside the spaceship), left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, right effect pattern 8R, hold icon 9A, hold icon 9B, variable icon 9C, and variable display position. Since the screen is visually recognized through the screen crack image CLK, it is possible to realize a display mode in which the screen changes to a broken mode depending on the screen break image CLK. In addition, the time saving background image HG1 (image inside the spaceship), left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, right effect pattern 8R, hold icon 9A, hold icon 9B, variable icon 9C, variable display position is the screen where the crack ran. Since the screen is visually recognized through the cracked image CLK, the visibility may be obstructed by the screen cracked image CLK. In addition, the screen crack image CLK is a moving image of a crack running from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions, but it is a still image after the display screen 7a is broken with a crack running in all directions from the center. Good too.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 117(C), the screen crack image CLK is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), and the screen crack is resolved. In other words, since the screen crack image CLK imitates a colorless and transparent glass-like screen as described above, the cracks run from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions in FIG. In FIG. 117(C), the display screen 7a has changed to an unbroken state. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 117(D), a horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a is the center line, and the left effect pattern 8L is tentatively marked with the number "1" in bright green on this center line. A reach is formed in which the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as a bright green number "1" and the middle performance symbol 8C is fluctuating. At this time, the small-sized left presentation pattern 8LZ, the small-sized medium presentation pattern 8CZ, and the small-sized right presentation pattern 8RZ are all in the process of changing performance (variation display) at high speed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117(E), the left effect pattern 8L of the bright green number "1" moves to the upper left side of the display screen 7a and temporarily stops, and the bright green number "1" The right effect pattern 8R is on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, moves to the left of the right hit image MY, and is temporarily stopped. At this time, the medium performance symbol 8C, the variable icon 9C, the first pending icon 9B, and the variable display position are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a). Further, the size of the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R moved to the left and right upper sides of the display screen 7a may be the same size as the size in the state where the reach is formed in FIG. 117(D). , or one that is one or two times smaller.

When the left presentation pattern 8L and the right presentation pattern 8R move to the upper left side or the upper right side of the display screen 7a, a cracked screen image CLK in which cracks run from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions is displayed again on the entire display screen 7a. be done. As mentioned above, the screen cracked image CLK is placed behind the right-handed image MY, the small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ, which are arranged at the forefront. However, here, the reach is further arranged behind the left presentation symbol 8L and the right presentation symbol 8R which are temporarily stopped. As described above, the screen cracked image CLK imitates a colorless and transparent glass-like screen, so in FIGS. 117(C) to (D), the display screen is 7a is displayed in an unbroken manner, and in FIG. 117(E), the display screen 7a changes from an unbroken manner to a manner in which cracks run from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions.

As a result, the right-hitting image MY, the small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, the small right effect pattern 8RZ, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R that temporarily stop when a reach is formed, It is designed to maintain its appearance. In other words, the right-hitting image MY, the small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, the small right effect pattern 8RZ, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R that temporarily stop when a reach is formed are screen cracked images CLK. By arranging it in front of (on the near side), it is possible to realize a display mode that does not change to the split mode. In this way, the right-hitting image MY, the small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, the small right effect pattern 8RZ, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R that temporarily stop when a reach is formed, are cracked. Since the broken screen image CLK is not visible through the broken screen image CLK, visibility is not obstructed by the broken screen image CLK. On the other hand, the time saving background image HG1 (image inside the spacecraft) is arranged behind the screen crack image CLK. As a result, the time-saving background image HG1 (image inside the spacecraft) is viewed through the screen crack image CLK in which the crack runs, and therefore visibility may be obstructed by the screen crack image CLK. Here, as described above, the medium effect symbol 8C, the hold icon 9B, the variable icon 9C, and the variable display position are already hidden (because they have disappeared from the display screen 7a), so they cannot be visually recognized. , visibility is not hindered by the screen cracked image CLK. In addition, the middle performance symbol 8C is different from the left performance symbol 8L and right performance symbol 8R, which temporarily stop when a reach is formed, and is in fluctuation, but it is different from the left performance symbol 8L and right performance symbol, which temporarily stops when a reach is formed. Similarly to 8R, it may be arranged in front (on the near side) of the screen cracked image CLK, or it may be arranged behind the screen cracked image CLK. In addition, as mentioned above, the screen crack image CLK is a moving image of a crack running from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions, but the screen crack image CLK is a video showing a crack running from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions. It may be a still image.

In this way, before reaching the reach state, the left effect pattern 8L and right effect pattern 8R are arranged behind the screen crack image CLK, so they each change to a broken state due to the screen crack image CLK. On the other hand, in the reach state, the left effect symbol 8L and right effect symbol 8R in the reach state are arranged in front of the screen crack image CLK. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel performance that has not been seen before in that it is possible to realize a display mode that does not change to a broken mode due to the screen cracked image CLK.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117(F), to the left of the center of the broken screen image CLK, a fragmented image HB of the screen image is located in front (towards the player) and scatters in all directions and falls. A closed first crack area CB1 is formed (appears), and furthermore, in the center of the screen crack image CLK, a fragment image HB of the screen image is located in front (towards the player) and facing in all directions. The second crack region CB2 is formed (appears) by scattering and falling and closing. The first crack area CB1 and the second crack area CB2 are closed areas without communication, and the time-saving background image HG1 (image inside the spacecraft) is easily visible through the first crack area CB1, and the second crack area CB1 is a closed area. The time-saving background image HG1 (image inside the spacecraft) is easily visible through the crack area CB2. In other words, although the visibility of the time-saving background image HG1 (image inside the spacecraft) is not obstructed by the first crack area CB1 and the second crack area CB2 formed in the screen crack image CLK, the first crack area CB1 and the second crack area CB2 Visibility is obstructed by the area of the screen cracked image CLK in which the crack area CB2 is not formed.

By scattering the fragment image HB toward the front of the screen crack image CLK, it is possible to express the state in which the screen crack image CLK is crushed, creating a realistic effect as if the display screen 7a is being crushed. can be provided to players.

Thereafter, the screen crack image CLK is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), and the screen crack is eliminated. After that, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a), and as shown in FIG. 117 (G), "Battle Effect" indicating SP reach (super reach) is written. A plurality of SP reach suggestion images SG are arranged so as not to overlap each other, and among the images displayed on the display screen 7a, a right-hitting image MY, a small left effect pattern 8LZ, a small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and a small Except for the right production pattern 8RZ, the time saving background image HG1 (image inside the spacecraft) and multiple SP reach suggestion images SG are converted to gray scale (this conversion process to gray scale is performed in real time) . Although the SP reach suggestion image SG is a full-color image mainly in blue and a three-dimensional image having a horizontally long rectangular shape, it has been converted into gray scale here. Note that the SP reach suggestion image SG may be a planar image.

The time saving background image HG1 (image inside the spacecraft) and the plurality of SP reach suggestion images SG have been converted into gray scale as described above. On the other hand, the right-handed image MY is not converted to grayscale, and remains displayed in full color as usual. The effect pattern 8RZ is also not converted to grayscale, and remains in a full-color variable effect (variable display) as usual.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117(H), each time one or some of the plurality of SP reach suggestion images SG are hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a) and disappear, the remaining SP reach suggestion images The size of SG has become larger than the size when it first appeared in FIG. 117 (G), and the arrangement has changed, and the size of the last SP reach suggestion image SG that remains is the largest, and As shown in (I), the conversion process to grayscale is completed, the image returns to a full-color image mainly composed of blue, and the SP reach suggestion image SG, which has become a three-dimensional image having a horizontally long rectangular shape, is displayed on the display screen 7a. displayed in a large position in the center. In this way, when the conversion process to grayscale is completed, the SP reach suggestion image SG returns to the original full-color image, and the time-saving background image HG1 (image inside the spacecraft) returns to the original full-color image.

After that, the SP reach suggestion image SG displayed in a large position in the center of the display screen 7a is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), and the background image is designed in full color from the time-saving background image HG1 (image inside the spacecraft). The screen switches to the short-time background image HG2 (ground image of the planet). Note that the background image may be switched from the time-saving background image HG1 (image inside the spacecraft) to a background image designed in full color and dedicated to battle effects.

In the battle performance, as shown in FIG. 117(J), a full-color ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, a full-color enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and a ally character CRA appears from the center of the display screen 7a. This is a performance in which CRA and the enemy character CRB fight, and it is a super reach performance (SP reach performance) in which the expectation of winning is set high in advance. If the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle production, it is a loss, whereas if the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated in the battle production, it is a win. In addition, in the battle performance, the second movable accessory 15 moves from the retreat position (the position of the second movable accessory 15 in FIG. 1) to the center position of the display screen 7a (a horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a). , the intersection of the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a). be.

After that, in the battle production, when the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the background image switches again from the time saving background image HG2 (ground image of the planet) to the time saving background image HG1 (image inside the spaceship), With the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a as the center line, the left effect pattern 8L reappears on this center line in a display mode in which it temporarily stops at the bright green number "1," and the middle effect pattern appears. 8C reappears in a display mode in which it temporarily stops at the bright green number "9", and the right effect pattern 8R reappears in a display mode in which it temporarily stops at the bright green number "1", and then, as shown in FIG. 117 ( As shown in K), the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are not aligned to the same bright green number "1" and are stopped and displayed, and a loss is confirmed. At the timing when the left effect pattern 8L, medium effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R stop and display, the small left effect pattern 8LZ stops and displays the bright green number "1," and the small medium effect pattern 8CZ stops and displays the bright green color. The small right production pattern 8RZ is stopped and displayed at the number "1" having a bright green color. Accordingly, the green variation icon 9C is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a).

When the white first pending icon 9B moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 117(L), the variable effects of the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are displayed. (Fluctuating display) starts. At this time, variable presentation (fluctuating display) of small-sized presentation symbols such as the small-sized left presentation pattern 8LZ, the small-sized medium presentation pattern 8CZ, and the small-sized right presentation pattern 8RZ is also started.

The white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the variable icon 9C, and the variable display (fluctuating display) of the production symbols is started, and the left production symbol 8L, middle production symbol 8C, and right production symbol 8R are the same. If the symbols do not line up and are stopped and displayed, a loss is confirmed, whereas if the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are the same pattern and are stopped and displayed, a win is confirmed. Then, a jackpot opening is started, and then a jackpot game in which a profit is given to the player is started.

In addition, in FIG. 117(H), if all the plurality of SP reach suggestion images SG are hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a) and disappear, the conversion process to grayscale will not develop into a battle effect. When the game ends, the content shown in FIG. 117(K) is established, and the loss is confirmed. Then, the process advances to FIG. 117(L), and the performance progresses.

In this way, in the screen cracking effect A, in FIGS. 117(A) and 117(B), at the time when the changing effect (fluctuating display) of the effect symbols is started, the display screen 7a has no cracks in the display screen 7a. However, after that, during the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols, the display screen 7a is in a state where cracks run from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions, and the cracked screen image CLK appears on the display screen. It is displayed throughout 7a. In addition, in FIGS. 117(D) to (F), although the display screen 7a has returned to the state in which no cracks have occurred in the display screen 7a, the display screen In 7a, cracks run from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions again, and the screen crack image CLK is displayed on the entire display screen 7a. As a result, players are given a sense of expectation that a performance with high expectations for a win or a winning notification may develop from now on, from the center of the display screen 7a to the four directions from the center of the display screen 7a. It is possible to provide a novel effect that has not been seen before by giving the screen a cracked image CLK in which cracks run in all directions.

[Screen cracking effect B]
Next, screen cracking effect B will be explained with reference to FIG. 118. Here, it is assumed that after hitting the jackpot, the state has transitioned to the high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy, high base state), which is a time-saving state, and the player should move the game ball so that it flows down the right gaming area 3B. A right-handed game is played by firing a game ball. In a right-handed game, a right-handed image MY with "Right-handed" written in the right arrow image is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a. The right-handed image MY is a three-dimensional image designed in full color. Note that the right-handed image MY may be a flat image designed in full color.

The right-hitting image MY is arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, similar to the above-mentioned small left effect pattern 8LZ, small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and small right effect pattern 8RZ. In addition, the right-handed image MY is always displayed in the jackpot gaming state and the time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state), and various effect images and other various Visibility is not obstructed by images. Here, since the time saving state is a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy, high-base state), the background image is the time-saving background image HG1 (image inside the spacecraft).

The player plays a right-handed game by firing the game ball so that it flows down the right game area 3B, and two game balls enter the second starting port 21 and enter the second starting port 21. Of the two game balls that entered the ball, the game ball that entered first is determined and displayed as the yellow (gold) first holding icon 9B based on pre-reading, and the game ball that entered last is displayed in white due to pre-reading. is determined and displayed as the second hold icon 9B. When the yellow (gold) first pending icon 9B moves to the variable display position and becomes the yellow (gold) variable icon 9C, there is one stocked pending icon 9B.

When the yellow (gold) first pending icon 9B moves to the variable display position and becomes the yellow (gold) variable icon 9C, the variable effect (fluctuating display) of the effect pattern starts, as shown in FIG. 118(A). be done. At this time, variable presentation (fluctuating display) of small-sized presentation symbols such as the small-sized left presentation pattern 8LZ, the small-sized medium presentation pattern 8CZ, and the small-sized right presentation pattern 8RZ is also started. At this point, the display screen 7a is in a state where no cracks have occurred in the display screen 7a. As the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbol by the yellow (gold) fluctuating icon 9C has started, the player must turn the handle to watch (concentrate) on the fluctuation (yellow (gold) fluctuating icon 9C). Stop the operation of 60.

When the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is started, after that, as shown in FIG. 118(B), the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a is set as the center line, and on this center line, The display mode is such that the left production pattern 8L temporarily stops at the bright blue number "6", the middle production pattern 8C temporarily stops at the bright blue number "6", and the right production pattern 8R displays bright blue. The display mode is such that it temporarily stops when the number "6" is displayed. At this time, the yellow (gold) variable icon 9C, the white first hold icon 9B, and the variable display position are not displayed (disappear from the display screen 7a). At this time, the small-sized left presentation pattern 8LZ, the small-sized medium presentation pattern 8CZ, and the small-sized right presentation pattern 8RZ are all in the process of changing performance (variation display) at high speed. In addition, when the left performance symbol 8L, middle performance symbol 8C, and right performance symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the bright blue number "6", the gaming state after the jackpot becomes a low probability time saving state (low probability high base state). Become.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 118(C), a screen crack image CLK in which cracks run from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions is displayed on the entire display screen 7a. The screen crack image CLK imitates a colorless and transparent glass-like screen, and includes a right-handed image MY, a small left effect pattern 8LZ, a small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and a small right effect pattern placed at the forefront. It is located at the rear of 8RZ. In other words, as described above, the screen cracked image CLK imitates a colorless and transparent glass-like screen. , the display screen 7a is displayed in an unbroken state, and in FIG. 118(C), the display screen 7a changes from an unbroken state to a state in which cracks run from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions. There is.

As a result, the right-hitting image MY, the small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ maintain their own modes. In other words, the right-hitting image MY, the small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ are arranged in front (on the near side) of the screen crack image CLK, so that they each have a broken appearance. It is possible to realize a display mode that does not change. In this way, the right-hitting image MY, the small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ are not visible through the cracked screen image CLK, so Visibility is not hindered by the screen cracked image CLK. On the other hand, the time saving background image HG1 (image inside the spacecraft), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are arranged behind the screen broken image CLK. As a result, the time-saving background image HG1 (image inside the spacecraft), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are visible through the cracked screen image CLK, so the screen It is possible to realize a display mode that appears to have changed to a broken mode depending on the broken image CLK. In addition, the time saving background image HG1 (image inside the spaceship), left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are visible through the screen crack image CLK with cracks running through them, so the screen cracks. Visibility may be obstructed by the image CLK. In addition, the screen crack image CLK is a moving image of a crack running from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions, but it is a still image after the display screen 7a is broken with a crack running in all directions from the center. Good too.

After that, as shown in FIG. 118(D), the left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R are hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a), suggesting to the player that there is a strong chance of winning. (In other words, the expectation of winning is set high) The ally character CRA with shining golden wings is placed behind the broken screen image CLK and displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a, and the background image is set as the time saving background. The image HG1 (image inside the spacecraft) is switched to the highly likely hit-suggestion background image SHG, which is a dedicated background image of the ally character CRA having golden wings. In addition, the ally character CRA, who has wings that shine in golden yellow, can perform a battle performance that is highly expected to win, or a hit notification (after a jackpot game, it will transition to a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state)). This suggests that it will develop into a public information system. Here, we suggest that this will develop into a hit notification. In the battle production, a full-color ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, a full-color enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA and enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. This is a super reach effect (SP reach effect) in which the expectation of winning is set high in advance. If the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle production, it is a loss, whereas if the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated in the battle production, it is a win. In addition, in the battle performance, the second movable accessory 15 moves from the retreat position (the position of the second movable accessory 15 in FIG. 1) to the center position of the display screen 7a (a horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a). , the intersection of the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a). be.

After that, an ally character CRA with wings that shines in golden yellow shatters the broken screen image CLK from behind the broken screen image CLK while holding the sword image KG in his right hand, resulting in a crushed screen image SSI, as shown in FIG. 118(E). As shown in , the fragmented image HB of the screen image scatters and falls in all directions from the front (towards the player), the broken screen image CLK disappears, and golden shining wings appear. The ally character CRA possessing the winning number is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), and a production pattern of the number "7" (number pattern) having a bright red color to notify a hit appears (is displayed) in the center of the display screen 7a. ). In other words, at the timing of the change from the broken screen image CLK to the shattered screen image SSI, the effect pattern of the number "7" (number pattern), which is bright red and indicates a hit, suddenly appears in the center of the display screen 7a ( displayed). As a result, at the timing when the screen cracked image CLK changes to the shattered screen image SSI, an unprecedented effect is developed in which a bright red effect pattern of the number "7" (number pattern) suddenly appears. A novel performance in which the bright red number 7 (number pattern) that suddenly appears is actually a notification that the player will move to a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy, high-base state) after a jackpot game. can be realized.

When the friendly character CRA with wings that shines in golden color shatters the broken screen image CLK from behind the broken screen image CLK, the fragmented image HB scatters toward the front of the broken screen image CLK, and the broken screen image CLK is It is possible to express the state of being crushed, and to provide the player with a realistic performance as if the display screen 7a was being crushed by the friendly character CRA having golden shining wings. In this way, as the fragmented image HB scatters toward the front of the broken screen image CLK, the broken screen image CLK progresses in pulverization, and the pulverized screen image SSI that crushes the broken screen image CLK is realized. .

After that, as shown in FIG. 118(F), the ally character CRA with golden wings is displayed again in a large size at the center of the display screen 7a, and a horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a is displayed. As a center line, on this center line, the left presentation pattern 8L reappears in a display mode in which it temporarily stops at the bright red number "7", and the middle presentation pattern 8C temporarily stops at the bright red number "7". It reappears in a display mode, and the right effect pattern 8R appears again in a display mode in which it temporarily stops at the bright red number "7". In other words, in FIG. 118(B), the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R were in a display state where they temporarily stopped at the bright blue number "6", but in FIG. 118(F), , the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R are switched to a display mode in which they temporarily stop at the bright red number "7".

Thereafter, the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in alignment with the bright red number "7", and a hit is confirmed. At the timing when the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R stop and display, the small left effect pattern 8LZ stops and displays the bright red number "7," and the small medium effect pattern 8CZ stops and displays the bright red color. The small right production pattern 8RZ is stopped and displayed at the number "7" having a bright red color. That is, the small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ are also stopped and displayed as the same pattern (here, the number "7" having a bright red color). In addition, the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the bright red number "7", so that the gaming state after the jackpot is in a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state). becomes.

Thereafter, the background image is switched from the background image SHG that suggests a strong win to the background image of the jackpot opening, and the jackpot opening is started. Thereafter, the background image is switched from the background image of the jackpot opening to the background image of the jackpot game, and a jackpot game advantageous to the player is started. Accordingly, the player starts operating the handle 60 again and plays a right-handed game. After the jackpot game, a transition is made to a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy, high-base state).

In this way, in screen cracking effect B, in FIGS. 118(B) to 118(D), at the time when the changing effect (fluctuating display) of the effect symbols is started, the display screen 7a has no cracks in the display screen 7a. However, after that, in the state where the performance symbols are temporarily stopped (small left performance symbol 8LZ, small medium performance symbol 8CZ, and small right performance symbol 8RZ are all in a fluctuating performance (fluctuating display). ), the display screen 7a has a crack running from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions, and a screen crack image CLK is displayed on the entire display screen 7a. This gives the player a sense of expectation on the display screen 7a that the game may develop into a win notification (notification that the transition to a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state) after a jackpot game) may occur. By being able to provide a screen crack image CLK that changes from a state in which no cracks occur to a state in which cracks run from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions, a novel performance that has not been seen before can be provided.

In addition, in the screen cracking effect B, in FIG. 118(D), the ally character CRA with golden wings shines with a win notification (after the jackpot game, the transition to the high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state)). This suggested that it would develop into Hochi (Hochi). However, suggesting the development of a performance (battle performance) with high expectations for winning, a battle performance is performed after Figure 118 (D), and the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated, resulting in a win. Then, the process may proceed to FIG. 118(E).

[Screen cracking effect C]
Next, screen cracking effect C will be explained with reference to FIG. 118. Here, it is assumed that after hitting the jackpot, the state has transitioned to the high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy, high base state), which is a time-saving state, and the player should move the game ball so that it flows down the right gaming area 3B. A right-handed game is played by firing a game ball. In a right-handed game, a right-handed image MY with "Right-handed" written in the right arrow image is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a. The right-handed image MY is a three-dimensional image designed in full color. Note that the right-handed image MY may be a flat image designed in full color.

The right-hitting image MY is arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, similar to the above-mentioned small left effect pattern 8LZ, small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and small right effect pattern 8RZ. In addition, the right-handed image MY is always displayed in the jackpot gaming state and the time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state), and various effect images and other various Visibility is not obstructed by images. Here, since the time saving state is a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy, high-base state), the background image is the time-saving background image HG1 (image inside the spacecraft).

The player plays a right-handed game by firing the game ball so that it flows down the right game area 3B, and two game balls enter the second starting port 21 and enter the second starting port 21. Of the two game balls that entered the ball, the game ball that entered first is determined and displayed as the yellow (gold) first holding icon 9B based on pre-reading, and the game ball that entered last is displayed in white due to pre-reading. is determined and displayed as the second hold icon 9B. When the yellow (gold) first pending icon 9B moves to the variable display position and becomes the yellow (gold) variable icon 9C, there is one stocked pending icon 9B.

When the yellow (gold) first pending icon 9B moves to the variable display position and becomes the yellow (gold) variable icon 9C, the variable effect (fluctuating display) of the effect pattern starts, as shown in FIG. 118(G). be done. At this time, variable presentation (fluctuating display) of small-sized presentation symbols such as the small-sized left presentation pattern 8LZ, the small-sized medium presentation pattern 8CZ, and the small-sized right presentation pattern 8RZ is also started. At this point, the display screen 7a is in a state where no cracks have occurred in the display screen 7a. As the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbol by the yellow (gold) fluctuating icon 9C has started, the player must turn the handle to watch (concentrate) on the fluctuation (yellow (gold) fluctuating icon 9C). Stop the operation of 60.

When the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is started, after that, as shown in FIG. 118(H), the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a is set as the center line, and on this center line, A reach is formed in which the left production symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the bright blue number "6", the right production symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the bright blue number "6", and the middle production symbol 8C is fluctuating. be done. At this time, the small-sized left presentation pattern 8LZ, the small-sized medium presentation pattern 8CZ, and the small-sized right presentation pattern 8RZ are all in the process of changing performance (variation display) at high speed.

After that, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, the right effect symbol 8R, the yellow (gold) variation icon 9C, the white first hold icon 9B, and the variation display position are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a), and the figure As shown in 118(I), the background image is a dedicated background image of the ally character CRA with golden shining wings, which suggests to the player that there is a high probability of winning from the time saving background image HG1 (image inside the spaceship). The screen changes to the background image SHG that strongly suggests a certain hit, and a cracked screen image CLK in which cracks run from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions is displayed on the entire display screen 7a.

At this time, in the center of the screen crack image CLK, a sword image KG imitating a sword, which is a member that breaks the display screen 7a, stabs (jumps out) from the rear of the screen crack image CLK toward the front (towards the player). As a result, the fragment image HB of the screen image scatters and falls in all directions in the front (toward the player side), forming a third crack area CB3 closed to the screen crack image CLK. (Appearance), the display mode is such that the tip of the sword image KG protrudes from the third crack area CB3. In other words, the screen crack image CLK is displayed at the same time as the sword image KG is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to realize an effect as if the display screen 7a (screen) was divided by the sword image KG (part image).

When the sword image KG stabs (jumps out) the broken screen image CLK from the back to the front (to the player's side), the fragmented image HB scatters toward the front of the broken screen image CLK, and the broken screen image CLK is shattered. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a realistic effect as if the display screen 7a was being shattered by the sword image KG.

The screen crack image CLK imitates a colorless and transparent glass-like screen, and includes a right-handed image MY, a small left effect pattern 8LZ, a small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and a small right effect pattern placed at the forefront. It is located at the rear of 8RZ. In other words, as described above, the screen cracked image CLK imitates a colorless and transparent glass-like screen. , the display screen 7a is displayed in an unbroken state, and in FIG. 118(I), the display screen 7a changes from an unbroken state to a state in which cracks run from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions. There is.

As a result, the right-hitting image MY, the small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ maintain their own aspects. In other words, the right-hitting image MY, the small-sized left effect pattern 8LZ, the small-sized medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small-sized right effect pattern 8RZ can be prevented from changing to the broken state due to the screen crack image CLK. In this way, the right-hitting image MY, the small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ are not visible through the cracked screen image CLK, so Visibility is not hindered by the screen cracked image CLK. On the other hand, the highly hit-suggesting background image SHG is arranged behind the screen crack image CLK. As a result, the highly hit-suggesting background image SHG is visually recognized through the cracked screen image CLK in which the crack runs, and therefore visibility may be obstructed by the broken screen image CLK. Note that the screen crack image CLK is a moving image of a crack running from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions, but it is a still image after the display screen 7a has been broken with a crack running in all directions from the center. Good too.

Thereafter, when the sword image KG is hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a), as shown in FIG. The character CRA is placed behind the broken screen image CLK and is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a while holding the sword image KG in his right hand. In addition, the ally character CRA, who has wings that shine in golden yellow, can perform a battle performance that is highly expected to win, or a hit notification (after a jackpot game, it will transition to a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state)). This suggests that it will develop into a public information system. Here, it is suggested that the game will develop into a win notification (notification of transition to a high-probability time-saving state (high-probability, high-base state) after a jackpot game). In the battle production, a full-color ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, a full-color enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA and enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. This is a super reach effect (SP reach effect) in which the expectation of winning is set high in advance. If the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle production, it is a loss, whereas if the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated in the battle production, it is a win. In addition, in the battle performance, the second movable accessory 15 moves from the retreat position (the position of the second movable accessory 15 in FIG. 1) to the center position of the display screen 7a (a horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a). , the intersection of the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a). be.

The ally character CRA, who has wings that shine in golden color, is placed behind the broken screen image CLK while holding the sword image KG in his right hand, and is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a. The head and chest of the friendly character CRA with wings that shine in color, and a part of the area of the background image SHG that strongly suggests a hit (an area corresponding to the third crack area CB3, where the friendly character has wings that shine in golden color) Areas of the strongly hit-suggesting background image SHG that do not overlap in the front-back direction with the head and chest of the CRA) can be easily recognized. In other words, the visibility of the head and chest of the friendly character CRA with golden-colored wings is not obstructed by the third crack area CB3 formed in the screen-broken image CLK. However, the area of the screen cracked image CLK in which the third crack area CB3 is not formed obstructs the visibility of the ally character CRA, which has wings that shine in golden yellow, excluding the head.

After that, the ally character CRA, who has wings that shine in golden yellow, uses the sword image KG held in his right hand to shatter the broken screen image CLK from behind the broken screen image CLK, as shown in FIG. 118(E) described above. It develops into a win notification (notification of transition to high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state) after a jackpot game), and the fragmented image HB of the screen image is in front (towards the player) and in all directions. The cracked screen image CLK disappears, the ally character CRA with shining golden wings disappears (disappears from the display screen 7a), and the bright red number "7" (number 7a) disappears. ) is displayed in a large size at the center of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 118(F) described above, the ally character CRA with golden wings is displayed again in a large size at the center of the display screen 7a, and passes through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a. With the horizontal line as the center line, the left effect pattern 8L reappears on this center line in a display mode that temporarily stops at the bright red number "7," and the middle effect pattern 8C temporarily stops at the bright red number "7." It reappears in a display mode in which it stops, and it reappears in a display mode in which it temporarily stops at the number "7" in which the right presentation pattern 8R is bright red. In other words, in FIG. 118(H), when the left effect pattern 8L and right effect pattern 8R forming a reach were in a display state where they temporarily stopped at the bright blue number "6", the above-mentioned FIG. 118(F) , the display mode has been switched to a display mode in which the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R temporarily stop at the bright red number "7".

Thereafter, the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in alignment with the bright red number "7", and a hit is confirmed. At the timing when the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R stop and display, the small left effect pattern 8LZ stops and displays the bright red number "7," and the small medium effect pattern 8CZ stops and displays the bright red color. The small right production pattern 8RZ is stopped and displayed at the number "7" having a bright red color.

Thereafter, the background image is switched from the background image SHG that suggests a strong win to the background image of the jackpot opening, and the jackpot opening is started. Thereafter, the background image is switched from the background image of the jackpot opening to the background image of the jackpot game, and a jackpot game advantageous to the player is started. Accordingly, the player starts operating the handle 60 again and plays a right-handed game. After the jackpot game, a transition is made to a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy, high-base state).

In this way, in the screen cracking effect C, in FIGS. 118(H) to 118(J), at the time when the variable effect (fluctuating display) of the effect symbols is started, the display screen 7a has no cracks on the display screen 7a. However, after that, in a state where the reach is formed by the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R (the small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ are all ), the display screen 7a is in a state where cracks run from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions, and a screen crack image CLK is displayed on the entire display screen 7a. This gives the player a sense of expectation on the display screen 7a that the game may develop into a win notification (notification that the transition to a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state) after a jackpot game) may occur. By being able to provide a screen crack image CLK that changes from a state in which no cracks occur to a state in which cracks run from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions, a novel performance that has not been seen before can be provided.

In addition, in screen cracking effect C, the ally character CRA with golden shining wings in FIG. 118(J) suggests that the game will develop into a hit notification. However, suggesting the development of a performance (battle performance) with a high expectation of winning, a battle performance is performed after Figure 118 (J), and the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated, resulting in a win. Then, the process may proceed to FIG. 118(E).

[Screen cracking effect D]
Next, the screen cracking effect D will be explained with reference to FIG. 119. Here, it is assumed that after hitting the jackpot, the state has transitioned to the high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy, high base state), which is a time-saving state, and the player should move the game ball so that it flows down the right gaming area 3B. A right-handed game is played by firing a game ball. In a right-handed game, a right-handed image MY with "Right-handed" written in the right arrow image is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a. The right-handed image MY is a three-dimensional image designed in full color. Note that the right-handed image MY may be a flat image designed in full color.

The right-hitting image MY is arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, similar to the above-mentioned small left effect pattern 8LZ, small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and small right effect pattern 8RZ. In addition, the right-handed image MY is always displayed in the jackpot gaming state and the time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state), and various effect images and other various Visibility is not obstructed by images. Here, since the time saving state is a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy, high-base state), the background image is the time-saving background image HG1 (image inside the spacecraft). Incidentally, above the small-sized medium effect pattern 8CZ, a small-sized right-handed image SAG with "right-handed shot" written in the right arrow image is arranged and displayed, similar to the right-handed image MY.

The small right-handed image SAG is a smaller version of the right-handed image MY, and has a shape similar to the right-handed image MY. Although the small right-handed image SAG is a three-dimensional image designed in full color, it is designed in a different color from the right-handed image MY (for example, if the right-handed image MY is designed mainly in red, , a small right-handed image SAG is designed primarily in white or light gray). The small right-handed image SAG is also arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, similar to the right-handed image MY. Note that the small right-handed image SAG may be a flat image designed in full color.

The player plays a right-handed game by firing the game ball so that it flows down the right game area 3B, and two game balls enter the second starting port 21 and enter the second starting port 21. Of the two game balls that entered the ball, the first game ball that entered the ball is determined and displayed as the red first holding icon 9B, and the last game ball that entered the ball is displayed as the white second reservation icon. The hold icon 9B is determined and displayed. When the first red pending icon 9B moves to the variable display position and becomes the red variable icon 9C, there is one stocked pending icon 9B.

When the red first pending icon 9B moves to the variable display position and becomes the red variable icon 9C, a variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbols is started as shown in FIG. 119(A). At this time, variable presentation (fluctuating display) of small-sized presentation symbols such as the small-sized left presentation pattern 8LZ, the small-sized medium presentation pattern 8CZ, and the small-sized right presentation pattern 8RZ is also started. At this point, the display screen 7a is in a state where no cracks have occurred in the display screen 7a. The player stops operating the handle 60 in order to gaze (concentrate) on the variation (the red variation icon 9C) as the variation production (variation display) of the production pattern by the red variation icon 9C is started. .

When the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is started, after that, as shown in FIG. 119(B), the left performance symbol 8L, middle performance symbol 8C, and right performance symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen without temporarily stopping. With the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of 7a as the center line, on this center line, the left effect pattern 8L has a bright green color and stops at the number "1", and the middle effect pattern 8C has a bright blue color. The display mode stops at the number "2", and the display mode stops at the number "3" where the right presentation pattern 8R is bright green. In this state, the small performance symbols such as the small left production symbol 8LZ, the small medium production symbol 8CZ, and the small right production symbol 8RZ do not stop, and all the small production symbols fluctuate at high speed. It is currently being displayed (variable display). In other words, the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R are in a state where they are pseudo-stopped and displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 119(C), a screen crack image CLK in which cracks run from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions is displayed on the entire display screen 7a. The screen crack image CLK imitates a colorless and transparent glass-like screen, and includes a right-handed image MY, a small left effect pattern 8LZ, a small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and a small right effect pattern placed at the forefront. It is placed behind the 8RZ and the small right-handed image SAG. In other words, as described above, the screen cracked image CLK imitates a colorless and transparent glass-like screen. , the display screen 7a is displayed in an unbroken state, and in FIG. 119(C), the display screen 7a changes from an unbroken state to a state in which cracks run from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions. There is.

As a result, the right-handed image MY, the small-sized left effect pattern 8LZ, the small-sized medium effect pattern 8CZ, the small-sized right effect pattern 8RZ, and the small-sized right-effect image SAG maintain their own aspects. In other words, the right-handed image MY, the small left effect symbol 8LZ, the small medium effect symbol 8CZ, the small right effect symbol 8RZ, and the small right image SAG are arranged in front (on the near side) of the screen crack image CLK. This makes it possible to realize a display mode that does not change to the broken mode. In this way, the right-hand hitting image MY, the small left-hand effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium-sized medium effect pattern 8CZ, the small right-hand effect pattern 8RZ, and the small right-hand movement image SAG are visually recognized through the cracked screen image CLK. Therefore, visibility is not obstructed by the screen cracked image CLK. On the other hand, the time saving background image HG1 (image inside the spaceship), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, the right effect pattern 8R, the hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9B, the variable icon 9C, and the variable display position are screen cracked. It is placed behind the image CLK. As a result, a crack ran through the time saving background image HG1 (image inside the spaceship), left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, right effect pattern 8R, hold icon 9A, hold icon 9B, variable icon 9C, and variable display position. Since the screen is visually recognized through the screen crack image CLK, it is possible to realize a display mode in which the screen changes to a broken mode depending on the screen break image CLK. In addition, the time saving background image HG1 (image inside the spaceship), left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, right effect pattern 8R, hold icon 9A, hold icon 9B, variable icon 9C, variable display position is the screen where the crack ran. Since the screen is visually recognized through the cracked image CLK, the visibility may be obstructed by the screen cracked image CLK. In addition, the screen crack image CLK is a moving image of a crack running from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions, but it is a still image after the display screen 7a is broken with a crack running in all directions from the center. Good too.

After that, on the left side of the center of the screen cracked image CLK, there is a fourth cracked area CB4 in which the fragmented image HB of the screen image is in front (towards the player), scatters in all directions, falls, and closes. Formed (appears). As a result, in the rear area corresponding to the fourth crack area CB4, the right side part of the left effect pattern 8L is shaved off by the fourth crack area CB4, and the time saving background image HG1 (image inside the spacecraft) is also displayed. The display mode is cut off by the fourth crack area CB4. On the other hand, through the fourth crack area CB4, the right arm and part of the right wing part of the ally character CRA, which has wings that shine in a golden color that suggests to the player that there is a strong chance of winning, and a part of the wing on the right side that shines in a golden color. A part of the hit-rich suggestion background image SHG, which is a dedicated background image of the winged ally character CRA (an area corresponding to the fourth crack area CB4, which includes the right arm of the ally character CRA with golden shining wings) The region of the highly hit-suggesting background image SHG that does not overlap in the front-rear direction with a part of the right wing portion becomes easier to see. Although there is a crack in the screen crack image CLK, the time-saving background image HG1 (image inside the spacecraft) is visible through other areas of the screen crack image CLK where the fourth crack area CB4 is not formed. ing.

The ally character CRA, who has wings that shine in golden yellow, performs a battle performance that is highly expected to win, or a win notification (notifies that the transition to a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state) after a jackpot game) This suggests that it will develop into Here, it is suggested that it will develop into a battle performance, which is a performance with high expectations of winning.

After that, in the center of the screen crack image CLK, as shown in FIG. 119(D), a fragment image HB of the screen image is further scattered in front (towards the player) and in all directions. A fifth crack region CB5 that falls and closes is formed (appears). As a result, in the rear area corresponding to the fifth crack area CB5, the entire medium effect pattern 8C becomes a display mode that is shaved off by the fifth crack area CB5, and the time saving background image HG1 (image inside the spacecraft) also appears in the fifth crack area CB5. The display mode is cut off by the crack area CB5. On the other hand, through the fifth crack area CB5, the head, left chest, and part of the left wing part of the ally character CRA, which has wings that shine in golden yellow, indicating to the player that there is a strong chance of winning, A part of the hit-rich suggestion background image SHG, which is a dedicated background image of the friendly character CRA with golden-colored wings (an area corresponding to the fifth crack area CB5, of the friendly character with golden-colored wings) The area of the highly hit-suggesting background image SHG that does not overlap in the front-rear direction with a portion of the head, left thorax, and left wing of the CRA) can be easily recognized. Note that although there are cracks in the screen crack image CLK through other areas in which the fourth crack area CB4 and the fifth crack area CB5 are not formed, the time-saving background image HG1 (spacecraft interior image) ) is visible.

In this way, at the timing when the fourth cracking area CB4 and the fifth cracking area CB5 are formed, a part of the ally character CRA with golden shining wings can be seen only through the fourth cracking area CB4 and the fifth cracking area CB5. It is possible to realize an unprecedented and innovative performance that can be visually recognized. In addition, in the surface crack image CLK, at least a part of the ally character CRA having golden shining wings can be visually recognized only through the fourth crack area CB4 and the fifth crack area CB5 where the display screen 7a is broken. , With the appearance of this ally character CRA, it may develop into a production with high expectations for winning or a winning notification (notification of transition to a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state) after a jackpot game). It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that he or she will not be able to play the game.

After that, the ally character CRA with wings that shines in golden color shatters the broken screen image CLK from behind the broken screen image CLK, so that the fragmented image HB of the screen image appears in front (towards the player) and in all directions. When it scatters and falls in all directions, the background image in the area corresponding to the scattered fragment image HB switches from the time-saving background image HG1 (image inside the spacecraft) to the background image SHG that strongly suggests a hit, and each time the fragment image HB scatters. While the area of the time-saving background image HG1 (image inside the spacecraft) that was displayed becomes smaller, the area of the highly hit-suggesting background image SHG that is displayed becomes larger, as shown in FIG. 119(E). When the screen cracked image CLK disappears, all the background images are switched from the time-saving background image HG1 (image inside the spacecraft) to the highly hit-suggestion background image SHG.

When all the background images are switched from the time-saving background image HG1 (image inside the spacecraft) to the background image SHG that strongly suggests winning, the ally character CRA with golden shining wings is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a) and SP An SP reach suggestion image SG marked with "battle effect" suggesting reach (super reach) is displayed in a large size at the center of the display screen 7a. The SP reach suggestion image SG is a full-color image mainly in blue, and is a stereoscopic image having a horizontally long rectangular shape. Note that the SP reach suggestion image SG may be a planar image.

After that, the SP reach suggestion image SG displayed in a large position in the center of the display screen 7a is hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a), and the background image is replaced with a time-saving background designed in full color from the hit rich suggestion background image SHG. Switch to image HG2 (ground image of the planet). It should be noted that the background image may be switched from the background image SHG that suggests a strong win to a background image designed in full color and dedicated to battle effects.

In the battle performance, as shown in FIG. 119(G), a full-color ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, a full-color enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and a ally character CRA appears from the center of the display screen 7a. This is a performance in which CRA and the enemy character CRB fight, and it is a super reach performance (SP reach performance) in which the expectation of winning is set high in advance. If the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle production, it is a loss, whereas if the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated in the battle production, it is a win.

When the battle performance starts, as shown in FIG. 119(H), the second movable accessory 15, which is placed in front of the display screen 7a and has the character string "OARO" formed on its surface, moves to the retracted position (see FIG. 1) to the center position of the display screen 7a (a horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a, and a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a, It starts moving downward to the advancing position, which is the intersection point of As a result, the player's expectation of winning is further increased due to the operation (movement) of the second movable accessory 15.

When the second movable accessory 15 advances to the advancing position and stops, the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise from the horizontal state and tilts (lined by the horizontal After that, it rotates clockwise and returns to its original horizontal state, moving from the advanced position to the retracted position. Due to the reciprocating movement of the second movable accessory 15 between the retracted position and the advanced position, the right-handed hit image MY arranged and displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a is covered by the second movable accessory 15. A period will occur. On the other hand, the small right-handed image SAG, which is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a and is placed furthest to the front like the right-handed image MY, is a small-sized right-handed image SAG that is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. Due to the reciprocating movement between the position and the advancing position, there is no period during which it is covered by the second movable accessory 15, and furthermore, like the right-handed image MY, the small left effect placed at the frontmost side The pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ also have a period in which they are covered by the second movable accessory 15 due to the reciprocating movement of the second movable accessory 15 between the retracted position and the advanced position. Does not occur at all.

After that, in the battle performance, when the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated, the background image changes from the time saving background image HG2 (planet ground image) to the time saving background image HG3, as shown in FIG. 119(J). At the same time, the left production pattern 8L temporarily stops at the bright red number "7" on the center line, with the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a as the center line. It reappears in a display mode in which the middle production pattern 8C temporarily stops at the bright red number "7", and the right production pattern 8R temporarily stops at the bright red number "7". After that, the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in the same bright red number "7", and the win is confirmed. At the timing when the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R stop and display, the small left effect pattern 8LZ stops and displays the bright red number "7," and the small medium effect pattern 8CZ stops and displays the bright red color. The small right production pattern 8RZ is stopped and displayed at the number "7" having a bright red color. In addition, the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the bright red number "7", so that the gaming state after the jackpot is in a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state). becomes.

Thereafter, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a), and as shown in FIG. 119(K), the right effect image MY and the small right effect image SAG are Similarly, a large right-handed player image BAG with "right-handed player" written in the right arrow image is placed in the center of the display screen 7a and displayed in a large size.

The large right-handed image BAG is an enlarged version of the right-handed image MY, and has a similar shape to the right-handed image MY. Although the large right-handed image BAG is a three-dimensional image designed in full color, it is designed in a different color from the right-handed image MY (for example, if the right-handed image MY is designed mainly in red, , the small right-handed image SAG is designed mainly in white or light gray, and the large right-handed image BAG is designed mainly in blue). The large right-handed image BAG is also arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, similar to the right-handed image MY and the small right-handed image SAG. Note that the large right-handed image SAG may be a flat image designed in full color.

In this way, the right-handed game image MY, the small right-handed game image SAG, and the large right-handed game image BAG are simultaneously displayed on the display screen 7a as images suggesting the game state of "right-handed game". The sizes of the images increase in the order of small right-handed image SAG, right-handed image MY, and large right-handed image BAG.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 119(L), the background image is switched from the time-saving background image HG3 (underground image of the planet) to the jackpot opening background image AHG, and the jackpot opening is started. Thereafter, the background image is switched from the background image of the jackpot opening to the background image of the jackpot game, and a jackpot game advantageous to the player is started. Accordingly, the player starts operating the handle 60 again and plays a right-handed game. After the jackpot game, the game will shift to a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy, high-base state).

In addition, in FIGS. 119(C) and (D), since the ally character CRA with golden shining wings does not appear, the ally character CRA with golden shining wings can be seen through the fourth cracking area CB4 and the fifth cracking area CB5. When a part of the character CRA cannot be visually recognized, there is no development into battle performance, or development into hit notification (notification of transition to high accuracy time saving state (high accuracy high base state) after the jackpot game). However, the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are not aligned in the same pattern, and are stopped and displayed, confirming the loss (it may be stopped and displayed with the numbered pattern in FIG. 119(B). , may be stopped and displayed with other number patterns). At this time, the small left performance pattern 8LZ, the small medium performance pattern 8CZ, and the small right performance pattern 8RZ are also stopped and displayed as symbols corresponding to the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R, respectively.

In this way, in screen cracking effect D, in FIGS. 119(B) to 119(D), at the time when the changing effect (fluctuating display) of the effect symbols is started, the display screen 7a has no cracks on the display screen 7a. However, after that, during the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols, the display screen 7a is in a state where cracks run from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions, and the cracked screen image CLK appears on the display screen. It is displayed throughout 7a. This may lead to performances with high expectations for players to win, or win notifications (informing players that they will move to a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy, high-base state) after a jackpot game). This feeling of expectation can be given by the screen crack image CLK, which changes from a state in which there is no crack on the display screen 7a to a state in which cracks run from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions, thereby creating an unprecedented and novel performance. can be provided.

In addition, in the screen cracking effect D, in FIGS. 119(C) to (D), only through the fourth cracking area CB4 and the fifth cracking area CB5 where the display screen 7a is broken, the ally character CRA with golden wings shines. Since at least a portion of the character CRA can be seen, the appearance of this ally character CRA creates a feeling of anticipation that it may develop into a performance with high expectations for winning or a winning notification. can be granted to a person.

In addition, in screen cracking effect D, the ally character CRA with golden shining wings in FIGS. there were. However, after Fig. 119 (D), it suggests the development to a hit notification (notification of transition to a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state) after a jackpot game). The fragmentation image HB of the screen image is scattered in all directions (towards the player) and falls. Then, the screen cracked image CLK disappears, the ally character CRA with shining golden wings disappears (disappears from the display screen 7a), and the bright red number "7" (number pattern) appears on the display screen 7a. It may be displayed in a large size in the center of the screen, and then proceed to FIG. As a result, an unprecedented effect is developed in which a production pattern of the number "7" (number pattern) with a bright red color suddenly appears, and at the same time, the number "7" (number pattern) with a bright red color suddenly appears. It is possible to realize a novel performance in which the performance pattern (symbol) actually notifies the transition to a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state) after a jackpot game.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of screen cracking effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, a plurality of types of images are displayed on the display screen 7a (screen) of the image display device 7, and one of the plurality of types of images is a right-handed hitting image MY that encourages right-handed hitting. One of the plurality of types of images is a broken screen image CLK in which at least a part of the display screen 7a (screen) is broken, and the right-handed image MY is arranged in front of the broken screen image CLK. (Figures 117 (B), (E) to (F) for screen cracking effect A, Figures 118 (C) to (D) for screen cracking effect B, and Figures 118 (I) to 118 (I) for screen cracking effect C) (J), and in screen cracking effect D (FIGS. 119(C) to (D)). According to this configuration, by arranging the right-handed image MY in front of the screen crack image CLK, for example, a crack runs in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a (screen), and at least part of the display screen 7a (screen) Even if the screen changes to a broken state and becomes the screen cracked image CLK, the state of the right-handed image MY can be maintained, that is, a display state that does not change to the broken state can be realized. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the feeling of anxiety that the right-handed game image MY will be crushed and the right-handed game state will end, and the display screen 7a (screen) changes to a state where at least a part of it is broken. The screen cracked image CLK is an unprecedented and novel feature in that it can give players a sense of anticipation that it may develop into a production with high expectations for a win or a win notification. We can provide performances. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

In addition, for example, a cracked screen image CLK in which a crack runs from the center of the display screen 7a (screen) in all directions, and at least a part of the display screen 7a (screen) changes to a broken state, provides a warning to the player about the display screen. It is possible to suddenly provide a performance with an impact as if 7a had suddenly broken, thereby reducing the monotony of the game performance and contributing to suppressing a decrease in the desire to play.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one of the plurality of types of images in the screen cracking effect A in FIG. 117, the screen breaking effect B in FIG. 118, the screen breaking effect C in FIG. 119, and the screen breaking effect D in FIG. The symbols are 8L (production symbol), middle production symbol 8C (production symbol), and right production symbol 8R (production symbol). The effect pattern) is arranged behind the screen cracked image CLK. According to this configuration, the left presentation pattern 8L (performance pattern), the middle presentation pattern 8C (performance pattern), and the right presentation pattern 8R (performance pattern) are arranged behind the screen cracked image CLK. , it is possible to realize a display mode in which the screen changes to a broken mode depending on the screen cracked image CLK.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one of the plurality of types of images in the screen cracking effect A in FIG. 117, the screen breaking effect B in FIG. 118, the screen breaking effect C in FIG. 119, and the screen breaking effect D in FIG. A small left effect pattern 8LZ (small effect pattern) corresponding to the pattern 8L (effect pattern), a small medium effect pattern 8CZ (small effect pattern) corresponding to the medium effect pattern 8C (performance pattern), a right effect pattern 8R There is a small right effect pattern 8RZ (small effect pattern) that corresponds to (effect pattern), a left effect pattern 8LZ (small effect pattern), a small medium effect pattern 8CZ (small effect pattern), and a small right effect pattern. The symbol 8RZ (small performance symbol) is arranged in front of the screen crack image CLK. According to this configuration, the left effect pattern 8LZ (small effect pattern), the small medium effect pattern 8CZ (small effect pattern), and the small right effect pattern 8RZ (small effect pattern) are in front of the screen cracked image CLK. Therefore, it is possible to realize a display mode that does not change to a broken mode due to the screen cracked image CLK.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the screen cracking effect A shown in FIG. When a ready-to-win state is reached in the ready-to-reach state (symbols), the left presentation pattern 8L (performance pattern) and the right presentation pattern 8R (performance pattern) in the ready state are arranged in front of the screen broken image CLK. According to this configuration, when the ready-to-reach state is reached, the left production symbol 8L (production symbol) and the right production symbol 8R (production symbol) in the ready-to-reach state are arranged in front of the screen cracked image CLK. Therefore, it is possible to realize a display mode that does not change to a broken mode due to the screen cracked image CLK. In other words, before reaching the reach state, the left performance symbol 8L (production symbol) and the right production symbol 8R (production symbol) are arranged behind the screen crack image CLK, so the screen cracks. While it is possible to realize a display mode that changes to a broken mode depending on the image CLK, when it comes to the reach state, the left effect pattern 8L (effect pattern) and the right effect pattern 8R (effect pattern) in the reach condition can be realized. Since the symbol) is arranged in front of the screen crack image CLK, it is possible to realize a display mode that does not change to a broken state due to the screen crack image CLK, which is an unprecedented and innovative effect. be able to.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the screen cracking effect B shown in FIG. 118(E), one of the plurality of types of images is a crushed screen image SSI in which the display screen 7a (screen) is crushed. , At the timing of the change from the broken screen image CLK to the shattered screen image SSI, a bright red effect pattern of the number "7" appears to notify a hit. According to this configuration, it is possible to realize an unprecedented and novel performance in which a performance pattern suddenly appears at the timing when the screen cracked image CLK changes to the shattered screen image SSI.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the screen cracking effect C shown in FIG. 118(I), one of the plurality of types of images is a sword image KG( (part image), and the screen crack image CLK is displayed at the timing when the sword image KG (part image) is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to realize an effect as if the display screen 7a (screen) is divided by the sword image KG (member image), and it is possible to provide an impactful effect to the player.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the screen cracking effect D shown in FIGS. The friendly character CRA (specific image with a high expectation of winning) has shining wings, and at least a part of the friendly character CRA (specific image) with golden shining wings is placed behind the screen cracked image CLK. The cracked screen is made visible through the fourth broken area CB4 (specific area) and the fifth broken area CB5 (specific area) formed in the screen broken image CLK. According to this configuration, in the screen cracked image CLK, at least a part of the ally character CRA (specific image (At least a part of) can be visually recognized, so the appearance of this ally character CRA (specific image) creates a feeling of expectation that it may develop into a performance with high expectation of winning or a winning notification. It can be given to the player.

[Modified example]
Below, a modification of the screen cracking effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the screen cracking effect A in FIG. 117 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the screen breaking effect B in FIG. 118, the screen breaking effect C in FIG. 118, and the screen breaking effect D in FIG. It was scattered all over the place. At this time, a display mode may be adopted in which the image is reflected in the scattered fragment image HB. In this way, the manner in which the screen split image CLK is crushed can be expressed in a more realistic manner. Further, the image reflected in the scattered debris image HB may be various images placed behind the screen split image CLK, or may be a dedicated image reflected in the scattered debris image HB.

[Modification 2]
In the screen cracking effect A in FIG. 117 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the screen breaking effect B in FIG. 118, the screen breaking effect C in FIG. 119, and the screen breaking effect D in FIG. A broken screen image CLK was displayed on the entire display screen 7a. However, since a colorless and transparent crystal image having a predetermined shape is placed on the display screen 7a, and the crystal image is not broken, it is not necessary to cover the entire display screen 7a. A change performance may be performed in which the appearance changes to a state in which a crack runs through and splits. Even in this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the player will experience a performance with a high level of expectation of winning or that it may develop into a winning notification by the changing performance of the crystal image, which is unprecedented. We can provide innovative performances.

[Modification 3]
In the screen cracking effect A shown in FIG. 117 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the screen breaking effect B shown in FIG. 118, the screen breaking effect C shown in FIG. 119, and the screen breaking effect D shown in FIG. The display mode was such that cracks ran in all directions, and the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9B (pending icon 9A) were visible through the screen cracked image CLK in which the cracks ran and broke. At this time, the screen crack image CLK becomes a display mode in which a crack runs from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions, and the fluctuation icon 9C and the pending icon 9B (hold icon 9A) also display a display mode in which a crack runs and breaks (varies). The display mode may be such that the icon 9C and the pending icon 9B (the pending icon 9A) are crushed. By doing this, when the screen crack image CLK becomes a display mode in which cracks run from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions, pending changes are made by pre-reading for the fluctuation icon 9C and the pending icon 9B (the pending icon 9A). It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the expectation level of winning may increase.

[Modification 4]
In the screen cracking effect D shown in FIG. 119(H) in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the battle effect is started, the first screen on which the character string "OARO" is formed on the surface is placed in front of the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 moves from the retracted position (the position of the second movable accessory 15 in FIG. 1) to the center position of the display screen 7a (a horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a, and the center of the top side of the display screen 7a). and the vertical line passing through the center of the lower side). However, instead of the second movable accessory 15 or together with the second movable accessory 15, the first movable accessory 14 may appear on the display screen 7a and move in the left and right direction, or the frame can be moved. The accessories 69 may be moved from the retracted position toward the handle 60 so as to approach each other. Similarly to the second movable accessory 15, when the first movable accessory 14 and the frame movable accessory 69 are activated during the fluctuating performance (variable display) of the performance symbol, the first movable accessory 14 and the frame movable accessory Compared to when the object 69 is not activated, the player has a high expectation of winning that a win will occur after the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is completed (that is, after the performance symbols are stopped and displayed). This suggests that Therefore, the player is highly interested in the operation (movement) of the first movable accessory 14 and the frame movable accessory 69. As a result, the player's expectation of winning increases due to the operation (action) of the first movable accessory 14 and the frame movable accessory 69, as well as the operation (action) of the second movable accessory 15.

[Modification 5]
In the screen cracking effect A in FIG. 117 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the screen breaking effect B in FIG. 118, the screen breaking effect C in FIG. 118, and the screen breaking effect D in FIG. Cracks appeared in all directions, and the entire display screen 7a was cracked. However, the cracked screen image CLK may be a state in which a part of the display screen 7a is cracked instead of the entire display screen 7a. The part of the display screen 7a may be the center of the display screen 7a, a certain distance (for example, 50 mm) from the center of the display screen 7a, or the upper left side of the display screen 7a. or the lower left side.

[Modification 6]
In the screen cracking effect D shown in FIG. 119 in the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, a small right-handed image SAG is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen as an image suggesting the game state of "right-handed game". It was placed above the medium effect pattern 8CZ, and "Right hit" was written in the right arrow image. However, as a small-sized right-hand hitting image SAG, the characters "right-hand hitting" may be omitted from the right arrow image and a simple right arrow image may be used. In this case, since the text "Right-handed" disappears from the right-arrow image, the small-sized right-handed-handed image SAG, which is simply a right-arrow image, is designed primarily in white or light gray.

[Modification 7]
In the screen cracking effect D shown in FIG. 119 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the right-handed image MY is placed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a as an image suggesting the game state of "right-handed game", and a small The right-handed image SAG was placed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a and above the small-sized medium production pattern 8CZ. The various decorative members provided on the center decorative body 10 do not cover the front of the right-handed image MY, and include a small right-handed image SAG, a small left effect pattern 8LZ, a small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and a small right effect pattern 8RZ. It may be made to cover the front of the. The decorative members that cover the front of the small right-handed image SAG, the small left-handed design 8LZ, the small medium-sized design 8CZ, and the small right-handed design 8RZ are transparent or translucent, and have a design applied to them. You can also use it as In this way, by covering the front of the small right-handed image SAG, the small left-hand effect pattern 8LZ, the small middle-effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right-hand effect pattern 8RZ with various decorative members provided on the center decoration body 10, , the player's line of sight can be naturally drawn to the center of the display screen 7a and its surroundings, and the visibility of the right-handed game image MY that is not covered by the various decorative members provided on the center decorative body 10 is improved. By being able to secure this, it is possible to continue to suggest "right-handed games" to players. In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are the number of reservations (numbers). ) When providing a reserved number display area having a horizontally long rectangular shape, the reserved number display area may be placed to the left of the small left-hand effect pattern 8LZ, or a small right-handed image designed in full color may be used. It may be placed near the SAG (lower left of the small right-handed image SAG). In this case, the reserved number display area is also displayed on the center decorative body 10 placed in front, similar to the small right-handed image SAG, the small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ. It will be covered with various decorative members provided.

[Modification 8]
In the screen cracking effect A shown in FIG. 117 in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, the screen breaking effect B shown in FIG. 118, the screen breaking effect C shown in FIG. 118, and the screen breaking effect D shown in FIG. A pending icon 9B was displayed as an image on the display screen 7a as a special figure pending. However, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are the number of reservations (numbers). ) may be provided with a pending number display area having a horizontally long rectangular shape. The number of first special drawings on hold (number on hold (number)) and the number on second special drawings on hold (number on hold (number)) are both numeric images, the closest to you, and the lower left side of the display screen 7a. Or, it is placed on the left side of the small left effect pattern 8LZ and does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

The number of 1st special figure reservations (number of reservations (numbers)) and the number of 2nd special figure reservations (number of reservations (numbers)) are both numerical images and are the closest to the front, so the number of 1st special figure reservations is The number (number of reservations (number)) and the number of second special drawings reservation (number of reservations (number)) can be arranged in front of the screen cracked image CLK. As a result, even if, for example, cracks run from the center of the display screen 7a (screen) in all directions, and at least a part of the display screen 7a (screen) changes to a broken screen, resulting in the screen cracked image CLK, the first Since it is possible to maintain the appearance of the number of reserved special drawings (number of reserved tickets (number)) and the number of second reserved special drawings (number of reserved tickets (number)), in other words, it is possible to realize a display format that does not change to a split format, The number of 1st special map reservations (reservation number (number)) and the number of 2nd special map reservations (reservation number (number)) are not crushed.

The number of 1st special map reservations (number of reservations (number)) and the number of 2nd special map reservations (number of reservations (number)) may be separated by a predetermined distance on the left and right, or by a predetermined distance above and below. May be separated. In addition, the number of 1st special figure reservations (the number of reservations (number)) is shown in blue, and the number of 2nd special figure reservations (the number of reservations (numbers)) is shown in red. This is to make it easier to distinguish between the number of reserved first special symbols (number of reserved symbols) and the number of reserved second special symbols (number of reserved symbols) by using different colors. The number of 1st special figure reservations (number of reservations (number)) and the number of 2nd special figure reservations (number of reservations (number)) are set in the vicinity of right-handed image MY (to the left or below of right-handed image MY). You can place it. In addition, the number of first special symbols on hold (the number of reservations (numbers)) and the number of second special symbols on hold (the number of reservations (numbers)) are calculated on the left side of the small left effect pattern 8LZ in the screen cracking effect D in FIG. 119. By arranging it toward the side, it may be placed near the small right-handed image SAG designed in full color (lower left of the small right-handed image SAG).

In addition, the number of first special symbols on hold (the number of reservations (number)) and the number of second special symbols on hold (the number of reservations (number)) are shown in FIGS. 117(G) to (H). Similarly to the small left presentation pattern 8LZ, the small medium presentation pattern 8CZ, and the small right presentation pattern 8RZ, the display state may be maintained in full color without being converted to gray scale. In addition, the number of first special symbols on hold (the number of reservations (numbers)) and the number of second special symbols on hold (the number of reservations (numbers)) are converted to gray scale in Figures 117 (G) to (H). Unlike the right-handed image MY, the small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ, which are still displayed in full color, they are converted to gray scale. It may be converted.

[Modification 9]
In the screen cracking effect A of FIG. 117(G) in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a), suggesting SP reach (super reach). A plurality of SP reach suggestion images SG marked as "battle production" were arranged so as not to overlap each other. However, the left effect pattern 8L and right effect pattern 8R remain displayed, and the left effect pattern 8L and right effect pattern 8R are also displayed together with the time saving background image HG1 (image inside the spaceship) and the plurality of SP reach suggestion images SG. The image may be converted to gray scale (this conversion to gray scale is performed in real time). Then, in FIG. 117(I), when the conversion process to gray scale is completed and the SP reach suggestion image SG returns to a full-color image mainly consisting of blue, the left effect pattern 8L and right effect pattern 8R are changed to their original state. (Incidentally, when the SP reach suggestion image SG returns to a full-color image mainly composed of blue, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R may be hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a). ). After that, before the battle performance shown in FIG. 117(J) is started, the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R may be hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a). In this way, it is possible to increase the number of effects in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are converted to grayscale.

[Modification 10]
In the screen cracking effect A in FIG. 117 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the screen breaking effect B in FIG. 118, the screen breaking effect C in FIG. 119, and the screen breaking effect D in FIG. MY was displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a. However, the right-handed image MY may be displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. Even in this case, due to the reciprocating movement of the second movable accessory 15 between the retracted position and the advanced position, the right-handed image MY, which is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, is covered by the second movable accessory 15. There will be a period in which the situation will occur. Further, the right-handed image MY may be displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. In this case, due to the reciprocating movement of the second movable accessory 15 between the retracted position and the advanced position, the right-handed image MY, which is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, is covered by the second movable accessory 15. This period never occurs. In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are the number of reservations (numbers). ), in the case of providing a reserved number display area having a horizontally long rectangular shape displayed as ), the right-handed image MY may be arranged and displayed. Even with this configuration, because the right-handed image MY, which is a three-dimensional image designed in full color, is placed in front of the screen crack image CLK, cracks may appear in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a (screen), for example. Even if at least a part of the display screen 7a (screen) changes to a cracked state and becomes the screen cracked image CLK, the right-handed image MY is maintained, that is, the display state does not change to the cracked state. It can be realized.

[Modification 11]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the screen cracking effect A shown in FIG. 117, the screen breaking effect B shown in FIG. 118, the screen breaking effect C, and the screen breaking effect D shown in FIG. Alternatively, other effects may be added.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect H1-1]
A gaming machine that displays multiple types of images on a screen,
One of the plurality of types of images is a right-handed image that encourages right-handed hitting;
One of the plurality of types of images is a broken screen image in which at least a portion of the screen is broken;
The right-handed image is placed in front of the screen cracked image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect H1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect H1-1,
One of the plurality of types of images is a production pattern,
The production pattern is placed behind the screen cracked image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect H1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect H1-2,
One of the plurality of types of images is a small performance pattern corresponding to the performance pattern,
The small production pattern is placed in front of the screen cracked image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect H1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect H1-3,
When the production symbol is in a ready-to-reach state with a predetermined symbol, the production symbol in the ready-to-reach state is placed in front of the screen cracked image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect H1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect H1-3,
One of the plurality of types of images is a crushed screen image in which the screen is crushed,
At the timing when the cracked screen image changes to the crushed screen image, the effect pattern that notifies you of a hit appears.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect H1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect H1-3,
One of the plurality of types of images is a member image imitating a member that breaks the screen,
The screen crack image is displayed at the timing when the member image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect H1-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect H1-3,
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image with a high expectation of winning;
At least a portion of the specific image is placed behind the broken screen image and is visible through a specific area formed in the broken screen image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Other variations]
Among the various display effects described above, a configuration that does not include some effects or effects other than those described above may be included.

Although the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described using a pachinko gaming machine as an example, it is not limited to this. For example, instead of a pachinko game machine, the present invention may be applied to a reel type game machine such as a slot machine, an arranged ball game machine, or a mahjong ball game machine. When the gaming machine 1 is a slot machine, the gaming medium may be changed from gaming balls to gaming medals.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes the production button 63, the sword member 65, and the select button 68 as the operation parts to be operated by the player, but is not limited to these, and the operation parts to be operated by the player include a lever, , a trigger, etc. may also be used. Further, in the display performance in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display performance may be executed using a button image representing the performance button 63, but instead of this, the display performance may be executed using an image representing the sword member 65. Alternatively, a display effect may be executed using an image representing a lever or a trigger.

Although the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the gaming machine 1 described above, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that is not equipped with a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed gaming machine.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment uses the display device (main display screen 7a, sub display screen 64, etc.) to execute various effects. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, these effects may be combined with each other to form one display effect. That is, out of the plurality of production examples and/or modifications described above, two or more production examples and/or modifications may be combined.
Furthermore, although the gaming machine 1 is equipped with a sub-display screen 64 in addition to the image display device 7 (main display screen 7a), the display effect performed on the main display screen 7a may be performed on the sub-display screen 64, The display effects performed on the sub display screen 64 may be performed on the main display screen 7a.

The present aspect has been described above based on the embodiments and modified examples, but the embodiments of the above-described aspect are for facilitating understanding of the present aspect, and do not limit the present aspect. This aspect may be modified and improved without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and this aspect includes equivalents thereof.

1...Game machine 3...Game area 5...Board lamp 7...Image display device 9A, 9B...Pending image (pending icon)
9C...The relevant pending image (pending icon)
14...First movable accessory 15...Second movable accessory 17...Big winning opening opening starting opening 20...First starting opening (first ball entrance)
21...Second starting port (second ball entry port)
64...Sub display screen 69...Frame movable accessory 66...Frame lamp 81...Microcomputer for game control 91...Microcomputer for performance control 101...Microcomputer for image control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a number image representing a number,
a first effect in which a first number image is displayed on the display means;
a second effect in which, after the first effect, a second number image representing a number having a different direction from the number represented by the first number image is displayed;
After the second effect, a third effect is displayed in which a third number image representing a number in a direction different from the number represented by the second number image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images